From 97d5c458cfa039d857301e1ca7d5af3beb37131d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jacob McDonnell Date: Sun, 26 Apr 2026 16:38:00 -0400 Subject: build: Better Build System --- static/v10/=.1 | 123 -- static/v10/Makefile | 14 - static/v10/man1/2500.1 | 120 -- static/v10/man1/300.1 | 228 --- static/v10/man1/450.1 | 110 -- static/v10/man1/8q.1 | 92 - static/v10/man1/:.1.broken | 26 - static/v10/man1/=.1 | 123 -- static/v10/man1/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man1/acro.1 | 59 - static/v10/man1/adb.1 | 1116 ------------ static/v10/man1/altran.1 | 82 - static/v10/man1/apl.1 | 202 --- static/v10/man1/apnews.1 | 39 - static/v10/man1/apply.1 | 102 -- static/v10/man1/apsend.1 | 60 - static/v10/man1/ar.1 | 83 - static/v10/man1/array.1 | 4 - static/v10/man1/as.1 | 89 - static/v10/man1/as80.1 | 80 - static/v10/man1/asa.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/ascii.1 | 82 - static/v10/man1/at.1 | 111 -- static/v10/man1/awk.1 | 452 ----- static/v10/man1/backup.1 | 351 ---- static/v10/man1/badge.1 | 41 - static/v10/man1/bas.1 | 312 ---- static/v10/man1/basename.1 | 58 - static/v10/man1/basic.1 | 14 - static/v10/man1/bc.1 | 274 --- static/v10/man1/bcp.1 | 288 ---- static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 | 68 - static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 | 38 - static/v10/man1/bison.1 | 62 - static/v10/man1/bite.1 | 712 -------- static/v10/man1/bitship.1 | 24 - static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 | 54 - static/v10/man1/bprint.1 | 87 - static/v10/man1/btoa.1 | 82 - static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 | 214 --- static/v10/man1/bundle.1 | 53 - static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 | 38 - static/v10/man1/c++.1 | 151 -- static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 | 43 - static/v10/man1/calendar.1 | 118 -- static/v10/man1/can.1 | 238 --- static/v10/man1/cat.1 | 44 - static/v10/man1/catsim.1 | 27 - static/v10/man1/cb.1 | 49 - static/v10/man1/cbt.1 | 71 - static/v10/man1/cc.1 | 52 - static/v10/man1/cdb.1 | 41 - static/v10/man1/cf.1 | 1 - static/v10/man1/charge.1 | 194 --- static/v10/man1/chash.1 | 44 - static/v10/man1/chdate.1 | 76 - static/v10/man1/chdir.1 | 29 - static/v10/man1/checknews.1 | 57 - static/v10/man1/checknr.1 | 99 -- static/v10/man1/chmod.1 | 40 - static/v10/man1/chown.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/chunk.1 | 58 - static/v10/man1/cin.1 | 906 ---------- static/v10/man1/cite.1 | 98 -- static/v10/man1/clear.1 | 14 - static/v10/man1/cmp.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/column.1 | 143 -- static/v10/man1/comm.1 | 48 - static/v10/man1/compress.1 | 238 --- static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 | 33 - static/v10/man1/con.1 | 176 -- static/v10/man1/cospan.1 | 315 ---- static/v10/man1/courier.1 | 36 - static/v10/man1/cp.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/cpio.1 | 184 -- static/v10/man1/cq.1 | 50 - static/v10/man1/cray.1 | 124 -- static/v10/man1/cref.1 | 119 -- static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 | 101 -- static/v10/man1/crypt.1 | 41 - static/v10/man1/cscan.1 | 77 - static/v10/man1/csh.1 | 2145 ----------------------- static/v10/man1/ctags.1 | 109 -- static/v10/man1/cu.1 | 248 --- static/v10/man1/cut.1 | 137 -- static/v10/man1/cvt.1 | 8 - static/v10/man1/d202.1 | 138 -- static/v10/man1/dag.1 | 150 -- static/v10/man1/date.1 | 33 - static/v10/man1/db.1 | 283 --- static/v10/man1/dc.1 | 196 --- static/v10/man1/dcon.1 | 170 -- static/v10/man1/dd.1 | 242 --- static/v10/man1/dds.1 | 25 - static/v10/man1/deroff.1 | 178 -- static/v10/man1/df.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 | 142 -- static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 | 128 -- static/v10/man1/diff.1 | 270 --- static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 | 160 -- static/v10/man1/dired.1 | 148 -- static/v10/man1/dis.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/dist.1 | 84 - static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 | 92 - static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 | 247 --- static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 | 31 - static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 | 210 --- static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 | 61 - static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 | 195 --- static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 | 702 -------- static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 | 99 -- static/v10/man1/docgen.1 | 68 - static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 | 101 -- static/v10/man1/doctype.1 | 53 - static/v10/man1/double.1 | 60 - static/v10/man1/download.1 | 175 -- static/v10/man1/dpost.1 | 310 ---- static/v10/man1/dsw.1 | 28 - static/v10/man1/du.1 | 42 - static/v10/man1/echo.1 | 25 - static/v10/man1/ed.1 | 421 ----- static/v10/man1/efl.1 | 74 - static/v10/man1/eqn.1 | 366 ---- static/v10/man1/esterel.1 | 258 --- static/v10/man1/exit.1 | 26 - static/v10/man1/expr.1 | 112 -- static/v10/man1/f2c.1 | 191 --- static/v10/man1/f77.1 | 212 --- static/v10/man1/factor.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/fc.1 | 292 ---- static/v10/man1/fed.1 | 127 -- static/v10/man1/fields.1 | 5 - static/v10/man1/file.1 | 18 - static/v10/man1/find.1 | 182 -- static/v10/man1/flex.1 | 716 -------- static/v10/man1/fmt.1 | 37 - static/v10/man1/form.1 | 84 - static/v10/man1/forml.1 | 50 - static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 | 37 - static/v10/man1/ftp.1 | 963 ----------- static/v10/man1/games.1 | 272 --- static/v10/man1/gcc.1 | 641 ------- static/v10/man1/getlab.1 | 49 - static/v10/man1/getopt.1 | 78 - static/v10/man1/gets.1 | 55 - static/v10/man1/getuid.1 | 85 - static/v10/man1/goto.1 | 37 - static/v10/man1/grabit.1 | 86 - static/v10/man1/gram.1 | 81 - static/v10/man1/grap.1 | 400 ----- static/v10/man1/graph.1 | 151 -- static/v10/man1/gre.1 | 188 -- static/v10/man1/grep.1 | 56 - static/v10/man1/hang.1 | 16 - static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 | 131 -- static/v10/man1/hoc.1 | 156 -- static/v10/man1/hostname.1 | 16 - static/v10/man1/hp.1 | 65 - static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 | 29 - static/v10/man1/ican.1 | 203 --- static/v10/man1/iclc.1 | 136 -- static/v10/man1/icon.1 | 162 -- static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 | 205 --- static/v10/man1/icont.1 | 267 --- static/v10/man1/ideal.1 | 380 ----- static/v10/man1/idiff.1 | 77 - static/v10/man1/if.1 | 76 - static/v10/man1/imscan.1 | 51 - static/v10/man1/inews.1 | 151 -- static/v10/man1/init.1 | 16 - static/v10/man1/intro.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/jim.1 | 331 ---- static/v10/man1/join.1 | 144 -- static/v10/man1/jx.1 | 130 -- static/v10/man1/kill.1 | 22 - static/v10/man1/kp.1 | 91 - static/v10/man1/ksh.1 | 3787 ----------------------------------------- static/v10/man1/lab.1 | 40 - static/v10/man1/langs.1 | 191 --- static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 | 41 - static/v10/man1/lcc.1 | 505 ------ static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 | 76 - static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 | 133 -- static/v10/man1/ld.1 | 111 -- static/v10/man1/ld80.1 | 120 -- static/v10/man1/learn.1 | 84 - static/v10/man1/lex.1 | 71 - static/v10/man1/library.1 | 241 --- static/v10/man1/lim.1 | 92 - static/v10/man1/limits.1 | 14 - static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/lint.1 | 319 ---- static/v10/man1/lisp.1 | 101 -- static/v10/man1/ln.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/load.1 | 52 - static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 | 212 --- static/v10/man1/login.1 | 54 - static/v10/man1/look.1 | 79 - static/v10/man1/lorder.1 | 40 - static/v10/man1/lp.1 | 181 -- static/v10/man1/lpr.1 | 54 - static/v10/man1/ls.1 | 215 --- static/v10/man1/m.1 | 31 - static/v10/man1/m4.1 | 315 ---- static/v10/man1/m6.1 | 109 -- static/v10/man1/mail.1 | 662 ------- static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 | 93 - static/v10/man1/mailx.1 | 1249 -------------- static/v10/man1/make.1 | 425 ----- static/v10/man1/makeml.1 | 138 -- static/v10/man1/man.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/maple.1 | 149 -- static/v10/man1/match.1 | 63 - static/v10/man1/matlab.1 | 113 -- static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 | 166 -- static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 | 120 -- static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 | 109 -- static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 | 314 ---- static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 | 42 - static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 | 162 -- static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 | 164 -- static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 | 341 ---- static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 | 63 - static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 | 172 -- static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 | 53 - static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 | 145 -- static/v10/man1/memo.1 | 38 - static/v10/man1/merge.1 | 50 - static/v10/man1/mesg.1 | 27 - static/v10/man1/mint.1 | 420 ----- static/v10/man1/mk.1 | 617 ------- static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 | 25 - static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 | 66 - static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 | 202 --- static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 | 88 - static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/mm.1 | 274 --- static/v10/man1/mmt.1 | 165 -- static/v10/man1/monk.1 | 341 ---- static/v10/man1/movie.1 | 165 -- static/v10/man1/mp.1 | 304 ---- static/v10/man1/mt.1 | 124 -- static/v10/man1/mv.1 | 28 - static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 | 65 - static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 | 366 ---- static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 | 42 - static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 | 34 - static/v10/man1/nice.1 | 14 - static/v10/man1/nm.1 | 33 - static/v10/man1/nm80.1 | 85 - static/v10/man1/nohup.1 | 15 - static/v10/man1/notary.1 | 94 - static/v10/man1/notify.1 | 114 -- static/v10/man1/nroff.1 | 191 --- static/v10/man1/occ.1 | 79 - static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 | 80 - static/v10/man1/ocr.1 | 176 -- static/v10/man1/od.1 | 74 - static/v10/man1/olint.1 | 147 -- static/v10/man1/opr.1 | 48 - static/v10/man1/ops5.1 | 185 -- static/v10/man1/org.1 | 60 - static/v10/man1/osh.1 | 1151 ------------- static/v10/man1/ov.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/p.1 | 52 - static/v10/man1/pack.1 | 136 -- static/v10/man1/paper.1 | 16 - static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 | 196 --- static/v10/man1/pascal.1 | 170 -- static/v10/man1/passwd.1 | 128 -- static/v10/man1/patch.1 | 320 ---- static/v10/man1/pax.1 | 657 ------- static/v10/man1/pc.1 | 176 -- static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 | 28 - static/v10/man1/pfe.1 | 19 - static/v10/man1/pic.1 | 341 ---- static/v10/man1/picasso.1 | 232 --- static/v10/man1/pico.1 | 273 --- static/v10/man1/picpack.1 | 123 -- static/v10/man1/pl.1 | 52 - static/v10/man1/plot.1 | 72 - static/v10/man1/post.1 | 607 ------- static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 | 243 --- static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 | 217 --- static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 | 206 --- static/v10/man1/postgif.1 | 157 -- static/v10/man1/postio.1 | 308 ---- static/v10/man1/postmd.1 | 330 ---- static/v10/man1/postnews.1 | 74 - static/v10/man1/postprint.1 | 257 --- static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 | 112 -- static/v10/man1/posttek.1 | 198 --- static/v10/man1/pp.1 | 39 - static/v10/man1/pq.1 | 52 - static/v10/man1/pr.1 | 49 - static/v10/man1/prefer.1 | 489 ------ static/v10/man1/printenv.1 | 33 - static/v10/man1/printfont.1 | 183 -- static/v10/man1/priv.1 | 145 -- static/v10/man1/prof.1 | 53 - static/v10/man1/proof.1 | 41 - static/v10/man1/proofr.1 | 111 -- static/v10/man1/prose.1 | 228 --- static/v10/man1/ps.1 | 66 - static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 | 37 - static/v10/man1/psifile.1 | 156 -- static/v10/man1/psix.1 | 132 -- static/v10/man1/ptx.1 | 120 -- static/v10/man1/punct.1 | 22 - static/v10/man1/push.1 | 104 -- static/v10/man1/pwd.1 | 21 - static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 | 178 -- static/v10/man1/pxp.1 | 125 -- static/v10/man1/qed.1 | 1617 ------------------ static/v10/man1/qsnap.1 | 117 -- static/v10/man1/random.1 | 50 - static/v10/man1/rates.1 | 61 - static/v10/man1/ratfor.1 | 70 - static/v10/man1/rc.1 | 896 ---------- static/v10/man1/rcp.1 | 87 - static/v10/man1/readnews.1 | 331 ---- static/v10/man1/readslow.1 | 25 - static/v10/man1/redmail.1 | 48 - static/v10/man1/refer.1 | 273 --- static/v10/man1/reloc.1 | 45 - static/v10/man1/remshent.1 | 31 - static/v10/man1/rev.1 | 75 - static/v10/man1/rew.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/rm.1 | 48 - static/v10/man1/rmdir.1 | 32 - static/v10/man1/roff.1 | 197 --- static/v10/man1/route.1 | 85 - static/v10/man1/rscan.1 | 46 - static/v10/man1/sdb.1 | 407 ----- static/v10/man1/sed.1 | 441 ----- static/v10/man1/see.also.1 | 171 -- static/v10/man1/sendnews.1 | 46 - static/v10/man1/seq.1 | 46 - static/v10/man1/server.1 | 35 - static/v10/man1/session.1 | 197 --- static/v10/man1/setlab.1 | 142 -- static/v10/man1/sexist.1 | 141 -- static/v10/man1/sh.1 | 386 ----- static/v10/man1/shift.1 | 38 - static/v10/man1/shstats.1 | 72 - static/v10/man1/sign.1 | 118 -- static/v10/man1/size.1 | 31 - static/v10/man1/size80.1 | 17 - static/v10/man1/sleep.1 | 31 - static/v10/man1/sml.1 | 96 -- static/v10/man1/sno.1 | 99 -- static/v10/man1/snocone.1 | 269 --- static/v10/man1/soelim.1 | 46 - static/v10/man1/sort.1 | 44 - static/v10/man1/speak.1 | 79 - static/v10/man1/spell.1 | 134 -- static/v10/man1/spelltell.1 | 109 -- static/v10/man1/spellwwb.1 | 164 -- static/v10/man1/spin.1 | 134 -- static/v10/man1/spitbol.1 | 404 ----- static/v10/man1/spline.1 | 95 -- static/v10/man1/split.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/splitrules.1 | 3 - static/v10/man1/stat.1 | 70 - static/v10/man1/stdarg.1 | 5 - static/v10/man1/strings.1 | 51 - static/v10/man1/strip.1 | 36 - static/v10/man1/strlic.1 | 72 - static/v10/man1/struct.1 | 4 - static/v10/man1/stty.1 | 49 - static/v10/man1/sum.1 | 31 - static/v10/man1/switch.1 | 76 - static/v10/man1/syl.1 | 93 - static/v10/man1/tabs.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/tail.1 | 95 -- static/v10/man1/talk.1 | 67 - static/v10/man1/tap.1 | 147 -- static/v10/man1/tape.1 | 60 - static/v10/man1/tar.1 | 154 -- static/v10/man1/tbl.1 | 281 --- static/v10/man1/tdc.1 | 184 -- static/v10/man1/tee.1 | 29 - static/v10/man1/telnet.1 | 92 - static/v10/man1/test.1 | 206 --- static/v10/man1/tex.1 | 325 ---- static/v10/man1/time.1 | 30 - static/v10/man1/tk.1 | 60 - static/v10/man1/tmg.1 | 52 - static/v10/man1/tmpnam.1 | 24 - static/v10/man1/tp.1 | 150 -- static/v10/man1/tr.1 | 86 - static/v10/man1/tr2tex.1 | 124 -- static/v10/man1/track.1 | 77 - static/v10/man1/troff.1 | 76 - static/v10/man1/trofftable.1 | 164 -- static/v10/man1/true.1 | 25 - static/v10/man1/tset.1 | 129 -- static/v10/man1/tsort.1 | 27 - static/v10/man1/tss.1 | 65 - static/v10/man1/tty.1 | 24 - static/v10/man1/twig.1 | 67 - static/v10/man1/type.1 | 28 - static/v10/man1/typo.1 | 45 - static/v10/man1/ucache.1 | 46 - static/v10/man1/ul.1 | 32 - static/v10/man1/un.1 | 29 - static/v10/man1/uniq.1 | 51 - static/v10/man1/uptime.1 | 18 - static/v10/man1/usgmake.1 | 700 -------- static/v10/man1/ustats.1 | 80 - static/v10/man1/uucp.1 | 255 --- static/v10/man1/uuencode.1 | 62 - static/v10/man1/uurec.1 | 18 - static/v10/man1/uustat.1 | 145 -- static/v10/man1/uuto.1 | 102 -- static/v10/man1/uux.1 | 129 -- static/v10/man1/v6run.1 | 42 - static/v10/man1/vacation.1 | 104 -- static/v10/man1/vi.1 | 459 ----- static/v10/man1/view2d.1 | 156 -- static/v10/man1/vis.1 | 41 - static/v10/man1/visi.1 | 283 --- static/v10/man1/vs.1 | 44 - static/v10/man1/vsw.1 | 93 - static/v10/man1/w.1 | 87 - static/v10/man1/wait.1 | 32 - static/v10/man1/wc.1 | 36 - static/v10/man1/wf1.1 | 74 - static/v10/man1/who.1 | 42 - static/v10/man1/worduse.1 | 157 -- static/v10/man1/write.1 | 62 - static/v10/man1/wtinit.1 | 25 - static/v10/man1/wwb.1 | 143 -- static/v10/man1/wwbhelp.1 | 74 - static/v10/man1/wwbinfo.1 | 48 - static/v10/man1/wwbmail.1 | 71 - static/v10/man1/wwbstand.1 | 94 - static/v10/man1/wwv.1 | 45 - static/v10/man1/xargs.1 | 163 -- static/v10/man1/xd.1 | 159 -- static/v10/man1/yacc.1 | 10 - static/v10/man1/yes.1 | 19 - static/v10/man1/zcmp.1 | 45 - static/v10/man1/zero.1 | 20 - static/v10/man1/zmore.1 | 125 -- static/v10/man2/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man2/access.2 | 63 - static/v10/man2/acct.2 | 46 - static/v10/man2/alarm.2 | 83 - static/v10/man2/back.2 | 1 - static/v10/man2/boot.2 | 27 - static/v10/man2/break.2 | 34 - static/v10/man2/brk.2 | 52 - static/v10/man2/cemt.2 | 30 - static/v10/man2/chdir.2 | 24 - static/v10/man2/chmod.2 | 61 - static/v10/man2/chown.2 | 71 - static/v10/man2/close.2 | 27 - static/v10/man2/cq.2 | 10 - static/v10/man2/creat.2 | 74 - static/v10/man2/csw.2 | 29 - static/v10/man2/deprecated.2 | 84 - static/v10/man2/dirread.2 | 63 - static/v10/man2/dup.2 | 54 - static/v10/man2/exec.2 | 288 ---- static/v10/man2/exit.2 | 126 -- static/v10/man2/f2c.2 | 333 ---- static/v10/man2/fields.2 | 2 - static/v10/man2/fmount.2 | 149 -- static/v10/man2/fork.2 | 32 - static/v10/man2/fpe.2 | 34 - static/v10/man2/front.2 | 12 - static/v10/man2/fstat.2 | 27 - static/v10/man2/getflab.2 | 238 --- static/v10/man2/getgid.2 | 25 - static/v10/man2/getplab.2 | 137 -- static/v10/man2/getuid.2 | 29 - static/v10/man2/gtty.2 | 31 - static/v10/man2/ilgins.2 | 34 - static/v10/man2/indir.2 | 32 - static/v10/man2/intr.2 | 31 - static/v10/man2/intro.2 | 271 --- static/v10/man2/ioctl.2 | 73 - static/v10/man2/kill.2 | 29 - static/v10/man2/labmount.2 | 25 - static/v10/man2/limits.2 | 145 -- static/v10/man2/link.2 | 26 - static/v10/man2/lseek.2 | 47 - static/v10/man2/m.2 | 57 - static/v10/man2/makdir.2 | 27 - static/v10/man2/mdate.2 | 31 - static/v10/man2/mkdir.2 | 68 - static/v10/man2/mknod.2 | 42 - static/v10/man2/mount.2 | 38 - static/v10/man2/mpx.2 | 503 ------ static/v10/man2/nice.2 | 27 - static/v10/man2/nochk.2 | 32 - static/v10/man2/open.2 | 61 - static/v10/man2/pipe.2 | 51 - static/v10/man2/profil.2 | 40 - static/v10/man2/quit.2 | 24 - static/v10/man2/read.2 | 42 - static/v10/man2/rele.2 | 26 - static/v10/man2/seek.2 | 83 - static/v10/man2/select.2 | 130 -- static/v10/man2/setgid.2 | 25 - static/v10/man2/setuid.2 | 50 - static/v10/man2/signal.2 | 220 --- static/v10/man2/sleep.2 | 31 - static/v10/man2/stat.2 | 128 -- static/v10/man2/stime.2 | 24 - static/v10/man2/stty.2 | 94 - static/v10/man2/sync.2 | 27 - static/v10/man2/syscall.2 | 17 - static/v10/man2/syslog.2 | 113 -- static/v10/man2/time.2 | 28 - static/v10/man2/times.2 | 68 - static/v10/man2/udbuf.2 | 48 - static/v10/man2/umask.2 | 38 - static/v10/man2/umount.2 | 34 - static/v10/man2/unlink.2 | 40 - static/v10/man2/unsafe.2 | 59 - static/v10/man2/vtimes.2 | 51 - static/v10/man2/wait.2 | 59 - static/v10/man2/write.2 | 54 - static/v10/man3/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man3/abort.3 | 19 - static/v10/man3/arith.3 | 97 -- static/v10/man3/assert.3 | 38 - static/v10/man3/atan.3 | 29 - static/v10/man3/atof.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/atoi.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/bessel.3 | 39 - static/v10/man3/bits.3 | 198 --- static/v10/man3/block.3 | 175 -- static/v10/man3/buildmap.3 | 62 - static/v10/man3/cbit.3 | 105 -- static/v10/man3/cbt.3 | 86 - static/v10/man3/chrtab.3 | 24 - static/v10/man3/closeshares.3 | 21 - static/v10/man3/compar.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/crypt.3 | 30 - static/v10/man3/ctime.3 | 36 - static/v10/man3/ctype.3 | 102 -- static/v10/man3/curses.3 | 98 -- static/v10/man3/dbm.3 | 144 -- static/v10/man3/ddsput.3 | 82 - static/v10/man3/dialout.3 | 86 - static/v10/man3/directory.3 | 110 -- static/v10/man3/ecvt.3 | 47 - static/v10/man3/end.3 | 45 - static/v10/man3/erf.3 | 39 - static/v10/man3/exit.3 | 61 - static/v10/man3/exp.3 | 28 - static/v10/man3/ferror.3 | 62 - static/v10/man3/fgets.3 | 73 - static/v10/man3/filebuf.3 | 200 --- static/v10/man3/fio.3 | 255 --- static/v10/man3/floor.3 | 57 - static/v10/man3/fopen.3 | 107 -- static/v10/man3/fptrap.3 | 94 - static/v10/man3/fread.3 | 55 - static/v10/man3/frexp.3 | 49 - static/v10/man3/fseek.3 | 51 - static/v10/man3/fstream.3 | 154 -- static/v10/man3/ftoa.3 | 39 - static/v10/man3/ftoo.3 | 32 - static/v10/man3/ftw.3 | 165 -- static/v10/man3/ftwalk.3 | 209 --- static/v10/man3/galloc.3 | 75 - static/v10/man3/gamma.3 | 48 - static/v10/man3/gerts.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/getarg.3 | 49 - static/v10/man3/getc.3 | 59 - static/v10/man3/getchr.3 | 55 - static/v10/man3/getdate.3 | 169 -- static/v10/man3/getenv.3 | 30 - static/v10/man3/getfields.3 | 74 - static/v10/man3/getflags.3 | 116 -- static/v10/man3/getflds.3 | 86 - static/v10/man3/getfsent.3 | 89 - static/v10/man3/getgrent.3 | 79 - static/v10/man3/getlogin.3 | 32 - static/v10/man3/getopt.3 | 99 -- static/v10/man3/getpass.3 | 27 - static/v10/man3/getpw.3 | 28 - static/v10/man3/getpwent.3 | 83 - static/v10/man3/getshares.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/getshput.3 | 50 - static/v10/man3/getstsrc.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/getwd.3 | 41 - static/v10/man3/hash.3 | 611 ------- static/v10/man3/hmul.3 | 16 - static/v10/man3/huff.3 | 89 - static/v10/man3/hypot.3 | 35 - static/v10/man3/ierror.3 | 52 - static/v10/man3/internet.3 | 104 -- static/v10/man3/intro.3 | 109 -- static/v10/man3/ios.3 | 384 ----- static/v10/man3/ipc.3 | 348 ---- static/v10/man3/iread.3 | 35 - static/v10/man3/istream.3 | 334 ---- static/v10/man3/itoa.3 | 30 - static/v10/man3/juke.3 | 115 -- static/v10/man3/l3tol.3 | 34 - static/v10/man3/labconst.3 | 32 - static/v10/man3/labeq.3 | 80 - static/v10/man3/labtoa.3 | 123 -- static/v10/man3/ldiv.3 | 43 - static/v10/man3/log.3 | 26 - static/v10/man3/malloc.3 | 94 - static/v10/man3/manip.3 | 186 -- static/v10/man3/map.3 | 274 --- static/v10/man3/memory.3 | 118 -- static/v10/man3/mesg.3 | 25 - static/v10/man3/mktemp.3 | 45 - static/v10/man3/mkunique.3 | 45 - static/v10/man3/mon.3 | 60 - static/v10/man3/monitor.3 | 103 -- static/v10/man3/mp.3 | 154 -- static/v10/man3/mvefil.3 | 62 - static/v10/man3/nargs.3 | 19 - static/v10/man3/nlist.3 | 62 - static/v10/man3/notary.3 | 92 - static/v10/man3/openshares.3 | 33 - static/v10/man3/ostream.3 | 249 --- static/v10/man3/perror.3 | 46 - static/v10/man3/pex.3 | 63 - static/v10/man3/picfile.3 | 253 --- static/v10/man3/pipebuf.3 | 73 - static/v10/man3/pipestream.3 | 59 - static/v10/man3/plot.3 | 161 -- static/v10/man3/poly.3 | 50 - static/v10/man3/pool.3 | 85 - static/v10/man3/popen.3 | 108 -- static/v10/man3/port.3 | 31 - static/v10/man3/pow.3 | 36 - static/v10/man3/print.3 | 274 --- static/v10/man3/printf.3 | 137 -- static/v10/man3/proj.3 | 370 ---- static/v10/man3/ptime.3 | 34 - static/v10/man3/putc.3 | 60 - static/v10/man3/putchr.3 | 49 - static/v10/man3/putshares.3 | 37 - static/v10/man3/pwquery.3 | 71 - static/v10/man3/qsort.3 | 42 - static/v10/man3/rand.3 | 37 - static/v10/man3/re.3 | 178 -- static/v10/man3/regex.3 | 66 - static/v10/man3/regexp.3 | 145 -- static/v10/man3/reset.3 | 42 - static/v10/man3/salloc.3 | 160 -- static/v10/man3/sbuf.prot.3 | 410 ----- static/v10/man3/sbuf.pub.3 | 254 --- static/v10/man3/scanf.3 | 300 ---- static/v10/man3/setbuf.3 | 46 - static/v10/man3/setfil.3 | 34 - static/v10/man3/setjmp.3 | 42 - static/v10/man3/setlimits.3 | 58 - static/v10/man3/setupgroups.3 | 30 - static/v10/man3/setupshares.3 | 51 - static/v10/man3/sfio.3 | 628 ------- static/v10/man3/sharesfile.3 | 17 - static/v10/man3/sin.3 | 27 - static/v10/man3/sinh.3 | 31 - static/v10/man3/sleep.3 | 29 - static/v10/man3/sqrt.3 | 24 - static/v10/man3/ssbuf.3 | 130 -- static/v10/man3/stak.3 | 163 -- static/v10/man3/stdio.3 | 123 -- static/v10/man3/stdiobuf.3 | 39 - static/v10/man3/string.3 | 205 --- static/v10/man3/strstream.3 | 110 -- static/v10/man3/swab.3 | 22 - static/v10/man3/switch.3 | 44 - static/v10/man3/system.3 | 22 - static/v10/man3/tcp.3 | 181 -- static/v10/man3/termcap.3 | 175 -- static/v10/man3/timec.3 | 109 -- static/v10/man3/tm.3 | 550 ------ static/v10/man3/tolower.3 | 20 - static/v10/man3/ttyn.3 | 26 - static/v10/man3/ttyname.3 | 84 - static/v10/man3/udp.3 | 83 - static/v10/man3/uname.3 | 54 - static/v10/man3/ungetc.3 | 39 - static/v10/man3/valloc.3 | 27 - static/v10/man3/varargs.3 | 89 - static/v10/man3/view2d.3 | 93 - static/v10/man3/vt.3 | 37 - static/v10/man4/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man4/binarsys.4 | 39 - static/v10/man4/bk.4 | 74 - static/v10/man4/bl.4 | 41 - static/v10/man4/bufld.4 | 22 - static/v10/man4/cat.4 | 20 - static/v10/man4/connld.4 | 83 - static/v10/man4/console.4 | 63 - static/v10/man4/da.4 | 16 - static/v10/man4/dc.4 | 214 --- static/v10/man4/dh.4 | 17 - static/v10/man4/dispatch.4 | 32 - static/v10/man4/dk.4 | 231 --- static/v10/man4/dn.4 | 35 - static/v10/man4/dp.4 | 32 - static/v10/man4/drum.4 | 16 - static/v10/man4/dz.4 | 18 - static/v10/man4/ethernet.4 | 105 -- static/v10/man4/fd.4 | 63 - static/v10/man4/fl.4 | 24 - static/v10/man4/font.4 | 59 - static/v10/man4/hp.4 | 105 -- static/v10/man4/ht.4 | 81 - static/v10/man4/intro.4 | 91 - static/v10/man4/ip.4 | 261 --- static/v10/man4/kl.4 | 41 - static/v10/man4/log.4 | 42 - static/v10/man4/lp.4 | 63 - static/v10/man4/lpr.4 | 52 - static/v10/man4/mailcnfg.4 | 117 -- static/v10/man4/mailsurr.4 | 517 ------ static/v10/man4/mem.4 | 34 - static/v10/man4/mesgld.4 | 168 -- static/v10/man4/modules.4 | 206 --- static/v10/man4/mt.4 | 162 -- static/v10/man4/newtty.4 | 90 - static/v10/man4/null.4 | 14 - static/v10/man4/pc.4 | 38 - static/v10/man4/pex.4 | 217 --- static/v10/man4/proc.4 | 243 --- static/v10/man4/ra.4 | 218 --- static/v10/man4/rf.4 | 37 - static/v10/man4/rk.4 | 28 - static/v10/man4/rp.4 | 34 - static/v10/man4/rv.4 | 71 - static/v10/man4/scsi.4 | 117 -- static/v10/man4/stream.4 | 272 --- static/v10/man4/tbl.4 | 90 - static/v10/man4/tc.4 | 31 - static/v10/man4/tcp.4 | 193 --- static/v10/man4/tiu.4 | 18 - static/v10/man4/tm.4 | 38 - static/v10/man4/tty.4 | 114 -- static/v10/man4/ttyld.4 | 294 ---- static/v10/man4/up.4 | 65 - static/v10/man4/va.4 | 121 -- static/v10/man4/vc.4 | 64 - static/v10/man4/vp.4 | 100 -- static/v10/man4/vs.4 | 20 - static/v10/man4/vt.4 | 230 --- static/v10/man5/80.out.5 | 161 -- static/v10/man5/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man5/a.out.5 | 150 -- static/v10/man5/acct.5 | 63 - static/v10/man5/aliases.5 | 51 - static/v10/man5/ar.5 | 55 - static/v10/man5/ascii.5 | 61 - static/v10/man5/backup.5 | 168 -- static/v10/man5/cdl.10.5 | 534 ------ static/v10/man5/config.5 | 149 -- static/v10/man5/core.5 | 57 - static/v10/man5/cpio.5 | 87 - static/v10/man5/dir.5 | 34 - static/v10/man5/dist.5 | 68 - static/v10/man5/dump.5 | 211 --- static/v10/man5/environ.5 | 91 - static/v10/man5/filsys.5 | 327 ---- static/v10/man5/fizz.10.5 | 459 ----- static/v10/man5/font.5 | 413 ----- static/v10/man5/fs.5 | 147 -- static/v10/man5/fsm.10.5 | 116 -- static/v10/man5/fstab.5 | 106 -- static/v10/man5/graw.10.5 | 79 - static/v10/man5/ident.5 | 37 - static/v10/man5/lde.10.5 | 295 ---- static/v10/man5/lnode.5 | 166 -- static/v10/man5/log.5 | 126 -- static/v10/man5/map.5 | 83 - static/v10/man5/math.5 | 104 -- static/v10/man5/mcolor.5 | 60 - static/v10/man5/mds.10.5 | 239 --- static/v10/man5/minterm.10.5 | 78 - static/v10/man5/minus.z.5 | 77 - static/v10/man5/mpictures.5 | 220 --- static/v10/man5/mpxio.5 | 187 -- static/v10/man5/netnews.5 | 123 -- static/v10/man5/news.5 | 146 -- static/v10/man5/newsrc.5 | 50 - static/v10/man5/paddle.10.5 | 63 - static/v10/man5/passwd.5 | 33 - static/v10/man5/picfile.5 | 157 -- static/v10/man5/plot.5 | 453 ----- static/v10/man5/poly.5 | 141 -- static/v10/man5/privs.5 | 282 --- static/v10/man5/pwfile.5 | 52 - static/v10/man5/saf.10.5 | Bin 4387 -> 0 bytes static/v10/man5/share.5 | 309 ---- static/v10/man5/shares.5 | 64 - static/v10/man5/speakm.5 | 42 - static/v10/man5/src.5 | 27 - static/v10/man5/stab.5 | 211 --- static/v10/man5/stock.10.5 | 18 - static/v10/man5/tap.5 | 68 - static/v10/man5/termcap.5 | 350 ---- static/v10/man5/tp.5 | 68 - static/v10/man5/troff.5 | 202 --- static/v10/man5/ttys.5 | 41 - static/v10/man5/ttytype.5 | 23 - static/v10/man5/types.5 | 42 - static/v10/man5/uids.5 | 33 - static/v10/man5/utmp.5 | 23 - static/v10/man5/uuencode.5 | 49 - static/v10/man5/values.5 | 84 - static/v10/man5/vfont.5 | 88 - static/v10/man5/view2d.5 | 65 - static/v10/man5/whoami.5 | 14 - static/v10/man5/worm.5 | 103 -- static/v10/man5/wtmp.5 | 21 - static/v10/man6/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man6/adventure.6 | 52 - static/v10/man6/arithmetic.6 | 71 - static/v10/man6/ascii.6 | 43 - static/v10/man6/atc.6 | 375 ---- static/v10/man6/azel.6 | 104 -- static/v10/man6/back.6 | 9 - static/v10/man6/banner.6 | 73 - static/v10/man6/basic.6 | 32 - static/v10/man6/bc.6 | 62 - static/v10/man6/bcd.6 | 24 - static/v10/man6/bianchi.6 | 37 - static/v10/man6/bj.6 | 84 - static/v10/man6/boggle.6 | 99 -- static/v10/man6/bridge.6 | 96 -- static/v10/man6/cal.6 | 35 - static/v10/man6/cards.6 | 43 - static/v10/man6/chess.6 | 31 - static/v10/man6/ching.6 | 127 -- static/v10/man6/cubic.6 | 17 - static/v10/man6/das.6 | 27 - static/v10/man6/doctor.6 | 16 - static/v10/man6/dpt.6 | 31 - static/v10/man6/eqnchar.6 | 182 -- static/v10/man6/factor.6 | 30 - static/v10/man6/festoon.6 | 17 - static/v10/man6/font.6 | 114 -- static/v10/man6/fortune.6 | 16 - static/v10/man6/hangman.6 | 56 - static/v10/man6/hyphen.6 | 19 - static/v10/man6/imp.6 | 36 - static/v10/man6/ipa.6 | 72 - static/v10/man6/latex.6 | 100 -- static/v10/man6/m6.6 | 110 -- static/v10/man6/mail.6 | 126 -- static/v10/man6/man.6 | 281 --- static/v10/man6/mars.6 | 100 -- static/v10/man6/maze.6 | 12 - static/v10/man6/mbits.6 | 118 -- static/v10/man6/mcs.6 | 145 -- static/v10/man6/mille.6 | 223 --- static/v10/man6/mon.6 | 12 - static/v10/man6/monop.6 | 181 -- static/v10/man6/moo.6 | 26 - static/v10/man6/mpictures.6 | 154 -- static/v10/man6/mpm.6 | 173 -- static/v10/man6/ms.6 | 340 ---- static/v10/man6/number.6 | 14 - static/v10/man6/ogre.6 | 128 -- static/v10/man6/ov.6 | 21 - static/v10/man6/ptx.6 | 36 - static/v10/man6/quiz.6 | 86 - static/v10/man6/rain.6 | 1 - static/v10/man6/redcode.6 | 80 - static/v10/man6/sail.6 | 560 ------ static/v10/man6/sfs.6 | 43 - static/v10/man6/sky.6 | 81 - static/v10/man6/snake.6 | 45 - static/v10/man6/spline.6 | 57 - static/v10/man6/term.6 | 71 - static/v10/man6/tmg.6 | 48 - static/v10/man6/trek.man.6 | 802 --------- static/v10/man6/ttt.6 | 29 - static/v10/man6/warp.6 | 13 - static/v10/man6/worms.6 | 1 - static/v10/man6/wump.6 | 29 - static/v10/man6/yacc.6 | 43 - static/v10/man7/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man7/apnews.7 | 196 --- static/v10/man7/ascii.7 | 37 - static/v10/man7/av.7 | 121 -- static/v10/man7/avw.7 | 127 -- static/v10/man7/cal.7 | 33 - static/v10/man7/dict.7 | 193 --- static/v10/man7/dkname.7 | 16 - static/v10/man7/dpd.7 | 75 - static/v10/man7/getty.7 | 75 - static/v10/man7/glob.7 | 36 - static/v10/man7/greek.7 | 42 - static/v10/man7/hier.7 | 517 ------ static/v10/man7/init.7 | 75 - static/v10/man7/kbd.7 | 44 - static/v10/man7/library.7 | 126 -- static/v10/man7/login.7 | 101 -- static/v10/man7/map.7 | 451 ----- static/v10/man7/me.7 | 270 --- static/v10/man7/msh.7 | 34 - static/v10/man7/netlib.7 | 91 - static/v10/man7/netnews.7 | 148 -- static/v10/man7/news.7 | 67 - static/v10/man7/obproc.7 | 240 --- static/v10/man7/papers.7 | 85 - static/v10/man7/poly.7 | 98 -- static/v10/man7/postnews.7 | 43 - static/v10/man7/pq.7 | 126 -- static/v10/man7/qns.7 | 189 -- static/v10/man7/readnews.7 | 400 ----- static/v10/man7/scat.7 | 81 - static/v10/man7/sky.7 | 48 - static/v10/man7/submit.7 | 112 -- static/v10/man7/tabs.7 | 30 - static/v10/man7/tel.7 | 127 -- static/v10/man7/telno.7 | 43 - static/v10/man7/tmheader.7 | 15 - static/v10/man7/town.7 | 33 - static/v10/man7/units.7 | 140 -- static/v10/man7/vs.7 | 58 - static/v10/man7/vsp.7 | 61 - static/v10/man7/weather.7 | 45 - static/v10/man7/wx.7 | 90 - static/v10/man8/11.8 | 12 - static/v10/man8/20boot.8 | 31 - static/v10/man8/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man8/ac.8 | 56 - static/v10/man8/acct.8 | 37 - static/v10/man8/adduser.8 | 87 - static/v10/man8/analyze.8 | 117 -- static/v10/man8/apx.8 | 33 - static/v10/man8/arcv.8 | 23 - static/v10/man8/arff.8 | 64 - static/v10/man8/asd.8 | 174 -- static/v10/man8/atalla.8 | 62 - static/v10/man8/authmgr.8 | 204 --- static/v10/man8/backup.8 | 90 - static/v10/man8/blmount.8 | 23 - static/v10/man8/bproc.8 | 235 --- static/v10/man8/check.8 | 50 - static/v10/man8/chk.8 | 21 - static/v10/man8/chown.8 | 47 - static/v10/man8/chuck.8 | 116 -- static/v10/man8/cl.8 | 100 -- static/v10/man8/clri.8 | 41 - static/v10/man8/config.8 | 48 - static/v10/man8/cpp.8 | 114 -- static/v10/man8/crash.8 | 268 --- static/v10/man8/cron.8 | 86 - static/v10/man8/dcheck.8 | 44 - static/v10/man8/delivermail.8 | 248 --- static/v10/man8/df.8 | 21 - static/v10/man8/dist.8 | 146 -- static/v10/man8/dkmgr.8 | 165 -- static/v10/man8/dli.8 | 27 - static/v10/man8/dmesg.8 | 64 - static/v10/man8/downgrade.8 | 37 - static/v10/man8/dump.8 | 94 - static/v10/man8/dumpdir.8 | 38 - static/v10/man8/expire.8 | 67 - static/v10/man8/fsck.8 | 248 --- static/v10/man8/fstat.8 | 49 - static/v10/man8/gacct.8 | 22 - static/v10/man8/gettable.8 | 65 - static/v10/man8/getty.8 | 88 - static/v10/man8/halt.8 | 21 - static/v10/man8/htable.8 | 116 -- static/v10/man8/icheck.8 | 182 -- static/v10/man8/inews.8 | 93 - static/v10/man8/init.8 | 147 -- static/v10/man8/ino.8 | 10 - static/v10/man8/ins.8 | 103 -- static/v10/man8/install.8 | 34 - static/v10/man8/ipconfig.8 | 125 -- static/v10/man8/istat.8 | 35 - static/v10/man8/kill.8 | 36 - static/v10/man8/kmc.8 | 107 -- static/v10/man8/ldpcs.8 | 58 - static/v10/man8/login.8 | 138 -- static/v10/man8/makekey.8 | 53 - static/v10/man8/mkfs.8 | 138 -- static/v10/man8/mknod.8 | 79 - static/v10/man8/mkpkg.8 | 179 -- static/v10/man8/mount.8 | 153 -- static/v10/man8/netfs.8 | 315 ---- static/v10/man8/netstat.8 | 100 -- static/v10/man8/nosh.8 | 138 -- static/v10/man8/ns.8 | 153 -- static/v10/man8/postbgi.8 | 138 -- static/v10/man8/postio.8 | 205 --- static/v10/man8/postreverse.8 | 97 -- static/v10/man8/postscript.8 | 283 --- static/v10/man8/privserv.8 | 60 - static/v10/man8/ps.8 | 77 - static/v10/man8/pstat.8 | 418 ----- static/v10/man8/pwserv.8 | 77 - static/v10/man8/quot.8 | 135 -- static/v10/man8/rarepl.8 | 115 -- static/v10/man8/rc.8 | 77 - static/v10/man8/reboot.8 | 127 -- static/v10/man8/recnews.8 | 24 - static/v10/man8/reloc.8 | 45 - static/v10/man8/renice.8 | 31 - static/v10/man8/restor.8 | 112 -- static/v10/man8/route.8 | 95 -- static/v10/man8/sa.8 | 185 -- static/v10/man8/salv.8 | 86 - static/v10/man8/savecore.8 | 83 - static/v10/man8/scsish.8 | 222 --- static/v10/man8/sendcover.8 | 28 - static/v10/man8/sendnews.8 | 60 - static/v10/man8/ship.8 | 118 -- static/v10/man8/showq.8 | 56 - static/v10/man8/shutdown.8 | 9 - static/v10/man8/smash.8 | 43 - static/v10/man8/smstat.8 | 24 - static/v10/man8/smtp.8 | 200 --- static/v10/man8/sticky.8 | 44 - static/v10/man8/su.8 | 34 - static/v10/man8/svcmgr.8 | 331 ---- static/v10/man8/swapon.8 | 37 - static/v10/man8/swtmp.8 | 24 - static/v10/man8/symorder.8 | 23 - static/v10/man8/sync.8 | 18 - static/v10/man8/syslog.8 | 172 -- static/v10/man8/tcpmgr.8 | 73 - static/v10/man8/tm.8 | 48 - static/v10/man8/tp.8 | 175 -- static/v10/man8/umount.8 | 31 - static/v10/man8/unspk.8 | 43 - static/v10/man8/upas.8 | 275 --- static/v10/man8/update.8 | 25 - static/v10/man8/uucico.8 | 205 --- static/v10/man8/uucleanup.8 | 103 -- static/v10/man8/uurec.8 | 18 - static/v10/man8/vipw.8 | 23 - static/v10/man8/vmstat.8 | 143 -- static/v10/man8/vpac.8 | 49 - static/v10/man8/wall.8 | 23 - static/v10/man8/worm.8 | 436 ----- static/v10/man8/xs.8 | 63 - static/v10/man8/xstr.8 | 108 -- static/v10/man9/32ld.9 | 55 - static/v10/man9/3cc.9 | 163 -- static/v10/man9/Makefile | 3 - static/v10/man9/add.9 | 138 -- static/v10/man9/alloc.9 | 93 - static/v10/man9/bitblt.9 | 161 -- static/v10/man9/bitfile.9 | 74 - static/v10/man9/blitblt.9 | 130 -- static/v10/man9/blitmap.9 | 191 --- static/v10/man9/brfs.9 | 27 - static/v10/man9/brush.9 | 301 ---- static/v10/man9/button.9 | 108 -- static/v10/man9/cip.9 | 58 - static/v10/man9/circle.9 | 78 - static/v10/man9/cos.9 | 59 - static/v10/man9/crabs.9 | 52 - static/v10/man9/demo.9 | 37 - static/v10/man9/face.9 | 86 - static/v10/man9/faced.9 | 179 -- static/v10/man9/flickfile.9 | 86 - static/v10/man9/flicks.9 | 138 -- static/v10/man9/font.9 | 110 -- static/v10/man9/gebaca.9 | 18 - static/v10/man9/getfont.9 | 59 - static/v10/man9/graphdraw.9 | 310 ---- static/v10/man9/icon.9 | 90 - static/v10/man9/intro.9 | 128 -- static/v10/man9/jf.9 | 117 -- static/v10/man9/jim.9 | 347 ---- static/v10/man9/jioctl.9 | 74 - static/v10/man9/jx.9 | 112 -- static/v10/man9/lens.9 | 108 -- static/v10/man9/libc.9 | 42 - static/v10/man9/lsh.9 | 32 - static/v10/man9/mcc.9 | 227 --- static/v10/man9/menuhit.9 | 210 --- static/v10/man9/mld.9 | 146 -- static/v10/man9/mouse.9 | 63 - static/v10/man9/movie.9 | 172 -- static/v10/man9/mux.9 | 210 --- static/v10/man9/muxstring.9 | 124 -- static/v10/man9/newlayer.9 | 81 - static/v10/man9/newproc.9 | 193 --- static/v10/man9/pads.9 | 102 -- static/v10/man9/paint.9 | 218 --- static/v10/man9/ped.9 | 318 ---- static/v10/man9/pengo.9 | 72 - static/v10/man9/pi.9 | 397 ----- static/v10/man9/proof.9 | 124 -- static/v10/man9/psi.9 | 142 -- static/v10/man9/reader.9 | 72 - static/v10/man9/rebecca.9 | 123 -- static/v10/man9/request.9 | 238 --- static/v10/man9/ruler.9 | 46 - static/v10/man9/sam.9 | 888 ---------- static/v10/man9/samuel.9 | 420 ----- static/v10/man9/string.9 | 102 -- static/v10/man9/term.9 | 50 - static/v10/man9/thinkblt.9 | 108 -- static/v10/man9/thinkclient.9 | 46 - static/v10/man9/twid.9 | 90 - static/v10/man9/types.9 | 147 -- static/v10/man9/vismon.9 | 116 -- static/v10/man9/windows.9 | 90 - 1111 files changed, 138077 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 static/v10/=.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/2500.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/300.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/450.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/8q.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/:.1.broken delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/=.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/acro.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/adb.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/altran.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apl.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apnews.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apply.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apsend.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ar.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/array.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/as.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/as80.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/asa.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ascii.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/at.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/awk.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/backup.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/badge.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bas.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/basename.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/basic.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bcp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bison.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bite.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bitship.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bprint.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/btoa.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bundle.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/c++.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/calendar.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/can.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cat.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/catsim.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cb.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cbt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cdb.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cf.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/charge.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chash.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chdate.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chdir.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/checknews.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/checknr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chmod.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chown.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chunk.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cin.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cite.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/clear.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cmp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/column.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/comm.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/compress.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/con.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cospan.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/courier.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cpio.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cq.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cray.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cref.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/crypt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cscan.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/csh.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ctags.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cu.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cut.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cvt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/d202.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dag.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/date.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/db.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dcon.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dds.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/deroff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/df.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/diff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dired.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dis.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dist.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/docgen.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/doctype.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/double.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/download.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dpost.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dsw.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/du.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/echo.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ed.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/efl.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/eqn.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/esterel.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/exit.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/expr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/f2c.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/f77.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/factor.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fed.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fields.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/file.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/find.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/flex.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fmt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/form.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/forml.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ftp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/games.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gcc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/getlab.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/getopt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gets.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/getuid.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/goto.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/grabit.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gram.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/grap.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/graph.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gre.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/grep.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hang.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hoc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hostname.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ican.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/iclc.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/icon.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/icont.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ideal.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/idiff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/if.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/imscan.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/inews.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/init.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/intro.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/jim.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/join.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/jx.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/kill.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/kp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ksh.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lab.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/langs.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lcc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ld.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ld80.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/learn.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lex.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/library.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lim.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/limits.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lint.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lisp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ln.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/load.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/login.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/look.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lorder.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lpr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ls.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/m.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/m4.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/m6.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mail.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mailx.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/make.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/makeml.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/man.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/maple.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/match.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/matlab.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/memo.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/merge.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mesg.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mint.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mk.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mm.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mmt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/monk.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/movie.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mv.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nice.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nm.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nm80.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nohup.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/notary.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/notify.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nroff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/occ.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ocr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/od.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/olint.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/opr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ops5.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/org.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/osh.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ov.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/p.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pack.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/paper.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pascal.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/passwd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/patch.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pax.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pfe.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pic.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/picasso.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pico.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/picpack.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pl.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/plot.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/post.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postgif.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postio.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postmd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postnews.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postprint.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/posttek.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pq.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/prefer.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/printenv.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/printfont.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/priv.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/prof.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/proof.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/proofr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/prose.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ps.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/psifile.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/psix.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ptx.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/punct.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/push.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pwd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pxp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/qed.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/qsnap.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/random.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rates.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ratfor.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rcp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/readnews.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/readslow.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/redmail.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/refer.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/reloc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/remshent.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rev.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rew.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rm.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rmdir.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/roff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/route.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rscan.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sdb.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sed.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/see.also.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sendnews.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/seq.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/server.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/session.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/setlab.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sexist.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sh.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/shift.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/shstats.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sign.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/size.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/size80.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sleep.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sml.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sno.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/snocone.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/soelim.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sort.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/speak.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spell.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spelltell.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spellwwb.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spin.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spitbol.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spline.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/split.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/splitrules.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/stat.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/stdarg.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/strings.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/strip.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/strlic.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/struct.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/stty.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sum.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/switch.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/syl.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tabs.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tail.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/talk.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tap.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tape.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tar.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tbl.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tdc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tee.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/telnet.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/test.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tex.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/time.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tk.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tmg.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tmpnam.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tr.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tr2tex.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/track.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/troff.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/trofftable.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/true.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tset.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tsort.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tss.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tty.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/twig.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/type.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/typo.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/ucache.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ul.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/un.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uniq.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uptime.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/usgmake.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ustats.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uucp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uuencode.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uurec.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uustat.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uuto.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uux.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/v6run.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vacation.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vi.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/view2d.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vis.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/visi.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vs.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vsw.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/w.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wait.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wf1.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/who.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/worduse.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/write.1 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man1/wtinit.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwb.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbhelp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbinfo.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbmail.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbstand.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwv.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/xargs.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/xd.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/yacc.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/yes.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/zcmp.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/zero.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man1/zmore.1 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/access.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/acct.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/alarm.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/back.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/boot.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/break.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/brk.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/cemt.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/chdir.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/chmod.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/chown.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/close.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/cq.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/creat.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/csw.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/deprecated.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/dirread.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/dup.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/exec.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/exit.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/f2c.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fields.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fmount.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fork.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fpe.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/front.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fstat.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getflab.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getgid.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getplab.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getuid.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/gtty.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/ilgins.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/indir.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/intr.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/intro.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/ioctl.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/kill.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/labmount.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/limits.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/link.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/lseek.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/m.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/makdir.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mdate.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mkdir.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mknod.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mount.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mpx.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/nice.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/nochk.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/open.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/pipe.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/profil.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/quit.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/read.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/rele.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/seek.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/select.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/setgid.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/setuid.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/signal.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/sleep.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/stat.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/stime.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/stty.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/sync.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/syscall.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/syslog.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/time.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/times.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/udbuf.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/umask.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/umount.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/unlink.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/unsafe.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/vtimes.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/wait.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man2/write.2 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/abort.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/arith.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/assert.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/atan.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/atof.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/atoi.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/bessel.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/bits.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/block.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/buildmap.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/cbit.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/cbt.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/chrtab.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/closeshares.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/compar.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/crypt.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ctime.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ctype.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/curses.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/dbm.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ddsput.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/dialout.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/directory.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ecvt.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/end.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/erf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/exit.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/exp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ferror.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fgets.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/filebuf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fio.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/floor.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fopen.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fptrap.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fread.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/frexp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fseek.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fstream.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftoa.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftoo.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftw.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftwalk.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/galloc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/gamma.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/gerts.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getarg.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getchr.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getdate.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getenv.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getfields.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getflags.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getflds.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getfsent.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getgrent.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getlogin.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getopt.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getpass.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getpw.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getpwent.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getshares.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getshput.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getstsrc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getwd.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/hash.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/hmul.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/huff.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/hypot.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ierror.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/internet.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/intro.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ios.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ipc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/iread.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/istream.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/itoa.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/juke.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/l3tol.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/labconst.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/labeq.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/labtoa.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ldiv.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/log.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/malloc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/manip.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/map.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/memory.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mesg.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mktemp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mkunique.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mon.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/monitor.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mvefil.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/nargs.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/nlist.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/notary.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/openshares.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ostream.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/perror.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pex.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/picfile.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pipebuf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pipestream.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/plot.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/poly.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pool.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/popen.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/port.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pow.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/print.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/printf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/proj.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ptime.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/putc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/putchr.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/putshares.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pwquery.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/qsort.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/rand.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/re.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/regex.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/regexp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/reset.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/salloc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sbuf.prot.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sbuf.pub.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/scanf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setbuf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setfil.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setjmp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setlimits.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setupgroups.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setupshares.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sfio.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sharesfile.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sin.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sinh.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sleep.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sqrt.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ssbuf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/stak.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/stdio.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/stdiobuf.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/string.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/strstream.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/swab.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/switch.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/system.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/tcp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/termcap.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/timec.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/tm.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/tolower.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ttyn.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ttyname.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/udp.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/uname.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ungetc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/valloc.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/varargs.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/view2d.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man3/vt.3 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/binarsys.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/bk.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/bl.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/bufld.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/cat.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/connld.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/console.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/da.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dc.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dh.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dispatch.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dk.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dn.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dp.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/drum.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dz.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ethernet.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/fd.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/fl.4 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man4/font.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/hp.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ht.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/intro.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ip.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/kl.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/log.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/lp.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/lpr.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mailcnfg.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mailsurr.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mem.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mesgld.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/modules.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mt.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/newtty.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/null.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/pc.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/pex.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/proc.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ra.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rf.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rk.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rp.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rv.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/scsi.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/stream.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tbl.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tc.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tcp.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tiu.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tm.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tty.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ttyld.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/up.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/va.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vc.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vp.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vs.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vt.4 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/80.out.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/a.out.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/acct.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/aliases.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ar.5 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man5/ascii.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/backup.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/cdl.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/config.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/core.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/cpio.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/dir.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/dist.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/dump.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/environ.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/filsys.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fizz.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/font.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fs.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fsm.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fstab.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/graw.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ident.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/lde.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/lnode.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/log.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/map.5 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man5/math.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mcolor.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mds.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/minterm.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/minus.z.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mpictures.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mpxio.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/netnews.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/news.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/newsrc.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/paddle.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/passwd.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/picfile.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/plot.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/poly.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/privs.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/pwfile.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/saf.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/share.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/shares.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/speakm.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/src.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/stab.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/stock.10.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/tap.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/termcap.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/tp.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/troff.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ttys.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ttytype.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/types.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/uids.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/utmp.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/uuencode.5 delete mode 100755 static/v10/man5/values.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/vfont.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/view2d.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/whoami.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/worm.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man5/wtmp.5 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/adventure.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/arithmetic.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ascii.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/atc.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/azel.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/back.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/banner.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/basic.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bc.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bcd.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bianchi.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bj.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/boggle.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bridge.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/cal.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/cards.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/chess.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ching.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/cubic.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/das.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/doctor.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/dpt.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/eqnchar.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/factor.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/festoon.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/font.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/fortune.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/hangman.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/hyphen.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/imp.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ipa.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/latex.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/m6.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mail.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/man.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mars.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/maze.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mbits.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mcs.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mille.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mon.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/monop.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/moo.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mpictures.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mpm.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ms.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/number.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ogre.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ov.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ptx.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/quiz.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/rain.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/redcode.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/sail.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/sfs.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/sky.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/snake.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/spline.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/term.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/tmg.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/trek.man.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ttt.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/warp.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/worms.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/wump.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man6/yacc.6 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/apnews.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/ascii.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/av.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/avw.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/cal.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/dict.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/dkname.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/dpd.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/getty.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/glob.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/greek.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/hier.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/init.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/kbd.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/library.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/login.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/map.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/me.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/msh.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/netlib.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/netnews.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/news.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/obproc.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/papers.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/poly.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/postnews.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/pq.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/qns.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/readnews.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/scat.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/sky.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/submit.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/tabs.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/tel.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/telno.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/tmheader.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/town.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/units.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/vs.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/vsp.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/weather.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man7/wx.7 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/11.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/20boot.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ac.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/acct.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/adduser.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/analyze.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/apx.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/arcv.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/arff.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/asd.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/atalla.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/authmgr.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/backup.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/blmount.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/bproc.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/check.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/chk.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/chown.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/chuck.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/cl.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/clri.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/config.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/cpp.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/crash.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/cron.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dcheck.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/delivermail.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/df.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dist.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dkmgr.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dli.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dmesg.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/downgrade.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dump.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dumpdir.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/expire.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/fsck.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/fstat.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/gacct.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/gettable.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/getty.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/halt.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/htable.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/icheck.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/inews.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/init.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ino.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ins.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/install.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ipconfig.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/istat.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/kill.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/kmc.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ldpcs.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/login.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/makekey.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mkfs.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mknod.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mkpkg.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mount.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/netfs.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/netstat.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/nosh.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ns.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postbgi.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postio.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postreverse.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postscript.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/privserv.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ps.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/pstat.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/pwserv.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/quot.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/rarepl.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/rc.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/reboot.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/recnews.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/reloc.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/renice.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/restor.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/route.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sa.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/salv.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/savecore.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/scsish.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sendcover.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sendnews.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ship.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/showq.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/shutdown.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/smash.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/smstat.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/smtp.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sticky.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/su.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/svcmgr.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/swapon.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/swtmp.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/symorder.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sync.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/syslog.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/tcpmgr.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/tm.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/tp.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/umount.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/unspk.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/upas.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/update.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/uucico.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/uucleanup.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/uurec.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/vipw.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/vmstat.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/vpac.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/wall.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/worm.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/xs.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man8/xstr.8 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/32ld.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/3cc.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/Makefile delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/add.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/alloc.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/bitblt.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/bitfile.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/blitblt.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/blitmap.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/brfs.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/brush.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/button.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/cip.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/circle.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/cos.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/crabs.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/demo.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/face.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/faced.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/flickfile.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/flicks.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/font.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/gebaca.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/getfont.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/graphdraw.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/icon.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/intro.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jf.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jim.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jioctl.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jx.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/lens.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/libc.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/lsh.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mcc.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/menuhit.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mld.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mouse.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/movie.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mux.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/muxstring.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/newlayer.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/newproc.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/pads.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/paint.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/ped.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/pengo.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/pi.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/proof.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/psi.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/reader.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/rebecca.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/request.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/ruler.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/sam.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/samuel.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/string.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/term.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/thinkblt.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/thinkclient.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/twid.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/types.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/vismon.9 delete mode 100644 static/v10/man9/windows.9 (limited to 'static/v10') diff --git a/static/v10/=.1 b/static/v10/=.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 509409e8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/=.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -.TH = 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -=, ==, =p, ==p \- redo previous shell command -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B = -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.br -.B == -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.br -.B =p -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.br -.B ==p -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I = -command provides a simple history mechanism for the shell, -.IR sh (1). -The environment variable -.BR HISTORY , -if set, -names a file to which -the shell appends the text of each command before execution. -.I = -searches the history file for the most recent -command that matches the -.I pattern, -performs the -.IR substitutions, -and executes it. -The -.I pattern -must agree with an initial substring of the original -command except for variations in spacing. -If no -.I pattern -is specified, the most recent command is selected. -If no -substitution -is specified, the command is executed without modification. -.PP -.PP -Substitutions have the form -.IP -.IB old = new -.LP -specifying that the string -.I old -in the command is to be replaced by -.I new. -Substitutions are made in order -and operate on the first match. -.PP -The -.I == -command is identical to -.IR = , -but allows the substituted command to be edited before running. -The command is printed, -and a modification request is read from the terminal. -Generally each character in the request specifies how to -modify the character immediately above it: -.TP -.B # -Delete the character. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B % -Replace the character with a space. -.TP -.B ^ -Insert the rest of the request line before the character. -.TP -.B $ -Replace the characters in the command from this position on -with the rest of the request line. -.IP "space or tab" -Leave the character(s) unchanged. -.TP -.B = -Must be the first and only edit character. -Back up to the next most recent -match in the history file -and try again. -.IP "any other" -This character replaces the one above it. -.PD -.PP -If the request line is longer than the command, -the overhang is appended to the command. -.PP -.I =p -and -.I ==p -behave like -.I = -and -.IR == , -except that they print the command on -their standard output instead of executing it. diff --git a/static/v10/Makefile b/static/v10/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index f47052cd..00000000 --- a/static/v10/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -SUBDIRS = man1 \ - man2 \ - man3 \ - man4 \ - man5 \ - man6 \ - man7 \ - man8 \ - man9 - -export OS="Unix V10" - -include ../subdir.mk - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/2500.1 b/static/v10/man1/2500.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bfdec3a4..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/2500.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ -.TH 2500 1 -.CT 1 graphics comm_dev -.SH NAME -2500 \- BVH2500 videotape recorder -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B 2500 -[ -.B -lq -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I 2500 -is an interpreter of commands to control -a SONY BVH2500 1-inch video recorder, whose -inputs and outputs have already been set up. -The options are -.TP -.B -l -Create a log file; useful in pursuit of bugs. -.TP -.B -q -Suppress the initial status report. -.PP -Most of the commands require an intimate knowledge of the equipment. -The simpler commands are described below; -see the -.B help -command for a complete list. -Times are given as -.B "[[hrs.]min.]sec.fr" -where there are 30 frames per second. -The commands are -.TF viewxxxxxx -.TP 10n -.BI cue \ t -Move the tape to time -.IR t . -.TP -.B help -Produce a list of all commands. -.TP -.BI loop "\ t0 t1 fps" -Play from -.I t0 -through -.I t1 -and back again at -.I fps -frames per second. -.TP -.B play -Start playing the tape from the current frame. -.TP -.BI snap \ n -When in still record mode, record the current input onto the next -.I n -frames. -A missing -.I n -is taken to be 1. -.TP -.B status -Print some status information. -The command -.B status status -prints all available status information. -.TP -.BI still \ t -Go into still record mode and cue to time -.IR t . -The command returns before the tape transport is done; -usually it must be followed by -.LR wait . -.TP -.B still mode on|off -Turn still mode on or off. -.TP -.B stop -Stop the tape transport. -.TP -.BI view " t0 t1" -Play from -.I t0 -through -.I t1. -.B wait -Wait for the previous tape transport command to finish. -.TP -.B ! -Interpret the rest of the line as a -.IR sh (1) -command. -.TP -.B # -Comment. Ignore the rest of the line. -.PD -.PP -.SH EXAMPLES -Assuming you have already set up the video switch to feed the BVH2500, -the following script will record (or rerecord) a movie starting at 2 minutes. -.EX -still 2.0.0 -wait -!generate an image -snap 1 -# repeat the last two lines as necessary -still mode off -stop -.EE -.br -.SH BUGS -The BVH2500 will misbehave if the pause between -.BR snap s -(in still record mode) is too long, -or if you record for many hours on end. -The latter problem can be avoided by using scripts that run -for 2 or 3 hours and sleeping for 10 minutes between scripts -with the tape transport off. -.br -Commands in the help list are (incorrectly) capitalized. - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/300.1 b/static/v10/man1/300.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c100fe71..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/300.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,228 +0,0 @@ -.TH 300 1 -.SH NAME -300, 300s \- handle special functions of DASI 300 and 300s terminals -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B 300 -[ -.B +12 -] -[ -.B \-n -] -[ -.BI \-d t,l,c -] -.PP -.B 300s -[ -.B +12 -] -[ -.B \-n -] -[ -.BI \-d t,l,c -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I 300\^ -supports special functions and optimizes the use of the -.SM DASI -300 -(\s-1GSI\s+1 300 or -.SM DTC -300) terminal; -.I 300s\^ -performs the same functions for the -.SM DASI -300s (\s-1GSI\s+1 300s or -.SM DTC -300s) terminal. -It converts half-line forward, half-line reverse, and full-line reverse -motions to the correct vertical motions. -It also -attempts to draw Greek letters and other special symbols. -It permits convenient use of 12-pitch text. -It also reduces printing time 5 to 70%. -.I 300\^ -can be used -to print equations neatly, in the sequence: -.PP -.RS -neqn file -.B \&.\|.\|. -\(bv nroff \(bv 300 -.PP -.RE -.SM WARNING: -if your terminal has a -.SM PLOT -switch, make sure it is turned -.I on\^ -before -.I 300\^ -is used. -.PP -The behavior of -.I 300\^ -can be modified by the optional flag arguments to handle -12-pitch text, fractional line spacings, messages, and delays. -.TP 9 -.B +12 -permits use of 12-pitch, 6 lines/inch text. -.SM DASI -300 terminals normally allow only two combinations: 10-pitch, 6 lines/inch, -or 12-pitch, 8 lines/inch. -To obtain the 12-pitch, 6 lines per inch combination, the user should turn the -.SM PITCH -switch to 12, and use the -.B +12 -option. -.TP 9 -.BI \- n\^ -controls the size of half-line spacing. -A half-line is, by default, -equal to 4 vertical plot increments. -Because each increment equals 1/48 of an inch, -a 10-pitch line-feed requires 8 increments, -while a 12-pitch line-feed needs only 6. -The first digit of -.I n\^ -overrides the default value, thus allowing for individual taste -in the appearance of subscripts and superscripts. -For example, -.IR nroff (1) -half-lines could be made to act as quarter-lines by using -.BR \-2 . -The user could also obtain appropriate half-lines for -12-pitch, 8 lines/inch mode by using the option -.B \-3 -alone, -having set the -.SM PITCH -switch to 12-pitch. -.TP 9 -.BI \-d t , l , c\^ -controls delay factors. -The default setting is -.BR \-d3,90,30 . -.SM DASI -300 terminals sometimes produce -peculiar output when faced with -very long lines, -too many tab characters, -or long strings of blankless, non-identical characters. -One null (delay) character is inserted in a line for every set of -.I t\^ -tabs, -and for every contiguous string of -.I c\^ -non-blank, non-tab characters. -If a line is longer than -.I l\^ -bytes, 1+(total length)/20 nulls are inserted at the end of that line. -Items can be omitted from the end of the list, -implying use of the default values. -Also, a value of -zero -for -.I t\^ -.RI ( c ) -results in two null bytes per tab (character). -The former may be needed for C programs, the latter for files like -.BR /etc/passwd . -Because terminal behavior varies according to the specific characters printed and -the load on a system, -the user may have to experiment with these values to get correct output. -The -.B \-d -option exists only as a last resort -for those few cases that do not otherwise print properly. -For example, the file -.B /etc/passwd -may be printed using -.BR \-d3,30,5 . -The value -.B \-d0,1 -is a good one to use for C programs that have many -levels of indentation. -.IP -Note that the delay control interacts heavily -with the prevailing carriage return and -line-feed delays. -The -.IR stty (1) -modes -.B "nl0 cr2" -or -.B "nl0 cr3" -are recommended for most uses. -.PP -.I 300\^ -can be used with the -.I nroff\^ -.B \-s -flag or -.B \&.rd -requests, when it is necessary to insert paper manually or change fonts -in the middle of a document. -Instead of hitting the -return -key in these cases, -you must use the -line-feed -key to -get any response. -.PP -In many (but not all) cases, the following sequences are equivalent: -.RS -.PP -nroff \-T300 files -.B \&.\|.\|. -\ \ and\ \ \ nroff files -.B \&.\|.\|. -\(bv 300 -.br -nroff \-T300\-12 files -.B \&.\|.\|. -\ \ and\ \ \ nroff files -.B \&.\|.\|. -\(bv 300\ +12 -.PP -.RE -The use of -.I 300\^ -can thus often be avoided unless -special delays or options are required; -in a few cases, however, the additional movement optimization of -.I 300\^ -may produce better-aligned output. -.PP -The -.IR neqn (1) -names of, and -resulting output for, the Greek and special characters supported -by -.I 300\^ -are shown in -.IR greek (7). -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR 450 (1), -.IR eqn (1), -.IR graph (1G), -.IR mesg (1), -.IR stty (1), -.IR tabs (1), -.IR tbl (1), -.IR tplot (1G), -.IR troff (1), -.IR greek (7). -.SH BUGS -Some special characters cannot be correctly printed in column 1 -because the print head cannot be moved to the left from there. -.br -If your output contains Greek and/or reverse line-feeds, -use a friction-feed platen instead of a forms tractor; -although good enough for drafts, -the latter has a tendency to slip when reversing direction, -distorting Greek characters and misaligning the first line of text after one or more -reverse line-feeds. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/450.1 b/static/v10/man1/450.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ce3cecdd..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/450.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -.TH 450 1 -.SH NAME -450 \- handle special functions of the DASI 450 terminal -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B 450 -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I 450\^ -supports special functions of, and optimizes the use of, the -.SM DASI -450 -terminal, -or any terminal that is functionally identical, -such as the -.SM DIABLO -1620 or -.SM XEROX -1700. -It converts half-line forward, half-line reverse, and full-line reverse -motions to the correct vertical motions. -It also -attempts to draw Greek letters and other special symbols -in the same manner as -.IR 300 (1). -.I 450\^ -can be used -to print equations neatly, in the sequence: -.PP -.RS -neqn\| file\| .\|.\|.\| \(bv\| nroff\| \(bv\| 450 -.RE -.PP -.SM WARNING: -make sure that the -.SM PLOT -switch on your terminal is -.SM ON -before -.I 450\^ -is used. -The -.SM SPACING -switch should be put in the desired position (either 10- or 12-pitch). -In either case, vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch, -unless dynamically changed to 8 lines per inch by an appropriate escape sequence. -.PP -.I 450\^ -can be used with the -.IR nroff (1) -.B \-s -flag or -.B \&.rd -requests, when it is necessary to insert paper manually or change fonts -in the middle of a document. -Instead of hitting the -return -key in these cases, -you must use the -line-feed -key to -get any response. -.PP -In many (but not all) cases, the use of -.I 450\^ -can be eliminated in favor of one of the following: -.PP -.RS -nroff\| \-T450\| files\| .\|.\|. -.RE -or -.RS -nroff\| \-T450\-12\| files\| .\|.\|. -.RE -.PP -The use of -.I 450\^ -can thus often be avoided unless -special delays or options are required; -in a few cases, however, the additional movement optimization of -.I 450\^ -may produce better-aligned output. -.PP -The -.IR neqn (1) -names of, and -resulting output for, the Greek and special characters supported -by -.I 450\^ -are shown in -.IR greek (7). -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR 300 (1), -.IR eqn (1), -.IR graph (1G), -.IR mesg (1), -.IR stty (1), -.IR tabs (1), -.IR tbl (1), -.IR tplot (1G), -.IR troff (1), -.IR greek (7). -.SH BUGS -Some special characters cannot be correctly printed in column 1 -because the print head cannot be moved to the left from there. -.br -If your output contains Greek and/or reverse line-feeds, -use a friction-feed platen instead of a forms tractor; -although good enough for drafts, -the latter has a tendency to slip when reversing direction, -distorting Greek characters and misaligning the first line of text after one or more -reverse line-feeds. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/8q.1 b/static/v10/man1/8q.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7ed6437f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/8q.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -1 5 8 6 3 7 2 4 -1 6 8 3 7 4 2 5 -1 7 4 6 8 2 5 3 -1 7 5 8 2 4 6 3 -2 4 6 8 3 1 7 5 -2 5 7 1 3 8 6 4 -2 5 7 4 1 8 6 3 -2 6 1 7 4 8 3 5 -2 6 8 3 1 4 7 5 -2 7 3 6 8 5 1 4 -2 7 5 8 1 4 6 3 -2 8 6 1 3 5 7 4 -3 1 7 5 8 2 4 6 -3 5 2 8 1 7 4 6 -3 5 2 8 6 4 7 1 -3 5 7 1 4 2 8 6 -3 5 8 4 1 7 2 6 -3 6 2 5 8 1 7 4 -3 6 2 7 1 4 8 5 -3 6 2 7 5 1 8 4 -3 6 4 1 8 5 7 2 -3 6 4 2 8 5 7 1 -3 6 8 1 4 7 5 2 -3 6 8 1 5 7 2 4 -3 6 8 2 4 1 7 5 -3 7 2 8 5 1 4 6 -3 7 2 8 6 4 1 5 -3 8 4 7 1 6 2 5 -4 1 5 8 2 7 3 6 -4 1 5 8 6 3 7 2 -4 2 5 8 6 1 3 7 -4 2 7 3 6 8 1 5 -4 2 7 3 6 8 5 1 -4 2 7 5 1 8 6 3 -4 2 8 5 7 1 3 6 -4 2 8 6 1 3 5 7 -4 6 1 5 2 8 3 7 -4 6 8 2 7 1 3 5 -4 6 8 3 1 7 5 2 -4 7 1 8 5 2 6 3 -4 7 3 8 2 5 1 6 -4 7 5 2 6 1 3 8 -4 7 5 3 1 6 8 2 -4 8 1 3 6 2 7 5 -4 8 1 5 7 2 6 3 -4 8 5 3 1 7 2 6 -5 1 4 6 8 2 7 3 -5 1 8 4 2 7 3 6 -5 1 8 6 3 7 2 4 -5 2 4 6 8 3 1 7 -5 2 4 7 3 8 6 1 -5 2 6 1 7 4 8 3 -5 2 8 1 4 7 3 6 -5 3 1 6 8 2 4 7 -5 3 1 7 2 8 6 4 -5 3 8 4 7 1 6 2 -5 7 1 3 8 6 4 2 -5 7 1 4 2 8 6 3 -5 7 2 4 8 1 3 6 -5 7 2 6 3 1 4 8 -5 7 2 6 3 1 8 4 -5 7 4 1 3 8 6 2 -5 8 4 1 3 6 2 7 -5 8 4 1 7 2 6 3 -6 1 5 2 8 3 7 4 -6 2 7 1 3 5 8 4 -6 2 7 1 4 8 5 3 -6 3 1 7 5 8 2 4 -6 3 1 8 4 2 7 5 -6 3 1 8 5 2 4 7 -6 3 5 7 1 4 2 8 -6 3 5 8 1 4 2 7 -6 3 7 2 4 8 1 5 -6 3 7 2 8 5 1 4 -6 3 7 4 1 8 2 5 -6 4 1 5 8 2 7 3 -6 4 2 8 5 7 1 3 -6 4 7 1 3 5 2 8 -6 4 7 1 8 2 5 3 -6 8 2 4 1 7 5 3 -7 1 3 8 6 4 2 5 -7 2 4 1 8 5 3 6 -7 2 6 3 1 4 8 5 -7 3 1 6 8 5 2 4 -7 3 8 2 5 1 6 4 -7 4 2 5 8 1 3 6 -7 4 2 8 6 1 3 5 -7 5 3 1 6 8 2 4 -8 2 4 1 7 5 3 6 -8 2 5 3 1 7 4 6 -8 3 1 6 2 5 7 4 -8 4 1 3 6 2 7 5 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/:.1.broken b/static/v10/man1/:.1.broken deleted file mode 100644 index e4a1e3b8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/:.1.broken +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he ': (I)'3/15/72': (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME : -- place a label -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS :_ [ label ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION :_ -does nothing. Its only function is to place -a label for the goto____ command. :_ is a command -so the Shell doesn't have to be fixed to ignore lines with -:'s. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO goto(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/=.1 b/static/v10/man1/=.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 509409e8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/=.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -.TH = 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -=, ==, =p, ==p \- redo previous shell command -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B = -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.br -.B == -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.br -.B =p -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.br -.B ==p -[ -.I pattern -] -[ -.I substitution ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I = -command provides a simple history mechanism for the shell, -.IR sh (1). -The environment variable -.BR HISTORY , -if set, -names a file to which -the shell appends the text of each command before execution. -.I = -searches the history file for the most recent -command that matches the -.I pattern, -performs the -.IR substitutions, -and executes it. -The -.I pattern -must agree with an initial substring of the original -command except for variations in spacing. -If no -.I pattern -is specified, the most recent command is selected. -If no -substitution -is specified, the command is executed without modification. -.PP -.PP -Substitutions have the form -.IP -.IB old = new -.LP -specifying that the string -.I old -in the command is to be replaced by -.I new. -Substitutions are made in order -and operate on the first match. -.PP -The -.I == -command is identical to -.IR = , -but allows the substituted command to be edited before running. -The command is printed, -and a modification request is read from the terminal. -Generally each character in the request specifies how to -modify the character immediately above it: -.TP -.B # -Delete the character. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B % -Replace the character with a space. -.TP -.B ^ -Insert the rest of the request line before the character. -.TP -.B $ -Replace the characters in the command from this position on -with the rest of the request line. -.IP "space or tab" -Leave the character(s) unchanged. -.TP -.B = -Must be the first and only edit character. -Back up to the next most recent -match in the history file -and try again. -.IP "any other" -This character replaces the one above it. -.PD -.PP -If the request line is longer than the command, -the overhang is appended to the command. -.PP -.I =p -and -.I ==p -behave like -.I = -and -.IR == , -except that they print the command on -their standard output instead of executing it. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/Makefile b/static/v10/man1/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index 31e80e19..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3 +0,0 @@ -MAN = $(wildcard *.1) - -include ../../mandoc.mk diff --git a/static/v10/man1/acro.1 b/static/v10/man1/acro.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 18a45daa..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/acro.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.2, February 26, 1981 -.TH ACRO 1 -.SH NAME -acro \- find acronyms in a text file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B acro -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Acro -searches for acronyms in a text file. -It prints each sentence containing an acronym. -.I Acro -also prints a frequency count of all acronyms used in the text. -.PP -.I Acro -skips lines that begin with a dot, "."; -so text files that contain standard -.IR nroff "(1) and " mm (1) -macros are acceptable input. -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH USES -.I Acro -can be used to locate acronyms in a text. -The user can then check to see that an acronym is fully defined -when it is first used. -.SH FILES -.TP 21 -/tmp/$$* -temporary files -.SH SEE ALSO -nroff(1), mm(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/adb.1 b/static/v10/man1/adb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fe5191b4..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/adb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1116 +0,0 @@ -.TH ADB 1 -.CT 1 debug_tune -.ds TW \v'.25m'\s+2~\s-2\v'-.25m' -.ds ST \v'.25m'*\v'-.25m' -.ds IM \v'.1m'=\v'-.1m'\s-2\h'-.1m'>\h'.1m'\s+2 -.ds LE \(<= -.ds LT \s-2<\s+2 -.ds GT \s-2>\s+2 -.SH NAME -adb \- debugger -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B adb -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I objfil -[ -.I corfil -] -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Adb -is a general purpose debugging program. -It may be used to examine files and to provide -a controlled environment for the execution -of UNIX programs. -.PP -.I Objfil -is normally an executable program file, preferably -containing a symbol table; -if not then the -symbolic features of -.I adb -cannot be used although the file can still -be examined. -The default for -.I objfil -is -.LR a.out . -.I Corfil -is assumed to be a core image file produced after -executing -.IR objfil ; -the default for -.I corfil -is -.LR core . -.PP -Requests to -.I adb -are read from the standard input and -responses are to the standard output. -Quit signals are ignored; interrupts -cause return to the next -.I adb -command. -The options are -.TP -.B -w -Create -.I objfil -and -.I corfil -if they don't exist; open them for writing -as well as reading. -.TP -.BI -I path -Directory in which to look for relative pathnames in -.B $< -and -.B $<< -commands. -.PP -In general requests to -.I adb -have the following form. -Multiple requests on one line must be separated by -.LR ; . -.IP -.RI [ address ] -.RB [ , -.IR count ] -.RI [ command ] -.PP -If -.I address -is present then the current position, called `dot', -is set to -.IR address . -Initially dot -is set to 0. -In general commands are repeated -.I count -times. -Dot advances between repetitions. -The default -.I count -is 1. -.I Address -and -.I count -are expressions. -.PP -Some formats, -data sizes, -and command details have -different behavior -on different systems. -See the -.SM "MACHINE DEPENDENCIES" -attachment for details. -.SS Expressions -Expressions are computed with sufficient precision -to address the largest possible file; -generally this means a long integer. -On the VAX, -expressions are 32 bits; -on the Cray, -64 bits. -.TP 7.2n -.B . -The value of dot. -.TP 7.2n -.B + -The value of dot -incremented by the current increment. -.TP 7.2n -.B ^ -The value of dot -decremented by the current increment. -.TP 7.2n -.B \&" -The last -.I address -typed. -.TP 7.2n -.I integer -A number -in the -.IR "default radix" ; -see the -.B $d -command. -Regardless of the default, -the prefixes -.L 0o -and -.L 0O -(zero oh) force interpretation -in octal radix; the prefixes -.L 0t -and -.L 0T -force interpretation in -decimal radix; the prefixes -.LR 0x , -.LR 0X , -and -.L # -force interpretation in -hexadecimal radix. -Thus -.LR 0o20 , -.LR 0t16 , -and -.L #10 -all represent sixteen. -.TP 7.2n -.IB integer . fraction -A floating point number. -.TP 7.2n -.BI \' cccc\| \' -The -.SM ASCII -value of one or more characters. -.L \e -may be used to escape a -.LR \' . -.TP 7.2n -.BI < name -The value of -.IR name , -which is either a variable name or a register name. -.I Adb -maintains a number of variables -named by single letters or digits. -The register names are -those printed by the -.B $r -command. -.TP 7.2n -.I symbol -A -.I symbol -is a sequence -of upper or lower case letters, underscores or -digits, not starting with a digit. -.L \e -may be used to escape other characters. -The value of the -.I symbol -is taken from the symbol table -in -.IR objfil . -.TP 7.2n -.IB routine . name -The address of the variable -.I name -in the specified -C routine. -Both -.I routine -and -.I name -are -.IR symbols . -If -.I name -is omitted the value is the address of the -most recently activated C stack frame -corresponding to -.IR routine ; -if -.I routine -is omitted, -the active procedure -is assumed. -.TP 7.2n -.BI ( exp ) -The value of the expression -.IB exp . -.LP -.I Monadic operators -.TP 7.2n -.BI * exp -The contents of the location addressed -by -.I exp -in -.IR corfil . -.TP 7.2n -.BI @ exp -The contents of the location addressed by -.I exp -in -.IR objfil . -.TP 7.2n -.BI - exp -Integer negation. -.TP 7.2n -.BI ~ exp -Bitwise complement. -.TP 7.2n -.BI % exp -If -.I exp -is used as an address, -it is in register space; -see `Addresses'. -.LP -.I "Dyadic\ operators" -are left associative -and are less binding than monadic operators. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 + e2 -Integer addition. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 - e2 -Integer subtraction. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 * e2 -Integer multiplication. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 % e2 -Integer division. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 & e2 -Bitwise conjunction. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 | e2 -Bitwise disjunction. -.TP 7.2n -.IB e1 # e2 -.I E1 -rounded up to the next multiple of -.IR e2 . -.DT -.SS Commands -Most commands consist of a verb followed by a modifier or list -of modifiers. -The following verbs are available. -(The commands -.L ? -and -.L / -may be followed by -.LR * ; -see `Addresses' -for further details.) -.TP .5i -.BI ? f -Locations starting at -.I address -in -.I objfil -are printed according to the format -.IR f . -.TP -.BI / f -Locations starting at -.I address -in -.I corfil -are printed according to the format -.I f. -.TP -.BI = f -The value of -.I address -itself is printed in the -styles indicated by the format -.IR f . -(For -.B i -format -.L ? -is printed for the parts of the instruction that reference -subsequent words.) -.PP -A -.I format -consists of one or more characters that specify a style -of printing. -Each format character may be preceded by a decimal integer -that is a repeat count for the format character. -If no format is given then the last format is used. -.PP -Most format letters fetch some data, -print it, -and advance (a local copy of) dot -by the number of bytes fetched. -The total number of bytes in a format becomes the -.I current increment. -`Long integers' are full words, -the size of an expression item: -e.g.\& -4 bytes on the VAX, -8 bytes on the Cray. -`Short integers' -are some useful shorter size: -2 byte short integers on the VAX, -2 byte parcels on the Cray. -.ta 2.5n .5i -.RS -.TP -.PD 0 -.B r -Print short integer in the current default radix. -.TP -.PD 0 -.B R -Print long integer in the current default radix. -.TP -.PD 0 -.B o -Print short integer in octal. -.TP -.B O -Print long integer in octal. -.TP -.B q -Print short in signed octal. -.TP -.B Q -Print long in signed octal. -.TP -.B d -Print short in decimal. -.TP -.B D -Print long in decimal. -.TP -.B x -Print short in hexadecimal. -.TP -.B X -Print long in hexadecimal. -.TP -.B u -Print short in unsigned decimal. -.TP -.B U -Print long in unsigned decimal. -.TP -.B f -Print -as a floating point number. -.TP -.B F -Print double-precision floating point. -.TP -.B b -Print the addressed byte in octal. -.TP -.B c -Print the addressed character. -.TP -.B C -Print the addressed character. -Control characters -are printed in the form -.BI ^ X -and the delete character is printed as -.LR ^? . -.TP -.B s -Print the addressed characters until a zero character -is reached. -Advance dot -by the length of the string, -including the zero terminator. -.TP -.B S -Print a string using -the -.BI ^ X -escape convention (see -.B C -above). -.TP -.B Y -Print a long integer in date format (see -.IR ctime (3)). -.TP -.B i -Print as machine instructions. -This style of printing causes variables -0, (1, ...) -to be set to the offset parts -of the first (second, ...) -operand of the instruction. -.TP -.B a -Print the value of dot -in symbolic form. -Dot is unaffected. -.TP -.B p -Print the addressed value in symbolic form. -Dot is advanced by the size of a machine address -(4 bytes on the VAX, -8 bytes on the Cray). -.TP -.B t -When preceded by an integer tabs to the next -appropriate tab stop. -For example, -.B 8t -moves to the next 8-space tab stop. -Dot is unaffected. -.TP -.B n -Print a newline. -Dot is unaffected. -.tr '" -.TP -.BR ' ... ' -Print the enclosed string. -Dot is unaffected. -.br -.tr '' -.TP -.B ^ -Dot is decremented by the current increment. -Nothing is printed. -.TP -.B + -Dot is incremented by 1. -Nothing is printed. -.TP -.B - -Dot is decremented by 1. -Nothing is printed. -.RE -.PD -.TP -newline -Update dot by the current increment. -Repeat the previous command with a -.I count -of 1. -.TP -.RB [ ?/ ] l "\fI value mask\fR" -Words starting at dot -are masked with -.I mask -and compared with -.I value -until -a match is found. -If -.B l -is used, -the match is for a short integer; -.B L -matches longs. -If no match is found then dot -is unchanged; otherwise dot -is set to the matched location. -If -.I mask -is omitted then \-1 is used. -.TP -.RB [ ?/ ] w "\fI value ...\fR" -Write the short -.I value -into the addressed -location. -If the command is -.BR W , -write a long. -Option -.B -w -must be in effect. -.TP -.RB [ ?/ ] "m\fI b e f \fP" [ ?\fR] -.br -New values for -.RI ( b,\ e,\ f ) -in the first map entry -are recorded. -If less than three expressions are given then -the remaining map parameters are left unchanged. -The address type (instruction or data) -is unchanged in any case. -If the -.L ? -or -.L / -is followed by -.L * -then -the second segment -of the mapping is changed. -If the list is terminated by -.L ? -or -.L / -then the file -.RI ( objfil -or -.I corfil -respectively) is used -for subsequent requests. -For example, -.L /m? -will cause -.L / -to refer to -.IR objfil . -.TP -.BI > name -Dot is assigned to the variable or register named. -.TP -.B ! -A shell is called to read the -rest of the line following `!'. -.TP -.BI $ modifier -Miscellaneous commands. -The available -.I modifiers -are: -.RS -.TP -.PD 0 -.BI < f -Read commands from the file -.IR f . -If -.I f -cannot be found, try -.BI /usr/lib/adb/ f. -If this command is executed in a file, further commands -in the file are not seen. -If -.I f -is omitted, the current input stream is terminated. -If a -.I count -is given, and is zero, the command will be ignored. -The value of the count will be placed in variable -.B 9 -before the first command in -.I f -is executed. -.TP -.BI << f -Similar to -.B < -except it can be used in a file of commands without -causing the file to be closed. -Variable -.B 9 -is saved during the execution of this command, and restored -when it completes. -There is a (small) limit to the number of -.B << -files that can be open at once. -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI > f -Append output to the file -.IR f , -which is created if it does not exist. -If -.I f -is omitted, output is returned to the terminal. -.TP -.B ? -Print process id, the signal which caused stopping or termination, -as well as the registers. -This is the default if -.I modifier -is omitted. -.TP -.B r -Print the general registers and -the instruction addressed by -.BR pc . -Dot is set to -.BR pc . -.TP -.B R -Like -.BR $r , -but include miscellaneous registers -such as the kernel stack pointer. -.TP -.B b -Print all breakpoints -and their associated counts and commands. -.TP -.B c -C stack backtrace. -If -.I address -is given then it is taken as the -address of the current frame; -otherwise, -the current C frame pointer -is used. -If -.B C -is used then the names and (long) values of all -parameters, -automatic -and static variables are printed for each active function. -If -.I count -is given then only the first -.I count -frames are printed. -.TP -.B a -Set the maximum number of arguments -printed by -.B $c -or -.B $C -to -.IR address . -The default is 20. -.TP -.B d -Set the default radix to -.I address -and report the new value. -.I Address -is interpreted in the (old) current radix; -.L 10$d -never changes the default radix. -To make decimal the default radix, use -.LR 0t10$d . -A radix of zero (the initial default) is a special case; -input with a leading zero is octal, -that with a leading sharp-sign -.L # -is hexadecimal, -other numbers are decimal. -When the default radix is zero, -the default output radix is -appropriate to the machine: -hexadecimal on the VAX, -octal on the Cray. -.TP -.B e -The names and values of all -external variables are printed. -.TP -.B w -Set the page width for output to -.I address -(default 80). -.TP -.B s -Set the limit for symbol matches to -.I address -(default 255). -.TP -.B q -Exit from -.IR adb . -.TP -.B v -Print all non zero variables in the current radix. -.TP -.B m -Print the address maps. -.TP -.B k -Simulate kernel memory management. -.TP -.B p -Simulate per-process memory management. -.IP -.B $k -and -.B $p -are used for system debugging. -Their details vary with machine and operating system. -.PD -.RE -.TP -.BI : modifier -Manage a subprocess. -Available modifiers are: -.RS -.TP -.PD 0 -.BI b c -Set breakpoint at -.IR address . -The breakpoint is executed -.IR count \-1 -times before -causing a stop. -Each time the breakpoint is encountered -the command -.I c -is executed. -If this command is omitted or sets dot -to zero -then the breakpoint causes a stop. -.TP -.B d -Delete breakpoint at -.IR address . -.TP -.B r -Run -.I objfil -as a subprocess. -If -.I address -is given explicitly then the -program is entered at this point; otherwise -the program is entered at its standard entry point. -.I count -specifies how many breakpoints are to be -ignored before stopping. -Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the -same line as the command. -An argument starting with < or > causes the standard -input or output to be established for the command. -All signals are enabled on entry to the subprocess. -.TP -.BI c s -The subprocess is continued. -If -.I s -is omitted -or nonzero, -the subprocess -is sent the signal that caused it to stop; -if 0 -is specified, -no signal is sent. -Breakpoints -and single-stepping -don't count as signals. -Breakpoint skipping is the same -as for -.BR r . -.TP -.BI s s -As for -.B c -except that -the subprocess is single stepped -.I count -times. -If a signal is sent, -it is received -before the first instruction is executed. -If there is no current subprocess then -.I objfil -is run -as a subprocess as for -.BR r . -In this case no signal can be sent; the remainder of the line -is treated as arguments to the subprocess. -.TP -.B k -The current subprocess, if any, is terminated. -.PD -.RE -.SS Variables -.I Adb -provides a number of variables. -Named variables are set initially by -.I adb -but are not used subsequently. -Numbered variables are reserved for communication -as follows. -.TP -.BR 0 ", " 1 ", ..." -The offset parts of the first, second, ... -operands of the last instruction printed. -Meaningless if the operand was a register. -.br -.ns -.TP -.B 9 -The count on the last -.B $< -or -.B $<< -command. -.PP -On entry the following are set -from the system header in the -.IR corfil . -If -.I corfil -does not appear to be a -core image then -these values are set from -.IR objfil . -.TP -.B b -The base address of the data segment. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B d -The data segment size. -.TP -.B e -The entry point. -.TP -.B m -The `magic' number -.RI ( a.out (5)). -.TP -.B s -The stack segment size. -.TP -.B t -The text segment size. -.PD -.SS Addresses -The address in a file associated with -a written address is determined by a mapping -associated with that file. -Each mapping is represented by one or more quadruples -.RI ( "t, b, e, f" ), -each mapping addresses of type -.I t -(instruction, -data, -user block) -in the range -.I b -through -.I e -to the part of the file -beginning at -address -.IR f . -An address -.I a -of type -.I t -is mapped -to a file address -by finding a quadruple -of type -.IR t , -for which -.IR b \*(LE a < e ; -the file address -is -.IR address + f \(mi b . -As a special case, -if an instruction space address is not found, -a second search is made -for the same address in data space. -.PP -Typically, -the text segment of a program -is mapped as instruction space, -the data and bss segments -as data space. -If -.I objfil -is an -.IR a.out, -or if -.I corfil -is a core image -or process file, -maps are set accordingly. -Otherwise, -a single `data space' -map is set up, -with -.I b -and -.I f -set to zero, -and -.I e -set to a huge number; -thus the entire file can be examined -without address translation. -.PP -The -.B ? -and -.B / -commands attempt to examine -instruction and data space -respectively. -.B ?* -tries for data space -(in -.IR objfil ); -.B /* -accesses instruction space -(in -.IR corfil ). -.PP -Registers in -process and core images -are a special case; -they live in a special `register' address space. -The contents of register 0 -are located at address -.BR %0 ; -register 1 -at -.BR %4 -(if registers are 4 bytes long); -and so on. -.B % -addresses -are mapped to the registers -for the `current frame,' -set by local variable references, -and reset to the outermost frame -(the `real' registers) -whenever a process runs -or a stack trace is requested. -.PP -Simulated memory management -translations -(the -.B $k -and -.B $p -commands) -are done before the mapping described above. -.SH FILES -.F a.out -.br -.F core -.br -.F /usr/lib/adb/* -parameter files -.br -.F /proc/* -.SH SEE\ ALSO -.IR cin (1), -.IR pi (9.1), -.IR nm (1), -.IR proc (4), -.IR a.out (5), -.IR bigcore (1) -.br -J. F. Maranzano and S. R. Bourne, -`A Tutorial Introduction to ADB' in -Bell Laboratories, -.I UNIX Programmer's Manual, -Volume\ 2, -Holt, Rinehart and Winston (1984) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -`Adb' when there is no current command or format. -Exit status is 0, unless last command failed or -returned nonzero status. -.SH BUGS -Either the explanation -or the implementation -of register variables -is too complex and arcane. -.SH MACHINE DEPENDENCIES -.SS PDP-11 -Short integers (printed by -.B r -format) -are 2 bytes; -long integers -(printed by -.B R -format) -are 4 bytes. -Addresses printed by -.B a -format are 2 bytes. -.PP -Register variables match the hardware in the -obvious way: -.B r0 -is at address -.BR %0 , -.B r1 -at -.BR %2 , -and so on. -.PP -The default output radix -is octal. -.PP -.B $k -and -.B $p -are unimplemented. -.SS VAX -Short integers are 2 bytes, -long integers are 4 bytes, -addresses are 4 bytes. -.PP -Register variables match the hardware in the -obvious way: r0 -is at address -.BR %0 , -r1 at -.BR %4 , -and so on. -.PP -The default output radix -is hexadecimal. -.PP -.B $k -sets the system base register pointer to -.IR address . -System space addresses are thereafter -mapped according to the system page table -starting at that physical address. -An -.I address -of zero -turns off mapping. -.PP -.B $p -sets the process control block pointer to -.IR address ; -user space addresses are thereafter -translated according to the user page tables -described by the PCB. -Kernel mapping must already be in effect. -.I Address -may be a physical address -(that of the PCB) -or the system space virtual address -of a page table entry -pointing to the PCB -(the number stored in -.IR p_addr ). -If -.I address -is zero, -user mapping is turned off; -addresses less than -0x80000000 -will be treated as physical addresses. -.PP -The command -.L "$ > greater than - = = equal to , , comma - % \(di divide * * exponential (power) - ! ! factorial and combinations ? ? deal - .le \(<= less than or equal .ge \(>= greater than or equal - .ne \(!= not equal .om \(*W omega (not used) - .ep \(*e epsilon .rh \(*r shape (rho) - .nt \(no not (also \'~\') .tk \(ua take (also \'^\') - .dr \(da drop .it \(*i iota - .ci \(ci circular function .al \(*a alpha (not used) - .cl \(lc maximum (ceiling) .fl \(lf minimum (floor) - .dl \(*D del (not used) .de \(gr upside down del - .jt \(de small circle (null) .qd \(sq quad - .ss \(sb right U (not used) .sc \(sp left U (not used) - .si \(ca Down U .su \(cu U (not used) - .[^ \(gr upside-down del .bv \o'\(lf\(rf' decode (base) - .rp \o'\(lc\(rc' encode (rep) .br \(or residue (mod) - .sp \(<- assignment (also '_') .go \(-> goto - .or V or .nn \o'\(*L~' nand - .nr \o'v~' nor .lg \o'*\(ci' log - .rv \o'\(ci\(or' reversal .tr \o'\(ci\e' transpose - .rb reverse bar .cb \o',-' comma bar ( not used) - .sb \o'/-' slash bar .bb \o'\e-' blackslash bar - .gu \o'\(*D\(or' grade up .gd \o'\(gr\(or' grade down - .qq \o'\(sq\(fm' quote quad .dm \o'\(sq:' domino - .lm \o'\(ca\(de' lamp .ib \o'\(rc\(lc\(lf\(rf' I-beam - .ex execute (not used) .fr format(not used) - .di diamond (not used) .ot out (not used) - .ld \o'\(*D~' locked del (not used) ._a A alias for \'A\' - ._b B alias for \'B\' ._c C alias for \'C\' - ._d D alias for \'D\' ._e E alias for \'E\' - ._f F alias for \'F\' ._g G alias for \'G\' - ._h H alias for \'H\' ._i I alias for \'I\' - ._j J alias for \'J\' ._k K alias for \'K\' - ._l L alias for \'L\' ._m M alias for \'M\' - ._n N alias for \'N\' ._o O alias for \'O\' - ._p P alias for \'P\' ._q Q alias for \'Q\' - ._r R alias for \'R\' ._s S alias for \'S\' - ._t T alias for \'T\' ._u U alias for \'U\' - ._v V alias for \'V\' ._w W alias for \'W\' - ._x X alias for \'X\' ._y Y alias for \'Y\' - ._z Z alias for \'Z\' -.fi diff --git a/static/v10/man1/apnews.1 b/static/v10/man1/apnews.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 42735c20..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/apnews.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -.TH APNEWS 1 -.SH NAME -apnews \- present recent AP wire stories -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B apnews -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Apnews -is designed to skim the current news on the AP wire. -On a video terminal, it presents a top half screen of twenty -story slugs (two-word labels); typing the number of one of -these slugs displays the first ten lines of the story -on the bottom half screen. -Successive ten line pages of the story are obtained -by hitting carriage return. -Successive twenty slug top half pages are obtained -by hitting \fBm\fR -(if you aren't reading a story, carriage return will do). -You can return to the current top half page with -\fB\&.\fR, or to the first top half page with \fBt\fR. -.PP -If you type -\fBs\fI keywords\fR -a search through today's stories is done for stories -with those words; a menu of such stories is presented. -You can use the story now being displayed as a source -of keywords by typing \fBy\fR. -.PP -To get a copy of a story you are reading in your own -file space, type -\fBc\fI xyz\fR which will -copy the story to file or directory \fIxyz\fR -(appending if \fIxyz\fR is a file and not empty). -The command '?' prints some help. -.SH FILES -/data/ap -.SH "SEE ALSO" -ap.keys(5) -.SH BUGS -These are left as an exercise for the reader. Please report to mel. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/apply.1 b/static/v10/man1/apply.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7b52bc40..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/apply.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -.TH APPLY 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -apply, pick \- repeatedly apply a command; select arguments -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B apply -[ -.BI -a c -] -[ -.BI - n -] -.I command arg ... -.PP -.B pick -[ -.I arg ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Apply -runs the named -.I command -on each -argument -.I arg -in turn. -Normally arguments are chosen singly; the optional number -.I n -specifies the number of arguments to be passed to -.I command. -If -.I n -is zero, -.I command -is run without arguments once for each -.I arg. -Character sequences of the form -.BI % d -in -.I command, -where -.I d -is a digit from 1 to 9, -are replaced by the -.IR d th -following unused -.I arg. -If any such sequences occur, -.I n -is ignored, -and the number of arguments passed to -.I command -is the maximum value of -.I d -in -.I command. -The character -.L % -may be changed by the -.B -a -option. -.PP -.I Pick -writes each argument to the standard error and reads a reply. -If the reply is -.LR y , -the argument is echoed to the standard output; -if the reply is -.LR q , -.I pick -exits without reading any more arguments; -there is no output for any other response. -If there are no arguments, -lines of the standard input are taken instead. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -apply echo * -Time-consuming way to do -.LR ls . -.TP -.L -apply -2 cmp a1 b1 a2 b2 -Compare the `a' files to the `b' files. -.TP -.L -wc -l `pick *.[ch]` -Interactively select `.c' and `.h' files and count the lines in each. -.TP -.L -apply "wc -l %1" `pick *.[ch]` -Same, but use a separate process to count each file. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sh (1) -.SH BUGS -There is no way to pass a literal -.L %2 -if -.L % -is -.I apply's -argument expansion character. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/apsend.1 b/static/v10/man1/apsend.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 42640eec..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/apsend.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -.TH APSEND 1 -.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev -.SH NAME -apsend \- send troff output to phototypesetter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B apsend -[ -.I options -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Apsend -sends -.IR troff (1) -output from the named files or from the standard input -to the Murray Hill computer center for high-quality typesetting. -.PP -The options, which need only be spelled far enough to be unique, are -.TF comment=xx -.TP -.BI account= xx -comp center account number (default from password file) -.PD -.TP -.BI bin= xx -comp center bin number (default from password file) -.TP -.BI mailto= xx -mailing instructions, up to 28 characters, instead of comp center bin -.TP -.BI comment= xx -up to 30 characters, for -.F APSLOG -file entry (default value is -.I file -or -.LR pipe.end ) -.TP -.BI device=imagen -Print on laser printer instead of phototypesetter. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/apsend/* -.TP -.F /usr/lib/apsend/* -.TP -.F APSLOG -record of apsend activity -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR troff (1), -.IR lp (1), -.IR font (5) -.SH BUGS -Do not be misled by the historical name of this program. -The correct -.I troff -device selection is -.BR -Tpost , -which is fortunately the default. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ar.1 b/static/v10/man1/ar.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9e882a21..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ar.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'AR (I)'3/15/72'AR (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME ar -- archive -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS ar__ key afile name918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION ar__ -maintains groups of files -combined into a single archive file. -Its main use -is to create and update library files as used by the loader. -It can be used, though, for any similar purpose. -.sp -key___ is one character from the set drtux_____, -optionally concatenated with v_. -afile_____ is the archive file. -The names_____ are constituent files in the archive file. -The meanings of the key___ characters are: -.sp -d_ means delete the named files from the archive file. -.sp -r_ means replace the named files in the archive file. -If the archive file does not exist, r_ will create it. -If the named files are not in the archive file, they are appended. -.sp -t_ prints a table of contents of the archive file. -If no names are given, all files in the archive are tabled. -If names are given, only those files are tabled. -.sp -u_ is similar to r_ except that only those -files that have been modified are replaced. -If no names are given, all files in the archive that -have been modified will be replaced by the modified version. -.sp -x_ will extract the named files. -If no names are given, all files in the archive are -extracted. -In neither case does x_ alter the archive file. -.sp -v_ means verbose. -Under the verbose option, -ar__ gives a file-by-file -description of the making of a -new archive file from the old archive and the constituent files. -The following abbreviations -are used: -.sp - c_ copy - a_ append - d_ delete - r_ replace - x_ extract -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /tmp/vtm? temporary -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO ld(I), archive(V) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "Bad usage", -"afile -- not in archive format", -"cannot open temp file", -"name -- cannot open", -"name -- phase error", -"name -- cannot create", -"no archive file", -"cannot create archive file", -"name -- not found". -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS Option -vt__ should be implemented as a table with more information. -.sp -There should be a way to specify the placement -of a new file in an archive. -Currently, it is placed at the end. - -"ar x" changes the modified-date of the current -directory to a random number. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/array.1 b/static/v10/man1/array.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4d3817c9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/array.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4 +0,0 @@ - 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 - 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 - 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 - 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/as.1 b/static/v10/man1/as.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0755075c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/as.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'AS (I)'1/15/73'AS (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME as -- assembler -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS as__ [ -_ ] name918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION as__ -assembles the concatenation of name\d1\u, .... -If the optional first argument --_ is used, -all undefined symbols in the assembly -are treated as global. - -The output of the assembly is left on the file "a.out". -It is executable if no errors occurred -during the assembly. - -.ti 0 -FILES /etc/as2 pass 2 of the assembler -.br -/tmp/atm1? temporary -.br -/tmp/atm2? temporary -.br -/tmp/atm3? temporary -.br -a.out object -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO ld(I), -nm(I), -un(I), -db(I), -a.out(V), -"UNIX Assembler Manual". -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS When -an input file cannot be read, its name -followed by a question mark is typed and assembly -ceases. -When syntactic or semantic errors occur, a single-character diagnostic is typed out -together with the line number and the file name in which it -occurred. Errors in pass 1 cause cancellation of pass 2. -The possible errors are: -.sp -.in +6 -.ti -6 -) parentheses error -.ti -6 -] parentheses error -.ti -6 -< String not terminated properly -.ti -6 -* Indirection ("*_") used illegally -.ti -6 -.li -. Illegal assignment to "." -.ti -6 -A error in A_ddress -.ti -6 -B B_ranch instruction is odd or too remote -.ti -6 -E error in E_xpression -.ti -6 -F error in local ("F_" or "b") type symbol -.ti -6 -G G_arbage (unknown) character -.ti -6 -I End of file inside an If__ -.ti -6 -M M_ultiply defined symbol as label -.ti -6 -O O_dd-- word quantity assembled at odd address -.ti -6 -P P_hase error-- "." different in pass 1 and 2 -.ti -6 -R R_elocation error -.ti -6 -U U_ndefined symbol -.ti -6 -X syntaX_ error -.in -6 -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS Symbol table overflow is not checked. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/as80.1 b/static/v10/man1/as80.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4babfcfb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/as80.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -.h 1 1 2/3/78 -.th as80 -.sh NAME -as80 \*- assembler for the 8080 and Z80 microprocessors -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd as80 -[ -.bd \*-lhzi -] name ... -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it as80 -assembles the concatenation of the named files. -The output of the assembly is left on the file -.bd "80.out". -It is executable if no errors occurred -during the assembly, -and if there were no unresolved external references. -.s1 -The -l option causes as80 to produce a listing -on the standard output. -.s1 -The -h option causes as80 to produce the output listing -in hex. Octal is default. -.s1 -Register names: a,b,c,d,e,h,l,af,bc,de,hl,ix,iy,sp -.br -Condition codes: nz,z,nc,c,po,pe,p,m -.br -Psuedo operations: .globl,.text.textorg,.data,.dataorg -.br - .bss,.bssorg,.byte,.word,.list, -.br -.s1 -.s3 -.sh FILES -as80 the assembler -.br -"80.out" -.br -OPCODES the external instruction set -.sh DIAGNOSTICS -When -an input file cannot be read, its name and -a "can't open" diagnostic is produced and assembly -ceases. -Whenever sytactic or semantic errors are -encountered, -a single-character diagnostic is produced. -The possible diagnostics are: -.s3 -.ta 3 -\. moving dot backwards -.br -[ byte constant error -.br -( Parentheses error -.br -" String not terminated properly -.br -E Illegal expression -.br -R Illegal register usage -.br -G Garbage (unknown) character -.br -M Multiply defined symbol -.br -P `\fB.\fR' different in pass 1 and 2 -.br -T A 16 bit expression has been truncated to an 8 bit value -.br -U Undefined symbol -.br -X Syntax error -.br -.sh BUGS -.s1 -If .list 1 is ever encountered, -a listing will start to come out -whether or not -l was selected. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/asa.1 b/static/v10/man1/asa.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4a813e73..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/asa.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.TH ASA 1 -.SH NAME -asa \- interpret ASA control characters -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B asa -[ -.I file -] -... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Asa -takes files which were written with ASA carriage control characters, -usually by FORTRAN programs, converts them to a form suitable for printing -on a terminal, line printer, and so on, and writes the results on the -standard output. -.PP -The control characters handled are: -.PP - \' \' single space -.br - \'0\' double space -.br - \'-\' triple space -.br - \'+\' overprint the previous line -.br - \'1\' start a new page -.PP -If no file names are given, the standard input is used. -.PP -Each input -file given starts a new page. -A skip to a new page on the first line of the -first input file is ignored. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ascii.1 b/static/v10/man1/ascii.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3495a297..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ascii.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -.TH ASCII 1 -.CT 1 inst_info -.SH NAME -ascii \- interpret ASCII characters -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ascii -[ -.BI -oxdb n -] -[ -.B -nct -] -[ -.B -e -] -[ -.I text -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ascii -prints the -.SM ASCII -values corresponding to characters and -.I vice -.IR versa . -The values are interpreted in a settable numeric base; -.B -o -specifies octal (the default), -.B -d -decimal, -.B -x -hexadecimal, and -.BI -b n -base -.I n. -.PP -With no arguments, -.I ascii -reproduces -.F /usr/pub/ascii -in the specified base. -Characters of -.I text -are converted to their -.SM ASCII -values, one per line. -If, however, the first -.I text -argument -is a valid number in the specified base, conversion -goes the opposite way. -Control characters are printed as they appear in -.FR /usr/pub/ascii . -Other options are: -.TP -.B -n -Force numeric output. -.TP -.B -c -Force character output. -.TP -.B -t -Convert from numbers to running text; do not interpret -control characters or insert newlines. -.TP -.B -e -Interpret remaining arguments as -.I text. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L "ascii -d" -Print the -.SM ASCII -table base 10. -.TP -.L "ascii p" -Print the octal value of `p'. -.TP -.L "ascii 160" -Show which character is octal 160. -.SH "SEE ALSO -.IR ascii (6) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/at.1 b/static/v10/man1/at.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 69613be6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/at.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -.TH AT 1 -.CT 1 time_man -.SH NAME -at \(mi execute commands at a later time -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B at -[ -.B -r -] -.I time -[ -.I day -] -[ -.I file -] -.PP -.B at -l -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I At -squirrels away a copy of the named -.I file -(standard input default) -to be used as input to -.IR sh (1) -at a specified later time. -A -.I cd -command to the current directory is inserted -at the beginning, -followed by assignments to all environment variables. -When the script is run, it uses the userid and groupid -of the creator of the copy. -.PP -The -.I time -is 1 to 4 digits, with an optional following -.LR A , -.LR P , -.L N -or -.L M -for -AM, PM, noon or midnight. -One and two digit numbers are taken to be hours, three and four digits -to be hours and minutes. -If no letters follow the digits, a 24 hour clock time is understood. -.PP -The optional -.I day -is either a month name followed by a day number, -or a day of the week; if the word -.L week -follows, invocation is moved seven days further off. -Names of months and days may be recognizably truncated. -A year number, spelled out in full, may follow the month. -.PP -The options are -.TP -.B -r -Remove the specified activity. -.TP -.B -l -List all activities scheduled for this user. -.PP -.I At -programs are executed by periodic execution -of -.F /usr/lib/atrun -from -.IR cron (8). -The granularity of -.I at -depends upon how often -.I atrun -is executed. -.PP -The standard output and standard error files are lost unless redirected. -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -at 0800 dec 24 -echo ho ho ho | mail claus -.EE -.TP -.L -at -r `at -l` -Remove a scheduled activity. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/spool/at/yy.ddd.hhmm -.TP -.F /usr/lib/atrun -.TP -.BI /usr/spool/at/ yy . ddd . hhmm\fP.* -activity for year, day, hour -.TP -.F /usr/spool/at/lasttimedone -last -.I hhmm -.TP -.F /usr/spool/at/past -activities in progress -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR calendar (1), -.IR pwd (1), -.IR sleep (1), -.IR cron (8) -.SH BUGS -Due to the granularity of the execution of -.I atrun, -there may be bugs in scheduling things almost -exactly 24 hours into the future. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/awk.1 b/static/v10/man1/awk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7ac74960..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/awk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,452 +0,0 @@ -.TH AWK 1 -.CT 1 files prog_other -.SH NAME -awk \- pattern-directed scanning and processing language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B awk -[ -.BI -F fs -] -[ -.I prog -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Awk -scans each input -.I file -for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified literally in -.IR prog -or in a file -specified as -.B -f -.IR file . -With each pattern -there can be an associated action that will be performed -when a line of a -.I file -matches the pattern. -Each line is matched against the -pattern portion of every pattern-action statement; -the associated action is performed for each matched pattern. -The file name -.L - -means the standard input. -Any -.IR file -of the form -.I var=value -is treated as an assignment, not a filename. -.PP -An input line is made up of fields separated by white space, -or by regular expression -.BR FS . -The fields are denoted -.BR $1 , -.BR $2 , -\&...; -.B $0 -refers to the entire line. -.PP -A pattern-action statement has the form -.IP -.IB pattern " { " action " } -.PP -A missing -.BI { " action " } -means print the line; -a missing pattern always matches. -Pattern-action statements are separated by newlines or semicolons. -.PP -An action is a sequence of statements. -A statement can be one of the following: -.PP -.EX -.ta \w'\f5delete array[expression]'u -if(\fI expression \fP)\fI statement \fP\fR[ \fPelse\fI statement \fP\fR]\fP -while(\fI expression \fP)\fI statement\fP -for(\fI expression \fP;\fI expression \fP;\fI expression \fP)\fI statement\fP -for(\fI var \fPin\fI array \fP)\fI statement\fP -do\fI statement \fPwhile(\fI expression \fP) -break -continue -{\fR [\fP\fI statement ... \fP\fR] \fP} -\fIexpression\fP #\fR commonly\fP\fI var = expression\fP -print\fR [ \fP\fIexpression-list \fP\fR] \fP\fR[ \fP>\fI expression \fP\fR]\fP -printf\fI format \fP\fR[ \fP,\fI expression-list \fP\fR] \fP\fR[ \fP>\fI expression \fP\fR]\fP -return\fR [ \fP\fIexpression \fP\fR]\fP -next #\fR skip remaining patterns on this input line\fP -delete\fI array\fP[\fI expression \fP] #\fR delete an array element\fP -exit\fR [ \fP\fIexpression \fP\fR]\fP #\fR exit immediately; status is \fP\fIexpression\fP -.EE -.DT -.PP -Statements are terminated by -semicolons, newlines or right braces. -An empty -.I expression-list -stands for -.BR $0 . -String constants are quoted \f5"\ "\fR, -with the usual C escapes recognized within. -Expressions take on string or numeric values as appropriate, -and are built using the operators -.B + - * / % ^ -(exponentiation), and concatenation (indicated by a blank). -The operators -.B -! ++ -- += -= *= /= %= ^= **= > >= < <= == != ?: -are also available in expressions. -Variables may be scalars, array elements -(denoted -.IB x [ i ] ) -or fields. -Variables are initialized to the null string. -Array subscripts may be any string, -not necessarily numeric; -this allows for a form of associative memory. -Multiple subscripts such as -.B [i,j,k] -are permitted; the constituents are concatenated, -separated by the value of -.BR SUBSEP . -.PP -The -.B print -statement prints its arguments on the standard output -(or on a file if -.BI > file -or -.BI >> file -is present or on a pipe if -.BI | cmd -is present), separated by the current output field separator, -and terminated by the output record separator. -.I file -and -.I cmd -may be literal names or parenthesized expressions; -identical string values in different statements denote -the same open file. -The -.B printf -statement formats its expression list according to the format -(see -.IR printf (3)). -The built-in function -.BI close( expr ) -closes the file or pipe -.IR expr . -.PP -The customary functions -.BR exp , -.BR log , -.BR sqrt , -.BR sin , -.BR cos , -.BR atan2 -are built in. -Other built-in functions: -.TF length -.TP -.B length -the length of its argument -taken as a string, -or of -.B $0 -if no argument. -.TP -.B rand -random number on (0,1) -.TP -.B srand -sets seed for -.B rand -.TP -.B int -truncates to an integer value -.TP -.BI substr( s , " m" , " n\fB) -the -.IR n -character -substring of -.I s -that begins at position -.IR m -counted from 1. -.TP -.BI index( s , " t" ) -the position in -.I s -where the string -.I t -occurs, or 0 if it does not. -.TP -.BI match( s , " r" ) -the position in -.I s -where the regular expression -.I r -occurs, or 0 if it does not. -The variables -.B RSTART -and -.B RLENGTH -are set to the position and length of the matched string. -.TP -.BI split( s , " a" , " fs\fB) -splits the string -.I s -into array elements -.IB a [1] , -.IB a [2] , -\&..., -.IB a [ n ] , -and returns -.IR n . -The separation is done with the regular expression -.I fs -or with the field separator -.B FS -if -.I fs -is not given. -.TP -.BI sub( r , " t" , " s\fB) -substitutes -.I t -for the first occurrence of the regular expression -.I r -in the string -.IR s . -If -.I s -is not given, -.B $0 -is used. -.TP -.B gsub -same as -.B sub -except that all occurrences of the regular expression -are replaced; -.B sub -and -.B gsub -return the number of replacements. -.TP -.BI sprintf( fmt , " expr" , " ...\fB ) -the string resulting from formatting -.I expr ... -according to the -.IR printf (3) -format -.I fmt -.TP -.BI system( cmd ) -executes -.I cmd -and returns its exit status -.PD -.PP -The ``function'' -.B getline -sets -.B $0 to -the next input record from the current input file; -.B getline -.BI < file -sets -.B $0 -to the next record from -.IR file . -.B getline -.I x -sets variable -.I x -instead. -Finally, -.IB cmd " | getline -pipes the output of -.I cmd -into -.BR getline ; -each call of -.B getline -returns the next line of output from -.IR cmd . -In all cases, -.B getline -returns 1 for a successful input, -0 for end of file, and \-1 for an error. -.PP -Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations -(with -.BR "! || &&" ) -of regular expressions and -relational expressions. -Regular expressions are as in -.IR egrep ; -see -.IR grep (1). -Isolated regular expressions -in a pattern apply to the entire line. -Regular expressions may also occur in -relational expressions, using the operators -.BR ~ -and -.BR !~ . -.BI / re / -is a constant regular expression; -any string (constant or variable) may be used -as a regular expression, except in the position of an isolated regular expression -in a pattern. -.PP -A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma; -in this case, the action is performed for all lines -from an occurrence of the first pattern -though an occurrence of the second. -.PP -A relational expression is one of the following: -.IP -.I expression matchop regular-expression -.br -.I expression relop expression -.br -.I expression in array-name -.br -.I (expr,expr,...) in array-name -.PP -where a relop is any of the six relational operators in C, -and a matchop is either -.B ~ -(matches) -or -.B !~ -(does not match). -A conditional is an arithmetic expression, -a relational expression, -or a Boolean combination -of these. -.PP -The special patterns -.B BEGIN -and -.B END -may be used to capture control before the first input line is read -and after the last. -.B BEGIN -and -.B END -do not combine with other patterns. -.PP -Variable names with special meanings: -.TF SUBSEP -.TP -.B FS -regular expression used to separate fields; also settable -by option -.BI -F fs. -.TP -.BR NF -number of fields in the current record -.TP -.B NR -ordinal number of the current record -.TP -.B FNR -ordinal number of the current record in the current file -.TP -.B FILENAME -the name of the current input file -.TP -.B RS -input record separator (default newline) -.TP -.B OFS -output field separator (default blank) -.TP -.B ORS -output record separator (default newline) -.TP -.B OFMT -output format for numbers (default -.BR "%.6g" ) -.TP -.B SUBSEP -separates multiple subscripts (default 034) -.TP -.B ARGC -argument count, assignable -.TP -.B ARGV -argument array, assignable; -non-null members are taken as filenames -.PD -.PP -Functions may be defined (at the position of a pattern-action statement) thus: -.IP -.L -function foo(a, b, c) { ...; return x } -.PP -Parameters are passed by value if scalar and by reference if array name; -functions may be called recursively. -Parameters are local to the function; all other variables are global. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -length > 72 -Print lines longer than 72 characters. -.TP -.L -{ print $2, $1 } -Print first two fields in opposite order. -.PP -.EX -BEGIN { FS = ",[ \et]*|[ \et]+" } - { print $2, $1 } -.EE -.ns -.IP -Same, with input fields separated by comma and/or blanks and tabs. -.PP -.EX - { s += $1 } -END { print "sum is", s, " average is", s/NR } -.EE -.ns -.IP -Add up first column, print sum and average. -.TP -.L -/start/, /stop/ -Print all lines between start/stop pairs. -.PP -.EX -BEGIN { # Simulate echo(1) - for (i = 1; i < ARGC; i++) printf "%s ", ARGV[i] - printf "\en" - exit } -.EE -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR lex (1), -.IR sed (1) -.br -A. V. Aho, B. W. Kernighan, P. J. Weinberger, -.I -Awk \- a Pattern Scanning and Processing Language (Programmer'sManual), -CSTR 118, 1985 -.SH BUGS -There are no explicit conversions between numbers and strings. -To force an expression to be treated as a number add 0 to it; -to force it to be treated as a string concatenate -\f5""\fP to it. -.br -The scope rules for variables in functions are a botch. -.br -.L -S -and -.L -R -are flaky. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/backup.1 b/static/v10/man1/backup.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7a1c35e5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/backup.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,351 +0,0 @@ -.TH BACKUP 1 -.CT 1 sa_mortals -.SH NAME -backup \- backup and recover files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B "backup recover" -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B "backup grep" -[ -.I option ... -] -.I pattern ... -.PP -.B "backup fetch" -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B "backup stats" -[ -.I option ... -] -.PP -.B "backup backup" -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B "backup munge" -.PP -.B "backup mount" -[ -.I option ... -] -.I mountpt -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I backup -programs save and restore archival copies of files in an optical disk -store on a central system (see -.IR backup (5)). -Backup occurs automatically daily (see -.IR backup (8)) -and upon specific request via -.IR "backup backup" . -.I "Backup grep" -shows backup copy names for specific files, and -.I "backup fetch" -restores data from specific backup copies. -.I "Backup recover" -is a combination of these two; -it fetches the most recent copy. -All the -.I backup -programs describe their options when presented -with a bad option such as -.BR -? . -.PP -.I "Backup recover" -retrieves -.I files -by name. -The names should be full pathnames rooted at -.BR /n/ ; -if not, -.I backup -tries to guess names that begin with -.BR /n/ . -Directories should be recovered before their contents. -Regular files that are linked together will stay linked if they -are recovered together. -The options for -.I recover -are: -.TP -.BI -o " dir" -The argument is restored as an entry in the directory -.IR dir . -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -v -Verbose (enforced). -.TP -.B -F -Restore directories as files containing a null-terminated list of element names. -.TP -.B -r -Recursively recover any subdirectories. -.TP -.B -d -Create any missing intermediate directories. -.TP -.BI -D old = new -Replace the prefix -.I old -of the original filename with -.I new -to form the new output filename. -.TP -.B -m -The names are backup copy names, as determined from -.I backup grep, -not original filenames. -.TP -.BI -fdevice -Use -.I device -rather than -.B /dev/worm0 -for the WORM. -.I Device -may be on another machine: -.IB machine ! device\fR. -An initial -.B w -implies a WORM device; a -.B j -implies a jukebox. -A numeric -.I device -means -.BI /dev/worm device\fR. -.TP -.B -e -Cause the -.I worm fetch -server on the backup system to terminate gracefully. -.TP -.B -i -Append -.BI . n -to the output name for each file where -.I n -is an increasing integer. -This is useful for recovering multiple copies of the same file. -.PD -.PP -A diagnostic like -.B "need disk backup2a" -means you need to mount the -A side of the cartridge labeled -.BR backup2 . -.PP -.I "Backup grep" -searches for names of backed up files that match the strings -.IR patterns . -If the pattern is a literal (no -.BR -e ) -that looks like a filename, -it reports the filename catenated with -.B // -and the time -of the most recent backup copy. -If the pattern is a literal that looks like the output under option -.BR -d , -it reports the name of the corresponding backup copy. -The options are: -.TP -.B -d -Print file change times -.RB ( ctime , -see -.IR stat (2)) -as integers rather than as dates. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -e -Interpret -.I patterns -as regular expressions -given in the notation of -.IR regexp (3). -Warning: -this option can execute extremely slowly; -it is almost always better to use -.IR gre (1) -on -.F /usr/backup/filenames -on the backup machine; see -.IR backup (5). -.TP -.B -a -Print all names in the database. -.TP -.B -V -Treat -.I pattern -as a literal filename -and list all versions of the file. -.TP -.BI -< n -Only list entries with a date less than or equal to -.IR n . -If -.I n -is not a simple integer date, it is interpreted as by -.IR timec (3). -.TP -.BI -> n -Only list entries with a date greater than or equal to -.IR n . -.TP -.B -D -Print the most recent entry for every file name starting with -.I pattern, -taking into account any cutoff date, but turning off option -.BR -e . -.PD -.PP -.I Backup fetch -takes from its arguments or from standard input -backup copy names as reported by -.I backup grep -(such as -.BR v2345/987 ) -and restores the corresponding files. -It accepts the same options as -.I backup recover -except -.BR -m ; -.B -v -is really optional. -Irrelevant prefixes are stripped from backup copy names. -Thus the output of the -.I "backup grep" -command can be used directly. -.PP -.I "Backup stats" -provides statistics about the files backed up. -By default, it looks for all systems and all users and gives a grand total. -The options are -.nr xx \w'\f5-u \fIusers ' -.TP \n(xxu -.B -i -Give information per system or user -rather than a total. -.TP -.BI -s " systems -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI -u " users -With option -.BR -i , -restrict the total to the systems or users named in -comma-separated lists. -The name -.L * -expands to all systems or all users. -.TP -.B -d -Print average number of files and bytes for the last 1 day, -7 days and 30 days. -.PP -.I "Backup backup" -backs up files. -If no file names are given, -they are taken from standard input. -File names are interpreted as in -.IR "backup recover" . -The files are safely on the backup system when the command exits but -will normally take a day to get into the backup database. -.PP -.I "Backup munge" -causes the backup system to process any received files. -When this terminates (assuming no errors), the files have been -put onto backup media and have been absorbed into the database. -.PP -.I "Backup mount" -is an experimental way to access backed up files. -The specified part of the backup files -(set by -.BI -D root -or -.B / -by default) is mounted at -.IR mountpt . -There is one option -.TP \n(xxu -.BI -d " date -Make the mounted hierarchy reflect the state at -the given date. -The mounting can be reversed with -.IR umount ; -see -.IR mount (8). -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -backup stats -i -s '*' -Get totals for all systems. -.TP -.L -backup fetch `backup grep -d \e`backup grep -d /n/bowell/etc/passwd\e`` -What -.I backup recover -does for you. -.TP -.L -backup recover /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes -.br -.ns -.TP -.L -cd /n/coma/usr/rob; backup recover fortunes -Two ways to get the latest available copy of -.BR /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes . -.TP -.L -backup grep -V /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes -List all available copies of -.B /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes -with their dates. -.TP -.L -backup recover -m -o /tmp /n/wild/usr/backup/v/v919/678 -.br -.ns -.TP -.L -backup recover -m -o /tmp v919/678 -Two ways to recover a specific backup copy and place the result in -.BR /tmp . -.B /n/wild/usr/backup/v/v919/678 -is the name of the backup copy; the file will be restored to -its home machine, not to -.BR wild . -.TP -.L -backup grep -V /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes | backup fetch -i -o . -Recover all the versions of the fortunes file into -.BR fortunes.1 , -.BR fortunes.2 , -\&... in the current directory. -.PD -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/backup -\h'.5i'home of all datafiles and executables (on client machines) -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR worm (8), -.IR backup (5), -.IR backup (8) -.SH BUGS -Recovery via symbolic links may not work; use the non-linked pathname. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/badge.1 b/static/v10/man1/badge.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 76457c60..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/badge.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.TH BADGE A -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -badge \- print Bell Labs badge -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B badge -.I string1 -.I string2 -.I [ picture.ps ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Badge -is an ASCII-to-PostScript converter that frames -its arguments in a pleasant, colorful badge, -suitable for laminating. -File -.I picture.ps -is assumed to contain 24-bit color encapsulated PostScript. -If it is omitted or doesn't exist, a blank box will appear; -.B goofy -and -.B donald -(see FILES) are available for the camera-shy. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -badge "DONALD F" DUCK /usr/games/ps/donald | lp -dpeacock -.TP -.L -badge "P J" "WEINBERGER" /usr/games/ps/goofy | lp -dpeacock -.EX -.SH BUGS -Very long names (over 1.75 inches in 14 point type) are not accounted for. -.P -Unlike a similar badge provided by security, the -logo adheres to corporate standards. -.SH FILES -/usr/games/ps/donald -.br -/usr/games/ps/goofy -.br -/usr/games/ps/logo A corporate logo. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bas.1 b/static/v10/man1/bas.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2bdaa5b1..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bas.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,312 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'BAS (I)'1/15/73'BAS (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME bas -- basic -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS bas___ [ file ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION bas___ -is a dialect of basic [1]. -If a file argument is provided, -the file is used for input before the console -is read. -.sp -bas___ accepts lines of the form: -.sp - statement - integer statement -.sp -Integer numbered statements -(known as internal statements) -are stored for later execution. -They are stored in sorted ascending order. -Non-numbered statements are immediately executed. -The result of an immediate expression statement -(that does not have '=' as its highest operator) is printed. -.sp -Statements have the following syntax: -.sp -.in +6 -.ti -3 -expression -.br -The expression is executed for its side -effects (assignment or function call) -or for printing as described above. -.sp -.ti -3 -done____ -.br -Return to system level. -.sp -.ti -3 -draw____ expression expression expression -.br -A line is drawn on the Tektronix 611 display (/dev/vt0) from -the current display position -to the XY co-ordinates specified by the -first two expressions. -(The scale is zero to one in both X and Y directions) -If the third expression -is zero, the line is invisible. -The current display position is set to the end point. -.sp -.ti -3 -display_______ list -.br -The list of expressions and strings is -concatenated and displayed (i.e. printed) on the 611 starting -at the current display position. -The current display position is not changed. -.sp -.ti -3 -erase_____ -.br -The 611 screen is erased. -.sp -.ti -3 -for___ name =_= expression expression statement -.ti -3 -for___ name =_ expression expression -.br -.li -... -.ti -3 -next____ -.br -The for___ statement -repetitively executes a -statement (first form) -or a group of statements (second form) -under control of a named variable. -The variable takes on the value of -the first expression, -then is incremented by one on each loop, -not to exceed the value of -the second expression. -.sp -.ti -3 -goto____ expression -.br -The expression is evaluated, truncated to an integer -and execution goes to the corresponding integer numbered statment. -If executed from immediate mode, -the internal statements are compiled first. -.sp -.ti -3 -if__ expression statement -.br -The statement is executed if the expression evaluates -to non-zero. -.sp -.ti -3 -list____ [expression [expression]] -.br -list____ is used to print out the stored internal statements. -If no arguments are given, all internal statements are printed. -If one argument is given, only that -internal statement is listed. -If two arguments are given, all internal statements -inclusively between the arguments are printed. -.sp -.ti -3 -print_____ list -.br -The list of expressions and strings are concatenated and -printed. -(A string is delimited by " characters.) -.sp -.ti -3 -return______ [expression] -.br -The expression is evaluated and the result is passed -back as the value of a function call. -If no expression is given, zero is returned. -.sp -.ti -3 -run___ -.br -The internal statements are compiled. -The symbol table is re-initialized. -The random number generator is re-set. -Control is passed to the lowest numbered internal -statement. -.sp -.ti -6 -Expressions have the following syntax: -.sp -.ti -3 -name -.br -A name is used to specify a variable. -Names are composed of a letter ('a' - 'z') -followed by letters and digits. -The first four characters of a name are significant. -.sp -.ti -3 -number -.br -A number is used to represent a constant value. -A number is composed of digits, at most one decimal point ('.') -and possibly a scale factor of the form -e_ digits or e-__ digits. -.sp -.ti -3 -(_ expression )_ -.br -Parentheses are used to alter normal order of evaluation. -.sp -.ti -3 -expression operator expression -.br -Common functions of two arguments are abbreviated -by the two arguments separated by an operator denoting the function. -A complete list of operators is given below. -.sp -.ti -3 -expression (_ [expression [,_ expression ...]] )_ -.br -Functions of an arbitrary number of arguments -can be called by an expression followed by the arguments -in parentheses separated by commas. -The expression evaluates to the -line number of the entry of the function in the -internally stored statements. -This causes the internal statements to be compiled. -If the expression evaluates negative, -a builtin function is called. -The list of builtin functions appears below. -.sp -.ti -3 -name [_ expression [,_ expression ...] ]_ -.br -Each expression is truncated to an integer -and used as a specifier for the name. -The result is syntactically identical to a name. -a[1,2] is the same as a[1][2]. -The truncated expressions are restricted to -values between 0 and 32767. -.sp -.ti -6 -The following is the list of operators: -.sp -.ti -3 -= -.br -= is the assignment operator. -The left operand must be a name or an array element. -The result is the right operand. -Assignment binds right to left, -all other operators bind left to right. -.sp -.ti -3 -& | -.br -&_ (logical and) -has result zero if either of its arguments are zero. -It has result one if both its arguments are non-zero. -|_ (logical or) -has result zero if both of its arguments are zero. -It has result one if either of its arguments are non-zero. -.sp -.ti -3 -< <= > >= == <> -.br -The relational operators -(< less than, <= less than or equal, -> greater than, ->= greater than or equal, -== equal to, -<> not equal to) -return one if their arguments are in the specified -relation. -They return zero otherwise. -Relational operators at the same level extend as follows: -a>b>c is the same as a>b&b>c. -.sp -.ti -3 -+ - -.br -Add and subtract. -.sp -.ti -3 -* / -.br -Multiply and divide. -.sp -.ti -3 -^ -.br -Exponentiation. -.sp -.ti -6 -The following is a list of builtin functions: -.sp -.ti -3 -arg -.br -Arg(i) is the value of the i_th -actual parameter on the current level -of function call. -.sp -.ti -3 -exp -.br -Exp(x) is the exponential function of x. -.sp -.ti -3 -log -.br -Log(x) is the logarithm base e of x. -.sp -.ti -3 -sin -.br -Sin(x) is the sine of x (radians). -.sp -.ti -3 -cos -.br -Cos(x) is the cosine of x (radians). -.sp -.ti -3 -atn -.br -Atn(x) is the arctangent of x. -.sp -.ti -3 -rnd -.br -Rnd() is a uniformly distributed random -number between zero and one. -.sp -.ti -3 -expr -.br -Expr() is the only form of program input. -A line is read from the input and -evaluated as an expression. -The resultant value is returned. -.sp -.ti -3 -int -.br -Int(x) returns x truncated to an integer. -.in -6 -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /tmp/btm? temporary -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO [1] DEC-11-AJPB-D -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS Syntax -errors cause the incorrect line to be typed -with an underscore where the parse failed. -All other diagnostics are self explanatory. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/basename.1 b/static/v10/man1/basename.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2d984abd..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/basename.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -.TH BASENAME 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -basename, dirname \- strip filename affixes -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B basename -.I string -[ -.I suffix -] -.PP -.B dirname -.I string -.SH DESCRIPTION -These functions split off useful parts of a pathname; -they are typically used inside substitution marks -.BR `\ ` -in shell scripts. -.PP -.I Basename -deletes any prefix ending in -.L / -and the -.I suffix, -if present in -.I string, -from -.I string, -and prints the result on the standard output. -.PP -.I Dirname -places on standard output the name of the directory in which -a file named -.I string -would nominally be found. -The calculation is syntactic and independent of -the contents of the file system. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -cc $1 -o `basename $1 .c` -Compile into -.LR file , -where -.L $1 -is -.L file.c -or -.LR dir/file.c . -.TP -.L -cc $1 -o `dirname $1`/`basename $1 .c` -Compile -.LR dir/file.c -into -.LR dir/file . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sh (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/basic.1 b/static/v10/man1/basic.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 137985e7..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/basic.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -.TH BASIC 1 grigg -.SH NAME -basic, bas, bite \- basic language interpreters -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B /usr/bin/lcl/basic -.PP -.B /usr/bin/lcl/bas -.PP -.B /usr/bin/lcl/bite -.SH DESCRIPTION -Of these three completely different Basic interpreters, -.I basic -is the biggest, and unfortunately the best. -Caveat emptor. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bc.1 b/static/v10/man1/bc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8f0528aa..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ -.TH BC 1 -.CT 1 numbers -.SH NAME -bc \- arbitrary-precision arithmetic language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bc -[ -.B -c -] -[ -.B -l -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bc -is an interactive processor for a language that resembles -C but provides arithmetic on numbers of arbitrary length with up -to 100 digits right of the decimal point. -It takes input from any files given, then reads -the standard input. -The -.B -l -argument stands for the name -of an arbitrary precision math library. -The following syntax for -.I bc -programs is like that of C; -.I L -means letter -.BR a - z , -.I E -means expression, -.I S -means statement. -.TF length(E) -.TP -Lexical -.RS -.HP -comments are enclosed in -.B /* */ -.HP -newlines end statements -.RE -.TP -Names -.IP -simple variables: -.I L -.br -array elements: -.IB L [ E ] -.br -The words -.BR ibase , -.BR obase , -and -.B scale -.TP -Other operands -arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and decimal point. -.RS -.TP -.BI ( E ) -.TP -.BI sqrt( E ) -.TP -.BI length( E ) -number of significant decimal digits -.TP -.BI scale( E ) -number of digits right of decimal point -.TP -.IB L ( E , ... ,\fIE\fP) -.RE -.TP -Operators -.RS -.HP -.B "+ - * / % ^\ " -.RB ( % -is remainder; -.B ^ -is power) -.HP -.B "++ --\ " -(prefix and postfix; apply to names) -.TP -.B "== <= >= != < >" -.TP -.B "= += -= *= /= %= ^=" -.RE -.TP -Statements -.RS -.br -.I E -.br -.B { -.I S -.B ; -\&... -.B ; -.I S -.B } -.br -.B "if (" -.I E -.B ) -.I S -.br -.B "while (" -.I E -.B ) -.I S -.br -.B "for (" -.I E -.B ; -.I E -.BI ; E ) -.I S -.br -null statement -.br -.B break -.br -.B quit -.br -\f5"\fRtext\f5"\fR -.RE -.TP -Function definitions -.RS -.br -.B define -.I L -.B ( -.I L -.B , -\&... -.B , -L -.BR ) { -.PD0 -.br -.B auto -.I L -.B , -\&... -.B , -.I L -.br -.I S -.B ; -\&... -.B ; -.I S -.br -.B "return (" -.I E -.B ) -.LP -.B } -.RE -.TP -Functions in -.B -l -math library -.RS -.TP -.BI s( x ) -sine -.TP -.BI c( x ) -cosine -.TP -.BI e( x ) -exponential -.TP -.BI l( x ) -log -.TP -.BI a( x ) -arctangent -.TP -.BI j( n,x ) -Bessel function -.RE -.PP -.DT -All function arguments are passed by value. -.PD -.PP -The value of a statement that is an expression is printed -unless the main operator is an assignment. -Text in quotes, which may include newlines, is also printed. -Either semicolons or newlines may separate statements. -Assignment to -.B scale -influences the number of digits to be retained on arithmetic -operations in the manner of -.IR dc (1). -Assignments to -.B ibase -or -.B obase -set the input and output number radix respectively. -.PP -The same letter may be used as an array, a function, -and a simple variable simultaneously. -All variables are global to the program. -Automatic variables are pushed down during function calls. -In a declaration of an array as a function argument -or automatic variable -empty square brackets must follow the array name. -.PP -.I Bc -is actually a preprocessor for -.IR dc (1), -which it invokes automatically, unless the -.B -c -(compile only) -option is present. -In this case the -.I dc -input is sent to the standard output instead. -.SH EXAMPLES -Define a function to compute an approximate value of -the exponential. -Use it to print 10 values. -(The exponential function in the library gives better answers.) -.PP -.EX -scale = 20 -define e(x){ - auto a, b, c, i, s - a = 1 - b = 1 - s = 1 - for(i=1; 1==1; i++){ - a = a*x - b = b*i - c = a/b - if(c == 0) return(s) - s = s+c - } -} -for(i=1; i<=10; i++) e(i) -.EE -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/lib.b -mathematical library -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR dc (1), -.IR hoc (1) -.SH BUGS -No -.LR && , -.LR || , -or -.L ! -operators. -.br -A -.L for -statement must have all three -.LR E s. -.br -A -.L quit -is interpreted when read, not when executed. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bcp.1 b/static/v10/man1/bcp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ab7cf541..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bcp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,288 +0,0 @@ -.TH BCP 1 -.CT 1 graphics -.SH NAME -bcp \(mi reformat black-and-white picture files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bcp -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file1 -[ -.I file2 -] -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bcp -copies black-and-white (B&W) image -.I file1 -to -.I file2, -optionally changing the file format and transforming the image. -If -.I file1 -is a directory name, -then every leaf of its file tree is processed in turn; and, in this case, -if -.I file2 -also is specified, it is made the root directory -of an isomorphic tree of output files. -If -.I file2 -is not specified, all output is catenated to stdout. -.PP -.I Bcp -can copy among all the B&W -.IR picfile (5) -formats, and some others. -The default output format is -.BR TYPE=ccitt-g4 . -Image transformations include trimming, translation, scaling, and rotation, -performed in that order (not in argument order). -.PP -Input files in -.IR picfile (5) -format must begin with an ASCII -.BI TYPE= type -header line. -.I Types -supported both as input and output are: -.nr xx \w'\fLccitt-g4\ ' -.TP \n(xxu -.B dump -One byte/pixel. -.B NCHAN=1 -is required. -On input, the grey pixel values are thresholded -to B&W; -see option -.BR -T . -On output, black becomes 0 and white 255. -.TP -.B bitmap -One bit/pixel. -Essentially Sun rasterfile format, with a -.IR picfile (5) -header replacing the Sun binary header. -.TP -.B ccitt-g4 -CCITT Group 4 FAX encoding, strongly compressive on printed text. -Also, -.B ccitt-g31 -(Group 3, 1-dim) -and -.B ccitt-g32 -(Group 3, 2-dim; see -.BR -k ). -.LP -Other supported -.I types -are: -.TP \n(xxu -.B binary -One bit/pixel encoding; obsolescent, but needed for old image archives. -Both input and output. -.TP -.B rle -Fast run-length encoding; obsolescent, but needed for old image archives. -Input or output, but not both. -.TP -.B pico -Same as -.BR dump . -Input only. -.TP -.B cdf -`Compound document format', used in AT&T FAX Connection product. -Input only. -Only the first of multiple pages is read. -.LP -Other formats not using a -.BI TYPE= type -header, are: -.IR bitfile (9.5) -format; -PostScript bitmap format (output only); and -Sun rasterfile format (with the Sun binary header; output only). -.PP -The options are: -.TP \n(xxu -.B -B[io] -Read/write -.IR bitfile (9.5) -format (no -.BI TYPE= type -header). -.TP -.B -M -Write -.B TYPE=bitmap -format. -.TP -.B -P -Write Postscript bitmap format (Suns only). -.TP -.BI -R x , y -Force output resolutions to -.I x,y -(pixels/inch). -If -.BI , y -is missing, it is taken to be the same as -.I x. -Overrides -.BI -x x , y . -Requires a -.BI RES= "x y -line in the header (but, see -.BR -Z ). -.TP -.B -R= -Force the output resolution to be equal to the greater of -the input resolutions. -.TP -.B -S -Write Sun rasterfile format (no -.BI TYPE= type -header; on Suns only). -.TP -.BI -T t -Threshold. -When reading -.BR TYPE=dump , -assign black to grey levels less than -.I t, -and white to others. -Default: -.BR -T128 . -.TP -.BI -Z x , y -Force input -.BI RES= "x y. -.TP -.B -b -Write -.B TYPE=binary -format. -.TP -.B -g4 -.br -.ns -.TP -.B -4 -Write -.B TYPE=ccitt-g4 -format. -Similarly, -.B -g31 -or -.B -31 -and -.B -g32 -or -.BR -32 . -.TP -.BI -k n -Set the `k' for -.B ccitt-g32 -encoding on output (default -.BR -k4 ). -.TP -.BI -o x , y -Offset (translate) the image by -.I x,y -pixels. -The width and height of the picture are not changed. -.TP -.B -p -Write -.B TYPE=dump NCHAN=1 -format. -Map black to 0, white to 255. -.TP -.B -r -Write -.B TYPE=rle -format. -.TP -.B -tl -Rotate the image to bring the left edge of the page to the top. -Set top-left corner of the rotated -image at the top-left corner of the image. -.TP -.BI -t d -Rotate the image -.I d -degrees counterclockwise about its center. -.I d -is a real number. -.TP -.BI -w l,t,r,b -Specify window (trim the image): -.I l,t -is the left-top corner and -.I r,b -the right-bottom corner measured in pixels. -If the new margins are outside the original picture, -the new area is set to white. -An argument given as -.L % -leaves the edge unchanged. -.TP -.BI -x x , y -Expand/contract (scale) the image, by real factors -.I x -and -.I y. -If -.BI , y -is missing, -.I y -is taken to be the same as -.I x. -May be overridden by -.BI -R x , y. -Requires a -.BI RES= "x y -line in the header (but, see -.BR -Z ). -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR cscan (1), -.IR imscan (1), -.IR ocr (1), -.IR pico (1), -.IR picfile (5) -.br -CCITT facsimile coding standards Rec. T.4(1988) and T.6(1988). -.SH BUGS -Concatenated pages are supported, but only if each new page has a complete -header. -.br -Scaling is accomplished by naive replication/deletion of pixels. -.br -Rotation by small angles exhibits aliasing effects, and is slow. -.br -Rotations -.B -tr -and -.B -tb -are unfinished. -.br -CCITT FAX `uncompressed' (or, `transparent') mode is not implemented. -.br -Postscript output is useful only for small images. -.br -.BI WINDOW= "l t r b -where -.I l -or -.I t -is non-zero -may not be handled correctly for every combination of file types. -.br -.B TYPE=rle -can't be both input and output. -.br -Should be merged with T. Duff's -.I pcp. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 b/static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0f63ee30..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -.TH BDIFF 1 -.SH NAME -bdiff \- big diff -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bdiff -file1 file2 [n] -.RB [ \-s ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bdiff\^ -is used in a manner analogous to -.IR diff (1) -to find which lines must be changed in two files to bring them -into agreement. -Its purpose is to allow processing of files which are too large -for -.IR diff . -.I Bdiff\^ -ignores lines common to the beginning of both files, -splits the remainder of each file into -.IR n -line -segments, and invokes -.I diff\^ -upon corresponding segments. -The value of -.I n\^ -is 3500 by default. -If the optional third argument is given, and it is -numeric, it is used as the value for -.IR n . -This is useful in those cases in which 3500-line segments are -too large for -.IR diff , -causing it to fail. -If -.I file1\^ -.RI ( file2 ) -is \fB\-\fR, -the standard input is read. -The optional -.B \-s -(silent) argument specifies that -no diagnostics are to be printed by -.I bdiff\^ -(note, however, that this does not suppress possible exclamations by -.IR diff . -If both optional arguments are specified, they must appear in the -order indicated above. -.PP -The output of -.I bdiff\^ -is exactly that of -.IR diff , -with line numbers adjusted to account for the segmenting of the files -(that is, to make it look as if the files had been processed -whole). -Note that -because of the segmenting of the files, -.I bdiff\^ -does not necessarily find a -smallest sufficient set of file differences. -.SH FILES -/tmp/bd????? -.SH "SEE ALSO" -diff(1). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Use -.IR help (1) -for explanations. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 b/static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 18159971..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -.TH BIGCORE 1 -.CT 1 debug_tune -.SH NAME -bigcore, coreid \- permit big core images, identify source of image -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bigcore -.I command -.PP -.B coreid -[ -.I file -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bigcore -calls the named -.I command -with no restriction on the size of core images. -By default, -no core image will be written when a program aborts -if it would be larger than a megabyte. -.PP -.I Coreid -reads the file -.FR core , -or the specified core image -.I file, -and prints on the standard output the argument list -of the program that produced the core image. -.SH FILES -.F core -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR core (5) -.SH BUGS -.I Coreid -only works for core images from C and Fortran programs. -.br -The arguments shown are those at the time of the dump, -not at invocation of the program. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bison.1 b/static/v10/man1/bison.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ebd6d11c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bison.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -.TH BISON 1 local -.SH NAME -bison \- GNU Project parser generator (yacc replacement) -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bison -[ -.B \-dvy -] file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bison -is a parser generator in the style of -.IR yacc (1). -It should be upwardly compatible with input files designed -for -.IR yacc . -.PP -Input files should follow the -.I yacc -convention of ending in ``.y''. -Unlike -.IR yacc , -the generated files do not have fixed names, but instead use the prefix -of the input file. -For instance, a grammar description file named -.B parse.y -would produce the generated parser in a file named -.BR parse.tab.c , -instead of -.IR yacc 's -.BR y.tab.c . -.PP -.I Bison -takes three optional flags. -.TP -.B \-d -Produce a -.B .tab.h -file, similar to -.IR yacc 's -.B y.tab.h -file. -.TP -.B \-v -Be verbose. Analogous to the same flag for -.IR yacc . -.TP -.B \-y -Use fixed output file names. I.e., force the output to be in files -.BR y.tab.c , -.BR y.tab.h , -and so on. This is for full -.I yacc -compatibility. -.SH FILES -/usr/local/lib/bison.simple simple parser -.br -/usr/local/lib/bison.hairy complicated parser -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR yacc (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -``Self explanatory.'' -... ha! diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bite.1 b/static/v10/man1/bite.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 41638a81..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bite.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,712 +0,0 @@ -.TH BITE 1 local -.SH NAME -bite \- Basic Interpreter for Testing & Engineering -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bite -[ - ] [prog1 prog2 prog3 .....] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bite -is a BASIC language interpreter. -Its virtues are in that it is written in the Bell System 'C' -compiler language which lends itself to -.I portability -and -.I readability. -One of the most important aspects is that the interpreter is -.I interfaced -with the -.I system shell via the '!' command. -Shell commands can be executed inmmediately or actually typed into -the BASIC program itself! -"bite" may also be invoked by a shell script and when given an argument -(a program name) will automatically cause the BASIC program to be -executed. In that case the BASIC program should be terminated with -a "bye" statement. -The inclusion of the '-' option, along with a BASIC program name will -cause "bite" to start and then "load" the BASIC program -.I without -running it. -.PP -.I Bite -is designed so that BASIC language programs -of the original Dartmouth syntax will be loadable -with little or no incompatibility and extra features that do not -follow common standards will be -.I additions -to, rather than -.I exceptions -to the syntax rules of BASIC. - -The commands and functions in this interpreter -are implemented by entries into -tables and the procedure for implementing new -commands will be documented as another virtue of the -configuration of this interpreter. -.PP -.I Bite -was implemented -with -.I instrument control -and -.I data collection -in mind -for the purpose of controlling an -.I Automated Test System (ATS). -These functions will be available as an extended instruction set. -Another version of "bite" is being configured for this purpose -which will reside (initially) on an PDP-11/03 (subsequently on -a PDP-11/23). -.PP -A standard string capability is implemented on the BASIC interpreter -BITE. -.TP 4 -.I Conventions -.TP 8 -.I THIS DOCUMENT -All things enclosed in [] are optional. -.TP 8 -.I EDITING -Editing is accomplished as it is in any BASIC language intepreter -in that line-numbers are entered by typing a line-number followed -by the statement and removed or deleted by merely typing the line-number. -Listing is accomplished with the "list" command (explained under "COMMANDS"). -In addition to the above, it is possible to list single lines by typing -the return-key in which case the program is listed one line-at-a-time, -starting at the first. When the last one is reached, the sequence starts -at the first line again. -At any time it is also possible to type the '-' symbol to "backup" a line- -at-a-time. -Other editing facilities are "s", "delete", and "reseq" also explained -under "COMMANDS". -.TP 8 -.I EXPR -Any algebraic expression which could be a constant, variable, math -function or a combination of same, seperated by arithmetic operators -as in: a+b*3.14*(4.4+c2*sin(b+s))+a(2,2) -See "variables" and "math functions" below. -.TP 8 -.I OPERATORS -+,-,*,/ or ^ for addition, subtraction, multiplication, division or -exponentiation in order of lowest to highest precidence. + and - have -the same precidence and * and / have the same precidence. -.TP -.I RELATIONALS -<, >, =, <=, >=, <> for less than, greater than, equality, less or equal, -greater than or equal and not equal. -.TP 8 -.I SOURCE PATH -When reference is made to a "bite" source file (i.e. the "old" and "load" -command), at least two directories are searched, the first being the current -directory and then /usr/lib/bites which is a "pool" where shared programs -should be stored. The /usr/lib/bites directory is analogous to the -/usr/bin directory in UNIX. -The user may specify extra paths to be searched by defining them in -BITEPATH and then exporting BITEPATH like: -.br -BITEPATH=:$HOME/BASIC:/usr/local/lib/: -.br -which adds the two pathnames between the ':' delimiters to the -other paths. In this way, one may have private BITE programs -and execute them from any directory. -.TP 8 -.I SOURCE PROGRAM NAME -The source program name is twelve or less characters suffixed by a .b . -.TP 8 -.I STATEMENT -A basic statement consists of a line number (integer value between 1 and -32767) followed by a command, space and operand which follows the -syntax governed by the command as in: 100 print "hello world" -A statement can be typed without a line number in which case it will -execute immediately. This is true for all commands, but doesn't make -sense for all commands such as "for". Immediate execution is handy -for diagnostic purposes such as: print a, to find out what the value -of a. -.TP 8 -.I VARIABLES -All variable names are either a lower case alpha character (a-z) -or a lower-case alpha character followed by an integer (0-9). -Array have the same name convention as regular variables and take -the form varname(D1,D2,D3....D10) where D1-D10 are the dimension -attributes of the array and can take the form of any legal expression -(including another array) as in a(b(2,2),x). -.TP 8 -.I STRING VARIABLE -A string variable is any single lower case alpha character (a-z) -followed by a '$' or any single alpha character followed by a single digit -(1-9) then followed by a '$' like a$ or z9$. -.TP 8 -.I STRING ARRAY VARIABLE -A string array variable has the same naming convention as a regular string -variable and contains one or two "subscripts" enclosed in parenthesis -as in: -.br - x1$(x,y) - -Like other array variables in BASIC string arrays must be declared -in a dimension statement prior to their use: e.g. dim a$(20) or -d$(100,3). -.TP 8 -.I STRING EXPRESSION -A string expression is any combination of string variables and -literals added together by a '+' operator which indicates concatenation. -An example of an assignment statement for string variables is: - - b$="Joan"+a1$+c2$+"John"+x$(20) -.SH COMMANDS -.TP 8 -.I bye or q -Exit -the interpreter. -.TP 8 -.I com[mon] -Preserve -variables for subsequent "run". Issue of the run command -otherwise de-allocates all variables. -.TP 8 -.I con \fR[line#] -Continue normal execution from single step mode. See "sing" command. -.TP 8 -.I data \fR(expr),(expr),(expr),.......... -The data statement is a string of defined constants or expressions referred -to by the "read" statement. Unlike most BASIC interpreters, the data is -stored only in the form of text strings which allows the read statement to -evaluate expressions as well as constants. -.TP 8 -.I del[ete] \fRlownum [, highnum] -Delete line-number specified if only lownum given. Delete all lines -between lownum and highnum if both are specified. -See the "undo" command. -.TP 8 -.I dim \fRvariable(expr1,expr2,....,expr10) -Allocate space and define the dimensional characteristics of -subscripted variable. -.TP 8 -.I end -Define logical end of program. Cause termination or current "run". -.TP 8 -.I expunge -Force all variable space, including subscripted variables to be freed. -Or de-allocate used varriable space. -.TP 8 -.I f -Identify current file. Typing "f" causes the currently referenced -file (if any) to be displayed. -.TP 8 -.I for - next -Cause code enclosed by this combination to be executed under the -conditions specified in the -.I for -statement as in: for variable = expr1 to expr2 [step expr]. -.TP 8 -.I gosub \fRline# -Goto subroutine, resume from following statement after "return" encountered. -.TP 8 -.I goto \fRline# -Force execution to continue starting at the line# specified. -.TP 8 -.I if \fR(expr1) relational (expr2) \fIthen \fRline# -Redirect program flow to line# if expr1 is related to expr2 by the -specified relational. -String expressions are also compared by the "if" statement as in: -.br -if a$ < "jim" goto 100 -.br -The results of the comparison are based on alphabetical order -of the two objects being compared. -The "then" in the "if" statement can be optionally replaced with "goto" -"go to" or "gosub". The "if" statement can also take the form: -.br -.I if \fR(expr) relatioanl (expr) \fIthen \fRvar = (expr) -.TP 8 -.I if \fRmore _fd \fI then \fRline# -Direct program flow to line# if there are more lines to be read -from the file associated with fd where fd is the file designator -between 1 and 4 inclusive. This type if statement is used to detect -EOF (End Of File) condition. -.br -Example: 100 if more _2 then 200 -.br -Note that "gosub" can be used in place of "then" in which case -the subroutine would be one for reading another line. -.TP 8 -.I input \fR[_fildes]var1[,var2,var3,....] -Prompt for input and assign inputed value to variable. -If 's' is typed program is halted. -String variables may be specified in the "input" statement. The -variables can be mixed like: -.br -input a$,a,b$(2,2) -.br -which will interpret the first input as a string, require the second -input to be numerical and interpret the third as a string input. -.TP 8 -.I [let] \fRvariable = expr -Assign the value of expr to variable. -The let is optional. -The let or assignment statement also allows the assignment of -string expressions to string variables like: -.br -b$="Joan"+a1$+c2$+"John"+x$(20) -.TP 8 -.I l[ist] \fR[lownum [, highnum]] -List the text in working storage. If lownum is given then only that number -is listed, if lownum and highnum are specified, then a listing is -displayed between the given statement numbers. -.TP 8 -.I load \fR[prog-name] -Same as the "old" command, except working storage is not cleared. -.TP 8 -.I ls \foptions -List directory. Same as UNIX "ls" command. -.TP 8 -.I mov \fRstartnum,endnum,newnum [,increm] -The mov command causes the lines beginning with -.I startnum -and ending with -.I endnum -to be moved (ie. resequenced) to the line beginning with -.I newnum -and incremented by -.I increm \fR. -The default value for -.I increm -is 10. -All references to the moved lines are updated. The user is responsible to -see that line numbers associated with moved lines do not conflict with -existing lines which will cause loss of program text. -.I mov -is similar to -.I reseq -(see below) except that only the specified lines are resequenced. -.TP 8 -.I n -List the next 23 lines. Useful for paging through a listing on a CRT. -.TP 8 -.I new -Clear program working storage for new program to be typed. -.TP 8 -.I old \fR[prog-name] -Clear user space and load program. If old is typed with no argument -it will prompt the user for a program name if not defined or load -the last defined program name. -.TP 8 -.I on \fR(expr) \fIgoto \fRline#,line#,....... -Is a selective goto with multiple line number targets. The target -branched to depends on the value of expr which is truncated. -Control is passed to the first line# specified after goto if the -value of the expression is 1. Control passes to the second line# -if the value is 2, the third if 3 and so on. -.TP 8 -.I on \fR(expr) \fIgosub \fRline#,line#,....... -Same action as on-goto, except action taken is that of "gosub". -.TP 8 -.I pause -Causes execution to be suspended until a "newline" or "return" is typed. -This is useful for programs which need to be continuously in "run", but -need to allow a time for user action i.e. unit insertion. -.TP 8 -.I pr[int] \fR[_fildes](expr's,quoted strings or tab operators) -The print statment is a limited format display statement in which -expressions are evaluated and displayed along with quoted literals. -The tab(expr) operator causes the print head to move to the absolute -column position computed by expr provided the current head position -is less. The specifiers must be seperated by onee or more commas -or semicolons. -String expressions are also expanded by the print statement. -.TP 8 -.I printf \fR[_fildes]"format string"[,expr1,expr2,.....,expr10] -This is an interpretive implementation of the UNIX 'C' library -routine, printf. It is, however restricted to only the floating -point format control specifiers 'f' and 'g'. Use of any of the -other specifiers such as 'o', 'd' or 's' will give erroneous results. -Print controls such as \\b (backspace), \\n (newline), \\r (return) -or \\t can also be used. The printf format was chosen in lieu -of the usual "print using" command because it was felt that -printf is not only a 'C' language standard but easier to use -than "print using". -.br -Usage Example: -.br -100 printf "Variable a=%2.2f\\tVariable b=%g.\\n",a,b -.TP 8 -.I randomize -Causes "rnd" statement to start at an "unpredictable" value. -.TP 8 -.I read \fRvar1,var2,var3,.............. -The "read" statement causes data to be assigned to each variable in the -list from the constants or expressions contained in "data" statements. The -reading starts where-ever the data pointer is currently at. The data pointer -points to the last data field accessed, if a read was done, the first -data field in the first data statment if the "restore" statment is issued -or the program is re-run. -The "read" statement will also assign values to string variables or -expressions in the "data" statement. -.TP 8 -.I rem -The remark statement causes no operation in -.I bite -but may be followed by any string of characters for the purpose of commenting -a program. Unlike compiler languages, remarks do take up program buffer space, -however, they are of paramount importance in making a program readable by -human beings and are therefore strongly recommended. -.TP 8 -.I reseq \fR[startnum [, increm]] -The resequence command causes the statement numbers and all references -to them (such as if's goto's, gosub's, etc) to be resequenced starting -at -.I startnum -and incremented by -.I increm. -If startnum and/or increm are omitted, the default values are 10 and -10 respectively. -.TP 8 -.I restore -Restores the data pointer to the first field of the first "data" statment. -.TP 8 -.I return -Return from subroutine called by "gosub" statement. -.TP 8 -.I rm \ffilename(s) -Remove file(s). Same as UNIX "rm" command. -.TP 8 -.I run \fR[prog-name] -Run basic program specified. If no argument is given, "run" attempts to -execute whatever is currently in working storage. -.TP 8 -.I s \fRline#/old-string/new-string[/] -Substitute in line line# the new-string for the old-string. The last delimiter -is optional, unless new-string is null in which case it is desired that -old-string merely be removed. -See the "undo" command. -.TP 8 -.I sing \fR[line#] -Enter the single step mode starting at the line# specified or at -the first line of the program if no line# is specified. -In single step mode an instruction is executed and then the prompt '^' -is displayed. -At this time the user may enter -any command (i.e. print) or hit the "return" key to execute the next -instruction. -See the "con" instruction. -.TP 8 -.I size -Causes amount of storage used and remaining or free space in -decimal number of bytes. -.TP 8 -.I stop -Stop execution of program. -.TP 8 -.I save \fR[prog-name] -Save the contents of working storage in file-name specified by progname. -If no progname is given last referenced file-name is used. If no file -name was referenced, the user is prompted for a name. -.TP 8 -.I undo -Undo last "s" command or -.I single line deletion. -.TP 8 -.I ! (any shell command string) -Unix shell command invocation allows system commands to be -executed from the interpreter. -Not available in restricted version. -.SH FILE COMMANDS -The file commands: append, openi, and openo are followed by one or more -file-names seperated by commas, each file-name being no more that -14 characters long. Files are assigned to designators (integer values -between 1 and 8 inclusive) in the order that they are open. -All commands -such as "print" and "input" which refer to a file use the designator -number preceded by a '_' character to refer to that file -as in: 100 print _1"hello world" or 100 input _3a(x,y) . -.TP 8 -.I append \fRfile1[,file2,.....,file8] -If file exists open for output cause new data to be appended. If file -does not exist, the named file is created. -.TP 8 -.I openi \fRfile1[,file2,.....,file8] -Open file for input. File must exist. -.TP 8 -.I openo \fRfile1[,file2,.....,file8] -Create named file(s) and open for output. If named files exist, the old -data is destroyed. -.TP 8 -.I seek \fR_fildes, offset, mode -Seek to a line whose position in the file is offset. If mode = 0 the -offset is from the beginning, if mode = 1 then the offset is relative -to the current file pointer. -.br -Usage Example: 101 seek _1, 33, 0 -.br -would cause the file pointer to the 33rd line. -.TP 8 -.I rewind \fR_fildes -Rewind the file specified by fildes to the beginning (first line). -This is effectively the same as seek _fildes, 0, 0. -.TP 8 -.I close \fR_fildes -Close file associated with file designator. -.TP 8 -.I closeall -Close all files input and output. -.SH MATH FUNCTIONS -.TP 8 -.I abs\fR(expr) -Absolute value. -.TP 8 -.I atn\fR(expr) -Arc-tangent. -.TP 8 -.I cos\fR(expr) -Cosine. -.TP 8 -.I exp\fR(expr) -Natural exponential. -.TP 8 -.I fact\fR(expr) -Factorial. (Truncates fractions i.e. fact(3.22) interpreted as fact(3)) -.TP 8 -.I int\fR(expr) -Integerize or truncate fractional part of result of expr. -.TP 8 -.I log\fR(expr) -Natural log. -.TP 8 -.I rnd\fR(expr) -Return random number between 0 and evaluated expr. -.TP 8 -.I sin\fR(expr) -Sine. -.TP 8 -.I sqr\fR(expr) -Square root. -.SH STRING FUNCTIONS -.TP 8 -.I asc(string) -Returns ASCII value of first character in string. -.TP 8 -.I chr$(expr) -Return the character corresponding to the value of expr where expr -is a numerical expression. If the value of the expression exceeds -octal 177 the least significant 7 bits are used. -.TP 8 -.I ext$(string,pos,len) -The ext$ "extract" string function returns a substring of the -string expression string starting at position "pos" having length "len". -If attempt is made to extract a string beyond the end of "string" the result -will be truncated and an error message will be displayed. -.TP -.I len(string) -Return the length of the string expression "string". -.TP -.I left$(string,n) -Return the leftmost n characters of the string. If the string length is -less than n, then the string itself is returned. -.TP -.I loc$(string) -Converts all upper case alphabetic characters in the string to lower case. -.br -EX: a$=loc$("ABCdef123#$^&*") -.br -returns abcdef123#$^&* to a$ -.TP -.I mid$(string,pos,len) -Does exactly same as ext$. Included because it is part of another -popular dialect of BASIC. -.TP -.I right$(string,n) -Return rightmost n characters of string. If string length is less than -n the string itself is returned. -.TP -.I str$(expr) -Returns value of expr (numerical expression) as an ASCII string. -.TP -.I string$(n,string) -Returns n occurrences of the first character in string. -.TP -.I upc$(string) -Converts all lower case alphabetic characters in the string to upper case. -.TP -.I val(string) -Return numerical value represented by ASCII number. -.br -Ex: a=val("100.2") -.br -assigns the value 100.2 to variable a. This function is good for -converting ASCII tabulations of numbers. ext$ or mid$ can be used -to select the column. -.SH ATS INSTRUMENT COMMANDS -.TP 8 -.I buspr \fR'busadr(text and expressions) -Buspr is merely an extension of the print statement which allows -the print string which would otherwise be displayed on the tty -to be sent via the IBV-11 bus to the bus address specified by "busadr". -The ' preceding busadr distinguishes the following character from anything -other than a single character to be interpreted as an address. -.br -Usage Example: 100 buspr '6"F2R";r -.TP 8 -.I cmd "string" -Send character string over IBV-11 command lines. -.TP 8 -.I delay num -Causes a delay of num 60ths of a second where num is an integer. -.br -Usage Example: 100 delay 120 (delay 2 minutes or 120/60ths sec) -.TP 8 -.I dvminit -Initialize Digital Voltmeter. -.TP 8 -.I dvms \fRfunction, range -Digital voltmeter set command, where: function is "ac", "dc" or "ohms" -and range is .1, 1, 10, 100, 1k, 10k or "aut". i.e. -.br -Usage Example: 100 dvms dc,1k -.TP 8 -.I hprintf \fR"format text"[,expr1,expr2,...,expr10] -Formatted print to strip printer. Syntax rules are the same as -. I printf. -Strip printer is 20 columns wide, anything past the 20th column is -truncated. -.TP 8 -.I lodset \fRlodnum,mode,value -Set load. Where lodnum an integer describing which load referred to, -mode is the manner in which the load is set and value is an expression -describing the current or resistance the load was set to depending on the -mode. Mode is a single character 'r', 'R', 'i' or 'I' where 'r' is resistance -mode (value in ohms) and 'i' is current mode (value in amperes). Small -letter causes a hunt for the value and capital causes set on first try. -.TP 8 -.I relay \fRfunction, relnum1[, relnum2, relnum3,... ] -Set multiprogrammer relays. Function is m (make), b (break) or c (clear). -Function is followed by all relay numbers to be acted upon which may -be expressions or variables. The clear function when not followed by -anything, simply means open all relays. When followed by relay numbers, -clear means all relays are open EXCEPT the ones specified. -.br -Usage Example: 100 relay m,10,20,21,a,b,rnd(10) -.TP 8 -.I ps \fRpsno, voltage, current limit, overvoltage -Set power supply parameters. Psno is an integer representing the -power supply number describing which power supply is to be used, -voltage, current limit and overvoltage are self explanatory. Each -one of the parameters may be a legal algebraic expression so that -they may be controlled by the program. -.br -Usage Example: 100 dvms 1,10,1,11 or 100 dvms n,v1,i1,v1+1 -.SH INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS -.TP 8 -.I btn\fR(expr) -Button function returns non-zero if control button number (expr) is -depressed. -.TP 8 -.I dvmr() -Return digital voltmeter reading. -.TP 8 -.I error() -Return 1 if last instrument command caused instrument error, otherwise -return 0. - -.SH AUTHORS -Richard B. Drake & James P. Hawkins -.SH FILES -source.b -.br -/usr/lib/bites/ -.br -.SH "SEE ALSO" -sh(1),bstring(1) -BASIC Programming and Applications, C. Joseph Sass 1972 -.br -.br -BITE Users Guide, J.P.Hawkins, Bell Labs, TM-79-2425-4 -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Diagnostic error messages are issued by the interpreter -which indicate syntax errors , system failure, illegal commands or expressions,etc. -The -.I LSI-11/03 -Version of -.I bite -does not issue explicit error messages, but displays an error number -in which the meanings are listed below. This is done to regain approx. -2Kb memory in an already tight LSI-11/03 memory. -.nf -.I Standard Error Messages - - NUMBER MESSAGE TEXT - -------------------- - 0 REFERS TO A NON EXISTING LINE NUMBER - 1 UNRECOGNIZABLE OPERATION - 2 CANNOT OPEN FILE - 3 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME - 4 BAD FILENAME - 5 WORKING STORAGE AREA EMPTY - 6 RUNS NESTED TOO DEEPLY - 7 UNASSIGNED VARIABLE - 8 EXPRESSION SYNTAX - 9 BAD KEYWORD IN STATEMENT - 10 IMPROPER OR NO RELATIONAL OPERATOR - 11 UNBALANCED QUOTES - 12 FILE EDITING NOT PERMITTED IN SINGLE STEP MODE - 13 MISSING OR ILLEGAL DELIMITER - 14 GOSUB WITH NO RETURN - 15 IS FATAL - 16 UNBALANCED PARENTHESIS - 17 UNKNOWN MATH FUNCTION - 18 NEXT WITH NO OR WRONG FOR IN PROGRESS - 19 CANNOT PROCESS IMAGINARY NUMBER - 20 WHAT ? - 21 BAD DIMENSION SYNTAX - 22 TOO MANY DIMENSIONS - 23 REDUNDANT DIM STATEMENT - 24 NOT ENOUGH WORKING STORAGE SPACE - 25 VARIABLE NOT DIMENSIONED - 26 WRONG NUM OF DIMS - 27 ONE OR MORE DIMS LARGER THAN ASSIGNED - 28 NEG. OR ZERO DIMENSION ILLEGAL - 29 DIVIDE BY ZERO - 30 BAD TAB SPEC. IN PRINT - 31 SYS CALL FAILED - 32 BAD FILE DECLARE SYNTAX - 33 OUT OF DATA - 34 FILE-NAME TOO LONG - 35 FILE DES. USED UP - 36 FILE NOT OPEN FOR OUTPUT - 37 FILE NOT OPEN FOR INPUT - 38 EXPRESSION YIELDS AN IMPOSSIBLE VALUE - 39 PRINTF: ARG COUNT MISMATCH - 40 PRINTF: MORE THAN 10 ARGS - 41 LINE TOO LONG FOR STRIP PRINTER - 42 MOV REQUIRES 3 LINE #'s SPACING IS OPTIONAL -.I String error messages - 49 STRING VARIABLE IN NUMERICAL EXPR. - 50 NON-STRING IN STRING ASSIGNMENT - 51 NUMERIC IN STRING EXPRESSION - 52 INVALID STRING OPERATOR - 53 CANNOT COMPARE STRING WITH NUM. TYPES - 54 UNKNOWN STRING FUNCTION - 55 OUT OF STRING RANGE - -.I Test Set and Instrument Error Messages - - 100 MISSING ' DELIMITER BEFORE BUS ADDR - 101 PS: VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE - 102 PS: CURRENT OUT OF RANGE - 103 PS: OVERVOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE - 104 RELAY ERR - 105 RELAY: INVALID FUNC. - 106 RELAY: INVALID NUMBER - 107 DVM: INVALID MODE - 108 DVM: INVALID RANGE - 109 LODSET: IMPROPER NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS - 110 LODSET: IMPROPER MODE - 111 LODSET: UNABLE TO SET LOAD -.fi -.SH BUGS - There are more or less common features not yet available such as -.I string variables, multiple statment lines, matrix statements -and the -.I def -statement. -Array variables do not accept reference to 0th elements. -Bugs will be found as local users write and execute programs and report -their problems. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bitship.1 b/static/v10/man1/bitship.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8afd9dcd..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bitship.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH BITSHIP 1 " " -.SH NAME -bitship \- convert file to or from visible representation -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bitship -[ -.B \-a -| -\-b -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bitship \-a -pipes an arbitrary file into a visible ASCII-95 representation. -.I Bitship \-b -performs the inverse transformation. If you are sending a file to -someone for the first time, you should probably include a copy of -the source code. -.SH FILES -/usr/src/cmd/bitship.c -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -"Usage:..." in case of an error in the command line. -.SH BUGS -There is no error correction. Illegal characters in a "visible" file -produce garbage. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 b/static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 41fe07a6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -.TH BMD08V I -.UC -.SH NAME -bmd08v \- Analysis of Variance -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bmd08v -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bmd08v -performs analysis of variance for any hierarchical -design with equal cell sizes. -This includes the nested, partially nested and partially crossed, -and fully crossed designs. -Separate analyses may be performed on several dependent -variables simultaneously. -.I Bmd08v -takes its input from the standard input and writes its results on -the standard output. -All bmd control cards must have the identifying field in -upper case (eg. PROBLM, INDEX, FINISH, etc.). -One important departure from previous -versions concerns the variable format card \- -it is no longer necessary! If you specify 0 for -the number of variable format cards, the data will -be assumed to be in "free format" \- items -separated by blanks or commas. -.SH EXAMPLES -In the first example, -.I data -contains the bmd control cards and the -input data. -Output is directed to the standard output. -.sp -bmd08v output -.SH FILES -/tmp/1????? temporary file -.br -/tmp/2????? temporary file -.SH "SEE ALSO" -BMD User's Guide, /usr/doc/bmd08v -.SH BUGS -Temporary files are not always scratched. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bprint.1 b/static/v10/man1/bprint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index aaefc641..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bprint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -.TH BPRINT 1 "local \- 9/24/91" -.SH NAME -bprint \- expression profiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bprint -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I bprint -produces on the standard output a listing of the programs compiled by -.I lcc -with the -.B \-b -option. -Executing an -.B a.out -so compiled appends profiling data to -.BR prof.out . -The first token of each expression in the listing is preceded -by the number of times it was executed -enclosed in angle brackets as determined from the data in -.BR prof.out . -.I bprint -interprets the following options. -.TP -.B \-c -Compress the -.B prof.out -file, which otherwise grows with every execution of -.BR a.out . -.TP -.B \-b -Print an annotated listing as described above. -.TP -.B \-n -Include line numbers in the listing. -.TP -.B \-f -Print only the number of invocations of each function. -A second -.B \-f -summarizes call sites instead of callers. -.TP -.SM -.BI \-I \*Sdir -specifies additional directories in which to seek -files given in -.B prof.out -that do not begin with `/'. -.PP -If any file names are given, only the requested data for those files are printed -in the order presented. -If no options are given, -.B \-b -is assumed. -.SH FILES -.PP -.ta \w'/usr/lib/bbexit.oXX'u -prof.out profiling data -.br -/usr/lib/bbexit.o creates -.B prof.out -when -.B a.out -exits -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR lcc (1), -.IR prof (1) -.SH BUGS -Macros and comments can confuse -.I bprint -because it uses post-expansion source coordinates -to annotate pre-expansion source files. -If -.I bprint -sees that it's about to print a statement count -.I inside -a number or identifier, it moves the count to just -.I before -the token. -.PP -Can't cope with an ill-formed -.BR prof.out . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/btoa.1 b/static/v10/man1/btoa.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fb20d204..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/btoa.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -.TH BTOA 1 local -.SH NAME -btoa, atob, tarmail, untarmail \- encode/decode binary to printable ASCII -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B btoa -.br -.B atob -.br -.B tarmail -who subject files ... -.br -.B untarmail -[ file ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Btoa -is a filter that reads anything from the standard input, and encodes it into -printable ASCII on the standard output. It also attaches a header and checksum -information used by the reverse filter -.I atob -to find the start of the data and to check integrity. -.PP -.I Atob -reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and -trailing lines added by mailers, and recreates a copy of the original file -on the standard output. -.I Atob -gives NO output (and exits with an error message) if its input is garbage or -the checksums do not check. -.PP -.I Tarmail -is a shell script that tar's up all the given files, pipes them -through -.IR compress "," -.IR btoa "," -and mails them to the given person with the given subject phrase. For -example: -.PP -.in 1i -tarmail ralph "here it is ralph" foo.c a.out -.in -1i -.PP -Will package up files "foo.c" and "a.out" and mail them to "ralph" using -subject "here it is ralph". Notice the quotes on the subject. They are -necessary to make it one argument to the shell. -.PP -.I Tarmail -with no args will print a short message reminding you what the required args -are. When the mail is received at the other end, that person should use -mail to save the message in some temporary file name (say "xx"). -Then saying "untarmail xx" -will decode the message and untar it. -.I Untarmail -can also be used as a filter. By using -.IR tarmail "," -binary files and -entire directory structures can be easily transmitted between machines. -Naturally, you should understand what tar itself does before you use -.IR tarmail "." -.PP -Other uses: -.PP -compress < secrets | crypt | btoa | mail ralph -.PP -will mail the encrypted contents of the file "secrets" to ralph. If ralph -knows the encryption key, he can decode it by saving the mail (say in "xx"), -and then running: -.PP -atob < xx | crypt | uncompress -.PP -(crypt requests the key from the terminal, -and the "secrets" come out on the terminal). -.SH AUTHOR -Paul Rutter (modified by Joe Orost) -.SH FEATURES -.I Btoa -uses a compact base-85 encoding so that -4 bytes are encoded into 5 characters (file is expanded by 25%). -As a special case, 32-bit zero is encoded as one character. This encoding -produces less output than -.IR uuencode "(1)." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -compress(1), crypt(1), uuencode(1), mail(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 b/static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 deleted file mode 100644 index dd7ce7de..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,214 +0,0 @@ -.ds dF /usr/lib/font -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH BUILDTABLES 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B buildtables -\- build -.B troff -tables on a PostScript printer -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBbuildtables\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" "name \(el" [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B buildtables -builds font width tables or the typesetter description -file on a PostScript printer. -No arguments means build a default set of tables; -usually a superset of the LaserWriter Plus collection. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-b speed -Transmit data over -.I line -at baud rate -.I speed. -Recognized baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. -The default -.I speed -is 9600 baud. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-l line -Build the tables on the PostScript printer attached to -.I line. -There is no default. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-t name -Use -.I name -as the template for fonts not in the default set. -Choose -.MW R -for proportionally spaced fonts and -.MW CW -for fixed width fonts. -Try -.MW ZD -(ZapfDingbats) if the font has a non-standard -character set. -The default is -.MR R . -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -into each PostScript table program; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-H hostdir -Use -.I hostdir -as the host-resident font directory. -A file in -.I hostdir -that matches the name of the -.B troff -font is assumed to be a host-resident font program and is included -in the PostScript width table program. -There is no default. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-S file -Use -.I file -as the shell library file. -Overrides the choice made with the -.OP \-T -option. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-T name -Set the target device to -.I name. -.br -Device -.I name -means -.ft 2 -.MI \*(dF/dev name /shell.lib -.ft 1 -is the shell library file. -There is no default. -.PP -If -.OP \-l -is omitted output files are the PostScript programs that -build the tables, rather than the tables themselves. -One of -.OP \-T -or -.OP \-S -is required. -If both are given -.OP \-S -wins. -Although -.OP \-H -is the preferred mechanism for including host-resident font files, -.OP \-C -makes sense when only one width table is built. -.PP -The shell library file defines a collection of functions used to -build -.BR troff (1) -tables. -The default set of tables is the list of names returned by the -.MW AllTables -function. -Changes to the default list can be made by updating the -.MW BuiltinTables -function. -.PP -Each -.B buildtables -argument -must be a default table name, or a pair of names enclosed in quotes. -If the argument is a pair, the first name is the -.B troff -font and the second is the full PostScript font name. -Tables are created in the current directory. -Each is assigned a name that matches the -.B troff -table name. -.PP -The PostScript table programs created by -.BR trofftable (1) -are written to files that have -.MW .ps -appended to the -.B troff -table name. -The -.MW .ps -file is deleted after the table is built. -Options not listed above are passed to -.B trofftable. -The PostScript table programs return data to the host computer using -PostScript's -.MW print -operator. -See -.BR hardcopy (1) -if you do not have access to the printer's serial port. -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -Build the default collection of devpost tables on the printer -connected to -.MW /dev/tty00 -(no font name arguments): -.EX -buildtables -l/dev/tty00 -Tpost -.EE -To do the same and to restrict the tables that are built, -Add -.B troff -font names (or -.MR DESC ) -to restrict the tables built on the printer connected to -.MR /dev/tty00 : -.EX -buildtables -l/dev/tty00 -Tpost R I B BI DESC S -.EE -Enclose the -.B troff -and PostScript font names in quotes to -build the width table for a font not in the default set -(also on the printer connected to -.MR /dev/tty00 ): -.EX -buildtables -l/dev/tty00 -TLatin1 "GL Garamond-Light" -.EE -A font must be available on the printer when the table is built. -Use -.OP \-H -or -.OP \-C -to include host-resident fonts. -.SH WARNINGS -.PP -A width table will not build properly if the printer cannot access -the PostScript font. -.PP -The -.OP \-TLatin1 -option only works on PostScript printers that support the full -.SM ISO -Latin-1 character set. -The error message from older printers will likely indicate a missing -.MW ISOLatin1Encoding -array. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dF/dev*/shell.lib -.br -.MW \*(dQ/dpost.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/trofftable.ps -.br -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR hardcopy (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR troff (1), -.BR trofftable (1), -.BR font (5) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bundle.1 b/static/v10/man1/bundle.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fcbd5b67..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/bundle.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -.TH BUNDLE 1 -.CT 1 comm_users -.SH NAME -bundle \- collect files for distribution -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bundle -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Bundle -writes on its standard output a shell script for -.IR sh (1) -that, when executed, -will recreate the original -.IR files . -Its main use is for distributing small numbers of text files by -.IR mail (1). -.PP -Although less refined than standard archives from -.IR ar (1), -.IR cpio (1), -or -.IR tar (1), -a -.IR bundle -file -is self-documenting and complete; little preparation is required on -the receiving machine. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -bundle makefile *.[ch] | mail elsewhere!mark -Send a makefile to Mark together with related -.L .c -and -.L .h -files. -Upon receiving the mail, Mark may save the file sans postmark, -say in -.BR gift/horse , -then do -.TP -.L -cd gift; sh horse; make -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR ar (1), -.IR cpio (1), -.IR tar (1), -.IR mail (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Bundle -will not create directories and is unsatisfactory for non-ASCII files. -.br -Beware of gift horses. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 b/static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b3d05fa0..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -.TH BYTEYEARS 1 -.SH NAME -byteyears \- time-space product for file residency -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B byteyears -[ -.B \-a -] -[ -.I file -] -. . . -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Byteyears -reports the product of the age of each -.I file -in years -and the length in bytes. -Files for which this number is large -may be reasonable candidates for deletion. -If the file is a directory, -.I byteyears -reports (recursively) on everything in that -directory. -If no arguments are given, the current directory is assumed. -If the -.B \-a -option is given, the time since last access -is used instead of the time since last modification. -.PP -Each line of output contains -the number of byte years (rounded to the nearest integer), -the size of the file in bytes, the time last -modified, and the name of the file. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -byteyears | sort \-r | sed 10q -List the ten leading candidates in the current directory. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/c++.1 b/static/v10/man1/c++.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e41cfe58..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/c++.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -.TH C++ 1 -.CT 1 prog_c -.SH NAME -CC, cfront \- C++ compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B CC -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B cfront -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I CC -compiles and links C++ programs in the manner of -.IR cc (1). -It handles source files with names ending in -.LR .c , -assembler files in -.LR .s , -and object files in -.LR .o . -Various passes of the compiler can be substituted via -environment variables listed under -.SM `FILES'. -Options include those of -.IR cc (1) -except -.BR -B -and -.BR -t , -those of -.IR ld (1), -those of -.I cfront, -and in addition -.TP -.BR -F -Run only the macro preprocessor -.IR cpp (8) -and -.I cfront -on the named -.B .c -files, and send the result to the -standard output. -.TP -.BI -. suffix -Instead of the standard output, place -.B -E -and -.B -F -output in files whose name is that of the source with -.BI . suffix -substituted for -.LR .c . -.PP -.I Cfront -reads C++ code (without preprocessing) from the standard input -and writes equivalent C code on the standard output. -The options are -.TP -.B +d -Don't expand inline functions. -.TP -.BI +x file -Take size and alignment information from -.I file -for cross compiling. -.TP -.B +e0 -.PD0 -.TP -.B +e1 -Make external declarations -.RB (+e0) -or definitions -.BR (+e1) -for virtual function tables. -These tables may appear as static data in -every compilation; -the options are intended to save redundant space. -.PD -.TP -.B +a0 -Produce classic C output (default). -.TP -.B +a1 -Produce -.SM ANSI -C output. -If this option is used with -.I CC, -then an -.SM ANSI -C compiler such as -.I lcc -must be specified in environment variable -.BR ccC . -.TP -.BI +f name -Use -.I name -to identify the source file in diagnostics. -.TP -.B +L -Produce -.SM ANSI -standard -.B #line -directives instead of -.BI # number. -.SH FILES -.TF cfrontC=/usr/bin/cfront -.TP -.B cppC=/lib/cpp -C preprocessor -.TP -.B cfrontC=/usr/bin/cfront -C++ translator -.TP -.B ccC=/bin/cc -C compiler -.TP -.B munchC=/usr/lib/munch -linker postprocessor for static initialization -.TP -.F /usr/lib/libC.a -C++ library -.TP -.F /usr/include/CC -standard directory for C++ -.L #include -files -.TP -Other files as in \fIcc\fR -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR cc (1), -.IR ld (1) -.br -B. Stroustrup, -.I The C++ Programming Language, -Addison-Wesley, 1986 -.br -B. Stroustrup, -.I C++ Reference Manual, -AT&T Bell Laboratories, May 1989 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 b/static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8caf170e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -. \"ident "@(#)ctrans:demangler/c++filt.1 1.1" -. \"This CC man page is generated by: troff -man c++filt.1 -. \"Copyright (c) 1988 AT&T -. \"All Rights Reserved -. \"THIS IS UNPUBLISHED PROPRIETARY SOURCE CODE OF AT&T -. \"The copyright notice above does not evidence any -. \"actual or intended publication of such source code. -.TH c++filt 1 -.UC 4 -.SH NAME -c++filt \- C++ name demangler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B c++filt -.RB [ -m ] -.RB [ -s ] -.RB [ -v ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I C++filt -copies standard input to standard output after decoding -tokens which look like C++ encoded symbols. -Any combination of the following options may be used: -.TP 15 -.B \-m -Produce a symbol map on standard output. -This map contains a list of the encoded names encountered and the -corresponding decoded names. -This output follows the filtered output. -.TP 15 -.B \-s -Produce a side-by-side decoding with each encoded symbol encountered -in the input stream replaced by the decoded name followed by the -original encoded name. -.TP 15 -.B \-v -Output a message giving information about the version of -.I c++filt -being used. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -CC(1), ld(1), nm(1). -.br -Bjarne Stroustrup, -.I The C++ Programming Language, -Addison-Wesley 1986. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/calendar.1 b/static/v10/man1/calendar.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a94e9bc8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/calendar.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,118 +0,0 @@ -.TH CALENDAR 1 -.CT 1 time_man -.SH NAME -calendar \- reminder service -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B calendar -[ -.B - -] -[ -.I n -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Calendar -consults calendar files -and prints out lines that contain today's date or -any date up through the -.IR n th -working day hence -.RI ( n =1 -by default). -Most American-style month-day dates such as -.BR "Aug. 19" ,\ -.BR "august 19" ,\ -.BR "8/19" , -etc., are recognized, but not -.LR 19/8 . -The symbol -.L * -denotes every month as in -.B * -19 or -.BR */19 . -A year may follow the day, as in -.BR "August 19 86" ,\ -.BR "8/19/86" , -or -.BR "Aug. 19, 1986" . -.PP -By default, the program consults the file -.F calendar -in directory -.B $HOME -(see -.IR sh (1)), -or in the current directory if a home directory is not known. -Other calendar files to be consulted may be specified by calendar -lines in one of the forms -.IP -.B #include -\f5\fIfile\^\f5 -.br -.B #include -\f5\fImachine\f5!\fIfile\^\f5\fR -.LP -where -.I file -is the name of some other calendar and -.I machine -is the name of a machine or service accessible via -.IR con (1). -.PP -When the optional -.L - -argument is present, -.I calendar -reminds all users of their calendar engagements by -.IR mail (1). -Normally this happens daily in the wee hours under control of -.IR cron (8). -Calendars not in home directories, or recipients not registered -as users, may be registered -for reminder service by placing lines of the form -.I calendarfile mailname -in file -.FR /usr/lib/calendar . -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -#include /usr/pub/btlcalendar -#include /n/coma/usr/pub/btlcalendar -#include mh/astro/coma.calendar!/usr/pub/btlcalendar -.EE -.ns -.IP -Ways to subscribe to a public calendar by -(1) users of -.LR mh/astro/coma , -(2) users elsewhere who have -.IR netfs (8) -access to -.BR coma , -and (3) users elsewhere without -.I netfs -access. -.SH FILES -.TF -.TP -.F calendar -.PD0 -.TP -.F /usr/lib/calendar? -.TP -.F /etc/passwd -.TP -.F /tmp/cal* -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR at (1) -.SH BUGS -.BR #include s -do not nest. -.br -The mail reminder service doesn't work when -it finds fewer than two calendars. -.br -Your calendar must be public information for you -to get reminder service. -.br -Holidays are what the program says they are. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/can.1 b/static/v10/man1/can.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1a070d4d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/can.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,238 +0,0 @@ -.TH CAN 1 -.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev -.SH NAME -can, bcan, dcan, tcan, xcan \- interface to Canon laser-printer spooler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B can -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B bcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B dcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B tcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B xcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -These commands print -.I files -(standard input by default) on Canon laser printers. -Four commands, all special cases of the generic -.I xcan, -handle particular kinds of data files: -.TP -.I can -ASCII text -.TP -.I bcan -bitmap images created by -.IR blitblt (9.1) -.TP -.I dcan -output from -.IR troff (1) -.TP -.I tcan -output for a Tektronix 4014 terminal, as produced by -.IR plot (1) -.PP -The destination printer is determined in the following ways, -listed in order of decreasing precedence. -.IP -option -.B -d -.I dest -.br -environment variable -.L CANDEST -.br -printer named in file -.F /etc/candest -.LP -Printers at the mother site are: -.RS -.TP -.B 3 -3rd floor, end of 9S corridor (seki) -.PD0 -.TP -.B 4 -4th floor, stair 8 (swift) -.TP -.B 8 -3rd floor, stair 8 (tukey) -.TP -.B 9 -4th floor, stair 9 (wild) -.TP -.B j -jones room (jones) -.TP -.B u -unix room (panther) -.TP -.BI / name -printer attached to machine with Datakit destination -.I name -.RE -.PD -.PP -Options: -.PP -.TP -.BI -d " dest" -Select the destination printer. -.TP -.BI -f " font" -Set the font (default -.LR CW.11 ) -for -.IR can ; -see -.IR font (7). -.TP -.B -L -(landscape) Rotate -.I bcan -pages 90 degrees. -.TP -.BI -l " n" -Set number of lines per page for -.I can -(default 66). -.TP -.BI -m " n" -Set -.I bcan -magnification -(default 2). -.TP -.B -n -Spool only, input has already been formatted by a remote -.IR xcan . -.TP -.BI -o " list" -Print only pages whose page numbers appear in -the comma-separated -.I list -of numbers and ranges. -A range -.IB n - m -means pages -.I n -through -.IR m ; -a range -.BI - b -means from the beginning to page -.IR n ; -a range -.IB n - -means from page -.I n -to the end. -.B -o -implies -.BR -r . -.TP -.B -r -print -pages in reverse order -(default for -.IR can " and " dcan ). -.TP -.B -sb -.RI "make " xcan " expect " bcan " input;" -.BR -sb " implies defaults of " -x176 " and " -y96 . -.TP -.B -sc -.RI "make " xcan " expect " can " input;" -.BR -sc " does not imply " -r . -.TP -.B -sd -.RI "make " xcan " expect " dcan " input;" -.BR -sd " does not imply " -r . -.TP -.B -st -.RI "make " xcan " expect " tcan " input." -.TP -.BI -t " n" -.I tcan -scale factor is -.RI ( n /100)/( n %100). -The default is 813, i.e., 13 tekpoints become 8 dots on the laser printer. -.TP -.BI -u " user" -set the name which appears on the banner page; -default is login name. -.TP -.BI -x " n" -set the horizontal -offset of the print image, measured in dots (default 48). -There are 240 dots to the inch. -.TP -.BI -y " n" -set the vertical -offset of the print image (default 0), -except in -.I tcan, -where this option specifies -.I n -extra tekpoints vertically. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/spool/jpd -.TP -.F /etc/candest -default destination -.PD0 -.TP -.F /usr/lib/font/devi10 -font directory -.TP -.F /usr/spool/jpd -spool directory -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR pr (1), -.IR lpr (1), -.IR blitblt (9.1), -.IR plot (1), -.IR font (7) -.SH BUGS -The `landscape' option is supported only by -.IR bcan ; -.BR -o " and " -r -are supported only by -.I can -and -.I dcan. -.br -There ought to be a way to determine the service class from the input data. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cat.1 b/static/v10/man1/cat.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f366ec7c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cat.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CAT (I)'1/15/73'CAT (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME cat -- concatenate and print -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS cat___ file918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION cat___ -reads each file in sequence -and writes it on the standard output. -Thus: -.sp -.ti +3 -cat___ file____ -.sp -is about the easiest way to print a file. -Also: -.sp -.ti +3 -cat___ file1_____ file2_____ >file3______ -.sp -is about the easiest way to concatenate -files. -.sp -If no input file is given cat___ reads from the standard -input file. -.sp -If the argument "-" is encountered, cat reads from -the standard input file. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO pr(I), cp(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS none; -if a file cannot be found it is ignored. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS cat x y >x and cat x y >y cause strange results. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/catsim.1 b/static/v10/man1/catsim.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a8dee1e3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/catsim.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -.th CATSIM I 11/1/73 -.sh NAME -catsim \*- phototypesetter simulator -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd catsim -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Catsim -will interpret its -standard input as codes for the phototypesetter (cat). -The output of -.it catsim -is output to the display (vt). -.s3 -About the only use of -.it catsim -is to save time and paper on the phototypesetter -by the following command: -.s3 - troff \*-t files | catsim -.sh FILES -/dev/vt0 -.sh "SEE ALSO" -troff(I), cat(IV), vt(IV) -.sh BUGS -Point sizes are not correct. -The vt character set is restricted to -one font of ASCII. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cb.1 b/static/v10/man1/cb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cdf3a803..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -.TH CB 1 -.CT 1 prog_c writing_output -.SH NAME -cb \- C program beautifier -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cb -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cb -reads C programs either from the named -.I files -or from the -standard input -and writes them -on the standard output with spacing and indentation -that displays the structure of the code. -The options are: -.TP -.B -s -Place newlines as in -Kernighan and Ritchie. -(Original newlines are preserved by default.) -.TP -.B -j -Join split lines. -.TP -.BI -l " leng" -Split lines that are longer than -.I leng, -120 by default. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR pr (1), -.IR troff (1), -.IR lp (1), -.IR font (6) -.br -B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, -.I "The C Programming Language," -Prentice-Hall, 1988. -.SH BUGS -Punctuation hidden in -preprocessor statements causes -.I cb -to make indentation errors. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cbt.1 b/static/v10/man1/cbt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6fe8f0ed..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cbt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -.TH CBT 1 -.SH NAME -cbt -\- programs for b-trees -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cbt -.I command -arguments ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -B-trees support lookup of values by key. -A b-tree -.I file -corresponds to two files, -.I file.T -and -.IR file.F . -.I file.T -contains the keys and pointers to values. -.I file.F -contains the values. -If the b-tree is an -.I index -there is no -.I .F -file. -.PP -.B cbt creat -.I arguments -creates empty b-trees. -Each argument may be a file name or the flag -.BR -i . -The b-trees created for all the names following a flag argument -will be indexes. -.PP -.B cbt report -.I file-names -reports on the sizes of the files. -If the amount of useful data is much less than the file sizes, -.B cbt squash -.I file -will make the b-tree much smaller by reconstructing it in nearly -minimal form. -.PP -.B cbt cat -.I file -prints out the contents of the b-tree in the form -.RS -.I key tab value new-line -.RE -.PP -.B cbt build [-r] -.I file -fills an empty b-tree with key-value pairs read from the standard -input. -The keys must be sorted and without duplicates. -If the optional argument is not present, then the part of each line -up to the first tab is the key, and the part after the first tab, -not including the new-line, is the value. -If the optional argument is present, then the input is assumed to -be a sequence of -.RS -.RI short klen; char key[klen]; short vlen; char value[vlen] -.RE -quadruples. -The smallest possible value for -.I klen -is 1, -so the shortest quadruple consists of 2 short integers and one character. -.SH SEE ALSO -memo by pjw, cbt(3) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cc.1 b/static/v10/man1/cc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 348a79e5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CC (I)'3/15/72'CC (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME cc -- C compiler -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS cc__ [ -c__ ] sfile\d1\u.c__ ... ofile\d1\u ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION cc__ -is the UNIX C compiler. -It accepts three types of arguments: - -Arguments whose names end with ".c" are assumed to be -C source programs; they are compiled, and -the object program is left on the file sfile\d1\u.o (i.e. -the file whose name is that of the source with ".o" substituted -for ".c"). - -Other arguments (except for "-c") are assumed -to be either loader flag arguments, or C-compatible -object programs, typically produced by an earlier cc__ run, -or perhaps libraries of C-compatible routines. -These programs, together with the results of any -compilations specified, are loaded (in the order -given) to produce an executable program with name -a.out_____. - -The "-c" argument suppresses the loading phase, as does -any syntax error in any of the routines being compiled. - -.ti 0 -FILES file.c input file -.nf -file.o object file -a.out loaded output -/tmp/ctm? temporary -/lib/c[01] compiler -/lib/crt0.o runtime startoff -/lib/libc.a builtin functions, etc. -/lib/liba.a system library -.fi -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO C reference manual (in preparation), cdb(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostics -are intended to be self-explanatory. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cdb.1 b/static/v10/man1/cdb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7a32353c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cdb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CDB (I)'1/15/73'CDB (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME cdb -- C debugger -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS cdb___ [ core [ a.out ] ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION cdb___ -is a debugging program for use with C programs. -It is by no means completed, -and this section is essentially only a placeholder -for the actual description. - -Cdb resembles db__ in many respects, except that -all integers are decimal. - -Even the present cdb___ has one useful feature: -the command - - $ - -will give a stack -trace -of the core image of a terminated C program. -The calls are listed in the order made; -the actual arguments to each routine are given -in octal. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO cc(I), db(I), C Reference Manual -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cf.1 b/static/v10/man1/cf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 727293e3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -char freq diff --git a/static/v10/man1/charge.1 b/static/v10/man1/charge.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4fe818f9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/charge.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ -.TH CHARGE 1 SHARE -.SH NAME -charge, charges \- change (show) charges for share system usage calculations -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B charge -[\-flags] -.br -.B charges -[\-flags] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Charge -will change the costs associated with the usage calculations for the -.IR "Share Scheduler" . -The flag \fB\-C\fR, if used, should be mentioned first -to cause -.I charge -to read the -existing values, -instead of working on default values. -The alternate name is used to show the charges currently in operation, -for which the default assumes \fB\-C\fR, unless the flag \fB\-\fP is used. -The optional flags are as follows:- -.TP "\w'-NmaxnormuXX'u" -.BI - -Causes -.I charges -to show the default settings for the charging parameters. -.TP -.BI -C -Causes -.I charge -to read in the current values, -which it will use instead of the defaults. -\fBMust be first flag if used\fP. -.TP -.BI -D h1,h2 -Will set the decay rate for process priorities with normal \fInice\fP -so that they will decay to half their initial value in -.I h1 -seconds, -and set the decay rate for process priorities with maximum \fInice\fP -so that they will decay to half their initial value in -.I h2 -seconds. -.TP -.BI -E half-life -Will set the decay rate for users' process -.I rates -so that they will decay to half their initial value in -.I half-life -seconds. -.TP -.BI -F flags -Sets various global scheduling flags \(em see -.IR share (5) -for details. -.I Flags -are assumed to be in octal. -.TP -.BI -G maxgroups -Sets the maximum depth for the scheduling tree. -.TP -.BI -K half-life [s] -Will set the decay rate for users' usages -so that they will decay to half their initial value in -.I half-life -hours. -If the -.I half-life -is followed by the character \fBs\fP, -then the number will be interpreted as seconds. -.TP -.BI -N maxnormu -Upper bound on -.I "normalised usage" -used in process priority calculations. -The number can be added to a running process's priority every clock tick, -so it should be small enough not to overrun the value -.I maxupri -in too short a time interval -(ie: it should be less than \fI(maxupri*(1\-pri_decay)) / \s-1HZ\s0\fP, -see the output of \fIcharges -v\fP for the low priority value of \fIpri_decay\fP.) -.TP -.BI -P maxpri -Absolute upper bound for a process's priority. -(Something less than the largest non-negative integer.) -.TP -.BI -Q maxupri -Upper bound for normal processes' priorities. -.I Idle -processes run with priorities in the range -.IB maxupri < pri < maxpri . -.TP -.BI -R delta -Sets the -.I run-rate -for the share scheduler in seconds. -.TP -.BI -S maxusers -Sets the maximum number of users and groups that can be active. -Note that this cannot exceed the maximum configured in the kernel. -.TP -.BI -U maxusage -Upper bound for ``reasonable'' usages. -Users with usages larger than this are grouped together and given a -.I "normalised usage" -which prevents them from interfering with ``normal'' users. -.TP -.BI -X maxushare -If the -.SM LIMSHARE -scheduling flag is on, -then this parameter limits the maximum effective share an -individual user can have to -.I maxushare -times their allocated share. -.TP -.BI -Y mingshare -If the -.SM ADJGROUPS -scheduling flag is on, -and any group is getting less than -.I mingshare -times its allocated share, -the costs incurred by the group members will be adjusted down to compensate. -(Does not affect the long-term charges.) -.TP -.BI -b bio -The charge for a disk block I/O operation. -.TP -.BI -m click -The charge for a -.IR "memory tick" . -.TP -.BI -s syscall -The charge for a system call. -.TP -.BI -t tick -The charge for a CPU tick. -.TP -.BI -v -Show scheduling feed-back parameters -.RI ( charges " only)." -.TP -.BI -y tio -The charge for a stream I/O operation. -(This is really dependent on the number of kernel buffer operations, -so a -.I "write(1)" -will cost the same as a -.I "write(64)" -to an ordinary stream, -or a -.I "write(1024)" -to a pipe.) -.TP -.IR percent -The percentage change to apply to all the charges. -.SH EXAMPLES -.B charge 10 -.RS -will change the costs to 10% of the default. -.RE -.B charges -.RS -show the current charges. -.RE -.B "charges \-" -.RS -show the default settings. -.RE -.SH SEE ALSO -.PD 0 -.TP "\w'/usr/include/sys/charges.hXX'u" -.IR /usr/include/sys/charges.h -The default values in the kernel. -.TP -.IR /usr/include/sys/share.h -Definition of charges structure. -.TP -.IR share (5) -A description of the -.IR "Share Scheduler" . -.PD -.SH BUGS -The percent flag will also affect any new constants, -so bias them accordingly. -.PP -.I Charges -works out the current charging percentage -by using the difference between the default cost for ``ticks'' -and the current setting. -.PP -The defaults are hardly ever relevant. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chash.1 b/static/v10/man1/chash.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fbe4e38c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/chash.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he '6/13/1972''CHASH (I)' -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -NAME chash -- precompile a hash table for cref____ -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS chash_____ file1 file2 -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION CHASH -takes symbols (character sequences; one per line) from -file1_____ and compiles a hash table for the use of cref____. -The table is written on file2_____. -.sp -A subroutine suitable for searching such a hash table -is available from the author. -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -FILES --- -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO cref(I) -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS --- -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -BUGS There -can only be 199 symbols; they may total -only 600 characters of text. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chdate.1 b/static/v10/man1/chdate.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6e471a8e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/chdate.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -.TH CHDATE 1 -.CT 1 files dirs -.SH NAME -touch, chdate \- set modification or access date of a file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B touch -[ -.B -c -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B chdate -[ -.B -am -] -.I date file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Touch -attempts to set the modification time of the -.I files -to the current time. -If a -.I file -does not exist, -it will be created unless option -.B -c -is present. -.PP -.I Chdate -sets the access and modification times of -.I files. -The -.I date -comprises two or more arguments: a month (3 letters or more), -a day number, an optional time in hour:min[:sec] form, and an -optional year. -A missing year means a time in the last 12 months. -The options are -.TP -.B -a -Change the access time only. -.TP -.B -m -Change the modification time only. -.PP -.I Chdate -knows how to carry between fields of a date. -Only a file's owner or the super-user can change its date. -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -.ta \w'chdate jul 4 12:00 1976 independence 'u -chdate jul 4 12:00 1976 independence -chdate jul -3 1976 independence # backdate one week -.EE -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR ls (1), -.IR utime -in -.IR chmod (2), -.IR stat (2), -.IR timec (3), -.IR chmod (1), -.IR chown (8) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Chdate -returns the number of files on which the date -could not be changed. -.SH BUGS -.I Touch -will not touch directories. -.PP -The first -.I file -name for -.I chdate -cannot begin with a digit. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chdir.1 b/static/v10/man1/chdir.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a8313507..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/chdir.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CHDIR (I)'3/15/72'CHDIR (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME chdir -- change working directory -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS chdir_____ directory -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION directory_________ -becomes the new working directory. -.sp -Because a new process is created to execute each command, -chdir_____ would be ineffective if it were written as a -normal command. It is therefore recognized and executed -by the Shell. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO sh(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "Bad directory" if the directory cannot -be changed to. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/checknews.1 b/static/v10/man1/checknews.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 29401198..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/checknews.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ -.TH CHECKNEWS 1 -.SH NAME -checknews \- check to see if user has news -.SH SYNOPSIS -.BR checknews " [ " ynqevv " ] [ " -.IR "readnews options" " ] " -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I checknews -reports to the user whether or not he has news. -.TP 10 -.B y -Reports ``There is news'' if the user has news to read. -.TP 10 -.B n -Reports ``No news'' if there isn't any news to read. -.TP 10 -.B q -causes checknews to be quiet. -Instead of printing a message, the exit status indicates news. -A status of 0 means no news, 1 means there is news. -.TP 10 -.B v -alters the -.B y -message to show the name of the first newsgroup containing unread news. -Doubling -.B v -(e.g. -.BR vv ) -will cause an explanation of -.I any -claim of new news, -and is useful if -.B checknews -and -.B readnews -disagree on whether there is news. -.TP 10 -.B e -Executes -.IR readnews (1) -if there is news. -.PP -If there are no options, -.B y -is the default. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 25 -~/.newsrc -/usr/lib/news/active -Active newsgroups -Options and list of previously read articles -.SH SEE ALSO -inews(1), -postnews(1), -readnews(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/checknr.1 b/static/v10/man1/checknr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a590a377..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/checknr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -.TH CHECKNR 1 4/5/80 -.UC 4 -.SH NAME -checknr \- check nroff/troff files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B checknr -[ -.B \-s -] [ -.B \-f -] [ -.BR \-a ".x1.y1.x2.y2. ... .xn.yn" -] [ -.BR \-c ".x1.x2.x3 ... .xn" -] -\fIfile\fP ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Checknr -checks a list of -.IR nroff (1) -or -.IR troff (1) -input files for certain kinds of errors -involving mismatched opening and closing delimiters -and unknown commands. -Delimeters checked are: -.IP (1) -Font changes using \efx ... \efP. -.IP (2) -Size changes using \esx ... \es0. -.IP (3) -Macros that come in open ... close forms, for example, -the .TS and .TE macros which must always come in pairs. -.PP -.I Checknr -knows about the -.IR ms (7) -and -.IR me (7) -macro packages. -.PP -Additional pairs of macros can be added to the list using the -.B \-a -option. -This must be followed by groups of six characters, each group defining -a pair of macros. -The six characters are -a period, -the first macro name, -another period, -and the second macro name. -For example, to define a pair .BS and .ES, use \-\fBa\fP.BS.ES -.PP -The -.B \-c -option defines commands which would otherwise be complained about -as undefined. -.PP -The -.B \-f -option requests -.I checknr -to ignore \ef font changes. -.PP -The -.B \-s -option requests -.I checknr -to ignore \es size changes. -.PP -.I Checknr -is intended to be used on documents that are prepared with -.I checknr -in mind, much the same as -.I lint. -It expects a certain document writing style for \ef and \es commands, -in that each \efx must be terminated with \efP and -each \esx must be terminated with \es0. -While it will work to directly go into the next font or explicitly -specify the original font or point size, -and many existing documents actually do this, -such a practice will produce complaints from -.I checknr. -Since it is probably better to use the \efP and \es0 forms anyway, -you should think of this as a contribution to your document -preparation style. -.SH SEE\ ALSO -nroff(1), troff(1), ms(7), me(7), checkeqn(1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Complaints about unmatched delimiters. -.br -Complaints about unrecognized commands. -.br -Various complaints about the syntax of commands. -.SH AUTHOR -Mark Horton -.SH BUGS -There is no way to define a 1 character macro name using -.B \-a diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chmod.1 b/static/v10/man1/chmod.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c67cfca9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/chmod.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CHMOD (I)'3/15/72'CHMOD (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME chmod -- change mode -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS chmod_____ octal file918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION The octal mode -replaces the mode of each of the files. -The mode is constructed from the OR of the -following modes: -.sp -.ti +3 -01 write for non-owner -.ti +3 -02 read for non-owner -.ti +3 -04 write for owner -.ti +3 -10 read for owner -.ti +3 -20 executable -.ti +3 -40 set-UID -.sp -Only the owner of a file may change its mode. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO stat(I), ls(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chown.1 b/static/v10/man1/chown.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9262195e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/chown.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CHOWN (I)'3/15/72'CHOWN (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME chown -- change owner -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS chown_____ owner file918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION owner_____ -becomes the new owner of the files. -The owner may be either a decimal UID or -a login name found in the password file. -.sp -Only the owner of a file is allowed to change the owner. -It is illegal to change the owner of a file with the set-user-ID -mode. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /etc/passwd -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO stat(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "Who?" if owner cannot be found, -"file?" if file cannot be found. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chunk.1 b/static/v10/man1/chunk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0b4c71ba..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/chunk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH CHUNK 1 -.SH NAME -chunk \- segment text into phrase units -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B chunk -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -[file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Chunk -segments text into phrase units -by beginning a new line at the end of each unit it identifies. -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH USES -This program is useful for reading research, -and it can be used to reformat text files for easier editing. -Additionally, editors may find it easier to edit a text whose microstructure -is typographically clear. -.SH BUGS -Since -.I chunk -runs -.IR deroff (1) -on the input text, -formatting commands (and thus paragraph and heading structures) are lost -in the output. -.PP -.I Chunk -will think unfamiliar abbreviations are the end of a sentence, -and hence the end of the chunk. -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cin.1 b/static/v10/man1/cin.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 94542852..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cin.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,906 +0,0 @@ -. \" Copyright 1984,1985,1986,1987,1988,1989,1990 AT&T Bell Laboratories -.TH CIN 1 -.CT 1 prog_c -.SH NAME -cin \- C interpreter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cin -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -[ -.B -- -.I arg ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cin -interprets a C program comprising the -.I file -arguments as in -.IR cc (1). -The special name -.L - -signifies standard input. -When called with no -.I file -arguments, -.I cin -defaults to -.BR -i . -Arguments -.I arg -are passed to the interpreted program as -.BR cin_argv[1] , -.BR cin_argv[2] , -\&... -and -.BR cin_argc . -.PP -Options -.BI -D name = def , -.BI -D name , -.BI -L name , -.BI -U name , -.BI -I name , -.BI -l x , -.BI -o name , -and -.BI -u name -are as in -.IR cc . -Options -.B -O -and -.B -g -are ignored. -Other options are: -.TP -.BI -0 name -Pass -.I name -to the interpreted program as -.BR cin_argv[0] . -.TP -.BI -C name -Use -.I name -as the interpreter startup file -(by default, the file -.FR $HOME/.cin.c ). -The interpreter startup file is ignored by using -.BR -C/dev/null . -.TP -.BI -F i : o : e -Use file descriptors -.IR i , o , e -as standard input, standard output, and standard error for the -interpreter, as distinct from the interpreted code -(by default, 0, 1, and 2). -.TP -.B -S -Enable interactive mode after run-time errors. -.TP -.BI -V name : n -Declare function -.I name -to have a variable number of arguments, the first -.I n -of which are to be type-checked. -.TP -.B -c -Parse files but do not execute the program. -.TP -.B -i -Enable interactive interpretation. -C statements are evaluated immediately using local and global variables. -Non-void values are printed. -Function, variable, and C pre-processor declarations are stored -in the current `view'. -A function definition must include its return type. -Declarations and statements can appear in any order and -identifiers can be redeclared. -.TP -.B -r -Prohibit multiply-declared global variables. -.TP -.B -s -Do not catch signals using -.IR signal (2) -(by default, -.I cin -catches -.BR SIGBUS , -.BR SIGEMT , -.BR SIGFPE , -.BR SIGILL , -.BR SIGINT , -.BR SIGIOT , -.BR SIGSEGV , -.BR SIGSYS , -.BR SIGTRAP ). -.TP -.B -v -Print the user and system times associated with loading files and executing -the program, as in -.IR time (1). -.TP -.BI + option -Turn off the specified -.IR option . -.PP -The functions and variables listed below are predefined in -.I cin -and -.IR libcin.a . -Their arguments are typed according to these conventions: -.IP -.B char -.BI * func , -.BI * message , -.BI * mod , -.BI * name , -.BI * ref , -.BI * string ; -.br -.B enode -.BI * code ; -.br -.B int -.IB level , -.IB line ; -.br -.B long -.BI (* after )(); -.br -.B unsigned -.B long -.IB addr ; -.br -.B void -.BI (* before )(), -.BI (* routine )(); -.PP -This first group of functions and variables are the most commonly used. -To use them load -.F libcin.a -and include -.FR cin.h . -.PP -.HP -.BI "int cin_break(" name , -.IB line , -.IB string ) -.br -If -.I string -is -.BR "(char *)0" , -place a -.B cin_system -in file -.I name -before line number -.IR line . -Otherwise, -place the C-language statement specified by -.I string -in file -.I name -before line number -.IR line . -Thus, -.IR string -is read and evaluated -within the prevailing context of the function -without stopping execution. -Return 0 if line number -.I line -cannot be found in file -.IR name . -.TP -.BI "int cin_dump(" name ) -Create an -.F a.out -and place it in the file -.IR name . -Return 0 if -.I name -cannot be created. -.TP -.BI "void cin_info(" string ) -Where -.I string -is: -.RS -.TP -.B breakpoint -Print -.IR cin 's -.BR cin_break s -and -.BR cin_stopin s. -.TP -.B log -Print -.IR cin 's -interactive mode log file name. -.TP -.B memory -Print -.IR cin 's -memory usage. -.TP -.B spy -Print -.IR cin 's -spies. -.TP -.B symboltable -Print -.IR cin 's -symbol table. -.TP -.B undefined -Print -.IR cin 's -undefined variables. -.TP -.B usage -Print -.IR cin 's -usage message. -.TP -.B version -Print -.IR cin 's -version number. -.TP -.B view -List the available views. -The current view is starred -.RB ( * ). -.TP -.B where -Print a trace of function calls. -.TP -.B wrapper -Print -.IR cin 's -wrappers. -.RE -.TP -.BI "int cin_load(" string ) -Evaluate -.I string -as invocation arguments of -.IR cin . -Return 0 if arguments are not valid. -.TP -.BI "int cin_log(" name ) -.IR mv (1) -the interactive mode session log to file -.IR name . -Return 0 if -.I name -cannot be -.IR mv ed. -.TP -.BI "void cin_make(" string ) -If -.I string -is -.BR "(char *)0" , -then re-load any file that is out of date. -Otherwise, -run -.BR $MAKE , -passing -.I string -as arguments, and scan -its standard output for lines that begin with pound sign -.RB ( # ). -Characters following the pound sign are executed as -a C-language statement. -.HP -.BI "int cin_pp(" func , -.IB level ) -.br -Print the C-language for the function -.IR func . -Where -.I level -is: -.RS -.TP -.B 0 -Print declaration. -.TP -.B 1 -Print declaration and body. -.PP -Return 0 if -.I func -cannot be found. -.RE -.TP -.B "void cin_quit()" -Flush output and exit -.IR cin . -If all else fails, -use -.IR _exit(2) . -.TP -.B "int cin_reset()" -Preserve function definitions, -zero bss variables, -and restore initialized data variables to their original values. -Return 0 if -state cannot be reset. -.TP -.B "void cin_return()" -Return from a call to -.BR cin_system . -.TP -.BI "void cin_run(" string ) -Set -.BR cin_argv[1] , -.BR cin_argv[2] , -\&... -and -.B cin_argc -from -.I string -and then -.BR "main(cin_argc, cin_argv)" . -.HP -.BI "int cin_spy(" func , -.IB name , -.IB mod , -.IB ref ) -.br -Trace variable references and modifications. -If -.I mod -is not -.BR "(char *)0" , -place the C-language statement specified by -.I mod -after the variable -.I name -is modified in the function -.IR func . -If -.I ref -is not -.BR "(char *)0" , -place the C-language statement specified by -.I ref -before the variable -.I name -is referenced in the function -.IR func . -If function value -.I func -is -.BR "(char *)0" , -search all functions. -Return 0 if -.I name -cannot be found in -.IR func . -.TP -.B "void cin_step()" -Step over function calls -to the next C-language statement in the current or previous function. -.TP -.B "void cin_stepin()" -Step into any function to the next C-language statement. -.TP -.B "void cin_stepout()" -Step out of the current function back to the next C-language statement -in the previous function. -.HP -.BI "int cin_stopin(" func , -.IB string ) -.br -If -.I string -is -.BR "(char *)0" , -place a -.B cin_system -before the first -executable line in the function -.IR func , -either in the current view or wherever -.I func -can be found. -Otherwise, -place the C-language statement specified by -.I string -before the first -executable line in the function -.IR func , -either in the current view or wherever it can be found. -Thus, -.IR string -is read and evaluated -within the prevailing context of the function -without stopping execution. -Return 0 if function -.I func -cannot be found. -.TP -.BI "char *cin_sync(" string ) -Where -.I string -is: -.RS -.TP -.B filename -Return the non-interactive C source file name being executed. -.TP -.B lineno -Return the non-interactive C source line number being executed. -.RE -.TP -.B "void cin_system()" -Start a -.BR cin_read - cin_eval - cin_print -loop. -.HP -.BI "int cin_unbreak(" name , -.IB line , -.IB string ) -.br -Clear a -.B cin_break -or a -.B cin_stopin -in file -.I name -before line number -.I line -with string -.IR string . -Return 0 if -.B cin_break -or -.B cin_stopin -cannot be cleared. -.TP -.BI "int cin_unload(" name ) -Unload the object file -.IR name . -Return 0 if -.I name -cannot be unloaded. -.HP -.BI "int cin_unspy(" func , -.IB name , -.IB mod , -.IB ref ) -.br -Remove the C-language statement specified by -.I mod -after the variable -.I name -is modified, -and the C-language statement specified by -.I ref -before the variable -.I name -is referenced in the function -.IR func . -Return 0 if spy cannot be cleared. -.HP -.BI "int cin_unstopin(" func , -.IB string ) -.br -Clear a -.B cin_stopin -or -.B cin_break -at the first -executable line in the function -.I func -with string -.I string -in either the current view or wherever -.I func -can be found. -Return 0 if the -.B cin_stopin -or -.B cin_break -cannot be cleared. -.HP -.BI "int cin_unwrapper(" func , -.IB before , -.IB after ) -.br -Remove the call of function -.I before -before the function -.I func -is called. -Remove the call of function -.I after -after the function -.I func -is called. -Return 0 if -.I func -cannot be found. -.TP -.BI "int cin_view(" name ) -Change the current view to -.IR name . -Return 0 if the view cannot be found. -.HP -.BI "int cin_wrapper(" func , -.IB before , -.IB after ) -.br -If -.I before -is not -.BR "(void (*)())0" , -call the function -.I before -with the arguments of function -.I func -before the function -.I func -is called. -If -.I after -is not -.BR "(long (*)())0" , -call the function -.I after -with the argument of the return value of function -.I func -after the function -.I func -is called. -The return value of function -.I after -is substituted for the return value of function -.IR func . -Return 0 if -.I name -cannot be found either in the current view or any other view. -.TP -.B "extern int cin_argc" -The number of elements passed to the interpreted program. -.TP -.B "extern char **cin_argv" -An array of the arguments passed to the interpreted program. -.TP -.B "extern char *cin_filename" -The current C source file name being executed. -.TP -.B "extern int cin_level" -The number of nested calls to -.BR cin_system . -.TP -.B "extern char *cin_libpath" -A colon -.RB ( : ) --separated list of libraries to search for undefined routines -(by default, -the libraries specified on the command line and -.FR -lc ). -.TP -.B "extern int cin_lineno" -The current C source line number being executed. -.TP -.B "extern char *cin_prompt" -The interactive mode prompt (by default, -the string -.RB `` cin> " '')." -.PP -These are some of the less frequently used functions and variables in -.IR cin . -They are primarily used by -.I cin -library or language developers. -.TP -.BI "enode *cin_compile(" code ) -Analyze -.I code -and return an optimized program. -Return -.B "(enode *)0" -if -.I code -cannot be compiled. -.TP -.BI "int cin_epp(" func ) -Print the -.BR enode s -for function -.IR func . -Return 0 if -.I func -cannot be found. -.TP -.BI "enode *cin_eprint(" code ) -Print the -.I code -as -.BR enode s. -Return the argument. -.HP -.BI "char *cin_error_code_set(" message , -.IB string ) -.br -Where -.I message -is: -.RS -.TP -.B dynamic error -When -.I cin -detects -a divide by zero, -a modulus by zero, -a null pointer access, -or -an abnormal signal -execute the C-language statement specified by -.IR string . -.TP -.B undefined function -When -.I cin -detects an undefined function execute the C-language statement specified by -.IR string . -.TP -.B undefined symbol -When -.I cin -detects -an undefined symbol execute the C-language statement specified by -.IR string . -.PP -If -.I string -is -.BR "(char *)0" , -execute -.BR cin_system() . -Return the old -.I string -for -.IR message . -.RE -.TP -.BI "enode *cin_eval(" code ) -Execute the -.I code -as if it were present in the program where -.B cin_eval -is called. -Return the resulting program. -.TP -.BI "ident *cin_find_ident(" name ) -If -.I name -is not -.BR "(char *)0" , -return the identifier for the variable -.I name -either in the current view or wherever -.I name -can be found. -If -.I name -is -.BR "(char *)0" , -return the identifier for the previous non- -.B "(char *)0" -value of the variable -.I name -in the next view where -.I name -can be found. -Return -.B "(ident *)0" -if -.I name -cannot be found. -.TP -.BI "struct nlist *cin_find_nlist(" addr ) -Return the loader symbol table entry for the external address -.IR addr . -Return -.B "(struct nlist *)0" -if -.I addr -cannot be found. -.HP -.BI "void (*cin_info_set())(" string , -.IB routine ) -.br -Inform -.B cin_info -that it should call -.I routine -when it is passed -.IR string . -Return the old -.I routine -for -.IR string . -.TP -.BI "char *cin_ltof(" line ) -Return the function name at line number -.I line -in the current view. -Return -.B "(char *)0" -if a function cannot be found for -.IR line . -.TP -.BI "void cin_pop(" level ) -Replace -.I level -interpreted function calls from the stack with -.BR cin_system . -.HP -.BI "enode *cin_print(" code , -.IB level ) -.br -Print the -.I code -as C-language code. -Where -.I level -is: -.RS -.TP -.B 0 -Print declaration. -.TP -.B 1 -Print declaration and body. -.PP -Return the -.I code -argument. -.RE -.TP -.BI "enode *cin_read(" string ) -Read -.I string -and return a program. -Return -.B "(enode *)0" -if -.I string -cannot be parsed. -.TP -.BI "char *cin_slashify(" string ) -Return a pointer to storage obtained from -.IR malloc (3) -and there create a character array from -.I string -by translating -backspace, -form feed, -newline, -carriage return, -horizontal tab, -vertical tab, -backslash, -single quote, -and double quote -into -.BR \eb , -.BR \ef , -.BR \en , -.BR \er , -.BR \et , -.BR \ev , -.BR \e\e , -.BR \e' , -and -.B \e" -respectively. -Other non-printable characters are translated into -.BI \e ddd -octal notation. -.TP -.B "extern int cin_err_fd" -.IR Cin 's -standard error file descriptor. -.TP -.B "extern int cin_in_fd" -.IR Cin 's -standard input file descriptor. -.TP -.B "extern int cin_out_fd" -.IR Cin 's -standard output file descriptor. -.TP -.B "extern stackelem *cin_stack" -The trace of function calls. -.TP -.B "extern view *cin_views" -The list of available views. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -The world's shortest ``Hello world'' program. -.EX -cin> printf("Hello world\en"); -Hello world -(int)12 -.EE -.TP -Setting breakpoints and tracing function calls. -.EX -$ cin -lcin -cin> int f(x) { return x <= 1 ? 1 : x * f(x - 1); } -extern int f(); -cin> cin_stopin("f", (char*)0); -/tmp/cin006795: 1: f: set breakpoint: (char *)0 -(int)1 -cin> f(2); -/tmp/int006795: 1: f: stopped execution: -cin> cin_return(); -/tmp/int006795: 1: f: stopped execution: -cin> (void)cin_info("where"); -/tmp/cin006795: 5: cin_system: info: where: () -/tmp/cin006795: 1: f: info: where: (x = (int)1) -/tmp/cin006795: 1: f: info: where: (x = (int)2) -/tmp/cin006795: 3: cin_system: info: where: () -cin> x; -(int)1 -cin> cin_return(); -(int)2 -cin> cin_quit(); -$ -.EE -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/include/cin.h -.TP -.F /tmp/cin* -default interactive log -.TP -.F /usr/include/cin.h -various function and variable declarations -.TP -.F /usr/lib/libcin.a -various predefined functions -.TP -.F $HOME/.cin.c -interpreter startup file -.HP -other files as in -.IR cc (1) -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.I "Cin User Manual" -.br -.I "Cin Reference Manual" -.br -B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, -.IR "The C Programming Language" , -Prentice-Hall, -1978 -.br -.IR lint (1), -.IR ar (1), -.IR cc (1) -.SH BUGS -The addresses of -.IR etext , -.IR edata , -and -.I end -are not meaningful with incrementally loaded code. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cite.1 b/static/v10/man1/cite.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2d8dc908..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cite.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ -.TH CITE 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff -.SH NAME -cite \- process citations in a document -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cite -[ -.B -s -] -[ -.B -u -] -[ -.I files -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cite -is a -.IR troff (1) -preprocessor for forward and backward references. -It copies the -.I files -or the standard input to standard output, -observing lines of the forms -.IP -\f5\&.CD "\fIkey\f5" "\fIdefinition\f5" -.br -\&.CU "\fIkey\f5"\fItext -.EE -.LP -Each -.B .CD -line is remembered. -A later -.B .CU -with the same -.I key -will be replaced by the -.I definition -for that key; the -.I text -will be copied verbatim. -If no definition is yet available for a -.B .CU -reference, the key will be replaced by -.BR ZZ . -.PP -At the location of each -.B .CD -command, -.I cite -causes -.I troff -to send the line (with macro substitutions) -to the standard error file. -The resulting definitions may be included at the beginning of another -.I cite-troff -run, effectively eliminating forward references. -Unfortunately, the definition file -may contain obsolete definitions (included -from a previous run) plus other -.I troff -messages. -These should be deleted using option -.BR -s . -.PP -The options are -.TP -.B -s -Place only the latest definitions -on the standard output; shunt -.RI non -cite -data to standard error. -.TP -.B -u -Place on standard error a list of undefined or unused citations. -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -cite file.defs file | troff -ms 2>temp.defs >/dev/null -cite -s temp.defs >file.defs -cite file.defs file | troff -ms 2>temp.defs | lp -.EE -.br -.ns -.IP -Run -.I cite-troff -to collect updated definitions in -.BR temp.defs . -.br -Eliminate old definitions, putting updates back in -.BR file.defs . -.br -Run -.IR cite-troff -again, using latest definitions. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR troff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/clear.1 b/static/v10/man1/clear.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7e3f6f21..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/clear.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -.TH CLEAR 1 -.SH NAME -clear \- clear terminal screen -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B clear -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Clear -clears the screen of the terminal on its standard output. -It depends upon the environment variable TERM to -know how to do it. -.SH FILES -.F /etc/termcap -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR term (7) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cmp.1 b/static/v10/man1/cmp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 05113c09..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cmp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CMP (I)'1/15/73'CMP (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME cmp -- compare two files -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS cmp___ file918 file928 -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION The two files are -compared for identical contents. -Discrepancies are noted -by giving the offset and the differing words, -all in octal. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO proof(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS Messages -are given for inability to open either argument, premature -EOF on either argument, and incorrect usage. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS If -the shorter of the two files is of odd length, -cmp acts as if a null byte had been appended to it. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/column.1 b/static/v10/man1/column.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 316a062f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/column.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ -.TH COLUMN 1 -.CT 1 files writing_output -.SH NAME -col, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, mc, fold, expand \- column alignment -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B col -[ -.B -bfx -] -.PP -.B 2 -[ -.I file -] -.PP -.B mc -[ -.B - -] -[ -.BI - N -] -[ -.B -t -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B fold -[ -.BI - N -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B expand -[ -.BI - stops -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -These programs rearrange files for appearance's sake. -All read the standard input and write the standard output. -Some optionally read from files instead. -.PP -.I Col -overlays lines to expunge reverse line feeds -(ESC-7) -and half line feeds (ESC-9 and ESC-8) -as produced by -.I nroff -for .2C in -.IR ms (6) -and for -.IR tbl (1). -It normally emits only full line feeds; -option -.B -f -(fine) allows half line feeds too. -Option -.B -b -removes backspaces, printing just one of each pile of overstruck -characters. -.I Col -normally converts white space to tabs; -option -.B -x -overrides this feature. -Other escaped characters and non-printing characters, except for -SO and SI, are ignored. -.PP -.I Col -should not be used for printing on an HP ThinkJet printer with -.I think -.RI ( thinkblt (9.1)), -which performs the -.I col -function itself. -.PP -Commands -.I "2, 3, 4, 5, 6" -convert their input to 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, or 6-column form, -with consecutive input lines arranged across each row. -.PP -.I Fold -inserts newlines after each -.I N -characters (default -.IR n =80, -or -.IR mux (9.1) -window size) -of long lines. -.PP -.I Mc -splits the input into as many columns as will fit in -.I N -print positions (default -.IR N =80). -Under option -.B - -each input line ending in a colon -.L : -is printed separately (see example). -On output, multiple spaces are converted to tabs; this -is suppressed by option -.BR -t . -.PP -.I Expand -replaces tabs by spaces. -The optional -.I stops -argument is a comma-separated list of tab stops, counted from 0; -default is every 8 columns. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -tbl file | nroff -ms | col | hp -Format some tables for printing on typewriters; -use -.I col -to remove reverse line feeds and -.I hp -(see -.IR ul (1)) -to do underlining, etc., on an HP terminal. -.TP -.L -ls directory1 directory2 | mc - -List files in multiple columns, separated by directory. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR pr (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Col -can't back up more than 128 lines or -handle more than 800 characters per line, -and understands -.L VT -(013) as reverse line feed. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/comm.1 b/static/v10/man1/comm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3ce8bb63..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/comm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -.th COMM I 8/21/73 -.sh NAME -comm \*- print lines common to two files -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd comm -[ -.bd \*- -[ -.bd 123 -] -] file1 file2 -[ -file3 -] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Comm -reads -.it file1 -and -.it file2, -which should be in sort, -and produces a three column output: lines only in -.it file1; -lines only in -.it file2; -and lines in both files. -.s3 -If -.it file3 -is given, the output will be placed there; -otherwise it will be written on the standard output. -.s3 -Flags 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of the corresponding -column. -Thus -.bd comm -.bd \*-12 -prints only the lines common to the two files; -.bd comm -.bd \*-23 -prints only lines in the first file but not in the second; -.bd comm -.bd \*-123 -is a no-op. -.s3 -.sh "SEE ALSO" -uniq(\|I\|), proof(\|I\|), cmp(\|I\|) -.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/compress.1 b/static/v10/man1/compress.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bebae189..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/compress.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,238 +0,0 @@ -.PU -.TH COMPRESS 1 local -.SH NAME -compress, uncompress, zcat \- compress and expand data -.SH SYNOPSIS -.ll +8 -.B compress -[ -.B \-f -] [ -.B \-v -] [ -.B \-c -] [ -.B \-V -] [ -.B \-b -.I bits -] [ -.I "name \&..." -] -.ll -8 -.br -.B uncompress -[ -.B \-f -] [ -.B \-v -] [ -.B \-c -] [ -.B \-V -] [ -.I "name \&..." -] -.br -.B zcat -[ -.B \-V -] [ -.I "name \&..." -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Compress -reduces the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. -Whenever possible, -each file is replaced by one with the extension -.B "\&.Z," -while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times. -If no files are specified, the standard input is compressed to the -standard output. -Compressed files can be restored to their original form using -.I uncompress -or -.I zcat. -.PP -The -.B \-f -option will force compression of -.I name. -This is useful for compressing an entire directory, -even if some of the files do not actually shrink. -If -.B \-f -is not given and -.I compress -is run in the foreground, -the user is prompted as to whether an existing file should be overwritten. -.PP -The -.B \-c -option makes -.I compress/uncompress -write to the standard output; no files are changed. -The nondestructive behavior of -.I zcat -is identical to that of -.I uncompress -.B \-c. -.PP -.I Compress -uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized in -"A Technique for High Performance Data Compression", -Terry A. Welch, -.I "IEEE Computer," -vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984), pp. 8-19. -Common substrings in the file are first replaced by 9-bit codes 257 and up. -When code 512 is reached, the algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and -continues to use more bits until the -limit specified by the -.B \-b -flag is reached (default 16). -.I Bits -must be between 9 and 16. The default can be changed in the source to allow -.I compress -to be run on a smaller machine. -.PP -After the -.I bits -limit is attained, -.I compress -periodically checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, -.I compress -continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, -if the compression ratio decreases, -.I compress -discards the table of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows -the algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file. -.PP -Note that the -.B \-b -flag is omitted for -.I uncompress, -since the -.I bits -parameter specified during compression -is encoded within the output, along with -a magic number to ensure that neither decompression of random data nor -recompression of compressed data is attempted. -.PP -.ne 8 -The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the -input, the number of -.I bits -per code, and the distribution of common substrings. -Typically, text such as source code or English -is reduced by 50\-60%. -Compression is generally much better than that achieved by -Huffman coding (as used in -.IR pack ), -or adaptive Huffman coding -.RI ( compact ), -and takes less time to compute. -.PP -Under the -.B \-v -option, -a message is printed yielding the percentage of -reduction for each file compressed. -.PP -If the -.B \-V -option is specified, the current version and compile options are printed on -stderr. -.PP -Exit status is normally 0; -if the last file is larger after (attempted) compression, the status is 2; -if an error occurs, exit status is 1. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -pack(1), compact(1) -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -Usage: compress [\-dfvcV] [\-b maxbits] [file ...] -.in +8 -Invalid options were specified on the command line. -.in -8 -Missing maxbits -.in +8 -Maxbits must follow -.BR \-b \. -.in -8 -.IR file : -not in compressed format -.in +8 -The file specified to -.I uncompress -has not been compressed. -.in -8 -.IR file : -compressed with -.I xx -bits, can only handle -.I yy -bits -.in +8 -.I File -was compressed by a program that could deal with -more -.I bits -than the compress code on this machine. -Recompress the file with smaller -.IR bits \. -.in -8 -.IR file : -already has .Z suffix -- no change -.in +8 -The file is assumed to be already compressed. -Rename the file and try again. -.in -8 -.IR file : -filename too long to tack on .Z -.in +8 -The file cannot be compressed because its name is longer than -12 characters. -Rename and try again. -This message does not occur on BSD systems. -.in -8 -.I file -already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)? -.in +8 -Respond "y" if you want the output file to be replaced; "n" if not. -.in -8 -uncompress: corrupt input -.in +8 -A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means that the input file has -been corrupted. -.in -8 -Compression: -.I "xx.xx%" -.in +8 -Percentage of the input saved by compression. -(Relevant only for -.BR \-v \.) -.in -8 --- not a regular file: unchanged -.in +8 -When the input file is not a regular file, -(e.g. a directory), it is -left unaltered. -.in -8 --- has -.I xx -other links: unchanged -.in +8 -The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See -.IR ln "(1)" -for more information. -.in -8 --- file unchanged -.in +8 -No savings is achieved by -compression. The input remains virgin. -.in -8 -.SH "BUGS" -Although compressed files are compatible between machines with large memory, -.BR \-b \12 -should be used for file transfer to architectures with -a small process data space (64KB or less, as exhibited by the DEC PDP -series, the Intel 80286, etc.) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 b/static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3514120f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -.PU -.TH COMPRESSDIR 1 local -.SH NAME -compressdir, uncompressdir \- compress and uncompress directories of files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.ll +8 -.B compressdir -[ flags ] [ -.I "directory \&..." -] -.ll -8 -.br -.B uncompressdir -[ flags ] [ -.I "directory \&..." -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -Recursively decends each specified directory and compresses each -file. -Each file is replaced by a file with the extension -.B "\&.Z," -but only if the file got smaller. -If no directories are specified, -the compression is applied to all files starting with the current directory. -Compressed files can be restored to their original form by running -.I uncompressdir -on the directories. -.PP -The -.I flags -specified are passed to the compress(1) program. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -compress(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/con.1 b/static/v10/man1/con.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8d7dfa66..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/con.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,176 +0,0 @@ -.TH CON 1 -.CT 1 comm_mach -.SH NAME -con, rx \- remote login and execution -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B con -[ -.B -l -] -.I machine -.PP -.B rx -[ -.B -n -] -.I machine -[ -.I command-word ... -] -.PP -.BI /usr/bin/m/ machine -[ -.I command-word ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Con -connects to the computer whose network address is -.I machine -and logs in if possible. -Standard input and output go to the local machine. -Option -.B -l -prevents automatic login; a normal login dialog ensues. -.PP -The quit signal (control-\e) is a local escape. -It prompts with the local machine name and -.BR >> . -Legitimate responses to the prompt are -.TP \w'\fL!\fIcommand\ \ 'u -.B i -Send a quit [sic] signal to the remote machine. -.PD0 -.TP -.BR q , " x" ", or " . -Exit. -.TP -.B b -Send a break. -.TP -.BI ! command -Execute -.I command -locally. -.PD -.PP -.I Rx -executes one shell command -on the remote machine as if logged in there, -but with local standard input and output. -Unquoted shell metacharacters in the command -are interpreted -locally, quoted ones remotely. -The assignment -.B REXEC=1 -appears in the remote environment. -With no arguments, -.I rx -just diagnoses availability. -Option -.B -n -ignores sporadic end-of-file indications on a -sick network. -.PP -Network addresses for both -.I con -and -.I rx -have the form -.IB network ! host -or simply -.I host. -Supported networks are -.L dk -(Datakit) and -.L tcp -(TCP/IP, usually Ethernet). -.PP -Directory -.F /usr/bin/m -contains machine names as commands: -.BI /usr/bin/m/ machine -with no argument runs an appropriate flavor of -.I con -for the named -.I machine. -If given arguments, -.BI /usr/bin/m/ machine -runs -.I rx -with those arguments. -If -.F /usr/bin/m -is in the -.IR sh (1) -search path, -the names become commands for navigating the -local cluster. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -rx overthere cat file1 >file2 -Copy remote -.I file1 -to local -.IR file2 . -.TP -.L -rx overthere cat file1 ">file2" -Copy remote -.I file1 -to remote -.IR file2. -.TP -.L -eqn paper | rx pipe troff -ms | rx arend lp -Parallel processing: -do each stage of a pipeline on a different machine. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/ipc/lib/auth* -.TP -.F /usr/ipc/lib/auth* -authentication -.TP -.F /usr/ipc/lib/serv* -servers -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR push (1), -.IR dcon (1), -.IR cu (1), -.IR dkmgr (8), -.IR svcmgr (8), -.IR tcpmgr (8), -.IR ipc (3) -.br -D. L. Presotto, -`Interprocess Communication in the Eighth Edition -.SM UNIX -System', -this manual, Volume\ 2 -.SH BUGS -The remote standard error and standard output are combined -and go inseparably to the local standard output. -.br -Under -.I rx, -a program -that should behave specially towards terminals may not: -.IR sh (1) -will not prompt, -.IR vi (1) -will not manage the screen, etc. -.I Nrx -(see -.IR dcon (1)) -avoids this trouble, but has others of its own. -.br -.I Con -and -.I rx -may not guess the right kind of connection. -In case of trouble, try the programs in -.IR dcon (1). -.br -The names in -.F /usr/bin/m -are conventions, not actual network addresses. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cospan.1 b/static/v10/man1/cospan.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d672e447..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cospan.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,315 +0,0 @@ -.TH COSPAN 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -cospan, psr \- coordination-specification analyzer -and pretty-printer -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cospan -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file -.PP -.B psr -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cospan -analyzes the behavior of coordinating systems. -Three types of input -.I file -are distinguished by suffix: -.TP -.B .sr -The normal case. -The file contains -.SM S/R -specifications as described in the reference, possibly including -.IR cpp (8) -commands, to be compiled into -.TP -.B .c -C code, which is compiled and linked into -.TP -.B .an -executable analysis program. -.PP -The options are -.TP -.BI -D name = value -.PD0 -.TP -.BI -D name -.TP -.BI -U name -.TP -.BI -I directory -Same as in -.IR cc (1). -.PD -.TP -.B -v -Produce verbose syntax error messages. -.TP -.B -p -Suppress file-name/line-number information -for embedded C code. -.TP -.B -i -Produce an implementation version of -the C code. -.TP -.B -m -Produce a merged version of -the C code. -.TP -.B -n -Compile no transition checks (except deadlocks). -By default, the analysis gives a warning on the first stability violation -and aborts on non-semi-deterministic resolutions. -.TP -.B -b -Use C built-in (machine-dependent) -integer division operations. -By default, an -.SM S/R -integer division -.IB i / j -results in the greatest integer not higher then the -mathematical quotient, and the remainder operation -.IB i " mod " j -yields a result in the range -.RI 0... j \-1. -.TP -.BI -C opt -Pass option -.BI - opt -to the C compiler. -.TP -.BI -h size -Set the state hash table size to the next prime after -.I size ; -default is 32693. -.TP -.BI -H size -Similar to -.BI \-h size, -except that states which produce hash collisions are ignored. -.TP -.BI -t secs -Abort analysis after -the specified number of seconds. -.TP -.BI -V s -Produce verbose analysis output messages. -The string -.I s, -by default -.LR awel , -specifies message types: -.I advice, warning, error, -or -.I list. -.TP -.B -r -Restart previously aborted analysis. -Recovery is possible in cases of hangups, interrupts, -software termination signals (due to a kill command), -timer alarms, no-space conditions, and aborts due to -.B -c -or -.B -L -requests. -.TP -.B -d -Abort on deadlocks. -By default, the analysis gives a warning on the first deadlock and reports -the number of deadlocks in the analysis summary. -.TP -.B -s -Abort on stability failures. -.TP -.B -l -List analysis on standard output. -.TP -.BI -T -Time each translation and execution step. -.PD0 -.TP -.BI -L number,number -List analysis, reporting states -in the given range, and abort after searching the upper bound. -.TP -.BI -c number -Check each back-edge in the -component identified by the given -.I number -and abort analysis. -.PP -.TP -.BI CC= name -Use an alternate C compiler; default is -.BR CC=cc . -.PD -.PP -The order of the arguments is arbitrary, and several options may -be combined to a single argument, provided that option -values are terminated by white space. -Options can be preset by defining the environment variable -.BR COSPANOPT . -.PP -.I Psr -is a pretty-printer for -.SM S/R -specifications. -It places -.IR troff (1) -or -.I nroff -output on the standard output. -.PP -The options, which may be reset between -.I files, -are: -.TP -.B -d -Show current date in page footer. -.TP -.B -m -show file modification time in footer (default). -.TP -.BI -n N -Number every -.IR N th -line; default is -.BR -n0, -no numbering. -.TP -.BI -s N -Set type size -to -.I N -points, vertical spacing to -.IR N /60 -inch, and tab stops every -.IR N /20 -inch. -.TP -.BI -w N -Set the page width -to -.IR N -(in -.I troff -notation). -.PD0 -.TP -.BI -f F -Use the -.I troff -font -.I F -and its italic, bold, and bold-italic counterparts. -Known fonts are -Bembo, CW, Euro, Futura, H, Hcond, Memphis, Optima, PA, R. -.TP -.BI -. request -Issue a -.I troff -request before printing the next -.IR file . -Multiple requests may be given. -.TP -.BI -T name -As in -.I troff. -Applies to all -.IR files . -If -.I name -is omitted, -.I troff -input is written on standard output. -.PD -.PP -.I Psr -sets the escape character to -.SM BEL. -The \e character is copied without -interpretation, to allow printing of embedded C code. -The macro -.B .SO -may be used to include -.I troff -text that uses the standard -escape character. -.PP -The strings -.BI DT , -.BI L , -and -.B R -contain today's date, the left-hand, and the right-hand side -of the page header, respectively. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.B COSPANOPT=-TlImyincludedir cospan myfile.sr -equivalent to -.BR "cospan -T -l -Imyincludedir myfile.sr" . -.TP -.B psr -.ll6.5i -.lt6.5i myfile.sr -equivalent to -.BR "psr -w6.5i myfile.sr -.SH "FILES" -.TF /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.psr -.TP -.F *.R -recovery data -.PD0 -.TP -.F *.T -error track -.TP -.F *.L -list output ( -.B -L -option) -.TP -.F *.M -merging data -.TP -.F /tmp/srtm?????? -temporary file -.TP -.F /usr/lib/sr -S/R compiler -.TP -.F /usr/lib/sr_D -S/R verbose compiler -.TP -.F /usr/include/crank.h -header file -.TP -.F /usr/include/crunch.h -implementation header file -.TP -.F /usr/libsr.a -analysis object library -.TP -.F /usr/lib/pretty -.I troff -preprocessor -.TP -.F /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.psr -.I troff -macros -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Z. Har'El and R. P. Kurshan, -.I -COSPAN User's Guide, -11211-871009-21TM, AT&T Bell Laboratories. -.IR spin (1), -.IR d202 (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/courier.1 b/static/v10/man1/courier.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 598707e9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/courier.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -.TH COURIER 1 -.SH NAME -courier \- remote procedure call compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B courier -[ -.B \-x -] -.I specfile -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Courier -compiles the Mesa-like specification language -associated with the Courier remote procedure call protocol. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'prog_server.c 'u -prog.cr Courier specification file for \fIprog\fR. -.PP -The following files are generated by courier from the above: -.LP -prog.h definitions and typedefs -.br -prog_stubs.c mappings between C and Courier -.br -prog_server.c server routines -.br -prog_client.c client routines -.SH BUGS -Note that program names are restricted to 5 characters to keep -generated filenames within the 14 character limit. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Eric C. Cooper, -`Writing Distributed Programs with Courier' -.br -`Courier: The Remote Procedure Call Protocol,' -Xerox System Integration Standard 038112, -December 1981. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cp.1 b/static/v10/man1/cp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b1f61d95..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CP (I)'1/24/73'CP (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME cp -- copy -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS cp__ file918 file928 -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION The -first file is copied onto the second. -The mode and owner of the target file -are preserved if it already -existed; the mode of the source file -is used otherwise. -.sp -If file928 is a directory, then the target -file is a file in that directory with the file-name -of file918. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO cat(I), pr(I), mv(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS Error returns are -checked at every system call, and -appropriate diagnostics are produced. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS Copying -a file onto itself destroys its contents. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cpio.1 b/static/v10/man1/cpio.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b4129266..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cpio.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,184 +0,0 @@ -.TH CPIO 1 -.CT 1 comm_users -.SH NAME -cpio \- copy file archives in and out -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cpio -.BI -o -[ -.I acBv -] -.PP -.B cpio -.BI -i -[ -.I BcdmrtuvfsSb6 -] -[ -.I pattern ... -] -.PP -.B cpio -.BI -p -[ -.I adlmruv -] -.I directory -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Cpio -o -(copy out) -reads the standard input to obtain a list of path names -and copies those files onto the -standard output -together with path name and status information. -.PP -.B Cpio -i -(copy in) -extracts files from the -standard input -which is assumed to be the product of a previous -.BR "cpio -o" . -Only files with names that match the -.I patterns -are selected. -.I Patterns -are given in the name-generating notation of -.IR sh (1); -the default is -.BR * -(all files). -The extracted files are conditionally created and copied -into the current directory tree -based upon the options described below. -File ownership is preserved if possible. -.PP -.B Cpio -p -(pass) reads from the standard input a list of path names -of files to copy -into the destination -.IR directory. -.PP -The options are: -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP -.B a -Reset access times of input files after they have been copied. -.TP -.B B -Input/output is to be blocked 5,120 bytes to the record -(does not apply to the -.I pass\^ -option; meaningful only with data directed to or from -.FR /dev/rmt? ). -.TP -.B d -.I Directories\^ -are to be created as needed. -.TP -.B c -Write header -information in -.SM ASCII -character form for portability. -.TP -.B r -Interactively rename -files. -An empty name (newline only) causes a file to be skipped. -.TP -.B t -Print a table of contents -of the input. -No files are created. -.TP -.B u -Copy unconditionally -(normally an older file will not overwrite a newer file). -.TP -.B v -(Verbose) -List file -names; -.B -vt -looks like -.BR "ls -l" . -.TP -.B l -Whenever possible, link files rather than copying them. -Usable only with -the -.B -p -option. -.TP -.B m -Retain previous file modification time. -This option is ineffective on directories that are being copied. -.TP -.B f -Copy in all files except those in -.I patterns.\^ -.TP -.B s -Swap bytes. -Use only with the -.B -i -option. -.TP -.B S -Swap halfwords. -Use only with the -.B -i -option. -.TP -.B b -Swap both bytes and halfwords. -Use only with the -.B -i -option. -.TP -.B 6 -Process an old (i.e., -.SM UNIX Sixth\^ -Edition format) -file. -Only useful with -.B -i -(copy in). -.PD -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -ls | cpio -oc >/dev/mt1 -Copy the contents of the current directory to a tape. -.PP -.EX -mkdir newdir -cd olddir -find . -print | cpio -pd ../newdir -.EE -.ns -.IP -Reproduce a directory hierarchy; -.B newdir -must exist. -.PD -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR ar (1), -.IR bundle (1), -.IR tar (1), -.IR find (1), -.IR cpio (5), -.IR cp (1) -.SH BUGS -Path names are restricted to 128 characters. -.br -Does not know about symbolic links. -.br -If there are too many unique linked files, -linking information is lost. -.br -Only the super-user can copy special files. -.br -The archive size is reported in archaic `blocks' of 512 bytes. -.\" @(#)cpio.1 5.2 of 5/18/82 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cq.1 b/static/v10/man1/cq.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 18561305..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cq.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -Section s22 returned 0. -Decimal and octal/hex constants sometimes give - different results when assigned to longs. -Decimal and octal/hex constants sometimes give - different results when assigned to longs. -Decimal and octal/hex constants sometimes give - different results when assigned to longs. -Section s241 returned 0. -Section s243 returned 0. -Section s244 returned 0. -Section s25 returned 0. - 8 bits in chars. - 32 bits in ints. - 16 bits in shorts. - 32 bits in longs. - 32 bits in unsigneds. - 32 bits in floats. - 64 bits in doubles. -5.960464e-08 is the least number that can be added to 1. (float). -1.387779e-17 is the least number that can be added to 1. (double). -Section s26 returned 0. -Section s4 returned 0. -Section s61 returned 0. -Section s626 returned 0. -Section s71 returned 0. -Section s72 returned 0. -Section s757 returned 0. -Section s7813 returned 0. -Section s714 returned 0. -Section s715 returned 0. -Register count for char is unreliable. -Register count for pointer is unreliable. -Register count for int is unreliable. -Section s81 returned 0. -Section s84 returned 0. -char alignment: 1 -short alignment: 2 -int alignment: 4 -long alignment: 4 -unsigned alignment: 4 -float alignment: 4 -double alignment: 4 -Sign extension in fields -Be especially careful with 1-bit fields! -Section s85 returned 0. -Section s86 returned 0. -Section s88 returned 0. -Section s9 returned 0. - -No errors detected. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cray.1 b/static/v10/man1/cray.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b91ce672..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cray.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ -.TH CRAY 1 -.CT 1 comm_mach -.SH NAME -cray \- run job remotely on cray-xmp -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cray -[ -.I options -] -[ -.I jcl -[ -[ -.B + -] -.I file -] -... -] -.PP -.B c1sts -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cray -submits the named files to the MHCC Cray. -A plus sign stands for a Cray end-of-file, -which separates jcl, source code, and data files. -A file -.I jcl -that doesn't exist in the current directory -is searched for in the directory specified -by the shell environment variable CRAYJCL. -.TP 1i -.BI -o ofile -Send the job output to -.I ofile. -.TP 1i -.BI -p pages -If the jcl file doesn't begin with a job line, -.I cray -supplies one. -In that case, -the option -.BI -p n -specifies the maximum number of pages -(actually, 45-line blocks) -that can be output; -the default is 100. -.TP 1i -.BI -s n -Run the job at service grade -.I n. -(The default is -.LR -s2 ; -fastest is -.LR -s1 ; -long runs should be at -.Lr -s4 .) -.TP 1i -.BI -t seconds -If the jcl file doesn't begin with a job line, -specifies the maximum running time; -the default is 15. -.PP -.I C1sts -gives a status report on the cray. -.SH EXAMPLES -Run a Fortran program and subroutine, reading from param -on unit 5 and writing on unit 6, -.TP -.L -cray -o output ft + main.f sub.f + param -Run a Fortran program and subroutine, reading from param -on unit 5 and writing on unit 6, -.SH BUGS -Because of a problem with the standard input, the -.B -o -option is required for remote execution via Datakit. -.SH "THE FIRST TIME" -An incredible amount of busywork is required the first -time you use this command. -Get an account on mhuxa by filing an application -at the computer center accounting office, -and if possible get password aging turned off. -Set up your -.F .profile -on your home machine -and in the comp center so that remote execution in either -direction gets a silent login. -(Otherwise, you may get a `Bad magic number' -message when trying to execute a push.) -(Try copying the mhuxa file -.FR /a2/c1127/ehg/.profile .) -Set up mail forwarding from mhuxa to your -home machine. -(See -.FR /usr/mail/ehg .) -Now, from your home machine, execute -.IP -.L dkcc mhcc/mhuxa who -.LP -to be sure everything is set up properly. -The first time you try this, you will be asked to -login; this legalizes remote execution from your -home machine onto the comp center machine. -For the reverse direction, -your user id should be added to -.F /etc/procuid.local -on your home machine. -Export -.L CRAYJCL=/n/swift/usr/lsrc/cmd/cray/Jcl -from your -.F .profile -on your home machine. -By editing a copy of -.F /usr/bin/crmail -in your bin, -you can arrange for special action to be taken when -your output arrives; the default is mail notification. -Now you should be ready to run; try -.IP -.L cray -s1 -o tmp audit -.LP -If you don't get some job output back from the cray within a few minutes, -something is wrong. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cref.1 b/static/v10/man1/cref.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ffa705bb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cref.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CREF (I)'2/5/1973'CREF (I)' -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -NAME cref -- make cross reference listing -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS cref____ [ -soi____ ] name1 ... -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION CREF makes a cross reference listing -of files in assembler format (see AS(I)). The files -named as arguments in the command -line are searched for symbols (defined as a succession -of alphabetics, numerics, '.', or '_', beginning with -an alphabetic, '.', or '_'). -.sp -The output report is in four columns: -.nf -.sp -(1) (2) (3) (4) -symbol file see text as it appears in file - below -.sp -.fi -The third column contains the line number in the file -by default; the -s__ option -will cause the most recent name symbol to appear there -instead. -.sp -CREF uses either an ignore______ file or an only____ file. -If the -i__ option is given, it will take the next -file name to be an ignore______ file; if the -o__ option -is given, the next file name will be taken as an only____ file. -Ignore______ and only____ -files should be lists of symbols separated by new lines. -If an ignore______ file is given, all the symbols in the file -will be ignored in columns (1) and (3) of the output. -If an only____ file is given, only symbols appearing in the -file will appear in column (1), but column (3) -will still contain the most recent name encountered. -Only one of the options -i__ or --o__ may be used. -The default setting -is -i__; -all symbols predefined in the assembler are ignored, except -system call names, which are collected. -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -FILES Files t.0, t.1, t.2, t.3 are -created (i.e. DESTROYED) in the working -directory of anyone -using cref____. This nuisance will be repaired soon. -The output is left in file s.out_____ in the working directory. -.sp -/usr/lem/s.tab is the default ignore______ file. -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO as(I) -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "line too long" -- input line >131 characters -.nf -.sp -"symbol too long" -- symbol >20 characters -.sp -"too many symbols" -- >10 symbols in line -.sp -"cannot open t.?" -- bug; see LEM -.sp -"cannot fork; examine t.out" -- can't start sort____ -.in 20 -.fi -process; intermediate results are on files t.0___, -t.1___,t.2___,t.3___. These may be sorted independently -and the results concatenated by the user. -.sp -.in 16 -"cannot sort" -- odd response from sort____; examine -.in 20 -intermediate results, as above. -.sp -.in16 -.nf -"impossible situation" -- system bug -.sp -"cannot open" file -- one of the input names -.in 20 -.fi -cannot be opened for reading. -.in16 -.nf -.sp -.fi -.in16 -.ti 0 -BUGS The destruction of -unsuspecting users' files should soon be fixed. -A limitation that may eventually go away is the -restriction to assembler language format. There -should be options for FORTRAN, English, etc., lexical -analysis. -.sp -File names longer than eight characters cause misalignment in -the output if tabs are set at every eighth column. - -It should -write on the standard output, not s.out. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 b/static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e991eb80..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH CROPMARKS 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B cropmarks -\- add cropmarks to PostScript files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBcropmarks\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Cropmarks -surrounds PostScript -.I files -with code that centers each page and adds cropmarks to the four -corners. -The results are written on the standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.I files, -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-d -Disable the device-dependent PostScript code that expands page sizes. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-h num -Set the height of each page to -.I num -inches. -The default is 11.0 inches. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-s -Scale pages so cropmarks always show up. -Primarily for debugging and development on devices that don't adjust -page sizes. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-w num -Set the width of each page to -.I num -inches. -The default is 8.5 inches. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/cropmarks.ps . -.PP -Height and width set with the -.OP \-h -and -.OP \-w -options adjust the size of the image area available on each sheet -of paper. -Neither suggests anything about the orientation of output in that area. -Cropmarks are printed at each corner just outside the image area. -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -Print text in a 6.5\(mu8.0-inch area centered on each sheet of paper: -.EX -troff -mm \f2file\fP | dpost | cropmarks -w6.5 -h8.0 | \f2spool -.EE -Print landscape text in exactly the same 6.5\(mu8.0-inch area: -.EX -troff -mm \f2file\fP | dpost -pland | cropmarks -w6.5 -h8.0 | \f2spool -.EE -In both examples, -.I spool -is the spooling command used to send PostScript output to a local printer. -.SH WARNINGS -.PP -Device-dependent PostScript code to automatically expand page sizes may -only work on Linotronic 200P typesetters that use 12-inch-wide paper. -Local changes to the printer-dependent code can be made in the -.MW expandpagesize -procedure defined in -.MR \*(dQ/cropmarks.ps . -.PP -The PostScript -.I files -must be reasonably well behaved. -There are no guarantees, particularly if the input -.I files -redefine the -.MW showpage -operator. -.PP -The program is unsupported and may not be included in future releases. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/cropmarks.ps -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BRpostio (1), -.BR troff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/crypt.1 b/static/v10/man1/crypt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1f366e1d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/crypt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'CRYPT (I)'10/23/71'CRYPT (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME crypt -- encode/decode -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS crypt_____ [ password ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION crypt_____ -is an exact implementation of Boris Hagelin's -cryptographic machine called the M-209 by the U. S. Army [1]. - -crypt_____ reads from the standard input file and writes -on the standard output. -For a given password, the encryption -process is idempotent; -that is, - - crypt znorkle cypher - crypt znorkle ' `(' `)' -form separate words. -If doubled in `&&', `|\|\||', `<<' or `>>' these pairs form single words. -These parser metacharacters may be made part of other words, or prevented their -special meaning, by preceding them with `\e'. -A newline preceded by a `\e' is equivalent to a blank. -.PP -In addition strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotations, -`\*(aa', `\*(ga' or `"', -form parts of a word; metacharacters in these strings, including blanks -and tabs, do not form separate words. -These quotations have semantics to be described subsequently. -Within pairs of `\'' or `"' characters a newline preceded by a `\e' gives -a true newline character. -.PP -When the shell's input is not a terminal, -the character `#' introduces a comment which continues to the end of the -input line. -It is prevented this special meaning when preceded by `\e' -and in quotations using `\`', `\'', and `"'. -.sh "Commands" -A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which -specifies the command to be executed. -A simple command or -a sequence of simple commands separated by `|' characters -forms a pipeline. -The output of each command in a pipeline is connected to the input of the next. -Sequences of pipelines may be separated by `;', and are then executed -sequentially. -A sequence of pipelines may be executed without immediately -waiting for it to terminate by following it with an `&'. -.PP -Any of the above may be placed in `(' `)' to form a simple command (which -may be a component of a pipeline, etc.) -It is also possible to separate pipelines with `|\|\||' or `&&' indicating, -as in the C language, -that the second is to be executed only if the first fails or succeeds -respectively. (See -.I Expressions.) -.sh "Jobs" -The shell associates a \fIjob\fR with each pipeline. It keeps -a table of current jobs, printed by the -\fIjobs\fR command, and assigns them small integer numbers. When -a job is started asynchronously with `&', the shell prints a line which looks -like: -.PP -.DT - [1] 1234 -.PP -indicating that the jobs which was started asynchronously was job number -1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process id was 1234. -.PP -If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the key -\fB^Z\fR (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to the current job. -The shell will then normally indicate that the job has been `Stopped', -and print another prompt. You can then manipulate the state of this job, -putting it in the background with the \fIbg\fR command, or run some other -commands and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground with -the foreground command \fIfg\fR. A \fB^Z\fR takes effect immediately and -is like an interrupt in that pending output and unread input are discarded -when it is typed. There is another special key \fB^Y\fR which does -not generate a STOP signal until a program attempts to -.IR read (2) -it. -This can usefully be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands -for a job which you wish to stop after it has read them. -.PP -A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read -from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, -but this can be disabled by giving the command ``stty tostop''. -If you set this -tty option, then background jobs will stop when they try to produce -output like they do when they try to read input. -.PP -There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character -`%' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can -name it as `%1'. Just naming a job brings it to the foreground; thus -`%1' is a synonym for `fg %1', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. -Similarly saying `%1 &' resumes job 1 in the background. -Jobs can also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start them, -if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus `%ex' would normally restart -a suspended -.IR ex (1) -job, if there were only one suspended job whose name began with -the string `ex'. It is also possible to say `%?string' -which specifies a job whose text contains -.I string, -if there is only one such job. -.PP -The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. -In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is marked with a `+' -and the previous job with a `\-'. The abbreviation `%+' refers -to the current job and `%\-' refers to the previous job. For close -analogy with the syntax of the -.I history -mechanism (described below), -`%%' is also a synonym for the current job. -.sh "Status reporting" -This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state. -It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that -no further progress is possible, but only just before it prints -a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your work. -If, however, you set the shell variable -.I notify, -the shell will notify you immediately of changes of status in background -jobs. -There is also a shell command -.I notify -which marks a single process so that its status changes will be immediately -reported. By default -.I notify -marks the current process; -simply say `notify' after starting a background job to mark it. -.PP -When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you will -be warned that `You have stopped jobs.' You may use the \fIjobs\fR -command to see what they are. If you do this or immediately try to -exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time, and the suspended -jobs will be terminated. -.sh Substitutions -We now describe the various transformations the shell performs on the -input in the order in which they occur. -.sh "History substitutions" -History substitutions place words from previous command input as portions -of new commands, making it easy to repeat commands, repeat arguments -of a previous command in the current command, or fix spelling mistakes -in the previous command with little typing and a high degree of confidence. -History substitutions begin with the character `!' and may begin -.B anywhere -in the input stream (with the proviso that they -.B "do not" -nest.) -This `!' may be preceded by an `\e' to prevent its special meaning; for -convenience, a `!' is passed unchanged when it is followed by a blank, -tab, newline, `=' or `('. -(History substitutions also occur when an input line begins with `\*(ua'. -This special abbreviation will be described later.) -Any input line which contains history substitution is echoed on the terminal -before it is executed as it could have been typed without history substitution. -.PP -Commands input from the terminal which consist of one or more words -are saved on the history list. -The history substitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these -saved commands into the input stream. -The size of which is controlled by the -.I history -variable; the previous command is always retained, regardless of its value. -Commands are numbered sequentially from 1. -.PP -For definiteness, consider the following output from the -.I history -command: -.PP -.DT -.br - \09 write michael -.br - 10 ex write.c -.br - 11 cat oldwrite.c -.br - 12 diff *write.c -.PP -The commands are shown with their event numbers. -It is not usually necessary to use event numbers, but the current event -number can be made part of the -.I prompt -by placing an `!' in the prompt string. -.PP -With the current event 13 we can refer to previous events by event -number `!11', relatively as in `!\-2' (referring to the same event), -by a prefix of a command word -as in `!d' for event 12 or `!wri' for event 9, or by a string contained in -a word in the command as in `!?mic?' also referring to event 9. -These forms, without further modification, simply reintroduce the words -of the specified events, each separated by a single blank. -As a special case `!!' refers to the previous command; thus `!!' -alone is essentially a -.I redo. -.PP -To select words from an event we can follow the event specification by -a `:' and a designator for the desired words. -The words of a input line are numbered from 0, -the first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first argument) -being 1, etc. -The basic word designators are: -.PP -.DT -.nf - 0 first (command) word - \fIn\fR \fIn\fR\|'th argument - \*(ua first argument, i.e. `1' - $ last argument - % word matched by (immediately preceding) ?\fIs\fR\|? search - \fIx\fR\|\-\fIy\fR range of words - \-\fIy\fR abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR\|' - * abbreviates `\*(ua\-$', or nothing if only 1 word in event - \fIx\fR\|* abbreviates `\fIx\fR\|\-$' - \fIx\fR\|\- like `\fIx\fR\|*' but omitting word `$' -.fi -.PP -The `:' separating the event specification from the word designator -can be omitted if the argument selector begins with a `\*(ua', `$', `*' -`\-' or `%'. -After the optional word designator can be -placed a sequence of modifiers, each preceded by a `:'. -The following modifiers are defined: -.ta .5i 1.2i -.PP -.nf - h Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving the head. - r Remove a trailing `.xxx' component, leaving the root name. - e Remove all but the extension `.xxx' part. - s/\fIl\fR\|/\fIr\fR\|/ Substitute \fIl\fR for \fIr\fR - t Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail. - & Repeat the previous substitution. - g Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. `g&'. - p Print the new command but do not execute it. - q Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions. - x Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines. -.fi -.PP -Unless preceded by a `g' the modification is applied only to the first -modifiable word. With substitutions, it is an error for no word to be -applicable. -.PP -The left hand side of substitutions are not regular expressions in the sense -of the editors, but rather strings. -Any character may be used as the delimiter in place of `/'; -a `\e' quotes the delimiter into the -.IR l "" -and -.IR r "" -strings. -The character `&' in the right hand side is replaced by the text from -the left. -A `\e' quotes `&' also. -A null -.IR l "" -uses the previous string either from a -.IR l "" -or from a -contextual scan string -.IR s "" -in `!?\fIs\fR\|?'. -The trailing delimiter in the substitution may be omitted if a newline -follows immediately as may the trailing `?' in a contextual scan. -.PP -A history reference may be given without an event specification, e.g. `!$'. -In this case the reference is to the previous command unless a previous -history reference occurred on the same line in which case this form repeats -the previous reference. -Thus `!?foo?\*(ua !$' gives the first and last arguments -from the command matching `?foo?'. -.PP -A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when the first -non-blank character of an input line is a `\*(ua'. -This is equivalent to `!:s\*(ua' providing a convenient shorthand for substitutions -on the text of the previous line. -Thus `\*(ualb\*(ualib' fixes the spelling of -`lib' -in the previous command. -Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded with `{' and `}' -if necessary to insulate it from the characters which follow. -Thus, after `ls \-ld ~paul' we might do `!{l}a' to do `ls \-ld ~paula', -while `!la' would look for a command starting `la'. -.PP -.if n .ul -\fBQuotations\ with\ \'\ and\ "\fR -.PP -The quotation of strings by `\'' and `"' can be used -to prevent all or some of the remaining substitutions. -Strings enclosed in `\'' are prevented any further interpretation. -Strings enclosed in `"' are yet variable and command expanded -as described below. -.PP -In both cases the resulting text becomes (all or part of) a single word; -only in one special case (see -.I "Command Substitition" -below) does a `"' quoted string yield parts of more than one word; -`\'' quoted strings never do. -.sh "Alias substitution" -The shell maintains a list of aliases which can be established, displayed -and modified by the -.I alias -and -.I unalias -commands. -After a command line is scanned, it is parsed into distinct commands and -the first word of each command, left-to-right, is checked to see if it -has an alias. -If it does, then the text which is the alias for that command is reread -with the history mechanism available -as though that command were the previous input line. -The resulting words replace the -command and argument list. -If no reference is made to the history list, then the argument list is -left unchanged. -.PP -Thus if the alias for `ls' is `ls \-l' the command `ls /usr' would map to -`ls \-l /usr', the argument list here being undisturbed. -Similarly if the alias for `lookup' was `grep !\*(ua /etc/passwd' then -`lookup bill' would map to `grep bill /etc/passwd'. -.PP -If an alias is found, the word transformation of the input text -is performed and the aliasing process begins again on the reformed input line. -Looping is prevented if the first word of the new text is the same as the old -by flagging it to prevent further aliasing. -Other loops are detected and cause an error. -.PP -Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser metasyntax. -Thus we can `alias print \'pr \e!* \||\| lpr\'' to make a command which -.I pr's -its arguments to the line printer. -.sh "Variable substitution" -The shell maintains a set of variables, each of which has as value a list -of zero or more words. -Some of these variables are set by the shell or referred to by it. -For instance, the -.I argv -variable is an image of the shell's argument list, and words of this -variable's value are referred to in special ways. -.PP -The values of variables may be displayed and changed by using the -.I set -and -.I unset -commands. -Of the variables referred to by the shell a number are toggles; -the shell does not care what their value is, -only whether they are set or not. -For instance, the -.I verbose -variable is a toggle which causes command input to be echoed. -The setting of this variable results from the -.B \-v -command line option. -.PP -Other operations treat variables numerically. -The `@' command permits numeric calculations to be performed and the result -assigned to a variable. -Variable values are, however, always represented as (zero or more) strings. -For the purposes of numeric operations, the null string is considered to be -zero, and the second and subsequent words of multiword values are ignored. -.PP -After the input line is aliased and parsed, and before each command -is executed, variable substitution -is performed keyed by `$' characters. -This expansion can be prevented by preceding the `$' with a `\e' except -within `"'s where it -.B always -occurs, and within `\''s where it -.B never -occurs. -Strings quoted by `\*(ga' are interpreted later (see -.I "Command substitution" -below) so `$' substitution does not occur there until later, if at all. -A `$' is passed unchanged if followed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line. -.PP -Input/output redirections are recognized before variable expansion, -and are variable expanded separately. -Otherwise, the command name and entire argument list are expanded together. -It is thus possible for the first (command) word to this point to generate -more than one word, the first of which becomes the command name, -and the rest of which become arguments. -.PP -Unless enclosed in `"' or given the `:q' modifier the results of variable -substitution may eventually be command and filename substituted. -Within `"' a variable whose value consists of multiple words expands to a -(portion of) a single word, with the words of the variables value -separated by blanks. -When the `:q' modifier is applied to a substitution -the variable will expand to multiple words with each word separated -by a blank and quoted to prevent later command or filename substitution. -.PP -The following metasequences are provided for introducing variable values into -the shell input. -Except as noted, it is an error to reference a variable which is not set. -.HP 5 -$name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -${name} -.br -Are replaced by the words of the value of variable -.I name, -each separated by a blank. -Braces insulate -.I name -from following characters which would otherwise be part of it. -Shell variables have names consisting of up to 20 letters and digits -starting with a letter. The underscore character is considered a letter. -.br -If -.I name -is not a shell variable, but is set in the environment, then -that value is returned (but \fB:\fR modifiers and the other forms -given below are not available in this case). -.HP 5 -$name[selector] -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -${name[selector]} -.br -May be used to select only some of the words from the value of -.I name. -The selector is subjected to `$' substitution and may consist of a single -number or two numbers separated by a `\-'. -The first word of a variables value is numbered `1'. -If the first number of a range is omitted it defaults to `1'. -If the last member of a range is omitted it defaults to `$#name'. -The selector `*' selects all words. -It is not an error for a range to be empty if the second argument is omitted -or in range. -.HP 5 -$#name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -${#name} -.br -Gives the number of words in the variable. -This is useful for later use in a `[selector]'. -.HP 5 -$0 -.br -Substitutes the name of the file from which command input is being read. -An error occurs if the name is not known. -.HP 5 -$number -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -${number} -.br -Equivalent to `$argv[number]'. -.HP 5 -$* -.br -Equivalent to `$argv[*]'. -.PP -The modifiers `:h', `:t', `:r', `:q' and `:x' may be applied to -the substitutions above as may `:gh', `:gt' and `:gr'. -If braces `{' '}' appear in the command form then the modifiers -must appear within the braces. -.B "The current implementation allows only one `:' modifier on each `$' expansion." -.PP -The following substitutions may not be modified with `:' modifiers. -.HP 5 -$?name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -${?name} -.br -Substitutes the string `1' if name is set, `0' if it is not. -.HP 5 -$?0 -.br -Substitutes `1' if the current input filename is know, `0' if it is not. -.HP 5 -$$ -.br -Substitute the (decimal) process number of the (parent) shell. -.HP 5 -$< -.br -Substitutes a line from the standard -input, with no further interpretation thereafter. It can be used -to read from the keyboard in a shell script. -.sh "Command and filename substitution" -The remaining substitutions, command and filename substitution, -are applied selectively to the arguments of builtin commands. -This means that portions of expressions which are not evaluated are -not subjected to these expansions. -For commands which are not internal to the shell, the command -name is substituted separately from the argument list. -This occurs very late, -after input-output redirection is performed, and in a child -of the main shell. -.sh "Command substitution" -Command substitution is indicated by a command enclosed in `\*(ga'. -The output from such a command is normally broken into separate words -at blanks, tabs and newlines, with null words being discarded, -this text then replacing the original string. -Within `"'s, only newlines force new words; blanks and tabs are preserved. -.PP -In any case, the single final newline does not force a new word. -Note that it is thus possible for a command substitution to yield -only part of a word, even if the command outputs a complete line. -.sh "Filename substitution" -If a word contains any of the characters `*', `?', `[' or `{' -or begins with the character `~', then that word is a candidate for -filename substitution, also known as `globbing'. -This word is then regarded as a pattern, and replaced with an alphabetically -sorted list of file names which match the pattern. -In a list of words specifying filename substitution it is an error for -no pattern to match an existing file name, but it is not required -for each pattern to match. -Only the metacharacters `*', `?' and `[' imply pattern matching, -the characters `~' and `{' being more akin to abbreviations. -.PP -In matching filenames, the character `.' at the beginning of a filename -or immediately following a `/', as well as the character `/' must -be matched explicitly. -The character `*' matches any string of characters, including the null -string. -The character `?' matches any single character. -The sequence `[...]' matches any one of the characters enclosed. -Within `[...]', -a pair of characters separated by `\-' matches any character lexically between -the two. -.PP -The character `~' at the beginning of a filename is used to refer to home -directories. -Standing alone, i.e. `~' it expands to the invokers home directory as reflected -in the value of the variable -.I home. -When followed by a name consisting of letters, digits and `\-' characters -the shell searches for a user with that name and substitutes their -home directory; thus `~ken' might expand to `/usr/ken' and `~ken/chmach' -to `/usr/ken/chmach'. -If the character `~' is followed by a character other than a letter or `/' -or appears not at the beginning of a word, -it is left undisturbed. -.PP -The metanotation `a{b,c,d}e' is a shorthand for `abe ace ade'. -Left to right order is preserved, with results of matches being sorted -separately at a low level to preserve this order. -This construct may be nested. -Thus `~source/s1/{oldls,ls}.c' expands to -`/usr/source/s1/oldls.c /usr/source/s1/ls.c' -whether or not these files exist without any chance of error -if the home directory for `source' is `/usr/source'. -Similarly `../{memo,*box}' might expand to `../memo ../box ../mbox'. -(Note that `memo' was not sorted with the results of matching `*box'.) -As a special case `{', `}' and `{}' are passed undisturbed. -.sh Input/output -The standard input and standard output of a command may be redirected -with the following syntax: -.HP 5 -< name -.br -Open file -.I name -(which is first variable, command and filename expanded) as the standard -input. -.HP 5 -<< word -.br -Read the shell input up to a line which is identical to -.I word. -.I Word -is not subjected to variable, filename or command substitution, -and each input line is compared to -.I word -before any substitutions are done on this input line. -Unless a quoting `\e', `"', `\*(aa' or `\*(ga' appears in -.I word -variable and command substitution is performed on the intervening lines, -allowing `\e' to quote `$', `\e' and `\*(ga'. -Commands which are substituted have all blanks, tabs, and newlines -preserved, except for the final newline which is dropped. -The resultant text is placed in an anonymous temporary file which -is given to the command as standard input. -.HP 5 -> name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 ->! name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 ->& name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 ->&! name -.br -The file -.I name -is used as standard output. -If the file does not exist then it is created; -if the file exists, its is truncated, its previous contents being lost. -.IP -If the variable -.I noclobber -is set, then the file must not exist or be a character special file (e.g. a -terminal or `/dev/null') or an error results. -This helps prevent accidental destruction of files. -In this case the `!' forms can be used and suppress this check. -.IP -The forms involving `&' route the diagnostic output into the specified -file as well as the standard output. -.I Name -is expanded in the same way as `<' input filenames are. -.HP 5 ->> name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 ->>& name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 ->>! name -.br -.ns -.HP 5 ->>&! name -.br -Uses file -.I name -as standard output like `>' but places output at the end of the file. -If the variable -.I noclobber -is set, then -it is an error for the file not to exist unless -one of the `!' forms is given. -Otherwise similar to `>'. -.PP -A command receives the environment in which the shell was -invoked as modified by the input-output parameters and -the presence of the command in a pipeline. -Thus, unlike some previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands -have no access to the text of the commands by default; rather -they receive the original standard input of the shell. -The `<<' mechanism should be used to present inline data. -This permits shell command scripts to function as components of pipelines -and allows the shell to block read its input. -Note that the default standard input for a command run detached is -.B not -modified to be the empty file `/dev/null'; rather the standard input -remains as the original standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal -and if the process attempts to read from the terminal, then the process -will block and the user will be notified (see -.B Jobs -above.) -.PP -Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe with the standard output. -Simply use the form `|\|&' rather than just `|'. -.sh Expressions -A number of the builtin commands (to be described subsequently) -take expressions, in which the operators are similar to those of C, with -the same precedence. -These expressions appear in the -.I @, -.I exit, -.I if, -and -.I while -commands. -The following operators are available: -.DT -.PP - |\|\|| && | \*(ua & == != =~ !~ <= >= < > << >> + \- * / % ! ~ ( ) -.PP -Here the precedence increases to the right, -`==' `!=' `=~' and `!~', `<=' `>=' `<' and `>', `<<' and `>>', `+' and `\-', -`*' `/' and `%' being, in groups, at the same level. -The `==' `!=' `=~' and `!~' operators compare their arguments as strings; -all others operate on numbers. -The operators `=~' and `!~' are like `!=' and `==' except that the right -hand side is a -.I pattern -(containing, e.g. `*'s, `?'s and instances of `[...]') -against which the left hand operand is matched. This reduces the -need for use of the -.I switch -statement in shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern matching. -.PP -Strings which begin with `0' are considered octal numbers. -Null or missing arguments are considered `0'. -The result of all expressions are strings, -which represent decimal numbers. -It is important to note that no two components of an expression can appear -in the same word; except when adjacent to components of expressions which -are syntactically significant to the parser (`&' `|' `<' `>' `(' `)') -they should be surrounded by spaces. -.PP -Also available in expressions as primitive operands are command executions -enclosed in `{' and `}' -and file enquiries of the form `\-\fIl\fR name' where -.I l -is one of: -.PP -.DT -.nf - r read access - w write access - x execute access - e existence - o ownership - z zero size - f plain file - d directory -.fi -.PP -The specified name is command and filename expanded and then tested -to see if it has the specified relationship to the real user. -If the file does not exist or is inaccessible then all enquiries return -false, i.e. `0'. -Command executions succeed, returning true, i.e. `1', -if the command exits with status 0, otherwise they fail, returning -false, i.e. `0'. -If more detailed status information is required then the command -should be executed outside of an expression and the variable -.I status -examined. -.sh "Control flow" -The shell contains a number of commands which can be used to regulate the -flow of control in command files (shell scripts) and -(in limited but useful ways) from terminal input. -These commands all operate by forcing the shell to reread or skip in its -input and, due to the implementation, restrict the placement of some -of the commands. -.PP -The -.I foreach, -.I switch, -and -.I while -statements, as well as the -.I if\-then\-else -form of the -.I if -statement require that the major keywords appear in a single simple command -on an input line as shown below. -.PP -If the shell's input is not seekable, -the shell buffers up input whenever a loop is being read -and performs seeks in this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading -implied by the loop. -(To the extent that this allows, backward goto's will succeed on -non-seekable inputs.) -.sh "Builtin commands" -Builtin commands are executed within the shell. -If a builtin command occurs as any component of a pipeline -except the last then it is executed in a subshell. -.HP 5 -.B alias -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR alias " name" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR alias " name wordlist" -.br -The first form prints all aliases. -The second form prints the alias for name. -The final form assigns the specified -.I wordlist -as the alias of -.I name; -.I wordlist -is command and filename substituted. -.I Name -is not allowed to be -.I alias -or -.I unalias. -.HP 5 -.B alloc -.br -Shows the amount of dynamic core in use, broken down into used and -free core, and address of the last location in the heap. -With an argument shows each used and free block on the internal dynamic -memory chain indicating its address, size, and whether it is used or free. -This is a debugging command and may not work in production versions of the -shell; it requires a modified version of the system memory allocator. -.HP 5 -.B bg -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBbg\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Puts the current or specified jobs into the background, continuing them -if they were stopped. -.HP 5 -.B break -.br -Causes execution to resume after the -.I end -of the nearest enclosing -.I foreach -or -.I while. -The remaining commands on the current line are executed. -Multi-level breaks are thus possible by writing them all on one line. -.HP 5 -.B breaksw -.br -Causes a break from a -.I switch, -resuming after the -.I endsw. -.HP 5 -.BR case " label:" -.br -A label in a -.I switch -statement as discussed below. -.HP 5 -.B cd -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR cd " name" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B chdir -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR chdir " name" -.br -Change the shells working directory to directory -.I name. -If no argument is given then change to the home directory of the user. -.br -If -.I name -is not found as a subdirectory of the current directory (and does not begin -with `/', `./' or `../'), then each -component of the variable -.I cdpath -is checked to see if it has a subdirectory -.I name. -Finally, if all else fails but -.I name -is a shell variable whose value begins with `/', then this -is tried to see if it is a directory. -.HP 5 -.B continue -.br -Continue execution of the nearest enclosing -.I while -or -.I foreach. -The rest of the commands on the current line are executed. -.HP 5 -.B default: -.br -Labels the default case in a -.I switch -statement. -The default should come after all -.I case -labels. -.HP 5 -.BR "dirs" -.br -Prints the directory stack; the top of the stack is at the left, -the first directory in the stack being the current directory. -.HP 5 -.BR echo " wordlist" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "echo \-n" " wordlist" -.br -The specified words are written to the shells standard output, separated -by spaces, and terminated with a newline unless the -.B \-n -option is specified. -.HP 5 -.B else -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B end -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B endif -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B endsw -.br -See the description of the -.I foreach, -.I if, -.I switch, -and -.I while -statements below. -.HP 5 -.BR eval " arg ..." -.br -(As in -.IR sh (1).) -The arguments are read as input to the shell and the resulting -command(s) executed. This is usually used to execute commands -generated as the result of command or variable substitution, since -parsing occurs before these substitutions. See -.IR tset (1) -for an example of using -.I eval. -.HP 5 -.BR exec " command" -.br -The specified command is executed in place of the current shell. -.HP 5 -.B exit -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR exit (expr) -.br -The shell exits either with the value of the -.I status -variable (first form) or with the value of the specified -.I expr -(second form). -.HP 5 -.B fg -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBfg\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Brings the current or specified jobs into the foreground, continuing them if -they were stopped. -.HP 5 -.BR foreach " name (wordlist)" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B end -.br -The variable -.I name -is successively set to each member of -.I wordlist -and the sequence of commands between this command and the matching -.I end -are executed. -(Both -.I foreach -and -.I end -must appear alone on separate lines.) -.IP -The builtin command -.I continue -may be used to continue the loop prematurely and the builtin -command -.I break -to terminate it prematurely. -When this command is read from the terminal, the loop is read up once -prompting with `?' before any statements in the loop are executed. -If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the terminal you can rub it out. -.HP 5 -.BR glob " wordlist" -.br -Like -.I echo -but no `\e' escapes are recognized and words are delimited -by null characters in the output. -Useful for programs which wish to use the shell to filename expand a list -of words. -.HP 5 -.BR goto " word" -.br -The specified -.I word -is filename and command expanded to yield a string of the form `label'. -The shell rewinds its input as much as possible -and searches for a line of the form `label:' -possibly preceded by blanks or tabs. -Execution continues after the specified line. -.HP 5 -.BR hashstat -.br -Print a statistics line indicating how effective the internal hash -table has been at locating commands (and avoiding -.I exec's). -An -.I exec -is attempted for each component of the -.I path -where the hash function indicates a possible hit, and in each component -which does not begin with a `/'. -.HP 5 -.B history -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BI history " n" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BI "history \-r" " n" -.br -Displays the history event list; if \fIn\fR is given only the -.I n -most recent events are printed. -The -.B \-r -option reverses the order of printout to be most recent first -rather than oldest first. -.HP 5 -.BR if " (expr) command" -.br -If the specified expression evaluates true, then the single -.I command -with arguments is executed. -Variable substitution on -.IR command "" -happens early, at the same -time it does for the rest of the -.I if -command. -.I Command -must be a simple command, not -a pipeline, a command list, or a parenthesized command list. -Input/output redirection occurs even if -.I expr -is false, when command is -.B not -executed (this is a bug). -.HP 5 -.BR if " (expr) " "then" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR else " " "if\fR (expr2) \fBthen" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B else -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B endif -.br -If the specified -.IR expr "" -is true then the commands to the first -.I else -are executed; else if -.IR expr2 "" -is true then the commands to the -second else are executed, etc. -Any number of -.I else-if -pairs are possible; only one -.I endif -is needed. -The -.I else -part is likewise optional. -(The words -.I else -and -.I endif -must appear at the beginning of input lines; -the -.I if -must appear alone on its input line or after an -.I else.) -.HP 5 -.B jobs -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B "jobs \-l" -.br -Lists the active jobs; given the -.B \-l -options lists process id's in addition to the normal information. -.HP 5 -\fBkill %\fRjob -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ \fB%\fRjob\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\fR\ pid -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ pid\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\ \-l\fR -.br -Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the -specified signal to the specified jobs or processes. -Signals are either given by number or by names (as given in -.I /usr/include/signal.h, -stripped of the prefix ``SIG''). -The signal names are listed by ``kill \-l''. -There is no default, saying just `kill' does not -send a signal to the current job. -If the signal being sent is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), -then the job or process will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well. -.HP -\fBlimit\fR -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR \fImaximum-use\fR -.br -Limits the consumption by the current process and each process -it creates to not individually exceed \fImaximum-use\fR on the -specified \fIresource\fR. If no \fImaximum-use\fR is given, then -the current limit is printed; if no \fIresource\fR is given, then -all limitations are given. -.IP -Resources controllable currently include \fIcputime\fR (the maximum -number of cpu-seconds to be used by each process), \fIfilesize\fR -(the largest single file which can be created), \fIdatasize\fR -(the maximum growth of the data+stack region via -.IR sbrk (2) -beyond the end of the program text), \fIstacksize\fR (the maximum -size of the automatically-extended stack region), and \fIcoredumpsize\fR -(the size of the largest core dump that will be created). -.IP -The \fImaximum-use\fR may be given as a (floating point or integer) -number followed by a scale factor. For all limits other than \fIcputime\fR -the default scale is `k' or `kilobytes' (1024 bytes); -a scale factor of `m' or `megabytes' may also be used. -For -.I cputime -the default scaling is `seconds', while `m' for minutes -or `h' for hours, or a time of the form `mm:ss' giving minutes -and seconds may be used. -.IP -For both \fIresource\fR names and scale factors, unambiguous prefixes -of the names suffice. -.HP 5 -.B login -.br -Terminate a login shell, replacing it with an instance of -.B /bin/login. -This is one way to log off, included for compatibility with -.IR sh (1). -.HP 5 -.B logout -.br -Terminate a login shell. -Especially useful if -.I ignoreeof -is set. -.HP 5 -.B newgrp -.br -Changes the group identification of the caller; for details see -.IR newgrp (1). -A new shell is executed by -.I newgrp -so that the shell state is lost. -.HP 5 -.B nice -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR nice " \+number" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR nice " command" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR nice " \+number command" -.br -The first form sets the -.I nice -for this shell to 4. -The second form sets the -.I nice -to the given number. -The final two forms run command at priority 4 and -.I number -respectively. -The super-user may specify negative niceness by using `nice \-number ...'. -Command is always executed in a sub-shell, and the restrictions -place on commands in simple -.I if -statements apply. -.HP 5 -.B nohup -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "nohup" " command" -.br -The first form can be used in shell scripts to cause hangups to be -ignored for the remainder of the script. -The second form causes the specified command to be run with hangups -ignored. -All processes detached with `&' are effectively -.I nohup'ed. -.HP 5 -.B notify -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBnotify\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when the status of the -current or specified jobs changes; normally notification is presented -before a prompt. This is automatic if the shell variable -.I notify -is set. -.HP 5 -.B onintr -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR onintr " \-" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR onintr " label" -.br -Control the action of the shell on interrupts. -The first form restores the default action of the shell on interrupts -which is to terminate shell scripts or to return to the terminal command -input level. -The second form `onintr \-' causes all interrupts to be ignored. -The final form causes the shell to execute a `goto label' when -an interrupt is received or a child process terminates because -it was interrupted. -.IP -In any case, if the shell is running detached and interrupts are -being ignored, all forms of -.I onintr -have no meaning and interrupts -continue to be ignored by the shell and all invoked commands. -.HP 5 -.BR "popd" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "popd" " +n" -.br -Pops the directory stack, returning to the new top directory. -With a argument `+\fIn\fR' discards the \fIn\fR\|th -entry in the stack. -The elements of the directory stack are numbered from 0 starting at the top. -.HP 5 -.BR "pushd" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "pushd" " name" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "pushd" " +n" -.br -With no arguments, -.I pushd -exchanges the top two elements of the directory stack. -Given a -.I name -argument, -.I pushd -changes to the new directory (ala -.I cd) -and pushes the old current working directory -(as in -.I csw) -onto the directory stack. -With a numeric argument, rotates the \fIn\fR\|th argument of the directory -stack around to be the top element and changes to it. The members -of the directory stack are numbered from the top starting at 0. -.HP 5 -.BR rehash -.br -Causes the internal hash table of the contents of the directories in -the -.I path -variable to be recomputed. This is needed if new commands are added -to directories in the -.I path -while you are logged in. This should only be necessary if you add -commands to one of your own directories, or if a systems programmer -changes the contents of one of the system directories. -.HP 5 -.BR repeat " count command" -.br -The specified -.I command -which is subject to the same restrictions -as the -.I command -in the one line -.I if -statement above, -is executed -.I count -times. -I/O redirections occur exactly once, even if -.I count -is 0. -.HP 5 -.B set -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR set " name" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR set " name=word" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR set " name[index]=word" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR set " name=(wordlist)" -.br -The first form of the command shows the value of all shell variables. -Variables which have other than a single word as value print as a parenthesized -word list. -The second form sets -.I name -to the null string. -The third form sets -.I name -to the single -.I word. -The fourth form sets -the -.I index'th -component of name to word; -this component must already exist. -The final form sets -.I name -to the list of words in -.I wordlist. -In all cases the value is command and filename expanded. -.IP -These arguments may be repeated to set multiple values in a single set command. -Note however, that variable expansion happens for all arguments before any -setting occurs. -.HP 5 -.BR setenv " name value" -.br -Sets the value of environment variable -.I name -to be -.I value, -a single string. -The most commonly used environment variable USER, TERM, and PATH -are automatically imported to and exported from the -.I csh -variables -.I user, -.I term, -and -.I path; -there is no need to use -.I setenv -for these. -.HP 5 -.B shift -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR shift " variable" -.br -The members of -.I argv -are shifted to the left, discarding -.I argv[1]. -It is an error for -.I argv -not to be set or to have less than one word as value. -The second form performs the same function on the specified variable. -.HP 5 -.BR source " name" -.br -The shell reads commands from -.I name. -.I Source -commands may be nested; if they are nested too deeply the shell may -run out of file descriptors. -An error in a -.I source -at any level terminates all nested -.I source -commands. -Input during -.I source -commands is -.B never -placed on the history list. -.HP 5 -.B stop -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBstop\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Stops the current or specified job which is executing in the background. -.HP 5 -.B suspend -.br -.ns -Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it had been sent a stop -signal with \fB^Z\fR. This is most often used to stop shells started by -.IR su (1). -.HP 5 -.BR switch " (string)" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR case " str1:" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ -.B breaksw -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\&... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B default: -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ -.B breaksw -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B endsw -.br -Each case label is successively matched, against the specified -.I string -which is first command and filename expanded. -The file metacharacters `*', `?' and `[...]' may be used in the case labels, -which are variable expanded. -If none of the labels match before a `default' label is found, then -the execution begins after the default label. -Each case label and the default label must appear at the beginning of a line. -The command -.I breaksw -causes execution to continue after the -.I endsw. -Otherwise control may fall through case labels and default labels as in C. -If no label matches and there is no default, execution continues after -the -.I endsw. -.HP 5 -.B time -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR time " command" -.br -With no argument, a summary of time used by this shell and its children -is printed. -If arguments are given -the specified simple command is timed and a time summary -as described under the -.I time -variable is printed. -If necessary, an extra shell is created to print the time -statistic when the command completes. -.HP 5 -.B umask -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR umask " value" -.br -The file creation mask is displayed (first form) or set to the specified -value (second form). The mask is given in octal. Common values for -the mask are 002 giving all access to the group and read and execute -access to others or 022 giving all access except no write access for -users in the group or others. -.HP 5 -.BR unalias " pattern" -.br -All aliases whose names match the specified pattern are discarded. -Thus all aliases are removed by `unalias *'. -It is not an error for nothing to be -.I unaliased. -.HP 5 -.BR unhash -.br -Use of the internal hash table to speed location of executed programs -is disabled. -.HP 5 -\fBunlimit\fR \fIresource\fR -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBunlimit\fR -.br -Removes the limitation on \fIresource\fR. If no \fIresource\fR -is specified, then all \fIresource\fR limitations are removed. -.HP 5 -.BR unset " pattern" -.br -All variables whose names match the specified pattern are removed. -Thus all variables are removed by `unset *'; this has noticeably -distasteful side-effects. -It is not an error for nothing to be -.I unset. -.HP 5 -.BR unsetenv " pattern" -.br -Removes all variables whose name match the specified pattern from the -environment. See also the -.I setenv -command above and -.IR printenv (1). -.HP 5 -.B wait -.br -All background jobs are waited for. -It the shell is interactive, then an interrupt can disrupt the wait, -at which time the shell prints names and job numbers of all jobs -known to be outstanding. -.HP 5 -.BR while " (expr)" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B end -.br -While the specified expression evaluates non-zero, the commands between -the -.I while -and the matching end are evaluated. -.I Break -and -.I continue -may be used to terminate or continue the loop prematurely. -(The -.I while -and -.I end -must appear alone on their input lines.) -Prompting occurs here the first time through the loop as for the -.I foreach -statement if the input is a terminal. -.HP 5 -\fB%\fRjob -.br -Brings the specified job into the foreground. -.HP 5 -\fB%\fRjob \fB&\fR -.br -Continues the specified job in the background. -.HP 5 -.B "@" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "@" " name = expr" -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.BR "@" " name[index] = expr" -.br -The first form prints the values of all the shell variables. -The second form sets the specified -.I name -to the value of -.I expr. -If the expression contains `<', `>', `&' or `|' then at least -this part of the expression must be placed within `(' `)'. -The third form assigns the value of -.I expr -to the -.I index'th -argument of -.I name. -Both -.I name -and its -.I index'th -component must already exist. -.IP -The operators `*=', `+=', etc are available as in C. -The space separating the name from the assignment operator is optional. -Spaces are, however, mandatory in separating components of -.I expr -which would otherwise be single words. -.IP -Special postfix `++' and `\-\-' operators increment and decrement -.I name -respectively, i.e. `@ i++'. -.sh "Pre-defined and environment variables" -The following variables have special meaning to the shell. -Of these, -.I argv, -.I cwd, -.I home, -.I path, -.I prompt, -.I shell -and -.I status -are always set by the shell. -Except for -.I cwd -and -.I status -this setting occurs only at initialization; -these variables will not then be modified unless this is done -explicitly by the user. -.PP -This shell copies the environment variable USER into the variable -.I user, -TERM into -.I term, -and -HOME into -.I home, -and copies these back into the environment whenever the normal -shell variables are reset. -The environment variable PATH is likewise handled; it is not -necessary to worry about its setting other than in the file -.I \&.cshrc -as inferior -.I csh -processes will import the definition of -.I path -from the environment, and re-export it if you then change it. -(It could be set once in the -.I \&.login -except that commands through -.IR net (1) -would not see the definition.) -.TP 15 -.B argv -\c -Set to the arguments to the shell, it is from this variable that -positional parameters are substituted, i.e. `$1' is replaced by -`$argv[1]', etc. -.TP 15 -.B cdpath -\c -Gives a list of alternate directories searched to find subdirectories -in -.I chdir -commands. -.TP 15 -.B cwd -The full pathname of the current directory. -.TP 15 -.B echo -\c -Set when the -.B \-x -command line option is given. -Causes each command and its arguments -to be echoed just before it is executed. -For non-builtin commands all expansions occur before echoing. -Builtin commands are echoed before command and filename substitution, -since these substitutions are then done selectively. -.TP 15 -.B history -\c -Can be given a numeric value to control the size of the history list. -Any command which has been referenced in this many events will not be -discarded. -Too large values of -.I history -may run the shell out of memory. -The last executed command is always saved on the history list. -.TP 15 -.B home -\c -The home directory of the invoker, initialized from the environment. -The filename expansion of `\fB~\fR' refers to this variable. -.TP 15 -.B ignoreeof -\c -If set the shell ignores -end-of-file from input devices which are terminals. -This prevents shells from accidentally being killed by control-D's. -.TP 15 -.B mail -\c -The files where the shell checks for mail. -This is done after each command completion which will result in a prompt, -if a specified interval has elapsed. -The shell says `You have new mail.' -if the file exists with an access time not greater than its modify time. -.IP -If the first word of the value of -.I mail -is numeric it specifies a different mail checking interval, in seconds, -than the default, which is 10 minutes. -.IP -If multiple mail files are specified, then the shell says -`New mail in -.IR name ' -when there is mail in the file -.I name. -.TP 15 -.B noclobber -\c -As described in the section on -.I Input/output, -restrictions are placed on output redirection to insure that -files are not accidentally destroyed, and that `>>' redirections -refer to existing files. -.TP 15 -.B noglob -\c -If set, filename expansion is inhibited. -This is most useful in shell scripts which are not dealing with filenames, -or after a list of filenames has been obtained and further expansions -are not desirable. -.TP 15 -.B nonomatch -\c -If set, it is not an error for a filename expansion to not match any -existing files; rather the primitive pattern is returned. -It is still an error for the primitive pattern to be malformed, i.e. -`echo [' still gives an error. -.TP 15 -.B notify -\c -If set, the shell notifies asynchronously of job completions. The -default is to rather present job completions just before printing -a prompt. -.TP 15 -.B path -\c -Each word of the path variable specifies a directory in which -commands are to be sought for execution. -A null word specifies the current directory. -If there is no -.I path -variable then only full path names will execute. -The usual search path is `.', `/bin' and `/usr/bin', but this -may vary from system to system. -For the super-user the default search path is `/etc', `/bin' and `/usr/bin'. -A shell which is given neither the -.B \-c -nor the -.B \-t -option will normally hash the contents of the directories in the -.I path -variable after reading -.I \&.cshrc, -and each time the -.I path -variable is reset. If new commands are added to these directories -while the shell is active, it may be necessary to give the -.I rehash -or the commands may not be found. -.TP 15 -.B prompt -\c -The string which is printed before each command is read from -an interactive terminal input. -If a `!' appears in the string it will be replaced by the current event number -unless a preceding `\e' is given. -Default is `% ', or `# ' for the super-user. -.TP 15 -.B shell -\c -The file in which the shell resides. -This is used in forking shells to interpret files which have execute -bits set, but which are not executable by the system. -(See the description of -.I "Non-builtin Command Execution" -below.) -Initialized to the (system-dependent) home of the shell. -.TP 15 -.B status -\c -The status returned by the last command. -If it terminated abnormally, then 0200 is added to the status. -Builtin commands which fail return exit status `1', -all other builtin commands set status `0'. -.TP 15 -.B time -\c -Controls automatic timing of commands. -If set, then any command which takes more than this many cpu seconds -will cause a line giving user, system, and real times and a utilization -percentage which is the ratio of user plus system times to real time -to be printed when it terminates. -.TP 15 -.B verbose -\c -Set by the -.B \-v -command line option, causes the words of each command to be printed -after history substitution. -.sh "Non-builtin command execution" -When a command to be executed is found to not be a builtin command -the shell attempts to execute the command via -.IR exec (2). -Each word in the variable -.I path -names a directory from which the shell will attempt to execute the command. -If it is given neither a -.B \-c -nor a -.B \-t -option, the shell will hash the names in these directories into an internal -table so that it will only try an -.I exec -in a directory if there is a possibility that the command resides there. -This greatly speeds command location when a large number of directories -are present in the search path. -If this mechanism has been turned off (via -.I unhash), -or if the shell was given a -.B \-c -or -.B \-t -argument, and in any case for each directory component of -.I path -which does not begin with a `/', -the shell concatenates with the given command name to form a path name -of a file which it then attempts to execute. -.PP -Parenthesized commands are always executed in a subshell. -Thus `(cd ; pwd) ; pwd' prints the -.I home -directory; leaving you where you were (printing this after the home directory), -while `cd ; pwd' leaves you in the -.I home -directory. -Parenthesized commands are most often used to prevent -.I chdir -from affecting the current shell. -.PP -If the file has execute permissions but is not an -executable binary to the system, then it is assumed to be a -file containing shell commands an a new shell is spawned to read it. -.PP -If there is an -.I alias -for -.I shell -then the words of the alias will be prepended to the argument list to form -the shell command. -The first word of the -.I alias -should be the full path name of the shell -(e.g. `$shell'). -Note that this is a special, late occurring, case of -.I alias -substitution, -and only allows words to be prepended to the argument list without modification. -.sh "Argument list processing" -If argument 0 to the shell is `\-' then this -is a login shell. -The flag arguments are interpreted as follows: -.TP 5 -.B \-c -\c -Commands are read from the (single) following argument which must -be present. -Any remaining arguments are placed in -.I argv. -.TP 5 -.B \-e -\c -The shell exits if any invoked command terminates abnormally -or yields a non-zero exit status. -.TP 5 -.B \-f -\c -The shell will start faster, because it will neither search for nor -execute commands from the file -`\&.cshrc' in the invokers home directory. -.TP 5 -.B \-i -\c -The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level input, -even if it appears to not be a terminal. -Shells are interactive without this option if their inputs -and outputs are terminals. -.TP 5 -.B \-n -\c -Commands are parsed, but not executed. -This may aid in syntactic checking of shell scripts. -.TP 5 -.B \-s -\c -Command input is taken from the standard input. -.TP 5 -.B \-t -\c -A single line of input is read and executed. -A `\e' may be used to escape the newline at the end of this -line and continue onto another line. -.TP 5 -.B \-v -\c -Causes the -.I verbose -variable to be set, with the effect -that command input is echoed after history substitution. -.TP 5 -.B \-x -\c -Causes the -.I echo -variable to be set, so that commands are echoed immediately before execution. -.TP 5 -.B \-V -\c -Causes the -.I verbose -variable to be set even before `\&.cshrc' is executed. -.TP 5 -.B \-X -\c -Is to -.B \-x -as -.B \-V -is to -.B \-v. -.PP -After processing of flag arguments if arguments remain but none of the -.B \-c, -.B \-i, -.B \-s, -or -.B \-t -options was given the first argument is taken as the name of a file of -commands to be executed. -The shell opens this file, and saves its name for possible resubstitution -by `$0'. -Since many systems use either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells -whose shell scripts are not compatible with this shell, the shell will -execute such a `standard' shell if the first character of a script -is not a `#', i.e. if the script does not start with a comment. -Remaining arguments initialize the variable -.I argv. -.sh "Signal handling" -The shell normally ignores -.I quit -signals. -Jobs running detached (either by `&' or the \fIbg\fR or \fB%... &\fR -commands) are immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including -hangups. -Other signals have the values which the shell inherited from its parent. -The shells handling of interrupts and terminate signals -in shell scripts can be controlled by -.I onintr. -Login shells catch the -.I terminate -signal; otherwise this signal is passed on to children from the state in the -shell's parent. -In no case are interrupts allowed when a login shell is reading the file -`\&.logout'. -.SH AUTHOR -William Joy. -Job control and directory stack features first implemented by J.E. Kulp of -I.I.A.S.A, Laxenburg, Austria, -with different syntax than that used now. -.SH FILES -.ta 1.75i -.nf -~/.cshrc Read at beginning of execution by each shell. -~/.login Read by login shell, after `.cshrc' at login. -~/.logout Read by login shell, at logout. -/bin/sh Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a `#'. -/tmp/sh* Temporary file for `<<'. -/etc/passwd Source of home directories for `~name'. -.fi -.SH LIMITATIONS -Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. -The system limits argument lists to 10240 characters. -The number of arguments to a command which involves filename expansion -is limited to 1/6'th the number of characters allowed in an argument list. -Command substitutions may substitute no more characters than are -allowed in an argument list. -To detect looping, the shell restricts the number of -.I alias -substititutions on a single line to 20. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -sh(1), newcsh(1), access(2), exec(2), fork(2), killpg(2), pipe(2), sigsys(2), -umask(2), vlimit(2), wait(2), jobs(3), sigset(3), tty(4), a.out(5), environ(5), -`An introduction to the C shell' -.SH BUGS -When a command is restarted from a stop, -the shell prints the directory it started in if this is different -from the current directory; this can be misleading (i.e. wrong) -as the job may have changed directories internally. -.PP -Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. -Command sequences of the form `a ; b ; c' are also not handled gracefully -when stopping is attempted. If you suspend `b', the shell will then -immediately execute `c'. This is especially noticeable if this -expansion results from an -.I alias. -It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to force it to -a subshell, i.e. `( a ; b ; c )'. -.PP -Control over tty output after processes are started is primitive; -perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good virtual -terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface much more -interesting things could be done with output control. -.PP -Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate shell procedures; -shell procedures should be provided rather than aliases. -.PP -Commands within loops, prompted for by `?', are not placed in the -.I history -list. -Control structure should be parsed rather than being recognized as built-in -commands. This would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, -to be combined with `|', and to be used with `&' and `;' metasyntax. -.PP -It should be possible to use the `:' modifiers on the output of command -substitutions. -All and more than one `:' modifier should be allowed on `$' substitutions. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ctags.1 b/static/v10/man1/ctags.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 184739e9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ctags.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -.TH CTAGS 1 -.UC 4 -.SH NAME -ctags \- create a tags file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ctags -[ -.B \-BFatuwx -] -name ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ctags -makes a tags file for -.IR ex (1) -from the specified C, Pascal and Fortran sources. -A tags file gives the locations of specified objects (in this case -functions and typedefs) in a group of files. Each line of the tags -file contains the object name, the file in which it is defined, and -an address specification for the object definition. Functions are -searched with a pattern, typedefs with a line number. Specifiers are -given in separate fields on the line, separated by blanks or tabs. -Using the -.I tags -file, -.I ex -can quickly find these objects definitions. -.PP -If the -.B \-x -flag is given, -.I ctags -produces a list of object names, the line number and file -name on which each is defined, as well as the text of that line -and prints this on the standard output. This is a simple index -which can be printed out as an off-line readable function index. -.PP -Files whose name ends in -.B \.c -or -.B \.h -are assumed to be C source files and are searched for C routine and -macro definitions. -Others are first examined to see if they contain any Pascal or -Fortran routine definitions; if not, they are processed again -looking for C definitions. -.PP -Other options are: -.TP 5 -.B \-F -use forward searching patterns (/.../) (default). -.TP 5 -.B \-B -use backward searching patterns (?...?). -.TP 5 -.B \-a -append to tags file. -.TP 5 -.B \-t -create tags for typedefs. -.TP 5 -.B \-w -suppressing warning diagnostics. -.TP 5 -.B \-u -causing the specified files to be -.I updated -in tags, that is, all references to them are deleted, -and the new values are appended to the file. -(Beware: this option is implemented in a way which is rather slow; -it is usually faster to simply rebuild the -.I tags -file.) -.PP -The tag -.I main -is treated specially in C programs. -The tag formed is created by prepending -.I M -to the name of the file, with a trailing .c removed, if -any, and leading pathname components also removed. -This makes use of -.I ctags -practical in directories with more than one program. -.SH FILES -.DT -tags output tags file -.SH SEE ALSO -ex(1), vi(1) -.SH AUTHOR -Ken Arnold; FORTRAN added by Jim Kleckner; Bill Joy -added Pascal and -.B \-x, -replacing -.I cxref; -C typedefs added by Ed Pelegri-Llopart. -.SH BUGS -Recognition of \fBfunctions\fR, \fBsubroutines\fR and \fBprocedures\fR -for FORTRAN and Pascal is done is a very simpleminded way. -No attempt is made to deal with block structure; if you have two -Pascal procedures in different blocks with the same name you lose. -.PP -The method of deciding whether to look for C or Pascal and FORTRAN -functions is a hack. -.PP -Does not know about #ifdefs. -.PP -Should know about Pascal types. -Relies on the input being well formed to detect typedefs. -Use of -tx shows only the last line of typedefs. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cu.1 b/static/v10/man1/cu.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8e365ce8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cu.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,248 +0,0 @@ -.TH CU 1 -.CT 1 comm_mach -.SH NAME -cu, ct \- call out to a terminal or another system -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cu -[ -.B -htn -] [ -.B -p -.I parity -] [ -.B -s -.I speed -] -.I telno -[ -.I service-class -] -.PP -.B ct -[ option ... -] -.I phone-number -[ -.I service-class -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cu -places a data call to a given telephone number -and expects a computer to answer. -It manages an interactive conversation with possible -transfers of text files. -.I Telno -is the telephone number, consisting of digits with minus signs at appropriate -places to indicate delay for second or subsequent dial tones. -A telephone number may also be expressed symbolically. -A symbolic number is looked up in the files -.F $HOME/lib/cunumber -and -.F /usr/lib/cunumber -whose lines look like this: -.IP -symbolic-number -actual-number -service-class -comment -.LP -The actual number -may be preceded by options -such as -.BR \-t . -The -.I comment, -if present, is printed out when the connection is made. -.PP -The options are -.TP -.B -n -Print the the called number but do not call it. -.TP -.B -t -Tandem: -use DC1/DC3 -.RB (control- S /control- Q ) -protocol to stop transmission from -the remote system when the local terminal buffers are almost full. -This argument should only be used if the remote system -understands that protocol. -.TP -.B -h -Half-duplex: -echo locally the characters that are sent to the remote system. -.TP -.BI -s " speed" -Set the line speed; -.L 1200 -means 1200 baud, etc. -The default depends on service class. -.TP -.BI -p " parity" -Set the parity of transmitted characters: -.BR 0 , -.BR 1 , -.BR e , -.BR o -mean -zero, -one, -even, -odd parity. -.B 0 -is the default. -.PP -The service class is expressed as in -.IR dialout (3). -A special class -.L direct -causes the -.I telno -argument to be taken -as the pathname -of a terminal line. -.I Cu -opens the file, -sets line speed and other modes, -and proceeds as if connected. -The default line speed is -9600 baud. -.PP -An explicit service class on the command line overrides -any specified in a -.L cunumber -file. -.PP -After making the connection, -.I cu -runs as two processes: -the sending -process reads the standard input and -passes most of it to the remote system; -the receiving -process reads from the remote system and passes -most data to the standard output. -Lines beginning with -.L ~ -have special meanings. -.PP -The sending -process interprets: -.TP `\fL~%break\ 'u -.B ~. -.br -.ns -.TP -.BR ~ EOT -Terminate the conversation. -.TP -.BI ~< file -Send the contents of -.I file -to the remote system, -as though typed at the terminal. -.TP -.B ~! -Invoke an interactive shell on the local system. -.TP -.BI ~! cmd -Run the command on the local system -(via -.LR "sh -c" ). -.TP -.BI ~$ cmd -Run the command locally and send its output -to the remote system. -.TP -.B ~b -.br -.ns -.TP -.B ~%break -Send a break (300 ms space). -.TP -.BI ~%take " from \fR[\fIto\fR]" -Copy file -.I from -(on the remote system) -to file -.I to -on the local system. -If -.I to -is omitted, -the -.I from -name is used both places. -.TP -.BI ~%put " from \fR[\fIto\fR]" -Copy file -.I from -(on local system) -to file -.I to -on remote system. -If -.I to -is omitted, the -.I from -name is used both places. -.TP -.BI ~~ text -send -the line -.BI ~ text . -.PD -.PP -WARNING: Using -.I cu -to reach your home machine from a machine you don't trust -can be hazardous to your password. -.PP -.I Ct -places a telephone call to a remote terminal -and allows a user to log in on that terminal -in the normal fashion. -The terminal must be equipped with an auto-answer -modem. -.PP -The -phone number and service class -are as in -.I cu. -The options are -.TP -.BI -c " count" -If the number doesn't answer, try -.I count -times before giving up (default 5). -.TP -.BI -w " interval -Space retries -.I interval -seconds apart (default 60). -.TP -.B -h -Try to hang up the phone before placing the -call. -This is useful for a -`call me right back' arrangement. -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/cunumber -.br -.F $HOME/lib/cunumber -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR con (1), -.IR ttyld (4), -.IR dialout (3) -.SH BUGS -Unless erase and kill characters are the same on the two machines, -they will be damaged by -.BR ~%put . -.br -.B ~%take -uses -.BR ~> -at the beginning of line to synchronize transmission. -This sequence can cause misfunction if it is received -for any other purpose. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cut.1 b/static/v10/man1/cut.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6394f788..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cut.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,137 +0,0 @@ -.TH CUT 1 -.CT 1 files -.SH NAME -cut, paste \- rearrange columns of data -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cut -.BI -c list -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B cut -.BI -f list -[ -.BI -d char -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B paste -[ -.B -s -] -[ -.BI -d chars -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cut -selects fields from each line of the -.I files -(standard input default). -In data base parlance, it -projects a relation. -The fields -can be fixed length, -as on a punched card (option -.BR -c ), -or be marked with a delimiter character (option -.BR -f ). -.PP -The meanings of the options follow. -A -.I list -is an increasing sequence of integers separated by commas, or by -.B - -to indicate a range, for example -.L 1,3-5,7. -.TF -d\ char\ \ -.PD -.TP -.BI -c list -The -.I list -specifies character -positions. -.TP -.BI -f list -The -.I list -specifies field numbers. -.TP -.BI -d char -The character -is the delimiter for option -.BR -f . -Default is tab. -.TP -.B -s -Suppress lines with no delimiter characters. -Normally such lines pass through untouched under option -.BR -f . -.PP -.I Paste -concatenates corresponding lines of the input -.I files -and places the result on the standard output. -The file name -.L - -refers to the standard input. -Lines are glued together with -characters taken circularly from the set -.I chars. -The set may contain the special escape sequences -.B \en -(newline), -.B \et -(tab), -.B \e\e -(backslash), and -.B \e0 -(empty string, not a null character). -The options are -.TP -.BI -d chars -The output separator characters. -Default is a tab. -.TP -.B -s -Paste together lines of one file, -treating every line as if it came from a distinct input. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -cut -d: -f1,3 /etc/passwd -Print map from login names to userids, see -.IR passwd (5). -.TP -.L -NAME=`who am i | cut -f1 -d" "` -Set -.L NAME -to current login name (subtly different from -.IR getuid (1)). -.PP -.EX -ls | paste - - - - -ls | paste -s '-d\et\en' - -.EE -.ns -.IP -4-column and 2-column file listing -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR gre (1), -.IR awk (1), -.IR sed (1), -.IR pr (1), -.IR column (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Cut -should handle disordered lists under option -.BR -f . -.br -In default of file names, -.I paste -should read the the standard input. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cvt.1 b/static/v10/man1/cvt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 892d6f15..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/cvt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -1 1 1 1 1 1 1.000000 1.000000 -2 2 2 2 2 2 2.000000 2.000000 -3 3 3 3 3 3 3.000000 3.000000 -4 4 4 4 4 4 4.000000 4.000000 -5 5 5 5 5 5 5.000000 5.000000 -6 6 6 6 6 6 6.000000 6.000000 -7 7 7 7 7 7 7.000000 7.000000 -8 8 8 8 8 8 8.000000 8.000000 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/d202.1 b/static/v10/man1/d202.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f0817688..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/d202.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,138 +0,0 @@ -.TH D202 1 -.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev -.SH NAME -d202, tc \- typesetter filters -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B d202 -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B e202 -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B tc -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I D202 -and its companions print files -created by -.IR troff (1) -on various devices: -.TP -.I d202 -Mergenthaler Linotron 202 -.PD0 -.TP -.I e202 -same, -with half-tone and extra graphics capability -.PD0 -.TP -.I tc -Tektronix 4014 display -.PD -.PP -If no -.I file -is mentioned, the standard input is printed. -The following options are understood. -.TP -.B -b -Report whether the typesetter is busy; do not print. -.TP -.BI -o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains comma-separated numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IB N1 - N2. -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest-numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.BI -s n -Stop after every -.I n -pages of output. -(Default 1 on 4014). -Proceed when the `RUN' button is pushed on the typesetter -.RI ( d202 ) -or newline on the terminal -.RI ( tc ). -.TP -.B -t -Direct output to the standard output instead of the typesetter. -Don't wait between pages in -.I tc. -.TP -.B -w -Wait for typesetter to become free, then print. -.TP -.BI -f " dir" -Take font information from -directory -.I dir -instead of the default. -.TP -.BI -a "r" -Set the aspect ratio to -.I r -(default -.IR r =1.5). -.I Tc -only. -.PP -While waiting between pages -.I tc -accepts -.BI ! command -to insert a shell command; -.BI + n -to skip forward -.I n -pages; -.BI - n -to skip backwards -.I n -pages; -.BI a r -to set the aspect ratio; -and -.B ? -to print the list of available actions. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/font/dev202/* -.TP -.F /usr/lib/font/dev202/* -202 description files -.PD0 -.PD0 -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR lp (1), -.IR troff (1), -.IR proof (9.1), -.IR apsend (1), -.IR font (5) -.SH BUGS -.I E202, -largely a superset of -.I d202, -should be combined with -.I d202. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dag.1 b/static/v10/man1/dag.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0ea92348..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dag.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,150 +0,0 @@ -.TH DAG 1 "15 April 1987" -.SH NAME -dag \- preprocessor for DAGs and other directed graphs -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dag -[ -.B \-T\fItype\fP -] [ -.B \-p\fIwidth\fPx\fIheight\fP -[ -.B ,\fImarginwidth\fP -[ -.B x\fImarginheight\fP -] ] -] [ -.B \-O -] [ -.B \-l -] [ files ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dag -is a -.IR pic (1) -or -.IR Postscript -preprocessor for drawing directed graphs. It works well on -directed acyclic graphs and other graphs that can be drawn -as a hierarchy. -.IR dag -selects coordinates for the nodes of the graph and creates a picture. -Input graphs are surrounded by the -.I troff -`commands' -.B \&.GS -and -.BR \&.GE . -The graph contains nodes, edges, and optional control statements. -Statements are semicolon terminated. Here is a brief summary: -.PP -\fBedge from\fP \fItail\fP \fBto\fP \fIhead0 edge-items, \fBto\fP head1 edge-items, \fBto\fP head2 edge-items... \fR: creates edges from the tail node -to the head nodes (or node). Nodes are implicitly created if they do -not already exist. \fIedge-items\fP (which apply to the -edge just made, as described below) and the noisewords \fBedge\fP, -\fBfrom\fP, and \fBto\fP are optional. Node names may be quoted -to avoid conflicting with keywords. -.PP -\fBordered\fP \fI tail head0 head1 head2... \fR: makes edges and also -constrains the left-to-right order of the head nodes and keeps them -on the same rank. May contain noisewords and edge-items. -.PP -\fBpath\fP \fI node0 node1 node2...\fR: creates a path of edges. -May contain noisewords and edge-items. -.PP -\fBbackedge\fP \fItail head0 head1 head2...\fR: creates edges that -point backward (up or left). -.PP -\fBbackpath\fP \fInode0 node1 node2...\fR: makes a path of backedges. -.PP -\fBdraw nodes\fP \fInode-items\fP: Changes default definition for all nodes -subsequently created. \fInode-items\fP are: \fBas\fP \fIshape\fP -(standard shapes are \fBBox, Circle, Ellipse, Diamond, Square,\fP -and \fBPlaintext\fP), \fBlabel\fR \fIstring\fP, -\fBpointsize\fP \fIn\fP, \fBwidth\fP \fIn\fP, -\fBheight\fP \fIn\fP, \fBcolor\fP \fIstring\fP. Dimensions are -in inches. \fIcolor\fP only works with PostScript and should evaluate -to an HSB triple. -.PP -\fBdraw\fP \fInodelist\fP \fInode-items\fP: controls drawing (shapes, -labels, etc.) of nodes in the list. -.PP -\fBdraw edges\fP \fIedge-items\fP: Changes default definition of edges -subsequently created. \fIedge-items\fP are: \fBdotted, dashed, solid\fP, -or \fBinvis\fP, \fBlabel\fP \fIstring\fP, \fBweight\fP \fIn\fP, -\fBcolor\fP \fIstring\fP, \fBpointsize\fP \fIn\fP. -.PP -\fBminimum rank\fP \fInodelist\fP: constrains nodes -to be on the topmost rank (or leftmost if drawn with .GR). -.PP -\fBmaximum rank\fP \fInodelist\fP: bottommost or rightmost rank. -.PP -\fBsame rank\fP \fInodelist\fP: constrains nodes to be -placed on the same rank. -.PP -\fBseparate ranks\fP \fIn\fP \fBequally\fP or \fBexactly\fP: -sets separation between ranks. -\fBexactly\fP means rank separation is fixed. -\fBequally\fP means that all ranks have the same separation. -.PP -The \fB\-O\fP option requests ``optimal'' node placement. This makes -slightly better layouts, but is only practical for graphs of a few -dozen nodes. -.PP -Output languages other than -.IR pic -are requested with \fB\-T\fP: \fB\-Tps\fP for PostScript, \fB\-Tsimple\fP -for a simple format similar to that of the Ninth Edition Unix \fIgraphdraw\fP -editor, and \fB\-Tcip\fP for a simplified form of \fIpic\fP code that -can be read by the obsolescent \fIcip\fP editor. PostScript drawings -are paginated by giving the \fB\-p\fP option to set page dimensions. -Default margins are one-half inch. -Although the margins can be set to zero, Laserwriters have hard margins -that prevent making seamless mosaics. -The \fB\-p\fP option replaces the \fIPoster\fP -program from CIA, which is inefficient for large drawings -because of quadratic behavior. -.PP -The \fB\-l\fP option disables automatic loading of the -.IR dag -graphics library. -.PP -A graph is drawn with left-to-right edges by using .GR -instead of .GS. The maximum height and width of the drawing may -be given on the .GS/.GR line. The optional keyword \fBfill\fP at -the end of this line makes \fIdag\fP adjust node positions -to fill the bounding box. -In-line graphics code such as \fIpic\fP or PostScript macros -may be defined in a block between \fB.PS\fP and \fB.PE\fP. -.PP -If \fIdag\fP is installed under EXPTOOLS, it uses the standard -\fBTOOLS\fP environment variable to find its libraries. -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.br -\&.GS 6 8 fill -.br -a b c; -.br -path a x y; -.br -draw nodes as Box; -.br -a z label "hi" weight 1000; -.br -draw edges dashed; -.br -b x; -.br -same rank b x; -.br -\&.GE -.br -.SH "BUGS" -\fItroff\fP doesn't have \fBdotted\fP or \fBdashed\fP splines. -Use PostScript. -.PP -\fIdag\fP doesn't keep edge labels from accidentally overlapping. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.I -E. R. Gansner, S. C. North, K. P. Vo, "DAG \(em A Graph Drawing Program," -TM 59554-871019-04TM. -.br diff --git a/static/v10/man1/date.1 b/static/v10/man1/date.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2ec8af09..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/date.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'DATE (I)'3/15/72'DATE (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME date -- print and set the date -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS date____ [ mmddhhmm ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION If no argument is given, the current date is printed -to the second. -If an argument is given, the current date is set. -mm__ is the month number; -dd__ is the day number in the month; -hh__ is the hour number (24 hour system); -mm__ is the minute number. -For example: - - date 10080045 - -sets the date to Oct 8, 12:45 AM. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" if the argument is syntactically incorrect. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/db.1 b/static/v10/man1/db.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 859bd7e8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/db.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,283 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'DB (I)'3/15/72'DB (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME db -- debug -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS db__ [ core [ namelist ] ] [ -_ ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION Unlike -many debugging packages (including DEC's ODT, on -which db__ is loosely based) db__ is not loaded as part of the -core image which it is used to examine; instead it examines files. -Typically, the file will be either a core image produced -after a fault or the binary output of -the assembler. -Core____ is the file being debugged; if omitted "core" is assumed. -namelist________ is a file containing a symbol table. -If it is omitted, -the symbol table is obtained from the -file being debugged, -or if not there from a.out_____. -If no appropriate name list file -can be found, db__ can still be used but some of its symbolic -facilities become unavailable. - -For the meaning of the optional third argument, see -the last paragraph below. -.sp -The format for most db__ requests is an address followed -by a one character command. -.sp -Addresses are expressions built up as follows: -.sp -.in +6 -.un 3 -1. A name has the value assigned to it -when the input file was assembled. -It may be relocatable or not depending -on the use of the name during the assembly. -.br -.un 3 -.sp -2. An octal number is an absolute quantity with the appropriate -value. -.br -.un 3 -.sp -3. A decimal number immediately followed by "." is -an absolute quantity with the appropriate value. -.br -.un 3 -.sp -4. An octal number immediately followed by "r" is a relocatable -quantity with the appropriate value. -.br -.un 3 -.sp -5. The symbol "." indicates the current pointer -of db__. The current pointer is set by many db__ requests. - -.ti -3 -6. A "*" before -an expression forms an expression whose value is the -number in the word addressed by the first expression. -A "*" alone is equivalent to "*.". - -.ti -3 -6. Expressions separated by "+" or " " (blank) are expressions -with value equal to the sum of the components. At most -one of the components may be relocatable. -.br -.un 3 -.sp -8. Expressions separated by "-" form an expression -with value equal to the difference to the components. -If the right component is relocatable, the left component -must be relocatable. -.br -.un 3 -.sp -9. Expressions are evaluated left to right. -.sp 1 -.in -6 -Names for registers are -built in: -.sp - r0 ... r5 - sp - pc - fr0 ... fr5 -.sp -These may be examined. -Their values are deduced from the contents -of the stack in a core image file. They are meaningless -in a file that is not a core image. -.sp -If no address is given for a command, the current address -(also specified by ".") is assumed. In general, "." -points to the last word or byte printed by db__. -.sp -There are db__ commands for examining locations -interpreted as octal numbers, machine instructions, -ASCII characters, and addresses. -For numbers and characters, either bytes -or words may be examined. -The following commands are used to examine the specified file. -.sp -.in +6 -.un 3 -/ The addressed word is printed in octal. - -.un 3 -\\ The addressed byte is printed in octal. - -.un 3 -" The addressed word is printed as two ASCII characters. - -.un 3 -' The addressed byte is printed as an ASCII character. -.ti -3 - -` The addressed word is printed in decimal. - -.un 3 -? The addressed word is interpreted as a machine -instruction and a symbolic form of the instruction, -including symbolic addresses, is printed. -Often, the result will appear exactly as it was written -in the source program. -.br -.un 3 - -& The addressed word is interpreted as a symbolic address -and is printed as the name of the symbol whose value is closest -to the addressed word, possibly followed by a signed offset. -.br -.un 3 - - (i. e., the character "new line") This command advances -the current location counter "." and prints the resulting -location in the mode last specified by -one of the above requests. -.br -.un 3 - -^ This character decrements "." and prints the -resulting location in the mode last selected -one of the above requests. It is a converse to . - -.un 3 -% Exit. -.sp -.in -6 -Odd addresses to word-oriented commands are rounded -down. -The incrementing and decrementing -of "." done by the and ^ requests is by one or -two depending on whether the last command -was word or byte oriented. -.sp -The address portion of any of the above commands -may be followed by a comma and then by an -expression. In this case that number of sequential -words or bytes specified by the expression is printed. -"." is advanced so that it points at the -last thing printed. -.sp -There are two commands to interpret the value -of expressions. -.sp -.in +6 -.un 3 -= When preceded by an expression, the value of the expression -is typed in octal. -When not preceded by an expression, the value of "." is -indicated. -This command does not change the value of ".". -.br -.un 3 - -: An attempt is made to print the given expression -as a symbolic address. If the expression is relocatable, -that symbol is found whose value is nearest -that of the expression, and the symbol is typed, followed by -a sign and the appropriate offset. -If the value of the expression is absolute, a symbol -with exactly the indicated value is sought and -printed if found; if no matching symbol is discovered, the -octal value of the expression is given. -.sp -.in -6 -The following command may be used to patch the file being debugged. -.sp -.in +6 -.un 3 -! This command must be preceded by an expression. -The value of the expression is stored at the location -addressed by the current value of ".". -The opcodes do not appear in the symbol -table, so the user must assemble them by hand. - -.sp -.in -6 -The following command is used after a fault has caused -a core image file to be produced. -.sp -.in +6 -.un 3 -$ causes the fault type and -the contents of the general registers and -several other registers to be printed both in octal and symbolic -format. -The values are as they were at the time of the fault. -.sp -.in -6 -Db__ should not be used to examine special files, -for example disks and tapes, since it reads one byte -at a time. -Use od(I) instead. - -For some purposes, it is important to know how addresses -typed by the user correspond with -locations in the file being debugged. -The mapping algorithm employed by db__ is non-trivial -for two reasons: -First, in an a.out_____ file, there is a 20(8) byte header -which will not appear when the file is loaded into -core for execution. -Therefore, apparent location 0 should correspond -with actual file offset 20. -Second, some systems cause a "squashed" core -image to be written. -In such a core -image, addresses in the stack must be mapped -according to the degree of squashing -which has been employed. -Db__ obeys the following rules: - -If exactly one argument is given, and if it appears -to be an a.out_____ file, the 20-byte header is skipped -during addressing, i.e., 20 is added to all addresses typed. -As a consequence, the header can be examined -beginning at location -20. - -If exactly one argument is given and if the file does -not appear to be an a.out_____ file, no mapping is done. - -If zero or two arguments are given, -the mapping appropriate to a core image file is employed. -This means that locations above the program break -and below the stack -effectively do not exist (and are not, in fact, recorded -in the core file). -Locations above the user's stack pointer are mapped, -in looking at the core file, to -the place where they are really stored. -The per-process data kept by the -system, which is stored in the last 512(10) bytes -of the core file, -can be addressed at apparent locations 160000-160777. - -If one wants to examine -a file which has an associated name list, -but is not a core image file, the last argument "-" -can be used (actually the only purpose of the -last argument is to make the number of -arguments not equal to two). -This feature is used most frequently in -examining the memory file /dev/mem. - -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO as(I), core(V), a.out(V), od(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "File not found" if the first argument -cannot be read; otherwise "?". -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dc.1 b/static/v10/man1/dc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 06e48454..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,196 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'DC (I)'1/15/73'DC (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME dc -- desk calculator -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS dc__ [file] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION dc__ -is an arbitrary precision integer arithmetic package. -The overall structure of dc is -a stacking (reverse Polish) calculator. -The following constructions are recognized -by the calculator: -.sp -.in +3 -.ti -3 -number -.br -The value of the number is pushed on the stack. -A number is an unbroken string of the digits 0-9. -It may be preceded by an underscore (_) to input a -negative number. -.sp -.ti -3 -+_ -_ *_ /_ %_ ^_ -.br -The top two values on the stack are added (+_), -subtracted (-_), multiplied (*_), divided (/_), -remaindered (%_) or exponentiated (^). -The two entries are popped off the stack; -the result is pushed on the stack in their place. -.sp -.ti -3 -s_x -.br -The top of the stack is popped and stored into -a register named x, where x may be any character. -.sp -.ti -3 -l_x -.br -The value in register x is pushed on the stack. -The register x is not altered. -All registers start with zero value. -.sp -.ti -3 -d_ -.br -The top value on the stack is pushed on the stack. -Thus the top value is duplicated. -.sp -.ti -3 -p_ -.br -The top value on the stack is printed. -The top value remains unchanged. -.sp -.ti -3 -f_ -.br -All values on the stack and in registers are printed. -.sp -.ti -3 -.ul 1 -q -.br -exits the program. If executing a string, the nesting level is -popped by two. -.sp -.ti -3 -.ul -x -.br -treats the top element of the stack as a character string -and executes it as a string of dc commands. -.sp -.ti -3 -[...]_____ -.br -puts the bracketed ascii string onto the top of the stack. -.sp -.ti -3 -<_x =_x >_x -.br -The top two elements of the stack are popped and compared. -Register x is executed if they obey the stated -relation. -.sp -.ti -3 -.ul -v -.br -replaces the top element on the stack by its square root. -.sp -.ti -3 -!_ -.br -interprets the rest of the line as a UNIX command. -.sp -.ti -3 -c_ -.br -All values on the stack are popped. -.sp -.ti -3 -i_ -.br -The top value on the stack is popped and used as the -number radix for further input. -.sp -.ti -3 -o_ -.br -the top value on the stack is popped and used as the -number radix for further output. -.sp -.ti -3 -z_ -.br -the stack level is pushed onto the stack. -.sp -.ti -3 -?_ -.br -a line of input is taken from the input source (usually the console) -and executed. -.sp -.ti -3 -new-line -.br -ignored except as the name of a register or to end the -response to a ?_. -.sp -.ti -3 -space -.br -ignored except as the name of a register or to terminate a number. -.br -.sp -.in -3 -If a file name is given, input is taken from that file until -end-of-file, then input is taken from the console. -.sp -An example to -calculate the monthly, weekly and -hourly rates for a $10,000/year salary. -.sp -.nf -.in +3 -10000 -100* (now in cents) -dsa (non-destructive store) -12/ (pennies per month) -la52/ (pennies per week) -d10* (deci-pennies per week) -375/ (pennies per hour) -f (print all results) - 512 - 19230 - 83333 -"a" 1000000 -.sp -.in -3 -An example which prints the first ten values of n! is -.in +3 -[la1+dsa*pla10>x]sx -0sa1 -lxx -.sp -.fi -.in -3 -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO msh(VII), salloc(III) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS (x) ? for unrecognized character x. -.br -(x) ? for not enough elements on the stack to do what was asked -by command x. -.br -"Out of space" when the free list is exhausted (too many digits). -.br -"Out of headers" for too many numbers being kept around. -.br -"Out of pushdown" for too many items on the stack. -.br -"Nesting Depth" for too many levels of nested execution. -.sp -.ti 0 -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dcon.1 b/static/v10/man1/dcon.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 575102dc..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dcon.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ -.TH DCON 1 -.CT 1 comm_mach -.SH NAME -dcon, ndcon, rlogin, nrx, rsh, scriptcon \- remote login and execution -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dcon -[ -.I option ... -] -.I machine -.PP -.B ndcon -.I machine -.PP -.B rlogin -.I machine -.PP -.B nrx -.I machine -[ -.I command-word ... -] -.PP -.B rsh -[ -.I option ... -] -.I machine -[ -.I command-word ... -] -.PP -.B scriptcon -.I machine script -.SH DESCRIPTION -Do not read this page unless you are familiar with -.IR con (1). -.PP -.I Dcon, -.I ndcon, -and -.I rlogin -are analogs (or special cases) of -.IR con (1) -for specific kinds of network connection. -They support the same local escape convention with the quit signal. -.PP -Similarly, -.I nrx -and -.I rsh -are analogs of -.IR rx. -.PP -Network addresses are as in -.IR con (1). -The default networks for the various commands are -.TP "\w'dcon, ndcon, nrx 'u -.I dcon, ndcon, nrx -.B dk -.TP -.I rlogin, rsh -.B tcp -.PP -.I Dcon -connects to the remote machine, and attempts -automatically to log in under -the login id of the invoking user. -Option -.BR -l -turns off automatic login; the remote machine will ask -for a login id and password. -.PP -.I Ndcon -behaves like -.I dcon -but provides a more transparent -transport protocol. -In particular terminal line disciplines are preserved -and it is possible to download into a -.IR mux (9.1) -window across an -.I ndcon -connection. -.PP -.I Rlogin -is like -.IR dcon , -but uses the connection protocol -found on Berkeley systems. -.PP -.I Rx -(see -.IR con (1)) -executes one shell command on the remote machine -as if logged in there, -with local standard input and output. -It uses a connection protocol specific to Research machines. -.PP -.I Nrx -is to -.I rx -as -.I ndcon -is to -.IR dcon : -it runs a command -remotely with line discipline preserved. -.PP -.I Rsh -is to -.I rx -as -.I rlogin -is to -.IR dcon : -it runs a command remotely using the Berkeley execution protocol. -.PP -.I Scriptcon -provides a connection like -.BR "dcon \-l" , -except that the login and other initial protocol are -controlled by a -.I script -file. -The first line of the file gives a string (e.g.\& -.LR login: ) -expected from the -remote machine; the second gives the local response, and -so on in alternation. -Unrecognized data from the remote machine are ignored. -Warning: a script that contains a password -may compromise the security of the remote system, hence -.I scriptcon -should be used only for restricted logins. -.PP -.I Con -tries to connect using the protocol of -.IR ndcon ; -if that fails, -it tries that of -.IR dcon , -then that of -.IR rlogin . -.I Rx -attempts its own style of connection; -if that fails, -it tries that of -.IR rsh . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR con (1), -.IR dkmgr (8), -.IR svcmgr (8), -.IR tcpmgr (8), -.IR ipc (3) -.br -D. L. Presotto, -`Interprocess Communication in the Eighth Edition -.SM UNIX -System', -this manual, Volume\ 2 -.SH BUGS -If a program run by -.I nrx -won't let go, for example by ignoring -signals, there is no way of getting out short of hanging up. -.br -There is no error correction or retry in a -.I scriptcon -script. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dd.1 b/static/v10/man1/dd.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d4aa458d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dd.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,242 +0,0 @@ -.TH DD 1 -.CT 1 files comm_dev -.SH NAME -dd, dblbuf \- convert and copy a file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dd -[ -.I option=value -] -... -.PP -.B dblbuf -[ -.B -b -.I blocksize -] -[ -.I file -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dd\^ -copies the specified input file -to the specified output with -possible conversions. -The standard input and output are used by default. -The input and output block size may be -specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O. -The options are -.TP \w'\f5count=\ \fIn'u -.BI if= file\^ -Set the input file (standard input by default). -.TP -.BI of= file\^ -Set the output file (standard output by default). -.TP -.BI ibs= n\^ -Set input block size to -.I n\^ -bytes (default 512). -.TP -.BI obs= n\^ -Set output block size (default 512). -.TP -.BI bs= n\^ -Set both input and output block size, -superseding -.I ibs\^ -and -.IR obs . -If no conversion is specified, -preserve the input block size instead of packing short blocks -into the output buffer. -This is particularly efficient since no in-core copy need be done. -.TP -.BI cbs= n\^ -Set conversion buffer size. -.TP -.BI skip= n\^ -Skip -.I n -input records before copying. -.TP -.BI iseek= n\^ -Seek -.I n -records forward on input file -before copying. -.TP -.BI files= n\^ -Copy and concatenate -.I n -input files (makes sense only -where input is a magnetic tape or similar device). -.TP -.BI oseek= n\^ -Aeek -.I n\^ -records from beginning of output file before copying. -.TP -.BI count= n\^ -Copy only -.I n -input records. -.HP -\f5conv=ascii\ \ \ \ \fRConvert \s-2EBCDIC\s0 to \s-2ASCII\s0. -.PD0 -.RS "\w'\f5conv=\fP'u" -.TP "\w'\f5unblock\ \ \fP'u" -.B ebcdic -Convert -.SM ASCII -to -.SM EBCDIC. -.TP -.B ibm -Like -.B ebcdic -but with a slightly different character map. -.TP -.B block -Convert variable length -.SM ASCII -records to fixed length. -.TP -.B unblock -Convert fixed length -.SM ASCII -records to variable length. -.TP -.B lcase -Map alphabetics to lower case. -.TP -.B ucase -Map alphabetics to upper case. -.TP -.B swab -Swap every pair of bytes. -.TP -.B noerror -Do not stop processing on an error. -.TP -.B sync -Pad every input record to -.I ibs\^ -bytes. -.RE -.PD -.PP -.fi -Where sizes are specified, -a number of bytes is expected. -A number may end with -.LR k , -.LR b , -or -.L w -to specify multiplication by -1024, 512, or 2 respectively; -a pair of numbers may be separated by -.L x -to indicate a product. -Multiple conversions may be specified in the style: -.LR conv=ebcdic,ucase . -.PP -.L Cbs\^ -is used only if -.LR ascii\^ , -.LR unblock\^ , -.LR ebcdic\^ , -.LR ibm\^ , -or -.L block\^ -conversion is specified. -In the first two cases, -.I n -characters are copied into the conversion buffer, any specified -character mapping is done, -trailing blanks are trimmed and new-line is added -before sending the line to the output. -In the latter three cases, characters are read into the -conversion buffer and blanks are added to make up an -output record of size -.I n. -If -.L cbs\^ -is unspecified or zero, the -.LR ascii\^ , -.LR ebcdic\^ , -and -.L ibm\^ -options convert the character set without changing the block -structure of the input file; the -.L unblock\^ -and -.L block\^ -options become a simple file copy. -.PP -.I Dblbuf -copies the named -.IR file , -or the standard input if no file -is specified, to the standard output. -Output is written in blocks matching the -input up to the given blocksize, or 32768 -bytes if not specified. -.PP -.I Dblbuf -uses multiple processes -to run faster, which is particularly useful in dealing with -a device such as a streaming tape drive. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -dd if=/dev/rmt0 of=x ibs=800 cbs=80 conv=ascii,lcase -Read an -.SM EBCDIC -tape blocked ten 80-byte -.SM EBCDIC -card images per record into an -.SM ASCII -file. -Note the use of raw magtape to handle arbitrary record sizes. -.TP -.L -tar cf /dev/stdout /usr | dblbuf >/dev/rmt1 -Copy the -.F /usr -directory to tape on -.FR /dev/rmt1 . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR cp (1), -.IR tar (1), -.IR cpio (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Dd -reports the number of full + partial input and output -blocks handled. -.SH BUGS -The -.SM ASCII/EBCDIC -conversion tables for -.I dd -were taken -from the 256-character standard in -.SM CACM -Nov, 1968. -The -.L ibm\^ -conversion, while less blessed as a standard, -corresponds better to certain -.SM IBM -print train conventions. -There is no universal solution. -.br -Options -.B if -and -.B of -are verbose equivalents of -.B < -and -.BR > . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dds.1 b/static/v10/man1/dds.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 35023aa4..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dds.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'Y''X' -.ti 0 -NAME X -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS X -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION X -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES X -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO X -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS X -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS X -.sp -.ti 0 -OWNER X diff --git a/static/v10/man1/deroff.1 b/static/v10/man1/deroff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 01dfb1be..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/deroff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,178 +0,0 @@ -.TH DEROFF 1 -.CT 1 writing_aids -.SH NAME -deroff, demonk, detex, delatex \- remove formatting requests -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B deroff -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B demonk -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B detex -.I file -.PP -.B delatex -.I file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Deroff -reads each file in sequence -and removes all -.I nroff -and -.IR troff (1) -requests and non-text arguments, backslash constructions, -and constructs of preprocessors such as -.I eqn, pic, -and -.IR tbl (1). -Remaining text is written on the standard output. -.I Deroff -follows files included by -.L .so -and -.L .nx -commands; -if a file has already been included, a -.L .so -for that file is ignored and a -.L .nx -terminates execution. -If no input file is given, -.I deroff -reads from standard input. -.PP -The options are -.TP -.B -w -Output a word list, one `word' (string of letters, digits, and -properly embedded ampersands and apostrophes, -beginning with a letter) per line. -Other characters are skipped. -Otherwise, the output follows the original, with the deletions mentioned above. -.TP -.B -i -Ignore -.L .so -and -.L .nx -requests. -.TP -.BR -ms -.PD0 -.TP -.B -mm -Remove titles, attachments, etc., as well as ordinary -.IR troff -constructs, from -.IR ms (6) -or -.I mm -documents. -.PD -.TP -.B -ml -Same as -.BR -mm , -but remove lists as well. -.PP -.I Demonk -removes all -.IR monk (1) -commands and then invokes -.I deroff -to handle both -.I troff -commands and preprocessor constructs. -.I Demonk -follows files included by -.L |\^insert -and -.L |\^source -commands as well as -.I troff -.L .so -and -.L .nx -requests. -If no input file is given, -.I demonk -reads from standard input. -.PP -.I Demonk -recognizes the following options and passes all options except -.B -b -and -.B -d -to -.I deroff . -.TP -.B -i -Ignore -.I monk -.L |\^insert -and -.L |\^source -commands as well as -.I troff -.L .so -and -.L .nx -requests. -.TP -.B -b -Do not output blank lines resulting from the removal of -.I monk -commands. -.TP -.BI -d dir -Use non-standard -.I monk -database directory -.I -dir. -.PP -.I Detex -and -.I delatex -do for -.IR tex (1) -and -.IR latex (6) -files what -.B deroff -w -does for -.I troff -files. -.I Delatex -largely subsumes -.I detex. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR troff (1), -.IR monk (1), -.IR tex (1), -.IR spell (1), -.IR wwb (1) -.SH BUGS -These filters are not complete interpreters of -.I troff -or -.I tex. -For example, macro definitions containing -.L \e$ -cause chaos in -.IR deroff -when the popular -.L $$ -delimiters for -.I eqn -are in effect. -.br -Text inside macros is emitted at place of -definition, not place of call. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/df.1 b/static/v10/man1/df.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fb1e1ec5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/df.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'DF (I)'1/20/73'DF (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME df -- disk free -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS df__ [ filesystem ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION df__ -prints out the number of free blocks -available on a file system. -If the file system is unspecified, -the free space on all of -the normally mounted file systems -is printed. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /dev/rf?, -/dev/rk?, -/dev/rp? -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO check(VIII) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 b/static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 219d3c02..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,142 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.4, March 9, 1981 -.tr @ -.TH DICTADD 1 -.SH NAME -dictadd \- add phrases to user's diction or sexist dictionary -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dictadd -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dictadd -adds words and/or phrases to the user's dictionaries -for use by the -.IR wwb "(1), " proofr "(1), " dictplus "(1), -.IR " diction "(1), " -.RI "and " sexist (1) -programs. -.I Sexist -searches a text for sexist phrases, -while the other programs search a text for wordy or misused diction. -These programs allow the user to have -dictionary files containing additional words and/or phrases -for the programs to locate or ignore. -.I Dictadd -automatically sets up these dictionary files. -.PP -.I Dictadd -asks users whether they want to add words to -.I $HOME/lib/ddict, $HOME/lib/sexdict, -or some other file. -The results depend on the user's response, -as shown below. -.PP -.RS 2 -.TP 21 -@@@User's request -.IR "Dictadd's " action -.TP -.I $HOME/lib/ddict -adds words and/or phrases to the user's dictionary, -.I $HOME/lib/ddict. -This file is checked automatically by -.I wwb -and -.I proofr -and can be specified for use by -.I dictplus -and -.I diction. -(See -.IR diction (1).) -.TP -.I $HOME/lib/sexdict -adds words and/or phrases to the user's dictionary, -.I $HOME/lib/sexdict. -This file is checked automatically by -.I sexist. -.TP -.I filename -adds words to -.I filename, -to be used with -.I diction, dictplus, -or -.I sexist. -.RE -.PP -In all cases, -.I dictadd -questions whether the user wants instructions, -and prompts with ">" for more words or phrases. -If the dictionary is not in existence when -.I dictadd -is invoked, it is created. -If the dictionary already exists, -.I dictadd -adds to it. -To quit, type "q" after the prompt. -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH EXAMPLE -1. The sequence: -.PP -.RS 5 -.B dictadd -(carriage return) -.br -(program asks if the user wants the words to be added to $HOME/lib/ddict) -.br -.B y -(user responds yes) -.br -(program asks if the user wants instructions) -.br -.I [~]phrase 1 -(carriage return) -.br -.I [~]phrase 2 -(carriage return) -.br -.I "[~]phrase n" -(carriage return) -.RE -.PP -will add phrases to -.IR $HOME/lib/ddict . -Phrases to be ignored must be preceded by a tilde(~), -phrases to be located require no special symbol. -When finished, type "q" on a line by itself. -.SH SEE ALSO -diction(1), -dictplus(1), -proofr(1), -sexist(1), -suggest(1), -wwb(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 b/static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 36c7f99f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,128 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.2, March 3, 1981 -.TH DICTPLUS 1 -.SH NAME -dictplus \- automatic combination of diction and suggest -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dictplus -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -][ -.B \-f -pfile [ -.B \-n -] ][ file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -.PP -.I Dictplus -automatically combines -.I diction -and -.IR suggest . -Options are: -.RS 5 -.TP 9 -.BI \-f " pfile" -Use the user's phrase file, -.IR pfile , -in addition to the default file of bad or wordy diction. -.IR Dictadd (1) -can be used -to set up this file. -.TP -.B \-n -Locate the phrases in -.I pfile -instead of the default phrase file. -.B \-n -cannot be used without -.B \-f -.IR pfile . -.RE -.I Dictplus -is one of the programs run under the -.IR proofr (1) -and -.IR wwb (1) -commands. -.PP -.IR Dictadd (1) -adds words and/or phrases that are to be located or ignored by -.IR diction " or " dictplus -to the user's dictionary, -.I $HOME/lib/ddict . -.I Dictadd -gives instructions on the necessary format -for phrases to be located or ignored by -.IR diction " or " dictplus. -.I $HOME/lib/ddict -is only used by -.I diction -and -.I dictplus -when it is specified by the -.B \-f -flag. -.IR Proofr (1) -checks -.I $HOME/lib/ddict -automatically when it runs -.IR dictplus . -.PP -All programs can take the following two options -that give information on the programs: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH EXAMPLES -1. The command: -.PP -.RS 5 -.B "dictplus -f patfile filename" -.RE -.PP -will print sentences from -.I filename -that contain bad or wordy diction, -including or suppressing phrases as specified in -.IR patfile . -Suggested replacements for bad phrases will also be printed. -(The -.I patfile -can be -.IR $HOME/lib/ddict .) -.SH FILES -.TP 21 -/tmp/$$* -temporary files used by -.I dictplus -.SH "SEE ALSO" -diction(1), -suggest(1), -proofr(1), -wwb(1), -worduse(1), -sexist(1), -dictadd(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/diff.1 b/static/v10/man1/diff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7942ec4b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/diff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,270 +0,0 @@ -.TH DIFF 1 -.CT 1 files -.SH NAME -diff, diff3 \- differential file comparison -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B diff -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file1 file2 -.PP -.B diff3 -[ -.B \-ex3 -] -.I file1 file2 file3 -.SH DESCRIPTION -When run on regular files -.I diff -tells what lines must be changed in the files to bring them into agreement. -Except in rare circumstances, -.I diff -finds a smallest sufficient set of differences. -If neither file -is a directory, then one -may be -.LR - , -meaning the standard input. -If one file -is a directory, -then a file in that directory with basename the same as that of -the other file is used. -.PP -If both files are directories, -similarly named files in the two directories -are compared by the method of -.I diff -for text files and -.IR cmp (1) -otherwise. -Options when comparing directories are: -.TP -.B -r -Apply -.I diff -recursively to similarly named subdirectories. -.TP -.B -s -Report files that are the same (normally not mentioned). -.PP -There are several options for output format; -the default output format contains lines of these forms: -.IP -.IB n1 a -.IB n3 , n4 -.br -.IB n1 , n2 d -.I n3 -.br -.IB n1 , n2 c -.IB n3 , n4 -.PP -These lines resemble -.I ed -commands to convert -.I file1 -into -.IR file2 . -The numbers after the letters pertain to -.IR file2 . -In fact, by exchanging -.L a -for -.L d -and reading backward -one may ascertain equally how to convert -.I file2 -into -.IR file1 . -As in -.I ed, -identical pairs where -.IR n1 = n2 -or -.I n3 = n4 -are abbreviated as a single number. -.PP -Following each of these lines come all the lines that are -affected in the first file flagged by -.LR < , -then all the lines that are affected in the second file -flagged by -.LR > . -.PP -.TP -.B -e -Produce a script of -.LR a , -.LR c , -and -.L d -for -.IR ed (1) -to recreate -.I file2 -from -.IR file1 . -When comparing directories, produce a -.IR sh (1) -script to convert text files common to the two directories. -.TP -.BI -c n -Include -.I n -extra lines of context with each set of differences. -The output format is modified: -the output begins with identification of the files involved and -their creation dates and changes are separated -by lines of *'s. -Lines removed from -.I file1 -are marked with -.LR - ; -those added to -.I file2 -are marked -.LR + . -Lines which are changed from one -file to the other are marked in both files with -.LR ! . -.TP -.B -h -Do a fast, half-hearted job, -useful only when changed stretches are short -and well separated, -but does work on files of unlimited length. -.TP -.B -b -Ignore trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) and treat other -strings of blanks as if they were a single space. -.TP -.B -B -Ignore all blanks. -.PP -.I Diff3 -compares three versions of a file -and publishes the various disagreeing ranges of text. -One of the following indicators introduces each reported -difference. -.TP -.B ==== -All three files differ. -.TP -.BI ==== f -File -.I f -differs, where -.I f -is 1, 2, or 3. -.PP -Disagreeing fragments from the three files follow the -.B ==== -line, each identified by a -.IR diff -like -range indication: -.TP -.IB f : n1 a -File -.I f -lacks text that other files have; their text would -be appended after line -.I n1. -.TP -.IB f : n1 , n2 c -.br -.ns -.TP -.IB f : n1 c -Lines -.I n1 -through -.I n2 -(or line -.I n1 -only) of file -.I f -would have to be changed to agree with some other file. -The original contents follow, unless a higher-numbered file -has the same contents. -.PP -Under option -.BR -e , -.I diff3 -publishes a script for -.IR ed (1) -that will incorporate into -.I file1 -all changes between -.I file2 -and -.I file3, -i.e. the changes that normally would be flagged -.B ==== -and -.BR ====3 . -Option -.B \-x -(\fB\-3\fR) -produces a script to incorporate -only changes flagged -.B ==== -.RB ( ====3 ). -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -(cat diff0-1 diff1-2 diff2-3; echo '1,$p') | ed - file0 >file3 -An ancestral -.L file0 -has been kept along with a chain of version-to-version -difference files made thus: -.LR "diff -e file0 file1 >diff0-1" . -The shell command reconstructs the latest version. -.PP -.EX -if diff3 mod1 old mod2 | grep -s '^====$' -then : -else (diff3 -e mod1 old mod2; echo '1,$p') | ed - mod1 >new -fi -.EE -.PD0 -.IP -Compare two different modified versions with an old file. -If no modifications interfere with each other -.RI ( grep -finds no -.B ==== -lines), make a new file incorporating both modifications. -.PD -.SH FILES -.F /tmp/d* -.br -.F /usr/lib/diffh -for -.B -h -.br -.F /usr/lib/diff3 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR cmp (1), -.IR comm (1), -.IR ed (1), -.IR idiff (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Diff -yields exit status is 0 for no differences, 1 for some, 2 for trouble. -.SH BUGS -Text lines that consist of a single `.' will -defeat options -.BR -e , -.BR -x , -and -.BR -3 . -.br -Superfluous output may result for files that differ -only in insignificant blanks when comparing directories -under option -.BR -b . -.br -Option -.B -c -is unpardonably bizarre. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 b/static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c3bc4dbd..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -.TH DIMPRESS 1 local -.SH NAME -dimpress \- Imagen printer filter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dimpress -[ option ] ... [ file ] ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dimpress -prints -.I files -created by -.IR troff (1) -on any printer that accepts the Impress graphics and page layout -language. -If no -.I file -is mentioned, the standard input is printed. -The following options are understood. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IB N1 \- N2. -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest-numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP 1.0i -.B \-t -Direct output to the standard output instead of the printer. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-x num -Leave a margin -.I num -inches from the left side edge of the paper. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-y num -Leaves a margin -.I num -inches down from the top of the page. -Negative values for -.I num -are allowed and often useful, especially to get macro generated -cut marks off the page. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-l -Print the job in landscape mode. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-p num -Set the horizontal and vetical step sizes for graphics to -.I num -pixels. -If Impress graphics commands are used for drawing this option -will only affect splines. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-P num -Use -.I num -as the pixel diameter of the Impress graphics pen. -Only useful when Impress graphics commands are being used. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-T name -Generate output to be printed on the target printer -.I name. -The printers currently supported are: -.RS 1i -.TP .5i -.PD 0 -.B i300 -Imagen 8/300 -.TP .5i -.B i480 -Imagen 5/480 -.TP .5i -.B i10 -Imagen Imprint-10 using rasti10 raster files -.TP .5i -.B i240 -Imagen Imprint-10 using rasti240 raster files -.RE -.PD 1 -.IP -By default the output printer is assumed to be -.I i300. -Although -.I i10 -and -.I i240 -select the same target printer, namely the Imprint-10, -the raster tables used for character generation will be -found in different directories. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-F dir -Use -.I dir -as the -.I troff -font directory. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-B dir -Use -.I dir -as the raster table directory. -When processing a -.I file -generated by -.I troff -for printing on device xxx -.I dimpress -will first look for the binary font directory devxxx -in the raster table directory. -If it's not found there the devxxx directory in -.I troff's -font directory will be used. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-R name -Use raster tables generated for device -.I name -when printing -.I file. -By default -.I dimpress -will attempt to use the target printer's raster files. -.TP 1.0i -.BI \-f file -Read resident font information from -.I file -which is located in directory /usr/lib/raster/RESIDENT. -By default -.I dimpress -looks for a file in that directory that has the same -name as the target printer. -Useful if several otherwise identical printers -support different sets of resident fonts. -.PP -The -.I files -should be prepared by -.I troff. -Best results will almost certainly be obtained only when -.I troff -and -.I dimpress -agree on the target printer. -.SH FILES -/tmp/dimp* -.br -/usr/lib/font/dev*/* -.br -/usr/lib/raster/rast* -.br -/usr/lib/raster/RESIDENT/* -.br -.SH SEE ALSO -troff(1), tc(1), troff(5), daps(1) -.\" @(#)daps.1 1.1 of 12/17/82 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dired.1 b/static/v10/man1/dired.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 16c2b312..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dired.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -.TH DIRED 1 -.CT 1 dirs -.SH NAME -dired \- directory editor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dired -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dired -displays a directory listing like -.L ls -l -(see -.IR ls (1)) -and allows you to prowl around the listed entries, -deleting, editing, and displaying them. -It requires a cursor-addressed terminal identified -in environment variable -.BR TERM ; -see -.IR term (9.1) -to simulate such terminals in -.IR mux (9.1). -.PP -With no -.I file -argument, the current directory is listed. -With only one -.I file -argument, the argument is interpreted as a directory and it is listed. -With multiple arguments, the arguments are interpreted as filenames. -The options are: -.TP -.BR - [ sr ][ nsrw ] -Sort the file list by -name (default), size, access time, or modification time. -Ordering for -.B s -is increasing if by name, decreasing otherwise. -Ordering is opposite for -.BR r . -.TP -.BI -w n -If -.I n -is -.BR f, -use the full screen; if -.BR h , -use half the screen (default); if a number, use -.I n -lines for the directory listing, reserving the rest -of the screen for quick -file display. -.PP -The fields of a -.I dired -listing are: mode, link count, owner, size, write date and name. -A cursor shows the current entry. -.PP -Commands consist of single characters; arguments are -prompted for at the bottom of the screen. -To get a complete list, use the help command. -Fuller descriptions of less obvious commands are given below. -.TP -.B ! -Prompt for a shell command. -The command is executed with -.L % -characters in the command are replaced by the pathname of the current -entry, and -.L # -characters by the basename. -.TP -.B . -Repeat the previous -.B ! -shell command, using the current entry to replace -.L % -or -.LR # . -.TP -.B d -Mark the current entry for deletion. -Deletion of a directory is recursive. -.TP -.B e -If the current entry is a file, -edit it with the editor -.I e, -or an editor named by the environment variable -.BR EDITOR . -If it is a directory, -invoke -.IR dired -recursively for that directory. -.TP -.B h -.br -.ns -.TP -.B ? -Display a help file. -.TP -.B m -Display the current file with the pager -.IR p (1), -or another pager named by the environment variable -.BR PAGER . -.TP -.B q -Quit this directory level of -.I dired. -List the files marked for deletion and request -confirmation before deleting them. -.TP -.B t -Type. -Display the current file. -In two-window mode pause after each screenfull until you type -a carriage return. -The display may be interrupted. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/dired -.TP -.F /usr/lib/dired -help file -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR ls (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -While -.I dired -is preparing a listing it reports `Reading', -and types a dot -for each 10 files. -.SH BUGS -Long lines and diagnostics can foul up the -display. -.br -Needs a command to search for a given file. -.br -The off-line print command -.L p -is broken. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dis.1 b/static/v10/man1/dis.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2361c0ff..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dis.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.TH DIS 1 SHARE -.SH NAME -dis \- display input as refreshed page on VDU output -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dis -.RB [ -t timeout] -.RB [ -c refresh] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dis -looks up the terminal capability database for the characteristics -of the device represented by the environment variable "TERM". -Assuming that the standard input consists of repetitive pages, -.I Dis -then uses cursor addressing to write changed data only on its standard output. -Pages are delimited by a -.I form-feed -or by a timeout, if requested. -.PP -The timeout is specified by the flag \fB-t\fR followed by a number -representing seconds. -.PP -If the -.B -c -flag is specified, the screen is completely redrawn every -.I refresh -updates. -.SH EXAMPLES -(while true; do date; echo '\\f\\c'; sleep 10; done)|dis -.SH FILES -/etc/termcap -.SH SEE ALSO -termlib(3), or curses(3). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -If your terminal doesn't have cursor addressing. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dist.1 b/static/v10/man1/dist.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a3e3edf4..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dist.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -.TH DIST 1 -.SH NAME -dist \(mi distribute files to remote systems -.SH SYNOPSIS -.\".BI "dist [ " system " | -[Ff] " file " ] [ -n ] " files -.BI "dist [ " system " | -[Ff] " file " ] " files -.PP -.B "dist -q [" -.I system -.B "| -[Ff]" -.I file -.B "]" -.PP -.B "dist -r [" -.I system -.B "| -[Ff]" -.I file -.B "]" -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dist -distributes files to other systems, where they are installed -under the same names. -.I Dist -operates by packaging the files with -.IR mkpkg (1), -and queuing the resulting package in a spool directory to be -picked up by the remote systems. -.PP -The remote systems' names are given as a single argument, containing -the system names (in the format of -.IR ipc (3)) -separated by white space; alternatively, the -.B -f -option may be used to specify a file containing a list of system names. -The -.B -F -option is identical to -.B -f -except -.I dist -looks for the file in a standard directory. -.PP -The -.I dist -command has two forms of use. In the first form, -.I dist -packages a group of files and queues them for transmission. -.\"If the -.\".B -n -.\"option is specified, the remote systems are notified that the package -.\"is available. -The -.I file -arguments may be either file names or options for -.IR mkpkg (1). -.PP -When -.B -q -is given, -.I dist -queries the named systems and displays the contents of their transmission -queues; if no systems are given the local queue is displayed -by default. -.PP -When -.B -r -is given, -.I dist -calls the named system and installs any packages it has queued for -the local system. -.SH EXAMPLES -Distribute a new binary for grep to all vaxes: -.IP -.B "dist -F vaxes /bin/grep" -.SH FILES -.B /usr/lib/dist/* -.br -.B /usr/lib/dist/destinations/* -.br -.B /usr/spool/dist/* -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR mkpkg (1), -.IR dist (5), -.IR dist (8) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 deleted file mode 100755 index ce5ee409..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -.TH DMDCAT 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdcat - send files to a 630 MTG connected printer. -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBdmdcat\fR [ \f3\-s\f1 ] [ \f3\-b\f1 ] [ \f3\-v\f1 ] [ -\f3\-u\f1 ] [ \f3\-t\f1 ] [ \f3\-e\f1 ] [ file\&.\&.\&. ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I dmdcat -command is intended to be used -to send files to a printer connected to the Printer port of the 630 -MTG terminal. -\f2Dmdcat\f1 will send the concatenation of files specified on its -command line, or the standard input if no files are specified. -.PP -The data is sent to the terminal preceded by a \fIPrinter-On\fR Request -escape sequence, and is terminated by a \fIPrinter-Off\fR request -escape sequence. -The \fIPrinter-On\fR request escape sequence commands the terminal emulator to start -sending incoming data to the printer if the printer is available. The \fIPrinter-Off\fR request escape sequence tells -the terminal emulator to stop the sending. -The escape sequences sent are: -.RS 8 -.ft CW -.sp -\f3Printer On\f1 - ESC[?5;1i -.sp -\f3Printer Off\f1 - ESC[?4i -.ft 1 -.RE -.PP -If the \fB\-s\fR is present, \f2dmdcat\f1 uses this set of escape -sequences: -.RS 8 -.ft CW -.sp -\f3Printer On (no screen)\f1 - ESC[?5;2i -.sp -\f3Printer Off (no screen)\f1 - ESC[4i -.ft 1 -.RE -.sp -which tells the terminal emulator to start/stop -sending incoming data to the printer (if the printer is available) as before -but not to display this data on the screen. -.PP -The terminal responds with: -.RS 8 -.ft CW -.sp -ESC[?\f3ps\f1i where: -.sp -\f3ps\f1=0 indicates printer was not granted -.sp -\f3ps\f1=1 indicates printer was granted. -.ft 1 -.RE -.sp -If the printer was not granted, or if the terminal does not respond, -\fIdmdcat\fR displays a message and aborts. -.PP -The second option, \fB\-b\fR, strips backspaces -from the output of \f2dmdcat\f1. -If backspaces result in two or more characters appearing -in the same place, only the last character read is output. -This means that the printed output appears exactly as it -appears on the 630 MTG screen, without bold and underline. -This option is useful for printers which either cannot process -backspaces or are slow in processing backspaces. -.PP -\fIDmdcat\fR is a shell program that calls \fIcat\fR(1) and will pass -the options \fB-u\fR, \fB-v\fR, \fB-t\fR, and \fB-e\fR to \fIcat\fR(1). - -.SH FILES -$DMD/lib/dmdgetpr reads terminal response - -.SH SEE ALSO -cat(1), col(1) in the -\f2UNIX System V User Reference Manual\f1. -.br -\f2630 MTG Terminal User's Guide\f1. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -\f2Dmdcat\f1 uses the \f2col\f1(1) command to -strip backspaces with the \fB\-b\fR option. -\fICol\f1(1) is not available on all \s-1UNIX\s+1 -systems. -The \fB\-b\fR option will give -an error message if it cannot locate the \f2col\f1(1) command. -.PP -\f2Dmdcat\f1 only works if it is executed from -the default 630 MTG terminal emulator or any terminal emulator that supports the -escape sequence sets described above. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 757eba1a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,247 +0,0 @@ -.TH DMDCC 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdcc \- 630 MTG C compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f3dmdcc [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I dmdcc -command is the 630 MTG C compiler. Any software to be downloaded -into the 630 MTG must be compiled using this command. -.PP -\fIDmdcc\fR works in a similar manner to -other compiler (cc) commands but is enhanced to call -\fImc68cpp\fR and \fImc68ld\fR -with special arguments for the 630 MTG development environment. -In particular, -the \fIdmdcc\fR command defines the variable \fBDMD630\fR, -it sets the include search path -to $DMD/include, it sets the library search path to $DMD/lib, -it includes the standard 630 MTG libraries, it links in the 630 -MTG C -run-time start-up routine crtm.o, and it tells \fImc68ld\fR -to retain relocation information so the -resulting executable file can be relocated before download into the -630 MTG. -.PP -The exact arguments passed to \fImc68cpp\fR and \fImc68ld\fR -can be viewed by including the \fI-#\fR debugging argument on the -\fIdmdcc\fR command line. -.PP -The -\fIdmdcc\fR utility -accepts three types of arguments: -.RS 8 -.B .c -.br -.B .s -.br -.B .o -.RE -.PP -Arguments whose names end with -.B .c -are the C source programs, and those with -.B .s -are the assembly programs. -They are compiled/assembled, and -each object program -whose name is that of the source with -.B .o -substituted -.RB "for " .c " or " .s -is left in the file. -The -.B .o -file is normally deleted if a single -C program is compiled and link-edited all at one time. -.PP -The following flags are interpreted by -.I dmdcc\c -\&. -See -.IR mc68cpp (1), -.IR mc68as (1) -and -.IR mc68ld (1) -for other useful flags. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-c\fR -Suppress the link-editing phase of the compilation, and force -an object file to be produced even if only one program is compiled. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-g\fR -Flag to the compiler to produce additional information needed for the -use of -.IR dmdpi (1). -\} -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-O\fR -Invoke an object-code optimizer. -The optimizer will move, merge, and delete code; this option should not be -used if it is expected that compiled code may be debugged with \fIdmdpi\fR(1). -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-W\fIc\fB,\fRarg1[\fB,\fRarg2...] -Hand off the argument[s] -to pass -.I c -where -.I c -is one of -.RB [ p02al ] -indicating preprocessor, -compiler, -optimizer, -assembler, -or link editor, respectively. For example: -.RS 6 -.ce -.B \-Wa,\-m -.br -invokes the \f2m4\f1 macro preprocessor on the input to the assembler. -.RE -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-S\fR -Compile the named C programs, and leave the -assembler-language output on corresponding files suffixed -.BR .s . -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-P\fR -Run only the macro preprocessor -on the named C programs, and leave the output on corresponding -files suffixed -.BR .i . -.TP 6 -\fB\-E\fR -Same as the -.B \-P -option except the output is directed to the standard output. -This allows the preprocessor to be used as a filter for -any other compiler. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-#\fR -Debug flag. Show the command lines passed to \fImc68cpp\fR, -\fImc68ccom\fR, \fImc68as\fR and \fImc68ld\fR. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB\-x\fR -Turn off special processing for the 630 MTG environment. This argument should -not be used when compiling programs to be downloaded into the 630 -MTG. -.PP -.TP 6 -\f3\-Z\f1 \f2n\f1 -Allocate \f2n\f1 bytes of stack for process. If not specified the -default is 2048, Note that stack size can be overridden at -download time with the \f2dmdld -Z\f1 option. If \f2n\f1 is -specified smaller than 2048, it is defaulted to 2048. -.PP -.DT -.br -.DT -.PP -Other arguments -are taken -to be either C preprocessor or link-editor flag arguments, or C-compatible -object programs, typically produced by an earlier -.I dmdcc -run, -or perhaps libraries of C-compatible routines. -These programs, together with the results of any -compilations specified, are link-edited (in the order -given) to produce an executable program with name -.B dmda.out -unless the -.B \-o -option of the link-editor is used. -.PP -The -.I dmdcc -command expects the \fBDMD\fR shell variable to be set and exported in -the user's environment. -This variable must point to the "root" directory of the 630 MTG software -node. -.PP -\fIDmdcc\fR tags the downloadable ouput file with a -programming envirionment identification number (PEID) which is -used by \fIdmdld\fR prior to download to verify copatibility -with terminal firmware. The PEID is determined by \fIdmdcc\fR -from the firmware routine linkages included in the process. -Every firmware routine called by the process causes a linkage -to the routine to be retrieved from archive and included in -the load module. Each of these linkage routines is tagged with -a PEID related to the firmware version that supports the -called firmware routine. The PEID associated with the latest -level of firmware required to support those linkages retrieved -from archive is tagged to the load module. Compatibility with -earlier firmware releases is maintained as long as new -firmware functions not supported by older firmware are not used -in the program. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 22 -file.c -input file -.TP 22 -file.o -object file -.TP 22 -file.s -assembly language file -.TP 22 -dmda.out -link-edited output -.TP 22 -/usr/tmp/mc68? -temporary file -.TP 22 -$DMD/lib/mc68cpp -preprocessor -.TP 22 -$DMD/lib/mc68ccom -compiler -.TP 22 -$DMD/lib/mc68optim -optimizer -.TP 22 -$DMD/bin/mc68as -assembler -.TP 22 -$DMD/bin/mc68ld -link loader -.DT -.PD -.br -.SH SEE ALSO -dmdpi(1), -mc68as(1), -mc68cpp(1), -mc68ld(1). -.br -m4(1) in the -\f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -.sp -.IR "The C Programming Language", -by Kernighan, B. W., and Ritchie, D. M., -Prentice-Hall, 1978. -.br -.I Programming in C\-A Tutorial -by Kernighan, B. W. -.br -.I C Reference Manual -by Ritchie, D. M. -.br -.br -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The diagnostics produced by the C compiler are sometimes -cryptic. -Occasional messages may be produced by the assembler -or link-editor. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 596e85b0..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -.TH DMDDEMO 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmddemo - demonstrations available on the 630 MTG -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBdmddemo\fR [options] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The \fIdmddemos\fR are graphical demonstration programs that run on the 630 MTG. -All programs will become local unless they are downloaded into a window -which is the last window connected to a host. -Exiting each program can be done by typing 'q' when that window is current -or by deleting the window. -Typing \fIdmddemo\fR -with no options gives you a list of demonstrations available. -.sp 2 -Options (demos) available are: -.nf -.sp - \fBball\fR A bouncing ball -.sp - \fBbounce\fR Ricocheting lines. Button 1 controls speed. -.sp - \fBclock\fR Displays face of clock with moving hands in - addition to a digital time display. -.sp - \fBdoodle\fR An interactive doodler. Button 1 draws and - button 2 erases. -.sp - \fBrose\fR Rotates trigonometric figures to produce various - flower shapes. -.sp - \fBstar\fR Interactive drawing. Button 1 draws and button 2 erases. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 deleted file mode 100755 index e129f264..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,210 +0,0 @@ -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH DMDLD 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdld \- 630 MTG application bootstrap loader -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f3dmdld [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file \f3[\f1 application - arguments \f3]\f1 -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I dmdld -program downloads the named -.I file -from the host, for execution in the 630 MTG terminal's window connected -to its standard output. It can also be used to invoke -cached applications. -.PP -The \fIdmdld\fR program works in \fIlayers(1)\fR and non-layers environments. -In \fIlayers(1)\fR, the download runs on top of the existing \fIxt\fR error-correcting -protocol. In non-layers, \fIdmdld\fR temporarily puts the 630 -MTG terminal into -\fIxt\fR protocol, and mimics that protocol from its side, thus insuring an error-free -download. -.PP -.I Dmdld -first asks the terminal if there is a cached application -of name -.I file -already in the terminal. The inquiry uses the filename -clipped from any pathname prefix. -If such an application exists and is -available, that application will be booted in the window without going -through the download sequence. -.PP -If a cached application of inquired filename -does not exist -in the terminal or is not available (see \fIcache(3L)\fR for reasons), -.I dmdld -will attempt to download -.I file -from the host. -Files to be downloaded by -.I dmdld -must be 630 object files created with -\fIdmdcc(1)\fR. -.PP -During compilation, \fIdmdcc(1)\fR looks for the programming environment identification -(PEID) number of all the library functions link-loaded, and assumes the highest number -as the PEID of the application. During the download initialization, \fIdmdld\fR -will send this number to the terminal. If the terminal's firmware version does not support -this PEID - in other words, the firmware does not have some new library functions used -by the application, the download will be aborted. The argument flag -.B \-f -will override this checking, but the sanity of the application (after being downloaded -and running) cannot be guaranteed. -.PP -The optional \f2application-arguments\f1 are also sent to the terminal in order to -initialize the parameters \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR of the function \fImain\fR -of the application. -.PP -During the download, the 630 mouse cursor will turn into a -"coffee cup" and the progress -of the download is shown by a gradual filling of the window with inverse video. -The code to be downloaded is relocated on-the-fly by \fIdmdld\fR to the -memory area allocated for it by the terminal. -If the download succeeds, the application will take over the -window and start execution. -.PP -The following options are supported by \fIdmdld\fR: -.TP -.B \-d -causes a printout of the download information on the -diagnostic output (standard error). -.TP -.B \-p -prints non-layers protocol statistics on the diagnostic output (standard error). -Note that this option forces the -.B \-d -option. In \fIlayers(1)\fR, this option is the same as the -.B \-d -option. -.TP -.B \-z -loads the process but does not run it. -The process can then be started using -.IR dmdpi (1). -This option works only under -.IR layers (1). -.TP -.B \-f -forces the download even if the programming environment identification -number of the application is not supported by the terminal it is downloaded -into. -.TP -.B \-n -is a null option, and is ignored by \f2dmdld\f1. It is used by -processes that want to fork \f2dmdld\f1 with a variable argument -option. -.TP -\f3\-Z\f1 \f2n\f1 -overrides the inherent stack size of the download application and sets it -to \fIn\fR bytes. \fIN\fR must be greater than or equal to 2048, or else stack -size is defaulted to 2048. Inherent stack size of the download application -is specified through the -Z option of \fIdmdcc(1)\fR (or defaulted to 2048). - -.TP -.B \-T -loads an absolute file (already link-loaded to a fixed address) -such as a new version of the terminal's firmware into the terminal's RAM space. -This download is called a takeover (overlay) download because it will close all -physical ports except for the one running \fIdmdld\fR. The whole terminal screen -will turn blank, and will be gradually filled up with inverse video representing -the code being downloaded. When the download is finished, execution will begin at -the first address of \fIfile\fR. Relocation will be done by \fIdmdld\fR only if the -first address of \fIfile\fR is lower than the first available RAM address of the -terminal. This is necessary because low-addressed RAM is used to store the -terminal's system tables and variables, and overwriting them with the downloaded data -may put the terminal into undetermined states. The \f3\-N\f1 -option can be used instead, if the relocation possibility is -not wanted. -.TP -.B \-N -loads an absolute file into the terminal's RAM space. The -difference between the \f3\-T\f1 and \f3\-N\f1 options is that -the \f3\-N\f1 does not relocate the absolute file. Therefore -the absolute file can be generated without relocation -information. -.PP -The \f3\-T\f1 and \f3\-N\f1 options only work in the -non-layers environment, and are exclusive of each other. -\ -.PP -The environment variable -.B JPATH -is the analog of the shell's -.B PATH -variable to define a set of directories in which to search for -.IR file . -.TP -\s-1\f3NOTE\s+1\f1: -Standard error should be redirected when using the -.B \-d -or -.B \-p -options. -.SH EXAMPLE -Invoking the terminal resident \fBPF Edit\fR application using \fIdmdld\fR: -.br -.ti +4 -.ft CM -dmdld "PF Edit" -.ft R -.PP -Invoking a \fIdmdcc(1)\fR compiled application: -.br -.ti +4 -.ft CM -dmdld dmda.out -.ft R -.PP -Invoking a \fIdmdcc(1)\fR compiled application with the -.B \-d -flag, redirecting standard error to \fItemp\fR: -.br -.ti +4 -.ft CM -dmdld -d dmda.out 2>temp -.ft R -.PP -Invoking a \fIdmdcc(1)\fR compiled application with \f2application-argument\f1: -.br -.ti +4 -.ft CM -dmdld $DMD/lib/demolib/clock "`date`" -.ft R - -.SH SEE ALSO -cache(3L), dmdcc(1), dmdpi(1), jx(1). -.br -layers(1) in the -\fIUNIX System V Release 3 User's Reference Manual\fR. -.br -layers(1) in the \fI5620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference Manual\fR. - -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.PP -The error message "\fIdmdld: ... is not compatible with terminal\fR" -means that the application the user attempts to -download cannot execute safely in the terminal because it calls -library routines which do not exist in the terminal's firmware version -(i.e. the programming environment ID of the application is "newer" than the -one supported -by the terminal). A firmware upgrade is necessary, or the user can force -the download by using the -.B \-f -flag. -.PP -The error messages "\fIdmdld: cannot access ...\fR" or "\fIdmdld: cannot open ...\fR" -appearing when the named \fIfile\fR is known to be in the cache, indicate that the -application is not available for booting, and \fIdmdld\fR cannot find or open the -named \fIfile\fR in the host. -.PP -The error message "\fIdmdld: no memory in terminal\fR" indicates -that the terminal has run out of memory to accept the download. The user may -free up memory (by deleting windows, etc..) and re-try. -.PP -Other error messages are self-explanatory. - -.SH BUGS -The \f2application-arguments\f1 are not sent to the terminal -to update \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR if the named -\fIfile\fR is found in the terminal's application cache. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 79f3b06e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ -.TH DMDMAN 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdman \- print manual pages -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B "dmdman" -[options] [sections] titles -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I dmdman -utility -prints the on-line manual pages for the given titles. -\f3Titles\f1 are entered in lower case. The \f3sections\f1 are -numbers from one to eight and correspond to the manual page -section numbers. The \f3section\f1 -number may not have a letter suffix. If no \f3section\f1 is -specified, the whole manual is searched for \f3title\f1 and -all occurences of it are printed. -.sp -\f3Options\f1 and their meanings are: -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB-c\fR -Preprocess output with col(1). -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB-d\fR -Search the current directory rather than \f2$DMD/man\f1. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB-w\fR -Prints on the standard output only the \f3pathname\f1 of the -entries, relative to \f2$DMD/man\f1, or the current directory -for \f2-d\f1 option. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB-Tterm\fR -Set \f2TERM\f1 (refer greek(1)) before printing the manual -page. In addition, a null \f3term\f1 will clear the -\f3term\f1 variable for the duration of the \f2dmdman\f1 -invocation. -.PP -.TP 6 -\fB-12\fR -Indicates that the terminal type specified on the \f2-T\f1 -option or in the \f2$Term\f1 variable is to be placed in 12 pitch -mode. If this option is used, then the terminal type must not -include the ``-12'' string; otherwise, this string will occur -twice in the \f2$Term\f1 variable, thus making it invalid. -.PP -Since the manual pages are not available on the -AT&T 3B2 Computer, this command will not work on that computer. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 32 -$DMD/man/?_man/man[1-8]/* -Packed manual entries -.DT -.PD -.SH SEE ALSO -col(1), greek(1) in the -\fIUNIX System V User's Reference Manual\fR. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 5cd5043c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,195 +0,0 @@ -.nr Hy 0 -.nh -.TH DMDMEMORY 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdmemory - 630 MTG memory profiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dmdmemory [ \-c ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -Memory in the 630 MTG terminal is divided into two types of memory which can be -requested by user level function calls: -.IP . 2 -non-compactible \fIalloc\fR memory [\fIalloc\fR(3R)], -.IP . 2 -garbage-collectible \fIgcalloc\fR memory [\fIgcalloc\fR(3R)]. -.P -The \fIalloc\fR memory pool starts from the low addressed end of the user memory pool and -grows upward. The \fIgcalloc\fR memory pool begins at the other end of the user -memory pool (i.e. at the highest address) and grows downward. -The mobile boundaries of the \fIalloc\fR and -\fIgcalloc\fR pools are named respectively \fBalloclevel\fR and \fBgclevel\fR. -.P -To contain fragmentation due to the non-compactibility of the \fIalloc\fR memory, -there is an \fBalloclimit\fR which restricts the expansion of the \fIalloc\fR pool. -.P -In order to make better use of \fIalloc\fR fragments, the 630 -MTG memory allocation scheme converts a \fIgcalloc\fR request -that cannot fit into -the \fIgcalloc\fR pool to an \fIalloc\fR request. -If there is a fragment big enough -to satisfy the request, it becomes a \fIgcastray\fR block. \fIGcastray\fR memory is -of the same type as \fIgcalloc\fR but resides inside the \fIalloc\fR pool. Note that this -type of memory is only known -by the terminal memory allocation system and cannot be requested directly by a user level -function call. -.P -The \fIdmdmemory\fR utility -presents a graphical representation of the memory usage in the 630 MTG terminal. -A user is able to monitor all three types of -memory with a scope (or zoom) facility, modify the \fBalloclimit\fR, and look -at the memory or stack usage of a particular process. -.P -The \-c option causes \f2dmdmemory\f1 to be cached in the 630 MTG -application cache. -.P -The window size used by \fIdmdmemory\fR is fixed. If the window size is -not correct, a \fICore\fR icon and a "\fImenu on button 2\fR" string are displayed. -The window must be reshaped if this appears by selecting either the -reshape option from the mouse button 2 menu or the reshape -function from the mouse button 3 menu. If reshape is selected -from the button 2 menu, the window is automatically reshaped to -the proper size. If the reshape function from the button 3 menu -is selected, the default window size presented is the correct window -for \fIdmdmemory\fR. -.bp - If a different window size is swept, the core icon and -message string are again displayed. Similarly, if at any time the -window is reshaped back to an incorrect size, the core icon and string are -again displayed. When the window size is incorrect, \fIdmdmemory\fR is largely inactive, so at -times it may be desirable to place \fIdmdmemory\fR in this state to -free cpu resources for other processes. Reshaping the window back to the -correct size reactivates \fIdmdmemory\fR. -.P -In the working mode, the \fIdmdmemory\fR window contains the following, from top to bottom: -.IP "" 2 -\f3\(em\f1 Three numerical upper fields which are, from left to right: -.IP "" 5 -the scoped number of \fIalloc\fR blocks. -.br -the scoped number of \fIgcastray\fR blocks, -.br -the scoped number of \fIgcalloc\fR blocks. -.IP "" 5 -The number of scoped blocks is the number of those bolcks that -fall within the range of memory represented by the dmdmemory -window. -.IP "" 2 -\f3\(em\f1A bar graph which represents the user memory pool in -.br -.in +1 -the viewing scope. \fIAlloc\fR -blocks are reverse-videoed, \fIgcastray\fR blocks are \fIbackground\fR textured, and -\fIgcalloc\fR blocks are grey shaded. To help the visualization, the bar graph is -marked by 100 tick marks, 8 pixels apart. The \fIalloclimit\fR is represented by a longer -vertical bar. -.in 0 -.IP "" 2 -\f3\(em\f1 Five numerical lower fields which are, from left to right: -.IP "" 5 -the starting address of the viewing scope, -.br -the \fBalloclevel\fR address, -.br -the \fBalloclimit\fR address, -.br -the \fBgclevel\fR address, -.br -the ending address of the viewing scope. -.IP "" 2 -In \fIfull view\fR -the viewing scope addresses are the same as the boundary addresses of the total user -memory pool. In a \fIscoped view\fR, the \fBalloclevel\fR, \fBalloclimit\fR or \fBgclevel\fR -addresses may not be displayed if they are out of the viewing scope. -.IP "" 2 -\f3\(em\f1An alphanumeric field which displays information or -.br -.in +1 -help messages. Information -includes the scope setting (\fIfull view\fR or \fIscoped view\fR) and the number of -bytes per pixel. Help messages depend on the command selected. -.in 0 -.P -The \fIdmdmemory\fR facility supports six commands, all accessed from mouse button 2. -Note that when a command is being executed, the \fIdmdmemory\fR window cannot be reshaped. The six commands are described below. -.bp -.SS Base -This command toggles between decimal and hexadecimal bases. Hexadecimal numbers are -preceded by a "0x" prefix. - -.SS Process -This command changes the mouse cursor to a "target" cursor and asks the user to -pick a window by clicking button 1 over it. Picking nothing (i.e., the screen background) -or clicking other buttons will cancel the command. -.P -Clicking button 1 over a window will cause the three numerical upper fields to blink. -They now represent scoped amounts of \fIalloc\fR, \fIgcastray\fR and \fIgcalloc\fR -memory used by the process running inside the selected window. -The -display inside the bar graph also blinks to mark the corresponding positions of these memory -blocks. The alphanumeric field displays the address of the -process. -.P -Clicking or holding any button stops the blinking, exits this command mode, and returns -\fIdmdmemory\fR to the normal viewing mode. -.P -If a cached process is selected, dmdmemory displays only that -memory used by the process that was allocated via an alloc ro -gcalloc procedure call. The memory actually occupied by the -process code and data is not displayed by the process -command. - -.SS Stack -This command is similar to the \fIprocess\fR command, except that the information -now deals with the stack assigned to the specified process. -.P -Since the process stack is \fIalloc\fR'ed, only the \fIalloc\fR field can have a -non-zero value (assuming the stack is inside the viewing scope). The alphanumeric field -shows how many bytes of its stack a process has used. -.P -The stack command displays the amount of assigned stack space -whether the process is cached or not. -.bp -.SS Scope -This command allows the user to zoom in (or out) in order to have a closer look at -a particular region of the user memory pool. -.P -When this command is selected, a full-length vertical bar blinks at the left side of -the bar graph. The user drags the vertical bar by holding down button 1. Note that the -starting address of the viewing scope (left-most lower numerical field) also blinks, -and changes with new values corresponding to the dragged bar positions. Releasing -button 1 will select the new starting address of the viewing scope. -.P -The ending address of the viewing scope is modified in the same manner with a -blinking bar appearing at the right end of the bar graph. If this bar -is positioned to the left of the previous one, \fIdmdmemory\fR takes it as a -zoom-out, back to \fIfull view\fR setting. Otherwise, the action results -in a zoomed-in (or scoped) view of the memory pool, and the numerical fields are -updated accordingly. Note that some addresses in the -lower fields are now out of scope and therefore are -not displayed. -.P -During this process, if any button other than button 1 is pressed and held, the -command is aborted and the current viewing scope is retained. -.P -The smallest scope is one byte per pixel. Attempts to zoom in -further will automatically re-expand the viewing scope to this minimum setting. - -.SS Limit -This command allows the user to modify the value of \fBalloclimit\fR. -.P -When this command is selected, the vertical bar which represents the position -of \fBalloclimit\fR in the graphical bar starts to blink. The same thing happens -to the \fBalloclimit\fR numerical field (middle lower field). To modify its value, -the user holds down button 1 and drags the vertical bar to new positions. The numerical -field changes accordingly. Note that \fBalloclimit\fR cannot go lower than \fBalloclevel\fR; -otherwise, some \fIalloc\fR blocks would be out of the \fIalloc\fR pool. -.P -This command does nothing if the \fBalloclimit\fR is not within the scope. -.P -\fBCaution\fR: a value for \fBalloclimit\fR that is too low restricts the expansion of the -\fIalloc\fR pool, causing \fIalloc\fR requests to fail. -.SH FILES -$DMD/lib/dmdmemory.m downloadable file - -.SH SEE ALSO -ucache(1), alloc(3R), gcalloc(3R). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 deleted file mode 100755 index aff5f198..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,702 +0,0 @@ -.TH DMDPI 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdpi \- 630 MTG process inspector and debugger -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dmdpi [ -c ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dmdpi -is a C language debugger that is bound dynamically to multiple subject -processes executing in a 630 MTG window in the layers environment. -In order to use dmdpi to its full capabilities, it is necessary to compile -the source program with the -.I -g -option of -.IR dmdcc . -However, if the target program is not compiled with -.I -g, -or no symbol tables -at all are available, dmdpi works as well as possible with the information -provided to it. -.PP -If the -c option is selected, \f2dmdpi\f1 will be -cached in the 630 MTG cache system. This will enable -\f2dmdpi\f1 to be executed again without the need for another -download. -.PP -Dmdpi uses a -multi-window user interface. -There are three types of windows: -debugger control windows, -which access the global state of the debugger; -process control windows (exactly one per process), -which start and stop processes and connect to process-specific functions; -and process inspection windows, -which include viewers for source text and memory, formatted various ways. -Initially, there are three debugger control -windows available: \fBdmdpi\fR, \fBhelp\fR -and \fBpwd/cd\fR. -.P -One might need to debug some initialization code that would ordinarily be -executed before dmdpi has a chance to gain control of the process. -The \fI-z\fR -of \fIdmdld\fR is useful for this purpose. This allows you to take -control of a process before the first statement is executed. -See the \fIdmdld(1)\fR manual page for details on using this option. - -.SS User Interface -Button 1 points. -Pointing at a window makes it current, noted with a highlighted border; -pointing at a line of text makes it current and inverts its video. -A scroll bar at the left of each window shows how -much of the text of a window is visible; -pointing into the scroll region and moving the mouse -controls what text is displayed. -.PP -Button 2 has a menu of operations that apply to the current line. -Operations above the -.B ~~~~~ -separator are specific to each line; -operations below the separator are generic line operations: -.TP 1i -.B cut -Remove the line. -.TP -.B sever -Remove the line and all lines above it. -.TP -.B fold -Wrap the line, if it extends past the right margin. -.TP -.B truncate -Truncate the line at the right margin. -.LP -Button 3 has a menu of window-level operations and is in two parts. -Operations above the separator are specific to each window. -Operations below the separator are the following generic window operations: -.TP 1i -.B reshape -Change the size of a window. -.TP -.B move -Move a window to a different place. -.TP -.B close -Delete a window. -.TP -.B fold -Like button 2 fold above except it applies to all lines in the window. -.TP -.B truncate -Like button 2 truncate above except it applies to all lines in the window. -.TP -.B top -The sub-menu off the \fBtop\fR -is a list of windows; -selecting one makes it top and current. -.LP -Button 3 also is also used to sweep out new windows. -.PP -Keyboard characters accumulate at the bottom of the window. -If the current line accepts input, it flashes with each keystroke; -otherwise, if the current window accepts input, its border flashes. -Carriage return is ignored until a line or window -accepts the text, whereupon -the input line is sent to the line or window. -.PP -The following keyboard commands are also available: -.TP -.B "\'>file\'" -This saves the contents of the current line, or current window if there is -no current line, into the named file. To achieve the status of no current line -in the window, scroll off the top or bottom of the window. -.TP -.B "\'state -variable is displayed and updated. -.PP -The menu operations on the process are: -.TP 1i -.PD 0 -.B run -let the process run -.TP -.B stop -stop the process -.TP -.B src text -open source text window(s) -.TP -.B Globals -open window for evaluating expressions in global scope -.TP -.B RawMemory -open window for editing uninterpreted memory -.TP -.B Assembler -open window for disassembler -.TP -.B User Types -open window for setting user types -.TP -.B Journal -open debugging session journal window -.TP -.B Bpt List -open breakpoint list window -.PD -.LP -Each line of the call stack traceback describes one function. -Each function in the traceback can open a stack frame -expression evaluator window -or display its current source line. - -.SS Process Inspection Windows -.TP -.B Source Text Windows -The source text window contains a listing of a source file. If there is more -than one source file for the process, selecting the -.B src text -item in the process control window will give you a source files window -in which there is a listing of all the source files associated with that -process. Library function source files are included in this list, even -though one might not actually have the source for these functions. -By highlighting a source line and selecting -.B open source file -in the button 2 menu, you can open a source listing for that file. -Each source file is in a separate window, which can be opened when needed. -The source files are searched for in the working directory. -Entering a pathname from the keyboard (when the Source files window is -current) enters a pathname prefix which points to a directory -where the source can be found, without changing the working directory. -.RS -.P -When opening a source file, -dmdpi -checks to see whether the source file is in time sync with the object module. -If not, dmdpi gives a message of this fact. One may override this -condition with the -.B reopen -item in the button 3 menu of the source text window. -Source lines are displayed on a "per request basis." In other words, only -the lines that are currently visible are sent from the host. More lines -are sent to be displayed on the terminal as needed. -.P -Specific strings may be searched for in the source text by -using \fI/string\fR, or the \fI?string\fR entered at the -keyboard, for searching forward and backward in the source -text respectively. The search will begin at the next (previous -for backwards search) C language statement rather than at the -next source line. Note that repeated reverse searches for the -same pattern must be specified as \fI??\fR rather than \fI?\fR -due to a conflict with the help operator (?). -Line numbers can also be searched -for by entering a line number at the keyboard when a line is not current -within the window. If a line is current, the number is evaluated as -a constant expression (see expressions below). To achieve the -status of no current line, scroll the current line off the top or bottom of -the window. -.P -.B Breakpoints -are set on source lines. A breakpoint is set by highlighting -the line on which you wish to break execution and selecting -.B set bpt -from the button 2 menu. -A breakpoint is denoted by a '>>>' next to the source line. -When the process reaches this line the process -halts and will not execute the line on which the breakpoint is set. -Clearing the breakpoint is done by highlighting the line on which a breakpoint -is set and selecting -.B clear bpt -from the button 2 menu. Clearing the breakpoint can also be done from the -breakpoint list -window (see below). A -.B conditional breakpoint -is a breakpoint that is set with a certain condition. When this condition -evaluates to TRUE, the process is halted. -Any valid dmdpi expression may be used as a condition -(see keyboard expressions). -To set a conditional breakpoint, select -.B cond bpt -from the button 2 menu. You are prompted to enter an expression -from the keyboard as a condition. -An example of a condition would be (x==1). When the variable x becomes -equal to 1, then execution breaks. The -.B trace on -item in the button 2 menu is actually a conditional breakpoint with -the condition of 0, meaning that the condition never evaluates to TRUE. -This has the effect of tracing a statement but never breaking execution. -The conditional breakpoint is removed in the same way a -regular breakpoint is removed. -.P -Once the process has been halted, select \f3run\f1 to start the process running again. -You can also -.B step -(execute) a number of source lines and then stop -again after these statements have been executed. -When statements are stepped, the debugger will not enter functions -unless the -.B step into fcn -item is actually specified. The current statement can always -be seen by selecting -the -.B current stmt -item in the button 3 menu. This highlights the statement currently in the PC. -.P -Another option that is available in the source text window is the ability -to look at the assembly code for a specified line. Highlighting a line and -selecting -.B assembler -in the button 2 menu displays the first assembler instruction of the -statement. -.RE - -.TP -.B Globals and Stack Frame Windows -A stack frame window is opened from a line in the call stack traceback -in the process control window or -from a line of source text. A globals window is opened from the button 3 menu -in the process control window. -These windows evaluate expressions with respect to global scope, -and scope in a function, respectively. -.RS -.P -.B "Expressions" -.P -Expressions may be entered from the keyboard or with the mouse. -The syntax for expressions in dmdpi is the same as C language expressions, -except for differences noted below. -The expressions are most commonly used for inspecting values of variables in -the program that is being debugged. -An example of an expression is -.I r.origin.x. -This -may be typed in order -to inspect the x coordinate value of a rectangle origin point if the process -has a rectangle -.I r. -.P -A summary of dmdpi's expression syntax is presented here only to -aid comprehension, rather than an exact statement of the language. -.RE -.sp -.RS -\fI -expression : - constant - primary - \(**expression - &expression - -expression - !expression - ~expression - sizeof expression - typeof expression - fabs (expression) - (type-name) expression /\(** from menu only \(**/ - {expression} identifier - expression binop expression - expression = expression - expression , expression - - -primary: - $ - identifier - ( expression ) - primary ( [expression-list] ) - primary[ expression ] - lvalue.identifier - primary -> identifier - -lvalue: - identifier - primary[expression] - lvalue.identifier - primary -> identifier - \(**expression - (lvalue) - -binop: - \(** / % + - >> << < > <= >= == != & ^ - | && || -\fR -.P -The major differences in the expressions which dmdpi understands and -the C expressions are: -.IP "" -The unary operators \fIfabs\fR and \fItypeof\fR are supported. -.I fabs -evaluates the absolute value of a floating point number. -.I typeof -evaluates the type of an expression. -Examples are: -.br - fabs(-2.0)=2 -.br - typeof(r.origin)= struct Point -.IP "" -The concept of a "current expression" has been introduced with the -.B $ -operator. -.B $ -is equal to the current highlighted expression. For example, if the line -containing \fIr.origin\fR is highlighted, one may type -.B $.x -to see the value of the x coordinate. -Another example of the -.B $ -expression is -.B $=. -This can be used, for instance if -.B $ -is equal to a variable x and you wish -to change the value of x to . -.IP "" -Expressions are evaluated within the scope boundaries of the window in -which they are typed. One can cross scope boundaries in order to evaluate -an expression with the syntax { expression } function-name. -This, for example, is useful for using the globals window to look -at static variables that are local -to a function -without having to open up a stack frame window. -.IP "" -Type casting may only be done through the use of the menu. -.IP "" -The following is not supported by dmdpi: ++ -- ?: op= string. -.IP "" -NOTE: expressions are always evaluated internally with a 32-bit precision. -Therefore, -results may not correspond in all cases with those generated by a C -program. -.P -Expressions are also used to specify the condition in the conditional -breakpoint. Note that the C comma operator is very useful in specifying -the condition. -Expressions separated by a comma are evaluated left-to-right and all but -the rightmost expression are discarded. -For example, a condition of \fI(x,y,x==y)\fR evaluates all -three expressions; however, only the last expression (x==y) determines -the result of the overall condition. The result is that the values of -x and y are printed but execution halts only when x==y. -.P -Registers in the stack frame windows are prefixed with the character -.B $ -, for example, -.B $d0. -The address of a register is the location at which it was saved. -Register values are only available after execution has been halted -at a breakpoint or after a step. The exception to this rule is that -one may look at register variables in calling functions if they happened -to be saved in the called function. -.P -An expression may be made -.I spy, -in order to observe changes in the expression. -The value of a spy expression is evaluated and displayed -each time the debugger looks at the process, i.e., when the process calls -wait() or sleep(). -If the value of a spy changes, the expression is updated and a message is -given that the expression has changed. -If a conditional breakpoint (or trace on) is set, then the process will be -halted. -The option -.B changed spies -in the button 2 menu will manually force all spies to be re-evaluated. -.P -A maximum of 150 global variables will fit into the globals menu. If -the targeted program has more than 150 global variables, the remaining -variables must be accessed by typing their name from the keyboard. -.RE -.SK -.TP -.B Raw Memory Window -The raw memory window is -a ``memory editor'' in which -memory is viewed as a sequence of 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-byte cells. -The -.B '.' -operator is a special symbol which denotes a cell address. Therefore, commands -such as -.B .+1 -in the button 2 menu give the next increment of memory after the current -cell address. The keyboard command -.B .= -displays the cell with address equal to expression. -The expression syntax is the same as defined above. -The format of the displayed -memory cells is -.I x/y: , -where x is the cell address, and y is the viewing increment. -.RS -Some of the functions available are: -.RS -.TP -change cell size and display format -Use the \fBsize\fR and \fBformat\fR items in the menu. -.TP -display cells above and below current cell. -Use the \fB.[+-]\fR options in the menu. -.TP -indirect to cell -Look at the cell using the contents of the current cell as an address. -Use the -.B \(** thru . -option. -.TP -change cell value -This is done with the keyboard expression: -.B $= -.TP -spy on memory cell -If the memory contents change, dmdpi will give notification. -.TP -disassemble instruction at cell. -Display the assembler instruction in the assembler window. Use the -.B asmblr -option in the button 2 menu. -.RE -.RE -.TP -.B (Dis)Assembler Window -Allows viewing of memory as a sequence of assembler instructions. -The menu options of this window are similar to those in the source text -window. The difference is that this window deals with assembler instructions -rather than the high-level source code. -.RS -.P -An instruction at a certain address can be displayed by entering the -keyboard expression -.B .=. -The expression syntax is the same as defined above. -More instructions can be viewed in a sequential manner using the -.B next -options in the button 2 menu. The next 1, 5, or 10 instructions -starting from the current instruction can be displayed. -.P -When setting a breakpoint or stepping into an assembler function, one must -step through the link and the movm.l instructions before \fIdmdpi\fR will be -able to generate the stack frame for the function. -.P -Some of the other functions available are: -.RS -.TP -change display format -.TP -open a stack frame window for instruction's function -.TP -display instruction as cells in the raw memory window -.TP -set/clear breakpoint on instruction -.TP -open stack frame window for instruction's function -.TP -display instruction at current PC -.TP -single step instruction(s) -.RE -.RE -.TP -.B User Types Window -Shows user-defined types and allows the display format of user-defined -types displayed in the globals and stack frame windows to be changed. -For example, the display format of a structure may be changed so that -certain fields are not displayed (hidden) and other fields are displayed -(shown). -.TP -.B Journal Window -Keeps a log of significant events in the course of a debugging session. -.TP -.B Breakpoint List Window -Lists all active source and assembler breakpoints. -Allows clearing of specified breakpoints or all breakpoints. -.RS -.P -Functions available include: -.RS -.TP -show source or assembler line at which a breakpoint is set -.TP -clear a single breakpoint -.TP -clear all breakpoints -.SH SEE ALSO -.PP -dmdcc(1), -dmdld(1), -ucache(1). -.SH WARNINGS -Do not use the -O optimizer option of dmdcc when compiling a program -to be debugged with dmdpi. -This will confuse dmdpi. -.P -It is possible to receive a message that there is no more memory on the -host system. This will happen if the process you are debugging has a very -large symbol table, or if you are debugging many processes at the same time. -The maximum amount of memory that a UNIX process is allowed to consume -can be changed by a system administrator. For a 3B2 host computer running -System V Release 2.0, how to change the per process memory limit is -documented in the manual \f2AT&T 3B2 Computer Unix System V Release 2.0 -System Administration Utilities Guide\f1 in the chapter -"Administrative Tasks" under "Tunable Parameters." An alternative to -changing the host computer's per process memory limit is to use -the \fImc68cprs\fR CCS utility to compress the size of process symbol tables -before they are opened for debugging with dmdpi. -.SH BUGS -In switch statements there is no boundary between the last case -and the branch code; the program -.I appears -to jump to the last case (but is really in the branch) -and then to the real case. -.P -The structure P which is of type "struct Proc \(**" within applications is -interpreted by \fIdmdpi\fR as "struct proc". This implies that one must -type P.state rather than P->state when accessing the structure P from the -keyboard. -.P -If a program contains multiple global structure declarations -of the same name, dmdpi will ignore all but the first declaration. -.P -A breakpoint cannot be set on a goto or return statement. -Attempting to do so will set a breakpoint on the following -line. Also, stepping onto a goto or return statement will -execute the goto or return instead of stopping on the line. -.P -When stepping past an if statement that is the -last statement within a while loop and the if condition fails -and does not have an else condition, -the program will appear to jump to the last line within the if -statement. It is really jumping to the statement that will -branch back to the top of the while loop. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 104cb1fa..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -.TH DMDVERSION 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -dmdversion \- inquire terminal/host software version -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dmdversion -[ -.B \-ehlst -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I dmdversion -utility displays the version numbers of the 630 MTG terminal and host software. -The terminal version number is the equivalent to the ASCII -string which contains three fields (f1;f2;f3) defined as -follows: -.TP 1i -.B f1 -identifies the 630 MTG as a windowing terminal -.TP -.B f2 -identifies the terminal as a 630 MTG -.TP -.B f3 -identifies the firmware release -.LP -.PP -Host software version is read from the file $DMD/VERSION. -.PP -The \f3\-t\f1 option is used to display the terminal version number. -The \f3\-h\f1 option is used to display the host software version -number. The default action is to display both terminal and -host software version numbers. -.PP -In the \fBlayers\fR environment, terminal version is found through an -\fIioctl(2)\fR call to the -xt device driver. In non-layers, or if the \fB-e\fR flag is specified, the -terminal version is found through the Request Terminal Type escape sequence \fBESC[c\fR. -.PP -The \fB-l\fR option can be used to inquire if Local Area -Network (LAN) Encoding is set for the terminal -through terminal setup. This is found through the Request Encoding escape -sequence \fBESC[F\fR. This option excludes the \fB-e\fR option and does not -inquire the terminal version number. -.PP -When the \f3\-s\f1 flag is present, no output is printed but -an exit value is returned as follows. If the \f3\-t\f1 or -\f3\-e\f1 options are present, the decimal ascii value of the -last digit of the terminal's version is returned. If the -\f3\-l\f1 option is present, 1 is returned if LAN encoding is -enabled; 0 otherwise. The \f3\-l\f1 option will overide the -\f3\-t\f1 or \f3\-e\f1 options. In all other cases, 255 (-1) is -returned. -.SS EXAMPLE -The following example can be used to determine if a 630 MTG or -some other windowing terminal (such as a 5620) is being used. -.RS 6 -.nf -.ft CM -case `dmdversion -t` in - *'8;8'*) - echo I am a 630 - ;; - *'8;7'*) - echo I am a 5620 - ;; - *) - echo Unknown terminal type - ;; -esac -.fi -.ft R -.RE -.SH FILES -.TP 22 -$DMD/VERSION -the host version -.SH SEE ALSO -version(3R). -.br -ioctl(2) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -layers(1) in the UNIX System V Release 3 User's Reference -Manual. -.br -layers(1) in the 5620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference -Manual. -.br -\f2630 MTG Terminal User's Guide\f1. - -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The -.B -e -and -.B -l -flags only work if the window connected to the standard output is -running the default 630 MTG terminal emulator or any other emulator that -supports the described escape sequences. - - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/docgen.1 b/static/v10/man1/docgen.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4036ea71..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/docgen.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -.TH DOCGEN 1 -.CT 1 writing_aids -.SH NAME -docgen \- generate a document from a script -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B docgen -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I ofile -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Docgen -guides interactive preparation of standard documents -according to canned scripts and -places the output in -.I ofile. -The output typically takes the form of -.IR troff (1) -input. -These options invoke standard scripts: -.TP -.B -mcs -(default) Bell Labs cover sheet; output (\c -.F temp.cover -by default) -may be typeset thus: -.L "troff temp.cover" -.TP -.B -ms -documents using the macro package -.IR ms (6); -output -.RF ( temp -by default) may be typeset thus: -.L "troff -ms temp" -.TP -.B -mm -similarly for the MM macro package of System V -.PP -Other options are: -.TP -.BI -f " file" -take script from -.I file -.TP -.B -v -(verbose) print document as it is generated -.TP -.B -d -(debug) print information about the script -as it is read -.PP -The reference tells how to construct scripts. -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/docgen/* -scripts -.br -.F temp.cover -.br -.F temp -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR troff (1), -.IR ms (6), -.IR mcs (6) -.SH BUGS -Not all document types are implemented. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 b/static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e0bd4eeb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ -.TH DOCSUBMIT 1 -.CT 1 writing_output -.SH NAME -docsubmit \- send document to library -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B docsubmit -[ -.B -c -.I cover-file -] -[ -.B -C -] -[ -.B -r -.I ref-file -] -[ -.B -t -] -[ -.B -f -.I copyf -] -[ -.B -d -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Docsubmit -sends the full text of a TM, including cover sheet, -to the Bell Laboratories library network, for inclusion -in the libraries' Linus database. -The -.I files -are those that would be mentioned in a -.I troff -command to print the paper; files included by -.B .so -macros or by preprocessors such as -.IR pic (1) -should not be mentioned. -The options are -.TP -.BI -c " coverfile -Cover sheet is in a file by itself. -.TP -.B -C -Cover sheet is in the document. -One of -.B -c -or -.B -C -must be specified. -.TP -.BI -r " ref-file -Specify a separate reference file for -.IR refer (1) -or -.IR prefer (1). -.TP -.B -t -The single -.I file -is -.IR tex (1) -source; only the base name, without -.BR .tex , -should be specified. -.TP -.BI -f copyf -Include a copy of -.I copyf -in the cpio file. This flag should only be necessary for -things like awk scripts executed inside the paper with .sy commands. -.TP -.B -d -Don't consided include files that can't be found as fatal errors. -.PP -Electronic submission -is not a substitute for the official paper submission. -For more information -contact your local library or call (201)582-4840. -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -docgen cover-file -eqn cover-file file.1 file.2 | troff | lp -docsubmit -c cover-file file.1 file.2 -.EE -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/docsubmit/* -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR troff (1), -.IR docgen (1) -.SH BUGS -Only documents that may be viewed by any AT&T employee can -have their full text made available under Linus. -.br -Documents with a complicated construction process, -such as a shell script or makefile, cannot be handled -directly. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/doctype.1 b/static/v10/man1/doctype.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d33ab684..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/doctype.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -.TH DOCTYPE 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff -.SH NAME -doctype \- guess command line for formatting a document -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B doctype -[ -.I option ... -] [ -.I file -] -... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Doctype -guesses and prints on the standard output the command line for printing -a document that uses -.IR troff (1), -related preprocessors like -.IR eqn (1), -and the -.IR ms (6) -and -.I mm -macro packages. -.PP -Option -.B -n -invokes -.I nroff -instead of -.I troff. -Other options are passed to -.I troff. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -eval `doctype chapter.?` | apsend -Typeset files named chapter.0, chapter.1, ... -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR troff (1), -.IR eqn (1), -.IR tbl (1), -.IR refer (1), -.IR prefer (1), -.IR pic (1), -.IR ideal (1), -.IR grap (1), -.IR ped (9.1), -.IR mcs (6), -.IR ms (6), -.IR man (6) -.SH BUGS -It's pretty dumb about guessing the proper macro package. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/double.1 b/static/v10/man1/double.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f2da42d7..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/double.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH DOUBLE 1 -.SH NAME -double \- double word finder -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B double -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -[file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Double -searches text for consecutive occurrences of words. -It skips text contained in tables formatted with -.IR tbl (1) -and ignores consecutive occurrences of any single character -except -.IR a . -When -.I double -finds two words in a row, -it prints them with the line number of the first one. -.PP -.I Double -is one of the programs run under the -.IR proofr (1) -and -.IR wwb (1) -commands. -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH SEE ALSO -proofr(1), -wwb(1), -tbl(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/download.1 b/static/v10/man1/download.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 72ff6730..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/download.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ -.ds dH /usr/lib/font/postscript -.TH DOWNLOAD 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -download \- host-resident PostScript font download -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBdownload\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B download -prepends host-resident fonts to -.I files -and writes the results on the standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -.B download -assumes the input -.I files -are a single PostScript job and that requested fonts -can be included at the start of each input -.IR file . -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-f -Force a complete scan of each input -.I file. -In the absence of an explicit comment pointing -.I download -to the end of the file, the default scan stops -immediately after the PostScript header comments. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-m name -Use -.I name -as the font map table. -A -.I name -that begins with -.MW / -is the full pathname of the -map table. -Otherwise -.I name -is relative to the host font directory. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-p printer -Read the printer-resident font list from file -.br -.MI /etc/lp/printers/ printer /residentfonts \f1. -.br -Fonts named in this file will not be downloaded. -The -.OP \-p -option is for use with Unix 4.0 lp. -Other spoolers should use the -.OP \-r -option. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-r file -Read the list of printer-resident fonts from -.I file. -Fonts named in this file will not be downloaded. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-H dir -Use -.I dir -as the host font directory. -The default is -.MR \*(dH . -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-T dir -Use -.I dir -as the temporary file directory. -Only used to make a copy of standard input. -By default -.I dir -is set to -.MR /tmp . -.PP -Requested fonts are named in a -.MW %%DocumentFonts: -comment in the input -.IR files . -Available fonts are the ones listed in the map table -selected using the -.OP \-m -option. -.PP -The map table consists of fontname\-filename pairs. -The fontname is the full name of the PostScript font, -exactly as it would appear in a -.MW %%DocumentFonts: -comment. -The filename is the pathname of the host resident font. -A filename that begins with a -.MW / -is used as is, -otherwise the pathname is relative to the host font -directory. -Comments are introduced by -.MW % -(as in PostScript) and -extend to the end of the line. -.PP -The only candidates for downloading are fonts listed -in the map table that point -.B download -to readable files. -A font is downloaded at most once per job. -Requests for unlisted fonts or inaccessible files -are ignored. -All requests are ignored if the map table can't be read. -.SH EXAMPLES -A map table used to control the downloading -of the Bookman font family might be, -.EX -1 -% -% The first string is the full PostScript font name. The second string -% is the file name - relative the host font directory unless it begins -% with a /. -% - - Bookman-Light KR - Bookman-LightItalic KI - Bookman-Demi KB - Bookman-DemiItalic KX -.EE -Use file -.MW myprinter -(in the default host font directory) as the -map table: -.EX -download -m myprinter \f2file -.EE -Set the host font directory to -.MW /tmp/font -and use -.MW /tmp/font/xxx -as the map table: -.EX -download -H /tmp/font -mxxx \f2file -.EE -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH BUGS -.B download -should be part of a more general program. -.PP -.B download -does not look for -.MW %%PageFonts: -comments -and there is no way to force multiple downloads of -a particular font. -.PP -Using full pathnames, either in map tables or for the map table -name, is not often recommended. -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy (1), -.BR postdmd (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postmd (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR posttek (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dpost.1 b/static/v10/man1/dpost.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 976c2024..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dpost.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,310 +0,0 @@ -.ds dF /usr/lib/font -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH DPOST 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B dpost -\- -.B troff -postprocessor for PostScript printers -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBdpost\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B dpost -translates -.I files -created by -.BR troff (1) -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num -(default is 1.0). -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which is located near the upper left corner of -each page. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default, -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP mode. -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-w num -Set the line width used to implement -.B troff -graphics commands to -.I num -points, where a point is approximately 1/72 -of an inch. -By default -.I num -is set to 0.3 points. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed near the -upper left corner of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y down the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves text down the page. -The default offset is 0. -.TP -.OP \-B -Include -.MW %%BoundingBox -comments in the output file. -Should only be used when the comments are needed -for picture inclusion. -Output is forced onto an 8.5\(mu11-inch page. -.TP -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -There is no default. -.TP -.OP \-F dir -Use -.I dir -as the font directory. -The default -.I dir -is -.MR \*(dF , -and -.B dpost -reads -.SM ASCII -font files from directory -.MR \*(dF/devpost . -.TP -.OP \-H dir -Use -.I dir -as the host-resident font directory. -A file in -.I dir -that matches the name of the -.B troff -font is assumed to be a host resident font program -and is included in -.B dpost -output. -There is no default. -.TP -.OP \-L \^file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/dpost.ps . -.TP -.OP \-T name -Use font files for device -.I name -as the best description of available PostScript fonts. -By default, -.I name -is -\*(mBpost\fP -and -.B dpost -reads -.SM ASCII -files from -.MR \*(dF/devpost . -.br -.ne 1i -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C \^file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request \|, -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0 the request -applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted the request -lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.PP -All -.I files -should be prepared by -.B troff -for the same device. -Device tables that describe real PostScript fonts that can be -used by -.B dpost -should include -.EX -PDL PostScript -.EE -in their -.SM DESC -file. -Tables that depend on a non-standard character set encoding indicate -that fact by an -.MW Encoding -entry in their -.SM DESC -file. -For example, -.EX -Encoding Latin1 -.EE -means include file -.MR \*(dQ/Latin1.enc . -The -.OP \-E -option overrides the -.SM DESC -setting. -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -A typical command line might be: -.EX -pic \f2files\fP | tbl | eqn | troff -mm | dpost -.EE -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully translated, -while 2 often indicates a syntax error in the input -.IR files . -.SH WARNINGS -.PP -.B dpost -output does not usually conform to Adobe's file-structuring conventions. -Send the output through -.B postreverse -to produce a minimally conforming PostScript file. -.PP -Emulation is expensive and does not always produce satisfactory results. -No attempt has been made to implement the character sets or fonts available -on all devices supported by -.BR troff . -Missing characters are replaced by white space, and unrecognized -fonts default to one of the Times fonts (e.g., -.MR R , -.MR I , -.MR B , -or -.MR BI ). -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dF/devpost/* -.br -.MW \*(dF/devpost/charlib/* -.br -.MW \*(dQ/dpost.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/color.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/draw.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR buildtables (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR psencoding (1), -.BR troff (1), -.BR font (5), -.BR troff (5) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dsw.1 b/static/v10/man1/dsw.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 20db6304..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/dsw.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'DSW (I)'3/15/72'DSW (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME dsw -- delete interactively -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS dsw___ [ directory ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION For -each file in the given directory ("." if not specified) -dsw___ types its name. If "y" is typed, the file is deleted; -if "x", dsw___ exits; if anything else, the file -is not removed. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO rm(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS The name "dsw" -is a carryover from the ancient past. Its etymology is -amusing but the name is nonetheless ill-advised. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/du.1 b/static/v10/man1/du.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4af9382c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/du.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'DU (I)'1/20/73'DU (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME du -- summarize disk usage -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS du__ [ -s__ ] [ -a__ ] [ name ... ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION du__ -gives the number of blocks contained in all files -and (recursively) directories within each specified directory or file name____. -If name____ is missing, ._ is used. - -The optional argument -s__ causes only the grand total to -be given. -The optional argument -a__ causes an entry to be generated -for each file. -Absence of either causes an entry to be generated for -each directory only. - -A file which has two links to it is only counted once. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES . -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS Non-directories -given as arguments (not under -a option) are not listed. -.sp -Removable -file systems do not work correctly -since i-numbers may be repeated while the corresponding -files are distinct. -Du should maintain an i-number list per root directory -encountered. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/echo.1 b/static/v10/man1/echo.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ba2bdb50..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/echo.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'ECHO (I)'3/15/72'ECHO (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME echo -- echo arguments -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS echo____ [ arg89918 ... ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION echo____ -writes all its arguments in order as a line on the -standard output file. -It is mainly useful for producing diagnostics in command files. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ed.1 b/static/v10/man1/ed.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d9a38bb6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ed.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,421 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'ED (I)'1/15/73'ED (I)' -.tr | -.ti 0 -NAME -.br -ed -- editor -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS -.br -ed__ [ name ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION -.br -.in -8 -ed__ -is the standard text editor. -.sp -If the optional argument is given, ed__ -simulates an e_ command on the named file; that is to say, -the file is read into ed__'s buffer so that it can be edited. -.sp -ed__ operates on a copy of any file it is editing; changes made -in the copy have no effect on the file until a write -(w_) command is given. -The copy of the text being edited resides -in a temporary file called the buffer______. There is only -one buffer. -.sp -Commands to ed__ have a simple and regular structure: zero or -more addresses_________ followed by a single character command_______, possibly -followed by parameters to the command. -These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. -Every command which requires addresses has default addresses, -so that the addresses can often be omitted. -.sp -In general, only one command may appear on a line. -Certain commands allow the input of text. -This text is placed in the appropriate place in the buffer. -While ed__ is accepting text, it is said -to be in input_____ mode____. In this mode, no commands are recognized; -all input is merely collected. -Input mode is left by typing a period (.) alone at the -beginning of a line. -.sp -ed__ supports a limited form of regular_______ expression__________ notation. -A regular expression is an expression which specifies -a set of strings of characters. -A member of this set of strings is said to be matched_______ -by the regular expression. -The regular expressions allowed by ed__ are constructed as follows: -.sp -.in +6 -.ti -3 -1. An ordinary character (not one of those discussed below) -is a regular expression and matches that character. -.sp -.ti -3 -2. A circumflex (^) at the beginning of a regular expression -matches the null character at the beginning of a line. -.sp -.ti -3 -3. A currency symbol ($) at the end of a regular expression -matches the null character at the end of a line. -.sp -.ti -3 -4. A period (.) matches any character but a new-line character. - -.ti -3 -5. A regular expression followed by an asterisk (*) -matches any number of adjacent occurrences (including zero) -of the regular expression it follows. - -.ti -3 -6. A string of characters enclosed in square brackets -([]) matches any character in the string but no others. -If, however, the first character of the string is a circumflex -(^) the regular expression matches any character but new-line -and the characters in the string. - -.ti -3 -7. The concatenation of regular expressions is a regular -expression which matches the concatenation of the strings -matched by the components of the regular expression. - -.ti -3 -8. The null regular expression standing alone -is equivalent to the last regular expression encountered. - -.in -6 -Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify -lines and in one command (s_, see below) -to specify a portion of a line which is to be replaced. - -If it is desired to use one of -the regular expression metacharacters as an ordinary -character, that character may be preceded by "\\". -This also applies to the character bounding the regular -expression (often "/") and to "\\" itself. -.sp -Addresses are constructed as follows. -To understand addressing in ed__ -it is necessary to know that at any time there is a current_______ -line____. Generally speaking, the current line is -the last line affected by a command; however, -the exact effect on the current line -by each command is discussed under the description of -the command. - -.in +6 -.ti -3 -1. The character "." addresses the current line. - -.ti-3 -2.|The character "^" addresses the line immediately before the current line. -.sp -.ti -3 -3. The character "$" addresses the last line of the buffer. - -.ti -3 -4. A decimal number n_ addresses the n_th line of the buffer. - -.ti -3 -6. A regular expression enclosed in slashes "/" addresses -the first line found by searching toward the end of the -buffer and stopping at the first line containing a -string matching the regular expression. -If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning of the -buffer. - -.ti -3 -5. A regular expression enclosed in queries "?" addresses -the first line found by searching toward the beginning of -the buffer and stopping at the first line found containing -a string matching the regular expression. If necessary -the search wraps around to the end of the buffer. - -.ti -3 -7. An address followed by a plus sign "+" -or a minus sign "-" followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus -(resp. minus) the indicated number of lines. -The plus sign may be omitted. - -.ti-3 -8.|"'x" addresses the line associated (marked) with the -mark name character "x" -which must be a printable character. -Lines may be marked with the "k" command described below. -.sp -.in -6 -Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. -Commands which require no addresses regard the presence -of an address as an error. -Commands which accept one or two addresses -assume default addresses when insufficient are given. -If more addresses are given than such a command requires, -the last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used. - -Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma -(,). -They may also be separated by a semicolon -(;). In this case the current line "." is set to -the previous address before the next address is interpreted. -This feature can be used to determine the starting -line for forward and backward searches ("/", "?"). -The second address of any two-address sequence -must correspond to a line following the line corresponding to the first address. - -In the following list of ed__ commands, the default addresses -are shown in parentheses. The parentheses are not part of -the address, but are used to show that the given addresses are -the default. - -As mentioned, it is generally illegal for more than one -command to appear on a line. -However, any command may be suffixed by "p" (for "print"). -In that case, the current line is printed after the command -is complete. -.ne 6 - -.in +6 -.ti -3 -(.)a -.ti -3 - -.ti -3 -.li -. -.br -The a_ppend command reads the given text -and appends it after the addressed line. "." is left -on the last line input, if there -were any, otherwise at the addressed line. -Address "0" is legal for this command; text is placed -at the beginning of the buffer. - -.ti -3 -(.,.)c -.ti -3 - -.ti -3 -. -.br -The c_hange -command deletes the addressed lines, then accepts input -text which replaces these lines. -"." is left at the last line input; if there were none, -it is left at the first line not changed. - -.ti -3 -(.,.)d -.br -The d_elete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer. -The line originally after the last line deleted becomes the current line; -if the lines deleted were originally at the end, -the new last line becomes the current line. - -.ti -3 -e filename -.br -The e_dit -command causes the entire contents of the buffer to be deleted, -and then the named file to be read in. -"." is set to the last line of the buffer. -The number of characters read is typed. -"filename" is remembered for possible use as a default file name -in a subsequent r_ or w_ command. -.sp -.ti-3 -f filename -.br -The f_ilename command prints the currently remembered file name. -If "filename" is given, -the currently remembered file name is changed to "filename". - -.ti -3 -(1,$)g/regular expression/command list -.br -In the g_lobal -command, the first step is to mark every line which matches -the given regular expression. -Then for every such line, the -given command list is executed with "." initially set to that line. -A single command or the first of multiple commands -appears on the same line with the global command. -All lines of a multi-line list except the last line must be ended with "\\". -a_, i_, and c_ commands and associated input are permitted; -the "." terminating input mode may be omitted if it would be on the -last line of the command list. -The (global) commands, g_ and v_, are not permitted in the command list. - -.ti -3 -(.)i -.ti -3 - -.ti -3 -. -.br -This command i_nserts the given text before the addressed line. -"." is left at the last line input; if there were none, -at the addressed line. -This command differs from the a_ command only in the placement of the -text. - -.ti-3 -(.)kx -.br -The mark_ command associates or marks the addressed line with -the single character mark name "x". -The ten most recent mark names are remembered. -The current mark names may be printed with the n_ command. - -.ti -3 -(.,.)mA -.br -The m_ove command will reposition the addressed lines after the line -addressed by "A". -The line originally after the last line moved becomes the current line; -if the lines moved were originally at the end, -the new last line becomes the current line. - -.ti-3 -n -.br -The markn_ames command will print the current mark names. - -.ti -3 -(.,.)p -.br -The p_rint command prints the addressed lines. "." -is left at the last line printed. -The p_ command may___ be placed on the same line after any command. - -.ti -3 -q_ -.br -The q_uit command causes ed__ to exit. No automatic write -of a file is done. - -.ti -3 -($)r filename -.br -The r_ead command -reads in the given file after the addressed line. -If no file name is given, -the remembered file name, if any, is used (see e_ and f_ commands). -The remembered file name is not changed unless -"filename" is the very first file name -mentioned. -Address "0" is legal for r_ and causes the -file to be read at the beginning of the buffer. -If the read is successful, the number of characters -read is typed. -"." is left at the last line read in from the file. - -.ti -3 -(.,.)s/regular expression/replacement/ or, -.ti -3 -(.,.)s/regular expression/replacement/g -.br -The s_ubstitute command searches each addressed -line for an occurrence of the specified regular expression. -On each line in which a match is found, -all matched strings are replaced by the replacement specified, -if the global replacement indicator "g" appears after the command. -If the global indicator does not appear, only the first occurrence -of the matched string is replaced. -It is an error for the substitution to fail on all addressed lines. -Any character other than space or new-line -may be used instead of "/" to delimit the regular expression -and the replacement. -"." is left at the last line substituted. - -The ampersand "&" appearing in the replacement -is replaced by the regular expression that was matched. -The special meaning of "&" in this context may be -suppressed by preceding it by "\\". - -.ti -3 -(1,$)v/regular expression/command list -.br -This command is the same as the g_lobal command -except that the command list is executed -with "." initially set to every line except______ those -matching the regular expression - -.ti -3 -(1,$)w filename -.br -The w_rite command writes the addressed lines onto -the given file. -If the file does not exist, -it is created mode 17 (readable and writeable by everyone). -The remembered file name is not___ changed unless -"filename" is the very first file name mentioned. -If no file name is given, -the remembered file name, if any, is used (see e_ and f_ commands). -"." is unchanged. -If the command is successful, the number of characters written is -typed. - -.ti -3 -($)= -.br -The line number of the addressed line is typed. -"." is unchanged by this command. - -.ti -3 -!UNIX command -.br -The remainder of the line after the "!" is sent -to UNIX to be interpreted as a command. -"." is unchanged. - -.ti -3 -(.+1) -.br -An address alone on a line causes that line to be printed. -A blank line alone is equivalent to ".+1p"; it is useful -for stepping through text. - -.in -6 -If an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL) is sent, -ed__ will print a "?" and return to its command level. - -If invoked with the command name '-', (see init____) -ed__ will sign on with the message "Editing system" -and print "*" as the command level prompt character. -.sp -Ed__ has size limitations on the maximum number of lines that can be edited, -and on the maximum number of characters in a line, -in a global's command list, -and in a remembered file name. -These limitations vary with the physical core size of the PDP11 computer -on which ed__ is being used. -The range of limiting sizes -for the above mentioned items is; -1300|-|4000 lines per file, -256|-|512 characters per line, -63|-|256 characters per global command list, -and -64 characters per file name. -.sp -.ti 0 -.in +8 -FILES -.br -/tmp/etm? temporary -.br -/etc/msh to implement the "!" command. -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" for any error -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/efl.1 b/static/v10/man1/efl.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0bb15834..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/efl.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -.TH EFL 1 -.SH NAME -efl \- extended Fortran language preprocessor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B efl -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I filename ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Efl -compiles a program written in the EFL language into clean Fortran. -.I Efl -provides the same control flow constructs as does Ratfor (1), -which are essentially identical to those in C: -.TP -statement grouping with braces; -decision-making with if, if-else, and switch-case; -while, -for, -Fortran do, -repeat, -and repeat...until loops; -multi-level break and next. -In addition, EFL has C-like data structures, -and more uniform and convenient input/output syntax, -generic functions. -EFL also provides -some syntactic sugar to make programs easier to read and write: -.TP -free form input: -multiple statements/line; automatic continuation -statement label names (not just numbers), -.TP -comments: -# this is a comment -.TP -translation of relationals: ->, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc. -.TP -return (expression) -returns expression to caller from function -.TP -define: -define name replacement -.TP -include: -include filename -.PP -.fi -The Efl command option -.B \-w -suppresses warning messages. -The option -.B \-C -causes comments to be copied through to the Fortran output (default); -.B \-# -prevents comments from being copied through. -If a command argument contains an embedded equal sign, -that argument is treated as if it had appeared in an -.B option -statement at the beginning of the program. -.I Efl -is best used with -.IR f77 (1). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR f77 (1), -.IR ratfor (1). -.br -S. I. Feldman, -.IR "The Programming Language EFL", -Bell Labs Computing Science Technical Report #78. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/eqn.1 b/static/v10/man1/eqn.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6236bea5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/eqn.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,366 +0,0 @@ -.TH EQN 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff -.EQ -delim $$ -.EN -.SH NAME -eqn, neqn, checkeq \- typeset mathematics -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B eqn -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B neqn -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B checkeq -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Eqn -is a -.IR troff (1) -preprocessor -for typesetting mathematics -on a phototypesetter, -.I neqn -on terminals. -Usage is almost always -.IP -.L -eqn file ... | troff -.br -.L -neqn file ... | nroff -.PP -If no files are specified, -these programs -read from the standard input. -.I Eqn -prepares output for the typesetter -named in the -.BI -T dest -option (Mergenthaler Linotron 202 default, see -.IR troff (1)). -When run with other preprocessor filters, -.I eqn -usually comes last. -.PP -A line beginning with -.B .EQ -marks the start of an equation; -the end of an equation -is marked by a line beginning with -.BR .EN . -Neither of these lines is altered, -so they may be defined in macro packages -to get -centering, numbering, etc. -It is also possible to set two characters -as `delimiters'; -text between delimiters is also -.I eqn -input. -Delimiters may be set to characters -.I x -and -.I y -with the option -.BI -d xy -or (more commonly) with -.B delim -.I xy -between -.B .EQ -and -.BR .EN . -Left and right delimiters may be identical. -(They are customarily taken to be -$font CW "$$" )$. -Delimiters are turned off by -.LR "delim off" . -All text that is neither between delimiters nor between -.B .EQ -and -.B .EN -is passed through untouched. -.PP -.I Checkeq -reports missing or unbalanced delimiters and -.BR .EQ / .EN -pairs. -.PP -Tokens within -.I eqn -are separated by -spaces, tabs, newlines, braces, double quotes, -tildes or circumflexes. -Braces {} are used for grouping; -generally speaking, -anywhere a single character like -.L x -could appear, a complicated construction -enclosed in braces may be used instead. -Tilde -.L ~ -represents a full space in the output, -circumflex -.L ^ -half as much. -.if t .ig -.PP -WARNING to users of the on-line manual. -Unless your terminal understands half-spacing, the -examples below will be nearly unreadable. -To get a well printed copy execute -.BR "man -t eqn | lp" . -.. -.PP -.vs 13p -Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords -.B sub -and -.B sup. -Thus -.L "x sub i" -makes -$x sub i$, -.L "a sub i sup 2" -produces -$a sub i sup 2$, -and -.L "e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2}" -gives -$e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2}$. -.PP -Fractions are made with -.BR over : -.L "a over b" -yields $a over b$. -.PP -.B sqrt -makes square roots: -.L "1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}" -results in -$1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}$ . -.PP -The keywords -.B from -and -.B to -introduce lower and upper -limits on arbitrary things: -$lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i$ -is made with -.L "lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i". -.PP -Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height are made with -.B left -and -.B right: -.L "left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right ] ~=~1" -produces -$left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right ] ~=~1$. -The -.B right -clause is optional. -Legal characters after -.B left -and -.B right -are braces, brackets, bars, -.B c -and -.B f -for ceiling and floor, -and -.B -"" -for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only bracket). -.PP -Vertical piles of things are made with -.BR pile , -.BR lpile , -.BR cpile , -and -.BR rpile : -.L "pile {a above b above c}" -produces -$pile {a above b above c}$. -There can be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. -.B lpile -left-justifies, -.B pile -and -.B cpile -center, with different vertical spacing, -and -.B rpile -right justifies. -.PP -Matrices are made with -.BR matrix : -.L "matrix { lcol { x sub i above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }" -produces -$matrix { lcol { x sub i above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }$. -In addition, there is -.B rcol -for a right-justified column. -.PP -.vs 12p -Diacritical marks are made with -.BR prime , -.BR dot , -.BR dotdot , -.BR hat , -.BR tilde , -.BR bar , -.BR under , -.BR vec , -.BR dyad , -and -.BR under : -.L "x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under" -is -$x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under$, -and -.L "x vec = y dyad" -is -$x vec = y dyad$. -.PP -Sizes and font can be changed with prefix operators -.B size -.I n, -.B size -.BI \(+- n, -.BR fat , -.BR roman , -.BR italic , -.BR bold , -or -.BR font -.I n. -Size and fonts can be changed globally in a document by -.B gsize -.I n -and -.B gfont -.IR n , -or by the command-line arguments -.BI -s n -and -.BI -f n. -.PP -Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by -3 point sizes from the previous size; -this may be changed by the command-line argument -.BI -p n. -.PP -Successive display arguments can be lined up. -Place -.B mark -before the desired lineup point in the first equation; -place -.B lineup -at the place that is to line up vertically in subsequent equations. -.PP -Shorthands may be defined -or existing keywords redefined with -.BI define : -.L define -.I thing -.L % -.I replacement -.L % -defines a new token called -.I thing -which will be replaced by -.I replacement -whenever it appears thereafter. -The -.L % -may be any character that does not occur in -.L replacement. -.PP -Keywords like -.L sum -.EQ -( sum ) -.EN -.L int -.EQ -( int ) -.EN -.L inf -.EQ -( inf ) -.EN -and shorthands like -.L >= -.EQ -(>=) -.EN -.L -> -.EQ -(->), -.EN -and -.L != -.EQ -( != ) -.EN -are recognized. -Greek letters are spelled out in the desired case, as in -.L alpha -or -.LR GAMMA . -Mathematical words like -.LR sin , -.LR cos , -.L log -are made Roman automatically. -.IR Troff (1) -four-character escapes like -.L \e(lh -(\(lh) can be used anywhere. -Strings enclosed in double quotes -.B -" " -are passed through untouched; -this permits keywords to be entered as text, -and can be used to communicate -with -.I troff -when all else fails. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR troff (1), -.IR tbl (1), -.IR ms (6), -.IR eqnchar (6), -.IR doctype (1) -.br -B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, -`Typesetting Mathematics\(emUser's Guide', -this manual, Volume 2 -.br -J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, -`NROFF/TROFF User's Manual', -.I ibid. -.SH BUGS -To embolden digits, parens, etc., -it is necessary to quote them, -as in -.LR bold\ "12.3" . -.EQ -delim off -.EN diff --git a/static/v10/man1/esterel.1 b/static/v10/man1/esterel.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ad619c79..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/esterel.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,258 +0,0 @@ -.EV -.TH esterel 1 local INRIA-CMA Esterel -.SH NAME -esterel \- Esterel compiler -.SH SYNTAX -.B esterel -[options] [file] ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I esterel -command invokes the various utilities constituting the Esterel language -development tools: -.IP "\fIstrlic\fP" -The Esterel front-end: receives files containing Esterel source -(\fB.strl\fP suffix) producing intermediate code (\fB.ic); -.IP "\fIiclc\fP" -The Esterel binder, performing the expansion of the \fBcopymodule\fP -statements; it receives several \fB.ic\fP (or \fB.lc\fP) -files and builds an unique linked code file (\fB.lc\fP); -.IP "\fIlcoc\fP" -The Esterel compiler, which produces from an unique \fB.lc\fP file, -Esterel automata in portable format (\fB.oc\fP); -.IP "\fIocl\fP" -A generic name for Esterel code generators, -translating portable automata (\fB.oc\fP) into a program written in one of -the supported target languages (see the \fB-L\fP option below). -.PP -If no files are given to the \fIesterel\fP command, the standard input -is used. Any suffix in the list \fB.strl\fP, \fB.ic\fP, \fB.lc\fP, -or \fB.oc\fP is recognized in the files names: the \fIesterel\fP command -will arrange for only the appropriate utilities to be called. -.SH OPTIONS -The following option is for the \fIesterel\fP command itself: -.IP "\fB-n\fP" -Tell what is to be done, but don't do it. -.PP -The option -.IP "\fB-version\fP" -display the version number of the \fIesterel\fP command, as well as the -ones of the various utilities including all known code generators. -.PP -The following options are passed to all four utilities: -.IP "\fB-v\fP" -Verbose mode: the \fIesterel\fP command and the various utilities -tell what they are doing; -.IP "\fB-w\fP" -Suppresse all warning messages; -.IP "\fB-W\fP" -Display all warning messages (the default is to display only "selected" -warnings); -.IP "\fB-stat\fP" -Display various time statistics; -.IP "\fB-memstat\fP" -Display statistics on dynamically allocated memory. -.PP -The three following options enable to stop the compilation process at -some intermediate stage: -.IP "\fB-ic\fP" -Just use \fIstrlic\fP to convert \fB.strl\fP files into \fB.ic\fP files -(with the same base name), ignoring all other files; -.IP "\fB-lc\fP" -Stop after running the binder (\fIiclc\fP); -.IP "\fB-oc\fP" -Stop after running the compiler (\fIlcoc\fP). -.PP -For the \fB-lc\fP and \fB-oc\fP options, one can specify the output -file name(s) with the \fB-B\fP and \fB-D\fP options. -.IP "\fB-B \fP\fIname\fP" -\fIname\fP denotes the output files default base name. -The appropriate suffix is added automatically (and possibly a working -directory name --see the following option). -If this option is omitted and if the \fIesterel\fP command -is invoked with only one file name, \fIname\fP defaults to the -base name of this unique file with the appropriate suffix; -otherwise it defaults to the base name \fBesterel\fP, still followed -by the appropriate suffix. -.IP "\fB-D \fP\fIdirectory\fP" -Specify a directory where the files produced by the command will be -placed. The default is the current directory. - -The \fB-B\fP and \fB-D\fP options and the corresponding -default rules apply to the files produced by -the \fB-K\fP (except \fB-Kic\fP) and \fB-L\fP options below. -.PP -The \fIesterel\fP command removes all the intermediate files it has created, -unless one of the following options is given: -.IP "\fB-Kic\fP -Keep all the \fB.ic\fP files (their names being the original ones, with -the suffix \fB.strl\fP replaced by \fB.ic\fP); -.IP "\fB-Klc\fP" -Keep the (unique) \fB.lc\fP file; -.IP "\fB-Koc\fP" -Keep the (unique) \fB.oc\fP file; -.IP "\fB-K" -Keep all the intermediate files. -.PP -The binder \fIiclc\fP recognizes some specific options: -.IP "\fB-Rs\fP" -Trace signal captures and renaming; -.IP "\fB-Rc\fP" -Trace constant captures and renaming; -.IP "\fB-R\fP" -Trace both signal and constant captures and renaming. -.PP -The compiler \fIlcoc\fP recognizes also some specific options: -.IP "\fB-size\fP" -Display the final size (states and bytes) of the generated automata; -.IP "\fB-show\fP" -Display dynamically the number of states generated so far. -.PP -The code generators (\fIocl\fP) recognize an unique option: -.IP "\fB-L\fP[\fIlanguage\fP][:\fIspecific_options\fP]" -.br -Set the target language: at this time only \fBc\fP, \fBlelisp\fP, -\fBtex\fP, \fBplm\fP, \fBauto\fP, -and \fBdebug\fP are known; it is likely that other languages be added. -The code generators have a name of the form \fBoc\fP\fIlanguage\fP. -If the \fB-L\fP option or the language are omitted, the default is \fBc\fP. -The string \fIspecific_options\fP allows to transmit language dependent -options to a given code generator (see \fBocl(1)\fP). -.IP -There can be as many \fB-L\fP options as needed. -.PP -Finally, there is a particular option to do as much as specified (by the -stop options) but producing nothing. -.IP "\fB-s\fP" -Perform all the compilation process, as specified by the other options, -but produce nothing. -.SH EXAMPLES -The simple command -.sp -.RS -.B esterel foo.strl -.RE -.sp -performs a full Esterel compilation, leaving the produced automaton, -in C language form, in the file \fBfoo.c\fP. -.PP -To produce debug format while keeping the generated automaton in portable -format, try -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -Koc -Ldebug foo.strl -.RE -.sp -.PP -A little more complex, the following command -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -Kic -Koc -Bautom -Llisp -.B f1.strl f2.ic f3.lc -.RE -.sp -will pass \fBf1.strl\fP through \fIstrlic\fP and keep the \fBf1.ic\fP file; -then it will pass \fBf1.ic\fP, \fBf2.ic\fP, and \fBf3.lc\fP -through \fIiclc\fP and \fIlcoc\fP, producing the file \fBautom.oc\fP -(the intermediate files are discarded); finally, -this last file will be converted into the LeLisp file \fBautom.ll\fP -by \fIoclelisp\fP. -.PP -The command -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -K -Bfoo -D/a/b f1.strl f2.strl f3.ic f4.oc -.RE -.sp -produces the following files: \fB/a/b/f1.ic\fP, \fB/a/b/f2.ic\fP, -\fB/a/b/foo.lc\fP, \fB/a/b/foo.oc\fP, and \fB/a/b/foo.c\fP. -.PP -To illustrate the \fB-s\fP option, note that -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -s foo.strl -.RE -.sp -performs a full compilation upto C code generation, but the C file is not -produced; similarly, -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -ic -s foo.strl -.RE -.sp -will only execute the front-end \fIstrlic\fP without producing any \fB.ic\fP -file. -.PP -Finally, -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -Lc -Lauto:"-signal EV1,EV2" foo.strl -.RE -.sp -performs a full compilation of the Esterel source file \fBfoo.strl\fP -to auto format (\fBfoo.auto\fP), passing the arguments -\fB-signal EV1,EV2\fP untouched to the corresponding code generator -(here \fIocauto\fP). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The command returns with exit code 0 if (and only if) -no error was detected by the various utilities. -.PP -Various error or warning messages indicate -incompatible or redundant options, or error -conditions related to file handling. -.SH BUGS -The command checks whether it generates a file which is already -present in its argument list, and if so, stops with an error, to -avoid clobbering the file. -.PP -The corresponding test is based on the name of files as given -by the user and is rather rustic. -For instance, the following erroneous condition (or any similar one) -is not detected -.sp -.RS -.B esterel -K -Bfoo -D.. foo.strl .././foo.lc -.RE -.sp -and will certainly result in loosing the original content of ../foo.lc -(use the \fB-n\fP option to see what will occur). -.SH FILES -.PP -In the following, $lib designates the default library directory for -Esterel utilities (usually /usr/local/lib/esterel). This default -path can be modified by the installer of the Esterel system, or by any -user setting the environment variable ESTERELLIB. -.sp -.ta \w'mmmmmm'u +\w'$lib/strlic 'u -.br -.ti0 - $lib/strlic Esterel front-end -.ti0 - $lib/iclc Esterel binder -.ti0 - $lib/lcoc Esterel compiler (automaton generator) -.ti0 - $lib/oc* Esterel code generators -.ti0 - - *.strl Esterel source files -.ti0 - *.ic Intermediate code files -.ti0 - *.lc Linked intermediate code file -.ti0 - *.oc Portable automata file -.ti0 - esterel.* Default names for keeping intermediate files -.SH SEE ALSO -strlic(l), iclc(l), lcoc(l), ocl(l) -.br -\fIEsterel V3 Reference Manual\fP -.br -\fIEsterel V3 System Manuals\fP -.SH IDENTIFICATION -Author: Jean-Paul Rigault, Ecole des Mines de Paris, CMA -.br -$Revision: 1.1 $ -.br -$Date: 88/04/07 13:39:34 $ diff --git a/static/v10/man1/exit.1 b/static/v10/man1/exit.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 970eacd6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/exit.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'EXIT(I)'3/15/72'EXIT(I)' -.ti 0 -NAME exit -- terminate command file -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS exit____ -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION exit____ -performs a seek____ to the end of its standard input file. -Thus, if it is invoked inside -a file of commands, upon return from exit____ the shell will -discover an end-of-file and terminate. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO if(I), goto(I), sh(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/expr.1 b/static/v10/man1/expr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3bc6fe3b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/expr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -.TH EXPR 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -expr \- integer and string-match expression evaluator for shell scripts -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B expr -.I arg ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The arguments are taken as an expression. -After evaluation, the result is written on the standard output. -Each token of the expression is a separate argument. -.PP -The operators and keywords are listed below -in order of increasing precedence, -with equal precedence operators grouped. -.TP \w'\f5(\fI\ expr\ \f5)\ 'u -.IB expr1 " | " expr2 -Value is the value of -.I expr1 -if that is neither empty nor 0, -otherwise the value of -.IR expr2. -.TP -.IB expr1 " & " expr2 -Value is the value of -.I expr1 -if neither -.I expr1 -nor -.I expr2 -is empty or 0, otherwise 0. -.TP -.I expr1 relop expr2 -.I Relop -is one of -.L "< <= = != >= >" . -Value is 1 -if the indicated comparison is true, 0 -if false. -The comparison is numeric if both -.I expr -are integers, otherwise lexicographic. -.TP -.IB expr1 " + " expr2 -.br -.ns -.TP -.IB expr1 " - " expr2 -.br -Value is the sum or difference of the (integer) values of -.I expr1 -and -.I expr2. -.TP -.IB expr1 " * " expr2 -.br -.ns -.TP -.IB expr1 " / " expr2 -.br -.ns -.TP -.IB expr1 " % " expr2 -.br -Value is the product, quotient, or remainder of the (integer) -values of -.I expr1 -and -.I expr2. -.TP -.IB expr " : " regexp -Match the string value of -.I expr -with the regular expression -.IR regexp ; -regular expression syntax is the same as in -.IR ed (1), -but matches are anchored at the left. -On success a subexpression -.BR \e(\| ... \|\e) , -if present in -.I regexp, -picks out a return value from the matched string. -Otherwise, -the matching operator yields the number of characters matched -(0 on failure). -.TP -.BI ( " expr " ) -Parentheses for grouping. -.TP -.I arg -Value is the string -.I arg. -.PP -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -a=`expr $a + 1` -Add 1 to shell variable -.IR a . -.TP -.L -expr $a : '.*/\e(.*\e)' '|' $a -Same as -.LR "basename $a" . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sh (1), -.IR test (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Expr -returns exit code 0 if the expression is neither null nor 0, -1 if the expression is null or 0, 2 for invalid expressions. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/f2c.1 b/static/v10/man1/f2c.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 419ba030..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/f2c.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ - - F2C(1) F2C(1) - - NAME - f2c - Convert Fortran 77 to C or C++ - - SYNOPSIS - f2c [ option ... ] file ... - - DESCRIPTION - F2c converts Fortran 77 source code in files with names end- - ing in `.f' or `.F' to C (or C++) source files in the cur- - rent directory, with `.c' substituted for the final `.f' or - `.F'. If no Fortran files are named, f2c reads Fortran from - standard input and writes C on standard output. File names - that end with `.p' or `.P' are taken to be prototype files, - as produced by option `-P', and are read first. - - The following options have the same meaning as in f77(1). - - -C Compile code to check that subscripts are within - declared array bounds. - - -I2 Render INTEGER and LOGICAL as short, INTEGER*4 as long - int. Assume the default libF77 and libI77: allow only - INTEGER*4 (and no LOGICAL) variables in INQUIREs. - Option `-I4' confirms the default rendering of INTEGER - as long int. - - -onetrip - Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if - reached. (Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all - if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit.) - - -U Honor the case of variable and external names. Fortran - keywords must be in lower case. - - -u Make the default type of a variable `undefined' rather - than using the default Fortran rules. - - -w Suppress all warning messages. If the option is - `-w66', only Fortran 66 compatibility warnings are sup- - pressed. - - The following options are peculiar to f2c. - - -A Produce ANSI C. Default is old-style C. - - -a Make local variables automatic rather than static - unless they appear in a DATA, EQUIVALENCE, NAMELIST, or - SAVE statement. - - -C++ Output C++ code. - - -c Include original Fortran source as comments. - - Page 1 Local (printed 2/2/93) - - F2C(1) F2C(1) - - -E Declare uninitialized COMMON to be Extern (overridably - defined in f2c.h as extern). - - -ec Place uninitialized COMMON blocks in separate files: - COMMON /ABC/ appears in file abc_com.c. Option `-e1c' - bundles the separate files into the output file, with - comments that give an unbundling sed(1) script. - - -ext Complain about f77(1) extensions. - - -f Assume free-format input: accept text after column 72 - and do not pad fixed-format lines shorter than 72 char- - acters with blanks. - - -72 Treat text appearing after column 72 as an error. - - -g Include original Fortran line numbers in #line lines. - - -h Emulate Fortran 66's treatment of Hollerith: try to - align character strings on word (or, if the option is - `-hd', on double-word) boundaries. - - -i2 Similar to -I2, but assume a modified libF77 and libI77 - (compiled with -Df2c_i2), so INTEGER and LOGICAL vari- - ables may be assigned by INQUIRE and array lengths are - stored in short ints. - - -kr Use temporary values to enforce Fortran expression - evaluation where K&R (first edition) parenthesization - rules allow rearrangement. If the option is `-krd', - use double precision temporaries even for single- - precision operands. - - -P Write a file.P of ANSI (or C++) prototypes for defini- - tions in each input file.f or file.F. When reading - Fortran from standard input, write prototypes at the - beginning of standard output. Option -Ps implies -P - and gives exit status 4 if rerunning f2c may change - prototypes or declarations. - - -p Supply preprocessor definitions to make common-block - members look like local variables. - - -R Do not promote REAL functions and operations to DOUBLE - PRECISION. Option `-!R' confirms the default, which - imitates f77. - - -r Cast values of REAL functions (including intrinsics) to - REAL. - - -r8 Promote REAL to DOUBLE PRECISION, COMPLEX to DOUBLE - COMPLEX. - - Page 2 Local (printed 2/2/93) - - F2C(1) F2C(1) - - -s Preserve multidimensional subscripts. - - -Tdir - Put temporary files in directory dir. - - -w8 Suppress warnings when COMMON or EQUIVALENCE forces - odd-word alignment of doubles. - - -Wn Assume n characters/word (default 4) when initializing - numeric variables with character data. - - -z Do not implicitly recognize DOUBLE COMPLEX. - - -!bs Do not recognize backslash escapes (\", \', \0, \\, \b, - \f, \n, \r, \t, \v) in character strings. - - -!c Inhibit C output, but produce -P output. - - -!I Reject include statements. - - -!i8 Disallow INTEGER*8. - - -!it Don't infer types of untyped EXTERNAL procedures from - use as parameters to previously defined or prototyped - procedures. - - -!P Do not attempt to infer ANSI or C++ prototypes from - usage. - - The resulting C invokes the support routines of f77; object - code should be loaded by f77 or with ld(1) or cc(1) options - -lF77 -lI77 -lm. Calling conventions are those of f77: see - the reference below. - - FILES - file.[fF] - input file - - *.c output file - - /usr/include/f2c.h - header file - - /usr/lib/libF77.a - intrinsic function library - - /usr/lib/libI77.a - Fortran I/O library - - /lib/libc.a - C library, see section 3 - - Page 3 Local (printed 2/2/93) - - F2C(1) F2C(1) - - SEE ALSO - S. I. Feldman and P. J. Weinberger, `A Portable Fortran 77 - Compiler', UNIX Time Sharing System Programmer's Manual, - Tenth Edition, Volume 2, AT&T Bell Laboratories, 1990. - - DIAGNOSTICS - The diagnostics produced by f2c are intended to be self- - explanatory. - - BUGS - Floating-point constant expressions are simplified in the - floating-point arithmetic of the machine running f2c, so - they are typically accurate to at most 16 or 17 decimal - places. - Untypable EXTERNAL functions are declared int. - - Page 4 Local (printed 2/2/93) - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/f77.1 b/static/v10/man1/f77.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d226c9f2..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/f77.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,212 +0,0 @@ -.TH F77 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -f77 \(mi Fortran 77 compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B f77 -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I F77 -is a Fortran 77 compiler. -It accepts several types of arguments: -.PP -Arguments whose names end with -.L .f -are taken to be -Fortran 77 source programs; -they are compiled, and -each object program is left on the file in the current directory -whose name is that of the source with -.L .o -substituted -for -.LR .f . -.PP -Arguments whose names end with -.L .r -or -.L .e -are taken to be Ratfor or EFL -source programs, respectively; these are first transformed by the -appropriate preprocessor, then compiled by -.I f77. -.PP -In the same way, -arguments whose names end with -.L .c -or -.L .s -are taken to be C or assembly source programs -and are compiled or assembled, producing a -.L .o -file. -.PP -The following options have the same meaning as in -.IR cc (1). -See -.IR ld (1) -for load-time options. -.TP -.B -c -Suppress loading and produce -.L .o -files for each source -file. -.TP -.B -g -Have the compiler produce additional symbol table information for -.IR sdb (A) -or -.IR pi (9.1). -.TP -.BR -w -Suppress all warning messages. -If the option is -.LR -w66 , -only Fortran 66 compatibility warnings are suppressed. -.TP -.B -p -Prepare object files for profiling, see -.IR prof (1). -.TP -.B -O -Invoke an -object-code optimizer. -.TP -.B -S -Compile the named programs, and leave the -assembler-language output on corresponding files suffixed -.LR .s . -(No -.L .o -is created.). -.TP -.BI -o " output" -Name the final output file -.I output -instead of -.LR a.out . -.PP -The following options are peculiar to -.IR f77 . -.TP -.BR -onetrip -Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if reached. -(Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit.) -.TP -.BR -u -Make the default type of a variable `undefined' rather than using the default Fortran rules. -.TP -.BR -C -Compile code to check that subscripts are within declared array bounds. -.TP -.B -I2 -Render -.SM INTEGER -and -.SM LOGICAL -as short, -.SM INTEGER\*S\(**4 -as long. -Allow only -.SM INTEGER\*S\(**4 -(and no -.SM LOGICAL\*S) -variables in -.SM INQUIRE\*Ss. -.TP -.B -U -Honor the case of variable and external names. -Fortran keywords must be in lower case. -.TP -.BR -F -Apply EFL and Ratfor preprocessors to relevant files, -put the results in the files -with the suffix changed to -.LR .f , -but do not compile. -.TP -.BR -m -Apply the M4 preprocessor to each -.L .r -or -.L .e -file before transforming -it with the Ratfor or EFL preprocessor. -.TP -.BI -E x -Use the string -.I x -as an EFL option in processing -.L .e -files. -.TP -.BI -R x -Use the string -.I x -as a Ratfor option in processing -.L .r -files. -.PP -Other arguments -are taken -to be either loader option arguments, or F77-compatible -object programs, typically produced by an earlier -run, -or perhaps libraries of F77-compatible routines. -These programs, together with the results of any -compilations specified, are loaded (in the order -given) to produce an executable program with name -.LR a.out . -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/libF77.a -.TP -.IB file .[fresc] -input file -.TP -.B *.o -object file -.TP -.F a.out -loaded output -.TP -.F ./fort* -temporary -.TP -.F /usr/lib/f77pass1 -compiler -.TP -.F /lib/f1 -pass 2 -.TP -.F /lib/c2 -optional optimizer -.TP -.F /usr/lib/libF77.a -intrinsic function library -.TP -.F /usr/lib/libI77.a -Fortran I/O library -.TP -.F /lib/libc.a -C library, see section 3 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR prof (1), -.IR cc (1), -.IR ld (1), -.IR efl (A), -.IR ratfor (A) -.br -S. I. Feldman and -P. J. Weinberger, -`A Portable Fortran 77 Compiler', -this manual, Volume 2 -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The diagnostics produced by -.I f77 -itself are intended to be -self-explanatory. -Occasional messages may be produced by the loader. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/factor.1 b/static/v10/man1/factor.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fb1aa2a5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/factor.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'FACTOR (I)'1/15/73'FACTOR (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME factor -- discover prime factors of a number -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS factor______ -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION When factor is invoked, it types -out "Enter:" at you. If you type in a positive -number less than 2^56 (about 7.2E16), it will repeat the number -back at you and then its prime factors each one printed -the proper number of times. Then it says "Enter:" again. -To exit, feed it an EOT or a delete. -.sp -Maximum time to factor is proportional to sqrt(n) and occurs -when n is prime. It takes 1 minute to factor a prime near 10^13. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "Ouch." for input out of range or for garbage input. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fc.1 b/static/v10/man1/fc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5c33f614..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/fc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,292 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'FC (I)'9/1/72'FC (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME fc -- fortran compiler -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS fc__ [ -c__ ] sfile\d1\u.f__ ... ofile\d1\u ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION fc__ -is the UNIX Fortran compiler. -It accepts three types of arguments: - -Arguments whose names end with ".f" are assumed to be -Fortran source program units; they are compiled, and -the object program is left on the file sfile\d1\u.o (i.e. -the file whose name is that of the source with ".o" substituted -for ".f"). - -Other arguments (except for "-c") are assumed -to be either loader flags, or -object programs, typically produced by an earlier fc__ run, -or perhaps libraries of Fortran-compatible routines. -These programs, together with the results of any -compilations specified, are loaded (in the order -given) to produce an executable program with name -a.out_____. - -The "-c" argument suppresses the loading phase, as does -any syntax error in any of the routines being compiled. - -The following is a list -of differences between fc__ -and ANSI standard Fortran (also see the BUGS section): -.sp -.in +3 -.ti -3 -1. Arbitrary combination of types is allowed -in expressions. Not all combinations are expected to -be supported at runtime. -All of the normal -conversions involving integer, real, double -precision and complex are allowed. -.sp -.ti -3 -2. The 'standard' implicit statement is recognized. -.sp -.ti -3 -3. The types -doublecomplex, logical*1, -integer*2 and real*8 (doubleprecision) -are supported. -.sp -.ti -3 -4. &_ as the first character of a line -signals a continuation card. -.sp -.ti -3 -5. c_ as the first character of a line signals a comment. -.sp -.ti -3 -6. All keywords are recognized in lower case. -.sp -.ti -3 -7. The notion of 'column 7' is not implemented. - -.ti -3 -8. G-format input is free form-- -leading blanks are ignored, the first blank after the start -of the number terminates the field. - -.ti -3 -9. A comma in any numeric or logical input field terminates -the field. - -.ti -4 -10. There is no carriage control on output. -.sp -.in -3 -In I/O statements, only unit numbers 0-19 are supported. -Unit number nn__ corresponds to file "fortnn__;" -(e.g. unit 9 is file "fort09"). -For input, the file must exist; -for output, it will be created. - -Unit 5 is permanently associated with -the standard input file; unit 6 with the -standard output file. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES file.f input file -.nf -a.out loaded output -f.tmp[123] temporary (deleted) -/usr/fort/fc[1234] compilation phases -/usr/lib/fr0.o runtime startoff -/usr/lib/filib.a interpreter library -/usr/lib/libf.a builtin functions, etc. -/usr/lib/liba.a system library -.fi -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO ANSI standard -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS Compile-time diagnostics -are given by number. -If the source code is available, it is -printed with an underline at the current -character pointer. -Errors possible are: - -.in +8 -.ti -8 -1 statement too long -.ti -8 -2 syntax error in type statement -.ti -8 -3 redeclaration -.ti -8 -4 missing ( in array declarator -.ti -8 -5 syntax error in dimension statement -.ti -8 -6 inappropriate or gratuitous array declarator -.ti -8 -7 syntax error in subscript bound -.ti -8 -8 illegal character -.ti -8 -9 common variable is a parameter or already in common -.ti -8 -10 common syntax error -.ti -8 -11 subroutine/blockdata/function not first statement -.ti -8 -12 subroutine/function syntax error -.ti -8 -13 block data syntax error -.ti -8 -14 redeclaration in external -.ti -8 -15 external syntax error -.ti -8 -16 implicit syntax error -.ti -8 -17 subscript on non-array -.ti -8 -18 incorrect subscript count -.ti -8 -19 subscript out of range -.ti -8 -20 subscript syntax error -.ti -8 -22 DATA syntax error -.ti -8 -23 Illegal variable in DATA -.ti -8 -23 equivalence inconsistency -.ti -8 -24 equivalence syntax error -.ti -8 -25 separate common blocks equivalenced -.ti -8 -26 common block illegally extended by equivalence -.ti -8 -27 common inconsistency created by equivalence -.ti -8 -28 DATA table overflow -.ti -8 -29 () imbalance in expression -.ti -8 -30 expression syntax error -.ti -8 -31 illegal variable in equivalence -.ti -8 -32 Storage initialized twice by DATA -.ti -8 -33 non array/function used with subscripts/arguments -.ti -8 -35 goto syntax error -.ti -8 -37 illegal return -.ti -8 -38 continue, return, stop, call, end, or pause syntax error -.ti -8 -39 assign syntax error -.ti -8 -40 if syntax error -.ti -8 -41 I/O syntax error -.ti -8 -42 do or I/O iteration error -.ti -8 -43 do end missing -.ti -8 -50 illegal statement in block data -.ti -8 -51 multiply defined labels -.ti -8 -52 undefined label -.ti -8 -53 dimension mismatch -.ti -8 -54 expression syntax error -.ti -8 -55 end of statement in hollerith constant -.ti -8 -56 array too large -.ti -8 -99 B table overflow -.ti -8 -101 unrecognized statement -.ti -8 - -.ti -8 -Runtime diagnostics: -.ti -8 - -.ti -8 -1 invalid log argument -.ti -8 -2 bad arg count to amod -.ti -8 -3 bad arg count to atan2 -.ti -8 -4 excessive argument to cabs -.ti -8 -5 exp too large in cexp -.ti -8 -6 bad arg count to cmplx -.ti -8 -7 bad arg count to dim -.ti -8 -8 excessive argument to exp -.ti -8 -9 bad arg count to idim -.ti -8 -10 bad arg count to isign -.ti -8 -11 bad arg count to mod -.ti -8 -12 bad arg count to sign -.ti -8 -13 illegal argument to sqrt -.ti -8 -14 assigned/computed goto out of range -.ti -8 -15 subscript out of range -.ti -8 -16 real**real overflow - -.ti -8 -100 illegal I/O unit number -.ti -8 -101 inconsistent use of I/O unit -.ti -8 -102 cannot create output file -.ti -8 -103 cannot open input file -.ti -8 -104 EOF on input file -.ti -8 -105 illegal character in format -.ti -8 -106 format does not begin with ( -.ti -8 -107 no conversion in format but non-empty list -.ti -8 -108 excessive parenthesis depth in format -.ti -8 -109 illegal format specification -.ti -8 -110 illegal character in input field -.ti -8 -111 end of format in hollerith specification -.ti -8 -999 unimplemented input conversion -.sp -.in -8 -.ti 0 -BUGS The following is a list of -those features not yet implemented: -.sp -.br -arithmetic statement functions - -backspace, endfile, rewind runtime - -binary I/O - -no scale factors on input diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fed.1 b/static/v10/man1/fed.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 17413593..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/fed.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'FED (I)'1/15/73'FED (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME -.br -fed -- edit associative memory for form letter -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS -.br -fe__d_ -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION -.br -fed___ is used to edit a form letter associative memory -file, form.m, which consists of named strings. -Commands consist of single letters followed by a list of -string names separated by a single space and ending with a -new line. -The conventions of the Shell with respect to '*' and '?' hold for -all commands but m_ where literal string names are expected. -The commands are: - -.in +5 -.ti -5 -e name918 ... - -e_dit writes the string whose name is name918 onto a temporary file -and executes the system editor ed__. On exit from the system -editor the temporary file is copied back into the associative -memory. Each argument is operated on separately. The sequence of -commands to add the string from 'file' to memory with name -'newname' is as follows: - - e newname - 0 (printed by ed) - r file - 200 - w - 200 - q (get out of ed) - q (get out of fe) - -To dump a string onto a file: - - e name - 200 (printed by ed) - w filename - 200 - q (get out of ed) - q (get out of fe) -.sp2 -.ti -5 -d [ name918 ... ] - -d_eletes a string and its name from the memory. When called with -no arguments d_ operates in a verbose mode typing each string -name and deleting only if a 'y' is typed. A 'q' response returns -to fed's command level. Any other response does nothing. -.sp 2 -.ti -5 -m name918 name928 ... - -(m_ove) changes the name of name918 to name928 and removes previous -string name928 if one exists. Several pairs of arguments may be given. -.sp 2 -.ti -5 -n [ name918 ... ] - -(n_ames) lists the string names in the memory. If called with -the optional arguments, it just lists those requested. -.sp 2 -.ti -5 -p name918 ... - -p_rints the contents of the strings with names given by the arguments. -.sp 2 -.ti -5 -q -(q_uit) returns to the system. -.sp 2 -.ti -5 -c [ p_ ] [ f_ ] - -c_hecks the associative memory file for consistency -and reports the number of free headers and blocks. -The optional arguments do the following: -.sp -.in +5 -.ti -2 -p causes any unaccounted for string to be -printed - -.ti -2 -f fixes broken memories by adding -unaccounted-for headers to free -storage and removing references to -released headers from associative -memory. -.in -5 -.sp -.sp -.in -5 -.ti 0 -FILES /tmp/ftmp? temporary -.br -form.m associative memory -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO form(I), ed(I), sh(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS '?' unknown command -.br -'Cannot open temp. file'-- cannot create a temporary file for ed command -.br -'name not in memory.' if string 'name' is not in the associative -memory and is used as an argument for d_ or m_. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -WARNING It -is legal but an unwise idea to have string names -with blanks, ":" or "?" in them. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fields.1 b/static/v10/man1/fields.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 56fdeb98..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/fields.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -x = 1 2 3 4 -3 6 -y = 3 8 9 -x = 1 2 3 0 0 6 -y = 2 8 16 -p->a = 0x3, p->b = 0xf diff --git a/static/v10/man1/file.1 b/static/v10/man1/file.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7e2aaa2a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/file.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -.th FILE I 11/1/73 -.sh NAME -file \*- determine format of file -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd file -files -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it File -will examine each of its arguments -and give a guess as to the contents of the file. -It is the only program that will give -device numbers of special files. -.sh BUGS -If the file is not instantly recognized, -its type is given as `unknown'. -There should be some heuristic to -recognize source file `signatures' -in each of the standard languages. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/find.1 b/static/v10/man1/find.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9fe8dd0c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/find.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,182 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIND 1 -.CT 1 files dirs -.SH NAME -find \- find files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B find -.I pathname ... expression -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Find -recursively descends -the directory hierarchy for each -.I pathname, -seeking files that match a boolean -.I expression, -which consists of one or more arguments. -It does not follow symbolic links. -In the following descriptions of primary expressions, -.I n -is a decimal integer; -.BI + n -may be written to specify more than -.I n -and -.BI - n -to specify less. -.TP 10n -.BI -name " filename" -True if the -.I filename -argument matches the current file name. -Normal shell filename metacharacters may be used if quoted. -.TP -.BI -perm " onum" -True if the file permission flags -exactly -match the -octal number -.I onum -(see -.IR chmod (1)). -If -.I onum -is prefixed by a minus sign, -more mode bits (017777, see -.IR stat (2)) -become significant and -the modes are compared: -.IR (mode&onum)==onum . -.TP -.BI -type " c" -True if the type of the file -is -.I c, -where -.I c -is -.BI b ", " c ", " d ", " -.BI f ", " -or -.B L -for -block special file, character special file, -directory, plain file or symbolic link. -.TP -.BI -links " n" -True if the file has -.I n -links. -.TP -.BI -user " uname" -True if the file belongs to the user -.I uname -(login name or numeric userid). -.TP -.BI -group " gname" -True if the file belongs to group -.I gname -(group name or numeric groupid). -.TP -.BI -size " n" -True if the file is -.I n -blocks long (512 bytes per block). -.TP -.BI -inum " n" -True if the file has inode number -.I n. -.TP -.BI -atime " n" -True if the file has been accessed in -.I n -days. -.TP -.BI -mtime " n" -True if the file has been modified in -.I n -days. -.TP -.BI -ctime " n" -True if the inode has been changed in -.I n -days. -.TP -.BI -exec " command" -True if the executed command returns -a zero value as exit status. -The end of the command must be punctuated by an escaped -semicolon. -A command argument -.L {} -is replaced by the -current pathname. -.TP -.BI -ok " command" -Like -.B -exec -except that the generated command is written on -the standard output, then the standard input is read -and the command executed only upon response -.BI y . -.TP -.B -print -Always true; -causes the current pathname to be printed. -.TP -.BI -newer " file" -True if -the file has been modified more recently than the argument -.I file. -.TP -.BI -status " n -True if -.IR lstat -(see -.IR stat (2)) -applied to the file yields error number -.IR n ; -see -.IR intro (2). -Testing -.L -status -turns off diagnostics that errors normally produce. -On ordinary systems a nonzero error number occurs when a file -disappears underfoot or a file system is in trouble. -.PP -The following operators, listed in order of decreasing precedence, -may be used to combine primary expressions. -.TP -.BI ( " expression " ) -Group with parentheses. -.TP -.BI ! " expression -Negation. -True if and only if -.I expression -is not true. -.TP -.I expression expression -Conjunction. -True if both expressions are true. -.TP -.IB expression " -o " expression -Disjunction. -True if either expression is true. -.SH EXAMPLES -.HP -.L -find / \e( -name a.out -o -name '*.o' \e) -atime +7 -exec rm '{}' \e; -.br -Remove all files named -.L a.out -or -.L *.o -that have not been accessed for a week. -.SH FILES -.F /etc/passwd -.br -.F /etc/group -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sh (1), -.IR test (1), -.IR filsys (5) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/flex.1 b/static/v10/man1/flex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 99cb5667..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/flex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,716 +0,0 @@ -.TH FLEX 1 "20 June 1989" "Version 2.1" -.SH NAME -flex - fast lexical analyzer generator -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B flex -[ -.B -bdfipstvFILT -c[efmF] -Sskeleton_file -] [ -.I filename -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I flex -is a rewrite of -.I lex -intended to right some of that tool's deficiencies: in particular, -.I flex -generates lexical analyzers much faster, and the analyzers use -smaller tables and run faster. -.SH OPTIONS -In addition to lex's -.B -t -flag, flex has the following options: -.TP -.B -b -Generate backtracking information to -.I lex.backtrack. -This is a list of scanner states which require backtracking -and the input characters on which they do so. By adding rules one -can remove backtracking states. If all backtracking states -are eliminated and -.B -f -or -.B -F -is used, the generated scanner will run faster (see the -.B -p -flag). Only users who wish to squeeze every last cycle out of their -scanners need worry about this option. -.TP -.B -d -makes the generated scanner run in -.I debug -mode. Whenever a pattern is recognized the scanner will -write to -.I stderr -a line of the form: -.nf - - --accepting rule #n - -.fi -Rules are numbered sequentially with the first one being 1. Rule #0 -is executed when the scanner backtracks; Rule #(n+1) (where -.I n -is the number of rules) indicates the default action; Rule #(n+2) indicates -that the input buffer is empty and needs to be refilled and then the scan -restarted. Rules beyond (n+2) are end-of-file actions. -.TP -.B -f -has the same effect as lex's -f flag (do not compress the scanner -tables); the mnemonic changes from -.I fast compilation -to (take your pick) -.I full table -or -.I fast scanner. -The actual compilation takes -.I longer, -since flex is I/O bound writing out the big table. -.IP -This option is equivalent to -.B -cf -(see below). -.TP -.B -i -instructs flex to generate a -.I case-insensitive -scanner. The case of letters given in the flex input patterns will -be ignored, and the rules will be matched regardless of case. The -matched text given in -.I yytext -will have the preserved case (i.e., it will not be folded). -.TP -.B -p -generates a performance report to stderr. The report -consists of comments regarding features of the flex input file -which will cause a loss of performance in the resulting scanner. -Note that the use of -.I REJECT -and variable trailing context (see -.B BUGS) -entails a substantial performance penalty; use of -.I yymore(), -the -.B ^ -operator, -and the -.B -I -flag entail minor performance penalties. -.TP -.B -s -causes the -.I default rule -(that unmatched scanner input is echoed to -.I stdout) -to be suppressed. If the scanner encounters input that does not -match any of its rules, it aborts with an error. This option is -useful for finding holes in a scanner's rule set. -.TP -.B -v -has the same meaning as for lex (print to -.I stderr -a summary of statistics of the generated scanner). Many more statistics -are printed, though, and the summary spans several lines. Most -of the statistics are meaningless to the casual flex user, but the -first line identifies the version of flex, which is useful for figuring -out where you stand with respect to patches and new releases. -.TP -.B -F -specifies that the -.ul -fast -scanner table representation should be used. This representation is -about as fast as the full table representation -.ul -(-f), -and for some sets of patterns will be considerably smaller (and for -others, larger). In general, if the pattern set contains both "keywords" -and a catch-all, "identifier" rule, such as in the set: -.nf - - "case" return ( TOK_CASE ); - "switch" return ( TOK_SWITCH ); - ... - "default" return ( TOK_DEFAULT ); - [a-z]+ return ( TOK_ID ); - -.fi -then you're better off using the full table representation. If only -the "identifier" rule is present and you then use a hash table or some such -to detect the keywords, you're better off using -.ul --F. -.IP -This option is equivalent to -.B -cF -(see below). -.TP -.B -I -instructs flex to generate an -.I interactive -scanner. Normally, scanners generated by flex always look ahead one -character before deciding that a rule has been matched. At the cost of -some scanning overhead, flex will generate a scanner which only looks ahead -when needed. Such scanners are called -.I interactive -because if you want to write a scanner for an interactive system such as a -command shell, you will probably want the user's input to be terminated -with a newline, and without -.B -I -the user will have to type a character in addition to the newline in order -to have the newline recognized. This leads to dreadful interactive -performance. -.IP -If all this seems to confusing, here's the general rule: if a human will -be typing in input to your scanner, use -.B -I, -otherwise don't; if you don't care about how fast your scanners run and -don't want to make any assumptions about the input to your scanner, -always use -.B -I. -.IP -Note, -.B -I -cannot be used in conjunction with -.I full -or -.I fast tables, -i.e., the -.B -f, -F, -cf, -or -.B -cF -flags. -.TP -.B -L -instructs flex to not generate -.B #line -directives (see below). -.TP -.B -T -makes flex run in -.I trace -mode. It will generate a lot of messages to stdout concerning -the form of the input and the resultant non-deterministic and deterministic -finite automatons. This option is mostly for use in maintaining flex. -.TP -.B -c[efmF] -controls the degree of table compression. -.B -ce -directs flex to construct -.I equivalence classes, -i.e., sets of characters -which have identical lexical properties (for example, if the only -appearance of digits in the flex input is in the character class -"[0-9]" then the digits '0', '1', ..., '9' will all be put -in the same equivalence class). -.B -cf -specifies that the -.I full -scanner tables should be generated - flex should not compress the -tables by taking advantages of similar transition functions for -different states. -.B -cF -specifies that the alternate fast scanner representation (described -above under the -.B -F -flag) -should be used. -.B -cm -directs flex to construct -.I meta-equivalence classes, -which are sets of equivalence classes (or characters, if equivalence -classes are not being used) that are commonly used together. -A lone -.B -c -specifies that the scanner tables should be compressed but neither -equivalence classes nor meta-equivalence classes should be used. -.IP -The options -.B -cf -or -.B -cF -and -.B -cm -do not make sense together - there is no opportunity for meta-equivalence -classes if the table is not being compressed. Otherwise the options -may be freely mixed. -.IP -The default setting is -.B -cem -which specifies that flex should generate equivalence classes -and meta-equivalence classes. This setting provides the highest -degree of table compression. You can trade off -faster-executing scanners at the cost of larger tables with -the following generally being true: -.nf - - slowest smallest - -cem - -ce - -cm - -c - -c{f,F}e - -c{f,F} - fastest largest - -.fi -Note that scanners with the smallest tables compile the quickest, so -during development you will usually want to use the default, maximal -compression. -.TP -.B -Sskeleton_file -overrides the default skeleton file from which flex constructs -its scanners. You'll never need this option unless you are doing -flex maintenance or development. -.SH INCOMPATIBILITIES WITH LEX -.I flex -is fully compatible with -.I lex -with the following exceptions: -.IP - -There is no run-time library to link with. You needn't -specify -.I -ll -when linking, and you must supply a main program. (Hacker's note: since -the lex library contains a main() which simply calls yylex(), you actually -.I can -be lazy and not supply your own main program and link with -.I -ll.) -.IP - -lex's -.B %r -(Ratfor scanners) and -.B %t -(translation table) options -are not supported. -.IP - -The do-nothing -.ul --n -flag is not supported. -.IP - -When definitions are expanded, flex encloses them in parentheses. -With lex, the following -.nf - - NAME [A-Z][A-Z0-9]* - %% - foo{NAME}? printf( "Found it\\n" ); - %% - -.fi -will not match the string "foo" because when the macro -is expanded the rule is equivalent to "foo[A-Z][A-Z0-9]*?" -and the precedence is such that the '?' is associated with -"[A-Z0-9]*". With flex, the rule will be expanded to -"foo([A-z][A-Z0-9]*)?" and so the string "foo" will match. -Note that because of this, the -.B ^, $, , -and -.B / -operators cannot be used in a definition. -.IP - -The undocumented lex-scanner internal variable -.B yylineno -is not supported. -.IP - -The -.B input() -routine is not redefinable, though may be called to read characters -following whatever has been matched by a rule. If -.B input() -encounters an end-of-file the normal -.B yywrap() -processing is done. A ``real'' end-of-file is returned as -.I EOF. -.IP -Input can be controlled by redefining the -.B YY_INPUT -macro. -YY_INPUT's calling sequence is "YY_INPUT(buf,result,max_size)". Its -action is to place up to max_size characters in the character buffer "buf" -and return in the integer variable "result" either the -number of characters read or the constant YY_NULL (0 on Unix systems) -systems) to indicate EOF. The default YY_INPUT reads from the -file-pointer "yyin" (which is by default -.I stdin), -so if you -just want to change the input file, you needn't redefine -YY_INPUT - just point yyin at the input file. -.IP -A sample redefinition of YY_INPUT (in the first section of the input -file): -.nf - - %{ - #undef YY_INPUT - #define YY_INPUT(buf,result,max_size) \\ - result = (buf[0] = getchar()) == EOF ? YY_NULL : 1; - %} - -.fi -You also can add in things like counting keeping track of the -input line number this way; but don't expect your scanner to -go very fast. -.IP - -.B output() -is not supported. -Output from the ECHO macro is done to the file-pointer -"yyout" (default -.I stdout). -.IP - -If you are providing your own yywrap() routine, you must "#undef yywrap" -first. -.IP - -To refer to yytext outside of your scanner source file, use -"extern char *yytext;" rather than "extern char yytext[];". -.IP - -.B yyleng -is a macro and not a variable, and hence cannot be accessed outside -of the scanner source file. -.IP - -flex reads only one input file, while lex's input is made -up of the concatenation of its input files. -.IP - -The name -.bd -FLEX_SCANNER -is #define'd so scanners may be written for use with either -flex or lex. -.IP - -The macro -.bd -YY_USER_ACTION -can be redefined to provide an action -which is always executed prior to the matched rule's action. For example, -it could be #define'd to call a routine to convert yytext to lower-case, -or to copy yyleng to a global variable to make it accessible outside of -the scanner source file. -.IP - -In the generated scanner, rules are separated using -.bd -YY_BREAK -instead of simple "break"'s. This allows, for example, C++ users to -#define YY_BREAK to do nothing (while being very careful that every -rule ends with a "break" or a "return"!) to avoid suffering from -unreachable statement warnings where a rule's action ends with "return". -.SH ENHANCEMENTS -.IP - -.I Exclusive start-conditions -can be declared by using -.B %x -instead of -.B %s. -These start-conditions have the property that when they are active, -.I no other rules are active. -Thus a set of rules governed by the same exclusive start condition -describe a scanner which is independent of any of the other rules in -the flex input. This feature makes it easy to specify "mini-scanners" -which scan portions of the input that are syntactically different -from the rest (e.g., comments). -.IP - -.I yyterminate() -can be used in lieu of a return statement in an action. It terminates -the scanner and returns a 0 to the scanner's caller, indicating "all done". -.IP - -.I End-of-file rules. -The special rule "<>" indicates -actions which are to be taken when an end-of-file is -encountered and yywrap() returns non-zero (i.e., indicates -no further files to process). The action can either -point yyin at a new file to process, in which case the -action should finish with -.I YY_NEW_FILE -(this is a branch, so subsequent code in the action won't -be executed), or it should finish with a -.I return -statement. <> rules may not be used with other -patterns; they may only be qualified with a list of start -conditions. If an unqualified <> rule is given, it -applies only to the INITIAL start condition, and -.I not -to -.B %s -start conditions. -These rules are useful for catching things like unclosed comments. -An example: -.nf - - %x quote - %% - ... - <> { - error( "unterminated quote" ); - yyterminate(); - } - <> { - yyin = fopen( next_file, "r" ); - YY_NEW_FILE; - } - -.fi -.IP - -flex dynamically resizes its internal tables, so directives like "%a 3000" -are not needed when specifying large scanners. -.IP - -The scanning routine generated by flex is declared using the macro -.B YY_DECL. -By redefining this macro you can change the routine's name and -its calling sequence. For example, you could use: -.nf - - #undef YY_DECL - #define YY_DECL float lexscan( a, b ) float a, b; - -.fi -to give it the name -.I lexscan, -returning a float, and taking two floats as arguments. Note that -if you give arguments to the scanning routine, you must terminate -the definition with a semi-colon (;). -.IP - -flex generates -.B #line -directives mapping lines in the output to -their origin in the input file. -.IP - -You can put multiple actions on the same line, separated with -semi-colons. With lex, the following -.nf - - foo handle_foo(); return 1; - -.fi -is truncated to -.nf - - foo handle_foo(); - -.fi -flex does not truncate the action. Actions that are not enclosed in -braces are terminated at the end of the line. -.IP - -Actions can be begun with -.B %{ -and terminated with -.B %}. -In this case, flex does not count braces to figure out where the -action ends - actions are terminated by the closing -.B %}. -This feature is useful when the enclosed action has extraneous -braces in it (usually in comments or inside inactive #ifdef's) -that throw off the brace-count. -.IP - -All of the scanner actions (e.g., -.B ECHO, yywrap ...) -except the -.B unput() -and -.B input() -routines, -are written as macros, so they can be redefined if necessary -without requiring a separate library to link to. -.IP - -When -.B yywrap() -indicates that the scanner is done processing (it does this by returning -non-zero), on subsequent calls the scanner will always immediately return -a value of 0. To restart it on a new input file, the action -.B yyrestart() -is used. It takes one argument, the new input file. It closes the -previous yyin (unless stdin) and sets up the scanners internal variables -so that the next call to yylex() will start scanning the new file. This -functionality is useful for, e.g., programs which will process a file, do some -work, and then get a message to parse another file. -.IP - -Flex scans the code in section 1 (inside %{}'s) and the actions for -occurrences of -.I REJECT -and -.I yymore(). -If it doesn't see any, it assumes the features are not used and generates -higher-performance scanners. Flex tries to be correct in identifying -uses but can be fooled (for example, if a reference is made in a macro from -a #include file). If this happens (a feature is used and flex didn't -realize it) you will get a compile-time error of the form -.nf - - reject_used_but_not_detected undefined - -.fi -You can tell flex that a feature is used even if it doesn't think so -with -.B %used -followed by the name of the feature (for example, "%used REJECT"); -similarly, you can specify that a feature is -.I not -used even though it thinks it is with -.B %unused. -.IP - -Comments may be put in the first section of the input by preceding -them with '#'. -.SH FILES -.TP -.I flex.skel -skeleton scanner -.TP -.I lex.yy.c -generated scanner (called -.I lexyy.c -on some systems). -.TP -.I lex.backtrack -backtracking information for -.B -b -flag (called -.I lex.bck -on some systems). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -lex(1) -.LP -M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, -.I LEX - Lexical Analyzer Generator -.SH AUTHOR -Vern Paxson, with the help of many ideas and much inspiration from -Van Jacobson. Original version by Jef Poskanzer. Fast table -representation is a partial implementation of a design done by Van -Jacobson. The implementation was done by Kevin Gong and Vern Paxson. -.LP -Thanks to the many flex beta-testers and feedbackers, especially Casey -Leedom, Frederic Brehm, Nick Christopher, Chris Faylor, Eric Goldman, Eric -Hughes, Greg Lee, Craig Leres, Mohamed el Lozy, Jim Meyering, Esmond Pitt, -Jef Poskanzer, and Dave Tallman. Thanks to Keith Bostic, John Gilmore, Bob -Mulcahy, Rich Salz, and Richard Stallman for help with various distribution -headaches. -.LP -Send comments to: -.nf - - Vern Paxson - Real Time Systems - Bldg. 46A - Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory - 1 Cyclotron Rd. - Berkeley, CA 94720 - - (415) 486-6411 - - vern@csam.lbl.gov - vern@rtsg.ee.lbl.gov - ucbvax!csam.lbl.gov!vern - -.fi -I will be gone from mid-July '89 through mid-August '89. From August on, -the addresses are: -.nf - - vern@cs.cornell.edu - - Vern Paxson - CS Department - Grad Office - 4126 Upson - Cornell University - Ithaca, NY 14853-7501 - - - -.fi -Email sent to the former addresses should continue to be forwarded for -quite a while. Also, it looks like my username will be "paxson" and -not "vern". I'm planning on having a mail alias set up so "vern" will -still work, but if you encounter problems try "paxson". -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.LP -.I flex scanner jammed - -a scanner compiled with -.B -s -has encountered an input string which wasn't matched by -any of its rules. -.LP -.I flex input buffer overflowed - -a scanner rule matched a string long enough to overflow the -scanner's internal input buffer (16K bytes - controlled by -.B YY_BUF_MAX -in "flex.skel"). -.LP -.I old-style lex command ignored - -the flex input contains a lex command (e.g., "%n 1000") which -is being ignored. -.SH BUGS -.LP -Some trailing context -patterns cannot be properly matched and generate -warning messages ("Dangerous trailing context"). These are -patterns where the ending of the -first part of the rule matches the beginning of the second -part, such as "zx*/xy*", where the 'x*' matches the 'x' at -the beginning of the trailing context. (Lex doesn't get these -patterns right either.) -If desperate, you can use -.B yyless() -to effect arbitrary trailing context. -.LP -.I variable -trailing context (where both the leading and trailing parts do not have -a fixed length) entails the same performance loss as -.I REJECT -(i.e., substantial). -.LP -For some trailing context rules, parts which are actually fixed-length are -not recognized as such, leading to the abovementioned performance loss. -In particular, parts using '|' or {n} are always considered variable-length. -.LP -Use of unput() or input() trashes the current yytext and yyleng. -.LP -Use of unput() to push back more text than was matched can -result in the pushed-back text matching a beginning-of-line ('^') -rule even though it didn't come at the beginning of the line. -.LP -yytext and yyleng cannot be modified within a flex action. -.LP -Nulls are not allowed in flex inputs or in the inputs to -scanners generated by flex. Their presence generates fatal -errors. -.LP -Flex does not generate correct #line directives for code internal -to the scanner; thus, bugs in -.I -flex.skel -yield bogus line numbers. -.LP -Pushing back definitions enclosed in ()'s can result in nasty, -difficult-to-understand problems like: -.nf - - {DIG} [0-9] /* a digit */ - -.fi -In which the pushed-back text is "([0-9] /* a digit */)". -.LP -Due to both buffering of input and read-ahead, you cannot intermix -calls to stdio routines, such as, for example, -.B getchar() -with flex rules and expect it to work. Call -.B input() -instead. -.LP -The total table entries listed by the -.B -v -flag excludes the number of table entries needed to determine -what rule has been matched. The number of entries is equal -to the number of DFA states if the scanner does not use REJECT, -and somewhat greater than the number of states if it does. -.LP -To be consistent with ANSI C, the escape sequence \\xhh should -be recognized for hexadecimal escape sequences, such as '\\x41' for 'A'. -.LP -It would be useful if flex wrote to lex.yy.c a summary of the flags used in -its generation (such as which table compression options). -.LP -The scanner run-time speeds still have not been optimized as much -as they deserve. Van Jacobson's work shows that the can go -faster still. -.LP -The utility needs more complete documentation. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fmt.1 b/static/v10/man1/fmt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 470951f5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/fmt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -.TH FMT 1 -.CT 1 writing_other -.SH NAME -fmt \(mi ultra-simple text formatter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fmt -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fmt -copies the given -.I files -(standard input by default) -to its standard output, filling and indenting lines. -The options are -.TP -.BI -l " n -Output line length is -.I n, -including indent, (default 70). -.TP -.BI -i " n -Indent -.I n -spaces (default 0). -.PP -Empty lines and initial white space in input lines are preserved. -Empty lines are inserted between input files. -.PP -.I Fmt -is idempotent: it leaves already formatted text unchanged. -.SH BUGS -Words longer than 256 characters are split. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/form.1 b/static/v10/man1/form.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4087d531..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/form.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'FORM (I)'6/15/72'FORM (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME -.br -form -- form letter generator -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS -.br -form____ proto arg918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION -.br -form____ generates a form letter from a prototype -letter, an associative memory, arguments and in a special case, the -current date. -.sp -If form____ is invoked with the proto_____ argument 'x', the associative memory is -searched for an entry with name 'x' and the contents filed under that name are -used as the prototype. If the search fails, the message "[x]:" is typed on -the console and whatever text is typed in from the console, terminated by -two new lines, is used as the prototype. -.sp -If the prototype argument is missing, '{letter}' is assumed. -.sp -Basically, form____ is a copy process from the prototype to the output file. -If an element of the form [n] (where n_ is a digit from 1 to 9) is encountered, -the n_th argument arg___9n8 is inserted in its place, and that argument is then -rescanned. If [0] is encountered, the current date is inserted. If -the desired argument has not been given, a message of the form "[n]:" is -typed. The response typed in then is used for that argument. -.sp -If an element of the form [name] or {name} is encountered, the name is looked up in the -associative memory. If it is found, the contents of the memory under this -name replaces the original element (again rescanned). If -the name is not found, a message of the form "[name]:" is typed. -The response typed in is used for that element. The response is -entered in the memory under the name if the name is enclosed in []. -The response is not entered in the memory but is remembered for the -duration of the letter if the name is enclosed in {}. -.sp -In both of the above cases, the response is typed in by entering -arbitrary text terminated by two new lines. Only the first of the -two new lines is passed with the text. -.sp -If one of the special characters [{]}\\ is preceded by -a \\, it loses its special character. -.sp -If a file named "forma" already exists in the users directory, "formb" is -used as the output file and so forth to "formz". -.sp -The file "form.m" is created if none exists. Because form.m is -operated on by the disc allocater, it should only be changed by using -fed___, the form letter editor, or form____. -.sp -.fi -.ti 0 -FILES -.br -form.m associative memory -.br -form? output file (read only) -.sp -.fi -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -.br -fed(I), type(I), roff(I) -.sp -.fi -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -.br -"cannot open output file" "cannot open memory file" -when the appropriate files cannot be located or created. -.sp -.fi -.ti 0 -BUGS -.br -An unbalanced ] or } acts as an end of file but -may add a few strange entries to the associative memory. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/forml.1 b/static/v10/man1/forml.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 092553b3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/forml.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'FORML (I)'10/24/72'FORML (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME forml -- form letter generator processor -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS forml_____ [ name ] ... -.sp -.ti0 -DESCRIPTION A streamlined program for typing form letters. -The names pick out -prestored form letters prepared according to the conventions -of -.ul -form -and -.ul -roff. -The program prompts to get each blank -filled in. -When all the forms are completed, it prompts "Set paper." -It waits for a newline before printing each letter. - -If more than one name is given, the name of -each letter is announced -before the prompts for it begin. -If no names are given, the program asks "Which letter?" before -each. -Respond with the name and a newline, or newline only when done. -.sp -On a 2741 type terminal, the program assumes the -letter is to be typed with a correspondence ball, -and also prompts "Change ball." -Replace the ball at the end. -.sp -.ti0 -FILES form.m (memory), -.br -forma, formb, ... temporaries -.sp -.ti0 -SEE ALSO form(I), fed(I), roff(I) -.br -.sp -.ti0 -DIAGNOSTICS "Try again"--can't get a process -.br -.sp -.ti0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 b/static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8e89e8c7..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he '10/24/72''FSTRIP (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME fstrip -- remove Fortran internal symbols -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS fstrip______ name\d1\u ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION Fortran output -files occasionally refer to so -many symbols that the debugger db__ (I) balks. -.ul -fstrip -massages a Fortran output file to remove the symbols -which are internal to Fortran. - -From the symbol tables contained in the files -given as arguments, -fstrip______ removes the symbols of the form "l#", -where "l" is one of "t", "c", or "d", and "#" is -a decimal number. - -The output of fstrip______ is unacceptable to the loader -under any circumstances. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO fc(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS yes, hopefully self-explanatory -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ftp.1 b/static/v10/man1/ftp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index be3ed7a9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ftp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,963 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1985 The Regents of the University of California. -.\" All rights reserved. -.\" -.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted -.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are -.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, -.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such -.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed -.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the -.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived -.\" from this software without specific prior written permission. -.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR -.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED -.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -.\" -.\" @(#)ftp.1 6.12.1.1 (Berkeley) 3/2/89 -.\" -.TH FTP 1 "February 23, 1989" -.UC 5 -.SH NAME -ftp \- internet file transfer program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ftp -[ -.I option ... -] [ -.B host -] -.PP -.B pftp -[ -.I option ... -] [ -.B host -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ftp -transfers files to and from a remote network -.I host -computer via the Internet file transfer protocol. -To reach outside Internet sites from -v10 machines, prefix the Internet host name with -.LR inet! ; -from System V machines, use -.I pftp. -After attempting to connect to the remote host, if any, -.I ftp -enters its command interpreter and prompts for instructions. -The following commands are recognized: -.TP -\f5\&!\fP [ \fIcommand\fP [ \fIargs\fP ] ] -Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine. -If there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command to execute -directly, with the rest of the arguments as its arguments. -.TP -\f5\&$\fP \fImacro-name\fP [ \fIargs\fP ] -Execute the macro \fImacro-name\fP that was defined with the -\f5macdef\fP command. -Arguments are passed to the macro unglobbed. -.TP -\f5account\fP [ \fIpasswd\fP ] -Supply a supplemental password required by a remote system for access -to resources once a login has been successfully completed. -If no argument is included, the user will be prompted for an account -password in a non-echoing input mode. -.TP -\f5append\fP \fIlocal-file\fP [ \fIremote-file\fP ] -Append a local file to a file on the remote machine. If a -.I remote-file -is not specified, the local file name is used -subject to altering -.I ntrans -or -.I nmap . -File transfer uses the current settings for -.IR type , -.IR format , -.IR mode , -and -.IR structure . -.TP -.B ascii -Set the file transfer -.I type -to network ASCII. This is the default type. -.TP -.B bell -Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer -command is completed. -.TP -.B binary -Set the file transfer -.I type -to support binary image transfer. -.TP -.B bye -Terminate the session. -An end of file will also terminate the session. -.TP -.B case -Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during -.B mget -commands. -When -.B case -is on (default is off), remote computer file names with all letters in -upper case are written in the local directory with the letters mapped -to lower case. -.TP -.BI cd " remote-directory" -Change the working directory on the remote machine -to -.IR remote-directory . -.TP -.B cdup -Change the remote machine working directory to the parent of the -current remote machine working directory. -.TP -.B close -Terminate the session. -Any defined macros are erased. -.TP -.B cr -Toggle carriage return stripping during -ascii type file retrieval. -Records are denoted by a carriage return/linefeed sequence -during ascii type file transfer. -When -.B cr -is on (the default), carriage returns are stripped from this -sequence to conform with the UNIX single linefeed record -delimiter. -Records on non-UNIX remote systems may contain single linefeeds; -when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds may be -distinguished from a record delimiter only when -.B cr -is off. -.TP -.BI delete " remote-file" -Delete the file -.I remote-file -on the remote machine. -.TP -\f5debug\fP [ \fIdebug-level\fP ] -Toggle debugging or set the debugging level. -When debugging is on, -.I ftp -prints each command sent to the remote machine, preceded -by the string -.LR --> . -.TP -\f5dir\fP [ \fIremote-directory\fP ] [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] -Place in -.IR local-file -a listing of the contents of -.IR remote-directory . -If -.I local-file -is -.LR - -or absent send output to the terminal. -If -.L prompt -is on, -.I ftp -asks for -.I local-file -to be confirmed. -If no -.IR remote-directory -is specified, the current working -directory on the remote machine is used. -.TP -.B disconnect -A synonym for -.BR close . -.TP -.BI form " format" -Set the file transfer -.I form -to -.IR format . -The default format is -.LR file . -.TP -\f5get\fP \fIremote-file\fP [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] -Retrieve the -.I remote-file -and store it on the local machine. If the local -file name is not specified, it is given the same -name it has on the remote machine, subject to -altering by -.IR case , -.IR ntrans , -and -.I nmap -settings. -The current settings for -.IR type , -.IR form , -.IR mode , -and -.I structure -are used while transferring the file. -.TP -.B glob -Toggle filename expansion for -.BR mdelete , -.BR mget , -and -.BR mput . -If globbing is turned off with -.BR glob , -the file name arguments -are taken literally and not expanded. -Globbing for -.B mput -is done as in -.IR csh (1). -For -.B mdelete -and -.BR mget , -ach remote file name is expanded -separately on the remote machine and the lists are not merged. -Expansion of a directory may be -different from expansion of the name of an ordinary file, -depending on the foreign operating system and FTP server. -It may be previewed by doing `\f5mls\fP\ \fIremote-files\fP\ \f5-\fP'. -Note: -.B mget and -.B mput -are not meant to transfer -entire directory subtrees of files. That can be done by -transferring a -.IR tar (1) -archive of the subtree (in binary mode). -.TP -.B hash -Toggle hash-sign -.RB ( # ) -printing for each data block -transferred. The size of a data block is 1024 bytes. -.TP -\f5help\fP [ \fIcommand\fP ] -Print an informative message about the meaning of -.IR command . -If no argument is given, -.I ftp -prints a list of the known commands. -.TP -\f5lcd\fP [ \fIdirectory\fP ] -Change the working directory on the local machine. If -no -.I directory -is specified, the user's home directory is used. -.TP -\f5ls\fP [ \fIremote-directory\fP ] [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] -List in -.I local-file -the contents of a -directory on the remote machine. -If \fIlocal-file\fR is -.L - -or absent, -the output is sent to the terminal. -The form of the list depends on the remote -server; most UNIX systems will produce -output from the command -.LR "ls -l" . -(See also -.BR nlist .) -If -.I remote-directory -is not specified, the current working directory is used. -.TP -\f5macdef\fP \fImacro-name\fP -Define a macro. -Subsequent lines are stored under -\fImacro-name\fP; a null line (consecutive newline characters -in a file or -carriage returns from the terminal) terminates macro input mode. -There is a limit of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all -defined macros. -Macros remain defined until a -.B close -command is executed. -The macro processor interprets -.B $ -and -.B \e -as special characters. -A -.B $ -followed by a number (or numbers) is replaced by the -corresponding argument on the macro invocation command line. -A -.B $ -followed by an -.L i -signals that macro processor that the -executing macro is to be looped. -On the first pass -.B $i -is -replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation command line, -on the second pass it is replaced by the second argument, and so on. -A -.B \e -followed by any character is replaced by that character. -Use -.B \e -to prevent special treatment of -.BR $ . -.TP -\f5mdelete\fP [ \fIremote-files\fP ] -Delete the -.I -remote-files -on the remote machine. -.TP -\f5mdir\fP \fIremote-files\fP \fIlocal-file\fP -Like -.BR dir , -except multiple remote files may be specified. -If interactive prompting is on, -.I ftp -will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the -target local file for receiving -.B mdir -output. -.TP -\f5mget\fP \fIremote-files\fP -Expand -.I remote-files -on the remote machine -and do a -.L get -for each file name thus produced. -See -.L glob -for details on the filename expansion. -Resulting file names will then be processed according to -.IR case , -.IR ntrans , -and -.I nmap -settings. -Files are transferred into the local working directory. -.TP -\f5mkdir\fP \fIdirectory-name\fP -Make a directory on the remote machine. -.TP -\f5mls\fP \fIremote-files\fP \fIlocal-file\fP -Like -.LR nlist , -except multiple remote files may be specified, -and a -.I local-file -must be specified. -If -.L prompt -is on, -.I ftp -asks to confirm the -.I local-file. -.TP -\f5mode\fP [ \fImode-name\fP ] -Set the file transfer mode to -.IR mode-name . -The default mode is -.LR stream . -.TP -\f5modtime\fP \fIfile-name\fP -Show the last modification time of the file on the remote machine. -.TP -\f5mput\fP \fIlocal-files\fP -Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as arguments -and do a -.L put -for each file in the resulting list. -See -.L glob -for details of filename expansion. -Resulting file names will then be processed according to -.I ntrans -and -.I nmap -settings. -.TP -\f5nlist\fP [ \fIremote-directory\fP ] [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] -Like -.LR ls , -giving only file names. -.TP -\f5nmap\fP [ \fIinpattern\fP \fIoutpattern\fP ] -Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism. -If no arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism is unset. -If arguments are specified, remote filenames are mapped during -.B mput -commands and -.B put -commands issued without a specified remote target filename. -If arguments are specified, local filenames are mapped during -.B mget -commands and -.B get -commands issued without a specified local target filename. -This command is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer -with different file naming conventions or practices. -The mapping follows the pattern set by -.I inpattern -and -.IR outpattern . -.I Inpattern -is a template for incoming filenames (which may have already been -processed according to the -.B ntrans -and -.B case -settings). -Variable templating is accomplished by including the sequences -.LR $1 , -.LR $2 ", ...," -.LR $9 -in -.IR inpattern . -Use -.L \e -to prevent special treatment of -.BR $ . -For example, given -.I inpattern -.B $1.$2 -and the remote file name -.LR mydata.data , -.B $1 -would have the value -.LR mydata , -and -.B $2 -would have the value -.LR data . -The -.I outpattern -determines the resulting mapped filename. -The sequences -.BR $1 , -.BR $2 ", ....," -.B $9 -are replaced by any value resulting -from the -.I inpattern -template. -The sequence -.B $0 -is replace by the original filename. -Additionally, the sequence '[\fIseq1\fP,\fIseq2\f\P]' is replaced by -.I seq1 -if -.I seq1 -is not a null string; otherwise it is replaced by -.IR seq2 . -For example, the command -.L "nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]" -would yield -the output filename -.L myfile.data -for input filenames -.L myfile.data -and -.LR myfile.data.old , -.L myfile.file -or the input filename -.LR myfile , -and -.LR myfile.myfile -for the input filename -.LR .myfile . -Spaces may be included in -.IR outpattern , -for example: -.L -nmap $1 "|sed 's/ *$//' > $1" . -.TP -\f5ntrans\fP [ \fIinchars\fP [ \fIoutchars\fP ] ] -Set or unset the filename character translation mechanism. -If no arguments are specified, the filename character -translation mechanism is unset. -If arguments are specified, characters in -remote filenames are translated during -.B mput -commands and -.B put -commands issued without a specified remote target filename. -If arguments are specified, characters in -local filenames are translated during -.B mget -commands and -.B get -commands issued without a specified local target filename. -This command is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer -with different file naming conventions or practices. -Characters in a filename matching a character in -.I inchars -are replaced with the corresponding character in -.IR outchars . -If the character's position in -.I inchars -is longer than the length of -.IR outchars , -the character is deleted from the file name. -.TP -\f5open\fP \fIhost\fP [ \fIport\fP ] -Establish a connection to the specified -.I host -FTP server. An optional port number may be supplied, -in which case, -.I ftp -will attempt to contact an FTP server at that port. -If the -.I auto-login -option is on (default), -.I ftp -will also attempt to automatically log the user in to -the FTP server (see below). -.TP -.B prompt -Toggle file-by-file prompting fo -.BR mget , -.BR mput , -and -.BR mdelete -(on by default). -.TP -\f5proxy\fP \fIftp-command\fP -Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connection. -This command allows simultaneous connection to two remote ftp -servers for transferring files between the two servers. -The first -.B proxy -command should be an -.BR open , -to establish the secondary control connection. -Enter the command -.L "proxy ?" -to see other commands executable on the -secondary connection. -The following commands behave differently when prefaced by -.BR proxy : -.B open -will not define new macros during the auto-login process, -.B close -will not erase existing macro definitions, -.B get -and -.B mget -transfer files from the host on the primary control connection -to the host on the secondary control connection, and -.BR put , -.BR mput , -and -.B append -transfer files from the host on the secondary control connection -to the host on the primary control connection. -.TP -\f5put\fP \fIlocal-file\fP [ \fIremote-file\fP ] -Store a local file on the remote machine. If -.I remote-file -is not specified, the local file name is used -after processing according to any -.I ntrans -or -.I nmap -settings. File transfer uses the -current settings for -.IR type , -.IR format , -.IR mode , -and -.IR structure . -.TP -.B pwd -Print the name of the current working directory on the remote -machine. -.TP -.B quit -A synonym for -.BR bye . -.TP -.BI quote " arg1 arg2 ..." -The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote FTP -server. -.TP -\f5recv\fP \fIremote-file\fP [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] -A synonym for get. -.TP -\f5remotehelp\fP [ \fIcommand-name\fP ] -Request help from the remote FTP server. If a -.I command-name -is specified it is supplied to the server as well. -.TP -\f5remotestatus\fP [ \fIfile-name\fP ] -With no arguments, show status of remote machine. -If -.I file-name -is specified, show status of -.I file-name -on the remote machine. -.TP -\f5rename\fP [ \fIfrom\fP ] [ \fIto\fP ] -Rename the file -.I from -on the remote machine, to the file -.IR to . -.TP -.B reset -Clear reply queue. -This command re-synchronizes command/reply sequencing with the remote -ftp server. -Resynchronization may be necessary following a violation of the ftp protocol -by the remote server. -.TP -.BI rmdir " directory-name" -Delete a directory on the remote machine. -.TP -.B runique -Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique filenames. -If the target of a -.B get -or -.B mget -command already exists locally, a -.L .1 -is appended to the name. -If that name, too, matches another existing file, -a -.L .2 -is appended and so on until -.LR .99 , -when the transfer is aborted. -Note that -.B runique -will not affect local files generated from a shell command -(see below). -The default value is off. -.TP -\f5send\fP \fIlocal-file\fP [ \fIremote-file\fP ] -A synonym for put. -.TP -.B sendport -Toggle the use of PORT commands. By default, -.I ftp -will attempt to use a PORT command when establishing -a connection for each data transfer. -The use of PORT commands can prevent delays -when performing multiple file transfers. If the PORT -command fails, -.I ftp -will use the default data port. When the use of PORT -commands is disabled, no attempt will be made to use -PORT commands for each data transfer. This is useful -for certain FTP implementations which ignore PORT -commands but incorrectly indicate they've been accepted. -.TP -.BI size " file-name" -Return size of -.I file-name -on the remote machine. -.TP -.B status -Show the current status of -.IR ftp . -.TP -\f5struct\fP [ \fIstruct-name\fP ] -Set the file transfer -.I structure -to -.IR struct-name . -By default -.L stream -structure is used. -.TP -.B sunique -Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique file names. -Default value is off. -.TP -.B system -Show the type of operating system running on the remote machine. -.TP -.B tenex -Set the file transfer type to that needed to -talk to TENEX machines. -.TP -.B trace -Toggle packet tracing. -.TP -\f5type\fP [ \fItype-name\fP ] -Set the file transfer -.I type -to -.IR type-name . -If no type is specified, the current type -is printed. The default type is network ASCII. -.TP -\f5user\fP \fIuser-name\fP [ \fIpassword\fP ] [ \fIaccount\fP ] -Identify yourself to the remote FTP server. If the -password is not specified and the server requires it, -.I ftp -will prompt the user for it (after disabling local echo). -If an account field is not specified, and the FTP server -requires it, the user will be prompted for it. -If an account field is specified, an account command will -be relayed to the remote server after the login sequence -is completed if the remote server did not require it -for logging in. -Unless -.I ftp -is invoked with -.L auto-login -disabled, this -process is done automatically on initial connection to -the FTP server. -.TP -.B verbose -Toggle verbose mode. In verbose mode, all responses from -the FTP server are displayed to the user. In addition, -if verbose is on, when a file transfer completes, statistics -regarding the efficiency of the transfer are reported. By default, -verbose is on. -.TP -\f5?\fP [ \fIcommand\fP ] -A synonym for help. -.PP -Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted with -quote -.B \&" marks. -.SS "Aborting a file transfer -The signal processing in the research version of -.I ftp -has been stripped out. Aborts will generally close the connection. -.SS "File naming conventions -Files specified as arguments to -.I ftp -commands are processed according to the following rules. -.TP -1) -If the file name -.L - -is specified, -.B stdin -(for reading) or -.B stdout -(for writing) is used. -.TP -2) -If the first character of the file name is -.LR | , -the remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell command. -.I Ftp -reads the standard output of the command, or writes the -standard input. -If the shell command includes spaces, it -must be quoted with double quotes. -A useful example of this mechanism is: -.LR |more . -.TP -3) -Failing the above checks, if glob is enabled, -local file names are expanded -according to the rules used in -.IR csh (1); -c.f. the -.I glob -command. -If the -.I ftp -command expects a single local file (e.g. -.BR put ), -only the first filename generated by the globbing operation is used. -.TP -4) -For -.B mget -commands and -.B get -commands with unspecified local file names, the local filename is -the remote filename, subject to altering by -.BR case , -.BR ntrans , -or -.B nmap -setting. -The resulting filename may then be altered if -.B runique -is on. -.TP -5) -For -.B mput -commands and -.B put -commands with unspecified remote file names, the remote filename is -the local filename, subject to altering by -.B ntrans -or -.B nmap -setting. -The resulting filename may then be altered by the remote server if -.B sunique -is on. -.SS "File transfer parameters -The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may -affect a file transfer. The -.I type -may be one of -.LR ascii , -.LR image -(binary), -.LR ebcdic , -and -.L local byte size -(for PDP-10's -and PDP-20's mostly). -.I Ftp -supports the ascii and image types of file transfer, -plus local byte size 8 for -.B tenex -mode transfers. -.PP -.I Ftp -supports only the default values for the remaining -file transfer parameters: -.IR mode , -.IR form , -and -.IR struct . -.SS "Options -Options may be specified at the command line, or to the -command interpreter. -.TP -.B \-v -Verbose. -Show all responses from the remote server, as well -as report on data transfer statistics. -.TP -.B \-n -Do not attempt -.L auto-login -upon initial connection. -If auto-login is enabled, -.I ftp -will check the -.F .netrc -(see below) file in the user's home directory for an entry describing -an account on the remote machine. If no entry exists, -.I ftp -will prompt for the remote machine login name (default is the user -identity on the local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password -and an account with which to login. -.TP -.B \-i -Do not prompt during -multiple file transfers. -.TP -.B \-d -Enable debugging. -.TP -.B \-g -Disables file name globbing. -.SS "The .netrc file -The -.F .netrc -file contains login and initialization information -used by the auto-login process. -It resides in the user's home directory. -The following tokens are recognized; they may be separated by spaces, -tabs, or new-lines: -.TP -\f5machine\fP \fIname\fP -Identify a remote machine name. -The auto-login process searches -.F .netrc -for a -.B machine -token that matches the remote machine specified on the -.I ftp -command line or as an -.B open -command argument. -Once a match is made, subsequent tokens are processed, -until end of file is reached or another -.B machine -or a -.B default -token is encountered. -.TP -.B default -This is the same as -.BI machine " name -except that -.B default -matches any name. -There can be only one -.B default -token, and it must be after all -.B machine -tokens. -This is normally used as: -.RS -.IP -.B -default login anonymous password user@site -.LP -thereby giving the user automatic anonymous ftp login to -machines not specified in -.BR .netrc . -.RE -.TP -\f5login\fP \fIname\fP -Identify a user on the remote machine. -If this token is present, the auto-login process will initiate -a login using the specified name. -.TP -\f5password\fP \fIstring\fP -Supply a password. -If this token is present, the auto-login process will supply the -specified string if the remote server requires a password as part -of the login process. -If this token is present in -.F .netrc -for any user other -than -.LR anonymous , -and -.F .netrc -is readable by nonowners, -.I ftp -will abort auto-login. -.TP -\f5account\fP \fIstring\fP -Supply an additional account password. -If this token is present, auto-login supplies the -.I string -when the remote server demands an additional -account password; otherwise auto-login initiates an -ACCT command. -.TP -\f5macdef\fP \fIname\fP -Define a macro in the style of -.BR macdef . -If a macro named -.I init -is defined, it is automatically executed as the last step in -auto-login. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR ftpd (8) -.SH BUGS -Remote servers may not support all features documented here. -.br -Interrupts cause -.I ftp -to exit. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/games.1 b/static/v10/man1/games.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b50fea6f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/games.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,272 +0,0 @@ -.TH GAMES 1 -.CT 1 misc inst_info -.SH NAME -games, demo \- some playthings -.SH SYNOPSIS -.2C -.fi -.BI /usr/jerq/bin/demo -[ -.I game -] -.de xx -.ti -3n -\fB\\$1 \\$2 \\$3\fP -.br -.. -.PP -.xx Labyrinth games -.B adventure -.br -.B zork -.br -.B rogue -.br -.B wump -.PP -.xx Card games -.B fish -.br -.B canfield -.br -.B bridge -[ -.I arg ... -] -.br -.B mille -.PP -.xx Board games -.B back -.PP -.xx Word games -.B hangman -[ -.B -a -] -.br -.B word_clout -.br -.B ana -[ -.I n -] -.br -.B festoon -.I length percent -.PP -.xx System games -.B imp -.br -.B tso -.PP -.xx War games -.B mars -[ -.B -dfhmp -] -[ -.BI -cqs value -] -.I file ... -.br -.B ogre -[ -.I type -] -.br -.B warp -.PP -.xx Games of speed and dexterity -.B atc -.br -.B snake -.br -.B worm -.br -.PP -.xx Educational games -.B quiz -[ -.B \-i -.I file -] -[ -.B \-t -] -[ -.I question answer -] -.br -.B arithmetic -[ -.B +-x/ -] -[ -.I range -] -.br -.PP -.xx Creative games -.B /usr/jerq/bin/twid -.br -.B banner -.PP -.xx Sayings -.B fortune -[ -.I file -] -.br -.B doctor -.br -.B say -[ -.I N -] -.PP -.xx Coding games -.br -.B bcd -.IR text -.br -.B ppt -.br -.B morse -.br -.B /usr/bin/number -.PP -.xx Out-of-layer games -.B /usr/jerq/bin/pen -.br -.B /usr/jerq/bin/crabs -[ -.B -i -] -.B \e -.br - [ -.B -s -.I gracetime -] -[ -.B -v -.I speed -] -[ -.I n -] -.sp -.1C -.PD -.SH DESCRIPTION -Game programs exist sporadically on various machines. -Manuals for many of them may be obtained by using -.IR man (1). -For example, to see manual pages for -.I atc -and -.I twid, -type -.BR "man atc twid" . -Unless shown otherwise, games live in -.FR /usr/games , -which may be put in your shell -.B PATH -to reach them more conveniently. -Some need a cursor-addressed terminal; see the appropriate -manual pages and -.IR term (9.1). -.PP -.I Demo -and other games found in -.FR /usr/jerq/bin -need a Teletype 5620 terminal running under -.IR mux (9.1). -.I Demo -comprises many games, which are listed when it -is invoked without an argument. -Experiment with the mouse to find out they work. -Some unobvious interactions are these: -.IP -.I Swar -is for two players, one using -.L asdwx -on the keyboard, the other -.LR 12350 -on the keypad. -.br -.I Pacman -is controlled by -.L hjkl -keys as in -.IR vi (1). -.PP -Here is a list of some -.I demo -games. -.LP -.2C -.xx Watch the time -.B clock -.PP -.xx War games -.B swar -.br -.PP -.xx Games of speed and dexterity -.B gebam -.br -.B pengo -.br -.B centipede -.br -.B asteroids -.br -.B pacman -.PP -.xx Educational games -.B maxwell -.PP -.xx Out-of-layer games -.B tracks -.br -.B pogo -.br -.B magnet -.PP -.xx Animation -.B EWD -.br -.B road -.br -.B juggle -.br -.B ball -.br -.B fence -.PP -.xx Movies -.B horse -.br -.B dodec -.br -.B explode -.br -.B arno -.PP -.xx Patterns -.B bounce -.br -.B moire -.br -.B fireworks -.br -.B rose -.br -.B disc -.br -.B lunch -.1C -.SH " " - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gcc.1 b/static/v10/man1/gcc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index df8fcd52..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/gcc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,641 +0,0 @@ -bg -.\ " ====================== -.\ " This version is 1.22 -.\ " ====================== -.TH GCC 1 "17 May 1988" "Version 1.22" -.SH NAME -gcc \- GNU project C Compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gcc -[ option ] ... file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I GNU\ C\ compiler -uses a command syntax much like the Unix C compiler. The -.I gcc -program accepts options and file names as operands. Multiple -single-letter options may -.I not -be grouped: `\fB\-dr\fR' -is very different from `\fB\-d\ \-r\fR'. -When you invoke -.I GNU\ CC -\, it normally does preprocessing, compilation, -assembly and linking. File names which end in `\fB.c\fR' -are taken as C -source to be preprocessed and compiled; compiler output files plus any -input files with names ending in `\fB.s\fR' -are assembled; then the -resulting object files, plus any other input files, are linked together to -produce an executable. -Command options allow you to stop this process at an intermediate stage. -For example, the `\fB\-c\fR' -option says not to run the linker. -Then the output consists of object files output by the assembler. -Other command options are passed on to one stage. -Some options control the preprocessor and others the compiler itself. -.SH OPTIONS -Here are the options to control the overall compilation process, -including those that say whether to link, whether to assemble, and so on. -.TP -.BI \-o "\ \ file" -Place linker output in file \fIfile\fR. -This applies regardless to whatever sort of output is being produced, -whether it be an executable file, an object file, an assembler file or -preprocessed C code. -If `\fB\-o\fR' -is not specified, the default is to put an executable file -in `a.out', the object file `\fIsource\fB.c\fR' in `\fIsource\fB.o\fR', -an assembler file in `\fIsource\fB.s\fR', -and preprocessed C on standard output. -.TP -.B \-c -Compile or assemble the source files, but do not link. -Produce object files with names made by replacing `\fB\.c\fR' -or `\fB\.s\fR' -with `\fB\.o\fR' -at the end of the input file names. -Do nothing at all for object files specified as input. -.TP -.B \-S -Compile into assembler code but do not assemble. -The assembler output file name is made by replacing `\fB\.c\fR' -with `\fB\.s\fR' -at the end of the input file name. -Do nothing at all for assembler source files or object files specified -as input. -.TP -.B \-E -Run only the C preprocessor. -Preprocess all the C source files specified -and output the results to standard output. -.TP -.B \-v -Compiler driver program prints the commands it executes as it runs -the preprocessor, compiler proper, assembler and linker. -Some of these are directed to print their own version numbers. -.TP -.BI \-B "prefix" -Compiler driver program tries \fIprefix\fR as a prefix for each program -it tries to run. These programs are `\fBcpp\fR', `\fBcc1\fR', -`\fBas\fR' and `\fBld\fR'. -For each subprogram to be run, the compiler driver first tries -the `\fB\-B\fR' prefix, if any. -If that name is not found, or if `\fB\-B\fR' was not specified, -the driver tries two standard prefixes, -which are `\fB/usr/lib/gcc-\fR' and `\fB/usr/local/lib/gcc-\fR'. -If neither of those results in a file name that is found, -the unmodified program name is searched for using the directories -specified in your `\fBPATH\fR' environment variable. -The run-time support file `\fBgnulib\fR' is also searched for using -the `\fB\-B\fR' prefix, if needed. -If it is not found there, the two standard prefixes above are tried, -and that is all. -The file is left out of the link if it is not found by those means. -Most of the time, on most machines, you can do without it. -.PP -These options control the C preprocessor, -which is run on each C source file before actual compilation. -If you use the `\fB\-E\fR' option, nothing is done except C preprocessing. -Some of these options make sense only together with `\fB\-E\fR' -because they request preprocessor output that is not suitable -for actual compilation. -.TP -.B \-C -Tell the preprocessor not to discard comments. Used with the `\fB\-E\fR' -option. -.TP -.BI \-I "dir" -Search directory -.I dir -for include files. -.TP -.B \-I\- -Any directories specified with `\fB\-I\fR' options before the `\fB\-I\-\fR' -option are searched only for the case of `\fB#include "\fIfile\fB"\fR'; -they are not searched for `\fB#include <\fIfile\fB>\fR'. -If additional directories are specified with `\fB\-I\fR' options after -the `\fB\-I\-\fR', these directories are searched for all '\fB#include\fR' -directives. (Ordinally \fIall\fR '\fB\-I\fR' directories are used this -way.) -In addition, the `\fB\-I\-\fR' option inhibits the use of the current -directory as the first search directory for `\fB#include "\fIfile\fB"\fR'. -Therefore, the current directory is searched only if it is requested -explicitly with `\fB\-I.\fR'. -Specifying both `\fB\-I\-\fR' and `\fB\-I.\fR' allows you to control precisely -which directories are searched before the current one and which are -searched after. -.TP -.B \-nostdinc -Do not search the standard system directories for header files. -Only the directories you have specified with `\fB\-I\fR' options -(and the current directory, if appropriate) are searched. -Between `\fB\-nostdinc\fR' and `\fB\-I-\fR', you can eliminate all -directories from the search path except those you specify. -.TP -.B \-M -Tell the preprocessor to output a rule suitable for \fBmake\fR -describing the dependencies of each source file. -For each source file, the preprocessor outputs one \fBmake\fR-rule -whose target is the object file name for that source file and -whose dependencies are all the files `\fB#include\fR'd in it. -This rule may be a single line or may be continued `\fB\\\fR'-newline -if it is long.`\fB\-M\fR' implies `\fB\-E\fR'. -.TP -.B \-MM -Like `\fB\-M\fR' but the output mentions only the user-header files included -with `\fB#include "\fIfile\fB"\fR'. -System header files included with `\fB#include <\fIfile\fB>\fR' -are omitted.`\fB\-MM\fR' implies `\fB\-E\fR'. -.TP -.BI \-D "macro" -Define macro \fImacro\fR -with the empty string as its definition. -.TP -.B \-D\fImacro=defn\fR -Define macro \fImacro\fR as \fIdefn\fR. -.TP -.BI \-U "macro" -Undefine macro \fImacro\fR. -.TP -.B \-T -Support ANSI C trigraphs. -You don't want to know about this brain-damage. -The `\fB\-ansi\fR' option also has this effect. -.PP -These options control the details of C compilation itself. -.TP -.B \-ansi -Support all ANSI standard C programs. -This turns off certain features of GNU C that are incompatible with -ANSI C, such as the \fBasm\fR, \fBinline\fR and \fBtypeof\fR keywords, and -predefined macros such as \fBunix\fR and \fBvax\fR that identify -the type of system you are using. -It also enables the undesirable and rarely used ANSI trigraph feature. -The `\fB\-ansi\fR' option does not cause non-ANSI programs to be rejected -gratuitously. -For that, `\fB\-pedantic\fR' is required in addition to `\fB\-ansi\fR'. -The macro \fB__STRICT_ANSI__\fR -is predefined when the `-ansi' option is used. -Some header files may notice this macro and refrain from declaring -certain functions or defining certain macros that the ANSI standard -doesn't call for; this is to avoid interfering with any programs -that might use these names for other things. -.TP -.B \-traditional -Attempt to support some aspects of traditional C compilers. -Specifically: -.br -\(** All \fBextern\fR declarations take effect globally even if -they are written inside of a function definition. -This includes implicit declarations of functions. -.br -\(** The keywords \fBtypeof\fR, \fBinline\fR, \fBsigned\fR, \fBconst\fR -and \fBvolatile\fR are not recognized. -.br -\(** Comparisons between pointers and integers are always allowed. -.br -\(** Integer types \fBunsigned short\fR and \fBunsigned char\fR -promote to \fBunsigned int\fR. -.br -\(** In the preprocessor, comments convert to nothing at all, -rather than to a space. -This allows traditional token concatenation. -.br -\(** In the preprocessor, single and double quote characters are -ignored when scanning macro definitions, so that macro arguments -can be replaced even within a string or character constant. -Quote characters are also ignored when skipping text inside -a failing conditional directive. -.TP -.B \-pedantic -Issue all the warnings demanded by strict ANSI standard C; -reject all programs that use forbidden extensions. -Valid ANSI standard C programs should compile properly with or -without this option (though a rare few will require `\fB\-ansi\fR'. -However, without this option, certain GNU extensions and -traditional C features are supported as well. -With this option, they are rejected. -There is no reason to \fIuse\fR -this option; it exists only to satisfy pedants. -.TP -.B \-O -Optimize. Optimizing compilation takes somewhat more time, and a lot -more memory for a large function. -Without `\fB\-O\fR', the compiler's goal is to reduce the cost of -compilation and to make debugging produce the expected results. -Statements are independent: if you stop the program with a breakpoint -between statements, you can then assign a new value to any variable or -change the program counter to any other statement in the function and -get exactly the results you would expect from the source code. -Without `\fB\-O\fR', only variables declared \fBregister\fR -are allocated in registers. -The resulting compiled code is -a little worse than produced by PCC without `\fB\-O\fR'. -With `\fB\-O\fR', the compiler tries to reduce code size and execution time. -Some of the `\fB\-f\fR' options described below turn specific -kinds of optimization on or off. -.TP -.B \-g -Produce debugging information in DBX format. -Unlike most other C compilers, -GNU CC allows you to use `\fB\-g\fR' with `\fB\-O\fR'. -The shortcuts taken by optimized code may occasionally -produce surprising results: some variables you declared may not exist -at all; flow of control may briefly move where you did not expect it; -some statements may not be executed because they compute constant -results or their values were already at hand; some statements may -execute in different places because they were moved out of loops. -Nevertheless it proves possible to debug optimized output. -This makes it reasonable to use the optimizer for programs that might -have bugs. -.TP -.B \-gg -Produce debugging information in GDB(GNU Debugger)'s own format. -This requires the GNU assembler and linker -in order to work. -.TP -.B \-w -Inhibit all warning messages. -.TP -.B \-W -Print extra warning messages for these events: -.br -\(** An automatic variable is used without first being initialized. -These warnings are possible only in optimizing compilation, because -they require data flow information that is computed only when -optimizing. -They occur only for variables that are candidates for register -allocation. Therefore, they do not occur for a variable that is -declared -.B volatile, -or whose address is taken, or whose size is other than -1,2,4 or 8 bytes. Also, they do not occur for structures, -unions or arrays, even when they are in registers. -Note that there may be no warning about a variable that is used -only to compute a value that itself is never used, because such -computations may be deleted by the flow analysis pass before the -warnings are printed. -These warnings are made optional because GNU CC is not smart -enough to see all the reasons why the code might be correct -despite appearing to have an error. -.br -\(** A nonvolantile automatic variable might be changed -by a call to \fBlongjmp\fR. -These warnings as well are possible only in optimizing compilation. -The compiler sees only the calls to \fBsetjmp\fR. -It cannot know where \fBlongjmp\fR -will be called; in fact, a signal handler could call it at any point -in the code. As a result, you may get a warning even when there is -in fact no problem because \fBlongjmp\fR -cannot in fact be called at the place which would cause a problem. -.br -\(** A function can return either with or without a value. -(Falling off the end of the function body is considered returning -without a value.) -Spurious warning can occur because GNU CC does not realize that -certain functions (including \fBabort\fR -and \fBlongjmp\fR) will never return. -.TP -.B \-Wimplicit -Warn whenever a function is implicitly declared. -.TP -.B \-Wreturn-type -Warn whenever a function is defined with a return-type that -defaults to \fBint\fR. Also warn about any \fBreturn\fR -statement with no return-value in a function whose return-type -is not \fBvoid\fR. -.TP -.B \-Wcomment -Warn whenever a comment-start sequence `/*' appears in a comment. -.TP -.B \-p -Generate extra code to write profile information suitable for the -analysis program \fBprof\fR. -.TP -.B \-pg -Generate extra code to write profile information suitable for the -analysis program \fBgprof\fR. -.TP -.BI \-l "library" -Search a standard list of directories for a library named \fIlibrary\fR, -which is actually a file named `\fBlib\fIlibrary\fB.a\fR'. -The linker uses this file as if it had been specified precisely by name. -The directories searched include several standard system directories -plus any that you specify with `\fB\-L\fR'. -Normally the files found this way are library files - archive files whose -members are object files. The linker handles an archive file by through -it for members which define symbols that have so far been referenced -but not defined. But if the file that is found is an ordinary -object file, it is linked in the usual fashion. -The only difference between an `\fB\-l\fR' option and the full file name of -the file that is found is syntactic and the fact that several directories -are searched. -.TP -.BI \-L "dir" -Add directory \fIdir\fR to the list of directories to be searched -for `\fB\-l\fR'. -.TP -.B \-nostdlib -Don't use the standard system libraries and startup files when -linking. Only the files you specify (plus `\fBgnulib\fR') -will be passed to the linker. -.TP -.BI \-m "machinespec" -Machine-dependent option specifying something about the type of target machine. -These options are defined by the macro \fBTARGET_SWITCHES\fR -in the machine description. The default for the options is also -defined by that macro, which enables you to change the defaults. -.IP -These are the `\fB\-m\fR' options defined in the 68000 machine description: -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-m68020 -Generate output for a 68020 (rather than a 68000). -This is the default if you use the unmodified sources. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-m68000 -Generate output for a 68000 (rather than a 68020). -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-m68881 -Generate output containing 68881 instructions for floating point. -This is the default if you use the unmodified sources. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-msoft-float -Generate output containing library calls for floating point. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mshort -Consider type \fBint\fR to be 16 bits wide, like \fBshort int\fR. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mnobitfield -Do not use the bit-field instructions. -.B '\-m68000' -implies -.B '\-mnobitfield'. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mbitfield -Do use the bit-field instructions. -.B '\-m68020' -implies -.B '\-mbitfield'. -This is the default if you use the unmodified sources. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mrtd -Use a different function-calling convention, in which functions that -take a fixed number of arguments return with the \fBrtd\fR -instruction, which pops their arguments while returning. This saves -one instruction in the caller since there is no need to pop the -arguments there. -This calling convention is incompatible with the one normally used on -Unix, so you cannot use it if you need to call libraries compiled with -the Unix compiler. -Also, you must provide function prototypes for all functions that take -variable numbers of arguments (including \fBprintf\fR); otherwise -incorrect code will be generated for calls to those functions. -In addition, seriously incorrect code will result if you call a -function with too many arguments. (Normally, extra arguments are -harmlessly ignored.) -The \fBrtd\fR -instruction is supported by the 68010 and 68020 -processors, but not by the 68000. -.IP -These are the `\fB\-m\fR' options defined in the VAX machine description: -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-munix -Do not output certain jump instructions ( -.B aobleq -and so on) that the Unix assembler -for the VAX cannot handle across long ranges. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mgnu -Do output those jump instructions, on the assumption -that you will assemble with the GNU assembler. -.TP 5 -.BI \-f "flag" -Specify machine-independent flags. These are the flags: -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-ffloat-store -Do not store floating-point variables in registers. -This prevents undesirable excess precision on machines such as the 68000 -where the floating registers (of the 68881) keep more precision -than a \fBdouble\fR is supposed to have. -For most programs, the excess precision does only good, but a few -programs rely on the precise definition of IEEE floating point. -Use ` -.B \-ffloat-store' -for such programs. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-frno-asm -Do not recognize \fBasm\fR, \fBinline\fR or \fBtypeof\fR -as a keyword. These words may then be used as identifiers. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fno-defer-pop -Always pop the arguments to each function call as soon as that -function returns. -Normally the compiler (when optimizing) lets arguments accumulate on the -stack for several function calls and pops them all at once. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fcombine-regs -Allow the combine pass to combine an instruction that copies one -register into another. -This might or might not produce better code when used in addition to ` -.B \-O'. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fforce-mem -Force memory operands to be copied into registers before doing -arithmetic on them. -This may produce better code by making all -memory references potential common subexpressions. -When they are not common subexpressions, -instruction combination should eliminate the separate register-load. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fforce-addr -Force memory address constants to be copied into registers before -doing arithmetic on them. -This may produce better code just as ` -.B \-fforce-mem' -may. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fomit-frame-pointer -Don't keep the frame pointer in a register for functions that don't -need one. This avoids the instructions to save, set up and restore -frame pointers; it also makes an extra register available in many -functions. \fBIt\ also\ makes\ debugging\ impossible.\fR -On some machines, such as the VAX, this flag has no effect, -because the standard calling sequence automatically handles -the frame pointer and nothing is saved by pretending it doesn't exist. -The machine-description macro \fBFRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED\fR -controls whether a target machine supports this flag. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-finline-functions -Integrate all simple functions into their callers. -The compiler heuristically decides which functions are simple enough -to be worth integrating in this way. -If all calls to a given function are integrated, and the function -is declared \fBstatic\fR, -then the function is normally not output as assembler code in its -own right. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fkeep-inline-functions -Even if all calls to a given function are integrated, and the -function is declared \fBstatic\fR, -nevertheless output a separate run-time callable version of -the function. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fwritable-strings -Store string constants in the writable data segment and don't uniquize them. -This is for compatibility with old programs which assume -they can write into string constants. Writing into string constants -is a very bad idea; ``constants'' should be constant. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fno-function-cse -Do not put function addresses in registers; make each instruction that -calls a constant function contain the function's address explicitly. -This option results in less efficient code, but some strange hacks -that alter the assembler output may be confused by the optimizations -performed when this option is not used. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fvolatile -Consider all memory references through pointers to be volatile. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-funsigned-char -Let the type \fBchar\f be the unsigned, like \fBunsigned char\fR. -Each kind of machine has a default for what \fBchar\fR -should be. It is either like \fBunsigned char\fR -by default of like \fBsigned char\fR -by default. (Actually, at present, the default is always signed.) -The type \fBchar\fR -is always a distinct type from either \fBsigned char\fR -or \fBunsigned char\fR, -even though its behavior is always just like one of those two. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fsigned-char -Let the type \fBchar\fR be the same as \fBsigned char\fR. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-ffixed-\fIreg\fR -Treat the register named \fIreg\fR as a fixed register; generated -code should never refer to it (except perhaps as a stack pointer, -frame pointer or in some other fixed role). \fIreg\fR -must be the name of a register. -The register names accepted are machine-specific and are defined in -the \fBREGISTER_NAMES\fR -macro in the machine description macro file. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fcall-used-\fIreg\fR -Treat the register named \fIreg\fR -as an allocatable register that is clobberred by function calls. -It may be allocated for temporaries or variables -that do not live across a call. -Functions compiled this way will not save and restore the -register \fIreg\fR. -Use of this flag for a register that has a fixed pervasive role -in the machine's execution model, such as the stack pointer or -frame pointer, will produce disastrous results. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fcall-saved-\fIreg\fR -Treat the register named \fIreg\fR -as an allocatable register saved by functions. -It may be allocated even for temporaries or -variables that live across a call. Functions compiled this way -will save and restore the register \fIreg\fR if they use it. -Use of this flag for a register that has a fixed pervasive role -in the machine's execution model, such as the stack pointer or -frame pointer, will produce disastrous results. -A different sort of disaster will result from the use of this -flag for a register in which function values are may be returned. -.TP -.BI \-d "letters" -Says to make debugging dumps at times specified by \fIletters\fR. -Here are the possible letters: -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ r -Dump after RTL generation. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ j -Dump after first jump optimization. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ J -Dump after last jump optimization. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ s -Dump after CSE (including the jump optimization that sometimes -follows CSE). -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ L -Dump after loop optimization. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ f -Dump after flow analysis. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ c -Dump after instruction combination. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ l -Dump after local register allocation. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ g -Dump after global register allocation. -.TP 10 -.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ m -Print statistics on memory usage, at the end of the run. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'/usr/local/lib/gcc-gnulib 'u -file.c input file -.br -file.o object file -.br -a.out loaded output -.br -/tmp/cc? temporary -.br -/usr/local/lib/gcc-cpp preprocessor -.br -/usr/local/lib/gcc-cc1 compiler -.br -/usr/local/lib/gcc-gnulib library need by GCC on some machines -.br -/lib/crt0.o runtime startoff -.br -/lib/libc.a standard library, see -.IR intro (3) -.br -/usr/include standard directory for `#include' files -.br -.SH "SEE ALSO" -B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, -.I The C Programming Language, -Prentice-Hall, -1978 -.br -B. W. Kernighan, -.I -Programming in C -.br -D. M. Ritchie, -.I -C Reference Manual -.br -adb(1), ld(1), dbx(1), as(1) -.SH BUGS -Bugs should be reported to bug-gcc@prep.ai.mit.edu. Bugs tend actually to be -fixed if they can be isolated, so it is in your interest to report them -in such a way that they can be easily reproduced according to get newer version. -.SH COPYING -Copyright (C) 1988 Richard M. Stallman. -.br -Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of -this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice -are preserved on all copies. -.br -Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this -manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the -section entitled "GNU CC General Public License" is included exactly as -in the original, and provided that the entire resulting derived work is -distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. -.br -Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual -into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, -except that the section entitled "GNU CC General Public License" may be -included in a translation approved by the author instead of in the original -English. -.SH AUTHORS -Richard M. Stallman diff --git a/static/v10/man1/getlab.1 b/static/v10/man1/getlab.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a740e23d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/getlab.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -.TH GETLAB 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -getlab \- print security labels of files and processes -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B getlab -[ -.B -d -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -If there is a -.I file -argument, -.I getlab -prints, in the style of -.IR labtoa (3), -the security labels of the named files. -Otherwise, -.I getlab -prints the security label of the process and the process ceiling, -The option is -.TP -.B -d -Also print labels of all open file descriptors. -.PP -If a (character special) -.I file -can be opened, and the labels of the file and the file descriptor -differ, both are printed. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.B getlab /dev/stdin -Print the labels (file system entry and file -descriptor) of the standard input. -.TP -.B drop getlab -d -Print the process label, -preventing the open-file check and the ceiling-label -check (see -.IR getplab (2)) -from raising the -process label. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR stat (1), -.IR getflab (2), -.IR getplab (2) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/getopt.1 b/static/v10/man1/getopt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ed35b03f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/getopt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ -.if t .ds ' \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\'\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ -.if n .ds ' ' -.if t .ds ` \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\`\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ -.if n .ds ` ` -.TH GETOPT 1 -.SH NAME -getopt \- parse command options -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B set \-\- \*`getopt optstring $\(**\*` -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Getopt\^ -is used to break up options in command lines for easy parsing by shell -procedures, and to check for legal options. -.I Optstring\^ -is a string of recognized option letters (see getopt(3C)); -if a letter is followed by a colon, the option -is expected to have an argument which may or -may not be separated from it by white space. -The special option \fB\-\-\fP is used to delimit the end of the -options. -.I Getopt\^ -will place \fB\-\-\fP in the arguments at the end -of the options, or recognize it if used explicitly. -The shell arguments ($1 $2 . . .) are reset so that each option -is preceded by a \fB\-\fP and in its own shell argument; each option -argument is also in its own shell argument. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Getopt\^ -prints an error message on -the standard error -when it encounters an option letter not included in -.IR optstring . -.SH EXAMPLES -The following code fragment shows how one might process the arguments -for a command that can take the options -.B a -and -.BR b , -and the option -.BR o , -which requires an argument. -.PP -.RS -.nf -.ss 18 -set \-\- \*`getopt abo: $\(**\*` -if [ $? != 0 ] -then - echo $USAGE - exit 2 -fi -for i in $\(** -do - case $i in - \-a \(bv \-b) FLAG=$i; shift;; - \-o) OARG=$2; shift; shift;; - \-\-) shift; break;; - esac -done -.fi -.ss 12 -.RE -.PP -This code will accept any of the following as equivalent: -.PP -.RS -.nf -.ss 18 -cmd \-aoarg file file -cmd \-a \-o arg file file -cmd \-oarg \-a file file -cmd \-a \-oarg \-\- file file -.fi -.ss 12 -.RE -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR sh (1), -.IR getopt (3C). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gets.1 b/static/v10/man1/gets.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 66fddb86..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/gets.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -.TH GETS 1 deprecated -.UC 4 -.SH NAME -gets \- get a string from standard input -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gets -[ default ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B N.B.: -This command was introduced for use in \fI.login\fR scripts when the facilities -of the -.IR tset (1) -command were not totally adequate in setting the terminal type. -This is no longer true, and -.I gets -should no longer be needed. -To boot, a construct ``$<'' is available in -.IR csh (1) -now which has the functionality of -.IR gets: -.IP -\fBset a=$<\fR -.br -\fBif ($a == '') set a=default -.LP -replaces -.IP -\fBset a=`gets default`\fR -.LP -Users of -.IR sh (1) -should use its -.I read -command rather than -.I gets. -.PP -.I Gets -can be used with -.IR csh (1) -to read a string from the standard input. -If a -.I default -is given it is used if just return is typed, or if an error occurs. -The resultant string (either the default or as read from the standard -input is written to the standard output. -If no -.I default -is given and an error occurs, -.I gets -exits with exit status 1. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -csh (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Gets -is obsolete. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/getuid.1 b/static/v10/man1/getuid.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b04e2e6b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/getuid.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -.TH GETUID 1 -.CT 1 proc_man secur -.SH NAME -getuid, id \(mi get user identity -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B getuid -[ -.B - -] -[ -.I arguments -] -.PP -.B id -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Getuid -prints on its standard output information about its invoker, -based on the effective user id, as presented in the password file. -With no arguments, -.I getuid -prints the login id of its invoker. -Arguments select which information to print: -.IP -.TF passwd -.TP -.B user -login id -.TP -.B group -group id -.TP -.B passwd -encrypted password -.TP -.B uid -numerical user id -.TP -.B gid -numerical group id -.TP -.B acct -comp center account number -.TP -.B bin -comp center output bin -.TP -.B home -home directory -.TP -.B shell -default shell -.PD -.PP -If the optional -.B - -or more than one argument is present, -the information is displayed in the form -.IP -user=name -.LP -as suitable for setting environment variables in the shell. -.PP -.I Id -prints the effective userid and groupid -and the login name. -The userid and groupid are printed numerically and, if -possible, textually. -.SH FILES -.TP -.F /etc/passwd -.TP -.F /etc/group -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR who (1), -.IR getuid (2), -.IR passwd (5), -.IR newgrp (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Getuid -reports the default group for the user, -not the current effective group id. -.br -The login id reported is the first one in the password file with -the correct numerical user id, not necessarily the login -for the current session. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/goto.1 b/static/v10/man1/goto.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 64feea78..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/goto.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'GOTO (I)'3/15/72'GOTO (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME goto -- command transfer -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS goto____ label -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION goto____ -is only allowed when the Shell -is taking commands from a file. -The file is searched (from the beginning) -for a line beginning with ":" followed by one -or more spaces followed by -the label_____. -If such a line is found, the goto____ command returns. -Since the read pointer in the command file points to the -line after the label, -the effect is to cause the Shell to transfer to the -labelled line. - -":" is a do-nothing -command that only serves to place a label. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO sh(I), :(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "goto error", if -the input file is a typewriter; "label not found". -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/grabit.1 b/static/v10/man1/grabit.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 04b4845f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/grabit.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH GRABIT 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B grabit -\- recover the text representation of PostScript objects -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBgrabit\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" object -\&... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Grabit -builds a PostScript program that generates a text representation -of one or more PostScript -.IR object s. -The program is written on the standard output. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-d -Do not automatically dump the contents of unrecognized dictionary -objects found in PostScript arrays. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -into the PostScript program. -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/grabit.ps . -.PP -When the program built by -.B grabit -is sent to a PostScript printer the text representation of each -.I object -is normally returned to the host computer over the printer's serial port. -Use -.BR hardcopy (1) -if you do not have access to the port. -.PP -Each argument should be a PostScript -.I object -or commands that generate a PostScript -.IR object . -The program built by -.B grabit -produces results that are often close to legitimate PostScript that -can be successfully sent through an interpreter. -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -If you can read and write -.MW /dev/tty00 -and there is a PostScript printer on -the other end, then -recover the readable portions of the -.MW userdict -and -.MW statusdict -dictionaries: -.EX -grabit userdict statusdict | postio -l/dev/tty00 -t -.EE -Otherwise get a printout of the dictionaries: -.EX -grabit userdict statusdict | hardcopy | lp ... -.EE -Arguments should be PostScript code that leaves an object on the stack. -Dump the contents of Adobe's -.MW internaldict -dictionary: -.EX -grabit "1183615869 internaldict" | postio -l/dev/tty00 -t -.EE -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/grabit.ps -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR hardcopy (1), -.BR postio (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gram.1 b/static/v10/man1/gram.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 627301c3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/gram.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH GRAM (1) -.SH NAME -gram \- find split infinitives and incorrect indefinite articles -.br -splitrules \- print information about split infinitives -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gram -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -[file ...] -.PP -.B splitrules -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Gram -uses the -.IR parts (1) -(part of speech assignment) program -to look for infinitives that are split by one or more adverbs. -It also checks for incorrect indefinite articles. -.PP -Grammatical information about split infinitives -can be obtained by typing: -.BR splitrules . -.PP -Two options, which apply to both programs, -give information about the programs: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.PP -.I Gram -is one of the programs run under the -.IR proofr (1) -and -.IR wwb (1) -commands. -.SH FILES -.TP 21 -/tmp/$$ -temporary files -.SH SEE ALSO -proofr(1), -wwb(1), -deroff(1), -parts(1). -.SH BUGS -.PP -Because -.I parts -is not always correct in its assignments, -.I gram -also makes errors. -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/grap.1 b/static/v10/man1/grap.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b380401e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/grap.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,400 +0,0 @@ -.TH GRAP 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff graphics -.SH NAME -grap \(mi pic preprocessor for drawing graphs -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B grap -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Grap -is a -.IR pic (1) -preprocessor for drawing graphs on a typesetter. -Graphs are surrounded by the -.I troff -`commands' -.B \&.G1 -and -.BR \&.G2 . -Data that is enclosed is scaled and plotted, -with tick marks supplied automatically. -Commands exist to modify the frame, -add labels, override the default ticks, -change the plotting style, -define coordinate ranges and transformations, -and include data from files. -In addition, -.I grap -provides the same loops, conditionals and macro processing that -.I pic -does. -.PP -.BI frame -.B ht -.I e -.B wid -.I e -.B top -.B dotted -.I \&...: -Set the frame around the graph to specified -.B ht -and -.BR wid ; -default is 2 by 3 (inches). -The default mode applies to all four sides; -.BR top , -.BR bot , -.BR left , -or -.B right -can be set to -.BR dotted , -.BR dashed , -.BR invis , -or -.BR solid -independently. -.PP -.B label -.I side -.B \&"a label" -.B \&"as a set of strings" -.I adjust: -Place label on specified side; default side is bottom. -.I adjust -is -.B up -(or -.B down -.B left -.BR right ) -.I expr -to shift default position; -.B width -.I expr -sets the width explicitly. -.PP -.BI ticks -.I side -.B in -.B at -.I "optname expr, expr, ...: -Put ticks on -.I side -at -.I "expr, ..., -and label with -.I \&"expr". -If any -.I expr -is followed by "...", label tick with "...", -and turn off all automatic labels. -If "..." contains -.BR %f 's, -they will be interpreted as -.B printf -formatting instructions for the tick value. -Ticks point -.B in -or -.B out -(default out). -Tick iterator: instead of -.B at -.I \&..., -use -.BI from -.I expr -.B to -.I expr -.B by -.I "o expr -where -.I o -is optionally -.B +-*/ -for additive or multiplicative steps. -.B by -can be omitted, to give steps of size 1. -If no ticks are requested, they are supplied automatically; -suppress this with -.B ticks -.BR off . -Automatic ticks normally -leave a margin of 7% on each side; set this to anything by -.B margin -.B = -.I expr. -.PP -.B grid -.I "side linedesc" -.B at -.I "optname expr, expr, ...: -Draw grids perpendicular to -.I side -in style -.I linedesc -at -.I "expr, ....\& -Iterators and labels work as with ticks. -.PP -.B coord -.I optname -.B x -.I "min, max" -.B y -.I "min, max" -.B "log x -.BR " log y : -Set range of coords and optional log scaling on either or both. -This overrides computation of data range. -Default value of -.I optname -is current coordinate system -(each -.B coord -defines a new coordinate system). -.PP -.B plot -.I \&"str" -.B at -.IR point ; -.B -.I \&"str" -.B at -.I point: -Put -.I str -at -.I point. -Text position can be qualified with -.BR rjust , -.BR ljust , -.BR above , -.BR below -after "...". -.PP -.B line -.B from -.I point -.B to -.I "point linedesc: -Draw line from here to there. -.B arrow -works in place of -.BR line . -.PP -.B next -.I optname -.B at -.I "point linedesc: -Continue plot of data in -.I optname to -.IR point ; -default is current. -.PP -.BI draw -.I "optname linedesc...:" -Set mode for -.BR next : -use this style from now on, -and plot "..." at each point (if given). -.PP -.BI new -.I "optname linedesc ...:" -Set mode for -.BR next , -but disconnect from previous. -.PP -A list of numbers -.I "x y1 y2 y3 ... -is treated as -.B plot -.B bullet -.B at -.IR x,y1 ; -.B plot -.B bullet -.B at -.IR x,y2 ; -etc., or as -.B next -.B at -.I x,y1 -etc., if -.B draw -is specified. -Abscissae of 1,2,3,... are provided if there is only one input number per line. -.PP -A -point -.I "optname expr, expr -maps the point to the named coordinate system. -A -.I linedesc -is one of -.B dot -.B dash -.B invis -.B solid -optionally followed by an expression. -.PP -.BI define -.I name -.BI { whatever } : -Define a macro. -There are macros already defined for standard plotting -symbols like -.BR bullet , -.BR circle , -.BR star , -.BR plus , -etc., in -.FR /usr/lib/grap.defines , -which is included if it exists. -.PP -.I var -.B = -.I expr: -Evaluate an expression. -Operators are -.B= -.B + -.B - -.B * -and -.B / . -Functions are -.B log -and -.B exp -(both base 10), -.BR sin , -.BR cos , -.BR sqrt ; -.B rand -returns random number on [0,1); -.BI max( e , e ) , -.BI min( e , e ) , -.BI int( e ) . -.PP -.B print -.IR expr ; -.B print -.I \&"...:" -As a debugging aid, print -.I expr or -.I string -on the standard error. -.PP -.B copy -\f5"\fIfilename\f5"\fR -.I : -Include this file right here. -.PP -.B copy -.B thru -.I macro: -Pass rest of input (until -.BR \&.G2 ) -through -.IR macro , -treating each field (non-blank, or "...") as an argument. -.I macro -can be the name of a macro previously defined, -or the body of one in place, like -.BR "/plot $1 at $2,$3/" . -.PP -.B copy -.B thru -.I macro -.B until -.B \&" -.I string -.B \&" -: -Stop copy when input is -.I string -(left-justified). -.PP -.BI pic -.I "remainder of line: -Copy to output with leading blanks removed. -.PP -.BI graph -.I "Name pic-position: -Start a new frame, place it at specified position, -e.g., -.B graph -.B Thing2 -.BR "with .sw at Thing1.se + (0.1,0)" . -.I Name -must be capitalized to keep -.I pic -happy. -.PP -.BI \&. "anything at beginning of line: -Copied verbatim. -.PP -.B sh -.BI % anything % : -Pass everything between the -.BR % 's -to the shell; -as with macros, -.B % -may be any character and -.I anything -may include newlines. -.PP -.B # -.I anything: -A comment, which is discarded. -.PP -Order is mostly irrelevant; no category is mandatory. -Any arguments on the -.B \&.G1 -line are placed on the generated -.B \&.PS -line for -.I pic. -.SH -EXAMPLES -.EX -.ps -1 -.vs -1 -\&.G1 -frame top invis right invis -coord x 0, 10 y 1, 5 log y -ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3,4,5 "top tick" -ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2 -label bot "this is a" "silly graph" -label left "left side label" "here" -grid bot dotted at 2,4,6,8 -grid left dashed at 2.5 -copy thru / circle at $1,$2 / -1 1 -2 1.5 -3 2 -4 1.5 -10 5 -\&.G2 -.ps -.vs -.EE -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/grap.defines -.TP -.F /usr/lib/grap.defines -definitions of standard plotting characters, e.g., bullet -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR graph (1), -.IR pic (1), -.IR plot (3) -.br -J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan, -.I "GRAP \(em A Language for Typesetting Graphs, -CSTR 114, 1984 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/graph.1 b/static/v10/man1/graph.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 839aa2a3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/graph.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -.TH GRAPH 1 -.CT 1 numbers graphics -.SH NAME -graph \- draw a graph -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B graph -[ -.I option ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Graph -with no options takes pairs of numbers from the -standard input as abscissas -.RI ( x -values) -and ordinates -.RI ( y -values) -of a graph. -Successive points are connected by straight lines. -The graph is encoded on the standard output -for display by -.IR plot (1) -filters. -.PP -If the ordinate of a point is followed by -a nonnumeric string, that string is printed as a -label beginning on the point. -Labels may be surrounded with quotes -.L -" " -in which case they may be empty or contain blanks -and numbers; -labels never contain newlines. -.PP -The following options are recognized, -each as a separate argument. -.TP -.B -a -Supply abscissas automatically; no -.IR x -values -appear in the input. -Spacing is given by the next -argument (default 1). -A second optional argument is the starting point for -automatic abscissas (default 0, or 1 -with a log scale in -.I x, -or the lower limit given by -.BR -x ). -.TP -.B -b -Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the input. -.TP -.B -c -Character string given by next argument -is default label for each point. -.TP -.B -g -Next argument is grid style, -0 no grid, 1 frame with ticks, 2 full grid (default). -.TP -.B -l -Next argument is a legend to title the graph. -Grid ranges -are automatically printed as part -of the title unless a -.B -s -option is present. -.TP -.B -m -Next argument is mode (style) -of connecting lines: -0 disconnected, 1 connected. -Some devices give distinguishable line styles -for other small integers. -Mode \-1 (default) begins with style 1 and -rotates styles for successive curves under option -.BR -o . -.TP -.B -o -(Overlay.) -The ordinates for -.I n -superposed curves appear in the input -with each abscissa value. -The next argument is -.IR n . -.TP -.B -s -Save screen; no new page for this graph. -.TP -.B -x l -If -.B l -is present, -.IR x -axis -is logarithmic. -Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) -.I x -limits. -Third argument, if present, is grid spacing on -.I x -axis. -Normally these quantities are determined automatically. -.TP -.B -y l -Similarly for -.IR y . -.TP -.B -e -Make automatically determined -.I x -and -.I y -scales equal. -.TP -.B -h -Next argument is fraction of space for height. -.TP -.B -w -Similarly for width. -.TP -.B -r -Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting. -.TP -.B -u -Similarly to move up before plotting. -.TP -.B -t -Transpose horizontal and vertical axes. -(Option -.B -a -now applies to the vertical axis.) -.PP -If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, -the axis -is reversed. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR plot (1), -.IR grap (1), -.IR spline (A) -.SH BUGS -In -.I graph -segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed. -.br -Logarithmic axes may not be reversed. -.br -Option -.B -e -actually makes automatic limits, rather than automatic scaling, -equal. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gre.1 b/static/v10/man1/gre.1 deleted file mode 100644 index dbaa0b8c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/gre.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,188 +0,0 @@ -.TH GRE 1 -.CT 1 files -.SH NAME -gre, grep, egrep, fgrep \(mi search a file for a pattern -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gre -[ -.I option ... -] -.I pattern -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B grep -[ -.I option ... -] -.I pattern -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B egrep -[ -.I option ... -] -.I pattern -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B fgrep -[ -.I option ... -] -.I strings -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Gre\^ -searches the input -.I files\^ -(standard input default) -for lines (with newlines excluded) that match the -.I pattern, -a regular expression as defined in -.IR re (3). -A file name of -.B - -is interpreted as standard input. -Normally, each line matching the pattern is `selected', -and each selected line is copied to the standard output. -The options are -.TP -.B -1 -Print only the first selected line of each file argument. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -b -Mark each printed line with its byte position in its file. -This is sometimes useful in locating patterns in non-text files. -.TP -.B -c -Print only a count of matching lines. -.TP -.BI -e " pattern" -Same as a simple -.I pattern -argument, -but useful when -.I pattern -begins with a -.BR - . -.TP -.B -E -Simulate -.IR egrep. -.TP -.BI -f " file" -Read the pattern from -.IR file ; -there is no -.I pattern -argument -.TP -.B -F -Simulate -.IR fgrep. -.TP -.B -G -Simulate -.IR grep. -.TP -.B -h -Do not print filename tags (headers) with output lines. -.TP -.B -i -Ignore alphabetic case distinctions. -.TP -.B -l -Print the names of files with selected lines; don't print the lines. -.TP -.B -L -Print the names of files with no selected lines; -the converse of -.BR -l . -.TP -.B -n -Mark each printed line with its line number counted in its file. -.TP -.B -s -Produce no output, but return status. -.TP -.B -v -Reverse: print lines that do not match the pattern. -.TP -.B -x -Exact match: The pattern is -.BI ^( pattern )$ . -The implicit parentheses count in back references. -.PD -.PP -Output lines are tagged by filename when there is more than one -input file. -(To force this tagging, include -.B /dev/null -as a filename argument.) -If the output line exceeds some internal limit, -a warning is given and a small block of text surrounding the match is printed. -.PP -Care should be taken when -using the shell metacharacters -.B $*[^|()\e -and newline -in -.IR pattern ; -it is safest to enclose the -entire expression -in single quotes -.BR \&\|\(fm \|.\|.\|.\| \(fm . -.PP -.I Gre -supplants three classic programs, which are still available: -.PP -.I Grep -handles only -.IR ed (1)-like -regular expressions. -It uses -.L \e(\|\e) -instead of -.LR (\|) . -.PP -.I Egrep -handles the same patterns as -.I gre -except for back-referencing with -.BR \e1 , -.BR \e2 , -\&... -.PP -.I Fgrep -handles no operators except newline (alternation). -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR re (3), -.IR awk (1), -.IR sed (1), -.IR sam (9.1), -.IR strings (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Exit status is 0 if any lines are selected, -1 if none, 2 for syntax errors, inaccessible files -(even if matches were found). -Warnings will be given for input lines that exceed -a (generous) internal limit. -.SH BUGS -.I Grep, egrep, -and -.I fgrep -do not support some options and print block numbers -rather than byte numbers for option -.BR -b . -.br -.I Egrep -may fail on input containing characters greater -than 0176. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/grep.1 b/static/v10/man1/grep.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bd5a1010..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/grep.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ -.th GREP I 3/3/73 -.sh NAME -grep \*- search a file for a pattern -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd grep -[ -.bd \*-v -] [ -.bd \*-l -] [ -.bd \*-n -] expression [input] [output] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Grep -will search the input file -(standard input default) -for each line containing the -regular expression. -Normally, each line found -is printed on the output file -(standard output default). -If the -.bd \*-v -flag is used, -all lines but those matching -are printed. -If the -.bd \*-l -flag is used, -each line printed is -preceded by its line number. -If the -.bd \*-n -flag is used, -no lines are printed, -but the number of lines that would -normally have been printed is reported. -If interrupt is hit, -the number of lines -searched is printed. -.s3 -For a complete description -of the regular expression, -see ed(I). -Care should be taken when -using the characters -$ * [ ^ | ( ) and \\ in the regular -expression as they are -also meaningful to the shell. -(Precede them by \\) -.sh "SEE ALSO" -ed(I), sh(I) -.sh BUGS -Lines -are limited to 512 characters; -longer lines are truncated. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hang.1 b/static/v10/man1/hang.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8915394a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/hang.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -.TH HANG 1 -.CT 1 proc_man debug_tune -.SH NAME -hang \(mi start a process in stopped state -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B hang -.I command -.SH DESCRIPTION -The given command is executed, but stopped before -.B main() -is called so that -the process can be picked up by a debugger. -To ensure that breakpoints may be set, the process does not share its text. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR pi (9.1), -.IR kill (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 b/static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fd43e269..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH HARDCOPY 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B hardcopy -\- redirects output from PostScript file operators to paper -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBhardcopy\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B hardcopy -surrounds -.I files -with PostScript that redirects file output to paper, -and writes the results on the standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-f name -Print -.I files -using font -.IR name , -which should be the name of a constant width font. -The default font is Courier. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-m num -Magnify each page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which is located near the upper left corner of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-s num -Print -.I files -using point size -.IR num . -When printing in landscape mode -.I num -is scaled by a factor that depends on the -imaging area of the device. -The default size for portrait mode is 10. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed near the -upper left corner of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y down the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0.25 inches. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves text down the page. -The default offset is 0.25 inches. -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/hardcopy.ps . -.PP -.B hardcopy -generates paper output from data that a PostScript program -normally sends back to a host computer. -It is particularly useful for recovering data from a printer -that does not allow access to its serial port. -.SH EXAMPLES -For a list of ROM based fonts type: -.EX -echo 'FontDirectory {pop ==} forall' | hardcopy | lp \(el -.EE -To recover the version number of the PostScript interpreter: -.EX -echo 'version ==' | hardcopy -pland | lp \(el -.EE -To build and print a width table for font -.MW R -type: -.EX -trofftable -TLatin1 R | hardcopy | lp \(el -.EE -.SH WARNINGS -Results are unpredictable if the input -.I files -make changes to the graphics state. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/hardcopy.ps -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR buildtables (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR trofftable (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hoc.1 b/static/v10/man1/hoc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 18786cd9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/hoc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ -.TH HOC 1 -.CT 1 numbers -.SH NAME -hoc \(mi interactive floating point language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B hoc -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Hoc -interprets a simple language for floating point arithmetic, -at about the level of Basic, with C-like syntax and -functions. -.PP -The named -.IR file s -are read and interpreted in order. -If no -.I file -is given or if -.I file -is -.L - -.I hoc -interprets the standard input. -.PP -.I Hoc -input consists of -.I expressions -and -.IR statements . -Expressions are evaluated and their results printed. -Statements, typically assignments and function or procedure -definitions, produce no output unless they explicitly call -.IR print . -.PP -Variable names have the usual syntax, including -.LR _ ; -the name -.L _ -by itself contains the value of the last expression evaluated. -Certain variables are already initialized: -.TP -.B E -base of natural logs -.PD0 -.TP -.B PI -.TP -.B PHI -golden ratio -.TP -.B GAMMA -Euler's constant -.TP -.B DEG -180/PI, degrees per radian -.TP -.B PREC -maximum number of significant digits in output, initially 15; -.B PREC=0 -gives shortest `exact' values. -.PD -.PP -Expressions are formed with these C-like operators, listed by -decreasing precedence. -.TP -.B ^ -exponentiation -.TP -.B ! - ++ -- -.TP -.B * / % -.TP -.B + - -.TP -.B > >= < <= == != -.TP -.B && -.TP -.B || -.TP -.B = += -= *= /= %= -.PP -Built in functions include -.BR abs , -.BR acos , -.B atan -(one argument), -.BR cos , -.BR cosh , -.BR erf , -.BR erfc , -.BR exp , -.BR gamma , -.BR int , -.BR log , -.BR log10 , -.BR sin , -.BR sinh , -.BR sqrt , -.BR tan , -and -.BR tanh . -The function -.B read(x) -reads a value into the variable -.BR x ; -the statement -.B print -prints a list of expressions that may include -string constants such as -.B \&\&\&"hello\en". -.PP -Control flow statements are -.BR if - else , -.BR while , -and -.BR for , -with braces for grouping. -Newline ends a statement. -Backslash-newline is equivalent to a space. -.PP -Functions and procedures are introduced by the words -.B func -and -.BR proc ; -.B return -is used to return with a value from a function. -Within a function or procedure, -arguments are referred to as -.BR $1 , -.BR $2 , -etc.; all other variables are global. -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -func gcd() { - temp = abs($1) % abs($2) - if(temp == 0) return abs($2) - return gcd($2, temp) -} -for(i=1; i<12; i++) print gcd(i,12) -.EE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR bc (1), -.IR dc (1) -.br -B. W. Kernighan and R. Pike, -.I -The Unix Programming Environment, -Prentice-Hall, 1984 -.SH BUGS -Error recovery is imperfect within function and procedure definitions. -.br -The treatment of newlines is not exactly user-friendly. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hostname.1 b/static/v10/man1/hostname.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5d4754bb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/hostname.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -.TH HOSTNAME 1 -.SH NAME -hostname, whoami \- computer name -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B hostname -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Hostname -prints the computer name as used by -.IR mail (1) -or -.IR uucp (1). -.SH FILES -.TF /etc/whoami -.TP -.F /etc/whoami -file containing the computer name diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hp.1 b/static/v10/man1/hp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cb0ce0e5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/hp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ -.TH UL 1 -.CT 1 comm_term -.SH NAME -ul, hp \- print underlines on screen terminals -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ul -[ -.B -i -] -[ -.B -t -.I terminal -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B hp -[ -.B -e -] -[ -.B -m -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ul -replaces backspaced, overstruck underscores by control sequences suitable -for the terminal given by the environment variable -.L TERM -or by option -.BR -t . -It reads from the standard input or the named files and -writes on the standard output. -Option -.B -i -represents underlining by a separate line of -.L - -characters. -.PP -.I Hp -is a filter that presents most -.IR nroff -output sensibly on HP 2600 series terminals. -Option -.B -s -stops and waits for a newline at the beginning of each page. -Option -.B -e -uses `display enhancement' features to distinguish -underlines, superscripts, and subscripts, -which are normally all shown in inverse video. -Option -.B -m -squeezes multiple newlines out of the output. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR column (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Hp -does not reliably handle reverse line feeds as produced -by -.IR tbl (1); -pipe the input through -.I col -to get rid of them; see -.IR column (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 b/static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 77daab21..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'HYPHEN (I)'1/15/73'HYPHEN (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME hyphen -- find hyphenated words -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS hyphen______ file\d1\u ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION It finds all of the words in a -document which are hyphenated across lines -and prints them back at you in a convenient format. - -If no arguments are given, the standard output -is used. -Thus hyphen______ may be used as a filter. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS yes -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS yes, it gets confused, but with no ill effects other than -spurious extra output. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ican.1 b/static/v10/man1/ican.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 48df33cd..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ican.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ -.TH ICAN 1 -.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev -.SH NAME -ican, ibcan, idcan, itcan \- interface to Imagen laser-printer spooler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ican -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B ibcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B idcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B itcan -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -These commands print -.I files -(standard input by default) on Imagen laser printers. -The four commands -handle particular kinds of data files: -.TP -.I ican -ASCII text -.TP -.I ibcan -bitmap images created by -.IR blitblt (9.1) -.TP -.I idcan -output from -.IR troff (1) -.TP -.I itcan -output for a Tektronix 4014 terminal, as produced by -.IR plot (1) -.PP -The destination printer is determined in the following ways, -listed in order of decreasing precedence. -.IP -option -.B -d -.I dest -.br -environment variable -.L ICANDEST -.br -printer named in file -.F /etc/icandest -.LP -Printers at the mother site are: -.RS -.TP -.B 1 -1st floor, stair 8 (sid) -.PD0 -.TP -.B 3 -3rd floor, stair 8 (shannon) -.TP -.B 5 -5th floor, 2C-5 (hunny) -.TP -.B j -5th floor, 2D-5 (jones) -.TP -.BI / name -printer attached to machine with Datakit destination -.I name -.RE -.PD -.PP -Options: -.PP -.TP -.BI -c " n" -Number of copies to be printed. -.TP -.BI -d " dest" -Select the destination printer. -.TP -.BI -f " font" -Set the font (default -.LR CW.11 ) -for -.IR can ; -see -.IR font (7). -.TP -.B -L -(landscape) Rotate -.I ibcan -pages 90 degrees. -.TP -.BI -l " n" -Set number of lines per page for -.I can -(default 66). -.TP -.BI -m " n" -Set -.I ibcan -magnification to a power of 2, -where -.I n -= 0, 1, or 2 -(default 1). -.TP -.BI -o " list" -Print only pages whose page numbers appear in -the comma-separated -.I list -of numbers and ranges. -A range -.IB n - m -means pages -.I n -through -.IR m ; -a range -.BI - b -means from the beginning to page -.IR n ; -a range -.IB n - -means from page -.I n -to the end. -.B -o -implies -.BR -r . -.TP -.B -r -print -pages in reverse order -(default for -.IR ican " and " idcan ). -.TP -.BI -u " user" -set the name which appears on the banner page; -default is login name. -.TP -.BI -x " n" -set the horizontal -offset of the print image, measured in dots (default 60). -There are 300 dots to the inch. -.TP -.BI -y " n" -set the vertical -offset of the print image (default 0), -except in -.I itcan, -where this option specifies -.I n -extra tekpoints vertically. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/spool/lp -.TP -.F /etc/icandest -default destination -.PD0 -.TP -.F /usr/lib/font/devi300 -font directory -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lp -spool directory -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR pr (1), -.IR blitblt (9.1), -.IR plot (1), -.IR font (7) -.SH BUGS -The `landscape' option is supported only by -.IR ibcan ; -.BR -o -is supported only by -.I ican -and -.I idcan. -.br -There ought to be a way to determine the service class from the input data. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/iclc.1 b/static/v10/man1/iclc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5f1ad4cb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/iclc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ -.TH ICLC 1 "1 July 1988" -.SH NAME -iclc \- Esterel binder -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B iclc -[ option ] ... [ file ]... -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fIiclc\fR is the Esterel v3 binder. -It produces an \fIlc\fR format output -(or \fIic\fR if some \fBcopymodule\fP instruction -could not be expanded) from one or more \fIic\fR format inputs. -If there is no input file, the standard input is used. -\fIic\fP format input describes Esterel \fBmodules\fP to be processed, -and \fIlc\fP format output describes Esterel \fBmodules\fP with -no \fBcopymodule\fP instruction. -Typical use is: -.br -.DS -iclc < game1.ic > game.lc -.DE -.br -or -.br -.DS -iclc game1.ic game2.ic > game.lc -.DE -.LP -The following options are interpreted by \fIiclc\fP: -.IP \fB-v\fR 10 -Verbose mode. Tells what's going on. -.IP \fB-version\fR 10 -Prints the version number and exits. -.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 -Prints times and memory sizes for the main phases. -.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 -Gives the memory allocator state at the end of processing. -.IP \fB-Rs\fR 10 -Signal renaming trace mode. -.IP \fB-Rc\fR 10 -Constant renaming trace mode. -.IP \fB-cascade\fR 10 -"Cascade" mode. Creates a file FOO.casc -using the -o, -B and -D options to find the name -(esterel.casc as a last resort). -.IP "\fB\-B\fP \fIname\fP" 10 -Basename for the auxiliary output file. -.IP "\fB-D\fP \fIname\fP" 10 -The name of the directory where the auxiliary output file will go. -For instance, -.br -iclc -D /users/john/wd -B game -cascade game*.ic -.br -will write in the file "/users/john/wd/game.casc". -.IP "\fB\-d\fP[level]" 10 -Debug mode. Barely for you. -.IP "\fB\-o\fP \fIname\fP" 10 -Names the final output file \fIname\fP (deleting the existing text). -Obsolete. -.IP \fB-\fR 10 -Specifies the standard input as input stream. Works only once. Obsolete. -.SH FILES -The caller of the command -must have read/write permission for the directories containing -the working files, and execute permission for the \fIiclc\fR file itself. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The diagnostics produced by \fIiclc\fR compiler are intended (as usual) -to be self-explanatory. -They have one of the following forms: -.IP -"file",line n: iclc error (or warning) : message -.IP -*** iclc: message -.IP ->>>iclc s_trace (or c_trace) : message -.LP -The first two forms are described in the \fIError Messages Manual\fR. -The last one is -generated by the -Rs or -Rc option. -The possible messages with -Rc are: -.IP "root module FOO:" -the binder begins to treat the root module FOO. -.IP "submodule /FOO/BAR:" -the binder begins to treat the module BAR, "called" -by module FOO. -.LP -CONSTANT added as @33 <<: -.IP -CONSTANT is added to the list of final -constants with number 33. The "<<" is here -to help you find later the name of constant -number 33. Just look upward for 33 followed by "<<". -.LP -CONSTANT captured by @33 in module /FOO/BAR: -.IP -CONSTANT is implicitly captured by final constant -number 33 which was defined in module /FOO/BAR. -.LP -CONSTANT replaced by @33 in module /FOO/BAR: -.IP -CONSTANT is explicitly renamed to final -constant number 33 by a copymodule instruction defined in module /FOO/BAR. -.LP -Messages generated by -Rs are alike, except that no module name is given -(all signals must be defined in the parent module). - -.SH IDENTIFICATION -.de VL -\\$2 -.. -Author: J-M. Tanzi, -CMA, Ecole des Mines de Paris, -.sp 0 -Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE -.sp 0 -Revision Number: -$Revision: 1.3 $ -; Release Date: -$Date: 88/07/04 10:32:28 $ -\&. -.SH SEE ALSO -Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual -.sp 0 -Esterel v3 System Manuals. -.sp 0 -strlic (1), lcoc(1), ocl (1). -.sp 0 -.SH BUGS -.IP - -error messages should point to the Esterel source code -and not to an intermediate code input file. -.IP - -there is no error message if the same signal or constant -appears more than once in a renaming list. Only one renaming -is applied, however. -.IP - -the "cascade" mode in not fully implemented. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/icon.1 b/static/v10/man1/icon.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 34b3fa86..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/icon.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,162 +0,0 @@ -.TH ICON 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -icon \- interactive icon drawing program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B icon -[ \fB\-x\fR m ] [ \fB\-y\fR n ] [ \fB\-c\fR ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I icon -utility -is a menu-driven interactive icon and picture drawing program. -It runs under -.I layers -using the "mouse" and keyboard for command and text entry. -The default \fIicon\fR display consists of a 50X50 cell grid in the -lower right-hand corner of the layer in which -.I icon -is invoked. By invoking \fIicon\fR with the \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR flags, -the grid size may be specified to be \fIm\fRX\fIn\fR, overriding the default. -Each cell in this grid corresponds to a single bit in the -.I icon -being created or edited. -In the upper left-hand corner of the layer, -an actual size view of the icon is displayed. -.P -The \f3\-c\f1 option causes icon to be cached in the 630 MTG -application cache. -.P -The grid size parameters \f2m\f1 and \f2n\f1 must be in the -range of 1 to 480. A parameter larger than 480 is reduced to -480, and a parameter smaller than 1 is set to the default -value of 50. -.P -If icon is invoked in a window that is too small for the -specified grid size, icon will display a grid icon in -the upper left corner of the window along with a message -``menu on button 2''. The window must be reshaped before icon -will continue. At this point a menu on button 2 will contain a -reshape selection. If selected, icon will automatically -reshape its window to a size and shape appropriate for the -grid size. Alternately, the button 3 reshape function can be -used to manually reshape the window. If at any time the window -is again reshaped to a size too small to display the selected -grid size, icon will redisplay the grid icon and the ``menu on -button 2'' message. -.P -When using icon, the meanings of the three mouse buttons are -as follows: -.TP 15 -\f3Button 1\f1 -Button 1, when depressed and held in, fills in the -grid position pointed to by the mouse cursor. -.TP -\f3Button 2\f1 -Button 2, when depressed and held in, clears the -grid position pointed to by the mouse cursor. -.TP -\f3Button 3\f1 -Button 3, when depressed, displays a matrix of icons. -By moving the cursor (now a box) over the desired icon and releasing the -button, commands will be invoked. -If the command requires a section of the grid display to be -selected, depressing button 2 will select a 16x16 grid outline. -To specify other than this 16x16 grid outline, -depress button 3 and sweep out the rectangle you wish -the command to act on. -.bp -.SS Commands -The command selection matrix icons are described below from the upper left by rows -to the bottom right. -On the bottom row is a help command designated by the word "help." -.TP 25 -\fBArrow\fR -move selection to another portion of the grid. -.TP -\fBCopier\fR -copy selection to another portion of the grid. -.TP -\fBBlack and white squares\fR -change light squares to dark and dark squares -to light (invert video). -.TP -\fBGarbage can\fR -erase. -.TP -\fBHorizontal wrap arrow\fR -flip on the x-axis. -.TP -\fBVertical wrap arrow\fR -flip on the y-axis. -.TP -\fBTo right and down arrow\fR -rotate 90 degrees clockwise. -.TP -\fBUp and to left arrow\fR -rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise. -.TP -\fBHorizontal lines\fR -shear along the x-axis. -.TP -\fBVertical lines\fR -shear along the y-axis. -.TP -\fBFour line sets\fR -stretch (expand). -.TP -\fBPinwheels\fR -take one pattern and make many copies of it. -.TP -\fBEyeglasses\fR -read an icon file. -.TP -\fBGrid\fR -draw a reference grid. -.TP -\fBMouse\fR -change current mouse cursor to selected 16 x 16 grid. -.TP -\fBQuill pen\fR -write an icon file. -.TP -\fBGrid, arrow to grid\fR -bitblt operator. -.TP -\fBHELP\fR -prints the help menu. -.TP -\fBSmoking gun\fR -exit the \fIicon\fR program. -.SS Cursor Icons -The following are status indicator icons that the mouse cursor changes to -under various conditions: -.TP 25 -\fBAlarm clock\fR -wait. -.TP -\fBDead Mouse\fR -mouse inactive. -.TP -\fBDark square in stack\fR -menu on button 3. -.TP -\fBSquare with arrow\fR -sweep rectangle (button 3). -.TP -\fBDouble square with arrow\fR -sweep rectangle (button 3) -or get 16x16 grid frame (button 2). -.bp -.SH FILES -.ta \w'$DMD/src/icons/texture/* 'u -$DMD/lib/icon.m terminal support program -.br -$DMD/icons/* icons -.SH SEE ALSO -ucache(1). -.br -layers(1) in the -\f2UNIX System V Release 3 User's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -layers(1) in the -\f25620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference Manual\f1. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 b/static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2fc07e27..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,205 +0,0 @@ -.ds M \fH -.de Ds -.nf -.in +.5i -.ft H -.sp .5 -.. -.de De -.ft R -.in -.5i -.fi -.sp .5 -.. -.TH ICON_PI 1 "The University of Arizona \- 5/6/86" -.SH NAME -icon_pi \- construct personalized interpreter for Icon -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*Micon_pi\fR -.SH DESCRIPTION -A personalized interpreter is -a version of Icon in which the run-time system can be easily -augmented and modified by the user. -.PP -To set up a personalized interpreter, a new directory should -be created solely for the use of the interpreter; otherwise -files may be accidentally destroyed by the set-up process. -For the purpose of example, suppose this directory is -named \*Mmyicon\fR. The set-up process consists of -.Ds -mkdir myicon -cd myicon -icon_pi -.De -Note that \*Micon_pi\fR must be run in the area in which the personalized -interpreter is to be built. -.PP -The shell script \*Micon_pi\fR constructs three subdirectories: -\*Mh\fR, \*Mstd\fR, and \*Mpi\fR. The subdirectory \*Mh\fR -contains header files that are needed in C routines. The subdirectory -\*Mstd\fR contains the portions of the Icon system that are needed -to build a personalized interpreter. The subdirectory \*Mpi\fR -contains a \*MMakefile\fR for building a personalized interpreter -and also is the place where source code for new C functions normally -resides. -.PP -The \*MMakefile\fR that is constructed by \*Micon_pi\fR -contains two definitions to facilitate building personalized -interpreters: -.IP \*MOBJS\fR .5i -a list of object modules that are to be added to or replaced -in the run-time system. \*MOBJS\fR initially is empty. -.IP \*MLIB\fR -a list of library options that are used when the run-time system -is built. \*MLIB\fR initially is empty. -.PP -Performing a \fImake\fR in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR creates four additional files -in \*Mmyicon\fR: -.Ds -.ta 1i -picont \fRcommand processor\*M -pilink \fRlinker\*M -piconx \fRrun-time system\*M -piconx.hdr \fRheader for linker output\*M -.De -A link to \*Mpicont\fR also is constructed in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR so that -the new personalized interpreter can be tested in the directory in -which it is made. -.PP -The file \*Mpicont\fR normally is built only on the first \fImake\fR. The -file \*Mpilink\fR is built on the first \fImake\fR and is -rebuilt whenever the repertoire of built-in functions is changed. -The file \*Mpiconx\fR is rebuilt whenever the source code in the -run-time system is changed. -.PP -The user of the personalized interpreter uses \*Mpicont\fR in -the same fashion that the standard \*Micont\fR; see \fIicont(1)\fR. -(Note that the accidental use of \*Micont\fR in place of -\*Mpicont\fR may produce mysterious results.) -In turn, \*Mpicont\fR translates a source program using the -standard Icon translator and links it using \*Mpilink\fR. -The resulting icode file uses \*Mpiconx\fR. -Note that the location of \*Mpiconx\fR is built into the icode file. -.PP -The relocation bits and symbol tables in -\*Mpiconx\fR can be removed by -.Ds -make Stripx -.De -in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR. This reduces the size of this file substantially -but makes the use of debuggers impractical. -.PP -If a \fImake\fR is performed in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR before any -run-time files are added or modified, the resulting personalized -interpreter is identical to the standard one. Such a \fImake\fR can -be performed to verify that the personalized interpreter system -is performing properly. -.PP -Note that a personalized interpreter inherits the parameters and -configuration of the locally installed version of Icon in \*Mv6\fR, including -optional language extensions. -The file \*Mmyicon/h/config.h\fR contains configuration information. -The definitions in this file should not be changed. -.PP -To add a new function to the personalized interpreter, it is first -necessary to provide the C code, adhering to the conventions and -data structures used throughout Icon. -Some useful functions are -contained in \*Mv6/pi/pil\fR, where \*Mv6\fR is the root -of the source hierarchy for the Icon system. -The directory -\*Mv6/src/iconx\fR contains the source code for the standard built-in -functions, which also can be used as models for new ones. -.PP -Suppose that \*Mgetenv\fR from \*Mv6/pi/pil\fR is to be -added to a personalized interpreter. The source code can be obtained by -.Ds -cp v6/pi/pil/getenv.c myicon/pi -.De -(Note that the actual paths depend on the -local hierarchy.) -.PP -Four things now need to be done to -incorporate this function in the personalized interpreter: -.IP 1. 5n -Add a line consisting of -.Ds -FncDef(getenv) -.De -to \*Mmyicon/h/fdef.h\fR in proper alphabetical order. -This causes the linker and the run-time system to know about the new function. -.IP 2. -Add \*Mgetenv.o\fR to the definition of \*MOBJS\fR in -\*Mmyicon/pi/Makefile\fR. -This causes \*Mgetenv.c\fR to be compiled and the resulting -object file to be loaded with the run-time system when a \fImake\fR is performed. -.IP 3. -Add a dependency line in \*Mmyicon/pi/Makefile\fR for \*Mgetenv.o\fR -to reflect the file that it includes, namely -.Ds -getenv.o: ../h/rt.h -.De -.IP 4. -Perform a \fImake\fR in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR. -This produces -new versions of \*Mpilink\fR and \*Mpiconx\fR in \*Mmyicon\fR. -.LP -The function \*Mgetenv\fR now can be used like any other built-in -function. -.PP -More than one function can be included in a single source file. -If a function requires a library to be loaded, that library should -be added to the definition of \*MLIB\fR in the \*MMakefile\fR. -.PP -The use of personalized interpreters is not limited to the addition -of new functions. Any module in the standard run-time system can -be modified as well. -To modify an existing portion of the Icon run-time system, -copy the source code file from the standard system to \*Mmyicon/pi\fR. -(Source code for a few run-time routines is placed in \*Mmyicon/std\fR -when a personalized interpreter is set up. Check this directory -first and use that file, if appropriate, rather than making -another copy in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR.) When a source-code file in -\*Mmyicon/pi\fR has been modified, place it in the \*MOBJS\fR -list just like a new file and perform a \fImake\fR. Note that -an entire module must be replaced, even if a change is made to -only one routine. -Any module that is replaced must contain all the global variables in -the original module to prevent \fIld(1)\fR from also loading the -original module. There is no way to delete routines from the run-time -system. -.PP -The directory \*Mmyicon/h\fR contains header files that are included -in various source-code files. -The file \*Mmyicon/h/rt.h\fR contains declarations and definitions that -are used throughout the run-time system. This is where the declaration -for the structure of a new type of data object would be placed. -.PP -Care -must be taken when modifying header files not to make changes that -would produce inconsistencies between previously compiled components -of the Icon run-time system and new ones. -.SH FILES -.ta 1i -.nf -\*Mv6/pi\fR code for building personalized interpreters -\*Mv6/src/iconx\fR run-time system -.fi -.SH SEE ALSO -icont(1) -.LP -\fIPersonalized Interpreters for Version 6.0 of Icon\fR, Ralph E. -Griswold, TR 86-12, Department of Computer Science, The University -of Arizona, May 1986. -.LP -\fIThe Icon Programming Language\fR, -Ralph E. Griswold and Madge T. Griswold, -Prentice-Hall Inc., -Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, -1983. -.LP -\fIVersion 6.0 of Icon\fR, Ralph E. Griswold, William H. Mitchell, and -Janalee O'Bagy, -TR 86-10, -Department of Computer Science, The University of Arizona, -May 1986. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/icont.1 b/static/v10/man1/icont.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bf252d5c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/icont.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,267 +0,0 @@ -.ds M \fH -.de Ds -.nf -.in +.5i -.ft H -.sp .5 -.. -.de De -.ft R -.in -.5i -.fi -.sp .5 -.. -.TH ICONT 1 "The University of Arizona \- 5/27/86" -.SH NAME -icont \- process Icon programs -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*Micont\fR -[ option ... ] file ... [ -\*M\-x\fR -arg ... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The program \*Micont\fR -is a command processor for running Version 6.0 Icon programs. -Used in its simplest form, -it produces a file suitable for interpretation by the Icon -interpreter. -Processing consists of two phases: -\fItranslation\fR -and -\fIlinking\fR. -During translation, -each Icon source file is translated into an intermediate language called \fIucode\fR; -during linking, -the one or more ucode files are combined and a single -\fIicode\fR file is produced. -Unless the -\*M\-o\fR -option is specified, the name of the resulting icode file is -formed by deleting the suffix of the first input file named on the -command line. -If the -\*M\-x\fR -argument is used, -the file is automatically executed by the interpreter -and any arguments following the -\*M\-x\fR -are passed as execution arguments to the Icon program itself. -.PP -Files whose names end in \*M.icn\fR are assumed to be Icon source programs. -These programs are translated, and the intermediate code is left in two ucode files of -the same name with \*M.u1\fR and \*M.u2\fR substituted for \*M.icn\fR. -The ucode code files normally are deleted when \*Micont\fR completes. -Files whose names end in \*M.u1\fR are assumed to refer to ucode -files from a previous translation; these files and the corresponding \*M.u2\fR -files are included in the linking phase after any \*M.icn\fR -files have been translated. -A \*M.u1\fR or \*M.u2\fR file that is explicitly named is not deleted. -Icon source programs may be read from standard input. -The argument -\*M\-\fR -signifies the use of standard input as a source file. -In this case, the ucode files are named \*Mstdin.u1\fR and \*Mstdin.u2\fR -and the icode file is named \*Mstdin\fR. -.PP -The following options are recognized by -\*Micont\fR: -.TP 4 -\*M\-c\fR -Suppress the linking phase. -The ucode code files are not deleted. -.TP -\*M\-m\fR -Preprocess each \*M.icn\fR source file -with the \fIm4\^(1)\fR -macro processor before translation. -.TP -\*M\-o \fIoutput\fR -Name the icode file -\fIoutput\fR. -.TP -\*M\-s\fR -Suppress informative messages from the translator and -linker. -Normally, both informative messages and error messages are sent -to standard error output. -.TP -\*M\-t\fR -Arrange for \*M&trace\fR to have an initial value of \-1 -when the program is executed. -Normally, \*M&trace\fR has an initial value of 0. -.TP -\*M\-u\fR -Issue warning messages for undeclared identifiers in the program. -The warnings are issued during the linking phase. -.PP -Icon has several tables related to the translation and linking -of programs. -These tables are large enough for most programs, but their sizes can be -changed, if necessary, by the \*M\-S\fR option. This option has the -form \*M\-S\^[cfgilrstCL]\fI n\fR, where the letter following the -\*MS\fR specifies the table and \fIn\fR is the number of storage units to -allocate for the table. -Some sizes depend on the size of the address space of the computer. -For this purpose, a VAX has a large address space, -while a PDP-11 has a small address space. -The tables and their default sizes for computers -with large and small memory sizes are: -.nf -.in +.5i -.sp -.ta .3i 2.5iR 3.3iR - \fIlarge small\fR -.sp .5 -\*Mc\fR constant table 100 100 -\*Mf\fR field table 100 100 -\*Mg\fR global symbol table 200 200 -\*Mi\fR identifier table 500 500 -\*Ml\fR local symbol table 100 100 -\*Mr\fR field table for records 100 100 -\*Ms\fR string space 15,000 7,500 -\*Mt\fR tree space 15,000 5,000 -\*MC\fR code buffer 20,000 4,000 -\*ML\fR labels 500 500 -.sp -.in -.5i -.fi -The units depend on the table involved, but the default values can -be used as a general guide for appropriate settings of \*M\-S\fR -options without knowing the units. -.PP -The environment variable \*MIPATH\fR controls the location of files -specified in link directives. The value of \*MIPATH\fR should be a blank-separated -form \fIp1\0p2 \*(El\0 pn\fR where the \fIpi\fR name directories. -Each directory is searched in turn to locate files named in link -directives. The default value for \*MIPATH\fR is \*M.\fR , that is, the current -directory. -.PP -The icode -file produced by the Icon linker is -executable. -\fRFor example, the command -.nf -.in +.5i -\*M -.sp -.5 -icont hello.icn -.ft R -.in -.5i -.sp .5 -.fi -produces a file named \*Mhello\fR -that can be run by the command -.nf -.in +.5i -\*M -.sp -.5 -hello -.ft R -.in -.5i -.sp .5 -.fi -.PP -Arguments can be passed to the Icon program by following the program -name with the arguments. Any such arguments are passed to the main -procedure as a list of strings. -.PP -When an Icon program is executed, several environment variables -are examined to determine certain execution parameters. -The values assigned to these variables should be numbers. -The variables that affect execution -and the interpretations of their values are as follows: -.TP 4 -\*MTRACE\fR -Initialize the value of \*M&trace\fR. -If this variable has a value, it overrides the translation-time -\*M\-t\fR -option. -.TP -\*MNBUFS\fR -The number of i/o buffers to use for files. -When a file is opened, it is assigned an i/o buffer if one is available -and the file is not a tty. -If no buffer is available, the file is not buffered. -\*M&input\fR, \*M&output\fR, and \*M&errout\fR are buffered if buffers -are available. -On large-memory systems, the default value of \fINBUFS\fR is 10. -On small-memory systems, it is 5. -.TP -\*MNOERRBUF\fR -If set, \*M&errout\fR is not buffered. -.TP -\*MICONCORE\fR -If set, a core dump is produced for error termination. -.TP -\*MSTRSIZE\fR -The initial size of the string space, in bytes. -The string space grows if necessary, but it never shrinks. -On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MSTRSIZE\fR is 51,200; -on small-memory systems, it is 10,240. -.TP -\*MHEAPSIZE\fR -The initial size of the allocated block region, in bytes. -The heap grows if necessary, but it never shrinks. -On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MHEAPSIZE\fR is 51,200; -on small-memory systems, it is 10,240. -.TP -\*MCOEXPSIZE\fR -The size, in words, of each co-expression block. -On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MCOEXPSIZE\fR is 2,000; -on small-memory systems, it is 1,000. -.TP -\*MMSTKSIZE\fR -The size, in words, of the main interpreter stack. On large-memory -systems, the default value of \*MMSTKSIZE\fR is 10,000; -on small-memory systems, it is 3,000. -.TP -\*MSTATSIZE\fR -The size, in bytes, of the static region in which co-expression blocks -are allocated. On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MSTATSIZE\fR -is 20,480; on small-memory systems, it is 1,024. -.TP -\*MSTATINCR\fR -The size of the increment used when the static region is expanded. -The default increment is one-fourth of the initial size of the static -region. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'\*Mitran\fR 'u -\*Micont\fR Icon command processor -.br -\*Mitran\fR Icon translator -.br -\*Milink\fR Icon linker -.br -\*Miconx\fR Icon run-time system -.br -.SH SEE ALSO -\fIThe Icon Programming Language\fR, -Ralph E. Griswold and Madge T. Griswold, -Prentice-Hall Inc., -Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, -1983. -.LP -\fIVersion 6.0 of Icon\fR, Ralph E. Griswold, William H. Mitchell, -and Janalee O'Bagy, -TR 86-10, -Department of Computer Science, The University of Arizona, -May 1986. -.LP -m4\^(1), icon_pi(1) -.SH BUGS -.LP -Icode files do not stand alone; the Icon run-time system must be -present. -An icode -file produced on one system will not work on another system unless -the Icon run-time system is in the same place on both systems and -the run-time system is of the same version of Icon as the linker -that produced the icode file. -.LP -Stack overflow is checked using a heuristic that is not always effective. -.LP -If the -\*M\-m\fR -option is used, -line numbers reported in error messages or tracing messages -are from the file after, not before, preprocessing. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ideal.1 b/static/v10/man1/ideal.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 38f6740a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ideal.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,380 +0,0 @@ -.TH IDEAL 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff graphics -.SH NAME -ideal \(mi troff preprocessor for drawing pictures -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ideal -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ideal -is a constraint-based -.IR troff (1) -preprocessor for typesetting figures in the complex plane. -A line beginning -.L .IS -marks the start of an -.I ideal -program, -.B .IE -or -.BR .IF -marks the end. -.B .IE -leaves the typesetting baseline below the bottom of the picture; -.B .IF -(flyback) leaves it at the top. -The options are -.TP -.BI -T dev -Produce instructions for -.IR troff (1) -device -.I dev. -.B -a -is a synonym for -.BR -Taps ; -.B -t -for -.BR -T202 . -.TP -.B -tex -Produce output for -.IR tex (1). -.TP -.B -p -Produce -.IR plot (1) -instructions. -Erases come unbidden at every -.BR .IS . -.TP -.B -4 -Produce instructions for a Tektronix -4014 and wait at each -.B .IE -for an input character -before erasing and starting the next picture. -.TP -.B -n -Produce raw -.IR ideal -output, which passes unharmed through -.I nroff. -.TP -.B -v -Print calculated values of variables on standard error. -.PP -.I Ideal -programs are built of -`boxes'; -boxes look like C functions, -in that they are named and delimited by braces. -They may include the following kinds of statements, -each terminated by a semicolon: -.TF spline -.TP -.B var -declares one or more complex variables local to the box. -Variable names are made up of letters and digits, and -start with a letter; do not use any of the following -keywords as variable names: -.LR at , -.LR bdlist , -.LR boundary , -.LR box , -.LR conn , -.LR construct , -.LR draw , -.LR exterior , -.LR interior , -.LR left , -.LR opaque , -.LR put , -.LR right , -.LR spline , -.LR text , -.LR to , -.LR using , -.L var -.TP -.I equation -declares relative positions of significant points of the box -.TP -.B conn -asks for a straight-line path through named points -.TP -.B pen -asks for a box to be replicated along a line between two points -.TP -.B left -left-justifies text with respect to a point -.TP -.B text -centers text with respect to a point -.TP -.B right -right-justifies text with respect to a point -.TP -.B spline -draws a spline guided by the named points -.TP -.B put -asks for an instance of a box to be drawn -.TP -.B opaque -asks for a box to erase lines already in the picture that -are covered by its bounding polygon -.TP -.B boundary -specifies the bounding polygon for an opaque box -.TP -.B construct -builds a partial picture on a separate `sheet of paper' -.TP -.B draw -adds the contents of the named constructed box to the current picture -.PD -.PP -.I Ideal -expects all components of a picture to be specified as boxes; -instructions to draw the entire picture should comprise a box called -.LR main . -Boxes are remembered across -.BR .IS / .IE -boundaries; -if you won't need a box again, you can reclaim the -space it requires by including the command -.BI ...forget " boxname" -on a line between any -.BR .IS / .IE -pair after the last use of -.I boxname. -Box -.L main -is an exception to this rule: -it is always forgotten at -.BR .IE . -.PP -During its first pass, -.I ideal -solves all the equations to determine the locations of all points -it needs to know. -These equations must be linear equations in complex variables, -although they may include non-linear operators: -.I ideal -plugs in for as many variables, and does as much function evaluation, -as it can before solving the linear equation. -It waits until it has absolutely no hope of reducing an equation -to a linear equation before complaining. -.I Ideal -knows about the following functions: -.TF f[z,w] -.TP -.IB f [ z , w ] -.I == z+(w-z)f, -fraction -.I f -of the way from -.I z -to -.I w -.TP -.BI re( z ) -real part of complex number -.TP -.BI im( z ) -imaginary part of complex number -.TP -.BI conj( z ) -complex conjugate of complex number -.TP -.BI abs( z ) -absolute value (modulus) of complex number -.TP -.BI cis( z ) -the unit vector -.if n .ig -$cos^x~+~i^sin^x$, -.. -.if t .ig -cos(x) + i*sin(x) -.. -where -.IR x " = re(" z ) -and -.I x -is measured in degrees -(radians if the line -.B ...radians -appeared more -recently in the file than the line -.BR ...degrees ) -.TP -.BI E( x ) -.RI "== cis(360 x ) -if -.I x -is measured in degrees -.TP -.BI angle( z ) -angle of complex number, -.RI arctan(im( z )/re( z )) -.PD -.PP -During the second pass, -.I ideal -draws the picture. -.PP -To draw a circle, -include the line -.B ...libfile circle -between the -.B .IS -and -.B .IE -lines, -and -.B put -the box named -.LR circle , -giving enough information that -the circle can be determined; -for instance, give the center and the radius, -or give three points through which the circle passes, -or give the center and a point on the circle. -The circle has center -.LR center , -radius -.LR radius , -and passes through -.BR z1 , -.BR z2 , -and -.B z3. -.PP -To draw an arc, -include the line -.B ...libfile arc -between the -.B .IS -and -.B .IE -lines, -and -.B put -the box named -.LR arc , -again giving enough information to determine the arc; -for instance, give the center, radius, and starting and ending angles, -or give three points on the arc--where to start, where to end, and somewhere -in between. -The arc has center -.LR center , -radius -.LR radius , -starts at point -.LR start , -passes through point -.L midway -at angle -.LR midang , -and -ends at point -.L end -at angle -.LR endang . -If no -.L midway -is specified, the arc is drawn counterclockwise from -.L start -to -.LR end . -.PP -The picture will be scaled to a default width of four inches -and centered in a column of six inches. -The default width can be changed by a -.B ...width -command, -which includes a number in inches. -The default column width can be changed by a -.B ...colwid -command. -To defeat -.I ideal's -notion of the size of the picture, you can include lines of -the form -.BR ...minx , -.BR ...miny , -.BR ...maxx , -or -.BR ...maxy ; -these give the various coordinates of the bounding box of the -picture in the coordinate system used by the picture. -.PP -.I Ideal -supports both C-style comments (between -.L /* -and -.L */ -brackets \(em which nest), -and shell-style comments (between -.L # -and newline). -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -.mk -\&...libfile circle -triangle { - var z1, z2, z3; - conn z1 to z2 to z3 to z1; -} -main { - put T: triangle { - z1 = 0; z2 = 1; z3 = (2,2); - } - put circle { - z1 = T.z1; z2 = T.z2; z3 = T.z3; - } -} -.EE -.de xx -.. -.if n .ig xx -.rt -.IS -...width 6 -...libfile circle -...minx -8 -triangle { - var z1, z2, z3; - conn z1 to z2 to z3 to z1; -} -main { - put T: triangle { - z1 = 0; z2 = 1; z3 = (2,2); - } - put circle { - z1 = T.z1; z2 = T.z2; z3 = T.z3; - } -} -.IE -.xx -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR troff (1), -.IR pic (1), -.IR ped (9.1), -.IR doctype (1) -.br -C. J. Van Wyk, -`IDEAL User's Manual', -this manual, Volume 2 -.SH BUGS -.I Ideal -is relatively unforgiving about syntax errors. -.br -Bounding box computation is naive for arcs and text strings. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/idiff.1 b/static/v10/man1/idiff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2a8047eb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/idiff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ -.TH IDIFF 1 -.CT 1 files dirs -.SH NAME -idiff \(mi interactive file comparison -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B idiff -[ -.I option -] -.I file1 file2 -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Idiff -compares -.I file1 -with -.I file2 -using -.IR diff , -then presents each set of changed lines -for selection or processing. -.I File2 -may be a directory; -in that case, the basename of -.I file1 -is appended. -.PP -For each group, legal responses are -.TP -.B < -to retain the `from' lines -.TP -.B > -to retain the `to' lines -.TP -.B e -to edit both sets of lines -.TP -.B d -to delete both sets -.TP -.B 1 -to retain the rest of the `from' file -.TP -.B 2 -to retain the rest of the `to' file -.TP -.B ! -to invoke a shell command -.PP -Lines that compare equal are copied verbatim from -.I file1. -Lines produced by this process, -including the lines written from within the editor, -are written to file -.IR idiff.out . -Comparison may be affected by the -.IR diff (1) -options -.TP -.B -b -Ignore trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) and treat other -strings of blanks as if they were a single space. -.TP -.B -B -Ignore all blanks. -.SH FILES -.TF /tmp/idiff.* -.TP -.F idiff.out -.TP -.F idiff.* -.TP -.F /tmp/idiff.* -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR diff (1) -.SH BUGS -There is no way to revisit a choice. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/if.1 b/static/v10/man1/if.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 917ec740..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/if.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'IF (I)'3/15/72'IF (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME if -- conditional command -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS if__ expr command [ arg918 ... ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION if__ -evaluates the expression expr____, and if its value is true____, -executes the given command_______ with the given arguments. - -The following primitives are used to construct -the expr____: - -.in +9 -.ti -4 --r__ file -.br -true if the file exists and is readable. - -.ti -4 --w__ file -.br -true if the file exists and is writable - -.ti -4 -s1 =_ s2 -.br -true if the strings s1__ and s2__ are equal. - -.ti -4 -s1 !=__ s2 -.br -true if the strings s1__ and s2__ are not equal. - -.in -9 -These primaries may be combined with the -following operators: - -.in +5 -!_ -.ti +4 -unary negation operator - --a__ -.ti +4 -binary and___ operator - --o__ -.ti +4 -binary or__ operator - -(_ expr )_ -.ti +4 -parentheses for grouping. - -.in -5 --a__ has higher precedence than -o__. -Notice that all the operators and flags are separate -arguments to if__ and hence must be surrounded by spaces. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO sh(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "if error", -if the expression has the wrong syntax; -"command not found." -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/imscan.1 b/static/v10/man1/imscan.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0aaaf98a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/imscan.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -.TH IMSCAN 1 "arend" -.CT 1 graphics -.SH NAME -imscan \(mi scan greyscale images -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B imscan -[ -.BI -s N -] -[ -.BI -l N -] -.I file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Imscan -digitizes an image with an Imagitex grey-scale scanner -and places the result in the named file in the form of -.IR picfile (5). -The options are -.TP -.BI -s N -Set a scale factor -.RI 1\(<= N \(<=9, -default 4. -With scale factor -.I N -the image is subsampled: only 1 out of every -.I N\(muN -pixels is stored. -A larger scale factor, therefore, produces a smaller image. -.TP -.BI -l N -Use lens focal length -.I N, -where -.I N -is either 5 or 8 (default). -The 8-inch lens scans images at 480 dots per inch. -The 5-inch lens scans at 754 dots per inch. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR cscan (1), -.IR pico (1), -.IR qsnap (1), -.I mugs -in -.IR face (9.7), -.IR picfile (5) -.SH BUGS -It is hard to get more than 2000 pixels per scanline reliably. -For large originals, higher scale factors work better than -smaller ones. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/inews.1 b/static/v10/man1/inews.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 15bb55a6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/inews.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -.TH INEWS 1 -.SH NAME -inews \- submit news articles -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B inews -[ -.B \-h -] -.B \-t -.IR title " [ " -.B \-n -.IR newsgroups " ] [ " -.B \-e -.IR "expiration date" " ]" -.PP -.B "inews \-p" -.RI " [ " filename " ] " -.PP -.BI "inews \-C " newsgroup -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Inews -submits news articles to the USENET news -network. -It is intended as a raw interface, not as a human user interface. -Casual users should probably use -.IR postnews (1) -instead. -.PP -The first form is for submitting user articles. -The body will be read from the standard -input. A -.I title -must be specified as there is no default. Each article -belongs to a list of newsgroups. If the -.B \-n -flag is omitted, the list -will default to something line -.IR general . -(On ours, it is -.IR general .) -If you wish to submit -an article in multiple newsgroups, the -.I newsgroups -must be separated by commas and/or spaces. -If not specified, the expiration date will be -set to the local default. -The -.B \-f -flag specifies the article's sender. Without this flag, the sender -defaults to the user's name. -If -.B \-f -is specified, the real sender's name will be included as a Sender line. -The -.B \-h -flag specifies that headers are present at the beginning of the -article, and these headers should be included with the article -header instead of as text. -(This mechanism can be used to edit headers and supply additional -nondefault headers, but not to specify certain information, -such as the sender and article ID, that inews itself generates.) -.LP -When posting an article, the environment is checked for -information about the sender. -If NAME is found, its value is used for the full name, -rather than the system value (often in /etc/passwd). -This is useful if the system value cannot be set, or when -more than one person uses the same login. -If ORGANIZATION is found, the value overrides the system -default organization. -This is useful when a person uses a guest login and is -not primarily associated with the organization owning the machine. -.LP -The second form is used for receiving articles from other machines. -If -.I filename -is given, the article will be read from the specified file; otherwise -the article will be read from the standard input. An expiration date -need not be present and a receival date, if present, will be ignored. -.LP -After local installation, inews will transmit the article to all systems -that subscribe to the newsgroups that the article belongs to. -.LP -The third form is for creating new newsgroups. On some systems, this may -be limited to specific users such as the super-user or news administrator. -(This happens on ours.) -.LP -If the file /usr/lib/news/recording is present, it is taken as a list of -"recordings" to be shown to users posting news. -(This is by analogy to the recording you hear when you dial information -in some parts of the country, asking you if you really wanted to do this.) -The file contains lines of the form: -.br - newsgroups filename -.br -for example: -.br - net.all net.recording - fa.all fa.recording -.br -Any user posting an article to a newsgroup matching the pattern on -the left will be shown the contents of the file on the right. -The file is found in the LIB directory (often /usr/lib/news). -The user is then told to hit DEL to abort or RETURN to proceed. -The intent of this feature is to help companies keep proprietary -information from accidently leaking out. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 25 -/usr/spool/news/.sys.nnn -temporary articles -.TP 25 -.RI /usr/spool/news/ newsgroups / article_no. -Articles -.TP 25 -/usr/spool/oldnews/ -Expired articles -.TP 25 -/usr/lib/news/active -List of known newsgroups and highest local article numbers in each. -.TP 25 -/usr/lib/news/seq -Sequence number of last article -.TP 25 -/usr/lib/news/history -List of all articles ever seen -.TP 25 -/usr/lib/news/sys -System subscription list -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Mail(1), -binmail(1), -getdate(3), -msgs(1), -news(5), -newsrc(5), -postnews(1), -readnews(1), -recnews(1), -sendnews(8), -uucp(1), -uurec(8), -.SH AUTHORS -Matt Glickman -.br -Mark Horton -.br -Stephen Daniel -.br -Tom R. Truscott diff --git a/static/v10/man1/init.1 b/static/v10/man1/init.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 77aff09e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/init.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ - 1 2 3 4 - 5 6 - 7 -if -for -else -while -1 2 3 if -4 5 0 for -6 7 8 else -9 10 11 while -1 2 3 if -4 5 0 for -6 7 8 else -9 10 11 while -0 0 0 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/intro.1 b/static/v10/man1/intro.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9c10c446..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/intro.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.TH INTRO 1 -.SH NAME -intro \- introduction to commands -.SH DESCRIPTION -This section describes publicly accessible commands -in alphabetic order. -.PP -The name of a particular machine at the head of the -page means that the command lives there and not necessarily -elsewhere. -`Local' means the same, without being specific about where. -.SH SEE ALSO -Section (7) for databases. -.br -Section (8) for `hidden' commands for booting, maintenance, etc. -.br -Section (9) for commands that involve the Teletype 5620 terminal. -.br -.I How to get started, -in the Introduction. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Upon termination each command returns two bytes of status, -one supplied by the system giving the cause for -termination, and (in the case of `normal' termination) -one supplied by the program; -see -.IR exit (2). -The former byte is 0 for normal termination, the latter -is customarily 0 for successful execution, nonzero -to indicate troubles such as erroneous parameters, bad or inaccessible data, -or other inability to cope with the task at hand. -It is called variously `exit code', `exit status' or -`return code', and is described only where special -conventions are involved. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/jim.1 b/static/v10/man1/jim.1 deleted file mode 100755 index f43ae986..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/jim.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,331 +0,0 @@ -.TH JIM 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -jim, jim.recover\- 630 MTG text editor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B jim -[ -.B \-c -] [ files \&. \&. \&. ] -.br -\f3jim.\(**\f1 -[ -.B \-f -] [ -.B \-t -] [ files \&. \&. \&. ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Jim -is the text editor for the 630 MTG terminal. -.P -It is a shared cached application if the \f3\-c\f1 option is -specified. -This means that multiple instances of jim -may run simultaneously without needing to do a download for -each instance. Once jim is downloaded it does not have to be -downloaded again. -.P -Jim relies on the mouse to select text and commands; -it runs only under -.IR layers (1). -.IR Jim 's -screen consists of a number of -.IR frames , -a one-line command and diagnostic frame at the bottom, -and zero or more larger file frames above it. -Except where indicated, these frames behave identically. -One of the frames is always the current frame, -to which typing and editing commands refer, -and one of the file frames is the working frame, -to which file commands such as pattern searching and I/O refer. -.PP -A frame has at any time a selected region of text, -indicated by reverse video highlighting. -The selected region may be a null string between two characters, -indicated by a narrow vertical bar between the characters. -The editor has a single -.I "save buffer -containing an arbitrary string. -The editing commands simply invoke transformations between the -selected region and the save buffer. -.PP -The mouse buttons are used for the most common operations. -Button 1 is used for selection. -Clicking button 1 in a frame -which is not the current frame makes the indicated frame current. -Clicking button 1 in the current frame selects the null string closest -to the mouse cursor. -Making the same null selection twice (`double clicking') selects -(in decreasing precedence) the bracketed or quoted string, word, or line -enclosing the selection. -By depressing and holding button 1, an arbitrary contiguous visible string -may be selected. -Button 2 provides a small menu of text manipulation functions, described below. -Button 3 provides control for inter-frame operations. -.PP -The button 2 menu entries are: -.TP -.B cut -Copy the selected text to the save buffer and delete it from the frame. -If the selected text is null, the save buffer is unaffected. -.TP -.B paste -Replace the selected text by the contents of the save buffer. -.TP -.B snarf -Copy the selected text to the save buffer. -If the selected text is null, the save buffer is unaffected. -.bp -.PP -Typing -replaces the selected text with the typed text. -If the selected text is not null, -the first character typed forces an implicit -.BR cut . -Control characters are discarded, but -BS (control H), -ETB (control W), -NL (control J) and ESC (escape) have special meanings. -BS is the usual backspace character, which erases the character before the selected text (which is a null string when it takes effect). -ETB erases back to the word boundary preceding the selected text. -There is no line kill character. -NL toggles the current frame between the workframe and the diagnostic -frame, and can be a substitute for manual frame selection with the -mouse. -ESC selects the text typed since the last button hit or ESC. -If an ESC is typed immediately after a button hit or ESC, -it is identical to a -.BR cut . -ESC followed by -.B paste -provides the functionality of a simple undo feature. -.PP -The button 3 menu entries are: -.TP -.B new -Create a new frame by sweeping with the mouse. -.TP -.B reshape -Change the shape of the indicated frame. -The frame is selected by clicking button 3 over the frame. -.TP -.B close -Close the indicated frame and its associated file. -The file is still available for editing later; -only the associated frame is shut down. -.TP -.B write -Write the indicated frame's contents to its associated file. -.PP -The rest of the menu is a list of file names available for editing. -To work in a different file, select the file from the menu. -If the file is not open on the screen, the cursor will switch to an -outline box to prompt for a rectangle to be swept out with button 3. -(Clicking button 3 without moving the mouse creates the largest -possible rectangle.) -If the file is already open, it will simply be made the workframe and -current frame (for typing), perhaps after redrawing if it is obscured -by another frame. -The format of the lines in the menu is: -.TP -\- -possibly an apostrophe, indicating that the file has been modified since -last written, -.TP -\- -possibly a period or asterisk, indicating the file is open (asterisk) or -the workframe (period), -.TP -\- -a blank, -.TP -\- -and the file name. -The file name may be abbreviated by compacting path components to keep -the menu manageable, but the last component will always be complete. -.bp -.PP -The work frame has a -.I "scroll bar -\(em a black vertical bar down the left edge. -A small tick in the bar indicates the relative position of the frame -within the file. -Pointing to the scroll bar and clicking a button controls scrolling -operations in the file: -.TP -button 1 -Move the line at the top of the screen to the y position of the mouse. -.TP -button 2 -Move to the absolute position in the file indicated by the y position of the mouse. -.TP -button 3 -Move the line at the y position of the mouse to the top of the screen. -.PP -The bottom line frame is used for a few typed commands, modeled on -.IR ed (1) , -which operate on the workframe. -When a carriage return is typed in the bottom line, -the line is interpreted as a command. -The bottom line scrolls, but only -when the first character of the next line is typed. -Thus, typically, after some message appears in the bottom line, -a command need only be typed; -the contents of the line will be automatically cleared when the first -character of the command is typed. -The commands available are: -.TP -.B e \f2file\f1\f3 -Edit the named -.IR file , -or use the current file name if none specified. -Note that each file frame has an associated file name. -.TP -.B E \f2file\f1\f3 -Edit the named -.IR file -unconditionally, as in \fIed\fP(1). -.TP -.B f \f2file\f1\f3 -Set the name of the -file associated with the work frame, if one is specified, -and display the result. -.TP -.B g \f2files\f1\f3 -Enter the named -.I files -into the filename menu, without duplication, -and set the work frame to one of the named files. -If the new work frame's file is not open, the user is prompted to create its frame. -The arguments to -.IT g -are passed through -.IR echo (1) -for shell metacharacter interpretation. -.TP -.B w \f2file\f1\f3 -Write the named -.IR file , -or use the current file name if none specified. -.TP -.B q -Quit the editor. -.bp -.TP -.B Q -Quit the editor unconditionally, as in \fIed\fP(1). -.TP -.B / -Search forward for the string matching the regular expression after the slash. -If found, the matching text is selected. -The regular expressions are exactly as in -.IR egrep (1), -with two additions: the character `@' matches any character -.I including -newline, and the sequence `\en' specifies a newline, even in character classes. -The negation of a character class does not match a newline. -An empty regular expression (slash-newline) repeats the last regular expression. -.TP -.B ? -Search backwards for the expression after the query. -.TP -.B 94 -Select the text of line 94, as in -.IR ed . -.TP -.B $ -Select the text of the last line. -.TP -.B cd \f2dir\f1\f3 -Set the working directory to \fIdir\fP, as in the shell. -There is no CDPATH search, but $HOME is the default \fIdir\fP. -.TP -.B = -Display the line number of selection in the current frame. -.TP -.B >\f2Unix-command\fP -Sends the selected text to the standard input of -.IR Unix-command . -.TP -.B <\f2Unix-command\fP -Replaces the selected text by the standard output of -.IR Unix-command . -.TP -.B |\|\f2Unix-command\fP -Replaces the selected text by the standard output of -.IR Unix-command, -given the original selected text as standard input. -.PP -If any of <, > or | is preceded by an asterisk \(**, -the command is applied to the entire file, instead of just the selected text. -If the command for < or | exits with non-zero status, the original text -is not deleted; otherwise, the new text is selected. -Finally, the standard error output of the command, which is merged with the -standard output for >, is saved in the file -$HOME/jim.err . -If the file is non-empty when the command completes, the first line is -displayed in the diagnostic frame. Therefore the command ``>pwd'' -will report -.IR jim 's -current directory. -.PP -The most recent search command ('/' or '?') and Unix command ('<', '|', -or '>') are added to the button 2 menu, so that they may be easily repeated. -.PP -Attempts to quit with modified files, or edit a new file -in a modified frame, are rejected. -A second `q' or `e' command will succeed. -The `Q' or `E' commands ignore modifications and work immediately. -Some consistency checks are performed for the `w' command. -.I jim -will reject write requests which it considers dangerous -(such as writes that change files which are modified when -read into memory). -A second `w' will always write the file. -.bp -.PP -If -.I jim -receives a hang-up signal, it writes a recover file, -which is a shell command file that, when executed, will -retrieve files that were being edited and had been modified. -The name of the file will be of the form \f2jim.\f1 followed -by a uniquely generated alphanumeric string. \f2Jim\f1 will -send mail to the logon id saying files may be recovered and -specifying the path and name of the recover file. If it cannot -write this file in the home directory, it writes it in the -current working directory. The \f3-t\f1 option prints a table -of contents. By default, the jim recover file is interactive; -the \f3-f\f1 option suppresses the interaction. -If no \f2file\f1 argument is given to the jim.recover shell -file, the recovery will apply to all modified files at the -time when jim received the hang-up signal. If there is a -\f2file\f1 argument, only those files will be recovered. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'$DMD/lib/jim.m 'u -$DMD/lib/jim.m terminal support program -.br -/tmp/jim.\(** temporary file -.br -$HOME/jim.err diagnostic output from Unix commands -.br -jim.\(** recovery script created upon \fIjim\fP failure -.SH SEE ALSO -ucache(1). -.br -ed(1), echo(1), egrep(1) in the \f2UNIX System V -User's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -layers(1) in the \f2Unix System V Release 3 User's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -layers(1) in the \f25620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference Manual.\f1 -.SH WARNING -\f2Jim\f1 is reshapable, but a reshape clears the screen -space of all open frames. -.SH BUGS -\" spectacular is the real word... -The regular expression matcher is non-deterministic (unlike -.IR egrep ), -and may be slow for -complicated expressions. -.P -The < and | operators don't snarf the original text. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/join.1 b/static/v10/man1/join.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 94117fff..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/join.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ -.TH JOIN 1 -.CT 1 files -.SH NAME -join \(mi relational database operator -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B join -[ -.I options -] -.I file1 file2 -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Join -forms, on the standard output, -a join -of the two relations specified by the lines of -.I file1 -and -.IR file2 . -If one of the file names is -.LR - , -the standard input is used. -.PP -.I File1 -and -.I file2 -must be sorted in increasing -.SM ASCII -collating -sequence on the fields -on which they are to be joined, -normally the first in each line. -.PP -There is one line in the output -for each pair of lines in -.I file1 -and -.I file2 -that have identical join fields. -The output line normally consists of the common field, -then the rest of the line from -.IR file1 , -then the rest of the line from -.IR file2 . -.PP -Input fields are normally separated spaces or tabs; -output fields by space. -In this case, multiple separators count as one, and -leading separators are discarded. -.PP -The following options are recognized, with Posix syntax. -.TP -.BI -a " n -In addition to the normal output, -produce a line for each unpairable line in file -.IR n , -where -.I n -is 1 or 2. -.TP -.BI -v " n -Like -.BI -a , -omitting output for paired lines. -.TP -.BI -e " s -Replace empty output fields by string -.IR s . -.TP -.BI -1 " m -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI -2 " m -Join on the -.IR m th -field of -.I file1 -or -.I file2. -.TP -.BI -j "n m" -Archaic equivalent for -.BI - n " m. -.TP -.BI -o fields -Each output line comprises the designated fields. -The comma-separated field designators are either -.BR 0 , -meaning the join field, or have the form -.IR n . m , -where -.I n -is a file number and -.I m -is a field number. -Archaic usage allows separate arguments for field designators. -.PP -.TP -.BI -t c -Use character -.I c -as the only separator (tab character) on input and output. -Every appearance of -.I c -in a line is significant. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -sort /etc/password | join -t: -a 1 -e "" - bdays -Add birthdays to password information, leaving unknown -birthdays empty. -The layout of -.F /etc/passwd -is given in -.IR passwd (5); -.B bdays -contains sorted lines like -.LR "ken:Feb\ 4" . -.TP -.L -tr : ' ' temp -.br -.ns -.TP -.L -join -1 3 -2 3 -o 1.1,2.1 temp temp | awk '$1 < $2' -Print all pairs of users with identical userids. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sort (1), -.IR comm (1), -.IR awk (1) -.SH BUGS -With default field separation, -the collating sequence is that of -.BI "sort -b" -.BI -k y , y, -with -.BR -t , -the sequence is that of -.BI "sort -t" x -.BI -k y , y. -.br -One of the files must be randomly accessible. - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/jx.1 b/static/v10/man1/jx.1 deleted file mode 100755 index ab0ebc03..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/jx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,130 +0,0 @@ -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH JX 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -jx \- 630 MTG execution and stdio interpreter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B jx -[\fB \-d \fR] [\fB \-p \fR] [\fB \-z \fR] [ \fB\-f\fR ] [ \fB\-Z\fR n ] [ \fB\-n\fR ] file -.br -[ command line arguments] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I jx -utility -downloads the program in -.I file -to the 630 MTG -and runs it there, simulating most of the standard I/O library -functions. -This gives application programs downloaded into the 630 MTG the ability -to perform operations such as file I/O to files resident on the host -computer, using the same interface as programs -written for execution on the host computer. -.PP -The jx utility calls -.I dmdld -to do the download into the terminal. Therefore, the -\f2-d\f1, \f2-p\f1, \f2-z\f1, \f2-f\f1, \f2-Z\f1, and \f2-n\f1 -options are available for use with \f2jx\f1. See the -.I dmdld(1) -manual page for information on these options. -.PP -\fIStdin\fR directed to the host portion of \f2jx\f1, either through the \f2jx\f1 -command line or with the \fIpopen\fR function, is properly redirected. -Note that input from the 630 MTG keyboard is not translated to \fIstdin\fR -to the host portion of \f2jx\f1. Rather, programs wishing to read from the -keyboard should use \fIkbdchar\fR(3R). -.PP -.I Stdout -and \fIstderr\fR, written to by the below library functions, -will be stored in a buffer during execution. -After the terminal program has -been rebooted, -.I stdout -and -.I stdin -will be redirected to the terminal. -.PP -Programs intended for use by -.I jx -should include \f3\f1 and <\f3dmdio.h\f1> -and call \fIexit\fR(3R) upon termination. \fIExit\fR() returns control to -the shell and causes a reboot of -the default terminal emulator. -.PP -What follows is a list of -stdio library functions available under \fIjx\fR. -These functions are called -from an application downloaded into the 630 MTG -by \f2jx\f1. The \f2jx\f1 library routines in the terminal then -translate the call into a message which is sent to the host portion -of \f2jx\f1 for processing. -.sp -.TS -center; -l l l l. -getc getchar fgets fflush -.sp -putc putchar puts fputs -.sp -fopen freopen fclose access -.sp -popen pclose fread fwrite -.sp -printf Printf fprintf Fprintf -.TE -.sp -The functions fprintf and printf are stripped down versions of -those on UNIX. The functions that start with an upper case -letter are identical to those on UNIX. See printf(3L) for more -details. -.bp -.SH FILES -.nf -$DMD/include/dmdio.h - -$DMD/lib/sysint host portion of \f2jx\f1 after download is complete - -$HOME/.jxout saved standard output - -$HOME/.jxerr saved standard diagnostic output -.fi -.SH SEE ALSO -dmdld(1), exit(3R), kbdchar(3R), printf(3L). -.br -access(2), -fopen(3S), -fread(3S), -getc(3S), -popen(3S), -printf(3S), -putc(3S), -puts(3S) in the -\f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference Manual\f1. -.SH WARNING -.P -Because 630 MTG keyboard data is not sent to the \f2stdin\f1 of the -host component of \f2jx\f1, applications running under \f2jx\f1 which read -from the \f2stdin\f1 will hang if their \f2stdin\f1 is not redirected. -.P -The \f2stdin\f1 can be redirected either from the command line or by -function calls inside the application process running on the -630 MTG terminal. -.SH BUGS -.I Jx -does not work when su'ed to another user. -.P -.I Jx -does not work in the nonlayers environment. -.P -\fIJx\fR does not work with application cached with -\fBA_SHARED\fR, \fBA_BSS\fR or \fBA_DATA\fR. -.P -\fIStderr\fR is buffered. Use fflush (stderr) if this is a -problem. -.P -\fIgetc(), getchar(), putc()\fR, and \fIputchar()\fR are not -macros as described in \fIgetc(3S)\fR and \fIputc(3S)\fR. -.P -The \fIfopen()\fR routine does not support the following -modes: r+, w+, a+. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/kill.1 b/static/v10/man1/kill.1 deleted file mode 100644 index df1c0cbe..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/kill.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -.th KILL I 8/18/73 -.sh NAME -kill \*- do in an unwanted process -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd kill -processid ... -.sh DESCRIPTION -Kills the specified processes. -The processid of each asynchronous process -started with `&' is reported by the shell. -Processid's can also be found by using \fIps\fR (I). -.s3 -The killed process must have -been started from the same typewriter -as the current user, unless -he is the superuser. -.sh "SEE ALSO" -ps(I), sh(I) -.sh BUGS -Clearly people should only be allowed to kill -processes owned by them, and having the same typewriter -is neither necessary nor sufficient. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/kp.1 b/static/v10/man1/kp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 58502a5b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/kp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ -.TH KP 1 -.CT 1 proc_man sa_mortals -.SH NAME -kp \(mi kernel profiling -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B kp -[ -.B -t -.I duration -] -[ -.B -c -.I command -] -[ -- -.B fsx -] -[ -.I kernel -] -.PP -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Kp -prints kernel profiling data. -If the -.B -t -option is specified -.I kp -uses data collected during a -sleep of the indicated duration -(in seconds). -If the -.B -c -option is specified -.I kp -uses data -collected while the indicated command is run -by -.IR system (3). -If neither option is specified -all profiling data since last boot is used; -it is illegal to specify both -.B -t -and -.B -c -options. -.LP -Profiling data consists of -(1) -clock-driven -.IR profil (2)-style -pc bucket counting -and -(2) -system call counts. -The bucket counts are reported resolved to the kernel source-file level -or the -external text symbol level, -according to whether the -.B -f -or -.B -x -options is given, respectively. -Raw unscaled bucket tick counts are given. -System call counts are reported if the -.B -s -option is specified. -Specifying none of -.B sfx -is equivalent to specifying them all: -the default treatment is to report ``the works.'' -.LP -Normally the namelist in -.B /unix -is believed, but this may be overruled by giving the filename -.I kernel -argument. -.LP -Since this program needs privileges to read -.FR /dev/kmem , -the -.B -c -option -is an invitation to horesmanship. -.SH FILES -.B /unix -.br -.B /dev/kmem -.SH BUGS -Not sorted. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ksh.1 b/static/v10/man1/ksh.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3ed7ef3b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ksh.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3787 +0,0 @@ -.ds OK [\| -.ds CK \|] -.ds ' \s+4\v@.3m@\'\v@-.3m@\s-4 -.ds ` \s+4\v@.3m@\`\v@-.3m@\s-4 -.de P -.br -.. -.TH KSH 1 -.SH NAME -ksh \- Korn shell, the not standard command programming language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ksh -[ -.B \-acefhikmnorstuvx -] [ -.B \-o -option ] .\|.\|. -[ arg .\|.\|. ] -.br -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ksh\^ -is a command programming language -that executes commands read from a terminal -or a file. -.I Rsh\^ -is a restricted version of the standard command interpreter -.IR sh ; -it is used to set up login names and execution environments whose -capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. -See -.I Invocation\^ -below -for the meaning of arguments to the shell. -.SS Definitions. -A -.I metacharacter\^ -is one of the following characters: -.RS -.PP -\f3; & ( ) \(bv < > new-line space tab\fP -.RE -.PP -A -.I blank\^ -is a -.B tab -or a -.BR space . -An -.I identifier\^ -is a sequence of letters, digits, or underscores -starting with a letter or underscore. -Identifiers are used as names for -.IR aliases , -.IR functions , -and -.IR "named parameters" . -A -.I word\^ -is a sequence of -.I characters\^ -separated by one or more non-quoted -.IR metacharacters . -.SS Commands. -A -.I simple-command\^ -is a sequence of -.I blank\^ -separated words -which may be preceded by a parameter assignment list. -(See -.I Environment\^ -below). -The first word specifies the name of the command to -be executed. -Except as specified below, -the remaining words are passed as arguments -to the invoked command. -The command name is passed as argument 0 -(see -.IR exec (2)). -The -.I value\^ -of a simple-command is its exit status -if it terminates normally, or (octal) 200+\f2status\^\fP if -it terminates abnormally (see -.IR signal (2) -for a list of -status values). -.PP -A -.I pipeline\^ -is a sequence of one or more -.I commands\^ -separated by -.BR \(bv . -The standard output of each command but the last -is connected by a -.IR pipe (2) -to the standard input of the next command. -Each command is run as a separate process; -the shell waits for the last command to terminate. -The exit status of a pipeline is the exit -status of the last command. -.PP -A -.I list\^ -is a sequence of one or more -pipelines -separated by -.BR ; , -.BR & , -.BR && , -or -.BR \(bv\|\(bv , -and optionally terminated by -.BR ; , -.BR & , -or -.BR \(bv& . -Of these five symbols, -.BR ; , -.BR & , -and -.BR \(bv& -have equal precedence, -which is lower than that of -.B && -and -.BR \(bv\|\(bv . -The symbols -.B && -and -.B \(bv\|\(bv -also have equal precedence. -A semicolon -.RB ( ; ) -causes sequential execution of the preceding pipeline; an ampersand -.RB ( & ) -causes asynchronous execution of the preceding pipeline (i.e., the shell does -.I not\^ -wait for that pipeline to finish). -The symbol -.B \(bv& -causes asynchronous execution of the preceding command or pipeline -with a two-way pipe established to the parent shell. -The standard input and output of the spawned command -can be written to and read from by the parent Shell -using the -.B \-p -option of -the special commands -.B read -and -.B print\^ -described later. -Only one such command can be active -at any given time. -The symbol -.B && -.RB (\| \(bv\|\(bv \^) -causes the -.I list\^ -following it to be executed only if the preceding -pipeline -returns a zero (non-zero) value. -An arbitrary number of new-lines may appear in a -.I list,\^ -instead of semicolons, -to delimit commands. -.PP -A -.I command\^ -is either a simple-command -or one of the following. -Unless otherwise stated, -the value returned by a command is that of the -last simple-command executed in the command. -.TP -\f3for\fP \f2identifier\^\fP \*(OK \f3in\fP \f2word\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP -Each time a -.B for -command is executed, -.I identifier\^ -is set to the next -.I word\^ -taken from the -.B in -.I word\^ -list. -If -.BI in " word\^" -\&.\|.\|. -is omitted, then -the -.B for -command executes the \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP once for each positional parameter -that is set -(see -.I "Parameter Substitution\^" -below). -Execution ends when there are no more words in the list. -.TP -\f3select\fP \f2identifier\^\fP \*(OK \f3in\fP \f2word\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP -A -.B select -command prints on standard error (file descriptor 2), the set of -.IR word s, -each preceded by a number. -If -.BI in " word\^" -\&.\|.\|. -is omitted, then -the -positional parameters -are used instead -(see -.I "Parameter Substitution\^" -below). -The -.SM -.B PS3 -prompt is printed -and a line is read from the standard input. -If this line consists of the number -of one of the listed -.BR word s, -then the value of the parameter -.I identifier\^ -is set to the -.I word\^ -corresponding to this number. -If this line is empty the selection list is -printed again. -Otherwise the value of the parameter -.I identifier\^ -is set to -.BR null . -The contents of the line read from standard input is -saved in -the parameter -.SM -.BR REPLY. -The -.I list\^ -is executed for each selection until a -.B break\^ -or -.I end-of-file\^ -is encountered. -.TP -\f3case\fP \f2word\^\fP \f3in\fP \*(OK \f2pattern\^\fP \*(OK \(bv \ -\f2pattern\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3)\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;;\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3esac\fP -A -.B case -command executes the -.I list\^ -associated with the first -.I pattern\^ -that matches -.IR word . -The form of the patterns is -the same as that used for -file-name generation (see -.I "File Name Generation\^" -below). -.TP -\f3if\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(OK \ -\f3elif\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \ -\*(OK \f3else\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK \f3f\&i\fP -The -.I list\^ -following \f3if\fP is executed and, -if it -returns a zero exit status, the -.I list\^ -following -the first -.B then -is executed. -Otherwise, the -.I list\^ -following \f3elif\fP -is executed and, if its value is zero, -the -.I list\^ -following -the next -.B then -is executed. -Failing that, the -.B else -.I list\^ -is executed. -If no -.B else -.I list\^ -or -.B then -.I list\^ -is executed, then the -.B if -command returns a zero exit status. -.TP -.PD 0 -\f3while\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP -.TP -\f3until\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP -.PD -A -.B while -command repeatedly executes the -.B while -.I list\^ -and, if the exit status of the last command in the list is zero, executes -the -.B do -.IR list ; -otherwise the loop terminates. -If no commands in the -.B do -.I list\^ -are executed, then the -.B while -command returns a zero exit status; -.B until -may be used in place of -.B while -to negate -the loop termination test. -.TP -\f3(\fP\f2list\^\fP\f3)\fP -.br -Execute -.I list\^ -in a separate environment. -Note, that if two adjacent open parentheses are -needed for nesting, a space must be inserted to avoid -arithmetic evaluation as described below. -.TP -\f3{ \fP\f2list\^\fP\f3;}\fP -.br -.I list\^ -is simply executed. -Note that -.B { -is a -.I keyword\^ -and requires a blank -in order to be recognized. -.TP -.PD 0 -\f3function\fP \f2identifier\^\fP \f3{\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;}\fP -.TP -\f2identifier\^\fP \f3() {\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;}\fP -.PD -Define a function which is referenced by -.IR identifier . -The body of the function is the -.I list\^ -of commands between -.B { -and -.BR } . -(See -.I Functions\^ -below). -.TP -\f3time \fP\f2pipeline\^\fP -.br -The -.I pipeline\^ -is executed and the elapsed time as well as -the user and system time are printed on standard error. -.PP -The following keywords -are only recognized as the first word of a command -and when not quoted: -.if t .RS -.PP -.B -.if n if then else elif fi case esac for while until do done { } function select time -.if t if then else elif fi case esac for while until do done { } function select time -.if t .RE -.SS Comments. -A word beginning with -.B # -causes that word and all the following characters up to a new-line -to be ignored. -.SS Aliasing. -The first word of each command is replaced by the text of an -.B alias -if an -.B alias -for this word has been defined. -The -first character of an -.B alias -name can be any printable character, -but the rest of the characters -must be the same as for a valid -.IR identifier . -The replacement string can contain any -valid Shell script -including the metacharacters listed above. -The first word of each command of the -replaced text will not be tested for additional aliases. -If the last character of the alias value is a -.I blank\^ -then the word following the alias will also be checked for alias -substitution. -Aliases can be used to redefine special -builtin commands but cannot be used to redefine -the keywords listed above. -Aliases can be created, listed, and exported with the -.B alias -command and can be removed with the -.B unalias -command. -Exported aliases remain in effect for sub-shells -but must be reinitialized for separate invocations -of the Shell (See -.I Invocation\^ -below). -.PP -.I Aliasing\^ -is performed when -scripts are read, -not while they are executed. -Therefore, -for an alias to take effect -the -.B -alias -command has to be executed before -the command which references the alias is read. -.PP -Aliases are frequently used as a short hand for full path -names. -An option to the aliasing facility allows the value of the alias -to be automatically set to the full pathname of -the corresponding command. -These aliases are called -.I tracked -aliases. -The value of a -.I tracked -alias is defined the first time the identifier -is read and becomes undefined each time -the -.SM -.B PATH -variable is reset. -These aliases remain -.I tracked -so that the next -subsequent reference will redefine the value. -Several tracked aliases are compiled into the shell. -The -.B \-h -option of the -.B set -command makes each command name which is an -.I identifier\^ -into a tracked alias. -.PP -The following -.I exported aliases -are compiled into the shell -but can be unset or redefined: -.RS 20 -.PD 0 -.TP -.B "echo=\(fmprint \-\(fm" -.TP -.B "false=\(fmlet 0\(fm" -.TP -.B "functions=\(fmtypeset \-f\(fm" -.TP -.B "history=\(fmfc \-l\(fm" -.TP -.B "integer=\(fmtypeset \-i\(fm" -.TP -.B "nohup=\(fmnohup \(fm" -.TP -.B "pwd=\(fmprint \- $\s-1PWD\s+1\(fm" -.TP -.B "r=\(fmfc \-e \-\(fm" -.TP -.B "true=\(fm:\(fm" -.TP -.B "type=\(fmwhence \-v\(fm" -.TP -.B "hash=\(fmalias \-t\(fm" -.PD -.RE -.SS Tilde Substitution. -After alias substitution is performed, each word -is checked to see if it begins with an unquoted -.BR \(ap . -If it does, then the word up to a -.B / -is checked to see if it matches a user name in the -.B /etc/passwd -file. -If a match is found, the -.B \(ap -and the matched login name is replaced by the -login directory of the matched user. -This is called a -.I tilde -substitution. -If no match is found, the original text is left unchanged. -A -.B \(ap -by itself, or in front of a -.BR / , -is replaced by the value of the -.B -.SM HOME -parameter. -A -.B \(ap -followed by a -.B + -or -.B \- -is replaced by the value of -the parameter -.B -.SM PWD -and -.B -.SM OLDPWD -respectively. -.PP -In addition, the value of each -.I "keyword parameter" -is checked to see if it begins with a -.B \(ap -or if a -.B \(ap -appears after a -.BR : . -In either of these cases a -.I tilde -substitution is attempted. -.SS Command Substitution. -The standard output from a command enclosed in -a pair of grave accents (\^\f3\*`\^\*`\fP\^) may be used as part or all -of a word; -trailing new-lines are removed. -The command substitution -\^\f3\*`\^cat file\^\*`\fP\^ -can be replaced by the equivalent but faster -\^\f3\*`\^ \|" ''. -.TP -.SM -.B PS3 -Selection prompt string -used within a -.B select -loop, by default -.RB `` "#? \|" ''. -.TP -.SM -.B SHELL -The pathname of the -.I shell\^ -is kept in the environment. -At invocation, if the value of this variable contains an -.B r -in the basename, -then the shell becomes restricted. -.TP -.B -.SM TMOUT -If set to a value greater than zero, -the shell will terminate if a command is not entered within -the prescribed number of seconds. -(Note that the shell can be compiled with a maximum bound -for this value which cannot be exceeded.) -.TP -.B -.SM VISUAL -If the value of this variable ends in -.IR emacs , -.IR gmacs , -or -.I vi -then the corresponding option -(see Special Command -.B set -below) -will be turned on. -.PD -.RE -.PP -The shell gives default values to -\f3\s-1PATH\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS1\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS2\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1MAILCHECK\s+1\fP, -\f3\s-1TMOUT\s+1\fP and \f3\s-1IFS\s+1\fP, -while -.SM -.BR HOME , -.SM -.B SHELL -.SM -.B ENV -and -.SM -.B MAIL -are -not set at all by the shell (although -.SM -.B HOME -.I is\^ -set by -.IR login (1)). -On some systems -.SM -.B MAIL -and -.SM -.B SHELL -are also -set by -.IR login (1)). -.SS Blank Interpretation. -After parameter and command substitution, -the results of substitutions are scanned for the field separator -characters ( -those found in -.SM -.B IFS -) -and split into distinct arguments where such characters are found. -Explicit null arguments (\^\f3"\^"\fP or \f3\*\(fm\^\*\(fm\fP\^) are retained. -Implicit null arguments -(those resulting from -.I parameters\^ -that have no values) are removed. -.SS File Name Generation. -Following substitution, each command -.I word\^ -is scanned for -the characters -.BR \(** , -.BR ? , -and -.B \*(OK\^ -unless the -.B \-f -option has been -.BR set . -If one of these characters appears -then the word is regarded as a -.IR pattern . -The word is replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pattern. -If no file name is found that matches the pattern, then -the word is left unchanged. -When a -.I pattern\^ -is used for file name generation, -the character -.B . -at the start of a file name -or immediately following a -.BR / , -as well as the character -.B / -itself, -must be matched explicitly. -In other instances of pattern matching the -.B / -and -.B . -are not treated specially. -.PP -.PD 0 -.RS -.TP -.B \(** -Matches any string, including the null string. -.TP -.B ? -Matches any single character. -.TP -.BR \*(OK \^.\|.\|.\^ \*(CK -Matches any one of the enclosed characters. -A pair of characters separated by -.B \- -matches any -character lexically between the pair, inclusive. -If the first character following the opening "[ \|" -is a "! \|" then any character not enclosed is matched. -A -.B \- -can be included in the character set by putting it as the -first or last character. -.PD -.RE -.SS Quoting. -Each of the -.I metacharacters\^ -listed above (See -.I Definitions -above). -has a special meaning to the shell -and cause termination of a word unless quoted. -A character may be -.I quoted\^ -(i.e., made to stand for itself) -by preceding -it with a -.BR \e . -The pair -.B \enew-line -is ignored. -All characters enclosed between a pair of single quote marks (\^\f3\(fm\^\(fm\fP\^), -except a single quote, -are quoted. -Inside double quote marks -(\f3"\^"\fP), -parameter and command substitution occurs and -.B \e -quotes the characters -.BR \e , -.BR \(fm , -\f3"\fP, -and -.BR $ . -.B -"$\(**" -is equivalent to -\f3"$1 \|$2\fP \|.\|.\|.\f3"\fP, -whereas -.B -"$@" -is equivalent to -.B -"$1"\| -.B -"$2"\| -\&.\|.\|.\^. -.PP -The special meaning of keywords can be removed by quoting any -character of the keyword. -The recognition of special command names listed below cannot be altered -by quoting them. -.SS Arithmetic Evaluation. -An ability to perform integer arithmetic -is provided with the special command -.BR let . -Evaluations are performed using -.I long\^ -arithmetic. -Constants are of the form -\*(OK\f2base\f3#\^\f1\*(CK\f2n\^\fP -where -.I base\^ -is a decimal number between two and thirty-six -representing the arithmetic base -and -.I n\^ -is a number in that base. -If -.I base\^ -is omitted -then base 10 is used. -.PP -An internal integer representation of a -.I named parameter\^ -can be specified with the -.B \-i -option of the -.B typeset -special command. -When this attribute is selected -the first assignment to the -parameter determines the arithmetic base -to be used when -parameter substitution occurs. -.PP -Since many of the arithmetic operators require -quoting, an alternative form of the -.B let -command is provided. -For any command which begins with a -.BR (( , -all the characters until a matching -.B )) -are treated as a quoted expression. -More precisely, -.B (( -\&.\|.\|. -.B )) -is equivalent to -.B let\^ -\f3"\fP \|.\|.\|.\f3"\fP. -.SS Prompting. -When used interactively, -the shell prompts with the value of -.SM -.B PS1 -before reading a command. -If at any time a new-line is typed and further input is needed -to complete a command, then the secondary prompt -(i.e., the value of -.BR \s-1PS2\s+1 ) -is issued. -.SS Input/Output. -Before a command is executed, its input and output -may be redirected using a special notation interpreted by the shell. -The following may appear anywhere in a simple-command -or may precede or follow a -.I command\^ -and are -.I not\^ -passed on to the invoked command. -Command and parameter substitution occurs before -.I word\^ -or -.I digit\^ -is used except as noted below. -File name generation -occurs only if the pattern matches a single file -and blank interpretation is not performed. -.TP 14 -.BI < word -Use file -.I word\^ -as standard input (file descriptor 0). -.TP -.BI > word -Use file -.I word\^ -as standard output (file descriptor 1). -If the file does not exist then it is created; -otherwise, it is truncated to zero length. -.TP -.BI >\h@-.3m@> word -Use file -.I word\^ -as standard output. -If the file exists then output is appended to it (by first seeking to the end-of-file); -otherwise, the file is created. -.TP -\f3<\h@-.3m@<\fP\*(OK\f3\-\fP\*(CK\f2word\fP -The shell input is read up to a line that is the same as -.IR word , -or to an end-of-file. -No parameter substitution, command substitution or -file name generation is performed on -.IR word . -The resulting document, -called a -.IR here-document , -becomes -the standard input. -If any character of -.I word\^ -is quoted, then no interpretation -is placed upon the characters of the document; -otherwise, parameter and command substitution occurs, -.B \enew-line -is ignored, -and -.B \e -must be used to quote the characters -.BR \e , -.BR $ , -.BR \*` , -and the first character of -.IR word . -If -.B \- -is appended to -.BR <\h@-.3m@< , -then all leading tabs are stripped from -.I word\^ -and from the document. -.TP -.BI <& digit -The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor -.I digit -(see -.IR dup (2)). -Similarly for the standard output using -.BR >& -.IR digit . -.TP -.B <&\- -The standard input is closed. -Similarly for the standard output using -.BR >&\- . -.PP -If one of the above is preceded by a digit, -then the -file descriptor number referred to is that specified -by the digit -(instead of the default 0 or 1). -For example: -.RS -.PP -\&.\|.\|. \|2>&1 -.RE -.PP -means file descriptor 2 is to be opened -for writing as a duplicate -of file descriptor 1. -.PP -The order in which redirections are specified is significant. -The shell evaluates each redirection in terms of the -.RI ( "file descriptor" ", " file ) -association at the time of evaluation. -For example: -.RS -.PP -\&.\|.\|. \|1>\f2fname\^\fP 2>&1 -.RE -.PP -first associates file descriptor 1 with file -.IR fname\^ . -It then associates file descriptor 2 with the file associated with file -descriptor 1 (i.e. -.IR fname\^ ). -If the order of redirections were reversed, file descriptor 2 would be associated -with the terminal (assuming file descriptor 1 had been) and then file descriptor -1 would be associated with file -.IR fname\^ . -.PP -If a command is followed by -.B & -and job control is not active, -then the default standard input -for the command -is the empty file -.BR /dev/null . -Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains the -file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by -input/output specifications. -.SS Environment. -The -.I environment\^ -(see -.IR environ (7)) -is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to -an executed program in the same way as a normal argument list. -The names must be -.I identifiers\^ -and the values are character strings. -The shell interacts with the environment in several ways. -On invocation, the shell scans the environment -and creates a -parameter -for each name found, -giving it the corresponding value and marking it -.I export . -Executed commands inherit the environment. -If the user modifies the values of these -parameters -or creates new ones, -using the -.B export -or -.B typeset \-x -commands they become part of the -environment. -The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed -of any name-value pairs originally inherited by the shell, -whose values may be modified by the current shell, -plus any additions -which must be noted in -.B export -or -.B typeset \-x -commands. -.PP -The environment for any -.I simple-command\^ -or function -may be augmented by prefixing it with one or more parameter assignments. -A parameter assignment argument is a word of the form -.IR identifier=value . -Thus: -.RS -.PP -\s-1TERM\s+1=450 \|cmd \|args and -.br -(export \|\s-1TERM\s+1; \|\s-1TERM\s+1=450; \|cmd \|args) -.RE -.PP -are equivalent (as far as the above execution of -.I cmd\^ -is concerned). -.PP -If the -.B \-k -flag is set, -.I all\^ -parameter assignment arguments are placed in the environment, -even if they occur after the command name. -The following -first prints -.B "a=b c" -and then -.BR c: -.PP -.RS -.nf -echo \|a=b \|c -set \|\-k -echo \|a=b \|c -.fi -.RE -.SS Functions. -.PP -The -.B function\^ -keyword, described in the -.I Commands -section above, -is used to define shell functions. -Shell functions are read in and stored internally. -Alias names are resolved when the function is read. -Functions are executed like commands with the arguments -passed as positional parameters. -(See -.I Execution -below). -.PP -Functions execute in the same process as the caller and -share all files, traps ( other than -.SM -.B EXIT -and -.SM -.BR ERR ) -and present working directory with the -caller. -A trap set on -.SM -.B EXIT -inside a function -is executed after the function completes. -Ordinarily, -variables are shared between the calling program -and the function. -However, -the -.B typeset -special command used within a function -defines local variables whose scope includes -the current function and -all functions it calls. -.PP -The special command -.B return -is used to return -from function calls. -Errors within functions return control to the caller. -.PP -Function identifiers -can be listed with the -.B \-f -option of the -.B typeset -special command. -The text of functions will also -be listed. -Function can be undefined with the -.B \-f -option of the -.B unset -special command. -.PP -Ordinarily, -functions are unset when the shell executes a shell script. -The -.B \-xf -option of the -.B typeset -command allows a function to be exported -to scripts that are executed without a separate -invocation of the shell. -Functions that need to be defined across separate -invocations of the shell should be placed in the -.B -.SM -ENV -file. -.SS Jobs. -.PP -If the -.B monitor -option of the -.B set -command is turned on, -an interactive shell associates a \fIjob\fR with each pipeline. It keeps -a table of current jobs, printed by the -.B jobs -command, and assigns them small integer numbers. When -a job is started asynchronously with -.BR & , -the shell prints a line which looks -like: -.PP -.DT - [1] 1234 -.PP -indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was job number -1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process id was 1234. -.PP -This paragraph and the next require features that are -not in all versions of UNIX and may not apply. -If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the key -\fB^Z\fR (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to the current job. -The shell will then normally indicate that the job has been `Stopped', -and print another prompt. You can then manipulate the state of this job, -putting it in the background with the -.B bg -command, or run some other -commands and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground with -the foreground command -.BR fg . -A \fB^Z\fR takes effect immediately and -is like an interrupt in that pending output and unread input are discarded -when it is typed. -.PP -A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read -from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, -but this can be disabled by giving the command ``stty tostop''. -If you set this -tty option, then background jobs will stop when they try to produce -output like they do when they try to read input. -.PP -There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character -.B % -introduces a job name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can -name it as -.B %1 . -Jobs can also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to -.B kill -or restart them. -Thus, on systems that support job control, -.RB ` fg -.BR %ed ' -would normally restart -a suspended -.IR ed (1) -job, if there were a suspended job whose name began with -the string `ed'. -.PP -The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. -In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is marked with a -.B + -and the previous job with a -.BR \- . -The abbreviation -.B %+ -refers -to the current job and -.B %\- -refers to the previous job. -.B %% -is also a synonym for the current job. -.PP -This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state. -It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that -no further progress is possible, but only just before it prints -a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your work. -.PP -When you try to leave the shell while jobs are running or stopped, you will -be warned that `You have stopped(running) jobs.' You may use the -.B jobs -command to see what they are. If you do this or immediately try to -exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time, and the stopped -jobs will be terminated. -.SS Signals. -The \s-1INT\s+1 and \s-1QUIT\s+1 signals for an invoked -command are ignored if the command is followed by -.B & -and job -.B monitor -option is not active. -Otherwise, signals have the values -inherited by the shell from its parent, -with the exception of signal 11 -(but see also -the -.B trap -command below). -.SS Execution. -Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions -are carried out. -If the command name matches one -of the -.I "Special Commands\^" -listed below, -it is executed within the -current shell process. -Next, the command name is checked to see if -it matches one of the user defined functions. -If it does, -the positional parameters are saved -and then reset to the arguments of the -.I function\^ -call. -When the -.I function\^ -completes or issues a -.BR return , -the positional parameter list is restored -and any trap set on -.SM -.B EXIT -within the function is executed. -The value of a -.I function\^ -is the value of the last command executed. -A function is also executed in the -current shell process. -If a command name is not a -.I "special command\^" -or a user defined -.IR function , -a process is created and -an attempt is made to execute the command via -.IR exec (2). -.PP -The shell parameter -.B -.SM PATH -defines the search path for -the directory containing the command. -Alternative directory names are separated by -a colon -.RB ( : ). -The default path is -.B :/bin:/usr/bin -(specifying the current directory, -.BR /bin , -and -.BR /usr/bin , -in that order). -Note that the current directory -is specified by a null path name, -which can appear immediately after the -equal sign, between colon delimiters, -or at the end of the path list. -If the command name contains a \f3/\fP then the search path -is not used. -Otherwise, each directory in the path is -searched for an executable file. -If the file has execute permission but is not a -directory or an -.B a.out -file, -it is assumed to be a file containing shell commands. -A sub-shell is spawned to read it. -All non-exported aliases, -functions, -and named parameters are removed in this case. -A parenthesized command is also executed in -a sub-shell. -.SS Command Re-entry. -The text of the last -.B -.SM -HISTSIZE -(default 128) -commands entered from a terminal device -is saved in a -.I history -file. -The file -.B \s-1$HOME\s+1/.history -is used if the -.B -.SM -HISTFILE -variable is not set -or is not writable. -A shell can access the commands of -all -.I interactive -shells which use the same named -.SM -.BR HISTFILE . -The special command -.B fc\^ -is used to list or -edit a portion this file. -The portion of the file to be edited or listed can be selected by -number or by giving the first character or -characters of the command. -A single command or range of commands can be specified. -If you do not specify an editor program as -an argument to -.B fc\^ -then the value of the parameter -.SM -.B FCEDIT -is used. -If -.SM -.B FCEDIT -is not defined then -.I /bin/ed -is used. -The edited command(s) is printed and re-executed upon -leaving the editor. -The editor name -.B \- -is used to skip the editing phase and -to re-execute the command. -In this case a substitution parameter of the form -\f2old\fP\f3=\fP\f2new\fP -can be used to modify the command before execution. -For example, if -.B r -is aliased to -.B \(fmfc \-e \-\(fm -then typing -`\f3r bad=good c\fP' -will re-execute the most recent command which starts with the letter -.BR c , -replacing the string -.B bad -with the string -.BR good . -.SS In-line Editing Options -Normally, each command line entered from a terminal device is simply -typed followed by a new-line (`RETURN' or `LINE\ FEED'). -If either the -.IR emacs , -.IR gmacs , -or -.I vi -option is active, the user can edit the command line. -To be in either of these edit modes -.B set -the corresponding -option. -An editing option is automatically selected each time the -.SM -.B VISUAL -or -.SM -.B EDITOR -variable is assigned a value ending in either of these -option names. -.PP -The editing features require that the user's terminal -accept `RETURN' as carriage return without line feed -and that a space (`\ ' must overwrite the current character on -the screen. -ADM terminal users should set the "space\ -\ advance" -switch to `space'. -Hewlett-Packard series 2621 terminal users should set the straps to -`bcGHxZ\ etX'. -.PP -The editing modes implement a concept where the user is looking through a -window at the current line. -The window width is the value of -.SM -.B COLUMNS -if it is defined, otherwise 80. -If the line is longer than the window width minus two, a mark is -displayed at the end of the window to notify the user. -As the cursor moves and reaches the window boundaries the window will be -centered about the cursor. -The mark is a -.BR > " (" -.BR < ", " -.BR * ) -if the line extends on the -right (left, both) side(s) of the window. -.SS Emacs Editing Mode -This mode is entered by enabling either the -.I emacs -or -.I gmacs -option. -The only difference between these two modes is the way -they handle -.BR ^T . -To edit, the user -moves the cursor to the point needing correction and -then inserts or deletes characters or words as needed. -All the editing commands are control characters or escape -sequences. -The notation for control characters is caret ( -.B ^ -) followed -by the character. -For example, -.B ^F -is the notation for control -.BR F . -This is entered by depressing `f' while holding down the -`CTRL' (control) key. -The `SHIFT' key is -.I not -depressed. -(The notation -.B ^? -indicates the DEL (delete) key.) -.PP -The notation for escape sequences is -.B M- -followed by a -character. -For example, -.B M-f -(pronounced Meta f) -is entered by depressing ESC -(ascii -.B 033 -) -followed by `f'. -( -.B M-F -would be the notation for ESC followed by `SHIFT' (capital) `F'.) -.PP -All edit commands -operate from any place on the line -(not just at the beginning). -Neither the "RETURN" nor the "LINE FEED" key is -entered after edit commands except when noted. -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP 10 -.BI ^F -Move cursor forward (right) one character. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-f -Move cursor forward one word. -(The editor's idea of a word is a string of characters -consisting of only letters, digits and underscores.) -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^B -Move cursor backward (left) one character. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-b -Move cursor backward one word. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^A -Move cursor to start of line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^E -Move cursor to end of line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^] char -Move cursor to character -.I char -on current line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^X^X -Interchange the cursor and mark. -.PP -.TP 10 -.I erase -(User defined erase character as defined -by the stty command, usually -.B ^H -or -.BR # .) -Delete previous character. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^D -Delete current character. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-d -Delete current word. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-^H -(Meta-backspace) Delete previous word. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-h -Delete previous word. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-^? -(Meta-DEL) Delete previous word (if your interrupt character is -.B ^? -(DEL, the default) then this command will not work). -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^T -Transpose current character with next character in -.I emacs -mode. -Transpose two previous characters in -.I gmacs -mode. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^C -Capitalize current character. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-C -Capitalize current word. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^K -Kill from the cursor to the end of the line. -If given a parameter of zero then kill from -the start of line to the cursor. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^W -Kill from the cursor to the mark. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-p -Push the region from the cursor to the mark on the stack. -.PP -.TP 10 -.I kill -(User defined kill character as defined -by the stty command, usually -.B ^G -or -.BR @ .) -Kill the entire current line. -If two -.I kill -characters are entered in succession, all -kill characters from then on cause a line feed -(useful when using paper terminals). -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^Y -Restore last item removed from line. (Yank item back to the line.) -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^L -Line feed and print current line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^@ -(Null character) Set mark. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M- -(Meta space) Set mark. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^J -(New\ line) Execute the current line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^M -(Return) Execute the current line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.I eof -End-of-file character, -normally -.BR ^D , -will terminate the shell -if the current line is null. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^P -Fetch previous command. -Each time -.B ^P -is entered -the previous command back in time is accessed. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-< -Fetch the least recent (oldest) history line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M-> -Fetch the most recent (youngest) history line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^N -Fetch next command. -Each time -.B ^N -is entered -the next command forward in time is accessed. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^R string -Reverse search history for a previous command line containing -.IR string . -If a parameter of zero is given the search is forward. -.I String -is terminated by a "RETURN" or "NEW\ LINE". -.PP -.TP 10 -.B ^O -Operate \- Execute the current line and fetch -the next line relative to current line from the -history file. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M- digits -(Escape) Define numeric parameter, the digits -are taken as a parameter to the next command. -The commands that accept a parameter are -.BR ^F , -.BR ^B , -.IR erase , -.BR ^D , -.BR ^K , -.BR ^R , -.B ^P -and -.BR ^N . -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI M- letter -Soft-key \- Your alias list is searched for an -alias by the name -.BI _ letter -and if an alias of this name is defined, its -value will be inserted on the line. -The -.I letter -must not be one of the above meta-functions. -.PP -.TP 10 -.B M-_ -The last parameter of the previous command is inserted -on the line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.B M-. -The last parameter of the previous command is inserted -on the line. -.PP -.TP 10 -.B M-* -Attempt file name generation on the current word. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^U -Multiply parameter of next command by 4. -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI \e -Escape next character. -Editing characters, the user's erase, kill and -interrupt (normally -.B ^? -) -characters -may be entered -in a command line or in a search string if preceded by a -.BR \e . -The -.B \e -removes the next character's -editing features (if any). -.PP -.TP 10 -.BI ^V -Display version of the shell. -.PD -.SS Vi Editing Mode -There are two typing modes. -Initially, when you enter a command you are in the -.I input\^ -mode. -To edit, the user enters -.I control\^ -mode by typing ESC ( -.B 033 -) and -moves the cursor to the point needing correction and -then inserts or deletes characters or words as needed. -Most control commands accept an optional repeat -.I count -prior to the command. -.P -When in vi mode on most systems, -canonical processing is initially enabled and the -command will be echoed again if the speed is 1200 baud or greater and it -contains any control characters or less than one second has elapsed -since the prompt was printed. -The ESC character terminates canonical processing for the remainder of the command -and the user can than modify the command line. -This scheme has the advantages of canonical processing with the type-ahead -echoing of raw mode. -.P -If the option -.B viraw\^ -is also set, the terminal will always have canonical processing -disabled. This mode is implicit for systems that do not support two -alternate end of line delimiters, -and may be helpful for certain terminals. -.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Input Edit Commands" -.PP -.RS -By default the editor is in input mode. -.PD 0 -.TP 10 -.I erase -(User defined erase character as defined -by the stty command, usually -.B ^H -or -.BR # .) -Delete previous character. -.TP 10 -.BI ^W -Delete the previous blank separated word. -.TP 10 -.BI ^D -Terminate the shell. -.TP 10 -.BI ^V -Escape next character. -Editing characters, the user's erase or kill -characters may be entered -in a command line or in a search string if preceded by a -.BR ^V . -The -.B ^V -removes the next character's -editing features (if any). -.TP 10 -.BI \e -Escape the next -.I erase -or -.I kill -character. -.P -.RE -.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Motion Edit Commands" -.RS -These commands will move the cursor. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3l\fP -Cursor forward (right) one character. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3w\fP -Cursor forward one alpha-numeric word. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3W\fP -Cursor to the beginning of the next word that follows a blank. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3e\fP -Cursor to end of word. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3E\fP -Cursor to end of the current blank delimited word. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3h\fP -Cursor backward (left) one character. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3b\fP -Cursor backward one word. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3B\fP -Cursor to preceding blank separated word. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3f\fP\f2c\fP -Find the next character \fIc\fP in the current line. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3F\fP\f2c\fP -Find the previous character \fIc\fP in the current line. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3t\fP\f2c\fP -Equivalent to -.B f -followed by -.BR h . -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3T\fP\f2c\fP -Equivalent to -.B F -followed by -.BR l . -.TP 10 -.B ; -Repeats the last single character find command, -.BR f , -.BR F , -.BR t , -or -.BR T . -.TP 10 -.B , -Reverses the last single character find command. -.TP 10 -.B 0 -Cursor to start of line. -.TP 10 -.B ^ -Cursor to first non-blank character in line. -.TP 10 -.B $ -Cursor to end of line. -.RE -.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Search Edit Commands" -.RS -These commands access your command history. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3k\fP -Fetch previous command. -Each time -.B k -is entered -the previous command back in time is accessed. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3\-\fP -Equivalent to -.BR k . -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3j\fP -Fetch next command. -Each time -.B j -is entered -the next command forward in time is accessed. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3+\fP -Equivalent to -.BR j . -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3G\fP -The command number -.I count -is fetched. -The default is the least recent history command. -.TP 10 -.BI / string -Search backward through history for a previous command containing -.IR string . -.I String -is terminated by a "RETURN" or "NEW\ LINE". -If \fIstring\fP is null the previous string will be used. -.TP 10 -.BI ? string -Same as -.B / -except that search will be in the forward direction. -.TP 10 -.B n -Search for next match of the last pattern to -.B / -or -.B ? -commands. -.TP 10 -.B N -Search for next match of the last pattern to -.B / -or -.BR ? , -but in reverse direction. -Search history for the \fIstring\fP entered by the previous \fB/\fP command. -.RE -.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Text Modification Edit Commands" -.RS -These commands will modify the line. -.TP 10 -.B a -Enter input mode and enter text after the current character. -.TP 10 -.B A -Append text to the end of the line. Equivalent to -.BR $a . -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3c\fP\f2motion\fP -.TP 10 -\f3c\fP[\f2count\fP]\f2motion\fP -Delete current character through the character -.I motion -moves the cursor to and enter input mode. -If \fImotion\fP is -.BR c , -the entire line will be deleted and -input mode entered. -.TP 10 -.B C -Delete the current character through the end of line and enter input mode. -Equivalent to -.BR c$ . -.TP 10 -.B S -Equivalent to -.BR cc . -.TP 10 -.B D -Delete the current character through the end of line. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3d\fP\f2motion\fP -.TP 10 -\f3d\fP[\f2count\fP]\f2motion\fP -Delete current character through the character -.I motion -moves the cursor to. Equivalent to -.BR d$ . -If \fImotion\fP is -.B d , -the entire line will be deleted. -.TP 10 -.B i -Enter input mode and insert text before the current character. -.TP 10 -.B I -Insert text before the beginning of the line. Equivalent to -the two character sequence -.BR ^i . -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3P\fP -Place the previous text modification before the cursor. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3p\fP -Place the previous text modification after the cursor. -.TP 10 -.B R -Enter input mode and -replace characters on the screen with characters you type overlay fashion. -.TP 10 -.BI r c -Replace the current character with -.IR c . -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3x\fP -Delete current character. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3X\fP -Delete preceding character. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3.\fP -Repeat the previous text modification command. -.TP 10 -.B \(ap -Invert the case of the current character and advance the cursor. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3_\fP -Causes the -.I count\^ -word of the previous command to be appended and -input mode entered. -The last word is used -if -.I count\^ -is omitted. -.TP 10 -.B * -Causes an -.B * -to be appended to the current word and file name generation attempted. -If no match is found, -it rings the bell. Otherwise, the word is replaced -by the matching pattern and input mode is entered. -.RE -.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Other Edit Commands" -.RS -Miscellaneous commands. -.TP 10 -.B u -Undo the last text modifying command. -.TP 10 -.B U -Undo all the text modifying commands performed on the line. -.TP 10 -[\f2count\fP]\f3v\fP -Returns the command -.BI "fc \-e ${\s-1VISUAL\s+1:\-${\s-1EDITOR\s+1:\-vi}}" " count" -in the input buffer. -If -.I count\^ -is omitted, then the current line is used. -.TP 10 -.BI ^L -Line feed and print current line. -Has effect only in control mode. -.TP 10 -.BI ^J -(New\ line) Execute the current line, regardless of mode. -.TP 10 -.BI ^M -(Return) Execute the current line, regardless of mode. -.TP 10 -.B \# -Equivalent to -\f3I#\fP\f2\fP. -Useful for causing the current line to be -inserted in the history without being executed. -.RE -.PD -.SS Special Commands. -The following simple-commands are executed in the shell process. -Input/Output redirection is permitted. -File descriptor 1 is the default output location. -Parameter assignment lists preceding the command do not -remain in effect when the command completes unless noted. -.TP -\f3:\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. -The command only expands parameters. -A zero exit code is returned. -.br -.ne 2 -.TP -\f3\|. \f2file\^\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. -Read and execute commands from -.I file\^ -and return. -The commands are executed in the current Shell environment. -The search path -specified by -.B -.SM PATH -is used to find the directory containing -.IR file . -If any arguments -.I arg\^ -are given, -they become the positional parameters. -Otherwise the positional parameters are unchanged. -.TP -\f3alias\fP \*(OK \f3\-tx\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\fP\*(OK \f2=value\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \*(CK -.I Alias\^ -with no arguments prints the list of aliases -in the form -.I name=value\^ -on standard output. -An -.I alias\^ -is defined -for each name whose -.I value\^ -is given. -A trailing space in -.I value\^ -causes the next word to be checked for -alias substitution. -The -.B \-t -flag is used to set and list tracked aliases. -The value of a tracked alias is the full pathname -corresponding to the given -.IR name . -The value becomes undefined when the value of -.SM -.B PATH -is reset but the aliases remained tracked. -Without the -.B \-t -flag, -for each -.I name\^ -in the argument list -for which no -.I value\^ -is given, the name -and value of the alias is printed. -The -.B \-x -flag is used to set or print exported aliases. -An exported alias is defined across sub-shell environments. -Alias returns true unless a -.I name\^ -is given for which no alias has been defined. -.TP -\f3bg\fP \*(OK \f3%\f2job\^\fP \*(CK -This command is only built-in on systems that support job control. -Puts the specified -.I job\^ -into the background. -The current job is put in the background -if -.I job\^ -is not specified. -.TP -\f3break\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Exit from the enclosing -.BR for -.BR while -.BR until -or -.B select\^ -loop, if any. -If -.I n\^ -is specified then break -.I n\^ -levels. -.TP -\f3continue\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Resume the next iteration of the enclosing -.BR for -.BR while -.BR until -or -.B select\^ -loop. -If -.I n\^ -is specified then resume at the -.IR n -th -enclosing loop. -.TP -.PD 0 -\f3cd\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK -.TP -\f3cd\fP \f2old\^\fP \f2new\^\fP -.PD -This command can be in either of two forms. -In the first form it -changes the current directory to -.IR arg . -If -.I arg\^ -is -.B \- -the directory is changed to the previous -directory. -The shell -parameter -.B -.SM HOME -is the default -.IR arg . -The parameter -.SM -.B PWD -is set to the current directory. -The shell parameter -.B -.SM CDPATH -defines the search path for -the directory containing -.IR arg . -Alternative directory names are separated by -a colon -.RB ( : ). -The default path is -.B -(specifying the current directory). -Note that the current directory is specified by a null path name, -which can appear immediately after the equal sign -or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in the path list. -If -.I arg -begins with a \f3/\fP then the search path -is not used. -Otherwise, each directory in the path is -searched for -.IR arg . -.P -The second form of -.B cd -substitutes the string -.I new -for the string -.I old -in the current directory name, -.SM -.B PWD -and tries to change to this new directory. -.P -The -.B cd\^ -command may not be executed by -.I rsh\^. -.TP -\f3eval\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The arguments are read as input -to the shell -and the resulting command(s) executed. -.TP -\f3exec\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. -If -.I arg\^ -is given, -the command specified by -the arguments is executed in place of this shell -without creating a new process. -Input/output arguments may appear and -affect the current process. -If no -arguments are given -the effect of this command is to -modify file descriptors -as prescribed by the input/output redirection list. -In this case, -any file descriptor numbers greater than 2 that are -opened with this mechanism are closed when invoking -another program. -.TP -\f3exit\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Causes the shell to exit -with the exit status specified by -.IR n . -If -.I n\^ -is omitted then the exit status is that of the last command executed. -An end-of-file will also cause the shell to exit -except for a -shell which has the -.I ignoreeof -option (See -.B set -below) turned on. -.TP -\f3export\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The given -.IR name s -are marked for automatic -export to the -.I environment\^ -of subsequently-executed commands. -.TP -.PD 0 -\f3fc\fP \*(OK \f3\-e \f2ename\^\fP \ \*(CK \*(OK \f3\-\f3nlr\^\f1 \*(CK \*(OK \f2first\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2last\^\fP \*(CK -.TP -\f3fc \-e \-\fP \*(OK \f2old\fP\f3\=\fP\f2new\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2command\^\fP \*(CK -.PD -In the first form, -a range of commands from -.I first\^ -to -.I last\^ -is selected from the last -.SM -.B HISTSIZE -commands that were typed at the terminal. -The arguments -.I first\^ -and -.I last\^ -may be specified as a number or as a string. -A string is used to locate the most recent command starting with -the given string. -A negative number is used as an offset to the current command number. -If the flag -.BR \-l , -is selected, -the commands are listed on standard output. -Otherwise, the editor program -.I ename\^ -is invoked on a file containing these -keyboard commands. -If -.I ename\^ -is not supplied, then the value of the parameter -.SM -.B FCEDIT -(default /bin/ed) -is used as the editor. -When editing is complete, the edited command(s) -is executed. -.I last\^ -is not specified -then it will be set to -.IR first . -If -.I first\^ -is not specified -the default is the previous command -for editing and \-16 for listing. -The flag -.B \-r -reverses the order of the commands and -the flag -.B \-n -suppresses command numbers when listing. -In the second form the -.I command\^ -is re-executed after the substitution -\f2old\^\fP\f3=\fP\f2new\^\fP -is performed. -.TP -\f3fg\fP \*(OK \f3%\f2job\^\fP \*(CK -This command is only built-in on systems that support job control. -If -.I job\^ -is specified it brings it to the foreground. -Otherwise, the current job is -brought into the foreground. -.TP -\f3jobs\fP \*(OK \f3\-l\^\fP \*(CK -Lists the active jobs; given the -.B \-l -options lists process id's in addition to the normal information. -.TP -\f3kill\fP \*(OK \f3\-\f2sig\^\fP \*(CK \f2process\^\fP .\|.\|. -Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the -specified signal to the specified jobs or processes. -Signals are either given by number or by names (as given in -.I /usr/include/signal.h, -stripped of the prefix ``SIG''). -The signal names are listed by -.BR "kill \-l'" . -There is no default, saying just `kill' does not -send a signal to the current job. -If the signal being sent is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), -then the job or process will be sent a CONT (continue) signal -if it is stopped. -The argument -.I process\^ -can be either a process id or a job. -.TP -\f3let\fP \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. -Each -.I arg -is an -.IR "arithmetic expression" -to be evaluated. -All calculations are done as long -integers and no check for overflow -is performed. -Expressions consist of constants, -named parameters, and operators. -The following set of operators, -listed in order of decreasing precedence, -have been implemented: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B \- -unary minus -.TP -.B ! -logical negation -.TP -.B "* / %" -.br -multiplication, division, remainder -.TP -.B "+ \-" -addition, subtraction -.TP -.B "<= >= < >" -.br -comparison -.TP -.B "== !=" -.br -equality inequality -.TP -.B = -arithmetic replacement -.PD -.PP -Sub-expressions in parentheses -.B (\|) -are evaluated first and can be used -to override the above precedence rules. -The evaluation within a precedence group -is from right to left for the -.B = -operator -and from left to right for the others. -.PP -A parameter name must be a valid -.IR identifier . -When a parameter is encountered, -the value associated with the -parameter name is substituted and expression evaluation resumes. -Up to nine levels of recursion are -permitted. -.PP -The return code is -0 if the value of the last expression -is non-zero, and 1 otherwise. -.RE -.TP -\f3newgrp\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -Equivalent to -.BI "exec newgrp" " arg\^" -\&.\|.\|.\^. -.TP -\f3print\fP \*(OK \f3\-Rnprsu\^\fP\*(OK\f2n\fP \*(CK \*(CK \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The shell output mechanism. -With no flags or with flag -.BR \- , -the arguments are printed -on standard output as described by -.IR echo (1). -In raw mode, -.B \-R -or -.BR \-r , -the escape conventions of -.I echo -are ignored. -The -.B \-R -option will print all subsequent arguments and options -other than -.BR \-n . -The -.B \-p -option causes the -arguments to be written onto the pipe -of the process spawned with -.B \(bv& -instead of standard output. -The -.B \-s -option causes the -arguments to be written onto the history file -instead of standard output. -The -.B \-u -flag can be used to specify a one digit -file descriptor unit number -.B n\^ -on which the -output will be placed. -The default is 1. -If the flag -.B \-n -is used, no -.B new-line\^ -is added to the output. -.TP -\f3read\fP \*(OK \f3\-prsu\^\fP\*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\f3?\f2prompt\^\f1 \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The shell input mechanism. -One line is read and -is broken up into words using the characters in -.B -.SM IFS -as separators. -In raw mode, -.B \-r, -a -.B \e -at the end of a line does not signify -line continuation. -The first -word is assigned to the first -.IR name , -the second word -to the second -.IR name , -etc., with leftover words assigned to the last -.IR name . -The -.B \-p -option causes the input line -to be taken from the input pipe -of a process spawned by the shell -using -.BR \(bv& . -If the -.B \-s -fag is present, -the input will be saved as a command in the history file. -The flag -.B \-u -can be used to specify a one digit file -descriptor unit to read from. -The file descriptor can be opened with the -.B exec\^ -special command. -The default value of -.I n\^ -is 0. -If -.IR name -is omitted then -.SM -.B REPLY -is used as the default -.IR name. -The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered. -An end-of-file with the -.B \-p -option causes cleanup for this process -so that another can be spawned. -If the first argument contains a -.BR ? , -the remainder of this word is used as a -.I prompt\^ -when the shell is interactive. -If the given file descriptor is open for writing -and is a terminal device then the prompt is placed -on this unit. -Otherwise the prompt is issued on file descriptor 2. -The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered. -.TP -\f3readonly\fP \*(OK \f2name\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The given -.IR names -are marked -readonly and these -names cannot be changed -by subsequent assignment. -.TP -\f3return\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Causes a shell -.I function -to return -to the invoking script -with the return status specified by -.IR n . -If -.I n\^ -is omitted then the return status is that of the last command executed. -If -.B return -is invoked while not in a -.I function -then it is the same as an -.BR exit . -.TP -\f3set\fP \*(OK \f3\-aefhkmnostuvx\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f3\-o\fP \f2option\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The flags for this command have meaning as follows: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP 8 -.B \-a -All subsequent parameters that are defined are automatically exported. -.TP 8 -.B \-e -If the shell is non-interactive and if a command fails, -execute the -.SM -.B ERR -trap, if set, -and exit immediately. -This mode is disabled while reading profiles. -.TP 8 -.B \-f -Disables file name generation. -.TP 8 -.B \-h -Each command whose name is an -.I identifier\^ -becomes a tracked alias when first encountered. -.TP 8 -.B \-k -All parameter assignment arguments are placed in the environment for a command, -not just those that precede the command name. -.TP 8 -.B \-m -Background jobs will run in a separate process group -and a line will print upon completion. -The exit status of background jobs is reported in a completion message. -On systems with job control, -this flag is turned on automatically for -interactive shells. -.TP 8 -.B \-n -Read commands but do not execute them. -.TP 8 -.B \-o -The following argument can be one of the following option names: -.RS -.TP 8 -.B allexport -Same as -.BR \-a . -.TP 8 -.B errexit -Same as -.BR \-e . -.TP 8 -.B emacs -Puts you in an -.I emacs -style in-line editor for command entry. -.TP 8 -.B gmacs -Puts you in a -.I gmacs -style in-line editor for command entry. -.TP 8 -.B ignoreeof -The shell will not exit on end-of-file. -The command -.B exit -must be used. -.TP 8 -.B keyword -Same as -.BR \-k . -.TP 8 -.B markdirs -All directory names resulting from file name generation have a trailing -.B / -appended. -.TP 8 -.B monitor -Same as -.BR \-m . -.TP 8 -.B noexec -Same as -.BR \-n . -.TP 8 -.B noglob -Same as -.BR \-f . -.TP 8 -.B nounset -Same as -.BR \-u . -.TP 8 -.B verbose -Same as -.BR \-v . -.TP 8 -.B trackall -Same as -.BR \-h . -.TP 8 -.B vi -Puts you in insert mode of a -.I vi\^ -style in-line editor -until you hit escape character -.BR 033 . -This puts you in move mode. -A return sends the line. -.TP 8 -.B viraw -Each character is processed as it is typed -in -.I vi\^ -mode. -.TP 8 -.B xtrace -Same as -.BR \-x . -.TP 8 - -If no option name is supplied then the current option settings are printed. -.RE -.TP 8 -.B \-s -Sort the positional parameters. -.TP 8 -.B \-t -Exit after reading and executing one command. -.TP 8 -.B \-u -Treat unset parameters as an error when substituting. -.TP 8 -.B \-v -Print shell input lines as they are read. -.TP 8 -.B \-x -Print commands and their arguments as they are executed. -.TP 8 -.B \- -Turns off -.B \-x -and -.B \-v -flags and stops examining arguments for flags. -.TP 8 -.B \-\- -Do not change any of the flags; useful in setting -.B $1 -to a value beginning with -.BR \- . -If no arguments follow this flag then the positional parameters are unset. -.PD -.PP -Using -.B \+ -rather than -.B \- -causes these flags to be turned off. -These flags can also be used upon invocation of the shell. -The current set of flags may be found in -.BR $\- . -The remaining arguments are positional -parameters and are assigned, in order, -.if t to\p -.if n to -.BR $1 , -.BR $2 , -\&.\|.\|.\^. -If no arguments are given then the values -of all names are printed on the standard output. -.RE -.TP -\f3shift\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -.br -The positional parameters from -\f3$\fP\f2n\fP\f3+1\fP -\&.\|.\|. -are renamed -.B $1 -\&.\|.\|.\^ -, default -.I n\^ -is 1. -The parameter -.I n\^ -can be any arithmetic expression that evaluates to a non-negative -number less than or equal to -.BR $# . -.TP -\f3test\fP \*(OK \f2expr\^\fP \*(CK -.br -Evaluate conditional expression -.IR expr . -See -.IR test (1) -for usage and description. -The arithmetic comparison operators -are not restricted to integers. -They allow any arithmetic expression. -Four additional primitive expressions are allowed: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -\f3\-L\fP \f2file\^\fP -True if -.I file\^ -is a symbolic link. -.TP -\f2file1\^\fP \f3\-nt\fP \f2file2\^\fP -True if -.I file1\^ -is newer than -.IR file2 . -.TP -\f2file1\^\fP \f3\-ot\fP \f2file2\^\fP -True if -.I file1\^ -is older than -.IR file2 . -.TP -\f2file1\^\fP \f3\-ef\fP \f2file2\^\fP -True if -.I file1\^ -has the same device and i-node number as -.IR file2 . -.PD -.RE -.TP -\f3times\fP -.br -Print the accumulated user and system times for -the shell and for processes -run from the shell. -.TP -\f3trap\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2sig\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. -.I arg\^ -is a command to be read and executed when the shell -receives signal(s) -.IR sig . -(Note that -.I arg\^ -is scanned once when -the trap is set and once when the trap -is taken.) -Each -.I sig\^ -can be given as a number or as the name of the signal. -Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. -Any attempt to set a trap on a signal that -was ignored on entry to the current shell -is ineffective. -An attempt to trap on signal 11 (memory fault) produces an error. -If -.I arg\^ -is omitted or is -.BR \- , -then all trap(s) -.I sig\^ -are reset -to their original values. -If -.I arg\^ -is the null -string then this signal is ignored by the shell and by the commands -it invokes. -If -.I sig\^ -is -.SM -.B ERR -then -.I arg\^ -will be executed whenever a command has a non-zero exit code. -This trap is not inherited by functions. -If -.I sig\^ -is -.B 0 -or -.SM -.B EXIT -and the -.B trap -statement is executed inside the body of a function, -then the command -.I arg\^ -is executed -after the function completes. -If -.I sig\^ -is -.B 0 -or -.SM -.B EXIT -for a -.B trap -set outside any function -then the command -.I arg\^ -is executed -on exit from the shell. -The -.B trap -command -with no arguments prints a list -of commands associated with each signal number. -.TP -\f3typeset\fP \*(OK \f3\-FLRZefilprtux\^\fP\*(OK\f2n\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\fP\*(OK \f2=value\^\fP \*(CK \^ \*(CK .\|.\|. \*(CK -Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. -When invoked inside a function, -a new instance of the parameter -.I name\^ -is created. -The parameter value and type are restored -when the function completes. -The following list of attributes may be specified: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B \-F -This flag provides UNIX to host-name file mapping on non-UNIX -machines. -.TP -.B \-L -Left justify and remove leading blanks from -.IR value . -If -.I n -is non-zero it defines the width -of the field, -otherwise it is determined by the width of the value of -first assignment. -When the parameter is assigned to, it is -filled on the right with blanks or truncated, if necessary, to -fit into the field. -Leading zeros are removed if the -.B \-Z -flag is also set. -The -.B \-R -flag is turned off. -.TP -.B \-R -Right justify and fill with leading blanks. -If -.I n -is non-zero it defines the width -of the field, -otherwise it is determined by the width of the value of -first assignment. -The field is left filled with blanks or -truncated from the end if the -parameter is reassigned. -The -.B L -flag is turned off. -.TP -.B \-Z -Right justify and fill with leading zeros if -the first non-blank character is a digit and the -.B \-L -flag has not been set. -If -.I n -is non-zero it defines the width -of the field, -otherwise it is determined by the width of the value of -first assignment. -.TP -.B \-e -Tag the parameter as having an error. -This tag is currently unused by the shell and can be -set or cleared by the user. -.TP -.B \-f -The names refer to function names rather than -parameter names. -No assignments can be made and the only other -valid flag is -.BR \-x . -.TP -.B \-i -Parameter is an integer. -This makes arithmetic faster. -If -.I n -is non-zero it defines the output arithmetic base, -otherwise the first assignment determines the output base. -.TP -.B \-l -All upper-case characters -converted to lower-case. -The upper-case flag, -.B \-u -is turned off. -.TP -.B \-p -The output of this command, if any, is written onto the two-way pipe -.TP -.B \-r -The given -.IR names -are marked -readonly and these -names cannot be changed -by subsequent assignment. -.TP -.B \-t -Tags the named parameters. -Tags are user definable and have no special -meaning to the shell. -.TP -.B \-u -All lower-case characters are converted -to upper-case characters. -The lower-case flag, -.B \-l -is turned off. -.TP -.B \-x -The given -.IR name s -are marked for automatic -export to the -.I environment\^ -of subsequently-executed commands. -.PD -.PP -Using -.B \+ -rather than -.B \- -causes these flags to be turned off. -If no -.I name\^ -arguments are given but flags are specified, -a list of -.I names\^ -(and optionally the -.I values\^ -) -of the -.I parameters\^ -which have these -flags set -is printed. -(Using -.B \+ -rather than -.B \- -keeps the -values to be printed.) -If no -.IR name s -and flags -are given, -the -.I names\^ -and -.I attributes\^ -of all -.I parameters\^ -are printed. -.RE -.TP -\f3ulimit\fP \*(OK \f3\-cdfmpt\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B \-c -imposes a size limit of -.I n\^ -blocks on the size of core dumps -(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). -.TP -.B \-d -imposes a size limit of -.I n\^ -blocks on the size of the data area -(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). -.TP -.B \-f -imposes a size limit of -.I n\^ -blocks on files written by child processes (files of any size may be read). -.TP -.B \-m -imposes a soft limit of -.I n\^ -blocks on the size of physical memory -(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). -.TP -.B \-p -changes the pipe size to -.I n\^ -(\s-1UNIX\s+1/\s-1RT\s+1 only). -.TP -.B \-t -imposes a time limit of -.I n\^ -seconds to be used by each process -(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). -.PD -.PP -If no option is given, -.B \-f -is assumed. -If -.I n\^ -is not given the current limit is printed. -.RE -.TP -\f3umask\fP \*(OK \f2nnn\^\fP \*(CK -The user file-creation mask is set to -.I nnn\^ -(see -.IR umask (2)). -If -.I nnn\^ -is omitted, the current value of the mask is printed. -.TP -\f3unalias\fP \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. -The -.IR -parameters -given by the list of -.IR name s -are removed from the -.I alias\^ -list. -.TP -\f3unset\fP \*(OK \f3\-f\fP \*(CK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. -The parameters given by the list of -.IR name s -are unassigned, -i. e., -their values and attributes are erased. -Readonly variables cannot be unset. -If the flag, -.BR \-f , -is set, then the names refer to -.I function\^ -names. -.TP -\f3wait\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Wait for the specified process and -report its termination status. -If -.I n\^ -is not given then all currently active child processes are waited for. -The return code from this command is that of -the process waited for. -.TP -\f3whence\fP \*(OK \f3\-v\fP \*(CK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. -For each -.IR name , -indicate how it -would be interpreted if used as a command name. -.P -The flag, -.BR \-v , -produces a more verbose report. -.SS Invocation. -If the shell is invoked by -.IR exec (2), -and the first character of argument zero -.RB ( $0 ) -is -.BR \- , -then the shell is assumed to be a -.I login -shell and -commands are read from -.B /etc/profile -and then from either -.B .profile -in the current directory or -.BR \s-1$HOME\s+1/.profile , -if either file exists. -Next, commands are read from -the file named by -performing parameter substitution on -the value of the environment parameter -.SM -.B ENV -if the file exists. -Commands are then read as described below; -the following flags are interpreted by the shell -when it is invoked: -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP 10 -.BI \-c "\| string\^" -If the -.B \-c -flag is present then -commands are read from -.IR string . -.TP -.B \-s -If the -.B \-s -flag is present or if no -arguments remain -then commands are read from the standard input. -Shell output, -except for the output of some of the -.I Special commands\^ -listed above, -is written to -file descriptor 2. -.TP -.B \-i -If the -.B \-i -flag is present or -if the shell input and output are attached to a terminal (as told by -.IR gtty (2)) -then this shell is -.IR interactive . -In this case \s-1TERMINATE\s+1 is ignored (so that \f3kill 0\fP -does not kill an interactive shell) and \s-1INTERRUPT\s+1 is caught and ignored -(so that -.B wait -is interruptible). -In all cases, \s-1QUIT\s+1 is ignored by the shell. -.TP -.B \-r -If the -.B \-r -flag is present the shell is a restricted shell. -.PD -.PP -The remaining flags and arguments are described under the -.B set -command above. -.SS Rsh Only. -.I Rsh -is used to set up login names and execution environments whose -capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. -The actions of -.I rsh\^ -are identical to those of -.IR sh , -except that the following are disallowed: -.RS -.PD 0 -.PP -changing directory (see -.IR cd (1)), -.br -setting the value of -.SM -.B SHELL -or -.SM -.BR PATH\*S, -.br -specifying path or -command names containing -.BR / , -.br -redirecting output -.RB ( > -and -.BR >> ). -.PD -.RE -.PP -The restrictions above are enforced -after \f3.profile\fP and the -.SM -.B ENV -files are interpreted. -.PP -When a command to be executed is found to be a shell procedure, -.I rsh\^ -invokes -.I sh\^ -to execute it. -Thus, it is possible to provide to the end-user shell procedures -that have access to the full power of -the standard shell, -while imposing a limited menu of commands; -this scheme assumes that the end-user does not have write and -execute permissions in the same directory. -.PP -The net effect of these rules is that the writer of the -.B .profile -has complete control over user actions, -by performing guaranteed setup actions -and leaving the user in an appropriate directory -(probably -.I not\^ -the login directory). -.PP -The system administrator often sets up a directory -of commands -(i.e., -.BR /usr/rbin ) -that can be safely invoked by -.IR rsh . -Some systems also provide a restricted editor -.IR red . -.SH EXIT STATUS -Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors, -cause the shell -to return a non-zero exit status. -If the shell is being used non-interactively -then execution of the shell file is abandoned. -Otherwise, the shell returns the exit status of -the last command executed (see also the -.B exit -command above). -.SH FILES -/etc/passwd -.br -/etc/profile -.br -\s-1$HOME\s+1/\f3.\fPprofile -.br -/tmp/sh\(** -.br -/dev/null -.SH SEE ALSO -cat(1), -cd(1), -echo(1), -emacs(1), -env(1), -gmacs(1), -newgrp(1), -test(1), -umask(1), -vi(1), -dup(2), -exec(2), -fork(2), -gtty(2), -pipe(2), -signal(2), -umask(2), -ulimit(2), -wait(2), -rand(3), -a.out(5), -profile(5), -environ(7). -.SH CAVEATS -.PP -If a command which is a -.I "tracked alias" -is executed, and then a command with the same name is -installed in a directory in the search path before the directory where the -original command was found, the shell will continue to -.I exec\^ -the original command. -Use the -.B \-t -option of the -.B alias\^ -command to correct this situation -.PP -If you move the current directory or one above it, -.B pwd\^ -may not give the correct response. -Use the -.B cd\^ -command with a full path name -to correct this situation. -.PP -Some very old shell scripts contain a -.B ^ -as a synonym for the pipe character -.BR \(bv . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lab.1 b/static/v10/man1/lab.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6f492a36..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lab.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -.TH LAB 1 alice -.CT 1 misc -.SH NAME -lab \(mi label maker -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lab -[ -.B -m -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lab -causes the -.I files -to be queued for printing as mailing labels. -If no files are named, the standard input is read. -The option -.B -m -causes notification via -.IR mail (1) -to be sent when the job completes. -.PP -The last line of each label is identified by ending it -with one or more spaces and a hyphen. -The hyphen must be the last character in the line; -no white space may follow it. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/spool/lab/* -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lab/* -spool area -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lab -printer daemon -.SH SEE\ ALSO -.IR pr (1) -.SH BUGS -Queued jobs print in directory (seemingly random) order. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/langs.1 b/static/v10/man1/langs.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7b9998d1..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/langs.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ -.TH LANGS 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -altran, cospan, esterel, icon, lisp, macsyma, maple, ops5, pascal, ratfor, S, smp, sno, spitbol, struct, twig \- languages -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B altran -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.br -.B cospan -[ -.I option ... -] -file -.nf -.B esterel -.B iconc -.B icont -.B lisp -.B /usr/lbin/macsyma -.B maple -.B /usr/lbin/ops5 -.fi -.B ratfor -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.br -.B S -.br -.B smp -.br -.B sno -[ -.I file ... -] -.br -.B spitbol -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.br -.B struct -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.br -.B twig -[ -.BI -w xx -] -.I file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Altran, -a language for rational algebra, is -described in W. S. Brown, -.I ALTRAN User's Manual. -For more information execute -.LR "man altran" . -.PP -.I Cospan, -a system which analyzes concurrent programs written in the data-flow -language S/R for properties defined by automata, is -described in -Z. Har'El and R. P. Kurshan, -.I COSPAN User's Guide, -1121-871009-21TM, AT&T Bell Laboratories, 1987. -For more information, execute -.LR "man cospan" . -.PP -.I Esterel -compiles single-process implementations of -programs expressed in terms of asynchronously cooperating -automata. -For more information, execute -.LR "man esterel" . -.PP -.I Icon, -a general-purpose language with -stream-based coroutines is described in R. E. Griswold, -.I The Icon Programming Language, -Prentice-Hall, 1983. -For more information, execute -.LR "man icont" . -.PP -.I Lisp, -the symbol manipulation language, is described in -J. K. Foderara, -`The Franz Lisp Manual', in -Unix Programmer's Manual, Seventh Edition, Virtual VAX-11 Version, -1980, Volume 2C -(Berkeley) -.PP -.I Macsyma, -another symbolic algebra language, -is described in -.I Macsyma Reference Manual, -Laboratory for Computer Science, MIT, 1977. -It breaks if the environment contains shell functions. -.PP -.I Maple, -a third symbolic algebra language, -is described in K. O. Geddes, G. H. Gonnet, and B. W. Char, -.I MAPLE User's Manual, Third Edition, -Research Report CS-83-41 -Dept. of Computer Science, University of Waterloo, 1983. -For more information execute -.LR "man maple" . -.PP -.I Ops5 -is a production-system interpreter -described in -C. L. Forgy -.IR "OPS5 User's Manual" , -Department of Computer Science, -Carnegie-Mellon University, -July, 1981. -For more information execute -.LR "man ops5" . -.PP -.I Pascal -is an interpreter and -.I pc -is a compiler for the well known language. -For more information, type -.LR "man pascal pc pxp" . -.PP -.I Ratfor -accepts Fortran extended with C-like control -constructs and compiles into Fortran. -For more information execute -.LR "man ratfor" . -For a full description see B. W. Kernighan and P. J. Plauger, -.I Software Tools, -Addison-Wesley, 1976. -.PP -.I S, -a system for data analysis and graphics, -is described in -R. A. Becker, J. M. Chambers, and A. R. Wilks, -.I -The New S Language, -Wadsworth, 1988. -.PP -.I Smp, -a fourth symbolic algebra language, -is described in C. Cole and S. Wolfram, -.I SMP Handbook, -California Institute of Technology, 1981. -.PP -.I Sno -is a dialect of Snobol 3. -For more information execute -.LR "man sno" . -.PP -.I Spitbol -is a dialect of Snobol 4. -For more information execute -.LR "man spitbol" . -The full story is in -R. B. K. Dewar, A. P. McCann, R. E. Goldberg, -and S. G. Duff, -.I Macro SPITBOL Program Reference Manual, -and R. E. Griswold, J. F. Poage, and I. P. Polonsky, -.I The SNOBOL4 Programming Language -Academic Press, 1968. -.PP -.I Struct, -an inverse of -.I ratfor, -deduces rational control structure from pure Fortran. -For more information execute -.LR "man struct" . -.PP -.I Twig -is a language for tree manipulation, -useful for code generation and other applications. -For more information execute -.LR "man twig" . -See also S. W. K. Tjiang, -.I Twig Reference Manual, -AT&T Bell Laboratories Computing Science Technical Report 120. -.SH BUGS -These language processors are available on a haphazard -collection of machines. -Many are maintained in the same spirit. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 b/static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e845fc9b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.TH LASERBAR 1 -.SH NAME -laserbar \- produce bar codes on a PostScript laser printer -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B laserbar -[\fB-r\fP rotate] [\fB-x\fP xoffset] [\fB-y\fP yoffset] -[\fB-X\fP xscale] [\fB-Y\fP yscale] [\fB-lns\fP] string -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Laserbar -prints on the standard output the PostScript text that will produce -(on a suitable laser printer) the \s-2CODE-39\s+2 bar code -corresponding to -.I string. -The \fBr\fP option may be used to specify a rotation (in -degrees) of the bar code. -The \fBx\fP, \fBy\fP, \fBX\fP, and \fBY\fP options may be used to specify -an x- or y-axis offset (in inches) or scaling factor, respectively. -(The offset is measured from the lower left corner of the page -to the upper left corner of the bar -code. By default, the bar code produced is one inch high, and is scaled -so that the narrowest elements are each 1/72-inch \- i.e., one point \- wide.) -If the \fBl\fP option is specified, the bar code produced is labeled. -If the \fBn\fP option is specified, the resulting PostScript text -includes a leading \f(CWnewpath\fP command, so that the text may stand -alone or precede any other PostScript commands. -If the \fBs\fP option is specified, the resulting PostScript text includes -a trailing \f(CWshowpage\fP command, so that the text may stand alone -or follow any other PostScript commands. -.P -This manual page (if it appears with a bar code printed on it) was -produced by something like the following sequence: -.IP -.ft CW -laserbar -x 2.5 -y 3 -l -n ABC123xyz > tempfile -.br -troff -man -Tpost laserbar.1 | dpost >> tempfile -.br -prt -dprinter -lpostscript tempfile -.ft P -.SH SEE ALSO -laserbar(3), prt(1), dpost(1), postbgi(1), postprint(1), postdmd(1), posttek(1), etc. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lcc.1 b/static/v10/man1/lcc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 29ab1194..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lcc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,505 +0,0 @@ -.TH LCC 1 "local \- 4/13/93" -.SH NAME -lcc \- local ANSI C compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lcc -[ -.I option -| -.I file -]... -.br -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -.I lcc -is a local ANSI C compiler for the VAX, MIPS, SPARC, and Motorola MC68020. -.PP -Arguments whose names end with `.c' are taken to be -C source programs; they are preprocessed, compiled, and -each object program is left on the file -whose name is that of the source with `.o' substituted for `.c'. -Arguments whose names end with `.i' are treated similarly, -except they are not preprocessed. -In the same way, -arguments whose names end with `.s' are taken to be assembly source programs -and are assembled, producing a `.o' file. -.PP -.I lcc -deletes a `.o' file if and only if exactly one -source file (`.c', `.s', or `.i' file) is mentioned and no other file -(source, object, library) or -.B \-l -option is mentioned. -.PP -.I lcc -uses ANSI standard header files -in preference to the `old-style' header files normally found in -.B /usr/include -(see `FILES' below). -Include files not found in the ANSI header files -are taken from the normal default include areas, -which usually includes -.BR /usr/include . -.PP -.I lcc -interprets the following options; unrecognized options are -taken as loader options (see -.IR ld (1)) -unless -.BR \-c , -.BR \-S , -or -.B \-E -precedes them. -Except for -.BR \-l , -all options are processed before any of the files -and apply to all of the files. -Applicable options are passed to each compilation phase in the order given. -.TP -.B \-c -Suppress the loading phase of the compilation, and force -an object file to be produced even if only one program is compiled. -.TP -.B \-g -Produce additional symbol table information for the local debuggers. -.I lcc -warns when -.B \-g -is unsupported. -.TP -.B \-w -Suppress warning diagnostics, such as those -announcing unreferenced statics, locals, and parameters. -The line -.I -#pragma ref id -simulates a reference to the variable -.IR id . -.TP -.BI \-d n -Generate jump tables for switches whose density is at least -.IR n , -a floating point constant between zero and one. -The default is 0.5. -.TP -.SM -.B \-A -Warns about -declarations and casts of function types without prototypes, -missing return values in returns from int functions, -assignments between pointers to ints and pointers to enums, and -conversions from pointers to smaller integral types. -A second -.SM -.B \-A -warns about -unrecognized control lines, -non-ANSI language extensions and source characters in literals, -unreferenced variables and static functions, -declaring arrays of incomplete types, -and exceeding -.I some -ANSI environmental limits, like more than 257 cases in switches. -It also arranges for duplicate global definitions in separately compiled -files to cause loader errors. -.TP -.SM -.B \-P -Writes declarations for all defined globals on standard error. -Function declarations include prototypes; -editing this output can simplify conversion to ANSI C. -This output may not correspond to the input when -there are several typedef's for the same type. -.TP -.B \-n -Arrange for the compiler to produce code -that tests for dereferencing zero pointers. -The code reports the offending file and line number and calls -.IR abort (3). -.TP -.SM -.B \-O -is ignored. -.TP -.SM -.B \-S -Compile the named C programs, and leave the -assembler-language output on corresponding files suffixed `.s'. -.TP -.SM -.B \-E -Run only the preprocessor on the named C programs -and unsuffixed file arguments, -and send the result to the standard output. -.TP -.SM -.B \-C -Prevent the preprocessor from eliding comments. -.TP -.BI \-o " output" -Name the output file -.IR output . -If -.B \-c -or -.B \-S -is specified and there is exactly one source file, -this option names the object or assembly file, respectively. -Otherwise, this option names the final executable -file generated by the loader, and `a.out' is left undisturbed. -.I lcc -warns if -.B \-o -and -.B \-c -or -.B \-S -are given with more than one source file and ignores the -.B \-o -option. -.TP -.SM -.BI \-D \*Sname=def -.br -.ns -.TP -.SM -.BI \-D \*Sname -Define the -.I name -to the preprocessor, as if by `#define'. -If no definition is given, the name is defined as "1". -.TP -.SM -.BI \-U \*Sname -Remove any initial definition of -.IR name . -.TP -.SM -.BI \-I \*Sdir -`#include' files -whose names do not begin with `/' are always -sought first in the directory of the -.I file -arguments, then in directories named in -.SM -.B \-I -options, then in directories on a standard list. -.TP -.SM -.B \-N -Do not search -.I any -of the standard directories for `#include' files. -Only those directories specified by explicit -.SM -.B \-I -options will be searched, in the order given. -.TP -.SM -.BI \-B \*Sstr -Use the compiler \fIstr\fP\fBrcc\fP instead of the default version. -Note that -.I str -often requires a trailing slash. -On Suns only, -.SM -.B \-Bstatic -and -.SM -.BI \-Bdynamic -are passed to the loader; see -.IR ld (1). -.TP -.B \-v -Print commands as they are executed; some of the executed -programs are directed to print their version numbers. -More than one occurrence of -.B \-v -causes the commands to be printed, but -.I not -executed. -.TP -.B \-b -Produce code that counts the number of times each expression is executed. -If loading takes place, replace the standard exit -function by one that writes a -.B prof.out -file when the object program terminates. -A listing annotated with execution counts can then be generated with -.IR bprint (1). -.I lcc -warns when -.B \-b -is unsupported. -.B \-Wf-C -is similar, but counts only the number of function calls. -.TP -.B \-p -Produce code that counts the number of times each function is called. -If loading takes place, replace the standard startup -function by one that automatically calls -.IR monitor (3) -at the start and arranges to write a -.B mon.out -file when the object program terminates normally. -An execution profile can then be generated with -.IR prof (1). -.I lcc -warns when -.B \-p -is unsupported. -.TP -.B \-pg -Causes the compiler to produce counting code like -.BR \-p , -but invokes a run-time recording mechanism that keeps more -extensive statistics and produces a -.B gmon.out -file at normal termination. -Also, a profiling library is searched, in lieu of the standard C library. -An execution profile can then be generated with -.IR gprof (1). -.I lcc -warns when -.B \-pg -is unsupported. -.TP -.SM -.BI \-t \*Sname -.br -.ns -.TP -.SM -.BI \-t -Produce code to print the name of the function, an activation number, -and the name and value of each argument at function entry. -At function exit, produce code to print -the name of the function, the activation number, and the return value. -By default, -.I printf -does the printing; if -.I name -appears, it does. -For null -.I char* -values, "(null)" is printed. -On Suns only, -.SM -.BI \-target -.I name -is accepted, but ignored. -.TP -.SM -.BI \-W \*Sx \fIarg\fP -pass argument -.I arg -to the program indicated by -.IR x ; -.I x -can be one of -.BR p , -.BR f , -.BR a , -or -.BR l , -which refer, respectively, to the preprocessor, the compiler proper, -the assembler, and the loader. -.I arg -is passed as given; if a -.B \- -is expected, it must be given explicitly. -.SM -.BI \-W \*So \fIarg\fP -specifies a system-specific option, -.IR arg . -.PP -Other arguments -are taken to be either loader option arguments, or C-compatible -object programs, typically produced by an earlier -.I lcc -run, or perhaps libraries of C-compatible routines. -Duplicate `.o' files are ignored. -These programs, together with the results of any -compilations specified, are loaded (in the order -given) to produce an executable program with name -.BR a.out . -.PP -.I lcc -assigns the most frequently referenced scalar parameters and -locals to registers whenever possible. -For each block, -explicit register declarations are obeyed first; -remaining registers are assigned to automatic locals if they -are `referenced' at least 3 times. -Each top-level occurrence of an identifier -counts as 1 reference. Occurrences in a loop, -either of the then/else arms of an if statement, or a case -in a switch statement each count, respectively, as 10, 1/2, or 1/10 references. -These values are increased accordingly for nested control structures. -.B \-Wf-a -causes -.I lcc -to read a -.B prof.out -file from a previous execution and to use the data therein -to compute reference counts (see -.BR \-b ). -.SH LIMITATIONS -.PP -.I lcc -accepts the C programming language -as described in the proposed ANSI standard -and in the second edition of Kernighan and Ritchie. -.I lcc -is intended to be used with the GNU C preprocessor, which supports the -preprocessing features introduced by the ANSI standard. -The -.SM -.B \-Wp-trigraphs -option is required to enable trigraph sequences. -.PP -Wide-character literals are accepted -but are treated as plain char literals. -Plain chars are signed chars, -ints and long ints are the same size -as are doubles and long doubles, and -plain int bit fields are signed. -Bit fields are aligned like unsigned integers but are otherwise laid out -as if by the standard C compiler, -.IR cc (1). -Other compilers, such as the GNU C compiler, -.IR gcc (1), -may choose other, incompatible layouts. -.PP -Likewise, calling conventions are intended to be compatible with -.IR cc (1), -except possibly for passing and returning structures. -Specifically, -.I lcc -passes structures like -.I cc -on all targets, -but returns structures like -.I cc -on only the MIPS. -Consequently, calls to/from such functions compiled with -.I cc -or other C compilers may not work. -Calling a function that returns -a structure without declaring it as such violates -the ANSI standard and may cause a core dump. -.SH FILES -.PP -The file names listed below are -.IR typical , -but vary among installations; installation-dependent variants -can be displayed by running -.I lcc -with the -.B \-v -option. -.PP -.ta \w'/usr/lib/gcc-cppxx'u -.nf -file.c input file -file.o object file -a.out loaded output -/tmp/lcc? temporaries -/usr/lib/gcc-cpp preprocessor -/usr/lib/rcc compiler -/usr/lib/bbexit.o exit for profiling -/lib/crt0.o runtime startoff -/lib/[gm]crt0.o startoffs for profiling -/lib/libc.a standard library -/usr/include/lcc ANSI standard headers -/usr/include/libc local ANSI headers -/usr/include traditional headers -prof.out file produced for \fIbprint\fR(1) -mon.out file produced for \fIprof\fR(1) -gmon.out file produced for \fIgprof\fR(1) -.fi -.PP -.I lcc -predefines the macros `unix' and `__LCC__'. -It may also predefine some installation-dependent symbols; option -.B \-v -exposes them. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, -.I The C Programming Language, -Prentice-Hall, 2nd Ed., 1988. -.PP -.I -American National Standard for Information Systems, Programming Language C, -ANSI X3.159-1989, American National Standard Institute, Inc., New York, 1990. -.PP -cc(1), ld(1) -.br -.SH BUGS -Mail bug reports along with the shortest program -that exposes them and the details reported by -.IR lcc 's -.B \-v -option to lcc-bugs@princeton.edu. -.PP -The `ANSI standard headers' conform to the specifications in -the standard, which may be too restrictive for some applications, -but necessary for portability. -Functions given in the ANSI headers may be missing from -the local C library (e.g., `wide character' functions) -or may not correspond exactly to the local version; -for example, the ANSI standard -.B stdio.h -specifies that -.IR printf , -.IR fprintf , -and -.I sprintf -return the number of characters written to the file or array, -but few existing libraries implement this convention. -.PP -On VAXes running 4.3bsd UNIX, -the definitions of -.I tolower -and -.I toupper -erroneously return bad values for non-letter arguments. -.PP -On the MIPS and SPARC, old-style variadic functions must use -.B varargs.h -from MIPS or Sun. New-style is recommended. -.PP -The Sun assembler version 3.5 or later is required on the MC68020, -and only the MC68881 is supported. -.PP -With -.BR \-b , -files compiled -.I without -.B \-b -may cause -.I bprint -to print erroneous call graphs. -For example, if -.B f -calls -.B g -calls -.B h -and -.B f -and -.B h -are compiled with -.BR \-b , -but -.B g -is not, -.B bprint -will report that -.B f -called -.BR h . -The total number of calls is correct, however. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 b/static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3ed6b108..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -.TH LCOC 1 "30 June 1988" -.SH NAME -lcoc \- Esterel compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lcoc -[ option ] ... [ file ]... -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fIlcoc\fR is the Esterel v3 compiler. -It produce an \fIoc\fR format output from one or more \fIlc\fR format inputs -(or \fIic\fR if no Esterel \fBcopymodule\fP instruction is used). -If there is no input files, the standard input is used. -\fIic\fP format inputs describes Esterel \fBmodules\fP to be processed, -and \fIoc\fP format output describes the computed automata. -Typical use is: -.br -.DS -lcoc < game1.ic > game1.oc -.DE -.br -or -.br -.DS -lcoc game1.ic > game1.oc -.DE -.LP -The following options are interpreted by \fIlcoc\fP. -.IP \fB-version\fR 10 -Gives the version name and terminates ignoring all others arguments. -.IP \fB-v\fR 10 -Verbose option: gives names of the modules compiled. -.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 -Prints statistic informations into the standard error stream: -parsing and compiling times and size of the process. -.IP \fB-size\fR 10 -Prints size informations into the standard error stream: -how many states, actions and action calls are produced. -.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 -Memory state after compiling. -.IP \fB-W\fR 10 -Give warnings about .ic unused actions and .ic dead code. -.IP \fB-show\fR 10 -During the compiling process, gives two informations into -the standard error stream: -how many states are already created and how many states are already -analysed. -.SH FILES -The caller of the command -must have read/write permission for the directories containing -the working files, and execute permission for the \fIlcoc\fR file itself. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The diagnostics produced by \fIlcoc\fR compiler are intended -to be self-explanatory. -.SH IDENTIFICATION -.de VL -\\$2 -.. -Author: F. Boussinot, -CMA, Ecole des Mines de Paris, -.sp 0 -Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE -.sp 0 -Revision Number: -$Revision: 1.3 $ -; Release Date: -$Date: 88/06/30 12:08:10 $ -\&. -.SH SEE ALSO -Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual -.sp 0 -Esterel v3 System Manuals. -.sp 0 -strlic (1), iclc(1), ocl (1). -.sp 0 -.SH BUGS - - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 b/static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a6514b0d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ -.TH LCOMP 1 -.SH NAME -lcomp, lprint \(mi line-by-line profiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lcomp -[ option ... ] file ... -.PP -.B lprint -[ option ] [ file ... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lcomp -is used in place of -.I cc (1) -or -.I f77 (1) -to insert instruction-counting code into programs. -It recognizes options whose initial letters are taken from the string -.LR CwpDUIRdlNnz , -and accepts files whose names end in -.LR .c , -.LR .f , -.LR .s , -or -.LR .o . -From each source file it derives a -.L .o -file and a -.L .sL -file which -.I lprint -uses to correlate source lines with basic blocks. -.PP -Option -.B -C -declares that -.L .c -files (and -.L .o -files, if no source files are named) -are C++ files. -If the -.B -c -option is not present -.I lcomp -creates -.FR a.out . -Each time -.F a.out -is run statistics are added -to a profiling file -.FR prof.out . -.PP -.I Lprint -produces on the standard output a listing (in the style of -.IR pr (1)) -of the programs compiled by -.I lcomp. -Without arguments or files, -each line of the listing is preceded by the number of times it was executed, -as determined from the data in -.FR prof.out . -.I Lprint -interprets the following options. -.TP -.B -a -Detailed listing of every machine instruction and how often it was executed. -.TP -.B -b -How often each basic block was executed. -.TP -.B -c -Compress the -.F prof.out -file, which otherwise grows with every execution of -.LR a.out . -.TP -.B -f -Print summary information by function: instruction executions, number of -invocations, source instructions, and number of instructions never executed. -.TP -.B -i -Before each line of source print the number of machine instructions executed. -.TP -.B -p -Before each line of source print the number of times the first basic block -in that line was executed. -.TP -.B -s -Summarize the counts by source file: instruction exectuions, source -instructions, instructions never executed, basic block executions, total -number of source basic blocks, and how many were never executed. -.PP -If any file names are given, the arguments -.L abip -apply only to them. -If no options are given, -.L -p -is assumed. -Any combination of options is allowed. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/nexit.o -.TP -.F prof.out -counts -.TP -.F *.sL -for correlating with source -.TP -.F /usr/lib/bb -for finding basic blocks and inserting counting code -.TP -.F /usr/lib/nexit.o -for printing counts when -.L a.out -exits -.SH "SEE ALSO" -cc(1), f77(1) -.SH BUGS -A line in the source file may be in zero, one, or more basic -blocks; -the count given in the listing corresponds to some particular -choice of the basic block to associate with the line. -.br -Processing the output of -.IR yacc (1) -without removing -.L #line -directives will produce unsatisfactory results. -.br -Option -.B -C -masks an option of -.IR cc (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ld.1 b/static/v10/man1/ld.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1347d1b6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ld.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'LD (I)'3/15/72'LD (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME ld -- link editor -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS ld__ [ -sulxr______ ] name\d1\u ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION ld__ combines several -object programs into one; resolves external -references; and searches libraries. -In the simplest case the names of several object -programs are given, and ld__ combines them, producing -an object module which can be either executed or -become the input for a further ld__ run. -In the latter case, the "-r" option must be given -to preserve the relocation bits. -.sp -The argument routines are concatenated in the order -specified. The entry point of the output is the -beginning of the first routine. -.sp -If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once. -Only those routines defining an unresolved external -reference are loaded. -If a routine from a library -references another routine in the library, -the referenced routine must appear after the -referencing routine in the library. -Thus the order of programs within libraries -is important. -.sp -ld__ understands several flag arguments which are written -preceded by a "-": -.sp -.in +6 -.ti -3 --s "squash" the output, that is, remove the symbol table -and relocation bits to save space (but impair the -usefulness of the debugger). -This information can also be removed by strip_____. -.ti -3 -.sp --u take the following argument as a symbol and enter -it as undefined in the symbol table. This is useful -for loading wholly from a library, since initially the symbol -table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed -to force the loading of the first routine. -.sp -.ti -3 --l This option is an abbreviation for a library name. -"-l" alone stands for "/usr/lib/liba.a", which -is the standard system library for assembly language -programs. -"-lx" stands for "/usr/lib/libx.a" where x is any character. -There are libraries for Fortran (x="f"), C (x="c"), Explor (x="e") and B (x="b"). - -.ti -3 --x Do not preserve local -(non-.globl) symbols in the output symbol table; only enter -external symbols. -This option saves some space in the output file. - -.ti -3 --r generate relocation bits in the output file -so that it can be the subject of another ld__ run. -.sp -.in -6 -The output of ld__ is left on a.out_____. This file is executable -only if no errors occurred during the load. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /usr/lib/lib?.a libraries -.br -a.out output file -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO as(I), ar(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "file -not found"-- bad argument -.sp -"bad format"-- bad argument -.sp -"relocation error"-- bad argument (relocation -bits corrupted) -.sp -"multiply defined"-- same symbol defined twice in same load -.sp -"un"-- stands for "undefined symbol" - -"symbol not found"-- loader bug - -"can't move output file"-- can't move temporary to a.out file - -"no relocation bits"-- an input file lacks relocation information - -"too many symbols"-- too many references to external -symbols in a given routine - -"premature EOF" - -"can't create l.out"-- cannot make temporary file - -"multiple entry point"-- more than one entry point -specified (not possible yet). -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ld80.1 b/static/v10/man1/ld80.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b35d608d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ld80.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ -.th "ld80" 1 1/2/78 -.sh NAME -"ld80" \*- link editor for the 8080/Z80 load moduals. -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd "ld80" -[ -.bd \*-ultdb -] name ... -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it "ld80" -combines several -object programs into one; resolves external -references; and searches libraries. -In the simplest case the names of several object -programs are given, and -.it "ld80" -combines them, producing -an object module which can be either executed or -become the input for a further -.it "ld80" -run. -The output of -.it "ld80" -is left on -.bd "80.out". -This file is made executable -only if no errors occurred during the load. -.s3 -The argument routines are concatenated in the order -specified. The entry point of the output is the -beginning of the first routine. -.s3 -If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once -at the point it is encountered in the argument list. -Only those routines defining an unresolved external -reference are loaded. -If a routine from a library -references another routine in the library, -the referenced routine must appear after the -referencing routine in the library. -Thus the order of programs within libraries -is important. -.s3 -.it "ld80" -understands several flag arguments which are written -preceded by a `\*-'. -Except for \fB\*-l\fR, -they should appear before the file names. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-b\fR This -option is used to provide an absolute origin for the bss segment -of the resultant "80.out". -The supplied origin must be the next argument on the command -line and must be a positive or negative octal (leading 0) or -decimal number. -The defualt is for the bss segment to immediately follow the data -segment. -Use of this option will cause the relocation information to -be suppressed from the output. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-d\fR This -option is used to provide an absolute origin for the data segment -of the resultant "80.out". -The supplied origin must be the next argument on the command -line and must be a positive or negative octal (leading 0) or -decimal number. -The default is to have the data placed directly -after the text. -Use of this option will cause the relocation information to -be suppressed from the output. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-u\fR take the following argument as a symbol and enter -it as undefined in the symbol table. This is useful -for loading wholly from a library, since initially the symbol -table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed -to force the loading of the first routine. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-t\fR This -option is used to provide an absolute origin for the text segment -of the resultant "80.out". -The supplied origin must be the next argument on the command -line and must be a positive or negative octal (leading 0) or -decimal number. -The default origin is 0. -Use of this option will cause the relocation information to -be suppressed from the output. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-l\fR This -option is an abbreviation for a library name. -\fB\*-l\fR -alone stands for `/usr/z8080/lib/z80', which -is the standard library for assembly language -programs. -\fB\*-l\fIx\fR -stands for `/usr/z8080/lib/z80\fIx\fR.a' where \fIx\fR is any character. -A library is searched when its name is encountered, -so the placement of a \fB\*-l\fR -is significant. -.i0 -.dt -.sh FILES -/usr/z8080/lib/z80 libraries -.br -"80.out" output file -.sh "SEE ALSO" -"as80" (I), ar (I) -.sh BUGS -Most diagnostics are self explanatory. -The strangest is 'origin - conflict' and -occurs whenever an origin supplied by the user via -the -t -d or -b options causes segments to overlap. -The numbers printed out correspond -origins and sizes(both in octal) of each resultant segment. -.bd "80.out" -is produced. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/learn.1 b/static/v10/man1/learn.1 deleted file mode 100644 index db6181ca..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/learn.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -.TH LEARN 1 panther -.CT 1 inst_info -.SH NAME -learn \(mi computer aided instruction about UNIX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B learn -[ -.BI - directory -] -[ -.I subject -[ -.I lesson -[ -.I speed -] -] -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Learn -gives CAI courses and practice in the use of UNIX. -To get started -simply type `learn'. -The program will ask questions to find out what -you want to do. -The questions may be bypassed by naming a -.I subject, -and the last -.I lesson -number that -.I learn -told you in the previous session. -You may also include a -.I speed -number that was given with the lesson number -(but without the parentheses that -.I learn -places around the speed number). -If -.I lesson -is -.LR - , -.I learn -prompts for each lesson; -this is useful for debugging. -.PP -The -.I subjects -presently handled are -.EX - editor - eqn - files - macros - morefiles - C -.EE -.PP -The special command -.L bye -terminates a -.I learn -session. -.PP -The -.BI - directory -option allows one to exercise a script in -a nonstandard place. -.SH FILES -.F /usr/learn/* -.SH BUGS -The main strength of -.I learn, -that it asks the student to use the real -UNIX, also makes possible baffling mistakes. -It is helpful, especially for nonprogrammers, -to have a UNIX initiate near at hand during the first -sessions. -.PP -Occasionally lessons are incorrect, sometimes because the local version -of a command operates in a non-standard way. -Such lessons may be skipped, -but it takes some sophistication to recognize -the situation. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lex.1 b/static/v10/man1/lex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 95dd3007..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -.TH LEX 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -lex \(mi generator of lexical analysis programs -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lex -[ -.B -tvfn -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lex -generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of text. -The input -.I files -(standard input default) -contain regular expressions -to be searched for, and actions written in C to be executed when -expressions are found. -.PP -A C source program, -.F lex.yy.c -is generated, to be compiled thus: -.IP -.B cc lex.yy.c -ll -.LP -This program, when run, copies unrecognized portions of -the input to the output, -and executes the associated -C action for each regular expression that is recognized. -.PP -The options have the following meanings. -.TP -.B -t -Place the result on the standard output instead of in file -.FR lex.yy.c . -.TP -.B -v -Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated analyzer. -.TP -.B -n -Opposite of -.BR -v ; -.B -n -is default. -.TP -.B -f -`Faster' compilation: don't bother to pack -the resulting tables; limited to small programs. -.SH EXAMPLES -This program converts upper case to lower, -removes blanks at the end of lines, -and replaces multiple blanks by single blanks. -.PP -.EX -%% -[A-Z] putchar(yytext[0]+\'a\'-\'A\'); -[ ]+$ -[ ]+ putchar(\' \'); -.EE -.SH FILES -.F lex.yy.c -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR yacc (1), -.IR sed (1) -.br -M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, -`LEX\(emLexical Analyzer Generator', -this manual, Volume 2 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/library.1 b/static/v10/man1/library.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d6517a3b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/library.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,241 +0,0 @@ -.nr X \" 0=3b2(default), 1=vax,uts \" 0=3b2(default), 1=vax,uts -.if \nX=0 .ds x} LIBRARY 1 "User Environment Utilities" "RDS Standard" 1 -.if \nX=1 .ds x} LIBRARY 1 "R&D UNIX STD" -.if \nX=2 .ds x} LIBRARY 1 "R&D UNIX STD" "\&" -.if \nX=3 .ds x} -.TH \*(x} -.SH NAME -library \- send information requests to appropriate organization -.PD -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B library [-1234567] [request string] -.PD -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I library -sends document/information requests to the -appropriate organization within the Library Network. -It also handles a variety of requests for other AT&T organizations -(e.g., Engineering Information Services). -It requires the user to discriminate between seven classes of requests -as indicated by the menu it displays: -.sp -.nf -1) Order by number - this includes nearly everything announced - by the AT&T Library Network (e.g. TMs, bulletin items) or handled - by the Engineering Information Services (e.g. J docs, CPSs). -2) Order item not announced by the AT&T Library Network. Available: - Buy a copy of a book; Address labels; Technical Reports; - Internal document by date (id unknown); Photocopies; - Subscribe to a journal; foreign language services. -3) Subscribe or unsubscribe to a bulletin (e.g. Mercury, CTP) -4) Submit a database search. Examples of available databases: - book catalog, internal documents, AT&T personnel, released papers -5) Request human assistance / interaction. Type(s) available: - General AT&T Library Network assistance; Reference question. -6) Request AT&T Library Network information/services. Examples: - LINUS info, products/services descriptions, loan/reserve status -7) Read AT&T Library Network email transmissions - -.fi -Note that the first class includes anything announced by the Library Network operated by AT&T Bell Laboratories. -.PP -The main menu level of -.I library -can be skipped by giving -the number of the desired option (1 - 7) -as the first parameter to the -\f2library\f1. -.PP -The secondary menu levels in -.I library -(presently in options 2, 4, 5 and 6) -can be bypassed by selecting the desired option as the second -parameter. -For example, to do order a photocopy, use the -command -.ce -library -2 -p -.PP -Similarly, if you want to do a search of the personnel database, -you can do the command line -.ce -library -4 -p waldstein, r k -.PP -Requests for objects that can be meaningfully described with one -line can be entered on the command line. -This includes the things orderable by options 1, 3, 4, and 6. -Note that library tries in this case to function with a minimum -of interaction. -For example, if you request a TM this way, -you will not be given a chance to enter remarks connected with the request. -.PP -When permitted, the command line requests can include more than one item -(presently only options 1 and 3 support this). -An example command line is -.ce -library -1 123456-851234-56tm 5d123 ad-123456 -.PP -In options 2, 5, and 6, -.I library -will prompt for a variety of information of varying complexity. -A period (.) at any point in this session will delete the -request being entered. -Blank lines (just hit return) will cause optional information to -be left out of the request. -A line consisting of tilde e (\~e) will, when a long response is -permitted, put you into an editor. -This editor defaults to ed(1). -However, if the environment variable EDITOR is set, the specified -editor is used. -A line consisting of tilde r (\~r) will, when a long response is -permitted, read in the indicated file. -.PP -Option 7 is a misfit, in that it is primarily a reader, not a -request transmitter; although it does allow requesting items. -This option is intended for reading electronic transmissions -from the library network: primarily responses to option 4 search -requests and ASAP (specialized searches like electronic Mercury). -A convenient way to use option 7 is to invoke it via a pipe -from mail(1), mailx(1) or post(1). -.ce - | 3 "library -7" -This assumes that mail message 3 consists of a search result. -The quote marks are required due to post(1) and mailx(1) syntax. -.PP -Break causes -.I library -to exit -without sending any requests. -.PP -In general for more information about what the library command can -do, go into each option and enter a question mark. -This will cause a description of how the option works and -what it can request. -.PP -Several other pieces of information can be passed -to -.I library -to ease and improve its usage. -This information is looked up in a file called .lib (or the file indicated -by the LIBFILE shell variable). -It expects this file to contain lines of the form: -.sp -.ti 10 -ID: \f2individual's PAN or Social Security Number\f1 -.ti 10 -libname: \f2individual's last name\f1 -.ti 10 -liblog: \f2name of log file\f1 -.ti 10 -libcntl: \f2control information\f1 -.ti 10 -reader: \f2reader control information\f1 -.ti 10 -liblocal: \f2control information\f1 -.PP -If this file is not found or lines of this form are not found, -then -.I library -prompts for name and ID (PAN or SS#). -.PP -This information can also be passed to -.I library -as the shell parameters: LIBID, LIBNAME, LIBLOG, LIBCNTL, and LIBLOCAL. -.PP -.I library -keeps a log of requests sent via library if a line in the .lib -file exists giving a log file name, i.e., if you have in -your .lib file a line of the form -.ce -liblog: \f2name of log file\f1 -.PP -.I library -keeps a log of requests in that file. -This file is created in a form that can be read and manipulated -by the -.I mail -command. -To read or modify the log file, type -.ce -mail -f \f2name of log file\f1 -.PP -.I library -creates the log file in your HOME directory unless the file name -given starts with a slash (/). -.I library -will automatically check option 1 requests -for duplicates in the log file. -.PP -The libcntl information is sent with the request to the program -that receives the requests for the library networks. -Control information containing the letter ``a'' -will cause an acknowledgement to be mailed back to you that -your request has been received. -Control information of the form ``m\f2number\f1''will determine the -maximum number of items retrieved by a search request. -For example, a control line of the form -.sp -.ce -libcntl: am100 -.PP -will cause requests to be acknowledged and a maximum of 100 retrieved -search items to be mailed back to you. -.PP -The reader control information is intended to let you personalize -the way -.I library -option 7 works for you. -Each letter after the colon indicates a different option turned -on or off. -Presently available are the following: -.RS -.TP 5 -b -causes library -7 to leave a -blank line between records when more than one is displayed on the screen. -.TP 5 -c -causes -.I library -to confirm that you want the entered requests transmitted. -It does this at the end of the session, before finishing. -.TP 5 -n -is an interesting features causing no introductory menu -of available announcements to be displayed. -The reader then goes straight into the first announcement to be read, -and moves directly from one announcement to the next, without -displaying the menu of those available at each stage. -.RE -.PP -The liblocal information is used to control the execution of -.I library. -Presently the only meaningful control is \f2x\fP. -This causes library(1) to assume you are an expert and the -prompts are generally much shorter. -.PP -.I library -also uses your .lib file to save various repetitious responses -for its own use. -These will prevent you from having to duplicate responses. -.PD -.SH BUGS -.I library -checks upon input whether the request is reasonable. -New styles of request numbers require program modification -before they are valid. -.PD -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 15 -$HOME/.lib -This optional file contains a PAN and name for -.I library -to use. -.TP 15 -/usr/lib/library/library.help -The help message displayed by library. -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -mail(1), post(1), mailx(1) -.\" @(#)library.1 1.12 11/26/90 RnD added diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lim.1 b/static/v10/man1/lim.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 946c7a10..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lim.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -.TH LIM 1 SHARE -.SH NAME -lim \- change shares for users -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBlim\fP limit{+|\-|=}string[,string...][;...] \-|name|uid-uid|uid\fB..\fP ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lim -changes shares file records for several users, -a range of uids -or a list from standard input. -The changeable limits are designated by their names as defined -in the files -.IR , -and -.I -as follows: -.TP "\w'lastusedXXXXXX'u" -.B charge -Long term account charge. -.TP -.B flags -The only specifiable flag is:- -.IR notshared . -Only the first few letters needed to ensure a unique match are required. -.TP -.B lastused -Date account last used. -.TP -.B sgroup -Scheduling group for the account. -.TP -.B shares -Allocated shares. -.TP -.B usage -Usage for scheduling. -.PP -The next character designates that the limit is to be -incremented (\c -\fB+\fR\c -), decremented (\c -\fB\-\fR\c -), or set (\c -\fB=\fR\c -). -.PP -The third group of characters is interpreted as a number, -a date (if the string contains a `/'), -or as a string -(or as a comma-separated list) -depending on the type of limit being changed. -However, if the first character is '\fB?\fR', -then an explanation of the -options available with the given limit will be listed. -.PP -Additional limits are specified by a semi-colon separated list. -.PP -If any following argument is just a `\fB\-\fR', -then the standard input is read for a list of user names, -one per line. -If any following argument \fIcontains\fP a `\fB\-\fR' -then it is interpreted as a range of uids, -otherwise if it ends in trailing dots (eg: 100\fB..\fR) -it is interpreted as a range running from the first uid up to the -maximum number of registered users. -Otherwise the argument is interpreted as a name. -.PP -A list of valid limits is printed out if -.I lim -is invoked with invalid arguments (or no arguments). -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 16 -/etc/shares -for share details. -.TP -/etc/passwd -for user names and \s-1ID\s0s. -.PD -.SH SEE ALSO -pl(1), lnode(5), shares(5). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.TP -\&... could not change kernel lnode ... -The limits system call failed for a logged in user, -usually because you are attempting to change a scheduling group -to one that isn't currently active. -.SH BUGS -.I Lim -does not use -.IR getshput (3), -so be careful something else is not updating the same entry simultaneously. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/limits.1 b/static/v10/man1/limits.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9beee8c5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/limits.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -UCHAR_MAX: 000000ff=255 -USHRT_MAX: 0000ffff=65535 -UINT_MAX: ffffffff=-1 -ULONG_MAX: ffffffff=-1 -CHAR_MAX: 0000007f=127 -SCHAR_MAX: 0000007f=127 -SHRT_MAX: 00007fff=32767 -INT_MAX: 7fffffff=2147483647 -LONG_MAX: 7fffffff=2147483647 -CHAR_MIN: ffffff80=-128 -SCHAR_MIN: ffffff80=-128 -SHRT_MIN: ffff8000=-32768 -INT_MIN: 80000000=-2147483648 -LONG_MIN: 80000000=-2147483648 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 b/static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 63ddb0ef..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.TH LINKDATA 1 -.SH NAME -link \- group data files into the text segment of a .o file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B linkdata file1 file2 ... -.br -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -.IR linkdata -reads the named files and generates an a.out-format file on the -standard output. The resulting file is as if it were assembled from -the following .s file. (The files can be rather long, so it's not -a good idea to make an actual assembly language file.) -.DS L -.ft C - .text - .globl datalist - .set datalist, 1f+4 # if there are no files, use ".set datalist, 1" - -# repeat the following for each file - .align 2 -1: .long 0x31 - .long 2f+4 - .long 3f+4 - .long 1f+4 # for the last file, use .long 1 instead -2: .long strlen("filename")*16+15 - .ascii "filename" - .align 2 -3: .word length(contents of file1)*16+15 - .byte [contents of file 1] - .align 2 - -.ft R -.DE diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lint.1 b/static/v10/man1/lint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4c9d3ee1..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,319 +0,0 @@ -.TH LINT 1 -.CT 1 prog_c -.SH NAME -lint, cyntax, cem \- C program verifiers -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lint -[ -.B -abchnpuvx -] [ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B cyntax -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B /usr/lib/cyntax/cem -[ -.I option ... -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lint -checks, more thoroughly than -.IR cc (1), -the syntactic validity and semantic consistency of -one or more C program -.I files. -It is assumed that all the -.I files -are to be loaded together; they are checked for -mutual compatibility. -Function definitions for certain libraries are available to -.IR lint ; -these libraries are referred to by a -conventional name, -such as -.LR -lm , -in the style of -.IR ld (1). -.PP -Any number of the option letters in the following list -may be used. -The -.BR -D , -.BR -U , -and -.B -I -options of -.IR cc (1) -are also recognized as separate arguments. -.TP -.B p -Attempt to check portability to some other -dialects of C. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B h -Apply heuristics to -intuit bugs, improve style, and reduce waste. -.TP -.B b -Report -.I break -statements that cannot be reached. -.TP -.B v -Suppress complaints about unused arguments in functions. -.TP -.B x -Report variables referred to by extern declarations, -but never used. -.TP -.B a -Report assignments of long values to int variables. -.TP -.B c -Complain about casts which have questionable portability. -.TP -.B u -Do not complain about functions and variables used and not -defined, or defined and not used (this is suitable for running -.I lint -on a subset of files out of a larger program). -.TP -.B n -Do not check compatibility against the standard library. -.PD -.PP -Certain conventional comments in the C source -will change the behavior of -.IR lint : -.TP -.B /*NOTREACHED*/ -at appropriate points. -Stop comments about unreachable code. -.PD 0 -.TP -.BI /*VARARGS n */ -Suppress -the usual checking for variable numbers of arguments -in the following function declaration. -The data types of the first -.I n -arguments are checked; -a missing -.I n -is taken to be 0. -.TP -.BI /*PRINTFLIKE n */ -The data types of the first -.I n\^ -arguments are checked as usual. -The remaining arguments are -checked -against the -.IR n th -argument, which is interpreted as a -.IR printf (3) -format string. -.TP -.BI /*SCANFLIKE n */ -Similarly for -.IR scanf (3). -.TP -.B /*NOSTRICT*/ -Shut off strict type checking in the next expression. -.TP -.B /*ARGSUSED*/ -Turn on the -.B -v -option for the next function. -.TP -.B /*LINTLIBRARY*/ -at the beginning of a file. Shut off complaints about -unused functions in this file. -.PD -.PP -.I Cyntax -makes checks similar to those of -.I lint, -more stringent about syntax, less observant of portability issues. -It keeps type information gleaned from source files, -whose names end with -.LR .c , -in `object files' with corresponding names ending in -.LR .O . -If all goes well it will cross check among all the -.L .c -and -.L .O -input -.I files. -.PP -Options -.BR -D , -.BR -I , -.BR -U , -.BR -o , -.BR -l -are as in -.IR cc (1), -option -.B -n -is as in -.IR lint . -Options -.BR -O , -.BR -P , -.BR -g , -.BR -p , -and -.BR -s -are ignored. -Other options are: -.TP -.B -c -Suppress cross checking. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -d -Passed to -.IR cem . -.TP -.B -h -Base object files on the basename of the source file -rather than the full pathname. -.TP -.B -G -Change default directory of include files to -.FR /usr/2include , -pass -.B -lg -to -.I cem -instead of -.BR -lc . -.TP -.B -j -Change default directory of include files to -.FR /usr/jerq/include , -pass -.B -lj -to -.I cem -instead of -.BR -lc . -.TP -.B -k -Change default directory of include files to -.FR /usr/ninclude , -pass -.B -lk -to -.I cem -instead of -.BR -lc . -.TP -.B -w -Enable pedantic warning diagnostics. -.TP -.B -m -equivalent to -.LR "-j -DMUX" . -.TP -.B -v -Report what -.I cyntax -is actually doing. -.TP -.BI -V func : n -Declare function -.I func -to have a variable number of arguments, the first -.I n -of which are to be type checked. -.PD -.PP -.I Cem -(cemantics), the cross-checker, is normally invoked only by -.IR cyntax . -It also has options, some of which -.I cyntax -can't be coerced into providing. -Besides -.B -o -and -.BR -l , -they are: -.TP -.B -m -Don't believe file modification times. -These are normally used to avert redundant type checking. -.PD0 -.TP -.B -d -``Debug'': print ascii version of -.L .O -files on standard output. -.TP -.B -p -Be pedantic about type checking. -.TP -.B -t -Unconditionally include file modification times in diagnostics. -.TP -.B -v -Use a verbose format for type names. -.PD -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/lint/llib-port -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lint/lint[12] -programs -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lint/llib-lc -declarations for standard functions -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lint/llib-port -declarations for portable functions -.TP -.F /usr/include/* -.TP -.F /usr/lib/cyntax/ccom -cyntax proper -.TP -.F /usr/lib/cyntax/libc -type library -.TP -.F /usr/lib/cyntax/libj -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR cc (1), -.IR ld (1) -.br -S. C. Johnson -`Lint, a C Program Checker', in -Bell Laboratories, -.I Unix Programmer's Manual, -Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1983, Vol. 2 -.RI ( "Seventh Edition" ) -.SH BUGS -.IR Exit (2) -and other functions which do not return -are not understood by -.IR lint ; -this causes various lies. -.br -The unnatural default setting of -.I lint -option -.B -b -is intended to hide the ugliness of -C code produced by -.IR yacc (1) -and -.IR lex (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lisp.1 b/static/v10/man1/lisp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ca26f391..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lisp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ -.TH LISP 1 "alice sola" -.SH NAME -lisp, liszt, lxref \- lisp interpreter and compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lisp -.PP -.B liszt -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I source -] -.PP -.B lxref -[ -.RB \- n -] -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lisp -interprets Franz Lisp, which closely resembles MIT's Maclisp. -Interpreted functions may be mixed with code compiled by -.I liszt, -and both may be debugged using the -`Joseph Lister' trace package. -.LP -There are too many functions to list here; one should refer to the -manuals listed below. -.PP -.I Liszt -compiles the lisp -.I source -file, whose name ends in -.BR .l , -into an object file, whose name ends in -.BR .o . -The following options are available. -.TP -.B \-w -suppress warning diagnostics -.TP -.B \-q -suppress compilation statistics -.TP -.BI \-o " object" -put object code in specified file -.TP -.B \-m -source is Maclisp -.TP -.B \-u -source is UCI Lisp -.TP -.B \-S -leave assembler input in file suffixed -.BR .s ; -do not finish compilation -.TP -.B \-x -place cross-reference list in file suffixed -.B .x -to be used by -.I lxref. -.PP -.I Liszt -with no arguments is the same as -.I lisp. -The compiler may be invoked from the interpreter: -.IP -( liszt [options] foo) -.LP -compiles file `foo.l'. -.PP -.I Lxref -writes to the standard output a readable form of -the named cross-reference files. -Not more than -.I n -(default 50) references to any function will be printed. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'/usr/lib/list/machacks.l 'u -/usr/lib/lisp/auxfns0.l common functions -.br -/usr/lib/lisp/auxfns1.l less common functions -.br -/usr/lib/lisp/trace.l Joseph Lister trace package -.br -/usr/lib/lisp/toplevel.l top level read-eval-print loop -.br -/usr/lib/lisp/machacks.l Maclisp compatibility package -.br -/usr/lib/list/ucifnc.l UCI Lisp compatibility package -.SH SEE ALSO -`F\s-2RANZ\s0\ L\s-2ISP\s0 Manual, Version 1' -by John K. Foderaro -.br -M\s-2ACLISP\s0 Manual -.SH "BUGS" -The error system is in a state of flux and not all error messages are -as informative as they could be. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ln.1 b/static/v10/man1/ln.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 80c55e9e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ln.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'LN (I)'3/15/72'LN (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME ln -- make a link -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS ln__ name\d1\u [ name\d2\u ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION ln__ creates a link to an existing file name\d1\u. -If name\d2\u is given, the link has that name; -otherwise it is placed in the current directory -and its name is the last component -of name\d1\u. -.sp -It is forbidden to link to a directory -or to link across file systems. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO rm(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS There is nothing particularly -wrong with ln__, but links don't work right with respect -to the backup system: one copy is backed up for each link, and -(more serious) in case of a file system reload -both copies are restored and the information that a link was involved -is lost. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/load.1 b/static/v10/man1/load.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1c4133a2..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/load.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.TH LOAD 1 -.CT 1 sa_mortals -.SH NAME -load \(mi load statistics -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B load -[ -.I interval -[ -.I count -[ -.I sysfile -[ -.I corefile -] -] -] -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Load -reports the number of -processes ready to run averaged over the preceding 1, 5, and 15 minutes. -.PP -The optional -.I interval -argument causes -a report once each -.I interval -seconds. -The first report is for all time since a reboot and each -subsequent report is for the last interval only. -.PP -The optional -.I count -argument restricts the number of reports. -.PP -The optional arguments -.I sysfile -and -.I corefile -cause the named files to be consulted instead of the defaults, -.F /unix -and -.FR /dev/kmem . -.SH FILES -.F /dev/kmem -.br -.F /unix -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR vismon (9.1), -.IR ps (1), -.IR vmstat (8) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 b/static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 deleted file mode 100755 index a850c376..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,212 +0,0 @@ -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH LOADFONT 1 "630 MTG" -.XE "loadfont" -.SH NAME -loadfont \- font managing program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B -loadfont [\-r name,name...] [\-p directory] [\-s] [\-c] [file...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I loadfont -program lets the user load and remove fonts from the terminal's cache. -It will download its terminal side which interacts with -the user. The command line arguments have the following meanings: -.PP -.TP 12 -\fB\-r\fR -Removes the given font from the terminal's cache. -.PP -.TP 12 -\fB\-p\fR -Sets default search path for font files. If this isn't set, -it defaults to $DMD/termfonts. All the file names in this directory -are put in the load submenu. -.TP 12 -\fB\-s\fR -Makes loadfont stay running after executing the earlier command line options. -.PP -.TP 12 -\fB\-c\fR -Causes loadfont to be cached in the 630 MTG cache system. When -this option is used, the loadfont program will remain in the -terminal after the program exits. Then, the next time loadfont -is executed, it will not have to be downloaded again. -.sp -Another effect of downloading loadfont with the \-c option is -that it can be executed in more than one window without -additional downloading. -.PP -.TP 12 -\fBfile\fR -Loads the given font file into the terminal's cache. -.PP -If a \f3file\f1 argument and/or the -\f3\-r\f1 option are given, loadfont will exit after -loading/removing the specified fonts, unless the \f3\-s\f1 is -also given to make it stay running. -.PP -The user interacts with -.I loadfont -by using a button 2 menu and, when prompted, the keyboard. -When button 2 is depressed, a menu with the following items appears. -.PP -.TP 8 -\fBLoad\fR -Load has a submenu of fonts that can be downloaded. -The fonts listed are all the files in the default search directory. -If the first item, Keyboard, is selected, the user is prompted -for the name of a font file to download. -.PP -.TP 8 -\fBRemove\fR -Remove has a submenu of all the fonts in the terminal's cache. -Selecting one will remove it from the cache and free the memory -it was using. Fonts in ROM or being used by another process -will be greyed in the menu and cannot be removed. -.PP -.TP 8 -\fBQuit\fR -Will make the program exit. -.PP -While a font is downloading, the button 2 menu will have only -one item, Terminate Download. Selecting it will stop the download -and switch the user back to the original menu. -.PP -The three fonts in ROM, resident to the 630 MTG, are called "small -font," "medium font," and "large font." Brief descriptions of these -fonts follow. -.PP -In the tables, -.I cell size -indicates the dimensions of the rectangle containing the character -image. All the characters in a particular font have the same cell size. -.I Character size -is the dimension of the largest character in the font. -.I Max chars -indicates how many characters in that font size will fit -horizontally and vertically in a full screen -window. See the section on fonts in the -\f2630 MTG Software Development Guide\f1 -for more information on font data structures. -.sp -.TS -center, box, tab(~); -lb | l. -Font Name~small font -Character Size~6 pixels wide by 9 pixels high -Cell Size~7 pixels wide by 14 pixels high -Max Chars~140 across, 69 down -_ -Font Name~medium font -Character Size~8 pixels wide by 11 pixels high -Cell Size~9 pixels wide by 14 pixels high -Max Chars~109 across, 69 down -_ -Font Name~large font -Character Size~9 pixels wide by 12 pixels high -Cell Size~11 pixels wide by 16 pixels high -Max Chars~89 across, 61 down -_ -.TE -.bp -.SH FILES -The default search path for font files is $DMD/termfonts. This -directory contains nine fonts. -.sp 2 -.TS -center, box, tab(~); -lb | l. -Font Name~noseprint -Character Size~5 pixels wide by 7 pixels high -Cell Size~6 pixels wide by 9 pixels high -Max Chars~163 across, 108 down -Comments~The characters are a single pixel thick and all -~are smaller than the characters found in the -~resident "small font". -_ -Font Name~7x14thin -Character Size~6 pixels wide by 9 pixels high -Cell Size~7 pixels wide by 14 pixels high -Max Chars~140 across, 69 down -Comments~The difference between "7x14thin" and the resident -~"small font" is in the thickness of the characters. -~The "7x14thin" consists of characters which are a -~single pixel in thickness whereas the "small font" -~consists of characters which are two pixels in thickness. -_ -.TE -.bp -.TS -center, box, tab(~); -lb | l. -Font Name~12x18norm -Character Size~10 pixels wide by 13 pixels high -Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 18 pixels high -Max Chars~81 across, 54 down -Comments~The characters are 2 pixels thick. -_ -Font Name~12x25thin -Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high -Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high -Max Chars~81 across, 39 down -Comments~The characters are a single pixel thick. -_ -Font Name~12x25norm -Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high -Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high -Max Chars~81 across, 39 down -Comments~The characters are 2 pixels thick. -_ -Font Name~12x25round -Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high -Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high -Max Chars~81 across, 39 down -Comments~The main difference between this font and the -~font called "12x25norm" is in the STYLE of the -~characters. The characters in "12x25round" are -~rounder in appearance, whereas the characters in -~"12x25norm" are squarer in appearance. -_ -Font Name~12x25BOLD -Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high -Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high -Max Chars~81 across, 39 down -Comments~The characters are 3 pixels thick. -_ -Font Name~script -Character Size~15 pixels wide (approx.) by 15 pixels high -Cell Size~16 pixels wide by 24 pixels high -Max Chars~61 across, 40 down -Comments~The characters in this font are created in -~script style. -_ -Font Name~twice_big -Character Size~18 pixels wide by 24 pixels high -Cell Size~22 pixels wide by 32 pixels high -Max Chars~44 across, 30 down -Comments~The characters are twice as tall and twice as -~wide as the resident "large font" -_ -.TE -.bp -.SH SEE ALSO -ucache(1), font(4). -.br -\f2630 MTG Software Development Guide\f1. -.SH WARNING -.P -Fonts that do not have 128 characters require the proper -parity setting when used in the default window process in the -non-layers environment. This is needed because a mod is done -on characters received from the host with the number of -characters in the font being used. -.P -This implies that parity bits are ignored for fonts with -exactly 128 characters, since c&0x7F == c%128. Fonts with less -than 128 characters need identical parity settings on the host -and in the terminal so that parity bits get stripped properly. -Characters with more than 128 characters require 8 bits with -no parity on both the host and in the terminal, because the -eighth bit is used to access characters greater than -128. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/login.1 b/static/v10/man1/login.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d979e088..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/login.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'LOGIN (I)'3/15/72'LOGIN (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME login -- sign onto UNIX -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS login_____ [ username [ password ] ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION The login_____ command -is used when a user initially -signs onto UNIX, or it may be used at any time to change -from one user to another. -The latter case is the one summarized above and -described here. -See login_____ (VII) for how to dial up initially. - -If login_____ is invoked without an argument, -it will ask for a user name, and, if -appropriate, a password. -Echoing is turned off (if possible) during the typing of the password, -so it will not appear on the written record of the -session. -.sp -After a successful login, -accounting files are updated and -the user is informed of the -existence of mailbox -and message-of-the-day files. - -Login is recognized by the Shell -and executed directly (without forking). -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /tmp/utmp accounting -.br -/tmp/wtmp accounting -.br -mailbox mail -.br -/etc/motd message-of-the-day -/etc/passwd password file -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO login(VII), init(VII), getty(VII), mail(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "login incorrect", -if the name or the password is bad. -"No Shell,", "cannot open password file," "no directory:" -consult a UNIX programming councilor. -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/look.1 b/static/v10/man1/look.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9db99ab5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/look.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -.TH LOOK 1 -.CT 1 files -.SH NAME -look \(mi find lines in a sorted list -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B look -[ -.BI -dfnixt c -] -[ -.I string -] -[ -.I file -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Look -consults a sorted -.I file -and prints all lines that begin with -.IR string . -It uses binary search. -.PP -The following options are recognized. -Options -.BI dfnt c -affect comparisons as in -.IR sort (1). -.TP -.B -i -Interactive. -There is no -.I string -argument; instead -.I look -takes lines from the standard input as strings to be looked up. -.TP -.B -x -Exact. -Print only lines of the file whose key matches -.I string -exactly. -.TP -.B -d -`Directory' order: -only letters, digits, -tabs and blanks participate in comparisons. -.TP -.B -f -Fold. -Upper case letters compare equal to lower case. -.TP -.B -n -Numeric comparison with initial string of digits, optional minus sign, -and optional decimal point. -.TP -.BI -t c -`Tab character' -.I c -terminates the sort key in the -.I file. -.PP -If no -.I file -is specified, -.F /usr/dict/words -is assumed, with collating sequence -.BR df . -.SH FILES -.F /usr/dict/words -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sort (1), -.IR gre (1), -.IR dict (7) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Look -returns exit status 0 if -.I string -is found, 1 if not found, 2 for error. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lorder.1 b/static/v10/man1/lorder.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 233f7d6a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lorder.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -.TH LORDER 1 -.CT 1 lib_obj -.SH NAME -lorder \(mi find ordering relation for an object library -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lorder -.I file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The input -is one or more object or library archive (see -.IR ar (1)) -.I files. -The standard output -is a list of pairs of object file names, -meaning that the first file of the pair refers to -external identifiers defined in the second. -The output may be processed by -.IR tsort (1) -to find an ordering of -a library suitable for one-pass sequential access by -.IR ld (1). -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -ar cr libnew.a \`lorder *.o | tsort\` -Build a new library from existing -.B .o -files. -.SH FILES -.F /tmp/*symref -.br -.F /tmp/*symdef -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR ar (1), -.IR tsort (1), -.IR ld (1) -.SH BUGS -The names of object files, in and out of libraries, must end with -.BR .o ; -nonsense results otherwise. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lp.1 b/static/v10/man1/lp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2d81c365..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,181 +0,0 @@ -.TH LP 1 -.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev -.SH NAME -lp \- printer output -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lp -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lp -is a generalized output printing service. -It can be used to queue files for printing, -check a queue, or kill jobs in a queue. -The options are: -.TF -p\ \fIproc\fP -.TP -.BI -d " dest" -Select the destination printer. -If -.I dest -is -.LR ? , -list the currently available printers. -In the absence of -.LR -d , -the destination is taken from the environment variable -.BR LPDEST , -or finally from the file -.FR /usr/spool/lp/defdevice . -Destination -.L stdout -is the standard output. -.TP -.BI -p " proc" -The given preprocessor is invoked. -The default preprocessor is -.LR generic , -which tries to do the right thing for regular text, -.IR troff (1) -output, or -.IR bitfile (9.5) -bitmaps. -If no preprocessing is desired -(e.g. an ImPress file from -.L dviimp -is to be printed) -.L noproc -may be specified. -.TP -.B -q -Print the queue for the given destination. -For some devices, include printer status. -.TP -.B -k -Kill the job(s) given as subsequent arguments instead of file names -for the given destination. -.PD -.PP -The remaining options may be used to affect the output at a given device. -These options may not be applicable to all devices. -.TF -p\ \fIproc\fP -.TP -.BI -c " n" -Print -.I n -copies. -.TP -.BI -f " font" -Set the font (default -.LR CW.11 ). -.TP -.BI -H -Suppress printing of header page. -.TP -.BI -i " n" -Select paper input tray options -.I n. -The value -.I n -may be a comma separated list. -.TP -.BI -l " n" -Set the number of lines per page to -.I n. -.TP -.B -L -Print pages in landscape mode (i.e. turned 90 degrees). -.TP -.BI -m " n" -Set magnification to -.I n. -.TP -.BI -n " n" -Print -.I n -logical pages per physical page. -.TP -.BI -o " list" -Print only pages whose page numbers appear in -the comma-separated -.I list -of numbers and ranges. -A range -.IB n - m -means pages -.I n -through -.IR m ; -a range -.BI - n -means from the beginning to page -.IR n ; -a range -.IB n - -means from page -.I n -to the end. -.TP -.B -r -Reverse the order of page printing (currently not functional). -.TP -.BI -x " n" -Set the horizontal -offset of the print image, measured in inches. -.TP -.BI -y " n" -Set the vertical -offset of the print image, measured in inches. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP 0 -.L -eqn paper | troff -ms | lp -Typeset and print a paper that contains equations. -.TP -.L -pr -l100 file | lp -l100 -fCW.8 -Print a file in a small font at 100 lines per page. -.TP -.L -lp -dstdout -H postfile -Convert a bitmap to postscript form. -Use -.IR mpictures (6) -macros to insert the output into a -.I troff -document. -.TP -.L -lp -du -H -i2,simplex viewgraphs.dvi -will take input from the second paper tray and print single sided, -even if the printer defaults to double sided (duplex) output. -Do not print a header page. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/spool/lp/defdevice -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lp/defdevice -default printer name -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lp/devices -printer list with interface specification -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lp/process -directory of preprocessors -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lp/prob/* -where printer jobs go when things go awry -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR pr (1), -.IR blitblt (9.1), -.IR plot (1), -.IR font (6), -.IR postio (8), -.IR postscript (8) -.SH BUGS -Not all options work with all output devices. -.br -Any user can kill any job. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lpr.1 b/static/v10/man1/lpr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ac3e644e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/lpr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -.TH LPR 1 alice -.CT 1 comm_dev -.SH NAME -lpr \(mi line printer spooler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lpr -[ -.B -m -] -[ -.I name ... -] -.PP -.B lp0 -[ -.I name ... -] -.PP -.B lp1 -[ -.I name ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lpr -causes the -named files -to be queued and then printed off line. -If no files are named, the standard input is read. -The option -.B -m -causes notification via -.IR mail (1) -to be sent when the job completes. -.PP -.I Lp0 -and -.I lp1 -direct output to particular printers. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/spool/lpd/* -.TP -.F /usr/spool/lpd/* -spool area -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lpd -printer daemon -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lpfx -filter to handle banners and underlining -.SH SEE\ ALSO -.IR pr (1), -.IR thinkblt (9.1) -.SH BUGS -Queued jobs print in directory (seemingly random) order. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ls.1 b/static/v10/man1/ls.1 deleted file mode 100644 index eb49b736..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ls.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,215 +0,0 @@ -.TH LS 1 -.CT 1 files dirs -.SH NAME -ls, lc \(mi list contents of directory -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ls -[ -.B -acdfilrstuFLR -] -.I name ... -.PP -.B lc -[ -.I options -] -.I name ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -For each directory argument, -.I ls -lists the contents of the directory; -for each file argument, -.I ls -repeats its name and any other information requested. -The output is sorted alphabetically by default. -When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. -When several arguments are given, -the arguments are first sorted, -but file arguments appear -before directories and their contents. -.PP -There are an unbelievable number of options: -.TP -.B -l -List in long format, giving mode (see below), number of links, owner, -group, -size in bytes, and time of last modification -for each file. -Symbolic links are identified by a link count marked -.LR L ; -the link count is that of the ultimate file. -If the file is a special file the size field will instead contain -the major and minor device numbers. -.TP -.B -d -If argument is a directory, list its name, not -its contents. -.TP -.B -t -Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of -by name, as is normal. -.TP -.B -L -Under -.B -l -for each symbolic link -give the immediate, not the ultimate, link count -and append the name pointed to. -.TP -.B -a -List all entries; usually -.F . -and -.F .. -are suppressed. -.TP -.B -c -Under -.B -t -sort by time of inode change; -under -.B -l -print time of inode change. -.TP -.B -f -Force each argument to be interpreted as a directory -and list the name found in each slot. -This option turns off -.BR -l ", " -t ", " -s , -and -.BR -r , -and -turns on -.BR -a ; -the order is the order in which entries -appear in the directory. -.TP -.B -F -cause directories to be marked with a trailing -.L / -and executable -files to be marked with a trailing -.L * -.TP -.B -i -Print i-number in first column -of the report for each file listed. -.TP -.B -r -Reverse the order of sort to get reverse alphabetic -or oldest first as appropriate. -.TP -.B -R -recursively list subdirectories encountered. -.TP -.B -s -Give size in Kbytes for each entry. -.TP -.B -u -Under -.B -t -sort by time of last access; -under -.B -l -print time of last access. -.PP -The mode printed under the -.B -l -option contains 11 characters -which are interpreted -as follows: -the first character is -.TP -.B d -if the entry is a directory; -.PD 0 -.TP -.B b -if the entry is a block-type special file; -.TP -.B c -if the entry is a character-type special file; -.TP -.B l -if the entry is a symbolic link and option -.B -L -is in effect; -.TP -.B - -if the entry is a plain file. -.PD -.PP -The next 9 characters are interpreted -as three sets of three bits each. -The first set refers to owner permissions; -the next to permissions to others in the same user-group; -and the last to all others. -Within each set the three characters indicate -permission respectively to read, to write, or to -execute the file as a program. -For a directory, `execute' permission is interpreted -to mean permission to search the directory -for a specified file. -The permissions are indicated as follows: -.TP 3 -.B r -if the file is readable; -.PD 0 -.TP 3 -.B w -if the file is writable; -.TP 3 -.B x -if the file is executable; -.TP 3 -.B - -if the indicated permission is not granted. -.PD -.PP -The group-execute permission character is given -as -.B s -if the file has set-group-ID mode; -likewise the user-execute permission character is given -as -.B s -if the file has set-user-ID mode. -.PP -The last character of the mode (normally a blank) -indicates the type of concurrency control: -.TP -.B e -if the file is set for exclusive access (1 writer or -.I n -readers); -.PD 0 -.TP -.B y -if the file is set for synchronized access (1 writer and -.I n -readers); -.PD 0 -.TP -.B a -if the file is set for append-only (all writes happen at end); -.PD 0 -.TP -.B b -if the file is blinded. -(Blind directories are unreadable.) -.PD -.PP -.I Lc -is the same as -.I ls, -but prints the list in multiple columns. -.SH FILES -.FR /etc/passwd -.br -.FR /etc/group -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR stat (2) -.SH BUGS -Option -.B -s -counts unwritten holes as if they were real data. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/m.1 b/static/v10/man1/m.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f1df70e4..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/m.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -nCC -O -c alloc.c -nCC -O -c dcl.c -nCC -O -c dcl2.c -nCC -O -c dcl3.c -nCC -O -c dcl4.c -nCC -O -c del.c -nCC -O -c error.c -nCC -O -c expand.c -nCC -O -c expr.c -nCC -O -c expr2.c -nCC -O -c expr3.c -nCC -O -c find.c -nCC -O -c lalex.c -nCC -O -c lex.c -nCC -DMUNCH -O -c main.c -nCC -O -c norm.c -nCC -O -c norm2.c -nCC -O -c print.c -nCC -O -c print2.c -nCC -O -c repr.c -nCC -O -c simpl.c -nCC -O -c simpl2.c -nCC -O -c size.c -nCC -O -c table.c -nCC -O -c typ.c -nCC -O -c typ2.c -yacc gram.y - -conflicts: 13 shift/reduce, 3 reduce/reduce -nCC -DGRAM -O -c y.tab.c -nCC -o cfront -O alloc.o dcl.o dcl2.o dcl3.o dcl4.o del.o error.o expand.o expr.o expr2.o expr3.o find.o lalex.o lex.o main.o norm.o norm2.o print.o print2.o repr.o simpl.o simpl2.o size.o table.o typ.o typ2.o y.tab.o diff --git a/static/v10/man1/m4.1 b/static/v10/man1/m4.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1e2fd5c5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/m4.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,315 +0,0 @@ -.TH M4 1 -.CT 1 prog_c -.SH NAME -m4 \(mi macro processor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B m4 -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I M4\^ -is a macro processor -intended as a front end for C and other languages. -Each of the argument files is processed in order; -if there are no files, or if a file name is -.BR - , -the standard input is read. -The processed text is written on the standard output. -.PP -The options and their effects are as follows: -.TP -.B -e -Operate interactively. -Interrupts are ignored and the output is unbuffered. -Using this mode requires a special state of mind. -.TP -.B -s -Enable line sync output for the C preprocessor, -.RB ( #line " .\|.\|.\|)" -.TP -.BI -B int\^ -Change the size of the push-back and argument collection -buffers from the default of 4,096. -.TP -.BI -H int\^ -Change the size of the symbol table hash array from the -default of 199. -The size should be prime. -.TP -.BI -S int\^ -Change the size of the call stack from the default of 100 slots. -Macros take three slots, and non-macro arguments take one. -.TP -.BI -T int\^ -Change the size of the token buffer from the default of 512 bytes. -.PP -The preceding options must appear before any -file names or -.B -D -or -.B -U -options. -.TP -\f5-D\fP\f2name\^\fP[\f5=\fP\f2val\^\fP] -Defines -.I name\^ -to -.I val\^ -or to null if -.I val -is missing. -.TP -.BI -U name\^ -undefines -.IR name . -.PP -Macro calls -have the form: -.IP -.L name(arg1,arg2, .\|.\|., argn) -.PP -The -.B ( -must immediately follow the name of the macro. -If a defined macro name is not followed by a -.BR ( , -it is deemed to have no arguments. -Leading unquoted blanks, tabs, and new-lines are ignored while collecting arguments. -Potential macro names consist of alphabetic letters, -digits, and underscore -.BR _ , -where the first character is not a digit. -.PP -Left and right single quotes are used to quote strings. -The value of a quoted string is the string stripped of the quotes. -.PP -When a macro name is recognized, -its arguments are collected by searching for a matching right -parenthesis. -Macro evaluation proceeds normally during the collection of the arguments, -and any commas or right parentheses -which happen to turn up within the value of a nested -call are as effective as those in the original input text. -After argument collection, -the value of the macro is pushed back onto the input stream -and rescanned. -.PP -The value of a macro is obtained by replacing -each occurrence of -.BI $ n\^ -in the replacement text, -where -.I n\^ -is a digit, -with the -.IR n -th -argument. -Argument 0 is the name of the macro; -missing arguments are replaced by the null string; -.B $# -is replaced by the number of arguments; -.B $* -is replaced by a list of all the arguments separated by commas; -.B $@ -is like -.BR $* , -but each argument is quoted (with the current quotes). -.PP -.I M4\^ -makes available the following built-in macros. -They may be redefined, but once this is done the original meaning is lost. -Their values are null unless otherwise stated. -.TP 12 -.B define -the second argument is installed as the replacement text of the macro -whose name is the first argument. -.TP -.B undefine -Remove the definition of the macro named in the argument. -.TP -.B defn -Return the quoted definition of the argument(s); -useful for renaming macros, especially built-ins. -.TP -.B pushdef -Like -.IR define , -but save any previous definition. -.TP -.B popdef -Remove current definition of the argument(s), -exposing the previous one if any. -.TP -.B ifdef -If the first argument is defined, the value is the second argument, otherwise the third. -If there is no third argument, the value is null. -The word -.L unix\^ -is predefined on -.SM UNIX -versions of -.IR m4 . -.TP -.B shift -Return all but the first argument. -The other arguments pushed back with -commas in between and quoted to -nullify the effect of the extra scan. -.TP -.B changequote -Change quote symbols to the first and second arguments. -The symbols may be up to five characters long. -.B Changequote\^ -without arguments restores the original values -(i.e., -.LR `\|' ). -.TP -.B changecom -Change left and right comment markers from the default -.B # -and new-line. -With no arguments, the comment mechanism is effectively -disabled. -With one argument, the left marker becomes the argument and -the right marker becomes new-line. -With two arguments, both markers are affected. -Comment markers may be up to five characters long. -.TP -.B divert -.I m4\^ -Switch output to one of 10 streams, -numbered 0-9 designated by the argument. -The final output is the concatenation of the streams -in numerical order; -stream 0 is the current initially. -Output to a stream other than 0 through 9 -is discarded. -.TP -.B undivert -Cause immediate output of text from diversions named as -arguments, or all diversions if no argument. -Text may be undiverted into another diversion. -Once undiverted, the diverted text is no longer contained in that diversion. -.TP -.B divnum -Return the name of the current output stream. -.TP -.B dnl -reads and discards characters up to and including the next new-line. -.TP -.B ifelse -If the first argument is the same string as the second, -then the value is the third argument. -If not, and if there are more than four arguments, the process is repeated with arguments 4, 5, 6 and 7. -Otherwise, the value is either the fourth string, or, if that is not present, -null. -.TP -.B incr -Return the value of the argument incremented by 1. -The value of the argument is calculated -by interpreting an initial digit-string as a decimal number. -.TP -.B decr -Return the value of the argument decremented by 1. -.TP -.B eval -Evaluate the argument as an arithmetic expression, using 32-bit arithmetic. -C-like operators include -.BR +-*/% , -bitwise -.BR &|^~ ; -relationals; parentheses. -Octal and hex numbers may be specified as in C. -The second argument specifies the radix for the result; -the default is 10. -The third argument may be used to specify the minimum number -of digits in the result. -.TP -.B len -Returns the number of characters in the argument. -.TP -.B index -Return the position in the first argument where the second argument begins (zero origin), -or \-1 if the second argument does not occur. -.TP -.B substr -Return a substring of the first argument. -The second argument is a zero origin -number selecting the first character; -the third argument indicates the length of the substring. -A missing third argument is taken to be large enough to extend to -the end of the first string. -.TP -.B translit -Transliterate the characters in the first argument -from the set given by the second argument to the set given by the third, -deleting characters that lack a correspondent in the third set. -There is no character-range notation. -.TP -.B include -Return the contents of the file named in the argument. -.TP -.B sinclude -Same, but give no diagnostic if the file is inaccessible. -.TP -.B syscmd -Execute the -.SM UNIX -command given in the first argument. -No value is returned. -.TP -.B sysval -The return code from the last call to -.IR syscmd . -.TP -.B maketemp -Fill in a string of -.LR X -characters in the argument with the current process id. -.TP -.B m4exit -Exit immediately from -.IR m4 . -Argument 1, if given, is the exit code; -the default is 0. -.TP -.B m4wrap -Push the argument back at the end of the input. -Example: -.L m4wrap(`cleanup()') -.TP -.B errprint -Prints the argument -on the standard error file. -.TP -.B dumpdef -Print current names and definitions, -for the named items, or for all if no arguments are given. -.TP -.B traceon -If there are no arguments, turn on tracing for all macros -(including built-ins). -Otherwise, turn on tracing for named macros. -.TP -.B traceoff -Turn off trace globally and for any macros specified. -Macros specifically traced by -.B traceon\^ -can be untraced only by specific calls to -.BR traceoff . -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -define(fib,`ifelse(define(`n',eval($1))n,0,1,n,1,1,dnl() -`eval(fib(n-1)+fib($1-2))')')dnl() -fib(2*3) -.EE -.ns -.IP -Recursively evaluate a Fibonacci number. -The inner -.B define -avoids some reevaluations. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/m6.1 b/static/v10/man1/m6.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e36d1037..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/m6.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'M6 (I)'11/15/72'M6 (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME m6 -- general purpose macro processor -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS m6__ -[ -d__ arg1 ] [ arg2 [ arg3 ] ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION m6__ -takes input from file arg2 (or standard input if arg2 is missing) -and places output on file arg3 (or standard output). -A working file of definitions, "m.def", -is initialized from file arg1 if that is supplied. -M6 differs from the standard [1] in these -respects: -.sp -#trace:, #source: and #end: -are not defined. -.sp -#meta,arg1,arg2: transfers the role of metacharacter -arg1 to character arg2. If two metacharacters become identical -thereby, the outcome of further processing is not guaranteed. -For example, to make []{} play the -roles of #:<> type -.sp -.in+5 -\\\#meta,<\\\#>,[: -.br -[meta,<:>,]: -.br -[meta,[substr,<<>>,1,1;,{] -.br -[meta,[substr,{{>>,2,1;,}] -.in-5 -.sp -#del,arg1: deletes the definition of macro arg1. -.sp -#save: and #rest: save and restore the definition table together with -the current metacharacters on file -m.def. -.sp -#def,arg1,arg2,arg3: works as in the standard with the extension -that an integer may be -supplied to arg3 to cause the new macro to perform the -action of a specified builtin before its replacement text is evaluated. -Thus all builtins -except #def: can be retrieved even after deletion. -Codes for arg3 are: -.sp -.in+5 -.nf -0 - no function -1,2,3,4,5,6 - gt,eq,ge,lt,ne,le -7,8 - seq,sne -9,10,11,12,13 - add,sub,mpy,div,exp -20 - if -21,22 - def,copy -23 - meta -24 - size -25 - substr -26,27 - go,gobk -28 - del -29 - dnl -30,31 - save,rest -.fi -.in-5 -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES m.def--working file of definitions -.br -/usr/lang/mdir/m6a--m6 processor proper (/usr/bin/m6 is only an initializer) -.br -/usr/lang/mdir/m6b--default initialization for m.def -.br -/bin/cp--used for copying initial value of m.def -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO [1] A. D. Hall, -The M6 Macroprocessor, Bell Telephone Laboratories, 1969 -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "err" --- a bug, an unknown builtin or a bad definition table -.br -"oprd"--can't open input or initial definitions -.br -"opwr"--can't open output -.br -"ova" -- overflow of nested arguments -.br -"ovc" -- overflow of calls -.br -"ovd" -- overflow of definitions -.br -"Try again" -- no process available for copying m.def -.br -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS Characters in internal tables are stored -one per word. -They really should be packed to improve capacity. -For want of space (and because of unpacked formats) no file arguments -have been provided to #save: or #rest:, -and no check is made on the actual opening of file m.def. -Again to save space, -garbage collection makes calls on #save: and #rest: and so overwrites -m.def. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mail.1 b/static/v10/man1/mail.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2fa981c0..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mail.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,662 +0,0 @@ -'\"macro stdmacro -.if n .pH g1.mail %W% of %G% -.nr X -.if \nX=0 .ds x} mail 1 "Essential Utilities" "\&" -.if \nX=1 .ds x} mail 1 "Essential Utilities" -.if \nX=2 .ds x} mail 1 "" "\&" -.if \nX=3 .ds x} mail "" "" "\&" -.TH \*(x} -.SH NAME -\f4mail\f1, \f4rmail\f1 \- read mail or send mail to users -.SH SYNOPSIS -.SS Sending mail: -.PP -\f4mail\f1 -[ -\f4\-tw\f1 -] [ -\f4\-m\f1 -.I message_type -] -\f2recipient . . .\f1 -.PP -\f4rmail\f1 -[ -\f4\-tw\f1 -] [ -\f4\-m\f1 -.I message_type -] -\f2recipient . . .\f1 -.PP -.SS Reading mail: -.PP -\f4mail\f1 -[ -\f4\-ehpPqr\f1 -] [ -\f4\-f\f1 -\f2file\f1 -] -.PP -.SS Forwarding mail: -.PP -\f4mail \-F\fP \f2recipient . . .\f1 -.PP -.SS Debugging: -.PP -\f4mail\fP [ \f4\-x\fP\f2debug_level\fP ] [ \f2other_mail_options\fP ] -\f2recipient . . .\f1 -.PP -\f4mail\f1 -\f4\-T\f1 -.I mailsurr_file -\f2recipient . . .\f1 -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -A -.I recipient\^ -is usually a user name recognized by -\f4login\fP(1). -When -.I recipients\^ -are named, -\f4mail\fP -assumes a message is being sent -(except in the case of the \f4\-F\fP option). -It reads from the standard input up to an end-of-file -(cntrl-d) or, -if reading from a terminal device, -until it reads a line consisting of just a period. -When either of those indicators is received, -\f4mail\fP -adds the -.I letter\^ -to the -.I mailfile -for each -.IR recipient . -.PP -A \f2letter\fP is composed of some \f2header lines\fP followed by a blank -line followed by the \f2message content\fP. -The \f2header lines\fP section of the letter consists of one or more UNIX -postmarks: -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4From\f1 \f2sender date_and_time\f1 [\f4remote from\f1 \f2remote_system_name\f1] -.RE -.sp .5 -followed by one or more standardized message header lines of the form: -.sp .5 -.RS -\f2keyword-name\f4\f4:\f1 [\f2printable text\f1] -.RE -.sp .5 -where \f2keyword-name\fP is comprised of any printable, -non-whitespace, characters other than colon (`:'). -A \f4Content-Length:\fP header line, -indicating the number of bytes in the \f2message content\fP will always be -present. -A \f4Content-Type:\fP header line that describes the type of the -\f2message content\fP (such as text, binary, multipart, etc.) will always -be present unless the letter consists of only header lines with no message -content. -Header lines may be contined on the following line if that line starts with -white space. -.SS Sending mail: -.PP -The following command-line arguments affect SENDING mail: -.PD 0 -.TP -\f4\-m\f1 -causes a \f4Message-Type:\fP line to be added to the message header with -the value of \f2message_type\fP. -.TP -\f4\-t\f1 -causes a \f4To:\f1 line to be added to the message header -for each of the intended recipients. -.TP -\f4\-w\f1 -causes a letter to be sent to a remote recipient without waiting for the -completion of the remote transfer program. -.PD -.PP -If a letter is found to be undeliverable, it is returned to the -sender with diagnostics that indicate the location and nature of the -failure. -If -\f4mail\fP -is interrupted during input, -the message is saved in the file -\f4dead.letter\f1 -to allow editing and resending. -\f4dead.letter\f1 -is always appended to, -thus preserving any previous contents. -The initial attempt to append to (or create) \f4dead.letter\fP will be in the -current directory. -If this fails, \f4dead.letter\fP will be appended to (or created in) the user's -login directory. -If the second attempt also fails, no \f4dead.letter\fP processing will be -done. -.PP -\f4rmail\fP -only permits the sending of mail; -\f4uucp\fP(1C) -uses -\f4rmail\fP -as a security precaution. -Any application programs that generate mail messages should be sure to -invoke \f4rmail\fP rather than \f4mail\fP for message transport and/or -delivery. -.PP -If the local system has the -Basic Networking Utilities installed, -mail may be sent to a recipient on a remote system. -There are numerous ways to address mail to recipients on remote systems -depending on the transport mechanisms available to the local system. -The two most prevalent addressing schemes are UUCP-style and -Domain-style. -With UUCP-style addressing, -remote recipients are specified -by prefixing the recipient name with the remote system name and -an exclamation point (such as sysa!user). -A series of system names separated by exclamation points -can be used to direct a letter through an extended -network (such as \f4sysa!sysb!sysc!user\f1). -With Domain-style addressing, -remote recipients are specified by appending an `\f4@\f1' and domain (and -possibly sub-domain) information to the recipient name -(such as \f4user@sf.att.com\f1). -(The local System Administrator should be consulted for details on which -addressing conventions are available on the local system.) -.PP -.SS Reading Mail: -.PP -The following command-line arguments affect READING mail: -.PD 0 -.TP -\f4\-e\f1 -causes mail not to be printed. -An exit value of 0 is returned if the user has mail; -otherwise, an exit value of 1 is returned. -.TP -\f4\-h\f1 -causes a window of headers to be initially displayed rather than the latest -message. The display is followed by the `\f4?\f1' prompt. -.TP -\f4\-p\f1 -causes all messages to be printed without prompting for disposition. -.TP -\f4\-P\f1 -causes all messages to be printed with \f2all\fP header lines displayed, -rather than the default selective header line display. -.TP -\f4\-q\f1 -causes -\f4mail\fP -to terminate after interrupts. -Normally an interrupt causes only the -termination of the message being printed. -.TP -\f4\-r\f1 -causes messages to be printed in first-in, first-out order. -.TP -\f\B\-f\fP\0\f2file\fP -causes -\f4mail\fP -to use -.I file\^ -(such as -\f4mbox\f1) -instead of the default -.IR mailfile . -.PD -.PP -\f4mail\fP, -unless otherwise influenced by command-line arguments, -prints a user's mail messages -in last-in, first-out order. -The default mode for printing messages is to display only -those header lines of immediate interest. -These include, but are not limited to, -the UNIX \f4From\fP and \f4>From\fP postmarks, -\f4From:\fP, -\f4Date:\fP, -\f4Subject:\fP, -and \f4Content-Length:\fP header lines, -and any recipient header lines such as -\f4To:\fP, -\f4Cc:\fP, -\f4Bcc:\fP, -etc. -After the header lines have been displayed, -\f4mail\fP will display the contents (body) of the message only if it -contains no unprintable characters. -Otherwise, \f4mail\fP will issue a warning statement about the message -having binary content and \f4not\fP display the content. -(This may be overridden via the \f4p\fP command. See below.) -.PP -For each message, -the user is prompted with a -\f4?\f1, -and a line is read from the standard input. -The following commands are available -to determine the disposition of the message: -.PD -.TP 21 -\f4#\f1 -Print the number of the current message. -.TP -\f4\-\f1 -Print previous message. -.TP -, \f4+\f1, or \f4n\f1 -Print the next message. -.TP -\f4!\f2command\^\f1 -Escape to the shell to do -.IR command . -.TP -\f4a\f1 -Print message that arrived during the \f4mail\fP session. -.TP -\f4d\f1, or \f4dp\f1 -Delete the current message and print the next message. -.TP -\f4d \f2n\fP\f1 -Delete message number \f2n\fP. Do not go on to next message. -.TP -\f4dq\f1 -Delete message and quit \f4mail\fP. -.TP -\f4h\f1 -Display a window of headers around current message. -.TP -\f4h \f2n\fP\f1 -Display a window of headers around message number \f2n\fP. -.TP -\f4h a\f1 -Display headers of all messages in the user's \f2mailfile\f1. -.TP -\f4h d\f1 -Display headers of messages scheduled for deletion. -.TP -\f4m\fP [ \f2persons\^\fP ] -Mail (and delete) the current message to the named -\f2person\f1(\f2s\f1). -.TP -.I n -Print message number \f2n\fP. -.TP -\f4p\f1 -Print current message again, -overriding any indications of binary (that is, unprintable) content. -.TP -\f4P\f1 -Override default brief mode and print current message again, -displaying all header lines. -.TP -\f4q\f1, or cntrl-\s-1D\s+1 -Put undeleted mail back in the -.I mailfile\^ -and quit \f4mail\fP. -.TP -\f4r\f1 [ \f2users\^\fP ] -Reply to the sender, and other \f2user(s)\f1, then delete the -message. -.TP -\f4s\fP [ \f2files\^\fP ] -Save message in the named -\f2file\f1(\f2s\f1)\^ -\f1(\f4mbox\f1 -is default) and delete the message. -.TP -\f4u\f1 [ \f2n\fP ] -Undelete message number \f2n\fP (default is last read). -.TP -\f4w\fP [ \f2files\^\fP ] -Save message contents, without any header lines, -in the named -.I files\^ -\f1(\f4mbox\f1 -is default) and delete the message. -.TP -\f4x\f1 -Put all mail back in the -.I mailfile\^ -unchanged and exit \f4mail\fP. -.TP -\f4y\fP [ \f2files\^\fP ] -Same as save. -.TP -\f4?\f1 -Print a command summary. -.PD -.PP -When a user logs in, the presence of mail, -if any, -is usually indicated. -Also, -notification is made if new mail arrives while using -\f4mail\fP. -.PP -The permissions of -.I mailfile\^ -may be manipulated using \f4chgrp\fP in two ways to alter the function of -\f4mail\fP. -The other -permissions of the file may be read-write (0666), read-only (0664), -or neither read nor write (0660) to allow different levels of privacy. -If changed to other than the default (mode 0660), the file will be preserved -even when empty to perpetuate the desired permissions. -(The administrator may override this file preservation using the -\f4DEL_EMPTY_MAILFILE\fP option of \f4mailcnfg\fP.) -.P -The group id of the mailfile must be \f4mail\f1 -to allow new messages to -be delivered, and the mailfile must be writable by group \f4mail\f1. -.SS Forwarding mail: -.PP -The following command-line argument affects FORWARDING of mail: -.sp .5 -.PD 0 -.TP -\f4\-F\fP\0\f2recipients\fP -Causes all incoming mail to be forwarded to -.IR recipients .\^ -The mailbox must be empty. -.PD -.PP -The \f4\-F\fP option causes the \f2mailfile\fP to contain -a first line of: -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4Forward to\f1 \f2recipient\^. . .\f1 -.RE -.sp .5 -Thereafter, all mail sent to the owner of the -.I mailfile\^ -will be forwarded to each -.IR recipient . -.PP -An \f4Auto-Forwarded-From: ...\f1 line -will be added to the forwarded message's header. -This is especially useful -in a multi-machine environment -to forward all a person's mail to a single machine, -and to keep the recipient informed if the mail -has been forwarded. -.PP -Installation and removal of forwarding is done with the -\f4\-F\f1 -invocation option. -To forward all your mail to \f4systema!user\f1 enter: -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4mail -F\0systema!user\f1 -.sp .5 -.RE -.PP -To forward to more than one recipient enter: -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4mail \-F\0"user1,user2@att.com,systemc!systemd!user3"\f1 -.sp .5 -.RE -.PP -Note that when more than one recipient is specified, the entire list -should be enclosed in double quotes so that it may all be -interpreted as the operand of the \f4\-F\f1 option. -The list can be up to 1024 bytes; either commas or white space can -be used to separate users. -.PP -If the first character of any forwarded-to recipient name is the pipe -symbol (`\(bv'), -the remainder of the line will be interpreted as a command to pipe the -current mail message to. -The command, known as a \f2Personal Surrogate\fP, -will be executed in the environment of the recipient of the -message (that is, basename of the \f2mailfile\fP). -For example, if the mailfile is \f4/var/mail/foo\f1, -\f4foo\fP will be looked up in \f4/etc/passwd\f1 -to determine the correct user\s-1ID\s+1, group\s-1ID\s+1, and \f4HOME\f1 directory. -The command's environment will be set to contain only -\f4HOME\f1, \f4LOGNAME\f1, \f4TZ\f1, \f4PATH\f1 -(= \f4/usr/bin:\f1), and \f4SHELL\f1 (= \f4/bin/sh\f1), -and the command will execute in the recipient's \f4HOME\f1 directory. -If the message recipient cannot be found in /etc/passwd, -the command will not be executed and a non-delivery notification with -appropriate diagnostics will be sent to the message's originator. -.PP -After the pipe symbol, escaped double quotes should be used -to have strings with embedded whitespace be considered as single arguments -to the command being executed. -No shell syntax or -metacharacters may be used unless the command specified is \f4/bin/sh\f1. -For example, -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4mail\0\-F\0"\(bv/bin/sh \-c \e"shell_command_line\e""\f1 -.RE -.sp .5 -will work, but is not advised since using double quotes and -backslashes within the shell_command_line is difficult to do correctly and -becomes tedious \f4very\fP quickly. -.PP -Certain %keywords are allowed within the piped-to command specification -and will be textually substituted for \f2before\fP the command line is -executed. -.sp .5 -.PD 0 -.TP -\f4%R\fP -Return path to the message originator. -.TP -\f4%c\fP -Value of the \f4Content-Type:\f1 header line if present. -.TP -\f4%S\fP -Value of the \f4Subject:\f1 header line if present. -.PD -.PP -If the command being piped to exits with any non-zero value, -\f4mail\fP will assume that message delivery failed and will generate a -non-delivery notification to the message's originator. It is allowable to -forward mail to other recipients \f4and\fP pipe it to a command, -as in -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4mail \-F\0"carol,joe,\(bvmyvacationprog %R"\f1 -.RE -.PP -Two UNIX System facilities that use the forwarding of -messages to commands are \f4notify\fP(1), -which causes asynchronous notification of new mail, -and \f4vacation\fP(1), -which provides an auto-answer capability for messages when the recipient -will be unavailable for an extended period of time. -.PP -To remove forwarding enter: -.sp .5 -.RS -\f4mail \-F\0"\^"\f1 -.RE -.PP -The pair of double quotes is mandatory to set a NULL argument for -the \-F option. -.PP -In order for forwarding to work properly the -.I mailfile\^ -should have \f4mail\fP as group ID, -and the group permission should be read-write. -.PP -\f4mail\fP will exit with a return code of \f40\fP if forwarding was -successfully installed or removed. -.SS Debugging: -.PP -The following command-line arguments cause \f4mail\fP to provide -DEBUGGING information: -.sp .5 -.PD 0 -.TP 22 -\f4\-T\fP\0\f2mailsurr_file -causes \f4mail\fP to display how it will parse and interpret -the \f4mailsurr\fP file. -.TP -\f4\-x\fP\f2debug_level\fP -causes \f4mail\fP to create a trace file containing debugging information. -.PD -.PP -The \f4\-T\fP option requires an argument that will be taken as the -pathname of a test \f4mailsurr\f1 file. -If NULL (as in \f4\-T ""\f1), -the system \f4mailsurr\f1 file will be used. -To use, type '\f4mail\fP \f4\-T\fP \f2test_file\0recipient\fP' and some trivial -message (like "testing"), -followed by a line with either just a dot (`.') or a cntrl-D. -The result of using the \f4\-T\f1 option will be displayed on standard output and -show the inputs and resulting transformations as \f4mailsurr\fP is -processed by the \f4mail\fP command for the indicated recipient. -Mail messages will never actually be sent or delivered when -the \f4\-T\f1 option is used. -.PP -The \f4\-x\f1 option causes \f4mail\fP to create a file named -\f4/tmp/MLDBG\f2process_id\f1 that contains debugging information -relating to how \f4mail\fP processed the current message. -The absolute value of \f2debug_level\f1 controls the verboseness -of the debug information. -Zero implies no debugging. -If \f2debug_level\f1 is greater than zero, -the debug file will be retained \f4only\f1 if \f4mail\fP encountered some -problem while processing the message. -If \f2debug_level\fP is less than zero the debug file will always be retained. -The \f2debug_level\f1 specified via \f4\-x\f1 overrides any specification -of \f4DEBUG\f1 in \f4/etc/mail/mailcnfg\f1. -The information provided by the \f4\-x\f1 option is esoteric and is -probably only useful to System Administrators. -The output produced by the \f4\-x\f1 option is a superset -of that provided by the \f4\-T\f1 option. -.SS Delivery Notification -Several forms of notification are available for mail by -including one of the following lines in the message header. -.PP -\f4Transport-Options:\f1 [ \f4/\f2options\f1 ] -.sp .2 -\f4Default-Options:\f1 [ \f4/\f2options\f1 ] -.sp .2 -\f4>To:\f1 \f2recipient\f1 [ \f4/\f2options\f1 ] -.PP -Where the ``/\f2options\f1'' may be one or more of the following: -.TP 12 -\f4/delivery\f1 -Inform the sender that the message was successfully delivered to the -\f2recipient\f1's mailbox. -.TP -\f4/nodelivery\f1 -Do not inform the sender of successful deliveries. -.TP -\f4/ignore\f1 -Do not inform the sender of \f4un\f1successful deliveries. -.TP -\f4/return\f1 -Inform the sender if mail delivery fails. -Return the failed message to the sender. -.TP -\f4/report\f1 -Same as \f4/return\f1 except that -the original message is not returned. -.PP -The default is \f4/nodelivery/return\f1. -If contradictory options are used, the first will -be recognized and later, conflicting, terms will be ignored. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 20 -\f4dead.letter\f1 -unmailable text -.TP -\f4/etc/passwd\f1 -to identify sender and locate recipients -.TP -\f4/etc/mail/mailsurr\f1 -routing / name translation information -.TP -\f4/etc/mail/mailcnfg\f1 -initialization information -.TP -.SM -\f4$HOME\*S/mbox\f1 -saved mail -.TP -.SM -\f4$MAIL\*S\f1 -variable containing path name of -.I mailfile\^ -.TP -\f4/tmp/ma\f1\(** -temporary file -.TP -\f4/tmp/MLDBG\f1\(** -debug trace file -.TP -\f4/var/mail/\f1\(**\f4.lock\f1 -lock for mail directory -.TP -\f4/var/mail/:saved\f1 -directory for holding temp files to prevent loss of data in the event of a -system crash. -.TP -\f4/var/mail/\f1\f2user\f1 -incoming mail for \f2user\fP; -that is, the -.I mailfile\^ -.PD -.SH SEE ALSO -\f4chmod\fP(1), -\f4login\fP(1), -\f4mailx\fP(1), -\f4notify\fP(1), -\f4write\fP(1), -\f4vacation\fP(1) -.sp .2 -\f4mail_pipe\fP(1M), -\f4mailsurr\fP(4), -\f4mailcnfg\fP(4) in the \f2System Administrator's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -.IR "User\'s Guide" . -.SH NOTES -The "Forward to recipient" feature may result in a loop. -Local loops (messages sent to \f4usera\f1, which are forwarded to -\f4userb\f1, which are forwarded to \f4usera\f1) will be detected -immediately. Remote loops (mail sent to \f4sys1!usera\fP1 which is forwarded -to \f4sys2!userb\f1, which is forwarded to \f4sys1!usera\f1) will also be -detected, but only after the message has exceeded the built-in hop count -limit of 20. -Both cases of forwarding loops will result in a non-delivery -notification being sent to the message originator. -.PP -As a security precaution, the equivalent of a \f4chmod s+g\f1 is performed on -the \f2mailfile\fP whenever forwarding is activated via the \f4\-F\fP -option, -and a \f4chmod s\(mig\fP is done when forwarding is removed via the -\f4\-F\fP option. -If the set\s-1GID\s+1 mode bit is not set when \f4mail\fP -attempts to forward an incoming message to a command, -the operation will fail and a non-delivery report with appropriate -diagnostics will be sent to the message's originator. -.PP -The interpretation and resulting action taken because of the -header lines described in the Delivery Notifications section -above will only occur if this version of \f4mail\fP is installed -on the system where the delivery (or failure) happens. -Earlier versions of \f4mail\fP may not support any types -of delivery notification. -.PP -Conditions sometimes result -in a failure to remove a lock file. -.PP -After an interrupt, the next message may not be printed; -printing may be forced by typing a -\f4p\f1. -.Ee diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 b/static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b39e0bc9..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -'\"macro stdmacro -.if n .pH g1.mailalias %W% of %G% -.nr X -.if \nX=0 .ds x} mailalias 1 "" "\&" -.if \nX=1 .ds x} mailalias 1 "" -.if \nX=2 .ds x} mailalias 1 "" "\&" -.if \nX=3 .ds x} mailalias "" "" "\&" -.TH \*(x} -.SH NAME -\f4mailalias\f1 \- translate mail alias names -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f4mailalias\f1 [ \f4\-s\f1 ] [ \f4\-v\f1 ] -.I name -\&... -.SH DESCRIPTION -\f4mailalias\fP -is called by -\f4mail\fP. -It places on the standard output a list of mail addresses corresponding to -.IR name . -The mail addresses are found by performing the following steps: -.TP 4 -1. -Look for the file \f4/var/mail/\f2name\f1. -If found, print -.I name -and exit. -.TP 4 -2. -Look for a match in the user's local alias file -\f4$HOME/lib/names\f1. -If a line is found beginning with the word -.IR name , -print the rest of the line on standard output and exit. -.TP 4 -3. -Look for a match in the system-wide alias files, -which are listed in the master path file -\f4/etc/mail/namefiles\f1. -If a line is found beginning with the word -.IR name , -print the rest of the line on standard output and exit. -.P -If an alias file is a directory name \f2dir\fP, then search the file -\f2dir\fP/\f2name\fP. -By default, the file \f4/etc/mail/namefiles\fP lists -the directory \f4/etc/mail/lists\fP -and -the file \f4/etc/mail/names\f1. -.TP 4 -4. -Otherwise print -.I name -and exit. -.PP -The alias files may contain comments (lines beginning with -\f4#\f1) -and information lines of the form: -.IP -.I "name\0list-of-addresses" -.PP -Tokens on these lines are separated by white-space. -Lines may be continued by placing a backslash (\e) at the end of the line. -.PP -If the -\f4-s\f1 -option is not specified and more than one name is being translated, each line -of output will be prefixed with the name being translated. -.PP -The -\f4-v\f1 -option causes debugging information to be written to standard output. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 30n -\f4$HOME/lib/names\f1 -private aliases -.TP -\f4/etc/mail/namefiles\f1 -list of files to search -.TP -\f4/etc/mail/names\f1 -standard file to search -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -\f4uucp\fP(1), -\f4mail\fP(1). -.br -\f4smtp\fP(1M), -\f4smtpd\fP(1M), -\f4smtpqer\fP(1M), -\f4smtpsched\fP(1M), -\f4tosmtp\fP(1M) in the \f2System Administrator's Reference Manual\f1. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mailx.1 b/static/v10/man1/mailx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 296a1e8d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mailx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1249 +0,0 @@ -'\"macro stdmacro -.if n .pH g1.mailx %W% of %G% -.nr X -.if \nX=0 .ds x} mailx 1 "Essential Utilities" "\&" -.if \nX=1 .ds x} mailx 1 "Essential Utilities" -.if \nX=2 .ds x} mailx 1 "" "\&" -.if \nX=3 .ds x} mailx "" "" "\&" -.TH \*(x} -.\" mailx command (in COMMAND section) -.de Cm -.PD -.\"sp -.ne 3 -.TP -\\f4\\$1\\f1\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 -.\"br -.. -.\" lines two through n of mailx command (.Cm) -.de C -.PD 0 -.ne 2 -.TP -\\f4\\$1\\f1\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 -.\"br -.. -.\" mailx tilde escape (in TILDE ESCAPE section) -.de Ti -.\"sp -.ne 2 -.TP -\\f4~\\^\\$1\\f1 \\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 -.\"br -.. -.\" mailx environment variable that takes an arg (in ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE section) -.de Va -.\"sp -.ne 2 -.TP -\\f4\\$1\\f1=\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 -.\"br -.. -.\" mailx environment variable that does not take an arg (in ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE section) -.de V -.\"sp -.ne 2 -.TP -\\f4\\$1\\f1 -.\"br -.. -.\" mailx environment variable in running text -.de Ev -\f4\\$1\f1\\$2 -.. -.ds Ma \\f4mailx\\f1 -.ds EV "\s-1ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES\s+1 -.ds CM "\s-1COMMANDS\s+1 -.ds TX "\s-1TILDE ESCAPES\s+1 -.ds WA "\s-1WARNINGS\s+1 -.ds al \\f2alias\\f1 -.ds nu \\f2number\\f1 -.ds ms \\f2message\f1 -.ds sh \\f2shell-command\\f1 -.ds mC \\f2mail-command\\f1 -.ds dl \\f4dead.letter\\f1 -.ds mr \\f4.mailrc\\f1 -.ds mb \\f4mbox\\f1 -.ds mx \\f4mailbox\\f1 -.ds ml \\f2msglist\\f1 -.ds om [\\f2msglist\\f1] -.ds hf \\f2header-field\\f1 -.ds fn \\f2filename\\f1 -.ds st \\f2string\\f1 -.ds dr \\f2directory\\f1 -.ds nm \\f2name\\f1 -.SH NAME -\f4mailx\f1 \- interactive message processing system -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f4mailx\f1 -[ -.I options -] [ -.IR name \|.\|.\|.\| -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -The command -\f4mailx\fP provides a comfortable, flexible environment for sending and -receiving messages electronically. -When reading mail, -\*(Ma provides commands to facilitate saving, deleting, and responding to -messages. -When sending mail, -\*(Ma allows editing, reviewing and other modification of the message -as it is entered. -.PP -Many of the remote features of \f4mailx\fP -work only if the Basic Networking Utilities are installed on your system. -.PP -Incoming mail is stored in a standard file for each user, -called the \*(mx for that user. -When \*(Ma is called to read messages, -the \*(mx is the default place to find them. -As messages are read, -they are marked to be moved to a secondary file for storage, -unless specific action is taken, -so that the messages need not be seen again. -This secondary file is called the \*(mb -and is normally located in the user's -\f4HOME\f1 -directory -[see -.Ev MBOX -(\*(EV) for a description of this file]. -Messages can be saved in other secondary files named by the user. -Messages remain in a secondary file until forcibly removed. -.PP -The user can access a secondary file by using the -\f4\-f\f1 option of the \*(Ma command. -Messages in the secondary file can then be read or otherwise -processed using the same \*(CM as in the primary \*(mx. -This gives rise within these pages to the notion of a current \*(mx. -.PP -On the command line, -.I options -start with a dash (\-) and any other arguments are taken to be -destinations (recipients). -If no recipients are specified, -\*(Ma attempts to read messages from the \*(mx. -Command-line options are: -.PP -.RS -.TP 14 -\f4\-d\f1 -Turn on debugging output. -.TP -\f4\-e\f1 -Test for presence of mail. -\f4mailx\fP prints nothing and exits with a successful return code if there is -mail to read. -.TP -\f4\-f\f1 [\*(fn] -Read messages from \*(fn instead of \*(mx. -If no \*(fn is specified, -the \*(mb is used. -.TP -\f4\-F\f1 -Record the message in a file named after the first recipient. -Overrides the -.Ev record -variable, if set (see \*(EV). -.TP -\f4\-h\f1 \*(nu -The number of network ``hops'' made so far. -This is provided for network -software to avoid infinite delivery loops. -This option and its argument is passed to the delivery program. -.TP -\f4\-H\f1 -Print header summary only. -.TP -\f4\-i\f1 -Ignore interrupts. -See also -.Ev ignore -(\*(EV). -.TP -\f4\-I\f1 -Include the newsgroup and article-id header lines when printing mail -messages. -This option requires the \f4\-f\f1 option to be specified. -.TP -\f4\-n\f1 -Do not initialize from the system default -.I mailx.rc -file. -.TP -\f4\-N\f1 -Do not print initial header summary. -.TP -\f4\-r\f2 address\f1 -Use -.I address -as the return address when invoking the delivery program. -All tilde commands are disabled. -This option and its argument is passed to the delivery program. -.TP -\f4\-s\f2 subject\f1 -Set the Subject header field to -.IR subject . -.TP -\f4\-T\f2 file\f1 -Message-id and article-id header lines are recorded in \f2file\f1 after the -message is read. -This option will also set the \f4\-I\f1 option. -.TP -\f4\-u\f2 user\f1 -Read -.IR user 's -\*(mx. -This is only effective if -.IR user 's -\*(mx is not read protected. -.TP -\f4\-U\f1 -Convert \f4uucp\fP style addresses to internet standards. -Overrides the -.Ev conv -environment variable. -.TP -\f4\-V\f1 -Print the \*(Ma version number and exit. -.RE -.PP -When reading mail, -\*(Ma is in -\f2command mode\f1. -A header summary of the first several messages is displayed, -followed by a prompt indicating \*(Ma can accept regular commands -(see \*(CM below). -When sending mail, -\*(Ma is in -\f2input mode\f1. -If no subject is specified on the command line, -a prompt for the subject is printed. -(A subject longer than 1024 characters causes \*(Ma to print the -message \f2mail: ERROR signal 10\fP; the mail will not be delivered.) -As the message is typed, -\*(Ma reads the message and store it in a temporary -file. -Commands may be entered by beginning a line with the tilde (~) escape -character followed by a single command letter and optional arguments. -See \*(TX for a summary of these commands. -.PP -At any time, -the behavior of \*(Ma is governed by a set of -\f2environment variables\f1. -These are flags and valued parameters which are set and cleared via the -\f4se\f1t -and -\f4uns\f1et -commands. -See \*(EV below for a summary of these parameters. -.PP -Recipients listed on the command line may be of three types: -login names, -shell commands, -or -alias groups. -Login names may be any network address, -including mixed network addressing. -If mail is found to be undeliverable, an attempt is -made to return it to the sender's \f2mailbox\f1. -If the recipient name begins with a pipe symbol ( | ), -the rest of the name is taken to be a shell command to pipe the -message through. -This provides an automatic interface with any program that reads the standard -input, such as -\f4lp\fP(1) -for recording outgoing mail on paper. -Alias groups are set by the -\f4a\f1lias -command (see \*(CM below) -and are lists of recipients of any type. -.PP -Regular commands are of the form -.PP -.RS -[ -.I command -] [ -.I msglist -] [ -.I arguments -] -.RE -.PP -If no command is specified in \f2command mode\f1, -\f4p\f1rint -is assumed. -In \f2input mode\f1, -commands are recognized by the escape character, -and lines not treated as commands are taken as input for the message. -.PP -Each message is assigned a sequential number, -and there is at any time the notion of a current message, -marked by a right angle bracket (>) in the header summary. -Many commands take an optional list of messages -(\*(ml) to operate on. -The default for \f2msglist\f1 is the current message. -A \*(ml is a list of message identifiers separated by spaces, -which may include: -.PP -.RS -.TP 8 -\f4n\f1 -Message number -\f4n\f1. -.TP -\f4\&.\f1 -The current message. -.TP -\f4^\f1 -The first undeleted message. -.TP -\f4$\f1 -The last message. -.TP -\f4*\f1 -All messages. -.TP -\f4n\-m\f1 -An inclusive range of message numbers. -.TP -\f4user\f1 -All messages from -\f4user\f1. -.TP -\f4/string\f1 -All messages with -\f4string\f1 -in the subject line (case ignored). -.TP -\f4:\f2c\f1 -All messages of type -.IR c , -where -.I c -is one of: -.RS 13 -.TP -\f4d\f1 -deleted messages -.TP -\f4n\f1 -new messages -.TP -\f4o\f1 -old messages -.TP -\f4r\f1 -read messages -.TP -\f4u\f1 -unread messages -.RE 0 -.RS 13 -Note that the context of the command determines whether this type of -message specification makes sense. -.RE -.PP -Other arguments are usually arbitrary strings whose usage -depends on the command involved. -File names, -where expected, -are expanded via the normal shell conventions [see -\f4sh\fP(1)]. -Special characters are recognized by certain commands and are -documented with the commands below. -.PP -At start-up time, -\*(Ma tries to execute commands from the optional system-wide file -(\f4/etc/mail/mailx.rc\f1) to initialize -certain parameters, -then from a private start-up file -\f1(\f4$HOME/.mailrc\f1) -for personalized variables. -With the exceptions noted below, -regular commands are legal inside start-up files. -The most common use of a start-up file is -to set up initial display options and alias lists. -The following commands are not legal in the start-up file: -\f4!\f1, -\f4C\f1opy, -\f4e\f1dit, -\f4fo\f1llowup, -\f4F\f1ollowup, -\f4ho\f1ld, -\f4m\f1ail, -\f4pre\f1serve, -\f4r\f1eply, -\f4R\f1eply, -\f4sh\f1ell, -and -\f4v\f1isual. -An error in the start-up file causes the remaining lines in the file to -be ignored. -The \*(mr file is optional, and must be constructed locally. -.SS \*(CM -The following is a complete list of \*(Ma commands: -.PP -.Cm ! \*(sh -Escape to the shell. -See -.Ev SHELL -(\*(EV). -.Cm # "" \f2comment\f1 -Null command (comment). -This may be useful in \*(mr files. -.Cm = -Print the current message number. -.Cm ? -Prints a summary of commands. -.Cm a lias \*(al \*(nm ... -.C g roup \*(al \*(nm ... -Declare an alias for the given names. -The names are substituted -when -\*(al is used as a recipient. -Useful in the \*(mr file. -.Cm alt ernates \*(nm ... -Declares a list of alternate names for your login. -When responding to a message, -these names are removed from the list of recipients for the response. -With no arguments, -\f4alt\f1ernates -prints the current list of alternate names. -See also -.Ev allnet -(\*(EV). -.Cm cd "" [\*(dr] -.C ch dir [\*(dr] -Change directory. -If \*(dr is not specified, -\f4$HOME\f1 -is used. -.Cm c opy [\*(fn] -.C c opy \*(om \*(fn -Copy messages to the file without marking the messages as saved. -Otherwise equivalent to the -\f4s\f1ave -command. -.Cm C opy \*(om -Save the specified messages in a file whose name is derived from the -author of the -message to be saved, without marking the messages as saved. -Otherwise equivalent to the -\f4S\f1ave -command. -.Cm d elete \*(om -Delete messages from the \*(mx. -If -.Ev autoprint -is set, -the next message after the last one deleted is printed -(see \*(EV). -.Cm di scard [\*(hf ...] -.C ig nore [\*(hf ...] -Suppresses printing of the specified header fields when displaying messages -on the screen. -Examples of header fields to ignore are -\f4status\f1 -and -\f4cc\f1. -The fields are included when the message is saved. -The -\f4P\f1rint -and -\f4T\f1ype -commands override this command. -If no header is specified, the current list of header fields being ignored -will be printed. -See also the \f4undi\f1scard and \f4unig\f1nore commands. -.Cm dp "" \*(om -.C dt "" \*(om -Delete the specified messages from the \*(mx and print the next message -after the last one deleted. -Roughly equivalent to a -\f4d\f1elete -command followed by a -\f4p\f1rint -command. -.Cm ec ho \*(st ... -Echo the given strings [like -\f4echo\fP(1)]. -.Cm e dit \*(om -Edit the given messages. -The messages are placed in a temporary file and the -.Ev EDITOR -variable -is used to get the name of the editor -(see \*(EV). -Default editor is -\f4ed\fP(1). -.Cm ex it -.C x it -Exit from \*(Ma, -without changing the \*(mx. -No messages are saved in the \*(mb (see also -\f4q\f1uit). -.Cm fi le [\*(fn] -.C fold er [\*(fn] -Quit from the current file of messages and read in the specified file. -Several special characters are recognized when used as file names, -with the following substitutions: -.RS 10 -.TP 10 -\f4%\f1 -the current \*(mx. -.TP -\f4%\f2user\f1 -the \*(mx for -.IR user . -.TP -\f4#\f1 -the previous file. -.TP -\f4&\f1 -the current \*(mb. -.RE -.RS 5 -Default file is the current \*(mx. -.RE -.Cm folders -Print the names of the files in the -directory set by the -.Ev folder -variable -(see \*(EV). -.Cm fo llowup [\*(ms] -Respond to a message, -recording the response in a file whose name is derived from the -author of the message. -Overrides the -.Ev record -variable, if set. -See also the -\f4F\f1ollowup, -\f4S\f1ave, -and -\f4C\f1opy -commands and -.Ev outfolder -(\*(EV). -.Cm F ollowup \*(om -Respond to the first message in the \*(ml, -sending the message to the author of each message in the \*(ml. -The subject line is taken from the first message -and the response is recorded in a file whose name is derived -from the author of the first message. -See also the -\f4fo\f1llowup, -\f4S\f1ave, -and -\f4C\f1opy -commands -and -.Ev outfolder -(\*(EV). -.Cm f rom \*(om -Prints the header summary for the specified messages. -.Cm g roup \*(al \*(nm ... -.C a lias \*(al \*(nm ... -Declare an alias for the given names. -The names are substituted -when -\*(al is used as a recipient. -Useful in the \*(mr file. -.Cm h eaders [\*(ms] -Prints the page of headers which includes the message specified. -The -.Ev screen -variable sets the number of headers per page -(see \*(EV). -See also the -\f4z\f1 -command. -.Cm hel p -Prints a summary of commands. -.Cm ho ld \*(om -.C pre serve \*(om -Holds the specified messages in the \*(mx. -.Cm i f \f2s\f1 | \f2r\f1 -.C "" \*(mCs -.C el se -.C "" \*(mCs -.C en dif -Conditional execution, where -.I s -executes following \*(mCs, up to an -\f4el\f1se -or -\f4en\f1dif, -if the program is in -.I send -mode, and -.I r -causes the \*(mCs to be executed only in -.I receive -mode. -Useful in the \*(mr file. -.Cm ig nore [\*(hf ...] -.C di scard [\*(hf ...] -Suppresses printing of the specified header fields when displaying messages -on the screen. -Examples of header fields to ignore are -\f4status\f1 -and -\f4cc\f1. -All fields are included when the message is saved. -The -\f4P\f1rint -and -\f4T\f1ype -commands override this command. -If no header is specified, the current list of header fields being ignored -will be printed. -See also the \f4undi\f1scard and \f4unig\f1nore commands. -.Cm l ist -Prints all commands available. -No explanation is given. -.Cm m ail \*(nm ... -Mail a message to the specified users. -.Cm M ail \*(nm -Mail a message to the specified user and record a copy of it -in a file named after that user. -.Cm mb ox \*(om -Arrange for the given messages to end up in the standard \*(mb save file -when \*(Ma terminates normally. -See -.Ev MBOX -(\*(EV) for a description of this file. -See also the -\f4ex\f1it -and -\f4q\f1uit -commands. -.Cm n ext [\*(ms] -Go to next message matching \*(ms. -A \*(ml may be specified, -but in this case the first valid message in the list is the only one used. -This is useful for jumping to the next message from a specific user, -since the name would be taken as a command in the absence of a real command. -See the discussion of \*(mls above for a description of -possible message specifications. -.Cm pi pe \*(om [\*(sh] -.C | "" \*(om [\*(sh] -Pipe the message through the given \*(sh. -The message is treated as if it were read. -If no arguments are given, -the current message is piped through the command specified by the -value of the -.Ev cmd -variable. -If the -.Ev page -variable is set, -a form feed character is inserted after each message -(see \*(EV). -.Cm pre serve \*(om -.C ho ld \*(om -Preserve the specified messages in the \*(mx. -.Cm P rint \*(om -.C T ype \*(om -Print the specified messages on the screen, -including all header fields. -Overrides suppression of fields by the -\f4ig\f1nore -command. -.Cm p rint \*(om -.C t ype \*(om -Print the specified messages. -If -.Ev crt -is set, -the messages longer than the number of lines specified by the -.Ev crt -variable are paged through the command specified by the -.Ev PAGER -variable. -The default command is -\f4pg\fP(1) -(see \*(EV). -.Cm q uit -Exit from \*(Ma, -storing messages that were read in \*(mb and unread messages in the \*(mx. -Messages that have been explicitly saved in a file are deleted. -.Cm R eply \*(om -.C R espond \*(om -Send a response to the author of each message in the \*(ml. -The subject line is taken from the first message. -If -.Ev record -is set to a file name, -the response is saved at the end of that file (see \*(EV). -.Cm r eply [\*(ms] -.C r espond [\*(ms] -Reply to the specified message, -including all other recipients of the message. -If -.Ev record -is set to a file name, -the response is saved at the end of that file (see \*(EV). -.Cm S ave \*(om -Save the specified messages in a file whose name is derived from -the author of the first message. -The name of the file is taken to be the author's name with all -network addressing stripped off. -See also the -\f4C\f1opy, -\f4fo\f1llowup, -and -\f4F\f1ollowup -commands and -.Ev outfolder -(\*(EV). -.Cm s ave [\*(fn] -.C s ave \*(om \*(fn -Save the specified messages in the given file. -The file is created if it does not exist. -THe file defaults to \*(mb. -The message is deleted from the \*(mx when -\*(Ma terminates unless -.Ev keepsave -is set -(see also \*(EV and the -\f4ex\f1it -and -\f4q\f1uit -commands). -.Cm se t -.C se t \*(nm -.C se t \*(nm=\*(st -.C se t \*(nm=\*(nu -Define a variable called \*(nm. -The variable may be given a null, string, or numeric value. -\f4Se\f1t -by itself prints all defined variables and their values. -See \*(EV for detailed descriptions of the \*(Ma variables. -.Cm sh ell -Invoke an interactive shell [see also -.Ev SHELL -(\*(EV)]. -.Cm si ze \*(om -Print the size in characters of the specified messages. -.Cm so urce \*(fn -Read commands from the given file and return to command mode. -.Cm to p \*(om -Print the top few lines of the specified messages. -If the -.Ev toplines -variable is set, -it is taken as the number of lines to print -(see \*(EV). -The default is 5. -.Cm tou ch \*(om -Touch the specified messages. -If any message in \*(ml is not specifically saved in a file, -it is placed in the \*(mb, -or the file specified in the -.Ev MBOX -environment variable, upon normal termination. -See -\f4ex\f1it -and -\f4q\f1uit. -.Cm T ype \*(om -.C P rint \*(om -Print the specified messages on the screen, -including all header fields. -Overrides suppression of fields by the -\f4ig\f1nore -command. -.Cm t ype \*(om -.C p rint \*(om -Print the specified messages. -If -.Ev crt -is set, -the messages longer than the number of lines specified by the -.Ev crt -variable are paged through the command specified by the -.Ev PAGER -variable. -The default command is -\f4pg\fP(1) -(see \*(EV). -.Cm u ndelete \*(om -Restore the specified deleted messages. -Will only restore messages deleted in the current mail session. -If -.Ev autoprint -is set, the last message of those restored is printed -(see \*(EV). -.Cm undi scard \*(hf ... -.C unig nore \*(hf ... -Remove the specified header fields from the list being ignored. -.Cm uns et \*(nm ... -Causes the specified variables to be erased. -If the variable was imported from the execution environment (i.e., a -shell variable) then it cannot be erased. -.Cm ve rsion -Prints the current version. -.Cm v isual \*(om -Edit the given messages with a screen editor. -The messages are placed in a temporary file and the -.Ev VISUAL -variable -is used to get the name of the editor -(see \*(EV). -.Cm w rite \*(om \*(fn -Write the given messages on the specified file, -minus the header and trailing blank line. -Otherwise equivalent to the -\f4s\f1ave -command. -.Cm x it -.C ex it -Exit from \*(Ma, -without changing the \*(mx. -No messages are saved in the \*(mb (see also -\f4q\f1uit). -.Cm z [+ | \-] -Scroll the header display forward or backward one screen\-full. -The number of headers displayed is set by the -.Ev screen -variable -(see \*(EV). -.SS \*(TX -The following commands may be entered only from -\f2input mode\f1, -by beginning a line with the tilde escape character (~). -See -.Ev escape -(\*(EV) -for changing this special character. -.PP -.Ti ! \*(sh -Escape to the shell. -.Ti . -Simulate end of file (terminate message input). -.Ti : \*(mC -.PD 0 -.Ti _\ \*(mC -.PD -Perform the command-level request. -Valid only when sending a message while reading mail. -.Ti ? -Print a summary of tilde escapes. -.Ti A -Insert the autograph string -.Ev Sign -into the message -(see \*(EV). -.Ti a -Insert the autograph string -.Ev sign -into the message -(see \*(EV). -.Ti b \*(nms ... -Add the \*(nms to the blind carbon copy (Bcc) list. -.Ti c \*(nms ... -Add the \*(nms to the carbon copy (Cc) list. -.Ti d -Read in the \*(dl file. -See -.Ev DEAD -(\*(EV) for a description of this file. -.Ti e -Invoke the editor on the partial message. -See also -.Ev EDITOR -(\*(EV). -.Ti f \*(om -Forward the specified messages. -The messages are inserted into the message -without alteration. -.Ti h -Prompt for Subject line and To, Cc, and Bcc lists. -If the field is displayed with an initial value, -it may be edited as if you had just typed it. -.Ti i \*(st -Insert the value of the named variable into the text of the message. -For example, -\f4~A\f1 -is equivalent to -\f1'\f4~i\f1\\f4Sign.'\f1 -Environment variables set and exported in the shell are also -accessible by ~i. -.Ti m \*(om -Insert the specified messages into the letter, -shifting the new text to the right one tab stop. -Valid only when sending a message while reading mail. -.Ti p -Print the message being entered. -.Ti q -Quit from input mode by simulating an interrupt. -If the body of the message is not null, -the partial message is saved in \*(dl. -See -.Ev DEAD -(\*(EV) for a description of this file. -.Ti r \*(fn -.PD 0 -.Ti <\ \*(fn -.Ti <\ !\*(sh -.PD -Read in the specified file. -If the argument begins with an exclamation point (!), -the rest of the string is taken as an arbitrary shell command -and is executed, -with the standard output inserted into the message. -.Ti s \*(st ... -Set the subject line to \*(st. -.Ti t \*(nms ... -Add the given \*(nms to the To list. -.Ti v -Invoke a preferred screen editor on the partial message. -See also -.Ev VISUAL -(\*(EV). -.Ti w \*(fn -Write the message into the given file, -without the header. -.Ti x -Exit as with -\f4~q\f1 -except the message is not saved in \*(dl. -.Ti | \*(sh -Pipe the body of the message through the given \*(sh. -If the \*(sh returns a successful exit status, -the output of the command replaces the message. -.SS \*(EV -The following are environment variables taken from the execution environment and -are not alterable within \*(Ma. -.Va \s-1HOME\s+1 \*(dr -The user's base of operations. -.Va \s-1MAILRC\s+1 \*(fn -The name of the start-up file. -Default is -\f4$HOME/.mailrc\f1. -.PP -The following variables are internal \*(Ma variables. -They may be imported from the execution environment or -set via the -\f4se\f1t -command at any time. -The -\f4uns\f1et -command may be used to erase variables. -.PP -.V allnet -All network names whose last component (login name) match are treated as -identical. -This causes the \*(ml message specifications to behave similarly. -Default is -\f4noallnet\f1. -See also the -\f4alt\f1ernates -command and the -.Ev metoo -variable. -.V append -Upon termination, append messages to the end of the \*(mb file instead of prepending them. -Default is -\f4noappend.\f1 -.V askcc -Prompt for the Cc list after the Subject is entered. -Default is -\f4noaskcc\f1. -.V askbcc -Prompt for the Bcc list after the Subject is entered. -Default is -\f4noaskbcc\f1. -.V asksub -Prompt for subject if it is not specified on the command line -with the -\f4\-s\f1 -option. -Enabled by default. -.V autoprint -Enable automatic printing of messages after -\f4d\f1elete -and -\f4u\f1ndelete -commands. -Default is -\f4noautoprint\f1. -.V bang -Enable the special-casing of exclamation points (!) in shell escape -command lines -as in -\f4vi\fP(1). -Default is -\f4nobang\f1. -.Va cmd \*(sh -Set the default command for the -\f4pi\f1pe -command. -No default value. -.Va conv \f2conversion\f1 -Convert uucp addresses to the specified -address style. -The only valid conversion now is -\f4internet\f1, -which uses domain-style addressing. -Conversion is disabled by default. -See also the -\f4\-U\f1 -command-line option. -.Va crt \*(nu -Pipe messages having more than \f2number\f1 lines -through the command specified by the value of the -.Ev PAGER -variable -.RI -[\f4pg\f1(1) by default]. -Disabled by default. -.Va DEAD \*(fn -The name of the file in which to save partial letters -in case of untimely interrupt. -Default is -\f4$HOME/dead.letter\f1. -.V debug -Enable verbose diagnostics for debugging. -Messages are not delivered. -Default is -\f4nodebug\f1. -.V dot -Take a period on a line by itself during input from a terminal as end-of-file. -Default is -\f4nodot\f1. -.Va EDITOR \*(sh -The command to run when the -\f4e\f1dit -or -\f4~e\f1 -command is used. -Default is -\f4ed\fP(1). -.Va escape \f2c\f1 -Substitute -.I c -for the ~ escape character. -Takes effect with next message sent. -.Va folder \*(dr -The directory for saving standard mail files. -User-specified file names beginning with a plus (+) -are expanded by preceding the file name with -this directory name to obtain the real file name. -If \*(dr does not start with a slash (/), -\f4$HOME\f1 -is prepended to it. -In order to use the plus (+) construct on a -\*(Ma command line, -.Ev folder -must be an exported -\f4sh\fP -environment variable. -There is no default for the -.Ev folder -variable. -See also -.Ev outfolder -below. -.V header -Enable printing of the header summary when entering \*(Ma. -Enabled by default. -.V hold -Preserve all messages that are read in the \*(mx instead of putting them -in the standard \*(mb save file. -Default is -\f4nohold\f1. -.V ignore -Ignore interrupts while entering messages. -Handy for noisy dial-up lines. -Default is -\f4noignore\f1. -.V ignoreeof -Ignore end-of-file during message input. -Input must be terminated by a period (.) on a line by itself -or by the -\f4~.\f1 -command. -Default is -\f4noignoreeof\f1. -See also -.Ev dot -above. -.V keep -When the \*(mx is empty, -truncate it to zero length instead of removing it. -Disabled by default. -.V keepsave -Keep messages that have been saved in other files in the \*(mx -instead of deleting them. -Default is -\f4nokeepsave\f1. -.Va \s-1MBOX\s+1 \*(fn -The name of the file to save messages which have been read. -The -\f4x\f1it -command overrides this function, -as does saving the message explicitly in another file. -Default is -\f4$HOME/mbox\f1. -.V metoo -If your login appears as a recipient, -do not delete it from the list. -Default is -\f4nometoo\f1. -.Va \s-1LISTER\s+1 \*(sh -The command (and options) to use when listing the contents of the -.Ev folder -directory. -The default is -\f4ls\fP(1). -.V onehop -When responding to a message that was originally sent to several -recipients, -the other recipient addresses are normally forced to be relative to the -originating author's machine for the response. -This flag disables alteration of the recipients' addresses, -improving efficiency in a network where all machines can send directly -to all other machines (i.e., one hop away). -.V outfolder -Causes the files used to record outgoing messages to be located -in the directory specified by the -.Ev folder -variable unless the -path name is absolute. -Default is -\f4nooutfolder\f1. -See -.Ev folder -above and the -\f4S\f1ave, -\f4C\f1opy, -\f4fo\f1llowup, -and -\f4F\f1ollowup -commands. -.V page -Used with the -\f4pi\f1pe -command to insert a form feed after each message sent through the pipe. -Default is -\f4nopage\f1. -.Va \s-1PAGER\s+1 \*(sh -The command to use as a filter for paginating output. -This can also be used to specify the options to be used. -Default is -\f4pg\fP(1). -.Va prompt \*(st -Set the \f2command mode\f1 prompt to \*(st. -Default is -\f1``\f4?\ \f1''. -.V quiet -Refrain from printing the opening message and version when entering \*(Ma. -Default is -\f4noquiet\f1. -.Va record \*(fn -Record all outgoing mail in \*(fn. -Disabled by default. -See also -.Ev outfolder -above. -If you have the -.Ev record -and -.Ev outfolder -variables set but the -.Ev folder -variable not set, messages are saved in -\f4+\f1\*(fn instead of \*(fn. -.V save -Enable saving of messages in \*(dl on interrupt or delivery error. -See -.Ev DEAD -for a description of this file. -Enabled by default. -.Va screen \*(nu -Sets the number of lines in a screen\-full of headers for the -\f4h\f1eaders -command. -It must be a positive number. -.Va sendmail \*(sh -Alternate command for delivering messages. -Default is -\f4/usr/bin/rmail\f1. -.V sendwait -Wait for background mailer to finish before returning. -Default is -\f4nosendwait\f1. -.Va SHELL \*(sh -The name of a preferred command interpreter. -Default is -\f4sh\fP(1). -.V showto -When displaying the header summary and the message is from you, -print the recipient's name instead of the author's name. -.Va sign \*(st -The variable inserted into the text of a message when the -\f4~a\f1 -(autograph) command is given. -No default -[see also -\f4~i\f1 -(\*(TX)]. -.Va Sign \*(st -The variable inserted into the text of a message when the -\f4~A\f1 -command is given. -No default -[see also -\f4~i\f1 -(\*(TX)]. -.Va toplines \*(nu -The number of lines of header to print with the -\f4to\f1p -command. -Default is 5. -.Va \s-1VISUAL\s+1 \*(sh -The name of a preferred screen editor. -Default is -\f4vi\fP(1). -.SH FILES -.TS -l l. -\f4$HOME/.mailrc\f1 personal start-up file -\f4$HOME/mbox\f1 secondary storage file -\f4/var/mail/*\f1 post office directory -\f4/usr/share/lib/mailx/mailx.help*\f1 help message files -\f4/etc/mail/mailx.rc\f1 optional global start-up file -\f4/tmp/R[emqsx]*\f1 temporary files -.TE -.SH SEE ALSO -\f4ls\fP(1), -\f4mail\fP(1), -\f4pg\fP(1). -.SH NOTES -The \f4\-h\f1 and \f4\-r\f1 options can be used only -if \*(Ma is using a delivery program other than -\f4/usr/bin/rmail\f1. -.PP -Where \*(sh -is shown as valid, -arguments are not always allowed. -Experimentation is recommended. -.PP -Internal variables imported from the execution environment cannot be -\f4uns\f1et. -.PP -The full internet addressing is not fully supported by \*(Ma. -The new standards need some time to settle down. -.PP -Attempts to send a message having a line consisting only of a ``.'' -are treated as the end of the message by \f4mail\fP(1) (the standard -mail delivery program). -.\" @(#)mailx.1 6.2 of 9/2/83 -.Ee diff --git a/static/v10/man1/make.1 b/static/v10/man1/make.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 66b14bda..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/make.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,425 +0,0 @@ -.TH MAKE 1 -.CT 1 prog_c writing_troff prog_other -.SH NAME -make \(mi maintain collections of programs -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B make -[ -.B -f -.I makefile -] -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I name ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Make -executes recipes in -.I makefile -to update the target -.IR names -(usually programs). -If no target is specified, the targets of the first rule in -.I makefile -are updated. -If no -.B -f -option is present, -.L makefile -and -.L Makefile -are tried in order. -If -.I makefile -is -.LR - , -the standard input is taken. -More than one -.B -f -option may appear. -.PP -.I Make -updates a target if it depends on prerequisite files -that have been modified since the target was last modified, -or if the target does not exist. -The prerequisites are updated before the target. -.PP -The makefile -comprises a sequence of rules and macro definitions. -The first line of a rule is a -blank-separated list of targets, then a single or double colon, -then a list of prerequisite files terminated by semicolon or newline. -Text following a semicolon, and all following lines -that begin with a tab, are shell commands: -the recipe for updating the target. -.PP -If a name appears as target in more than one single-colon rule, it depends -on all of the prerequisites of those rules, but only -one recipe may be specified among the rules. -A target in a double-colon rule is updated by the following -recipe only if it is out of date with respect to the -prerequisites of that rule. -.PP -Two special forms of name are recognized. -A name like -.IR a ( b ) -means the file named -.I b -stored in the archive named -.I a. -A name like -.IR a (( b )) -means the file stored in archive -.I a -and containing the entry point -.I b. -.PP -Sharp and newline surround comments. -.PP -In this makefile -.L pgm -depends on two -files -.L a.o -and -.LR b.o , -and they in turn depend on -.L .c -files and a common file -.LR ab.h : -.PP -.EX -pgm: a.o b.o - cc a.o b.o -lplot -o pgm -.EE -.PP -.EX -a.o: ab.h a.c - cc -c a.c -.EE -.PP -.EX -b.o: ab.h b.c - cc -c b.c -.EE -.PP -Makefile lines of the form -.IP -.IB "string1 " = " string2" -.LP -are macro definitions. -Subsequent appearances of -.BI $( string1 ) -are replaced by -.IR string2 . -If -.I string1 -is a single character, the parentheses are optional; -.B $$ -is replaced by -.BR $ . -Each entry in the environment (see -.IR sh (1)) -of the -.I make -command is taken as a macro definition, -as are command arguments with embedded equal signs. -.PP -Lines of the form -.IB "string1 " := " string2" -occurring in a recipe are assignments: macro definitions -that are made in the course of executing the recipe. -.PP -A target containing a single -.B % -introduces a pattern rule, -which controls the making of names that do not occur -explicitly as targets. -The -.B % -matches an arbitrary string called the stem: -.IB A % B -matches any string that begins with -.I A -and ends with -.I B. -A -.B % -in a prerequisite name stands for the stem; -and the special macro -.B $% -stands for the stem in the recipe. -A name that has no explicit recipe is -matched against the target of each pattern rule. -The first pattern rule for which the prerequisites exist -specifies -further dependencies. -.PP -The following pattern rule maintains an object library where all the C source files -share a common include file -.LR defs.h . -.PP -.EX -arch.a(%.o) : %.c defs.h - cc -c $%.c - ar r arch.a $%.o - rm $%.o -.EE -.PP -A set of default pattern rules is built in, and effectively -follows the user's list of rules. -Assuming these rules, -which tell, among other things, how to make -.B .o -files from -.B .c -files, the first example becomes: -.PP -.EX -pgm: a.o b.o - cc a.o b.o -lplot -o pgm -.EE -.PP -.EX -a.o b.o: ab.h -.EE -.PP -Here, greatly simplified, is a sample of the built-in rules: -.PP -.EX - CC = cc - %.o: %.c - $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -c $%.c - %.o: %.f - f77 $(FFLAGS) -c $%.f - % : %.c - $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -o $% $%.c -.EE -.PP -The first rule -says that a name ending in -.B .o -could be made -if a matching name ending in -.B .c -were present. -The second states a similar rule for files ending in -.BR .f . -The third says that an arbitrary name can be made -by compiling a file with that name suffixed by -.BR .c . -.PP -Macros make the builtin pattern rules flexible: -.B CC -names the particular C compiler, -.B CFLAGS -gives -.IR cc (1) -options, -.B FFLAGS -for -.IR f77 (1), -.B LFLAGS -for -.IR lex (1), -.B YFLAGS -for -.IR yacc (1), -and -.B PFLAGS -for -.IR pascal (A). -.PP -An older, now disparaged, means of specifying default rules -is based only on suffixes. -Prerequisites are inferred according to selected suffixes -listed as the `prerequisites' for the special name -.BR .SUFFIXES ; -multiple lists accumulate; -an empty list clears what came before. -.PP -The rule to create a file with suffix -.I s2 -that depends on a similarly named file with suffix -.I s1 -is specified as an entry -for the `target' -.IR s1s2 . -Order is significant; the first possible name for which both -a file and a rule exist -is inferred. -An old style rule for making -optimized -.B .o -files from -.B .c -files is -.PP -.EX -\&.SUFFIXES: .c .o -\&.c.o: ; cc -c -O -o $@ $*.c -.EE -.PP -The following two macros are defined for use in any rule: -.TP -.B $($@) -full name of target -.PD0 -.TP -.B $($/) -target name beginning at the last slash, if any -.PD -.LP -A number of other special macros are defined -automatically in rules invoked by one of the implicit mechanisms: -.TP -.B $* -target name with suffix deleted -.PD0 -.TP -.B $@ -full target name -.TP -.B $< -list of prerequisites in an implicit rule -.TP -.B $? -list of prerequisites that are out of date -.TP -.B $^ -list of all prerequisites -.PD -.PP -The following are included for consistency with System V: -.TP -.B $(@D) -directory part of -.B $@ -(up to last slash) -.PD0 -.TP -.B $(@F) -file name part of -.B $@ -(after last slash) -.TP -.B $(*D) -directory part of -.B $* -(up to last slash) -.TP -.B $(*F) -file name part of -.B $* -(after last slash) -.TP -.B $(. -.PP -Interrupt and quit cause the target to be deleted -unless the target depends on the special name -.BR .PRECIOUS . -.PP -.I Make -includes a rudimentary parallel processing ability. -If the separation string is -.B :& -or -.B ::& , -.I make -can run the command sequences to create the prerequisites -simultaneously. -If two names are separated by an ampersand on the right side -of a colon, those two may be created in parallel. -.PP -Other options: -.TP -.B -i -Equivalent to the special entry -.L .IGNORE: . -.TP -.B -k -When a command returns nonzero status, -abandon work on the current entry, but -continue on branches that do not depend on the current entry. -.TP -.B -n -Trace and print, but do not execute the commands -needed to update the targets. -.TP -.B -t -Touch, i.e. update the modified date of targets, without -executing any commands. -.TP -.B -r -Turn off built-in rules. -.TP -.B -s -Equivalent to the special entry -.BR .SILENT: . -.TP -.B -e -Environment definitions override conflicting definitions in arguments -or in makefiles. -Ordinary precedence is argument over makefile -over environment. -.TP -.B -o -Assume old style default suffix list: -.L -\&.SUFFIXES: .out .o .c .e .r .f .y .l .s .p -.TP -.BI -P n -Permit -.I n -command sequences to be done in parallel with -.BR & . -.TP -.B -z -Run commands by passing them to the shell; -normally simple commands are run directly by -.IR exec (2). -.SH FILES -.F makefile -.br -.F Makefile -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR sh (1), -.I touch -in -.IR chdate (1), -.IR ar (1), -.IR mk (1) -.SH BUGS -Comments can't appear on recipe lines. -.br -Archive entries are not handled reliably. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/makeml.1 b/static/v10/man1/makeml.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c66b9efa..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/makeml.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,138 +0,0 @@ -.TH MAKEML 1 -.SH NAME -makeml \- build the Standard ML of New Jersey system -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B makeml -options -.br -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fIMakeml\fP is a tool for building the Standard ML of New Jersey system (sml) -from source and `.mo' files. -For the standard installation the only options required are the machine type and -operating system. -There are also options to build a version with the compiler object code in the -heap instead of the text segment and to build the batch compiler. -For example -.RS -makeml \-vax \-bsd \-noshare -.RE -builds the vax version of the interactive system to run on bsd systems with -the compiler object code in the heap. -.SH OPTIONS -The following basic options are the only ones needed for normal use. -.TP -.BI \-sun3 -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI \-m68 -Build the sun-3 version of the system. -An operating system option must be specified (-sunos or -mach). -.TP -.BI \-sun4 -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI \-sparc -Build the sun-4 version of the system. -An operating system option must be specified (-sunos or -mach). -.TP -.BI \-next -Build the NeXT version of the system (implies -m68). -.TP -.BI \-encore -Build the Encore Multimax (ns32032 processor) version of the system. -This implies the \fB-bsd\fP option. -.TP -.BI \-vax -Build the vax version of the system. -For the vax an operating system option must be specified. -.TP -.BI \-bsd -Build a version that runs under bsd unix. For the Sun-3 or Sun-4, -you must specify either -sunos or -mach, not -bsd. -.TP -.BI \-sunos -Build a version that runs under SunOS. -.TP -.BI \-mach -Build a version that runs under Mach. -.TP -.BI \-ultrix -Build a version that runs under Ultrix. -.TP -.BI \-v9 -Build a version that runs under v9 Unix. -.TP -.BI \-batch -Build the batch compiler (with default name `smlc') instead of an -interactive system. -.TP -.BI \-noshare -Do not link the `.mo' files into an `a.out' format object file and include it in the -runtime executable. -.TP -.BI \-i -Make the `sml' image start out using the interpreter for faster compilation -and slower execution (for interactive system only; can switch -back to native code once in -`sml' by `System.Control.interp := false'). -.TP -.BI \-ionly -Build an image (with default name `smli') that has only the interpreter. -This gives fast compilation and saves space by eliminating the code -generator from the executable, but results in slower execution. -.TP -.BI \-o " image" -Use image as the name of the system image. -The default image name is `sml' for interactive systems, `smli' for the -interpreter only system and `smlc' for the batch compiler. -.PP -The following options may be used to tune garbage collection and paging performance. -.TP -.BI \-h " heapsize" -Set the initial heap size to \fIheapsize\fP kilo-bytes. -.TP -.BI \-m " softlimit" -Set the soft limit on the heap size to \fIsoftlimit\fP kilo-bytes. -.TP -.BI \-r " ratio" -Set the ratio of the heap size to live data to \fIratio\fP. -This must be at least 3. -.PP -The following options are for building and testing new versions of the system; they -are not necessary for normal installation. -.TP -.BI \-run -Build the run-time kernel (`runtime/run'), but don't build a system. -.TP -.BI \-noclean -Don't remove the existing `.o' files in the runtime directory. -.TP -.BI \-norun -Don't re-compile the runtime kernel. -This implies the \fB-noclean\fP option. -.TP -.BI \-target " machine" -Build a batch cross compiler for \fImachine\fP. -For example, to build a \fBvax\fP to \fBsparc\fP cross compiler -.ti +0.5i -makeml \-vax \-bsd \-target sparc -.br -This option implies the \fB-batch\fP option. -.TP -.BI \-mo " path" -Use \fIpath\fP as the directory containing the `.mo' files. -.TP -.BI \-runtime " path" -Use \fIpath\fP as the source directory for the runtime code. -.TP -.BI \-D def -When compiling the runtime code add ``\fB-D\fP\fIdef\fP'' as a command line option. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -linkdata(1) -.SH AUTHOR -John Reppy -.SH BUGS -This will not work with the sun cross-compilers (really a problem with the -runtime makefile). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/man.1 b/static/v10/man1/man.1 deleted file mode 100644 index dec4ecce..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/man.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'MAN (I)'3/15/72'MAN (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME man -- run off section of UNIX manual -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS man___ title [ section ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION man___ -is a shell command file that will locate -and run off a particular section of this manual. -Title is the the desired -part of the manual. -Section is the section number of the manual. -(In Arabic, not Roman numerals.) -If section is missing, 1_ is assumed. -For example, - - man man - -would reproduce this page. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /sys/man/man?/* -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO sh(I), roff(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "File not found", "Usage .." -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/maple.1 b/static/v10/man1/maple.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2a8dba35..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/maple.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -.TH MAPLE 1 "02 June 1987" "University of Waterloo" -.ds ]W "Symbolic Comp. Group -.SH NAME -maple \- interactive symbolic algebraic program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B maple -[ -.B \-b -libname -] [ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-s -] -\" If a constant width font is used, set cW to 1. -\" Other set cW to 0 and use .cs to set constant spacing for examples -.ie \w'M'>\w'.' .nr cW 0 -.el .nr cW 1 -\" -.SH DESCRIPTION -Initiate a session with the -.I maple -symbolic algebraic program. -Expressions are read from standard input and the results are produced -in the standard output file as soon as each input expression has been -read. -Maple has the ability to algebraically manipulate unbounded integers, -exact rational numbers, real numbers with arbitrary precision, symbolic -formulae, polynomials, sets, lists, and equations. -It can solve systems of equations, differentiate formulae, and integrate -formulae. -In the following example from a Maple session, Maple's output -is shown to the right of the input expressions. -.sp -.ps 9 -.vs 10 -.nf -.if !\n(cW .cs R 18 -.in +2 -p:=x^2\-x\-2; - 2 - p := x \- x \- 2 - -q:=(x+1)^2; - 2 - q := (x + 1) - -s:=p/q; - 2 - x \- x \- 2 - s := \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- - 2 - (x + 1) - -diff(s,x); # differentiate with respect to x - - 2 - 2 x \- 1 x \- x \- 2 - \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- \- 2 \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- - 2 3 - (x + 1) (x + 1) - -normal(s); - x \- 2 - \-\-\-\-\-\-\- - x + 1 - -Digits := 47; - Digits := 47 - -x := 3^50; - x := 717897987691852588770249 - -s; - 717897987691852588770247 - \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- - 717897987691852588770250 - -evalf(s); - .99999999999999999999999582113329270438496099068 - -quit; - -.in -2 -.if !\n(cW .cs R -.fi -.ps 10 -.vs 12 - -If there is a system-wide maple initialization file with the name -.I init -under the src subdirectory of the Maple library, then this file -is read before the session starts. -In addition, if there is a maple initialization file named -.I .mapleinit -in the user's home directory, this file is read next. -If the \fI\-s\fR (suppress initialization) -option is specified, Maple will forego reading -any initialization file when initiating a session. - - -If the -.I \-b -(library) option is used, -then -.I pathname -should be the pathname of a directory which contains the Maple library. -This is used to initialize the value of the Maple variable `libname'. -By default, `libname' is initialized with the pathname /u/maple/lib. -Some sites may install a maple shell script which uses the \fI\-b\fR -option to redefine the library pathname to be whatever is appropriate -for those sites, e.g., -.nf - maple \-b /usr/public/waterloo/maple/lib $* -.fi - -The \fI\-q\fR (quiet) option will suppress the printing of Maple's -startup logo, various informational messages (words used messages -and garbage collection messages), and the signoff message. -Maple is better suited for use as a filter when these messages are -suppressed. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.I "Maple: A Sample Interactive Session" -issued by the Symbolic Computation Group as -Research Report CS-85-01 available from the Department of Computer -Science, University of Waterloo, -.br -.I "Maple User's Guide" -by B.W. Char et al, Watcom Publications Limited, Waterloo, Ontario (1985). -.br -.IR mint (1) -.SH FILES -\&.mapleinit -.br -/usr/maple/lib \- Maple library (Pathname subject to change at -each installation.) -.SH AUTHOR -Symbolic Computation Group, University of Waterloo -.SH "FOR HELP" -At Waterloo, there is the newsgroup uw.maple which contains broadcasts -and discussions which would be of interest to general Maple users. -You should subscribe to this newsgroup if you intend to use Maple in -more than just a casual manner. -Users are encouraged to post their questions regarding Maple to this -newsgroup if they feel that their enquiries are of a general nature. -Replies will be posted to the newsgroup for all to see. -If you have a question that you think is of a very specific nature and -not of interest to others, you may send a mail message to -maple_help@watmum. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/match.1 b/static/v10/man1/match.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 058a529d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/match.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH MATCH 1 -.SH NAME -match \- compare style tables from two or more texts -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B match -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -[style-file1 [style-file2 ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Match -collates selected variables from tables produced by the -.IR style (1) -command and prints values from the different files -one below the other for easy comparison. -The -.I style-files -must contain tables produced by -.IR style . -.PP -.I Match -can also run on one file -to produce an abbreviated version of the -.I style -table. -.PP -When comparing texts, it is advisable to use -texts of similar length. -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH USES -This program is useful for visually inspecting similarities -and differences among stylistic features of different documents -or drafts and their revisions. -.SH SEE ALSO -style(1), -prose(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/matlab.1 b/static/v10/man1/matlab.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 69866780..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/matlab.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ -.TH MATLAB 1 -.CT 1 numbers -.SH NAME -matlab \(mi interactive matrix desk calculator -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B /usr/lbin/matlab -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Matlab -manipulates complex matrices interactively. -Special cases include -real matrices and scalars. -Operations include pseudoinversion (which -is inversion for square nonsingular matrices), eigendecomposition, -various other factorizations, solution of linear equations, matrix -products (including inner and outer products), Kronecker products, -log, exponential and trigonometric functions of matrices, and rank and -condition estimation. -.PP -Variables are alphanumeric strings of at most -4 characters. -Case is ignored. -Expressions and assignment statements are written -as in Fortran. -Multiple statements can be put on one line, -separated by either comma or semicolon; the result of a statement -is written on the standard output unless a semicolon follows the statement. -Extensions to Fortran notation include: -.PP -.I Matrix construction -from elements. -Elements in a row are separated by commas; columns are -separated by semicolons; matrices are surrounded by -.L < > -brackets. -.PP -.I Transpose -is indicated by postfix prime -.LR ' . -.PP -.I Consecutive integers -are denoted by colons in the style 1:4 or 1:2:8 (meaning 1,3,5,7). -.L A(2:5) -is a subarray; -.L A(:,j) -is a column. -.PP -.I Identity -matrix is denoted -.LR eye ; -its dimensions are dictated by context. -.PP -.I Reverse division -is denoted by \e . -For example, -.L x = A \e b -is roughly the same as -.LR "x = inv(A) * b" , -except that Gaussian elimination, if applicable, is used to compute -.IR x . -.PP -Some -.I matlab -commands: -.TP -.B help -.PD0 -.TP -.BI help " word" -List commands and functions, or specific information about a -.IR word : -.IP -.ft 5 -.nf -ABS ANS ATAN BASE CHAR CHOL CHOP CLEA COND CONJ COS -DET DIAG DIAR DISP EDIT EIG ELSE END EPS EXEC EXIT -EXP EYE FILE FLOP FLPS FOR FUN HESS HILB IF IMAG -INV KRON LINE LOAD LOG LONG LU MACR MAGI NORM ONES -ORTH PINV PLOT POLY PRIN PROD QR RAND RANK RCON RAT -REAL RETU RREF ROOT ROUN SAVE SCHU SHOR SEMI SIN SIZE -SQRT STOP SUM SVD TRIL TRIU USER WHAT WHIL WHO WHY -.fi -.TP -.BI save(' file ') -.TP -.BI save(' file \fR[\fB, var \fR]...\fB') -Save all current variables, -or just the designated variables in -.I file. -.TP -.BI load(' file ') -Restore saved variables. -.TP -.BI exec(' file ') -Execute the commands in -.I file -before reading more commands from the standard input. -.PD -.PP -.I Matlab -can be called as a subroutine. -For details, see the reference or -type -.LR "help user" . -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/mathelp.dac -.br -.F /usr/lib/mathelp.idx -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Cleve Moler, -.I MATLAB User's Guide, -Technical Report CS81\-1 (Revised), Dept. -of Computer Science, University of New Mexico, 1982. -(Available in troff form with the Matlab source.) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 374c5e43..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68AR 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68ar \- archive and library maintainer for portable archives -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68ar -key [ posname ] afile name ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mc68ar\^ -maintains groups of files -combined into a single archive file. -Its main use -is to create and update library files as used by the link editor. -It can be used, though, for any similar purpose. -.PP -When -.I mc68ar\^ -creates an archive, it creates headers in a format that is portable across -all machines. The portable archive's format and structure are described in -detail in -.IR ar (4). -The archive symbol table [described in -.IR ar (4)] -is used by the link editor -[\f2mc68ld(1)\f1] -to effect multiple passes over libraries of -object files in an efficient manner. -Whenever the -.IR mc68ar (1) -command is used to create or update the contents of an archive, the -symbol table is rebuilt. The symbol table can be forced to be rebuilt -by the -.BR s -option described below. -.PP -.I Key\^ -is one character from the set -.BR drqtpmx , -optionally concatenated with -one or more of -.BR vuaibcls . -.I Afile\^ -is the archive file. -The -.I names\^ -are constituent files in the archive file. -The meanings of the -.I key\^ -characters are: -.TP -.B d -Deletes the named files from the archive file. -.TP -.B r -Replaces the named files in the archive file. -If the optional character -.B u -is used with -.BR r , -then only those files with -modified dates later than -the archive files are replaced. -If an optional positioning character from the set -.B abi -is used, then the -.I posname\^ -argument must be present -and specifies that new files are to be placed -after -.RB ( a ) -or before -.RB ( b -or -.BR i ) -.IR posname . -Otherwise -new files are placed at the end. -.TP -.B q -Quickly appends the named files to the end of the archive file. -Optional positioning characters are invalid. -The command does not check whether the added members -are already in the archive. -Useful only to avoid quadratic behavior when creating a large -archive piece-by-piece. -.TP -.B t -Prints a table of contents of the archive file. -If no names are given, all files in the archive are tabled. -If names are given, only those files are tabled. -.TP -.B p -Prints the contents of named files in the archive. -.TP -.B m -Moves the named files to the end of the archive. -If a positioning character is present, -then the -.I posname\^ -argument must be present and, -as in -.BR r , -specifies where the files are to be moved. -.TP -.B x -Extracts the named files. -If no names are given, all files in the archive are -extracted. -In neither case does -.B x -alter the archive file. -.bp -.TP -.B v -Verbose. -Under the verbose option, -.I mc68ar\^ -gives a file-by-file -description of the making of a -new archive file from the old archive and the constituent files. -When used with -.BR t , -it gives a long listing of all information about the files. -When used with -.BR x , -it precedes each file with a name. -.TP -.B c -Create. -Normally, -.I mc68ar\^ -will create -.I afile\^ -when it needs to. -The create option suppresses the -normal message that is produced when -.I afile\^ -is created. -.TP -.B l -Local. -Normally, -.I mc68ar\^ -places its temporary files in the directory -.BR /tmp . -This option causes them to be placed in the local directory. -.TP -.B s -Symbol table creation. -Forces the regeneration of the archive symbol table even if -.IR mc68ar (1) -is not invoked with a command which will modify the archive contents. -This command is useful to restore the archive symbol table after the -.IR mc68strip (1) -command has been used on the archive. -.SH FILES -/tmp/ar\(** temporaries -.SH SEE ALSO -mc68ld(1), -mc68lorder(1), -mc68strip(1). -.br -a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference -Manual\f1. -.SH BUGS -If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list, -it may be put in the archive twice. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 31b323da..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68AS 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68as \- \*N MC68000 assembler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.BR mc68as -.RB "[" \-o " objfile]" -.if 'mc68'x86' .RB \-x -.if 'mc68'3b' .RB "[" \-Q "]" -.RB "[" \-n "]" -.RB "[" \-m "]" -.RB "[" \-R "]" -.RB "[" \-V "]" -file-name -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68as -command -assembles the named file. -.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ -The output file is executable if no errors -occurred during the assembly, transfer vectors were not used, -and there are no unresolved external references.\} -The following flags -may be specified in any order: -.TP \w'\fB\-o\fP\ \fIobjfile\fP\ \ 'u -.BI \-o " objfile" -Puts the output of the assembly in -.IR objfile . -By default, the output file name is formed by -removing the -.B .s -suffix, if there is one, from the input file name -and appending a -.B .o -suffix. -.if 'mc68'x86' \{\ -.TP -.B \-x -This -flag is -.I required -for all x86 files. -\} -.if 'mc68'3b' \{ -.TP -.B \-Q -Warn the user if a transfer vector operand is used -in any context other than a "call" instruction. -\} -.TP -.B \-n -Turns off long/short address optimization. -By default, address optimization takes place. -.TP -.B \-m -Runs the -.I m4 -macro pre-processor -on the input to the assembler. -.TP -.B \-R -Removes (unlinks) the input file after assembly -is completed. -.TP -.B \-V -Writes the version number of the assembler being run -on the standard error output. -.SH FILES -.RI /tmp/mc68a[A-L]AAa XXXXXX -temporary files -.SH "SEE ALSO" -mc68ld(1), -mc68nm(1), -mc68strip(1). -.br -a.out(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference -Manual\f1. -.br -m4(1) in the -\f2UNIX System V User's Reference Manual\f1. -.br -\f2UNIX Assembler User's Guide for the Motorola 68000\f1 in the -\f2630 MTG Software Development Guide\f1. -.SH WARNING -.if 'mc68'3b' \{ -.PP -If the input file does not contain a -.B .file -assembler directive and the -.B \-m -flag was not specified, -the file name given by the assembler when an -error occurs is one of the temporary files -.RB ( /usr/tmp/mc68as \s-1XXXXXX\s+1) -\} -.PP -If the -.B \-m -.RI ( m4 -macro pre-processor invocation) option is used, -keywords for -.I m4 -.RI "[see " m4 (1)] -cannot be used as symbols (variables, functions, labels) -in the input file since -.I m4 -cannot determine which are assembler symbols and -which are real -.I m4 -macros. -.SH BUGS -The -.B even -assembler directive is not guaranteed to work -in the -.B .text -section when optimization is performed. -.PP -Arithmetic expressions may only have -one forward referenced symbol per expression. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 4cc4e674..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -.SA 1 -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH MC68CONV 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68conv \- \*N MC68000 object file converter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68conv -.RB [ \- ] -.RB [ \-a ] -.RB [ \-o ] -.RB [ \-p ] -.RB [ \-s ] -.B -t -target files -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68conv -command -converts \*N object files from their current format to the format -of the -.I target -machine. -Mc68conv can read an archive file in any of three formats: -the -.SM UNIX -pre-5.0 format, the 5.0 random access format, and the -6.0 portable -.SM ASCII -format. -It produces a file in the format specified -.RB ( -a , -.BR -o , -or -.BR -p ). -The converted file is written to -file\c -.I .v\c -\&. -.PP -Command line options are: -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \- -indicates -.I files -should be read from -.I stdin\c -\&. -.PP -.TP 12 -.B \-a -If the input file is an archive, produces the ouput file in the -6.0 portable ASCII archive format. -.PP -.TP 12 -.B \-o -If the input file is an archive, produces -the output file in the UNIX pre-5.0 format. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-p -If the input file is an archive, produces the ouput file in the -UNIX 5.0 random access archive format. -This is the default. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-s -Functions exactly as 3bswab, i.e. "preswab" -all characters in the object file. This is useful only for AT&T -3B20 Computer object files which are to be "swab-dumped" from a DEC machine -to a 3B20 Computer. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-t " target" -Converts the object file to the byte ordering of the -machine (\f2target\f1) to which the object file is being shipped. This -may be another host or a target machine. Legal values for -.I target -are: pdp, vax, ibm, i80, x86, b16, n3b, m32, and mc68. -.PP -Mc68conv can be used to convert all object files in common object file -format. It can be used on either -the source ("sending") or target ("receiving") machine. -.PP -Mc68conv is meant to ease the problems created -by a multi-host cross-compilation development environment. Mc68conv is best -used within a procedure for shipping object files from one machine to -another. -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.nf -# ship object files from pdp11 to ibm -$echo \(**.out | mc68conv -t ibm -$OFC\/foo.o -$uucp \(**.v my370!~\/rje\/ -.fi -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -All diagnostics are -intended to be self-explanatory. Fatal diagnostics on the command -lines cause termination. Fatal diagnostics on an input file cause the -program to continue to the next input file. -.bp -.SH "WARNINGS" -.PP -Mc68conv will not convert archives from one format to another if -both the source and target machines have the same byte ordering. -The -.SM UNIX -tool -.IR convert (1) -should be used for this purpose. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 43a1d523..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,314 +0,0 @@ -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH MC68CPP 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68cpp \- the C language preprocessor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B $DMD/lib/mc68cpp [ -option ... -.B ] -.B [ -ifile -.B [ -ofile -.B ] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -.I Mc68cpp\^ -is the C language preprocessor which is invoked as the -first pass of any C compilation using the -.IR dmdcc (1) -command. Thus, the output of -.I mc68cpp\^ -is designed to be in a form acceptable as input -to the next pass of the C compiler. -As the C language evolves, -.I mc68cpp\^ -and the rest of the C compilation package will be -modified to follow these changes. -Therefore, the use of -.I mc68cpp\^ -other than in this framework is not suggested. -The preferred way to invoke -.I mc68cpp\^ -is through the -.IR dmdcc (1) -command, since the functionality of -.I mc68cpp\^ -may some day be moved elsewhere. See -.IR m4 (1) -for a general macro processor. -.PP -.I Mc68cpp\^ -optionally accepts two file names as arguments. -.I Ifile\^ -and -.I ofile\^ -are respectively the input and output -for the preprocessor. They default to standard input -and standard output if not supplied. -.PP -The following \fIoptions\fP to -.I mc68cpp\^ -are recognized: -.TP -.B \-P -Preprocesses the input without producing the line control -information used by the next pass of the C compiler. -.TP -.B \-C -By default, -.I mc68cpp\^ -strips C-style comments. If the -.B \-C -option is specified, all comments (except those found on -.I mc68cpp -directive lines) -are passed along. -.TP -.BI \-U name\^ -Removes any initial definition of -.IR name , -where -.I name\^ -is a reserved symbol -that is predefined by the particular preprocessor. -The current list of these possibly reserved symbols includes: -.PD 0 -.ne 3v -.RS 10 -.TP 19 -operating system: -ibm, gcos, os, tss, unix -.TP -hardware: -interdata, pdp11, u370, u3b, u3b5, vax, mc68000, mc68k16, mc68k32 -.TP -\s-1UNIX\s+1 variant: -.SM RES\*S, -.SM RT -.RE -.PD -.TP -.BI \-D name\^ -.PD 0 -.TP -.BI \-D name=def\^ -Defines -.I name\^ -as if by a -.B #define -directive. If no -.I =def\^ -is given, -.I name\^ -is defined as 1. -.bp -.PD -.TP -.BI \-I dir\^ -Changes the algorithm for searching for -.B #include -files -whose names do not begin with \f3/\fP -to look in -.I dir\^ -before looking in the directories on the standard list. -Thus, -.B #include -files whose names are enclosed in \f3"\|"\fP -will be searched for -first in the directory of the -.I ifile\^ -argument, -then in directories named in -.B \-I -options, -and last in directories on a standard list. -For -.B #include -files whose names are enclosed in -.BR <> , -the directory of the -.I ifile\^ -argument is not searched. -.PP -Two special names are understood by -.IR mc68cpp . -The name -.B _\^\^_\s-1LINE\s+1_\^\^_ -is defined as the current line number (as a decimal integer) as known by -.IR mc68cpp , -and -.B _\^\^_\s-1FILE\s+1_\^\^_ -is defined as the current file name (as a C string) as known by -.I mc68cpp.\^ -They can be used anywhere (including in macros) just as any -other defined name. -.PP -All -.I mc68cpp\^ -directives start with lines whose first character is -.BR # . -The directives are: -.TP -.BI #define " name" " " token-string -Replaces subsequent instances of -.I name\^ -with -.IR token-string . -.TP -\fB#define\fI name\fB(\fI arg\fB, ...,\fI arg\fB )\fI token-string\fR -Notice that there can be no space between -.I name -and the -.BR ( . -Replaces subsequent instances of -.I name -followed by a -.BR ( , -a list of comma separated tokens, and a -.B ) -by -.I token-string -where each occurrence of an -.I arg -in the -.I token-string -is replaced by the corresponding token in the comma separated list. -.TP -.BI #undef " name" -Causes the definition of -.I name -(if any) to be forgotten from now on. -.TP -\fB#include\fI "filename" -.PD 0 -.TP -.BI #include " " < filename > -Include at this point the contents of -.I filename -(which will then be run through -.IR mc68cpp ). -When the -.BI < filename > -notation is used, -.I filename -is only searched for in the standard places. -See the -.B \-I -option above for more detail. -.PD -.TP -\fB#line\fI integer-constant "filename" -Causes -.I mc68cpp -to generate line control information for the next pass of the -C compiler. -.I Integer-constant -is the line number of the next line -and -.I filename -is the file where it comes from. -If \fI"filename"\fR is not given, the current file name is unchanged. -.TP -.B #endif -.br -Ends a section of lines begun by a test directive -.RB ( #if , -.BR #ifdef , -or -.BR #ifndef ). -Each test directive must have a matching -.BR #endif . -.bp -.TP -.BI #ifdef " name" -The lines following will appear in the output if, and only if, -.I name -has been the subject of a previous -.B #define -without being the subject of an intervening -.BR #undef . -.TP -.BI #ifndef " name" -The lines following will not appear in the output if, and only if, -.I name -has been the subject of a previous -.B #define -without being the subject of an intervening -.BR #undef . -.SK -.TP -.BI #if " constant-expression" -Lines following will appear in the output if, and only if, the -.I constant-expression -evaluates to non-zero. -All binary non-assignment C operators, the -.B ?: -operator, the unary -.BR \(mi , -.BR ! , -and -.B ~ -operators are all legal in -.IR constant-expression . -The precedence of the operators is the same as defined by the C language. -There is also a unary operator -.BR defined , -which can be used in -.I constant-expression -in these two forms: -.BI defined " " ( " name " ) -or -.BI defined " name" . -This allows the utility of -.BR #ifdef " and " #ifndef -in a -.B #if -directive. -Only these operators, integer constants, and names which -are known by -.I mc68cpp -should be used in -.IR constant-expression . -In particular, the -.B sizeof -operator is not available. -.TP -.B #else -Reverses the notion of the test directive which -matches this directive. So if lines previous to -this directive are ignored, the following lines -will appear in the output, -and vice versa. -.PP -The test directives and the possible -.B #else -directives can be nested. -.SH FILES -.TP 1.5i -/usr/include -standard directory for -.B #include -files -.SH SEE ALSO -.PP -dmdcc(1). -.br -m4(1) in the -\f2UNIX System V User's Reference Manual\f1. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.PP -The error messages produced by -.I mc68cpp\^ -are intended to be self-explanatory. The line number and filename -where the error occurred are printed along with the diagnostic. -.SH WARNING -When newline characters were found in argument lists for macros -to be expanded, previous versions of -.I mc68cpp\^ -put out the newlines as they were found and expanded. -The current version of -.I mc68cpp\^ -replaces these newlines with blanks to alleviate problems that the -previous versions had when this occurred. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 deleted file mode 100755 index f26c0178..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68CPRS 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68cprs \- compress a MC68000 object file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68cprs -.RB [ \-pv ] -infile outfile -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68cprs -command -reduces the size of a Motorola 68000 object file, -.IR infile , -by removing duplicate structure and union descriptors. -The reduced file, -.IR outfile , -is produced as output. -.PP -The options are: -.PP -.TP 6 -.B \-p -Prints statistical messages including: -.sp -.RS 12 -total number of tags -.br -total duplicate tags -.br -total reduction of -.IR infile . -.RE -.PP -.TP 6 -.B \-v -Prints verbose error messages if error condition occurs. -.SH EXAMPLE -.ft CW - mc68cprs dmda.out sm3b -.ft R -.SH SEE ALSO -mc68strip(1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 deleted file mode 100755 index d44c9134..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,162 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68DIS 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68dis \- MC68000 disassembler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68dis -.RB [ \-o ] -.RB [ \-V ] -.RB [ \-L ] -.RB [ \-d " sec]" -.RB [ \-da " sec ]" -.RB [ \-F " function]" -.RB [ \-t " sec]" -.br -.RB [ \-l " string]" -files -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68dis -command -produces an assembly language listing -of each of its -object -.IR file -arguments. -The listing includes -assembly -statements -and a hexadecimal or octal representation of the binary that -produced those statements. -.PP -The following \fIoptions\fP are -interpreted by the disassembler and may be specified in any order. -.PP -.TP 12 -.B \-o -Prints numbers in octal. -Default is hexadecimal. -.PP -.TP 12 -.B \-V -Version number of the disassembler is written to standard error. -.PP -.TP 12 -.B \-L -Invokes a look-up of C source labels in the symbol table for -subsequent printing. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-d " sec" -Disassembles the -named section as data, -printing the offset of -the data from the -beginning of the section. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-da " sec" -Disassembles the -named section as data, -printing the actual -address of the data. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-F " function" -Disassembles the -named function -in each object file -that is specified -on the command line. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-t " sec" -Disassembles the -named section as text. -.PP -.TP 12 -.BR \-l " string" -Disassembles the -library file specified -as -.IR string . -For example, -one would issue the -command -.B "mc68dis \-l x \-l z" -to disassemble -.B libx.a -and -.B libz.a\c -\&. -All libraries are -assumed to be in -.BR $DMD/lib . -.DT -.br -.PP -If the -.BR \-d , -.B \-da -or -.BR \-t -options are specified, -only those named -sections from each -user supplied file name -are disassembled. -Otherwise, all sections -containing text will -be disassembled. -.PP -If the -.BR \-F -option is specified, -only those named -functions from each -user supplied file name -are disassembled. -.B \-F -only works with object files that have been compiled with the -.B "dmdcc -g" -option. -.bp -.PP -On output, a number enclosed in brackets -at the beginning of a line, -such as -.BR [5] , -represents a C break-pointable line number that -starts with the following instruction. -These line numbers are present only when the -object file has been compiled with the -.B "dmdcc -g" -option. -An expression such as -.B <40> -in the operand field, -following a relative displacement -for control transfer instructions, -is the computed address -within the section to which -control is transferred. -Similarly, an expression such as -\f3<40>+%d0\f1, -following a program counter index plus displacement -operand, indicates that the effective address -of the operand in the current section is 40 plus the content of %d0. -A C function name -will appear in the first column, -followed by -.BR (\|) , -if the function was compiled with -.BR -g . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dmdcc(1), -mc68as(1), -mc68ld(1). -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -The self-explanatory diagnostics -indicate errors in -the command line or problems -encountered with the -specified files. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 6552bbe6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,164 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68DUMP 1 "630 MTG" -.tr ~ -.SH NAME -mc68dump \- dump parts of an MC68000 object file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68dump -.RB [ \-acfghlorst ] -.RB [ \-z " name]" -files -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68dump -command -dumps selected parts of each -of its object \fIfile\fP arguments. -.PP -This command -accepts both object files and archives of object files. -It -processes each file argument according to one or more of the following -options: -.TP \w'\fB\-d~number~~'u -.B \-a -Dumps the archive header of each member of each archive file -argument. -.TP -.B \-g -Dumps the global symbols in the symbol table of a 6.0 archive. -.TP -.B \-f -Dumps each file header. -.TP -.B \-o -Dumps each optional header. -.TP -.B \-h -Dumps section headers. -.TP -.B \-s -Dumps section contents. -.TP -.B \-r -Dumps relocation information. -.TP -.B \-l -Dumps line number information. -.TP -.B \-t -Dumps symbol table entries. -.TP -.BR \-z ~name -Dumps line number entries for the named function. -.TP -.BR \-c -Dumps the string table. -.PP -The following \fImodifiers\fP are used in conjunction with the options -listed above to modify their capabilities. -.TP \w'\fB\-d~number~~'u -.BR \-d ~number -Dumps the section number or range of sections starting at \fInumber\fP -and ending either at the last section number or \fInumber\fP specified by -.BR +d . -.TP -.BR +d ~number -Dumps sections in the range either beginning with -first section or beginning -with section specified by \fB\-d\fP. -.TP -.BR \-n ~name -Dumps information pertaining only to the named entity. -This -.I modifier -applies to -.BR \-h , -.BR \-s , -.BR \-r , -.BR \-l , -and -.BR \-t . -.TP -.B \-p -Suppresses printing of the headers. -.TP -.BR \-t ~index -Dumps only the indexed symbol table entry. -The -\f3-t\f1, -used in conjunction with -.BR +t , -specifies a range of symbol -table entries. -.TP -.BR +t ~index -Dumps the symbol table entries in the range ending with the indexed entry. -The range begins at the first symbol table entry or at the entry -specified by the -.B \-t -option. -.TP -.B \-u -Underlines the name of the file for emphasis. -.TP -.B \-v -Dumps information in symbolic representation rather than numeric -(e.g., -.SM C_STATIC -instead of -.BR \s-10X02\s+1 ). -This \fImodifier\fP can be used with all the above options -except -.B \-s -and -.B \-o -options -of -.IR mc68dump. -.TP -.BR \-z ~name,number -Dumps line number entry or range of line numbers starting at -.I number -for the named function. -.TP -.BR \+z ~number -Dumps line numbers starting at either function -.IR name " or " number -specified -by -.BR \-z, -up to -.I number -specified by -.BR +z . -.PP -.PP -Blanks separating an \fIoption\fP and its \fImodifier\fP are optional. -The comma separating the name from the number modifying the -.B \-z -option may -be replaced by a blank. -.PP -The -.B -z -and -.B -n -options that take a -.I name -modifier will only work with object files that have been compiled -with the -.B "dmdcc \-g" -option. -.PP -The -.I mc68dump -command -attempts to format the information it dumps in a meaningful way, -printing certain information in character, -hex, octal or decimal representation as appropriate. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dmdcc(1). -.br -a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programer's -Reference Manual\f1. -.tr ~~ diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 5d64faf2..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,341 +0,0 @@ -.\" @(#) ld.1: 2.3 11/17/83 -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH MC68LD 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68ld \- link editor for MC68000 object files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f3mc68ld [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file-names -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68ld -command -combines several -object files into one, -performs relocation, -resolves external symbols, -and supports symbol table information -for symbolic debugging. -In the simplest case, the names of several object -programs are given, and -.I mc68ld -combines them, producing -an object module that can either be executed or -used as input for a subsequent -.I mc68ld -run. -The output of -.I mc68ld -is left in -.BR mc68a.out . -This file is executable -if no errors occurred during the load. -If any input file, -.IR file-name , -is not an object file, -.I mc68ld -assumes it is either a text file containing link editor directives -or an archive library. -(See -the \f2Link Editor\f1 in the \f2UNIX System V Support Tools -Guide\f1 for a discussion of input directives.) -.PP -If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once -at the point it is encountered in the argument list. -Only those routines defining an unresolved external -reference are loaded. -The order of library members is unimportant because -\fImc68ld\fR passes through each library's (archive) symbol -table as many times as necessary until no new -external symbols are resolved and no new references are generated. -.PP -The following options are recognized by -.IR mc68ld . -.TP \w'\fB\-u\fP\ symname\ \ 'u -.if !'mc68'' \{\ -.B \-a -Produces an absolute file; gives warnings for undefined references. -Relocation information is stripped from the output object file -unless the -.B \-r -option is given. The -.B \-r -option is needed only when an absolute file should retain its -relocation information (the normal case for the 630 MTG -downloaded programs). -If neither -.BR \-a " nor " \-r -is given, -.B \-a -is assumed. -\} -.TP -.BR \-e " epsym" -Sets the default entry point address for the output file to be that of -the symbol -.IR epsym . -.if \nF \{\ -This option forces the -.B \-X -option to be set. \} -.TP -.BR \-f " fill" -Sets the default fill pattern for ``holes'' within -an output section as well as initialized bss sections. -The argument \fIfill\fP is a two-byte constant. -.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ -.TP -.B \-i -This option specifies that separate ``I'' and ``D'' space are to be -generated. -.B \-i -has no effect if -.B \-tv -is given. -This allows 64K of instructions and 64K of data. -'br \} -.if 'mc68'x86' \{\ -.TP -.B \-i -This option specifies that separate ``I'' and ``D'' space is to be -generated. -The option -.B \-i -has no effect if -.B \-tv -is given. -This allows up to 1 MB of text and 1 MB of data. -'br \} -.ie \nD \{\ -.TP -.BR \-l "x" -Searchs a library -.BI lib x .a, -where \fIx\fR is up to seven characters. -A library is searched when its name is encountered, -so the placement of a \fB\-l\fR -is significant. -By default, libraries are located in -.ie 'mc68'' -.BR /lib. -.el $DMD/lib. -'br \} -.el \{\ -.TP -.BI \-l x -Searches a library -.BI lib x .a, -where \fIx\fR is up to seven characters. -A library is searched when its name is encountered, -so the placement of a \fB\-l\fR -is significant. -By default, libraries are located in -.ie 'mc68'' /lib and /usr/lib. -.el $DMD/lib . -'br \} -.TP -.B \-m -Produces a map or listing of the input/output sections -on the standard output. -.TP -.BR \-o " outfile" -Produces an output object file by the name -.IR outfile . -The name of the default object file is -.BR mc68a.out . -.TP -.B \-r -Retains relocation entries in -the output object file. -Relocation entries must be saved if the -output file is to become an input file in a -subsequent -.I mc68ld -run. -.ie 'mc68'' The -.el \{\ -Unless -.B \-a -is also given, the -\} -link editor will not complain about -unresolved references. -.TP -.B \-s -Strips line number entries and -symbol table information -from the output object file. -.if \nG \{\ -.TP -.B \-t -Turns off the warning about multiply defined symbols that are -not the same size. -'br \} -.if \nC \{\ -.TP -.B \-tv -Transfer vector object files are expected. -When libraries are searched with this option, -component object modules with the wrong magic -number are ignored (as are transfer vector modules -when -.B \-tv -is not given). -The default is -.I no -transfer vectors. -'br \} -.TP -.BR \-u " symname" -Enters \fIsymname\fP as an undefined symbol -in the symbol table. -This is useful -for loading entirely from a library, since initially the symbol -table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed -to force the loading of the first routine. -.\" .if \nG \{\ -.\" .TP -.\" .B \-x -.\" Do not preserve local (non-.globl) symbols in the output symbol -.\" table; enter external and static symbols only. This option saves -.\" some space in the output file. -.\" 'br \} -.if \nH \{\ -.TP -.B \-z -Do not bind anything to address zero. This option will catch null -pointers. -.TP -.B \-F -Allows the object module to be paged. -'br \} -.TP -.BR \-L " dir" -Changes the algorithm of searching for -.BI lib x .a -to look in -.IR dir -before looking in $DMD/lib. -This option is effective only if it precedes the -.B \-l -option on the command line. -.if \nG \{\ -.TP -.B \-M -Outputs a message for each multiply defined external definition. -'br \} -.TP -.B \-N -Puts the data section immediately following the text in the output file. -.TP -.B \-V -Outputs a message giving information about the version of mc68ld -being used. -.TP -.BR \-VS " num" -Uses -\f2num\f1 -as a decimal version stamp -identifying the -.BR mc68a.out -file that is produced. The version -stamp is stored in the optional header. -.if \nF \{\ -.TP -.B \-X -Generates a standard UNIX file header within the ``optional header'' -field in the output file. -'br \} -.DT -.br -.DT -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 25 -.ie 'mc68'' /lib/lib\fI?\fR.a -.el $DMD/lib/lib\fI?\fR.a -libraries -.if 'mc68'' \{\ -.TP 25 -/usr/lib/lib?.a -libraries -\} -.TP 25 -mc68a.out -output file -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dmdcc(1), mc68as(1). -.br -a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's -Reference Manual\f1. -.bp -.SH WARNINGS -Through its options and input directives, the Motorola 68000 link editor gives -users great flexibility; -however, those who use the input directives must assume -some added responsibilities. -Input directives and options should insure the following properties -for programs: -.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ -.IP \- 5 -C programs must have data -.RB ( .data "), bss (" .bss ), -and stack space in one 64K byte region. -Stack space -.I must -be provided. -'br \} -.IP \- 5 -C defines a zero pointer as null. -A pointer to which zero has been assigned must -not point to any object. -To satisfy this, users must not place any object -at virtual address zero in the data space. -.tr ~ -.IP \- 5 -When the link editor is called through -.IR dmdcc (1), -a startup routine is linked with the user's program. This -routine usually calls exit(~) [see -.IR exit (3R)] -after execution of the main program. If the user -calls the link editor directly, then the user must insure that -the program always calls exit(~) rather than falling through the -end of the entry routine. -.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ -.IP \- 5 -Without a transfer vector, all text (code) -must reside within a single 64K-byte area. -Transfer vector function linkage removes this -restriction. -.PP -By default, the link editor takes care of these -things. -Specifying regions or defining sections with names other -than -.BR .bss ", " .data ", " .text ", or" -.B .tv -can decrease the link editor's ability to do these -automatically. -In general, users should not specify regions when the -program uses a transfer vector. -'br \} -.if \nC \{\ -.SH BUGS -.I mc68ld -can not currently create transfer vector symbols. -Thus no symbols created through assignment in an -input directive will be given an entry in the transfer vector. -In particular, this means the entry point of a program -can not be redefined by assignment to -.BR main . -Unsuspecting users who create such a symbol and expect it -to be in the transfer vector receive an obscure error -message about an invalid transfer vector relocation reference. -'br \} -.PP -The -\f3\-VS\f1 \f2num\f1 -option has an effect only when the -.B "\-X" -option is also selected. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 6eb484ff..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH MC68LORDER 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68lorder \- find ordering relation for an object library -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68lorder -file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The input -is one or more object or library archive -.I files\^ -[see -.IR mc68ar (1)]. -The standard output -is a list of pairs of object file names, -meaning that the first file of the pair refers to -external identifiers defined in the second file. -The output may be processed by -.IR tsort (1) -to find an ordering of -a library suitable for one-pass access by -.IR mc68ld (1). -Note that the link editor -.IR mc68ld (1) -is capable of multiple passes over an archive in the portable archive format -[see -.IR ar (4)] -and does not require that -.IR mc68lorder (1) -be used when building an archive. The usage of -the -.IR mc68lorder (1) -command may, however, allow for a slightly more efficient access of -the archive during the link edit process. -.PP -The following example builds a new library -from existing -.B \&.o -files. -.PP -.RS -.ft CM -mc68ar cr library `mc68lorder \(**.o | tsort` -.ft 1 -.RE -.SH FILES -\(**symref, \(**symdef temporary files -.SH "SEE ALSO" -mc68ar(1), -mc68ld(1). -.br -ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference -Manual\f1. -.br -tsort(1) in the -\f2\s-1UNIX\s+1 System V User Reference Manual\f1. -.SH BUGS -Object files whose names do not end with -.BR .o , -even when -contained in library archives, are overlooked. -The global symbols and references are attributed to -some other file. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 02c2f36c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68NM 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68nm \- print name list of a MC68000 object file -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f3mc68nm [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file-names -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68nm\^ -command -displays the symbol table of each -Motorola 68000 object file -.IR file-name . -.I File-name\^ -may be a relocatable or absolute Motorola 68000 object file; -or it may be an archive of relocatable or absolute Motorola 68000 object files. -For each symbol, the following information is printed. -For the \f3TYPE\f1, \f3SIZE\f1, or \f3LINE\f1 information, -the object file must be compiled with the -\f3-g\f1 option of the \f2dmdcc\f1(1) command. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B Name -The name of the symbol. -.TP 9 -.B Value -Its value expressed as an offset or an address -depending on its storage class. -.TP 9 -.B Class -Its storage class. -.TP 9 -.B Type -Its type and derived type. -If the symbol is an instance of a structure or of a union, then the structure -or union tag is given following the type (e.g. struct-tag). -If the symbol is an array, then the array dimensions are given -following the type (eg., -.BR char[ n ][ m ] ). -.TP 9 -.B Size -Its size in bytes, if available. -.TP 9 -.B Line -The source line number at which it is defined, if available. -.TP 9 -.B Section -For storage classes static and external, -the object file section containing the symbol (e.g., text, data or bss). -.DT -.br -.PP -The output of -.I mc68nm -may be controlled using the following options: -.\" .if !'mc68'' \{\ -.\" .PP -.\" .TP 9 -.\" .B \-a -.\" Produce full output. Redundant symbols (.text, .data, and .bss), -.\" normally suppressed, are printed. -.\" \} -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-d -Prints the value and size of a symbol in decimal (the default). -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-o -Prints the value and size of a symbol in octal instead of decimal. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-x -Prints the value and size of a symbol in hexadecimal instead of decimal. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-h -Does not display the output header data. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-v -Sorts external symbols by value before they are printed. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-n -Sorts external symbols by name before they are printed. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-e -Prints only external and static symbols. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-f -.\" .ie 'mc68'' \{\ -Produces full output. Prints redundant symbols (.text, .data and .bss), -that are normally suppressed. -.\" \} -.\" .el \{\ -.\" ``Fancy'' output is produced; that is, the symbol table information -.\" is post-processed to reflect the block structure of the source code. -.\" \} -.bp -.TP 9 -.B \-u -Prints undefined symbols only. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-V -Prints the version of the mc68nm command executing on the standard error output. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-T -By default, -.I mc68nm\^ -prints the entire name of the symbols listed. -Since object files can have symbol names with an arbitrary number of -characters, a name that is longer than the width of the column set aside -for names will overflow its column, forcing every column after the name -to be misaligned. The -.B \-T -option causes -.I mc68nm\^ -to truncate every name which would otherwise overflow its column and -place an asterisk as the last character in the displayed name to mark -it as truncated. -.DT -.br -.PP -Options may be used in any order, either singly or in combination, -and may appear anywhere in the command line. -Therefore, both -.B "mc68nm name \-e \-v" -and -.B "mc68nm \-ve name" -print the static and external symbols in -.IR name , -with external symbols sorted by value. -.SH "FILES" -/usr/tmp/nm?????? -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dmdcc(1), -mc68as(1), -mc68ld(1). -.br -a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference -Manual\f1. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.TP 9 -``mc68nm: name: cannot open'' -if -.I name -cannot be read. -.PP -.TP 9 -``mc68nm: name: bad magic'' -if -.I name -is not an appropriate Motorola 68000 object file. -.PP -.TP 9 -``mc68nm: name: no symbols'' -if the symbols have been stripped from -.IR name . -.SH "WARNINGS" -When all the symbols are printed, they must be printed in the order they -appear in the symbol table in order to preserve scoping information. -Therefore, the -.B \-v -and -.B \-n -options should be used only in conjunction with the -.B \-e -option. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 0707b768..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE -.TH MC68SIZE 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68size \- print section sizes of MC68000 object files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.BR mc68size -.RB [ -o ] -.RB [ -x ] -.RB [ -V ] -files -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68size -command -produces section size information for each section in the -Motorola 68000 object files. -The size of the text, data, and bss (uninitialized data) -sections are printed along with the total size of the object -file. If an archive file is input to the mc68size command the -information for all archive members is displayed. -.PP -Numbers are printed in decimal unless either the -.B \-o -or the -.B \-x -option is used, in which case they are printed in -octal, or in hexadecimal, respectively. -.PP -The -.B \-V -flag will supply the version information on the -.I mc68size -command. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dmdcc(1), -mc68as(1), -mc68ld(1). -.br -a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference -Manual\f1. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -"mc68size: name: cannot open" -.br - if -.I name -cannot be read. -.PP - -"mc68size: name: bad magic" -.br - if -.I name -is not a Motorola 68000 object file. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 deleted file mode 100755 index 7d02e453..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,145 +0,0 @@ -.TH MC68STRIP 1 "630 MTG" -.SH NAME -mc68strip \- strip symbolic information from MC68000 object file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mc68strip -.RB [ \-l ] -.RB [ \-m ] -.RB [ \-x ] -.RB [ \-r ] -.RB [ \-s ] -.if 'mc68'3b' \{\ -.RB [ \-f ] -.\} -.RB [ \-V ] -file-names -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.I mc68strip -command -strips the symbol table and line number information from -Motorola 68000 object files, -including archives. -Once this has been done, no symbolic debugging access -is available for that file; therefore, this command is -normally run only on production modules that have -been debugged and tested. -.PP -The amount of information stripped from the symbol table -can be controlled by using the following options: -.PP -.TP 9 -.BR \-l -Strips line number information only; -does not strip any symbol table information. -.PP -.TP 9 -.BR \-m -Strips symbol table information only; -does not strip any relocation information. -Used for 630 MTG applications which need relocation information for downloads, -but do not neccesarily need symbol table information. -This option does not work on archives. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-x -Does not strip static or external symbol information. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-r -Resets the relocation indices into the symbol table. -.if 'mc68'3b' \{\ -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-f -Removes the relocation information from an executable object file -for all sections not of type COPY. Reset -relocation indices into the symbol table for all retained relocation -information. -.\} -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-s -Resets the line number indices into the symbol table (does not remove). -Resets the relocation indices into the symbol table. -.PP -.TP 9 -.B \-V -Prints the version of the mc68strip command executing on the standard error output. -.DT -.br -.PP -If there are any relocation entries in the object file and any symbol -table information is to be stripped, -.I mc68strip -will complain and terminate without stripping -.I file-name -unless the -\f3\-r\f1 or \f3\-m\f1 -flags are used. -.PP -If the -.IR mc68strip -command is executed on a common archive file [see -.IR ar (4)] -the archive symbol table will be removed. The archive -symbol table must be restored by executing the -.IR mc68ar (1) -command with the -.B s -option before the archive can be -link edited by the -.IR mc68ld (1) -command. -.IR Mc68strip (1) -will instruct the user with appropriate warning messages when this -situation arises. -.PP -The purpose of this command is to reduce the file storage -overhead taken by the object file. -.SH "FILES" -/usr/tmp/mc68str?????? -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dmdcc(1), -mc68ar(1), -mc68as(1), -mc68ld(1). -.br -a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's -Reference Manual\f1. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.TP 9 -mc68strip: name: cannot open -.br - if -.I name -cannot be read. -.PP -.TP 9 -mc68strip: name: bad magic -.br - if -.I name -is not a Motorola 68000 object file. -.PP -.TP 9 -mc68strip: name: relocation entries present; cannot strip -.br - if -.I name -contains relocation entries and the -\f3\-r\f1 or \f3\-m\f1 -flag is not used, -the symbol table information cannot be stripped. -.PP -.TP 9 -mc68strip: name: other options set with "m" option -.br - if -other flags are used with the -m option which is mutually exclusive. -.PP -.TP 9 -mc68strip: "m" option not allowed on archive files -.br - if -file name is an archive file. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/memo.1 b/static/v10/man1/memo.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e2103d66..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/memo.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -.TH MEMO 1 "local" -.SH NAME -memo \- produce macros for MM interactively -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B memo -.I filename \ -[ -.I argument\ -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Memo -is designed as a computer -aid to help new or infrequent users of the PWB/MM Memorandum -Macros. -It asks questions interactively to produce a -file which contains the necessary introductory and concluding -macros for PWB/MM. -In order to enter the text of the memo, you must enter -the editor. -For help to any question enter a -.I -\? -A detailed explanation of the proper -answer will be printed. -.P -The following are optional arguments to be used when filename already exists to avoid lengthy printout: -.TP 7 -.B a -Enter editor to add/modify text. -.TP 7 -.B b -Be prompted for concluding macros. -.TP 7 -! -Overwrite filename and begin introductory macros. -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR nroff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/merge.1 b/static/v10/man1/merge.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 39c8f7fb..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/merge.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -.th MERGE I 11/7/73 -.sh NAME -merge \*- merge several files -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd merge -[ -.bd \*-anr -] [ \fB\*-\fIn\fR ] [ \fB+\fIn\fR ] [ name ... ] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Merge -merges several files together -and writes the result on -the standard output. -If a file -is designated by -an unadorned `\*-', -the standard input is understood. -.s3 -The merge is line-by-line in increasing ASCII collating sequence, -except that upper-case letters are considered -the same as the corresponding lower-case letters. -.s3 -.it Merge -understands several flag arguments. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-a\fR Use strict ASCII collating sequence. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-n\fR An initial numeric string, possibly preceded by '\*-', -is sorted by numerical value. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-r\fR Data is in reverse order. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\*-\fIn\fR The first \fIn\fR fields in each line -are ignored. A field is defined as a string of non-space, non-tab -characters separated by tabs and spaces from its neighbors. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB+\fIn\fR The first \fIn\fR characters are ignored. -Fields (with \fB\*-\fIn\fR) -are skipped before characters. -.i0 -.sh "SEE ALSO" -sort(I) -.sh BUGS -Only 8 files can be handled; -any further files are ignored. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mesg.1 b/static/v10/man1/mesg.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 880ab13d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mesg.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'MESG (I)'3/15/72'MESG (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME mesg -- permit or deny messages -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS mesg____ [ n_ ][ y_ ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION mesg____ n_ -forbids messages via write_____ by revoking non-user -write permission on the user's typewriter. -mesg____ y_ reinstates permission. -mesg____ with no argument reverses the current permission. -In all cases the previous state is reported. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /dev/tty? -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO write(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" if the standard input file is not a typewriter -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mint.1 b/static/v10/man1/mint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9f9bd7a3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,420 +0,0 @@ -.TH MINT 1 "02 June 1987" "University of Waterloo" -.ds ]W "Symbolic Comp. Group -.SH NAME -mint \- produce usage report from a maple program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mint -[ -.B \-i -info_level -] -[ -.B \-l -] -[ -.B \-d -library_database -] -[ -.B \-a -database_file -] -[ -.B \-q -] -[ file ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fIMint\fP produces a report about possible errors in a Maple source file -and also reports about how variables are used in the file. -If \fIfile\fP is not given, then the standard input file is used to -read Maple source statements. -Unlike \fImaple\fP, \fImint\fP is not terminated when it reads a -quit statement. -It is terminated when it reaches the end of file. -When started, \fImint\fP normally produces a mint leaf logo. -This can be suppressed by the use of the \fB\-q\fP (quiet) option. - -The amount of information to be produced by \fImint\fP is specified by the -\fIinfo_level\fP argument. -The values allowed for this argument are: -.nf - - 0 \- Display no information. - 1 \- Display only severe errors - 2 \- Display severe and serious errors - 3 \- Display warnings as well as severe and serious errors - 4 \- \kxGive a full report on variable usage as well as - \h'|\nxu'displaying errors and warnings - -.fi -A report for each procedure in the file is displayed -separately followed by a global report for statements not contained -within any procedure. -If the severity of errors found within a procedure is less than -what \fIinfo_level\fP specifies, then no report is produced for -that procedure. -In all cases, the most severe error found in the file will be used -to set the exit status for \fImint\fP. -Thus, by using an \fIinfo_level\fP of 0, \fImint\fP can be used to -determine the severity of errors in a file without actually producing -any output at all. -If no value is given for \fIinfo_level\fP on the command line, a default -value of 2 (severe and serious errors) is used. - -The types of errors and warnings found are classified as severe, -serious, and warning. A severe error is an undisputable error. -A serious error -is almost certainly an error. However, persons defining procedures -for addition to the Maple library may choose to ignore these ``errors''. -Warnings are possible errors. -They point to constructs that may be correct in some contexts, but -probable errors in other contexts. -The types of errors and warnings produced are: -.in +0.8i -.ti -0.8i - -\fBSEVERE\fP - -.ti -0.4i -Syntax errors -.br -A caret symbol will point to the token -that is being read when the error occurred. - -.ti -0.4i -Duplicated parameter -.br -A name appears more than once in a parameter list for a -procedure. - -.ti -0.4i -Duplicated local -.br -A name is declared more than once in the list of local -variables for a procedure. - -.ti -0.4i -Local variable and parameter conflict -.br -A name is used both as a parameter and a local -variable within a procedure. In further analysis, -the name is treated as a parameter. - -.ti -0.4i -Local variable and system-defined name conflict -.br -The name of a local variable is also used by Maple as a -system-defined name. - -.ti -0.4i -Parameter and system-defined name conflict -.br -The name of a parameter is also used by Maple as a -system-defined name. - -.ti -0.4i -Duplicated loop name -.br -A loop nested within another loop uses as its loop -control variable the same name that the outer loop uses. - -.ti -0.4i -Break or next statement outside of a loop -.br -A break or a next statement occurs outside of any loop. -(Break or next may still be used as names within an -expression outside of a loop.) - -.ti -0.4i -RETURN or ERROR function call outside of a procedure -.br -A function call to RETURN or ERROR occurs outside of -a procedure body. (RETURN or ERROR may still be used -as names if they are not invoked as functions.) - -.ti -0.4i -Unreachable code -.br -There are statements which follow directly after a goto type -of statement. These statements are unreachable and will never -be executed. A goto statement is a next statement, a break -statement, a quit, stop, or done statement, a RETURN() call, -an ERROR() call. -An if statement all branches of which end in a goto statement -is also considered a goto statement. - -.ti -0.8i -\fBSERIOUS\fP - -.ti -0.4i -Overly long name -.br -A name whose length is too long is used. The length of -the name is truncated to the maximum allowed. - -.ti -0.4i -Unused local variable -.br -A local variable is declared for a procedure but never -used within the procedure body. - -.ti -0.4i -Local variable assigned a value but not used otherwise -.br -A local variable is assigned a value within a procedure but -is not otherwise used. - -.ti -0.4i -Local variable never assigned a value but used as a value -.br -A local variable was never assigned a value in a procedure but -within the procedure its value is used in an expression. -Such an expression would contain a pointer to a non-existent -local variable if the expression were returned or assigned to -a global variable. - -.ti -0.4i -System-defined name is overwritten -.br -A name which is treated as a system-defined name by Maple -is assigned a value. -The class of system-defined names includes names which are -special names for the Maple kernel, e.g., true and Digits, -names of built-in functions, e.g., anames and lprint, -names of functions which are automatically readlib-defined, e.g., -cat or help. -Also included are names that are special to routines for evalf, -diff, expand, etc. -Examples of these are Pi and sinh. -These special names generally should not be assigned a value in order -for some library routines to work properly. -Included in the report is an indication of which parts of Maple use -the system-defined names. - -.ti -0.4i -Dubious global name in a procedure -.br -A global name is used within a procedure. A global name is -a name which is not a parameter, a local name, a system-defined name, or -a catenated name. -A quoted name used as an argument to the routines lprint, print, and -ERROR is probably used just for output and is not considered a name. -Global names used as procedure -names in a function call are not considered errors. -Also excluded are names of files in the Maple library, e.g., -`convert/ratpoly`. -All remaining names are considered as global names. -By convention, global names used in a package of routines should -begin with the `_` (underscore) character. -Those that do not are considered dubious and are reported here. - -.ti -0.4i -Library file name overwritten -.br -The name of a library file, e.g., `convert/ratpoly`, is assigned -a value. It is usual for the name of a library file to also be -the name of a library function. Hence, the library function -`convert/ratpoly` is no longer accessible. -(The \fB\-l\fP (library file) option will downgrade these messages -from a serious error to a report.) - -.ti -0.4i -Unused parameter in a procedure -.br -A name specified in the parameter list of a procedure is -never used in the procedure. This is considered a serious -error if `args' is never used in the procedure either. -If args is used in the procedure, then it's possible that -the parameter may be accessed through a construct using `arg' -and this error is downgraded to a warning. - -.ti -0.4i -Wrong argument count in a procedure call -.br -The number of arguments passed in a procedure call doesn't match the -number of formal arguments in the definition of a procedure of the -same name recorded in the library database file. -A library database file (cf. \fBDATABASE FILES\fP) contains information -about the minimum number of arguments expected for a procedure, the -maximum number of arguments, whether `nargs' is used in the procedure -body, and the name of the file in which the procedure is defined. -If the number of actual arguments passed is either less than the -minimum arguments expected or more than the maximum number expected -\fIand\fP `nargs' is not used in the procedure body, then a warning is -generated. -This warning is suppressed if one of the arguments passed is `args'. -It is a common practice for a procedure to take its argument list, -contained in the expression sequence `args', and pass that on to -other procedures. -What appears to \fImint\fP as one argument is in reality a sequence -of arguments. -.ti -0.8i - -\fBWARNING\fP - -.ti -0.4i -Equation used as a statement -.br -This may be intentional. On the other hand, it's common -for many Fortran and C programmers to mistype '=' for -the assignment operator which is ':=' in Maple. - -.ti -0.4i -Unused parameter in a procedure -.br -See similar entry under serious errors. - -.ti -0.4i -Global name used -.br -A global name which may or may not start with '_' is used within -this procedure. - -.ti -0.4i -Catenated name used -.br -A name is formed through the catenation operator. - -.in -0.8i -\fBOTHER REPORTS\fP -.sp -If \fIinfo_level\fP is 4, then a usage report is given for each procedure -as well as global statements within the file. -Each usage report shows how parameters, local variables, global variables, -system-defined names and catenated names are used. -As well can easily be done, the following information about how a -variable is used may be provided: -.nf - - 1. Used as a value - 2. Used as a table or list element - 3. Used as a call-by-value parameter - 4. Used as a call-by-name parameter (a quoted parameter) - 5. Called as a function - 6. Assigned a procedure - 7. Assigned a list - 8. Assigned a set - 9. Assigned a range - 10. Assigned a value as a table or list element - 11. \kxAssigned a function value - \h'|\nxu'(assigned a value to remember as a function value) - -.fi - -In addition, a list of all the error messages generated is given. - -.SH COMMAND OPTIONS -The \fB\-i\fP (info level) and \fB\-q\fP (quiet) options are explained -above. -The \fB\-l\fP (library file) option will suppress the catenated name -warning and the global name warning if only one of each is used -outside of any procedure. -Typically, a Maple library source file will contain one of each for -use in loading the library file. -This option will also suppress error messages about library file names -being overwritten since one of the purposes of a library file is to -assign a procedure to a library file name. -Moreover, warnings about the assignment of values to the system-defined -names Digits and printlevel are suppressed since this often happens -in a library file. - -.SH INITIALIZATION FILE -If there is a file named .mintrc in your home directory, \fImint\fP -will read this file for command line options. -This file may contain several lines containing command line options or -arguments as you would type them on a command line. -Since \fImint\fP reads this file and then scans the actual command line, -arguments on the actual command line can override arguments in the -initialization file. -A good use of the initialization file may be to enter the name of the -Maple library procedure database file when using the \fB\-d\fP option, -obviating the need to type this each time \fImint\fP is used. - -.SH PROCEDURE DATABASE FILES -A procedure database file contains information about the definition of -procedures which is useful in ensuring that these procedures are -used correctly. -Each line in a database file contains the following: - -.nf - -.fi - -where is a legal Maple name without any embedded blanks, - is the minimum number of arguments expected for -, is the maximum number of arguments, -is 1 if `nargs' is used in the procedure body for and -0 otherwise, is the name of the file in which -is defined. -The entries on each line are in free format but must be separated -from one another by at least one space character. -The values for and should be numbers in -the range 0 to 999. -If is 999 for an entry, that denotes that the procedure -has no upper limit on the number of arguments. -There may be multiple entries for a particular procedure. -Later entries supercede earlier ones. - -A procedure database file for the entire Maple library is generated -or updated periodically. -This file is -/usr/maple/data/mint.db and contains close to 1200 entries and -it takes \fImint\fP about 7 seconds to read this file. - -A private database file can be generated through the use of -the \fB\-a\fP command line option for \fImint\fP. -A file name must follow \fB\-a\fP on the command line and is taken -to be a procedure database file. -As \fImint\fP scans procedure definitions in the input file, it -will append procedure database entries into the database file. -For information gathered automatically by \fImint\fP about a -procedure, and will both be the number of -formal arguments used in the procedure definition. -You can edit the database file to adjust these values. -Remember that use of `nargs' in a procedure body sets the -field to 1 in the database entry and that this will turn off -argument count checking for that procedure. - -.SH EXAMPLES - -.ft CW -.nf -mint -d /usr/maple/data/mint.db -a my.db -i 4 rat_poisson -mint -d /usr/maple/data/mint.db -d my.db rat_trap -mint -i 1 -q warfarin -.fi -.ft P - -The first example gives a full report (info_level = 4) for the -Maple source file rat_poisson. -It reads the Maple library database file and uses this to check that -procedures defined in the Maple library are called with the correct -number of arguments. -Information about procedures defined in rat_poisson is \fIappended\fP -to my.db. - -In the second example, both the Maple library database file and -the private database file my.db are used to check number of arguments -used in procedure calls in the file rat_trap. -Entries in my.db supercede entries in the library database file -if the name of a library procedure has been redefined in my.db. - -In the third example, no argument count checking is done. -Since the info_level is set to 1, only severe errors are -reported. -Since the \fB\-q\fP (quiet) option is used, the printing -of the \fImint\fP leaf logo is suppressed in the output. - -.SH FILES USED -\&.mintrc \- Mint initialization file -/usr/maple/data/mint.db \- \kxMaple library procedure database -\h'|\nxu'(The location of the database may be different for each site) -.SH SEE ALSO -maple - -.SH STATUS -\fIMint\fP will return an exit status of 1, 2, or 3 if the -worst error it detects is a warning, serious error, or severe -error, respectively. An exit status of 0 is returned if no -errors or warnings are found. - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mk.1 b/static/v10/man1/mk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9d0018c5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,617 +0,0 @@ -.TH MK 1 -.CT 1 prog_c writing_troff prog_other -.SH NAME -mk, mkconv, membername \- maintain (make) related files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mk -[ -.B -f -.I mkfile -] ... -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I name ... -] -.PP -.B mkconv -.I makefile -.PP -.B membername -.I aggregate ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mk -is most often used to keep object files current with the -source they depend on. -.PP -.I Mk -reads -.I mkfile -and builds and executes dependency dags (directed acyclic graphs) for the target -.IR names . -If no target is specified, the targets of the first non-metarule in -the first -.I mkfile -are used. -If no -.B -f -option is present, -.L mkfile -is tried. -Other options are: -.TP \w'\fL-d[egp]\ 'u -.B -a -Assume all targets to be out of date. -Thus, everything gets made. -.PD 0 -.TP -.BR -d [ egp ] -Produce debugging output -.RB ( p -is for parsing, -.B g -for graph building, -.B e -for execution). -.TP -.B -e -Explain why each target is made. -.TP -.B -i -Force any missing intermediate targets to be made. -.TP -.B -k -Do as much work as possible in the face of errors. -.TP -.B -m -Generate an equivalent makefile on standard output. -Recipes are not handled well. -.TP -.B -n -Print, but do not execute, the commands -needed to update the targets. -.TP -.B -t -Touch (update the modified date of) non-virtual targets, without -executing any recipes. -.TP -.B -u -Produce a table of clock seconds spent with -.I n -recipes running. -.TP -.BI -w name1,name2,... -Set the initial date stamp for each name -to the current time. -The names may also be separated by blanks or newlines. -(Use with -.B -n -to find what else would need to change if the named files -were modified.) -.PD -.PP -.I Mkconv -attempts to convert a -.IR make (1) -.I makefile -to a -.IR mkfile -on standard output. -The conversion is not likely to be faithful. -.PP -The shell script -.I membername -extracts member names -(see `Aggregates' below) -from its arguments. -.SS Definitions -A -.I mkfile -consists of -.I assignments -(described under `Environment') and -.IR rules . -A rule contains -.I targets -and a -.I tail. -A target is a literal string, or -.I label, -and is normally a file name. -The tail contains zero or more -.I prerequisites -and an optional -.I recipe, -which is a shell script. -.PP -A -.I metarule -has a target of the form -.IB A % B -where -.I A -and -.I B -are (possibly empty) strings. -A metarule applies to any label that matches the target with -.B % -replaced by an arbitrary string, called the -.IR stem . -In interpreting a metarule, -the stem is substituted for all occurrences of -.B % -in the prerequisite names. -A metarule may be marked as using regular expressions (described under `Syntax'). -In this case, -.B % -has no special meaning; -the target is interpreted according to -.IR regexp (3). -The dependencies may refer to subexpressions in the normal way, using -.BI \e n. -The -.I dependency dag -for a target consists of -.I nodes -connected by directed -.IR arcs . -A node consists of a label -and a set of arcs leading to prerequisite nodes. -The root -node is labeled with an original target -.I name. -.SS Building the Dependency Dag -.PP -Read the -.I mkfiles -in command line order and distribute rule tails over targets -to get single-target rules. -.PP -For a node -.IR n , -for every rule -.I r -that matches -.IR n 's -label generate an arc to a prerequisite node. -The node -.I n -is then marked as done. -The process is then repeated for each of the prerequisite nodes. -The process stops if -.I n -is already done, -or if -.I n -has no prerequisites, -or if any rule would be used more than -.B $NREP -times on the current path in the dag. -A probable node is one where the label exists as a file -or is a target of a non-metarule. -.PP -After the graph is built, it is checked for cycles, -and subdags containing no probable nodes are deleted. -Also, for any node with arcs generated by a non-metarule with a recipe, -arcs generated by a metarule with a recipe -are deleted. -Disconnected subdags are deleted. -.SS Execution -Labels have an associated date stamp. -A label is -.I ready -if it has no prerequisites, or -all its prerequisites are made. -A ready label is -.I trivially uptodate -if it is not a target and has a nonzero date stamp, or -it has a nonzero date stamp, -and all its prerequisites are made and predate the ready label. -A ready label is marked -.I made -(and given a date stamp) -if it is trivially uptodate or by executing the recipe -associated with the arcs leading from the node associated with the ready label. -The -.B P -attribute can be used to generalize -.IR mk 's -notion of determining if prerequisites predate a label. -Rather than comparing date stamps, it executes a specified program -and uses the exit status. -.PP -Date stamps are calculated differently for virtual labels, -for labels that correspond to extant files, -and for other labels. -If a label is -.I virtual -(target of a rule with the -.B V -attribute), -its date stamp is initially zero and upon being made is set to -the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites. -Otherwise, if a label is nonexistent -(does not exist as a file), -its date stamp is set to the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites, -or zero if it has no prerequisites. -Otherwise, the label is the name of a file and -the label's date stamp is always that file's modification date. -.PP -Nonexistent labels which have prerequisites -and are prerequisite to other label(s) are treated specially unless the -.B -i -flag is used. -Such a label -.I l -is given the date stamp of its most recent prerequisite -and if this causes all the labels which have -.I l -as a prerequisite to be trivially uptodate, -.I l -is considered to be trivially uptodate. -Otherwise, -.I l -is made in the normal fashion. -.PP -Two recipes are called identical if they arose by distribution -from a single rule as described above. -Identical recipes may be executed only when all -their prerequisite nodes are ready, and then just one instance of -the identical recipes is executed to make all their target nodes. -.PP -Files may be made in any order that respects -the preceding restrictions. -.PP -A recipe is executed by supplying the recipe as standard input to -the command -.B - /bin/sh -e -.br -The environment is augmented by the following variables: -.TP 14 -.B $alltarget -all the targets of this rule. -.TP -.B $newprereq -the prerequisites that caused this rule to execute. -.TP -.B $nproc -the process slot for this recipe. -It satisfies -.RB 0\(<= $nproc < $NPROC , -where -.B $NPROC -is the maximum number of recipes that may be executing -simultaneously. -.TP -.B $pid -the process id for the -.I mk -forking the recipe. -.TP -.B $prereq -all the prerequisites for this rule. -.TP -.B $stem -if this is a metarule, -.B $stem -is the string that matched -.BR % . -Otherwise, it is empty. -For regular expression metarules, the variables -.LR stem0 ", ...," -.L stem9 -are set to the corresponding subexpressions. -.TP -.B $target -the targets for this rule that need to be remade. -.PP -Unless the rule has the -.B Q -attribute, -the recipe is printed prior to execution -with recognizable shell variables expanded. -To see the commands print as they execute, -include a -.L set -x -in your rule. -Commands returning nonzero status (see -.IR intro (1)) -cause -.I mk -to terminate. -.SS Aggregates -Names of the form -.IR a ( b ) -refer to member -.I b -of the aggregate -.IR a . -Currently, the only aggregates supported are -.IR ar (1) -archives. -.SS Environment -Rules may make use of shell (or environment) variables. -A legal shell variable reference of the form -.B $OBJ -or -.B ${name} -is expanded as in -.IR sh (1). -A reference of the form -.BI ${name: A % B = C\fB%\fID\fB}\fR, -where -.I A, B, C, D -are (possibly empty) strings, -has the value formed by expanding -.B $name -and substituting -.I C -for -.I A -and -.I D -for -.I B -in each word in -.B $name -that matches pattern -.IB A % B . -.PP -Variables can be set by -assignments of the form -.I - var\fB=\fR[\fIattr\fB=\fR]\fItokens\fR -.br -where -.I tokens -and the optional attributes -are defined under `Syntax' below. -The environment is exported to recipe executions. -Variable values are taken from (in increasing order of precedence) -the default values below, the environment, the mkfiles, -and any command line assignment. -A variable assignment argument overrides the first (but not any subsequent) -assignment to that variable. -.br -.ne 1i -.EX -.ta \n(.lu/3u +\n(.lu/3u -.nf -AS=as FFLAGS= NPROC=1 -CC=cc LEX=lex NREP=1 -CFLAGS= LFLAGS= YACC=yacc -FC=f77 LDFLAGS= YFLAGS= -BUILTINS=' -.ta 8n -%.o: %.c - $CC $CFLAGS -c $stem.c -%.o: %.s - $AS -o $stem.o $stem.s -%.o: %.f - $FC $FFLAGS -c $stem.f -%.o: %.y - $YACC $YFLAGS $stem.y && - $CC $CFLAGS -c y.tab.c && mv y.tab.o $stem.o; rm y.tab.c -%.o: %.l - $LEX $LFLAGS -t $stem.l > $stem.c && - $CC $CFLAGS -c $stem.c && rm $stem.c' -ENVIRON= -.EE -.PP -The builtin rules are obtained from the variable -.B BUILTINS -after all input has been processed. -The -.B ENVIRON -variable is split into parts at control-A characters, -the control-A characters are deleted, and the parts are -placed in the environment. -The variable -.B MKFLAGS -contains all the option arguments (arguments starting with -.L - -or containing -.LR = ) -and -.B MKARGS -contains all the targets in the call to -.IR mk . -.SS Syntax -Leading white space (blank or tab) is ignored. -Input after an unquoted -.B # -(a comment) is ignored as are blank lines. -Lines can be spread over several physical lines by -placing a -.B \e -before newlines to be elided. -Non-recipe lines are processed by substituting for -.BI ` cmd ` -and then substituting for variable references. -Finally, the filename metacharacters -.B []*? -are expanded. -.tr #" -Quoting by -.BR \&'' , -.BR ## , -and -.B \e -is supported. -The semantics for substitution and quoting are given in -.IR sh (1). -.PP -The contents of files may be included by lines beginning with -.B < -followed by a filename. -.PP -.tr ## -Assignments and rule header lines are distinguished by -the first unquoted occurrence of -.B : -(rule header) -or -.B = -(assignment). -.PP -A rule definition consists of a header line followed by a recipe. -The recipe consists of all lines following the header line -that start with white space. -The recipe may be empty. -The first character on every line of the recipe is elided. -The header line consists of at least one target followed by the rule separator -and a possibly empty list of prerequisites. -The rule separator is either a single -.LR : -or is a -.L : -immediately followed by attributes and another -.LR : . -If any prerequisite is more recent than any of the targets, -the recipe is executed. -This meaning is modified by the following attributes -.TP -.B < -The standard output of the recipe is read by -.I mk -as an additional mkfile. -Assignments take effect immediately. -Rule definitions are used when a new dependency dag is constructed. -.PD 0 -.TP -.B D -If the recipe exits with an error status, the target is deleted. -.TP -.B N -If there is no recipe, the target has its time updated. -.TP -.B P -The characters after the -.B P -until the terminating -.B : -are taken as a program name. -It will be invoked as -.B "sh -c prog 'arg1' 'arg2'" -and should return 0 exit status -if and only if arg1 is not out of date with respect to arg2. -Date stamps are still propagated in the normal way. -.TP -.B Q -The recipe is not printed prior to execution. -.TP -.B R -The rule is a metarule using regular expressions. -.TP -.B U -The targets are considered to have been updated -even if the recipe did not do so. -.TP -.B V -The targets of this rule are marked as virtual. -They are distinct from files of the same name. -.PD -.PP -Similarly, assignments may have attributes terminated by -.BR = . -The only assignment attribute is -.TP 3 -.B U -Do not export this variable to recipe executions. -.SH EXAMPLES -A simple mkfile to compile a program. -.IP -.EX -prog: a.o b.o c.o - $CC $CFLAGS -o $target $prereq -.EE -.PP -Override flag settings in the mkfile. -.IP -.EX -$ mk target CFLAGS='-O -s' -.EE -.PP -To get the prerequisites for an aggregate. -.IP -.EX -$ membername 'libc.a(read.o)' 'libc.a(write.o)' -read.o write.o -.EE -.PP -Maintain a library. -.IP -.EX -libc.a(%.o):N: %.o -libc.a: libc.a(abs.o) libc.a(access.o) libc.a(alarm.o) ... - names=`membername $newprereq` - ar r libc.a $names && rm $names -.EE -.PP -Backquotes used to derive a list from a master list. -.IP -.EX -NAMES=alloc arc bquote builtins expand main match mk var word -OBJ=`echo $NAMES|sed -e 's/[^ ][^ ]*/&.o/g'` -.EE -.PP -Regular expression metarules. -The single quotes are needed to protect the -.BR \e s. -.IP -.EX -\&'([^/]*)/(.*)\e.o':R: '\e1/\e2.c' - cd $stem1; $CC $CFLAGS -c $stem2.c -.EE -.PP -A correct way to deal with -.IR yacc (1) -grammars. -The file -.B lex.c -includes the file -.B x.tab.h -rather than -.B y.tab.h -in order to reflect changes in content, not just modification time. -.IP -.EX -YFLAGS=-d -lex.o: x.tab.h -x.tab.h: y.tab.h - cmp -s x.tab.h y.tab.h || cp y.tab.h x.tab.h -y.tab.c y.tab.h: gram.y - $YACC $YFLAGS gram.y -.EE -.PP -The above example could also use the -.B P -attribute for the -.B x.tab.h -rule: -.IP -.EX -x.tab.h:Pcmp -s: y.tab.h - cp y.tab.h x.tab.h -.EE -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR make (1), -.IR chdate (1), -.IR sh (1), -.IR regexp (3) -.br -A. Hume, -.RI ` Mk : -a Successor to -.IR Make ', -this manual, Volume 2 -.SH BUGS -Identical recipes for regular expression metarules only have one target. -.br -Seemingly appropriate input like -.B CFLAGS=-DHZ=60 -is parsed as an erroneous attribute; correct it by inserting -a space after the first -.LR = . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7c159819..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'MKDIR (I)'3/15/72'MKDIR (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME mkdir -- make a directory -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS mkdir_____ dirname ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION mkdir_____ creates specified directories -in mode 17. -.sp -The standard entries "." and ".." are made automatically. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO rmdir(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "dirname ?" -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4273ce25..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKDIST 1 -.SH NAME -mkdist, insdist \(em make and install distribution packages -.SH SYNOPSIS -.ft CW -/usr/lib/dist/mkdist [-v] [-D \fIold\fP=\fInew\fP] [-[Xx] \fIcommand\fP] \fIfiles ...\fP -.sp -/usr/lib/dist/insdist [-v] [-D \fIold\fP=\fInew\fP] [-R \fIrootdir\fP] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mkdist -packages the named files into a distribution package on the standard output. -A distribution package is an ordinary -.IR tar (1) -file, containing the files of the package as well as installation information -for use by -.IR insdist . -.PP -The -.B -D -option to both -.I mkdist -and -.I insdist -allows prefix substitution to be performed on pathnames going into the -distribution. (\c -.I Mkdist -arranges for all file names in the distribution to be absolute path names, -by prepending the current directory to any relative pathname arguments.) -At most one -.B -D -option will be applied to any name in the distribution, so there are no -substitution loops. If multiple -.B -D -options might match a given file name, the leftmost one from the command -line is chosen. -The -.B -R -option (\c -.I insdist -only) additionally specifies that all files are to be unpacked relative -to the given root directory. -.PP -The -.B -X -and -.B -x -options to -.I mkdist -allow a command to be given that will be executed -when the distribution is unpacked by -.I insdist . -These options are identical, except that pathname prefix substitution from -.B -D -options will be applied to a command specified in a -.B -X -option. -.PP -The -.B -v -option turns on verbose output describing what's going on. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR tar (1) -.SH BUGS -The -.B -v -option should show more. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ccc3a918..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,202 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH MKSTAND 1 -.SH NAME -mkstand \- compile style standards for prose program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mkstand -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -][ -.B \-mm -| -.B \-ms -][ -.B \-li -| -.B \+li -][ -.B \-o -outfile ] file1 file2 ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mkstand -enables users to compile their own set of -.IR style (1) -standards for use by -.IR prose (1). -.I Prose -describes stylistic features of a text -and compares them to specified standards. -If a user or group, for example a writing group, -has many documents of a certain type -that they consider good, -those documents can be used as the basis for their own standards. -.I Mkstand -creates the standards, -which reflect the stylistic features -of the input documents. -Then the user can use -.I prose -to evaluate documents according to those standards. -.PP -.I Mkstand -runs -.I style -on a set of documents and computes the means -and standard deviations of certain -.I style -statistics. -Then it puts these into -.I outfile -.RI ( stand.out -is the default) in a format that -.I prose -can read. -Then if -.I prose -is run with the command: -.PP -.RS 5 -.BI "prose \-x " "outfile textfile" -.RE -.PP -it compares -.I textfile -with the standards in -.IR outfile . -The command: -.PP -.RS 5 -.BI "wwbstand \-x " "outfile" -.RE -.PP -will display the standards in a comprehensible form. -.PP -.I Mkstand -tries to produce valid standards by enforcing these requirements: -.RS 5 -.TP -1. -Input files must be at least 90 sentences or 1900 words long. -.TP -2. -If an input file has -.I style -scores that are more than 2 standard deviations from the mean, -scores for that file are excluded from the computation of the standards. -.RE -.PP -Although -.I mkstand -will compile standards for any number of documents (up to 75), -standards will be most reliable if at least 20 documents are used. -.PP -Because -.I mkstand -runs -.IR deroff (1) -on input files before computing scores, -formatting header files should be included as part of the input. -.PP -Four options affect -.IR deroff : -.RS 5 -.TP -.B \-mm -eliminate -.IR mm (1) -macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences -(e.g. headings), -from the analysis. -This is the default. -.TP -.B \-ms -eliminate -.IR ms (1) -macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences, -from the analysis. -The -.B \-ms -flag overrides the default, -.BR \-mm . -.TP -.B \-li -eliminate list items, -as defined by -.I mm -macros, from the analysis. -This is the default. -.TP -.B \+li -Include list items in the input text, -in the analysis. -This flag should be used if the texts contain lists of sentences, -but not if the texts contain many lists of non-sentences. -.RE -.PP -Other options are: -.RS 5 -.TP 11 -.BI \-o " outfile" -put standards in -.I outfile -instead of the default -.IR stand.out . -.RE -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.PP -.I Mkstand -saves the -.I style -scores it used in computing the standards in a file named -.IR styl.scores . -Users should examine the scores in this file -for any scores that seem unusual or invalid. -If any are found, -.I mkstand -should be rerun without the unusual document. -.SH FILES -.TP 21 -/tmp/$$stat.out -temporary file containing -.I style -tables of input files -.TP -stand.out -default output file containing standards -.TP -styl.scores -output file containing -.I style -scores used in compiling standards -.SH SEE ALSO -prose(1), -style(1), -deroff(1), -wwbstand(1), -wwb(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2906eb97..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKSTR 1 2/24/79 -.UC -.SH NAME -mkstr \- create an error message file by massaging C source -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mkstr -[ -.B \- -] -messagefile prefix file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mkstr -is used to create files of error messages. -Its use can make programs with large numbers of error diagnostics much -smaller, and reduce system overhead in running the program as the -error messages do not have to be constantly swapped in and out. -.PP -.I Mkstr -will process each of the specified -.I files, -placing a massaged version of the input file in a file whose name -consists of the specified -.I prefix -and the original name. -A typical usage of -.I mkstr -would be -.DT -.PP - mkstr pistrings xx *.c -.PP -This command would cause all the error messages from the C source -files in the current directory to be placed in the file -.I pistrings -and processed copies of the source for these files to be placed in -files whose names are prefixed with -.I xx. -.PP -To process the error messages in the source to the message file -.I mkstr -keys on the string -\%`error("' -in the input stream. -Each time it occurs, the C string starting at the `"' is placed -in the message file followed by a null character and a new-line character; -the null character terminates the message so it can be easily used -when retrieved, the new-line character makes it possible to sensibly -.I cat -the error message file to see its contents. -The massaged copy of the input file then contains a -.I lseek -pointer into the file which can be used to retrieve the message, i.e.: -.IP -.DT -.nf -\fBchar\fR efilname[] = "/usr/lib/pi_strings"; -\fBint\fR efil = -1; -.sp -error(a1, a2, a3, a4) -{ - \fBchar\fR buf[256]; - - \fBif\fR (efil < 0) { - efil = open(efilname, 0); - \fBif\fR (efil < 0) { -oops: - perror(efilname); - exit(1); - } - } - \fBif\fR (lseek(efil, (long) a1, 0) |\|| read(efil, buf, 256) <= 0) - \fBgoto\fR oops; - printf(buf, a2, a3, a4); -} -.fi -.PP -The optional -.B \- -causes the error messages to be placed at the end of the specified -message file for recompiling part of a large -.IR mkstr \|ed -program. -.SH SEE\ ALSO -lseek(2), xstr(1) -.SH AUTHORS -William Joy and Charles Haley -...SH BUGS -...All the arguments except the name of the file to be processed could be made unnecessary. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6ad049ee..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKUNIQUE 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -mkunique \- create files with unique names -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mkunique -[ -.I template ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mkunique -uses the library function -.IR mkunique (3) -to create -files with unique names, -one per specified template. -If no template is supplied, -.I mkunique -creates a single file with template -.LR qXXXXXX . -The resulting file names are echoed on the standard output, -one per line. -.LP -This command may be used to create names for scratch files in -publically shareable multilevel secure `blind' directories, -without violating security policy. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR mkunique (3), -.IR mktemp (3), -.IR bl (4) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mm.1 b/static/v10/man1/mm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7931c0ed..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ -.TH MM 1 -.SH NAME -mm \- print out documents formatted with the \s-1MM\s+1 macros -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mm -[ options ] [ files ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mm\^ -can be used to type out documents using -.IR nroff (1) -and the -.SM MM -text-formatting macro package. -It has options to specify -preprocessing by -.IR tbl (1) -and/or -.IR neqn (1) -and postprocessing by various terminal-oriented output filters. -The proper pipelines and the -required arguments and flags for -.IR nroff (1) -and -.SM MM -are generated, depending on the options selected. -.PP -.I Options\^ -for -.I mm\^ -are given below. -Any other arguments or flags (e.g., -.BR \-rC3 ) -are passed -to -.IR nroff (1) -or to -.SM MM\*S, -as appropriate. -Such options can occur in any order, -but they must appear before the -.I files\^ -arguments. -If no arguments are given, -.I mm\^ -prints a list of its options. -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP 9 -.BI \-T term -Specifies the type of output terminal; -for a list of recognized values for -.IR term , -type -.BR "help term2" . -If this option is -.I not\^ -used, -.I mm\^ -will use the value of the shell variable -.SM -.B $TERM -from the environment (see -.IR profile (5) -and -.IR environ (7)) -as the value of -.IR term , -if -.SM -.B $TERM -is set; -otherwise, -.I mm\^ -will use -.B 450 -as the value of -.IR term . -If several terminal types are specified, -the last one takes precedence. -.TP -.B \-12 -Indicates that the document is to be produced in 12-pitch. -May be used when -.SM -.B $TERM -is set to one of -.BR 300 , -.BR 300s , -.BR 450 , -and -.BR 1620 . -(The pitch switch on the -.SM DASI -300 and 300s terminals must be manually -set to -.B 12 -if this option is used.) -.TP -.B \-c -Causes -.I mm\^ -to invoke -.IR col (1); -note that -.IR col (1) -is invoked automatically by -.I mm\^ -unless -.I term\^ -is one of -.BR 300 , -.BR 300s , -.BR 450 , -.BR 37 , -.BR 4000A , -.BR 382 , -.BR 4014 , -.BR tek , -.BR 1620 , -and -.BR X . -.TP -.B \-e -Causes -.I mm\^ -to invoke -.IR neqn (1); -also causes -.I neqn -to read the -.B /usr/pub/eqnchar -file (see -.IR eqnchar (7)). -.TP -.B \-t -Causes -.I mm\^ -to invoke -.IR tbl (1). -.TP -.B \-E -Invokes the -.B \-e -option of -.IR nroff (1). -.TP -.B \-y -Causes -.I mm\^ -to use the non-compacted version of the macros (see -.IR mm (7)). -.PD -.PP -As an example (assuming that the shell variable -.SM -.B $TERM -is set in the environment to -.BR 450 ), -the two command lines below are equivalent: -.RS -.PP -mm \|\-t \|\-rC3 \|\-12 \|ghh\(** -.br -tbl \|ghh\(** \|\(bv \|nroff \|\-cm \|\-T450\-12 \|\-h \|\-rC3 -.RE -.PP -.I Mm\^ -reads the standard input -when -.B \- -is specified -instead of any file names. -(Mentioning other files together with -.B \- -leads to disaster.)\ -This option allows -.I mm\^ -to be used as a filter, e.g.: -.RS -.PP -cat \|dws \|\(bv \|mm \|\- -.RE -.SH HINTS -.PD 0 -.TP -1. -.I Mm\^ -invokes -.IR nroff (1) -with the -.B \-h -flag. -With this flag, -.IR nroff (1) -assumes that the terminal has tabs set -every 8 character positions. -.TP -2. -Use the -.BI \-o list\^ -option of -.IR nroff (1) -to specify ranges of pages to be output. -Note, however, that -.IR mm , -if invoked with -one or more of the -.BR \-e , -.BR \-t , -and -.B \- -options, -.I together\^ -with the -.BI \-o list\^ -option of -.IR nroff (1) -may cause a harmless ``broken pipe'' diagnostic -if the last page of the document is not specified in -.IR list . -.TP -3. -If you use the -.B \-s -option of -.IR nroff (1) -(to stop between pages of output), -use line-feed (rather than return or new-line) -to restart the output. -The -.B \-s -option of -.IR nroff (1) -does not work with the -.B \-c -option of -.IR mm , -or if -.I mm\^ -automatically invokes -.IR col (1) -(see -.B \-c -option above). -.TP -4. -If you lie to -.I mm\^ -about the kind of terminal its output will be printed on, -you'll get (often subtle) garbage; -however, if you are redirecting output into a file, use the -.B \-T37 -option, and then use the appropriate terminal filter when you actually print that file. -.PD -.br -.ne 4 -.SH SEE ALSO -.tr ~ -.PD 0 -col(1), env(1), eqn(1), greek(1), mmt(1), nroff(1), tbl(1), -profile(5), mm(7), term(7). -.PP -.I "\s-1MM\s+1\-Memorandum Macros\^" -by D.~W. Smith and J.~R. Mashey. -.PP -.I "Typing Documents with \s-1MM\s+1\|" -by D.~W. Smith and E.~M. Piskorik. -.PD -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.tr ~~ -``mm: \|no input file''\| if -none of the arguments is a readable file and -.I mm\^ -is not used as a filter. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mmt.1 b/static/v10/man1/mmt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a5663650..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mmt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ -.TH MMT 1 -.SH NAME -mmt, mvt \- typeset documents, view graphs, and slides -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mmt -[ options ] [ files ] -.PP -.B mvt -[ options ] [ files ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -These two commands are very similar to -.IR mm (1), -except that they both typeset their input via -.IR troff (1), -as opposed to formatting it via -.IR nroff (1); -.I mmt\^ -uses -the -.SM MM -macro package, -while -.I mvt\^ -uses the -Macro Package for -View Graphs and Slides. -These two commands have options to specify -preprocessing by -.IR tbl (1) -and/or -.IR eqn (1). -The proper pipelines and the -required arguments and flags for -.IR troff (1) -and -for -the macro packages -are generated, depending on the options selected. -.PP -.I Options\^ -are given below. -Any other arguments or flags (e.g., -.BR \-rC3 ) -are passed -to -.IR troff (1) -or to -the macro package, -as appropriate. -Such options can occur in any order, -but they must appear before the -.I files\^ -arguments. -If no arguments are given, -these commands -print a list of their options. -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP 10 -.B \-e -Causes -these commands -to invoke -.IR eqn (1); -also causes -.I eqn -to read the -.B /usr/pub/eqnchar -file (see -.IR eqnchar (7)). -.TP -.B \-t -Causes -these commands -to invoke -.IR tbl (1). -.TP -.B \-Tst -Directs the output to the -.SM MH STARE -facility. -.TP -.B \-Tvp -Directs the output to a Versatec printer via the -.IR vpr (1) -spooler; -this option is not available at all -.SM UNIX -sites. -.TP -.B \-T4014 -Directs the output to a Tektronix 4014 terminal via the -.IR tc (1) -filter. -.TP -.B \-Ttek -Same as -.BR \-T4014 . -.TP -.B \-a -Invokes the -.B \-a -option of -.IR troff (1). -.TP -.B \-y -Causes -.I mmt\^ -to use the non-compacted version of the macros (see -.IR mm (7)). -No effect for -.IR mvt . -.PD -.PP -These commands read the standard input -when -.B \- -is specified -instead of any file names. -.PP -.I Mvt\^ -is just a link to -.I mmt\^. -.SH HINT -Use the -.BI \-o list\^ -option of -.IR troff (1) -to specify ranges of pages to be output. -Note, however, that these commands, if invoked with -one or more of the -.BR \-e , -.BR \-t , -and -.B \- -options, -.I together\^ -with the -.BI \-o list\^ -option of -.IR troff (1) -may cause a harmless ``broken pipe'' diagnostic -if the last page of the document is not specified in -.IR list . -.SH SEE ALSO -.tr ~ -.PD 0 -env(1), eqn(1), mm(1), tbl(1), tc(1), troff(1), profile(5), -environ(7), mm(7), mv(7). -.PP -.I "\s-1MM\s+1\-Memorandum Macros\^" -by D.~W. Smith and J.~R. Mashey. -.PP -.I "Typing Documents with \s-1MM\s+1\^" -by D.~W. Smith and E.~M. Piskorik. -.PP -.I "A Macro Package for View Graphs and Slides\^" -by T.~A. Dolotta and D.~W. Smith (in preparation). -.PD -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.tr ~~ -``m[mv]t: \|no input file''\| if -none of the arguments is a readable file and -the command -is not used as a filter. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/monk.1 b/static/v10/man1/monk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bc7adb64..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/monk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,341 +0,0 @@ -.TH MONK 1 -. \".TH MONK 1 EXPTOOLS -.CT 1 writing_other -.SH NAME -monk, monksample, monkspell, monkmerge \- typeset documents and letters -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B monk -[ -.I options -|\ -.I files -] -.PP -.B monksample -[ -.I sample -] -.PP -.B monkspell -[ -.I options -] -... -[ -.I files -] -... -.PP -.B monkmerge -[ -.I files -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Monk -formats the text in the named -.I files -for -phototypesetting, using other -.IR troff (1) -preprocessors as necessary. -.I Options\^ -are given below. -Any other arguments or flags (e.g., -.BR -o1-2 ) -are passed -to -.I troff. -Options can occur in any order and can be intermixed with files. -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP -.BI -A commands -Invoke the -.I commands -after all preprocessors and before -.IR troff . -.TP -.BI -B commands -Invoke the -.I commands -after -.I monk -and before any other preprocessor. -.PD -.TP -.B -E -Invoke the -.B -e -option of -.IR troff . -.TP -.BR -N -Use the uncompressed monk databases. -This facilitates debugging monk database entries. -.TP -.BI -R file -Use -.I file -as the index file for -.IR prefer (1). -.TP -.BI -S dest -Send output to device -.IR dest . -Supported forms are: -.RS -.TF -Sapsend -.TP -.BR -Sapsend -Linotronic L200P; see -.IR apsend (1). -.TP -.BR -Sd202 -Mergenthaler Linotron 202; see -.IR d202 (A). -. \".TP -. \".BR -Si300 -. \"\s-1EXPTOOLS\s+1 spooler; see -. \".IR i300 (1). -.TP -.BR -Slp -Postscript line printer; see -.IR lp (1) -(default). -. \".TP -. \".BR -Slpr -. \"Allentown spooler; see -. \".IR lpr (1) -.TP -.BR -Sproof -Teletype 5620 or 630 terminal; see -.IR proof (9.1). -. \".TP -. \".BR -Sprt -. \"Unison spooler; see -. \".IR prt (1). -.TP -.BR -Sthink -HP ThinkJet; see -.IR thinkblt (9.1). -.TP -.BR -S- -Standard output. -.PD -.RE -.TP 0 -.BI -T device -Prepare output for device specified as in -.B -T -option of -.IR troff (1). -.TP -.B -x -Shows the preprocessors that are being invoked. -.PD -.PP -The following options are not normally needed because monk automatically -determines which preprocessors are required. -However, if the commands in -.B -A -or -.B -B -options require a preprocessor, their use can be forced by -the following options. -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -c -.I col -postprocessor; see -.IR column (1). -(Automatically invoked for many printing terminals.) -.TP -.B -cn -.IR cite (A) -. \".TP -. \".B -cw -. \".IR cw (1) -.TP -.B -e -.IR eqn (1) -.TP -.B -g -.IR grap (1) -.TP -.B -i -.IR ideal (1) -.TP -.B -ipa -.IR ipa (A) -.TP -.B -p -.IR pic (1) -.TP -.B -r -.IR prefer (1) -.TP -.B -t -.IR tbl (1) -.TP -.B -tp -.IR tped ; -see -.IR ped (9.1) -.PD -.PP -.I Monksample -produces on the standard output a skeleton document that you can -redirect into a file and edit. -If no argument is given, -.I monksample -prints a list of the available -.I samples. -They are: -.TF centerpb -.TP -.B acm -Association for Computing Machinery galley sheets. -.TP -.B centerpb -Center Phone Book. -.TP -.B cspress -Computer Science Press galley sheets. -.TP -.B form1 -AT&T Bell Laboratories merit review form 1. -.TP -.B im -AT&T Bell Laboratories internal memorandum. -.TP -.B kluwer -Kluwer Academic Publishers book format. -.TP -.B letter -Letters with optional AT&T letterhead. -.TP -.B memo -Internal AT&T correspondence. -.TP -.B model -IEEE/ACM model sheets. -.TP -.B research -AT&T Bell Laboratories bi-annual research report. -.TP -.B rp -AT&T Bell Laboratories release paper. -.TP -.B song -Song sheets for singing at nursing homes. -.TP -.B tc -AT&T Bell Laboratories technical correspondence. -.TP -.B tm -AT&T Bell Laboratories technical memorandum. -.PD -.PP -.I Monkspell -looks up words from the named -.I files -(standard input default) -in a public spelling list and in a private list. -Possible misspellings\(emwords -that occur in neither and are not plausibly derivable -from the former\(emare placed on the standard output. -It ignores constructs of -.IR monk (1), -.IR troff (1) -and its standard preprocessors. -It runs -.IR demonk (1) -with all specified options and passes its output to -.IR spell (1). -The following options, in addition to all options for -.IR deroff (1), -are available: -.TP -.BI -d dir -Use non-standard -.I monk -database directory -.I -dir. -.TP -.B -i -Ignore -.I monk -.L |\^insert -and -.L |\^source -commands as well as -.I troff -.L .so -and -.L .nx -requests. -.PP -.I Monkmerge -reads each file and copies it to standard output, -replacing -.I monk -.B insert -commands with the file contents. -It ignores -.I monk -.B source -commands, which include a file without processing the -.I monk -commands within. -If no input file is given, -.I monkmerge -reads from standard input. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -monk paper -Format the file using the default typesetter fonts and output device. -.TP -.L -monk -Sproof paper -Format a file and proof it on a 5620 terminal. -.SH FILES -.TF $MHOME/sample -.TP -.F $MHOME/cite -forward and backward reference preprocessor -.TP -.F $MHOME/db -monk databases -.TP -.F $MHOME/monk -monk compiler -.TP -.F $MHOME/tmac.p -macros for -.IR pic (1) -preprocessor -.TP -.F $MHOME/sample -directory for existing samples -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR prefer (1), -.IR troff (1), -.IR deroff (1), -.IR tex (1), -.IR lp (1), -.IR apsend (1), -.IR d202 (A), -.IR thinkblt (9.1), -.IR proof (9.1) -.br -Murrel, S. L., -Kowalski, T. J., -`Typing Documents on the UNIX System: Using Monk 0.6', -this manual, Volume 2 -. \".SH AUTHOR -. \"Sharon Peeters and T. J. Kowalski -. \".SH PROVIDER -. \"Alan Hastings diff --git a/static/v10/man1/movie.1 b/static/v10/man1/movie.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0cc8e53a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/movie.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ -.TH MOVIE 1 -.CT 1 files prog_other -.SH NAME -movie, stills \- algorithm animation -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B movie -[ -.B -t -.I termprog -] -[ -.BI -m memory -] -[ -.I file -] -.br -.B stills -[ -.I files ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -.I Movie -converts a script in a movie language -into an internal representation, then displays it in a window on a -Teletype 5620, AT&T630, or X11 system (depending on which version has been compiled). -If the filename is of the form -\f2file\f(CW.s\f1, -.I movie -creates the intermediate form in -\f2file\f(CW.i\f1, -which will be used in subsequent calls if it is more recent than -\f2file\f(CW.s\f1. -The options are: -.TP -.BI -t " termprog -Load -.I termprog -instead of the default terminal program. -.br -.ns -.TP -.B -m\f2mem\fP -Use -.I mem -bytes of terminal memory instead of the default. -.PP -In the terminal, button 1 stops and starts the movie; -button 2 adjusts view sizes and selects clicks; -button 3 sets various parameters. -.PP -.SS Movie language -.br -.B text -.I options x y string. -Text is centered and medium size by default; options: one of -.B "center -.B ljust -.B rjust -.B above -.BR below , -and one of -.BR "small -.B medium -.B big -.BR bigbig . -A leading quote is stripped from -.IR string , -as is a trailinbg quote if a leading one is present. -.br -.BI line -.I "options x1 y1 x2 y2. -Lines are solid by default; options: one of -.B "fat -.B fatfat -.B dotted -.B dashed -and one of -.B "-> -.B <- -.BR <-> . -.br -.BI box -.I "options xmin ymin xmax ymax. -A box may -.BR fill ed. -.br -.BI circle -.I "options x1 y1 radius. -Radius is measured in the -.I x -dimension. -A circle may be -.BR fill ed. -.br -Any text or geometrical object may be labeled with a name and colon. -A subsequent appearance of a label in the same view erases the previous -object with that label. -.BI erase -.I label -erases the object explicitly. -.B clear -erases all objects currently in the current view. -.br -.BI click -.I "optional name -leaves a mark in the intermediate with this name; -clicks are used to control stepping in a movie or to define frames -for a set of stills. -.br -A movie may consist of multiple independent views, -each presented as a rectangular sub-window. -.BI view -.I name -associates -subsequent objects with this view, -until changed again. -Labels and coordinates are local to views. -If no view statements appear, there is a single implicit view -.BR def.view . -.br -Comments follow #; blank lines are ignored. -.PP -.I Stills -converts selected frames of a movie into -commands for -.IR pic (1). -Commands for -.I stills -begin with -.B .begin stills -and end with -.B .end -.BR stills . -.SH FILES -All files are in -.BR /usr/lib/movie . -.TF stills.awk -.TP -.F develop -Shell script to control conversion from script language to internal form. -.TP -.F fdevelop -C program that does the work. -.TP -.F stills.awk -Awk program to process stills language into -.IR pic (1). -.TP -.F anim -Host end of the animation system. -.TP -.F animterm -terminal end. -.TP -.F newer -Test whether one file is newer than another. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan, -.IR "A System for Algorithm Animation" , -CSTR 132, January, 1987. -.SH BUGS -The 630 can only handle 65000 bytes of memory. -.br diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mp.1 b/static/v10/man1/mp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 62174fef..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,304 +0,0 @@ -.TH MP 1 -.CT 1 writing_other -.SH NAME -mp, MetaPost \- system for drawing pictures -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mp -[ -.B -I -] -[ -.B -T -] -[ -.I first-line -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Mp -interprets the MetaPost language and produces -.I PostScript -pictures. The MetaPost language is similar to Knuth's Metafont -with additional features for including -.IR tex (1) -or -.IR troff (1) -commands and accessing features of PostScript not found in Metafont. -The -.B -T -flag selects -.I troff -instead of -.IR tex . -.PP -An argument given on the command line -behaves as the first input line. -That can be either a (possibly truncated) file name -or a sequence MetaPost commands starting with -.L \e -and including an -.L input -command. Thus -.L mp figs -processes the file -.LR figs.mp . -The basename of -.L figs -becomes the -.IR jobname , -and is used in forming output file names. If no file is named, the -jobname becomes -.LR mpout . -The default -.L .mp -extension can be overridden by specifying an extension explicitly. -.PP -There is normally one output file for each picture generated, -and the output files are named -.IR jobname.nnn , -where -.I nnn -is a number passed to the -.L beginfig -macro. The output file name is -.IB jobname .ps -if this number is negative. -.PP -The output files can be used as figures in a TeX document by including -.IP -.BI "\especial{psfile=" jobname.nnn } -.LP -in the TeX document. Alternatively, one can -.L \einput epsf.tex -and then use the macro -.BI "\eepsfbox{" jobname.nnn } -to produce a box of the appropriate size containing the figure. -.TP -.BI btex " TeX commands " etex -This causes -.I mp -to generate a MetaPost picture expression that corresponds to the -TeX commands. If the TeX commands generate -more than one line of text, it must be in a -.L \evbox -or a minipage environment. -.TP -.BI verbatimtex " TeX commands " etex -This is ignored by -.I mp -except that the TeX commands are passed on to TeX. When using LaTeX -instead of TeX the input file must start with a -.L verbatimtex -block that gives the -.L \edocumentstyle -and -.L "\ebegin{document}" -commands. -.PP -Since most TeX fonts have to be downloaded as bitmaps, the -.L btex -feature works best when the output of -.L mp -is to be included in a TeX document so that -.IR dvips (1) -can download the fonts. For self-contained PostScript output that can be -used directly or included in a -.I troff -document, start your MetaPost input file with the command -.L "prologues:=1" -and stick to standard PostScript fonts. TeX and MetaPost use the names in the -third column of the file -.LR /usr/lib/mp/trfonts.map . -.PP -MetaPost output can be included in a -.I troff -document via the -.IR mpictures (6) -macro package. In this case -.I mp -should be invoked with the -.B -T -flag so that the commands between -.L btex -and -.L etex -or between -.L verbatimtex -and -.L etex -are interpreted as -.I troff -instead of TeX. (This automatically sets -.L prologues:=1 -). -.PP -Here is a list of the environment variables affect the behavior of -.IR mp : -.TF MPXCOMMAND -.TP -.B MPINPUTS -Search path for -.L \einput -files. -It should be colon-separated, -and start with dot. -Default: -.L .:/usr/lib/mp -.TP -.B MFINPUTS -Auxiliary search path for -.L \einput -files with -.L .mf -extensions. -Default: -.L .:/usr/lib/mf -.TP -.B TEXFONTS -Search path for font metric files. -Default: -.L .:/usr/lib/tex/fonts/tfm -.TP -.B MPXCOMMAND -The name of a shell script that converts embedded typesetting commands -to a form that -.I mp -understands. -Defaults: -.L /usr/lib/mp/bin/makempx -for -.I tex -and -.L /usr/lib/mp/bin/troffmpx -for -.I troff -.TP -.B TEX -The version of TeX to use when processing -.L btex -and -.L verbatimtex -commands. Default: -.L tex -.TP -.B TROFF -The -.I troff -pipeline for -.L btex -and -.L verbatimtex -commands. Default: -.B eqn -d\e$\e$ | troff -Tpost -.TP -.B MPMEMS -Search path for -.L .mem -files. Default: -.L .:/usr/lib/mp -.TP -.B MPPOOL -Search path for strings. -Default: -.L .:/usr/lib/mp -.TP -.B MPEDITOR -A command for invoking an editor with -.L %s -in place of the file name and -.L %d -in place of the line number. -Default: -.L /bin/ed %s -.TP -.B TEXVFONTS -Search path for virtual fonts. -Default: -.L /usr/lib/tex/fonts/psvf -.PD -.PP -A -.L .mem -file is a binary file that permits fast loading of fonts and macro packages. -.I Mp -reads the default -.F plain.mem -unless another -.L .mem -file is specified at the start of the first line with an -.L & -just before it. There is also an -.F mfplain.mem -that simulates plain Metafont so that -.I mp -can read -.L .mf -fonts. (Plain Metafont is described in -.I The -.IR METAFONTbook ). -.PP -Experts can create -.L .mem -files be invoking -.I mp -with the -.B -I -switch and giving macro definitions followed by a -.L dump -command. -.PP -The MetaPost language is similar to Metafont, but the manual -.I A User's Manual for MetaPost -assumes no knowledge of Metafont. MetaPost does not have bitmap -output commands or Metafont's online display mechanism. Use -.IR dvips (1) -and -.IR psi (9.1) -to see the results before printing. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/tex/macros/doc/mpintro.tex -.TP -.F /usr/lib/mp/* -macros, -.L .mem -files, and tables for handling included -.I tex -and -.I troff -.TP -.F /usr/lib/mp/bin -Directory for programs that handle included -.I tex -and -.IR troff . -.F /usr/lib/mp/trfonts.map -table of corresponding font names for -.IR troff , -PostScript, and TeX -.TP -.F /usr/lib/tex/macros/epsf.tex -The TeX input file where the -.L \eepsfbox -macro is defined -.TP -.F /usr/lib/tex/macros/doc/mpintro.tex -TeX input for a document that describes the MetaPost language -.TP -.F /usr/lib/mp/examples.mp -The source file for the figures used in -.F mpintro.tex -.TP -.F /n/bowell/usr/src/cmd/tex/mp/doc/* -More information on using MetaPost with -.IR troff . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR tex (1), -.IR lp (1), -.IR psi (9.1), -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I The METAFONTbook, -Addison Wesley, 1986, -.br -John D. Hobby, -.I A User's Manual for MetaPost -AT&T Bell Labs Computing Science Technical Report 162, 1991. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mt.1 b/static/v10/man1/mt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e01ec0c5..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'MT (I)'6/12/72'MT (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME mt -- manipulate magtape -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS mt__ [ key ] [ name ... ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION mt__ -saves and restores selected portions of the file system -hierarchy on magtape. -Its actions are controlled by the key___ argument. -The key is a string of characters containing -at most one function letter and possibly -one or more function modifiers. -Other arguments to the command are file or directory -names specifying which files are to be dumped, restored, -or tabled. - -The function portion of -the key is specified by one of the following letters: - -.in +6 -.ti -3 -r The indicated files and directories, together with -all subdirectories, are dumped -onto the tape. -The old contents of the tape are lost. - -.ti -3 -x extracts the named files from the tape to the file system. -The owner, mode, and date-modified are restored to what they -were when the file was dumped. -If no file argument is given, the entire contents of the -tape are extracted. - -.ti -3 -t lists the names of all files stored on the tape which -are the same as or are hierarchically below -the file arguments. If no file argument is given, -the entire contents of the tape are tabled. - -.ti -3 -l is the same as t_ except that an expanded listing -is produced giving all the available information about the -listed files. - -.in -6 -The following characters may be used in addition to the letter -which selects the function desired. - -.in +6 -.ti -3 -0, ..., 7 This modifier selects the drive on which the tape is mounted. -"0" is the default. - -.ti -3 -v Normally mt__ does its work silently. The v_ (verbose) -option causes it to type the name of each file it treats -preceded by a letter to indicate what is happening. - -.in +2 - a file is being added - x file is being extracted - -.in -2 -The v_ option can be used with r_ and x_ only. - -.ti -3 -f causes -new entries copied on tape to be 'fake' in that -only the entries, not the data associated -with the entries are updated. -Such fake entries cannot be extracted. -Usable only with r_. - -.ti -3 -w causes mt__ to pause before treating each file, type -the indicative letter and the file name (as with v_) -and await the user's response. Response -"y" means "yes", so the file is treated. Null response -means "no", and the file does not take part -in whatever is being done. Response "x" means "exit"; -the mt__ command terminates immediately. In the x_ function, -files previously asked about -have been extracted already. -With r_, no change has been made to the tape. - -.ti -3 -m make (create) directories during an x_ if necessary. -.in -6 -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /dev/mt? -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO tap(I), tap(V) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS Tape open error -.br -Tape read error -.br -Tape write error -.br -Directory checksum -.br -Directory overflow -.br -Seek error -.br -Tape overflow -.br -Phase error (a file has changed after it was selected for -dumping but before it was dumped) -.br -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS If, during an "x", -the files are specified in a different order -than they are on the tape, -seek errors will result because the tape -cannot be rewound. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mv.1 b/static/v10/man1/mv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7966ab0a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/mv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'MV (I)'2/9/73'MV (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME mv -- move or rename a file -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS mv__ name\d1\u name\d2\u -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION mv__ -changes the name of name\d1\u to -name\d2\u. -If name\d2\u is a directory, name\d1\u is moved to -that directory with its original file-name. -Directories may only be moved within the same parent -directory (just renamed). -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO -- -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS yes -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 b/static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4fe22985..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ -.TH ENCRYPT 1 -.SH NAME -encrypt, decrypt \- encrypt or decrypt a message or file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B encrypt -[ -.B \-p -] -[ password ] -.br -.B decrypt -[ -.B \-p -] -[ password ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Encrypt -( -.I decrypt -) -reads from the standard input and writes -on the standard output. -The -.I password -is a key, up to 127 characters in length, which selects a particular transformation. -If no -.I password -is given, -.I encrypt -demands a key from the terminal (without echoing what the user types). -If the wrong key is given to decrypt, it will usually exit without -writing on standard output. -.PP -If the -.B \-p -option is specified, the ciphertext will be encoded into printing -characters only; suitable for sending through mail. -In this mode, -.B decrypt -ignores any lines that do not have a special prefix (added by -.B encrypt -), -so messages received in the mail can be read without having to edit -out headers. -.PP -Encryption takes place in three layers. The first addresses traffic -analysis threats by hiding the size of the message and insuring that -if the same message is send repeatedly with the same -.I password -the ciphertext will be entirely different each time. -The second layer is the proposed Data Encryption Standard (DES) used -in Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) mode. Finally, a key-dependent character -transposition is applied to the ciphertext which impedes the -assembly of corresponding pairs of DES blocks under a known-plaintext attack. -.PP -The user is encouraged to use a lengthy password. A short sequence of -words chosen at random from a dictionary and committed to memory is -a good plan. -.SH FILES -/dev/tty for typed key -.SH AUTHOR -D.P.Mitchell -.SH BUGS -This encryption program is not provably secure, and the author gives no -guarantee that it cannot be broken. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 b/static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 56f29c23..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,366 +0,0 @@ -.TH NEWCSH 1 -.UC 4 -.bd S 3 -.SH NAME -newcsh \- description of new csh features (over oldcsh) -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B csh -\fIcsh-options\fR -.SH SUMMARY -This is a summary of features new in -.IR csh (1) -in this version of the system; an older version of -.I csh -is available as -.I oldcsh. -This newer -.I csh -has some new process control primitives and a few other new features. -Users of -.I csh -must (and automatically) use the new terminal driver (summarized in -.IR newtty(4) -and completely described with the old in -.IR tty (4)) -which allows generation of some new -interrupt signals from the keyboard which tell jobs to stop, -and arbitrates access to the terminal; -on CRT's the command ``stty crt'' is -normally placed in the -.I .login -file to be executed at login, -to set other useful modes of this terminal driver. -.PP -.B "Jobs." -.PP -The most important new feature in this shell is the control of -.I jobs. -A job is associated with each pipeline, where a pipeline is either -a simple command like ``date'', or a pipeline like ``who | wc''. -The shell keeps a table of current jobs, and assigns them small -integer numbers. -When you start a job in the background, the shell prints a line -which looks like: -.PP -\ \ \ \ [1] 1234 -.PP -this indicating that the job which was started asynchronously with ``&'' -is job number 1 and has one (top-level) process, whose process id is 1234. -The set of current jobs is listed by the -.I jobs -command. -.PP -If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the -key ^Z (control-Z) which sends a -.I stop -signal to the current job. The shell will then normally indicate that -the job has been ``Stopped'', and print another prompt. -You can then -put the job in the background with the command ``bg'', or run -some other commands and then return the job to the foreground with -``fg''. -A ^Z takes effect immediately and is like an interrupt in that -pending output and unread input are discarded when it is typed. -There is another special key ^Y which does not generate a stop signal -until a program attempts to -.IR read (2) -it. -This can usefully be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands -for a job which you wish to stop after it has read them. -.PP -A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read -from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, -but this can be disabled by doing ``stty tostop''. If you set this -tty option, then background jobs will stop when they try to produce -output like they do when they try to read input. -.PP -There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character -``%'' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can -name it as ``%1''. Just naming a job brings it to the foreground; thus -``%1'' is a synonym for ``fg %1'', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. -Similarly saying ``%1 &'' resumes job 1 in the background. -Jobs can also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start them, -if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus ``%ex'' would normally restart -a suspended -.IR ex (1) -job, if there were only one suspended job whose name began with -the string ``ex''. It is also possible to say ``%?string'' -which specifies a job whose text contains -.I string, -if there is only one such job. -.PP -The shell also maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. -In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is marked with a ``+'' -and the previous job with a ``\-''. The abbreviation ``%+'' refers -to the current job and ``%\-'' refers to the previous job. For close -analogy with the -.I history -mechanism, -``%%'' is also a synonym for the current job. -.PP -.B "Status reporting." -.PP -This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state. -It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that -no further progress is possible, but only just before it prints -a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your work. -If, however, you set the shell variable -.I notify, -the shell will notify you immediately of changes of status in background -jobs. -There is also a shell command -.I notify -which marks a single process so that its status changes will be immediately -reported. By default -.I notify -marks the current process; -simply say ``notify'' after starting a background job to mark it. -.PP -When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you will -be warned that ``You have stopped jobs.'' You may use the ``jobs'' -command to see what they are. If you do this or immediately try to -exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time, and the suspended -jobs will be unmercifully terminated. -.PP -.B "New builtin commands." -.HP 5 -.B bg -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBbg\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Puts the current or specified jobs into the background, continuing them -if they were stopped. -.HP 5 -.B fg -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBfg\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Brings the current or specified jobs into the foreground, continuing them if -they were stopped. -.HP 5 -.B jobs -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -.B "jobs \-l" -.br -Lists the active jobs; given the -.B \-l -options lists process id's in addition to the normal information. -.HP 5 -\fBkill %\fRjob -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ \fB%\fRjob\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\fR\ pid -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ pid\ ... -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBkill\ \-l\fR -.br -Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the -specified signal to the specified jobs or processes. -Signals are either given by number or by names (as given in -.I /usr/include/signal.h, -stripped of the prefix ``SIG''). -The signal names are listed by ``kill \-l''. -There is no default, saying just `kill' does not -send a signal to the current job. -If the signal being sent is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), -then the job or process will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well. -.HP 5 -.B notify -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBnotify\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when the status of the -current or specified jobs changes; normally notification is presented -before a prompt. All jobs are marked ``notify'' if the shell variable -``notify'' is set. -.HP 5 -\fBstop\ %\fRjob\ ... -.br -Stops the specified job which is executing in the background. -.HP 5 -\fB%\fRjob -.br -Brings the specified job into the foreground. -.HP 5 -\fB%\fRjob \fB&\fR -.br -Continues the specified job in the background. -.br -.ne 5 -.PP -.B "Process limitations." -.PP -The shell provides access to an experimental facility for limiting -the consumption by a single process of system resources. -The following commands control this facility: -.HP 5 -\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR \fImaximum-use\fR -.HP 5 -\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR -.br -.ns -.HP -\fBlimit\fR -.br -Limits the consumption by the current process and each process -it creates to not individually exceed \fImaximum-use\fR on the -specified \fIresource\fR. If no \fImaximum-use\fR is given, then -the current limit is printed; if no \fIresource\fR is given, then -all limitations are given. -.IP -Resources controllable currently include \fIcputime\fR (the maximum -number of cpu-seconds to be used by each process), \fIfilesize\fR -(the largest single file which can be created), \fIdatasize\fR -(the maximum growth of the data+stack region via -.IR sbrk (2) -beyond the end of the program text), \fIstacksize\fR (the maximum -size of the automatically-extended stack region), and \fIcoredumpsize\fR -(the size of the largest core dump that will be created). -.IP -The \fImaximum-use\fR may be given as a (floating point or integer) -number followed by a scale factor. For all limits other than \fIcputime\fR -the default scale is ``k'' or ``kilobytes'' (1024 bytes); -a scale factor of ``m'' or ``megabytes'' may also be used. -For cputime the default scaling is ``seconds'', while ``m'' for minutes -or ``h'' for hours, or a time of the form ``mm:ss'' giving minutes -and seconds may be used. -.IP -For both \fIresource\fR names and scale factors, unambiguous prefixes -of the names suffice. -.HP 5 -\fBunlimit\fR \fIresource\fR -.br -.ns -.HP 5 -\fBunlimit\fR -.br -Removes the limitation on \fIresource\fR. If no \fIresource\fR -is specified, then all \fIresource\fR limitations are removed. -.ne 5 -.PP -.B "Directory stack." -.PP -This shell now keeps track of the current directory (which is kept -in the variable -.I cwd) -and also maintains a stack of directories, which is printed by the -command -.I dirs. -You can change to a new directory and push down the old directory -stack by using the command -.I pushd -which is otherwise like the -.I chdir -command, changing to its argument. -You can pop the directory stack by saying -.I popd. -Saying -.I pushd -with no arguments exchanges the top two elements of the directory stack. -The elements of the directory stack are numbered from 1 starting at the top. -Saying -.I pushd -with a argument ``+\fIn\fR'' rotates the directory stack to make that entry -in the stack be at the top and changes to it. -Giving -.I popd -a ``+\fIn\fR'' argument eliminates that argument from the directory stack. -.PP -.B "Miscellaneous." -.PP -This shell imports the environment variable USER into the variable -.I user, -TERM into -.I term, -and -HOME into -.I home, -and exports these back into the environment whenever the normal -shell variables are reset. -The environment variable PATH is likewise handled; it is not -necessary to worry about its setting other than in the file -.I \&.cshrc -as inferior -.I csh -processes will import the definition of -.I path -from the environment, and re-export it if you then change it. -(It could be set once in the -.I \&.login -except that commands over the Berknet would not -see the definition.) -.PP -There are new commands -.I eval, -which is like the eval of the Bourne shell -.IR sh (1), -and useful with -.IR tset (1), -and -.I suspend -which stops a shell (as though a ^Z had stopped it; since -shells normally ignore ^Z signals, this command is necessary.) -.PP -There is a new variable -.I cdpath; -if set, then each directory in -.I cdpath -will be searched for a directory named in a -.I chdir -command if there is no such subdirectory of the current directory. -.PP -An -.I unsetenv -command removing environment variables has been added. -.PP -There is a new ``:'' modifier ``:e'', which yields the extension -portion of a filename. Thus if ``$a'' is ``file.c'', ``$a:e'' is ``c''. -.PP -There are two new operators in shell expressions ``!~'' and ``=~'' which -are like the string operations ``!='' and ``=='' except that the right -hand side is a -.I pattern -(containing, e.g. ``*''s, ``?''s and instances of ``[...]'') -against which the left hand operand is matched. This reduces the -need for use of the -.I switch -statement in shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern matching. -.PP -The form ``$<'' is new, and is replaced by a line from the standard -input, with no further interpretation thereafter. It may therefore -be used to read from the keyboard in a shell script. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -csh(1), killpg(2), sigsys(2), signal(2), jobs(3), sigset(3), tty(4) -.SH BUGS -Command sequences of the form ``a ; b ; c'' are not handled gracefully -when stopping is attempted. If you suspend ``b'', the shell will then -immediately execute ``c''. This is especially noticeable if this -expansion results from an -.I alias. -It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to force it to -a subshell, i.e. ``( a ; b ; c )'', but see the next bug. -.PP -Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. -.PP -Control over output is primitive; -perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good virtual -terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface much more -interesting things could be done with output control. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 b/static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e77a2030..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.TH NEWGRP 1 -.CT 1 proc_man secur -.SH NAME -newgrp \(mi change to a new group -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B newgrp -.I group -[ -.I command -[ -.I arg ... -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Newgrp -runs a -.I command -with the (real and effective) groupid temporarily set to -.I group. -If no command is given, the user's shell (see -.IR passwd (5)) -is executed. -.PP -A password is demanded if the group has -a password and the user does not. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -exec newgrp bin -Restart the shell with a different groupid. -.SH FILES -.F /etc/group -.br -.F /etc/passwd -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR login (8), -.IR getuid (2) -.SH BUGS -On other systems, -.I newgrp -is built into the shell. -Here it will spawn a new shell unless invoked with -.BR exec . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 b/static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fbae397a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.TH NEWSCHECK 1 -.SH NAME -newscheck \- check to see if user has news -.SH SYNOPSIS -newscheck [yne] [readnews options] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I newscheck -reports to the user whether or not he has news. -.TP 10 -.B y -Reports "There is news" if the user has news to read. -.TP 10 -.B n -Reports "No news" if their isn't any news to read. -.TP 10 -.B e -Executes -.I readnews(1) -if there is news. -.PP -If there are no options, -.B y -is the default. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 25 -/usr/lib/news/active -Active newsgroups -.TP 25 -~/.newsrc -Options and list of previously read articles -.SH SEE ALSO -readnews(1), -inews(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nice.1 b/static/v10/man1/nice.1 deleted file mode 100644 index eda8f19b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/nice.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -.th NICE I 11/1/73 -.sh NAME -nice \*- run a command at low priority -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd nice -command [ arguments ] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Nice -executes -.it command -at low priority. -.sh "SEE ALSO" -nohup(I), nice(II) -.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nm.1 b/static/v10/man1/nm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6a4bc5be..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/nm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'NM (I)'3/15/72'NM (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME nm -- print name list -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS nm__ [ name ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION nm__ -prints the symbol table from the output file of an -assembler or loader run. -Each symbol name is preceded by its value (blanks if undefined) -and one of the letters "U" (undefined) "A" (absolute) "T" -(text segment symbol), -"D" (data segment symbol), or "B" -(bss segment symbol). -Global symbols have their first character underlined. -The output is sorted alphabetically. -.sp -If no file is given, the symbols in a.out_____ are listed. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES a.out -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO as(I), ld(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS "?" -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nm80.1 b/static/v10/man1/nm80.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ba9a0422..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/nm80.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -.th NM80 1 03/01/77 -.sh NAME -nm80 \*- print name list -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd nm80 -[ -.bd \-cnrupgfabdth -] -[ name ] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Nm80 -prints the symbol table from the output file of an -assembler or loader run. -Each symbol name is preceded by its value (blanks if undefined) -and one of the letters: -.s1 -\fBU\fR (undefined) -.br -\fBA\fR (absolute) -.br -\fBT\fR (text segment symbol) -.br -\fBD\fR (data segment symbol) -.br -\fBB\fR (bss segment symbol) -.br -\fBF\fR (file name) -.br -\fBC\fR (common symbol) -.s3 -If the symbol is local (non-external) -the type letter is in lower case. -The output is sorted alphabetically. -.s3 -If no file is given, the symbols in -.bd 80.out -are listed. -Absolute symbols have their values printed in octal. -Non-absolute symbols are assumed to be addresses -and are printed in a "low byte:high byte" format. -.s3 -Options are: -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-a\fR list only absolute symbols -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-b\fR list only bss symbols -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-c\fR list only C-style external symbols, that is -those beginning with underscore `\*_'. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-d\fR list only data symbols -those beginning with underscore `\*_'. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-f\fR print only the file names. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-g\fR print only global (external) symbols -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-n\fR sort by value instead of by name -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-p\fR don't sort; print in symbol-table order -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-r\fR sort in reverse order -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-t\fR list only text symbols -those beginning with underscore `\*_'. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-u\fR print only undefined symbols. -.s3 -.lp +4 4 -\fB\-h\fR print output in hex. -.i0 -.sh FILES -80.out -.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nohup.1 b/static/v10/man1/nohup.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 090375d1..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/nohup.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -.th NOHUP I 11/1/73 -.sh NAME -nohup \*- run a command immune to hangups -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd nohup -command [ arguments ] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Nohup -executes -.it command -with hangups, -quits and interrupts all ignored. -.sh "SEE ALSO" -nice(I), signal(II) -.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/notary.1 b/static/v10/man1/notary.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6524f30c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/notary.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -.TH NOTARY 1 -.CT 1 comm_term sa_mortals secur -.SH NAME -sign, enroll, verify, key, notaryd \(mi sign and verify certificates -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B "notary sign -.PP -.B "notary enroll -[ -.B -n -] -.I name -.PP -.B "notary verify -.I name -.I xsum -.I text -.PP -.B lmask -.B xn -.B /usr/notary/notaryd -[ -.B -m -.I mtpt -] -[ -.B -d -.I dir -] -.PP -.B "notary key -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Notary -provides a document-authentication service. -Any user may `sign' a document by presenting it and -a secret key to the notary. -The notary returns a certificate (a cryptographic checksum made -with the secret key). -For the certificate to be useful, the key must -be enrolled with the notary under some public name. -Given the certificate and the public name, any user may -ask the notary to authenticate the document by verifying that -it is indeed as certified. -.PP -.I Sign -writes on the standard output a certificate for its standard input. -The secret key -is demanded from the terminal. -.PP -.I Enroll -prompts the terminal for a secret key to associate with the -public -.IR name . -Unless this is a new enrollment for -.I name, -indicated by option -.BR -n , -the previous value of the key is demanded from the terminal. -If a trivial new key is presented, the -.I name -is erased from the database. -.PP -.I Verify -tells whether -.I xsum -is the checksum of -.IR text, -figured with the enrolled key for the public -.IR name . -.PP -.I Notaryd -is the notary daemon, which mounts itself on -.I mtpt -(default -.FR /cs/notary ) -and keeps its log files and database in directory -.I dir -(default -.FR /usr/notary ). -The database is encrypted, so that although -.I notaryd -is normally started by -.IR rc (8), -it cannot serve other requests until it has been primed by a -.L "notary key -request, which obtains the notary's master key from -the terminal. -.SH FILES -.nf -.F /cs/notary -.F /usr/notary/* -.fi -.SH "SEE ALSO -.IR notary (3) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/notify.1 b/static/v10/man1/notify.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 60d4194a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/notify.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ -'\"macro stdmacro -.if n .pH g1.notify %W% of %G% -.nr X -.if \nX=0 .ds x} notify 1 "Essential Utilities" "\&" -.if \nX=1 .ds x} notify 1 "Essential Utilities" -.if \nX=2 .ds x} notify 1 "" "\&" -.if \nX=3 .ds x} notify "" "" "\&" -.TH \*(x} -.SH NAME -\f4notify\f1 \- notify user of the arrival of new mail -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f4notify\fP \f4\-y\fP [ \f4\-m\fP \f2mailfile\fP ] -.br -\f4notify\fP [ \f4\-n\fP ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -When a new mail message arrives, -the \f4mail\fP command first checks if the recipient's mailbox indicates -that the message is to be forwarded elsewhere (to some other recipient or -as the input to some command). -\f4notify\fP is used to set up forwarding on the user's mailbox so that the new -message is saved into an alternative mailbox and, -if the user is currently logged in, -he or she is notified immediately of the arrival of new mail. -.PP -Command-line options are: -.sp .5 -.PD 0 -.TP 12 -\f4\-m\f2\0mailfile\f1 -File to save mail messages into while automatic notification is activated. -If not specified, it defaults to \f2$HOME/.mailfile\fP. -.TP -\f4\-n\f1 -Remove mail notification facility -.TP -\f4\-y\f1 -Install mail notification facility -.PD -.PP -If invoked with no arguments, -\f4notify\fP reports whether automatic mail notification is activated or not. -.PP -The notification is done by looking in \f4/etc/utmp\f1 to -determine if the recipient is currently logged in, -and if so, on which terminal device. -Then the terminal device is opened for writing and the user is notified about -the new message. -The notification will indicate who the message is from. -If the message contains a \f4Subject:\fP header line it will be included. -(For security, all unprintable characters within the header will be converted -to an exclamation point.) -.PP -If the user is logged in multiple times he or she will get multiple -notifications, one per terminal. -To disable notifications to a particular login session, -the \f4mesg\fP(1) command can be used to disable writing -to that terminal. -.PP -If there are multiple machines connected together via RFS or NFS, -\f4notify\f1 will look up the \f4/etc/utmp\fP files on the other systems as -well. -To do this, the file \f4/etc/mail/notify.sys\f1 will be -consulted, which will contain two columns, the first being the name of a -system and the second being a path to find the root filesystem for that -machine. -.PP -If \f4notify\fP has troubles delivering the mail to the specified mailfile, -\f4notify\fP -will look up the directory of the mailfile in \f4/etc/mail/notify.fsys\fP. -If the file's directory is found in the first column of the file, the mail will be -forwarded to the system listed in the second column instead of being returned -to the sender. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 18 -\f4/tmp/notif\f1\(** -temporary file -.TP 18 -\f4/var/mail/\f1\(** -users' standard mailboxes -.TP 18 -\f4/usr/lib/mail/notify2\f1 -program that performs the notification -.TP 18 -\f4/etc/mail/notify.fsys\f1 -list of file systems and home systems -.TP 18 -\f4/etc/mail/notify.sys\f1 -list of machines and paths to their root filesystems -.TP 18 -\f4/etc/utmp\f1 -list of users who are logged in -.PD -.SH SEE ALSO -\f4mail\fP(1), \f4mesg\fP(1). -.br -.IR "User\'s Guide" . -.br -.ne 8 -.SH NOTES -Because \f4notify\fP uses the ``\f4Forward to \(bv\f2command\f1'' facility of -\f4mail\fP to implement notifications, -\f4/var/mail/\f2username\f1 should not be specified as the place -to put newly arrived messages via the \f4\-m\fP invocation option. -The \f4mail\fP command uses -\f4/var/mail/\f2username\f1 to hold either mail messages, -\f4or\fP indications of mail forwarding, -but not both simultaneously. -.PP -If the user is using \f4layers\fP(1), -the notification will \f4only\fP appear in the \f4login\fP window. -.\"@(#)notify.1 1.2 -.Ee diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nroff.1 b/static/v10/man1/nroff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1a770595..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/nroff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'NROFF (I)'1/15/73'NROFF (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME nroff -- format text -.sp -.ti 0 -.nf -SYNOPSIS nroff_____ [+_N] [-s__] [-h__] [-q__] [-i__] files -.fi -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION nroff_____ -formats text according to control lines embedded -in the text files. -The non-file option arguments are interpreted as follows: - -.in +6 -.ti -3 -+N Output will commence at the first page whose page -number is N (independent of whether or not the -page number is being printed). - -.ti -3 --s Stop between pages. Printing will halt prior to -each page (including the first) to permit paper -loading and changing. Printing is restarted by -typing either a "newline" or "delete" character. - -.ti -3 --h High-speed output. During output, strings of -space characters are replaced where possible with -tab characters to speed up output. Futhermore, if -the output is directed into a file or a pipe, -this mode effectively reduces the total number of -characters in the file or pipe; this is especially -important in multi-column output where the -temporary file(s) or pipe(s) would otherwise contain -a large number of space characters. - -.ti -3 --q The prompt names for insertions are not printed -and the bell character is sent instead; in -addition, the insertion is not echoed. This mode -permits insertions during the actual output printing - -.ti -3 --i Index mode. NROFF creates a file called "index" -containing every word output together with the -line and page number. The format is word, tab, -page, tab, line, newline, etc. Invoking this mode -slows down the execution of NROFF considerably. -.sp -.in -6 -Nroff is more completely described -in [1]. -A condensed Request Summary is included here. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /etc/suftab suffix hyphenation tables -.br -/tmp/rtm? temporary -.br -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO [1] NROFF User's Manual (available as MM-73-1271-2). -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS none -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS - -.in 0 -.bp -.cc % -%nf -%ce -REQUEST REFERENCE AND INDEX - -Request Initial If no Cause -Form____ Value_____ Argument________ Break_____ Explanation___________ - -I. Page____ Control_______ - -.pl +_N N=66 N=66 no P_age L_ength. -.bp +_N N=1 - yes B_egin P_age. -.pn +_N N=1 ignored no P_age N_umber. -.po +_N N=0 N=prev no P_age O_ffset. -.ne N - N=1 no NE__ed N lines. - -II. Text____ Filling_______, Adjusting_________, and___ Centering_________ - -.br - - yes BR__eak. -.fi fill - yes FI__ll output lines. -.nf fill - yes N_oF_ill. -.ad c adj,norm adjust no AD__just mode on. -.na adjust - no N_oA_djust. -.ce N off N=1 yes CE__nter N input text lines. - -III. Line____ Spacing_______ and___ Blank_____ Lines_____ - -.ls +_N N=1 N=prev no L_ine S_pacing. -.sp N - N=1 yes SP__ace N lines -.lv N - N=1 no OR- -.sv N - N=1 no S_aV_e N lines. -.os - - no O_utput S_aved lines. -.ns space - no N_o-S_pace mode on. -.rs - - no R_estore S_pacing. -.xh off - no EX_tra-H_alf-line mode on. - -IV. Line____ Length______ and___ Indenting_________ - -.ll +_N N=65 N=prev no L_ine L_ength. -.in +_N N=0 N=prev yes IN__dent. -.ti +_N - N=1 yes T_emporary I_ndent. - -V. Macros______, Diversion_________, and___ Line____ Traps_____ - -.de xx - ignored no DE__fine or redefine a macro. -.rm xx - - no R_eM_ove macro name. -.di xx - end no DI__vert output to macro "xx". -.wh -_N xx - no WH__en; set a line trap. -.ch -_N -_M - no OR- -.ch xx -_M - no OR- -.ch -_N y - no OR- -.ch xx y - no CH__ange trap line. - -VI. Number______ Registers_________ - -.nr a +_N -_M - no OR- -.nr ab +_N -_M - no N_umber R_egister. -.nc c \\n \\n no N_umber C_haracter. -.ar arabic - no Arabic numbers. -.ro arabic - no Roman numbers. -.RO arabic - no ROMAN numbers. - -VII. Input_____ and___ Output______ Conventions___________ and___ Character_________ Translations____________ - -.ta N,M,... none no PseudoTA__bs setting. -.tc c space space no T_ab replacement C_haracter. -.lc c . . no L_eader replacement C_haracter. -.ul N - N=1 no UN__derline input text lines. -.cc c . . no Basic C_ontrol C_haracter. -.c2 c ' ' no Nobreak control character. -.li N - N=1 no Accept input lines LI__terally. -.tr abcd.... - no TR__anslate on output. - -VIII. Hyphenation___________. - -.nh on - no N_o H_yphen. -.hy on - no HY__phenate. -.hc c none none no H_yphenation indicator C_haracter. - -IX. Three_____ Part____ Titles______. - -.tl 'left'center'right' no T_itL_e. -.lt N N=65 N=prev no L_ength of T_itle. - -X. Output______ Line____ Numbering_________. - -.nm +_N M S I off no N_umber M_ode on or off, set parameters. -.np M S I reset no N_umber P_arameters set or reset. - -XI. Conditional___________ Input_____ Line____ Acceptance__________ - -.if c anything - no OR- -.if !c anything - no OR- -.if N anything - no OR- -.if !N anything - no IF__ true accept line of "anything". - -XII. Environment___________ Switching_________. - -.ev N N=0 N=prev no E_nV_ironment switched. - -XIII. Insertions__________ from____ the___ Standard________ Input_____ Stream______ - -.rd prompt bell no R_eaD_ insert. -.ex - - no EX__it. - -XIV. Input_____ File____ Switching _________ - -.so filename - no Switch SO__urce file (push down). -.nx filename - no N_eX_t file. -.sp -XV. Miscellaneous_____________ - -.ig - - no IG__nore. -.fl - - no FL__ush output buffer. -.ab - - no AB__ort. -%cc . -.fi -.in 16 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/occ.1 b/static/v10/man1/occ.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7190fbe2..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/occ.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -.TH OCC 1 "8 Juillet 88" -.SH NAME -occ \- Esterel and Lustre C code producer -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B occ -[ option ] ... [ file ]... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The \fIocc\fR code producer takes as input one or more \fIoc\fR files -and produces standard executable C code. -If there is no input files, the standard input is used. -Typical use is: -.DS -occ < game1.oc -.DE -or -.DS -occ game1.oc -.DE -.LP -The following options are interpreted by \fIocc\fP. -.IP \fB-version\fR 10 -Gives the version name and terminates ignoring all others arguments. -.IP \fB-array\fR 10 -Arrays of automata are available using the \fB -array\fR option. -.IP \fB-nopack\fR 10 -With this option, there is no packaging of input, output and sensor interface -procedures. This option is available for compatibility with old -\fIocc\fR versions. -.IP \fB-s\fR 10 -Silent mode. No output file is generated. -.IP \fB-v\fR 10 -Verbose option: gives names of the input module. -.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 -Prints statistic informations into the standard error stream: -global time and size of the process. -.IP \fB-size\fR 10 -Prints size informations into the standard error stream: -how many actions and how many bytes are produced. -.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 -Memory state after compiling. -.IP "\fB\-B\fP \fIname\fP" 10 -\fIname\fP denotes the output file default base name. -The suffix .c is added automatically (and possibly a working -directory name --see the following option). -If this option is omitted the output code is printed in file: -occ_out.c. -For instance, -.DS -occ -B game1 game1.oc -.DE -.IP "\fB\-D\fP \fIdirectory\fP" 10 -Specify a directory where the output file will be placed. -The default is the current directory. -.SH FILES -The caller of the command -must have read/write permission for the directories containing -the working files, and execute permission for the occ file. -.SH IDENTIFICATION -.de VL -\\$2 -.. -Author: A Ressouche, -INRIA, -.sp 0 -Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE -.sp 0 -Revision Number: -$Revision: 1.5 $ -\&. -.SH SEE ALSO -Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual -.sp 0 -Esterel v3 System Manuals. -.sp 0 -strlic (1), iclc(1), lcoc (1). -.sp 0 -.SH BUGS - - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 b/static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 149a572b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -.TH OCDEBUG 1 "8 Juillet 88" -.SH NAME -ocdebug \- Esterel and Lustre Debug code producer -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ocdebug -[ option ] ... [ file ]... -.SH DESCRIPTION -The \fIocdebug\fR code producer takes as input one or more \fIoc\fR files -and produces a human-readable file. -If there is no input files, the standard input is used. -Typical use is: -.DS -ocdebug < game1.oc -.DE -or -.DS -ocdebug game1.oc -.DE -.LP -The following options are interpreted by \fIocdebug\fP. -.IP \fB-version\fR 10 -Gives the version name and terminates ignoring all others arguments. -.IP \fB-names\fR 10 -With this option, \fIocdebug\fR prints the signal name between brackets -for each present signal test and between braces for each output action -performed in the automaton. -.IP \fB-halts\fR 10 -With this option, \fIocdebug\fR prints the haltset of each state after the -keyword: \fBhaltset\fR -.IP \fB-emitted\fR 10 -With this option, the list of output or local signals emitted in each -transition is printed out after the keyword: \fBemitted\fR. -.IP \fB-s\fR 10 -Silent mode. No output file is generated. -.IP \fB-v\fR 10 -Verbose option: gives names of the input module. -.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 -Prints statistic informations into the standard error stream: -global time and size of the process. -.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 -Memory state after compiling. -.IP "\fB\-B\fP \fIname\fP" 10 -\fIname\fP denotes the output file default base name. -The suffix .debug is added automatically (and possibly a working -directory name --see the following option). -If this option is omitted the output code is printed in file: -ocdebug_out.debug. -For instance, -.DS -ocdebug -B game1 game1.oc -.DE -.IP "\fB\-D\fP \fIdirectory\fP" 10 -Specify a directory where the output file will be placed. -The default is the current directory. -.SH FILES -The caller of the command -must have read/write permission for the directories containing -the working files, and execute permission for the occ file. -.SH IDENTIFICATION -.de VL -\\$2 -.. -Author: A Ressouche, -INRIA, -.sp 0 -Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE -.sp 0 -Revision Number: -$Revision: 1.4 $ -\&. -.SH SEE ALSO -Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual -.sp 0 -Esterel v3 System Manuals. -.sp 0 -strlic (1), iclc(1), lcoc (1). -.sp 0 -.SH BUGS - - diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ocr.1 b/static/v10/man1/ocr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 184a240a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ocr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,176 +0,0 @@ -.TH OCR 1 cetus,hydra,coma -.CT 1 graphics -.SH NAME -ocr \- optical character recognition -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ocr -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ocr -reads a black-and-white image of a page from -.IR file , -and writes ASCII to the standard output. -If no -.I file -is specified, it reads from the standard input. -.PP -The input is a -.IR picfile (5) -image of one column of machine-printed text, normally -scanned in by -.IR cscan (1). -Fonts, sizes, and line-spacings may vary within the column, -but each line should have a constant text size and baseline. -Lines should be parallel and roughly horizontal. -.PP -In the output, white space approximates the original page layout. -Words that -.IR spell (1) -are preferred, and hyphenations across lines are recombined. -.PP -The options are: -.nr xx \w'\fL-pn,m\ \ ' -.TP \n(xxu -.BI -a s -The alphabet is the union of symbol sets selected by characters in string -.IR s , -from among: -.RS -.PD -.nr yy \w'\fLA\ \ ' -.TP \n(yyu -.B A -ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ -.PD0 -.TP -.B a -abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz -.PD0 -.TP -.B 0 -0123456789 -.PD0 -.TP -.B . -.ie t \&.\^,\|-\^:\^;\|*\^'\|\^"\|?\^!\|/\|&\|$\^(\^)\^[\|\^]\|#\|@\|% \0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0 \kz(basic punctuation) -.el \&.\^,\|-\^:\^;\|*\^'\|\^"\|?\^!\|/\|&\|$\^(\^)\^[\|\^]\|#\|@\|% \0\0\0\0\0\0\0 \kz(basic punctuation) -.ig -should include ` /(em + ??? -shouldn't include []#@% ??? -.. -.PD0 -.TP -.B ^ -^\|\f(CW~\fR\^`\|\^\\\||\|\^{\|}\|_ \h'|\nzu'(extended punct'n) -.ig -should include []#@% ??? -shouldn't include ` ??? -.. -.PD0 -.TP -.B + -+\^\-\^*\|/\|<\^>\^=\^.\^E\|e\|[\|] \h'|\nzu'(numerical punct'n) -.PD0 -.TP -.B s -.ie t \(sc\^\(dg\^\(dd\^\(ct\|\(bu\|\(co\|\(rg\|\(de\^\(fm\^\(en\|\^\(mi\|\(em \h'|\nzu'(selected non-ASCII) -.el \\(sc\\(dg\\(dd\\(ct\\(bu\\(co ... \h'|\nzu'(selected non-ASCII) -.PD0 -.TP -.B l -.ie t \(fi\|\(fl\|f\h'-.1m'f\|f\h'-.1m'\(fi\|f\h'-.1m'\(fl\|\N'114'\|\N'115'\|\N'105'\|\N'106' \h'|\nzu'(ligatures and digraphs) -.el fi fl ff ffi ffl ae oe ... \h'|\nzu'(ligatures, digraphs) -.PD0 -.TP -.B g -.ie t \(*a\(*b\(*g\(*d\(*e\(*z\(*y\(*h\(*i\(*k\(*l\(*m\(*n\(*c\(*o\(*p\(*r\(*s\(*t\(*u\(*f\(*x\(*q\(*w \h'|\nzu'(Greek lower case) -.el \\(*a\\(*b\\(*g\\(*d\\(*e\\(*z ... \h'|\nzu'(Greek lower case) -.PD0 -.TP -.B G -.ie t AB\(*G\(*DEZH\(*HIK\(*LMN\(*CO\(*PP\(*STY\(*FX\(*Q\(*W \h'|\nzu'(Greek upper case) -.el AB\\(*G\\(*DEZ ... \h'|\nzu'(Greek upper case) -.PD -.PP -The default is -.BR -aAa0.+^ , -the full printable-ASCII set, which may be abbreviated as -.BR -ap . -Thus, -.B -apslgG -selects all of the above. -.RE -.PD -.TP \n(xxu -.B -c -Find columns in complex nested layouts using greedy white covers algorithm. -.TP -.BI -m l[,r] -Trim the left and right margins of the image by -.I l -and -.I r -inches, respectively, before looking for columns. -If -.I r -is omitted, it is assumed to equal -.IR l. -.TP -.BI -n n -Find the -.I n -largest columns by analysis of a single vertical projection. -Each column should be compactly-printed -and separated from the others by at least 2 ems of horizontal white space. -.TP -.BI -p n,m -Point sizes lie in the range [ -.I n, m -]; other sizes are discarded. -The default is -.BR -p6,24 . -.TP -.B -s -Defeat spelling check (but continue to favor numeric strings and good punctuation). -.TP -.B -t -Write -.IR troff (1) -format. -Each column is shown on a separate page, lines at their original height, -words at their original horizontal location, and -characters roughly original size in Times roman. -Hyphenated words are not recombined. -.TP -.B -u -Unspellable words are prefixed with `?' or, if -.B -t -is specified, printed boldface. -.TP -.BI -w w -Find the largest column of width -.I w -inches, within a single vertical projection. -.SS Fonts -Trained on over 100 Latin-alphabet book fonts in various italic, bold, etc styles. -Only one font of Greek, without diacriticals. -Also Swedish and Tibetan, on request. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR bcp (1), -.IR cscan (1), -.IR font (6), -.IR picfile (5), -.IR spell (1), -.IR troff (1) -.SH BUGS -For best results, use images of high-contrast, cleanly-printed original -documents digitized at a resolution of 400 pixels/inch or higher. -It may help to restrict the alphabet and sizes to what's there. -.ig -8.7 CPU minutes on pipe to read this page, September 1989. -.. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/od.1 b/static/v10/man1/od.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 114143ee..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/od.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'OD (I)'1/15/73'OD (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME od -- octal dump -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS od__ [ -abcdho_______ ] [ file ] [ [+_]offset[._][b_] ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION od__ -dumps -file____ -in -one or more formats -as -selected by the first argument. -(If the first argument is missing, -o__ is default.) -The meanings of the format argument characters -are: - -.in +5 -.ti -2 -a_ interprets words as PDP-11 instructions and -dis-assembles the operation code. -Unknown operation codes print as ???. - -.ti -2 -b_ interprets bytes in octal. - -.ti -2 -c_ interprets bytes in ascii. -Unknown ascii characters are printed as \\?. - -.ti -2 -d_ interprets words in decimal. - -.ti -2 -h_ interprets words in hex. - -.ti -2 -o_ interprets words in octal. - -.in -5 -The file argument specifies which file is to be dumped. -If no file argument is specified, -the standard input is used. -Thus od can be used as a filter. - -The offset argument specifies the offset -in the file where dumping is to commence. -This argument is normally interpreted -as octal bytes. -If '.' is appended, the offset is interpreted in -decimal. -If 'b' is appended, the offset is interpreted in blocks. -(A block is 512 bytes.) -If the file argument is omitted, -the offset argument must be preceded by '+'. - -Dumping continues until an end-of-file -condition or until -halted by sending an interrupt signal. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO db(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/olint.1 b/static/v10/man1/olint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9911eee4..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/olint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,147 +0,0 @@ -.TH LINT 1 -.UC 4 -.SH NAME -lint \- a C program verifier -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lint -[ -.B \-abchnpuvx -] -file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Lint -attempts to detect features of the C program -.I files -which are -likely to be bugs, or non-portable, or wasteful. -It also checks the type usage of the program more strictly -than the compilers. -Among the things which are currently found are -unreachable statements, -loops not entered at the top, -automatic variables declared and not used, -and logical expressions whose value is constant. -Moreover, the usage of functions is checked to find -functions which return values in some places and not in others, -functions called with varying numbers of arguments, -and functions whose values are not used. -.PP -By default, it is assumed that all the -.I files -are to be loaded together; they are checked for -mutual compatibility. -Function definitions for certain libraries are available to -.IR lint ; -these libraries are referred to by a -conventional name, -such as `\-lm', in the style of -.IR ld (1). -.PP -Any number of the options in the following list -may be used. -The -.SM -.BR \-D "\*S," -.SM -.BR \-U "\*S," -and -.SM -.B \-I -options of -.IR cc (1) -are also recognized as separate arguments. -.TP -.B p -Attempt to check portability to the -.I IBM -and -.I GCOS -dialects of C. -.TP -.B h -Apply a number of heuristic tests to attempt to -intuit bugs, improve style, and reduce waste. -.TP -.B b -Report -.I break -statements that cannot be reached. -(This is not the default because, unfortunately, -most -.I lex -and many -.I yacc -outputs produce dozens of such comments.) -.TP -.B v -Suppress complaints about unused arguments in functions. -.TP -.B x -Report variables referred to by extern declarations, -but never used. -.TP -.B a -Report assignments of long values to int variables. -.TP -.B c -Complain about casts which have questionable portability. -.TP -.B u -Do not complain about functions and variables used and not -defined, or defined and not used (this is suitable for running -.I lint -on a subset of files out of a larger program). -.TP -.B n -Do not check compatibility against the standard library. -.PP -.IR Exit (2) -and other functions which do not return -are not understood; this causes various lies. -.PP -Certain conventional comments in the C source -will change the behavior of -.IR lint : -.TP -/*NOTREACHED*/ -at appropriate points -stops comments about unreachable code. -.TP -.RI /*VARARGS n */ -suppresses -the usual checking for variable numbers of arguments -in the following function declaration. -The data types of the first -.I n -arguments are checked; -a missing -.I n -is taken to be 0. -.TP -/*NOSTRICT*/ -shuts off strict type checking in the next expression. -.TP -/*ARGSUSED*/ -turns on the -.B \-v -option for the next function. -.TP -/*LINTLIBRARY*/ -at the beginning of a file shuts off complaints about -unused functions in this file. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'/usr/lib/llib-port 'u -/usr/lib/lint/lint[12] programs -.br -/usr/lib/lint/llib-lc declarations for standard functions -.br -/usr/lib/lint/llib-port declarations for portable functions -.SH SEE ALSO -cc(1) -.br -S. C. Johnson, -.I Lint, a C Program Checker -.SH BUGS -There are some things you just -.B can't -get lint to shut up about. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/opr.1 b/static/v10/man1/opr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0c015ccf..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/opr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'OPR (I)'1/15/73'OPR (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME opr -- off line print -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS opr___ [--__] [-_] [+_] [+-__]file918 ... -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION opr___ -will arrange to have the -201 data phone daemon submit a job to the -Honeywell 6070 to print the file arguments. -Normally, -the output appears at the GCOS central site. -If the first argument is --__, the output -is remoted to station R1. -(Station R1 has a 1403 printer.) - -Normally, each file is printed in the state it is found -when the data phone daemon reads it. -If a particular file argument is preceded by +_, -or a preceding argument of +_ has been encountered, -then opr___ will make a copy for the daemon to print. -If the file argument is preceded by -_, -or a preceding argument of -_ has been encountered, -then opr will unlink (remove) the file. - -If there are no -arguments except for the optional --__, -then the standard input is read and off-line printed. -Thus opr___ may be used as a filter. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /usr/dpd/* spool area -.br -/etc/passwd personal ident cards -.br -/etc/dpd daemon -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO dpd(I), passwd(V) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS -- -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ops5.1 b/static/v10/man1/ops5.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c7b58b27..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ops5.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ -.TH OPS5 1 -.SH NAME -ops5 \- a rule-based production-system environment -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ops5 -.SH DESCRIPTION -Ops5 is a rule-based language built on Lisp. -A program consists of a collection of -if\(enthen rules and a global `working memory'. -Each rule has a conditional expression, the -.SM `LHS' -and a -sequence of actions, the -.SM `RHS'. -A -.SM LHS -consists of one or more patterns and is -`satisfied' when every pattern -matches an element in working memory. -.PP -The rule interpreter executes a `recognize-act' cycle: -.IP 1. -Match: Evaluate the -.SM LHS\*Ss -of the rules to determine which are satisfied. -.IP 2. -Conflict Resolution: Select one rule from among the ones with satisfied -.SM LHS\*Ss. -If no -.SM LHS\*Ss -is satisfied halt execution. -.IP 3. -Act: Perform the operations specified in the -.SM RHS -of the selected rule. -.PP -The top level commands -in order of usefulness are: -.TP 12 -.B watch -report on firings and working memory changes -.EX -(watch) ;Report current watch level -(watch 0) ;No report -(watch 1) ;Report rule names and working memory time tags -(watch 2) ;Report rule names, working memory time tags - ;and changes to working memory -.EE -.TP -.B load -load working memory and rule declarations -.EX -(load 'billing.l) ;Load file `billing.l' -.EE -.TP -.B run -start the rule interpreter -.EX -(run) ;Run until no rules are satisfied or halt executed -(run 1) ;Run one rule firing -.EE -.TP -.B exit -exit -.I ops5 -.EX -(exit) -.EE -.B -.TP -.B back -back up the rule interpreter -.EX -(back 32) ;Back up 32 rule firings -.EE -.TP -.B wm -display working memory -.EX -(wm 32) ;Display working memory element 32 -.EE -.TP -.B ppwm -display parts of working memory -.EX -(ppwm customer ^record bad) ;Display all customer working memory - ;elements with `bad' records -.EE -.TP -.B pm -display production or rule memory -.EX -(pm good-customer) ;Display rule `good-customer' -.EE -.TP -.B cs -print the conflict set -.EX -(cs) -.EE -.TP -.B matches -print matches for condition elements of a rule -.EX -(matches bad-customer) ;Display matches for rule `bad-customer' -.EE -.TP -.B pbreak -set a break point after a production firing -.EX -(pbreak bad-but-long-term-customer) ;Set break point after rule - ;`bad-but-long-term-customer' -.EE -.TP -.B make -make working memory elements -.EX -;Make a customer working memory element -(make customer ^name Terry ^record bad ^years 22) -.EE -.TP -.B remove -remove working memory elements -.EX -(remove *) ;Remove all working memory elements -(remove 17) ;Remove working memory element 17 -.EE -.TP -.B excise -remove rules -.EX -;Remove `good-customer' and `bad-customer' rules -(excise good-customer bad-customer) -.EE -.TP -.B openfile -open a file -.EX -;Open `ruletrace.ops' as output -;and associate it with traceoutput port -(openfile traceoutput |ruletrace.ops| out) -;Open `answers' as input and associate it with stdin port -(openfile stdin |answers| in) -.EE -.TP -.B closefile -close a file -.EX -(closefile traceoutput stdin) ;Close traceoutput and stdin ports -.EE -.TP -.B default -change default input and output files -.EX -(default nil trace) ;Change trace port back to default -(default traceoutput write) ;Change write port to traceoutput -(default stdin accept) ;Change accept port to stdin -.EE -.TP -.B strategy -select rule interpreter strategy. -.EX -(strategy) ;Report current strategy -(strategy mea) ;Selects mea strategy -(strategy lex) ;Selects lex strategy (default on startup) -.EE -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/lisp -.TP -.F /usr/lib/lisp -lisp library -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Forgy, C. L., -.IR "OPS5 User's Manual" , -Department of Computer Science, -Carnegie-Mellon University, -July, 1981 -.br -lisp (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -When -.I ops5 -stops executing for any reason, you are placed in the -.I lisp -top-level routine. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/org.1 b/static/v10/man1/org.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6cb7d250..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/org.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH ORG 1 -.SH NAME -org \- show the organization of a document -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B org -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -[file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Org -copies the input text to the output, -and formats it, -preserving headings and paragraph boundaries, -but only including the first and last sentence of each paragraph. -The input text must contain standard -.I mm(1) -macros. -.PP -The output can be used to study the general organization of the paper, -and is sometimes a good abstract. -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH SEE ALSO -mm(1). -.SH BUGS -The input text must contain standard -.I mm -macros. -.PP -.I Org -will not recognize common abbreviations at the end of -a sentence as the sentence end. -Consequently, more than two sentences may be printed for a paragraph. -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/osh.1 b/static/v10/man1/osh.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3202dfb1..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/osh.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1151 +0,0 @@ -.if t .ds ' \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\'\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ -.if n .ds ' ' -.if t .ds ` \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\`\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ -.if n .ds ` ` -.ds OK [\| -.ds CK \|] -.TH SH 1 -.SH NAME -sh \- shell, the standard command programming language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B sh -[ -.B \-ceiknrstuvx -] [ args ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Sh\^ -is a command programming language -that executes commands read from a terminal -or a file. -See -.I Invocation\^ -below -for the meaning of arguments to the shell. -.SS Commands. -A -.I simple-command\^ -is a sequence of non-blank -.I words\^ -separated by -.I blanks\^ -(a -.I blank\^ -is a -tab -or a -space). -The first word specifies the name of the command to -be executed. -Except as specified below, -the remaining words are passed as arguments -to the invoked command. -The command name is passed as argument 0 -(see -.IR exec (2)). -The -.I value\^ -of a simple-command is its exit status -if it terminates normally, or (octal) 200+\f2status\^\fP if -it terminates abnormally (see -.IR signal (2) -for a list of -status values). -.PP -A -.I pipeline\^ -is a sequence of one or more -.I commands\^ -separated by -.BR \(bv . -The standard output of each command but the last -is connected by a -.IR pipe (2) -to the standard input of the next command. -Each command is run as a separate process; -the shell waits for the last command to terminate. -.PP -A -.I list\^ -is a sequence of one or more -pipelines -separated by -.BR ; , -.BR & , -.BR && , -or -.BR \(bv\|\(bv , -and optionally terminated by -.B ; -or -.BR & . -Of these four symbols, -.B ; -and -.B & -have equal precedence, -which is lower than that of -.B && -and -.BR \(bv\|\(bv . -The symbols -.B && -and -.B \(bv\|\(bv -also have equal precedence. -A semicolon -.RB ( ; ) -causes sequential execution of the preceding pipeline; an ampersand -.RB ( & ) -causes asynchronous execution of the preceding pipeline (i.e., the shell does -.I not\^ -wait for that pipeline to finish). -The symbol -.B && -.RB (\| \(bv\|\(bv \^) -causes the -.I list\^ -following it to be executed only if the preceding -pipeline -returns a zero (non-zero) exit status. -An arbitrary number of new-lines may appear in a -.IR list , -instead of semicolons, -to delimit commands. -.PP -A -.I command\^ -is either a simple-command -or one of the following. -Unless otherwise stated, -the value returned by a command is that of the -last simple-command executed in the command. -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP -\f3for\fP \f2name\^\fP \*(OK \f3in\fP \f2word\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP -Each time a -.B for -command is executed, -.I name\^ -is set to the next -.I word\^ -taken from the -.B in -.I word\^ -list. -If -.BI in " word\^" -\&.\|.\|. -is omitted, then -the -.B for -command executes the \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP once for each positional parameter -that is set -(see -.I "Parameter Substitution\^" -below). -Execution ends when there are no more words in the list. -.TP -\f3case\fP \f2word\^\fP \f3in\fP \*(OK \f2pattern\^\fP \*(OK \(bv \ -\f2pattern\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3)\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;;\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3esac\fP -A -.B case -command executes the -.I list\^ -associated with the first -.I pattern\^ -that matches -.IR word . -The form of the patterns is -the same as that used for -file-name generation (see -.I "File Name Generation\^" -below). -.TP -\f3if\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(OK \ -\f3elif\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \ -\*(OK \f3else\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK \f3f\&i\fP -The -.I list\^ -following \f3if\fP is executed and, -if it -returns a zero exit status, the -.I list\^ -following -the first -.B then -is executed. -Otherwise, the -.I list\^ -following \f3elif\fP -is executed and, if its value is zero, -the -.I list\^ -following -the next -.B then -is executed. -Failing that, the -.B else -.I list\^ -is executed. -If no -.B else -.I list\^ -or -.B then -.I list\^ -is executed, then the -.B if -command returns a zero exit status. -.TP -\f3while\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP -A -.B while -command repeatedly executes the -.B while -.I list\^ -and, if the exit status of the last command in the list is zero, executes -the -.B do -.IR list ; -otherwise the loop terminates. -If no commands in the -.B do -.I list\^ -are executed, then the -.B while -command returns a zero exit status; -.B until -may be used in place of -.B while -to negate -the loop termination test. -.TP -\f3(\fP\f2list\^\fP\f3)\fP -.br -Execute -.I list\^ -in a sub-shell. -.TP -\f3{\fP\f2list\^\fP\f3;}\fP -.br -.I list\^ -is simply executed. -.PD -.PP -The following words -are only recognized as the first word of a command -and when not quoted: -.if t .RS -.PP -.B -.if n if then else elif fi case esac for while until do done { } -.if t if then else elif f\&i case esac for while until do done { } -.if t .RE -.SS Comments. -A word beginning with -.B # -causes that word and all the following characters up to a new-line -to be ignored. -.SS Command Substitution. -The standard output from a command enclosed in -a pair of grave accents (\^\f3\*`\^\*`\fP\^) may be used as part or all -of a word; -trailing new-lines are removed. -.SS Parameter Substitution. -The character -.B $ -is used to introduce substitutable -.IR parameters . -Positional parameters may be assigned values by -.BR set . -Variables may be set by writing: -.RS -.PP -.IB name = value\^ -\*(OK -.IB name = value\^ -\*(CK .\|.\|. -.RE -.PP -Pattern-matching is not performed on -.IR value . -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP -\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3}\fP -A -.I parameter\^ -is a sequence of letters, digits, or underscores (a -.IR name ), -a digit, -or any of the characters -.BR \(** , -.BR @ , -.BR # , -.BR ? , -.BR \- , -.BR $ , -and -.BR !\\^ . -The value, if any, of the parameter is substituted. -The braces are required only when -.I parameter\^ -is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore -that is not to be interpreted as part of its name. -A -.I name\^ -must begin with a letter or underscore. -If -.I parameter\^ -is a digit then it is a positional parameter. -If -.I parameter\^ -is -.B \(** -or -.BR @ , -then all the positional -parameters, starting with -.BR $1 , -are substituted -(separated by spaces). -Parameter -.B $0 -is set from argument zero when the shell -is invoked. -.TP -\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:\-\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP -If -.I parameter\^ -is set and is non-null then substitute its value; -otherwise substitute -.IR word . -.TP -\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:=\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP -If -.I parameter\^ -is not set or is null -then set it to -.IR word ; -the value of the parameter is then substituted. -Positional parameters may not be assigned to -in this way. -.TP -\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:?\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP -If -.I parameter\^ -is set and is non-null then substitute its value; -otherwise, print -.I word\^ -and exit from the shell. -If -.I word\^ -is omitted, then the message -``parameter null or not set'' -is printed. -.TP -\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:+\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP -If -.I parameter\^ -is set and is non-null then substitute -.IR word ; -otherwise substitute nothing. -.PD -.PP -In the above, -.I word\^ -is not evaluated unless it is -to be used as the substituted string, -so that, in the following example, -.B pwd -is executed only if -.B d -is not set or is null: -.RS -.PP -echo \|${d:\-\^\*`\^pwd\^\*`\^} -.RE -.PP -If the colon -.RB ( : ) -is omitted from the above expressions, then the -shell only checks whether -.I parameter\^ -is set or not. -.PP -The following -parameters -are automatically set by the shell: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B # -The number of positional parameters in decimal. -.TP -.B \- -Flags supplied to the shell on invocation or by -the -.B set -command. -.TP -.B ? -The decimal value returned by the last synchronously executed command. -.TP -.B $ -The process number of this shell. -.TP -.B ! -The process number of the last background command invoked. -.PD -.RE -.PP -The following -parameters -are used by the shell: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -.SM HOME -The default argument (home directory) for the -.I cd\^ -command. -.TP -.B -.SM PATH -The search path for commands (see -.I Execution\^ -below). -.TP -.B -.SM MAIL -If this variable is set to the name of -a mail file, then the shell informs the user of -the arrival of mail in the specified file. -.TP -.SM -.B PS1 -Primary prompt string, by default -.RB `` "$ \|" ''. -.TP -.SM -.B PS2 -Secondary prompt string, by default -.RB `` "> \|" ''. -.TP -.SM -.B IFS -Internal field separators, -normally -.BR space , -.BR tab , -and -.BR new-line . -.PD -.RE -.PP -The shell gives default values to -\f3\s-1PATH\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS1\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS2\s+1\fP, and \f3\s-1IFS\s+1\fP, -while -.SM -.B HOME -and -.SM -.B MAIL -are -not set at all by the shell (although -.SM -.B HOME -.I is\^ -set by -.IR login (1)). -.SS Blank Interpretation. -After parameter and command substitution, -the results of substitution are scanned for internal field separator -characters (those found in -.BR \s-1IFS\s+1 ) -and split into distinct arguments where such characters are found. -Explicit null arguments (\^\f3"\^"\fP or \f3\*'\^\*'\fP\^) are retained. -Implicit null arguments -(those resulting from -.I parameters\^ -that have no values) are removed. -.SS File Name Generation. -Following substitution, each command -.I word\^ -is scanned for -the characters -.BR \(** , -.BR ? , -and -.BR \*(OK . -If one of these characters appears -then the word is regarded as a -.IR pattern . -The word is replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pattern. -If no file name is found that matches the pattern, then -the word is left unchanged. -The character -.B . -at the start of a file name -or immediately following a -.BR / , -as well as the character -.B / -itself, -must be matched explicitly. -.PP -.PD 0 -.RS -.TP -.B \(** -Matches any string, including the null string. -.TP -.B ? -Matches any single character. -.TP -.BR \*(OK .\|.\|.\^ \*(CK -Matches any one of the enclosed characters. -A pair of characters separated by -.B \- -matches any -character lexically between the pair, inclusive. -If the first character following the opening -\`\`\*(OK\'\' -is a -.B "``!''" -then any character not enclosed is matched. -.PD -.RE -.SS Quoting. -The following characters have a special meaning to the shell -and cause termination of a word unless quoted: -.RS -.PP -\f3; & ( ) \(bv < > new-line space tab\fP -.RE -.PP -A character may be -.I quoted\^ -(i.e., made to stand for itself) -by preceding -it with a -.BR \e . -The pair -.B \enew-line -is ignored. -All characters enclosed between a pair of single quote marks (\^\f3\*'\^\*'\fP\^), -except a single quote, -are quoted. -Inside double quote marks -(\f3"\^"\fP), -parameter and command substitution occurs and -.B \e -quotes the characters -.BR \e , -.BR \*` , -\f3"\fP, -and -.BR $ . -.B -"$\(**" -is equivalent to -\f3"$1 \|$2\fP \|.\|.\|.\f3"\fP, -whereas -.B -"$@" -is equivalent to -.B -"$1"\| -.B -"$2"\| -\&.\|.\|.\|. -.SS Prompting. -When used interactively, -the shell prompts with the value of -.SM -.B PS1 -before reading a command. -If at any time a new-line is typed and further input is needed -to complete a command, then the secondary prompt -(i.e., the value of -.BR \s-1PS2\s+1 ) -is issued. -.SS Input/Output. -Before a command is executed, its input and output -may be redirected using a special notation interpreted by the shell. -The following may appear anywhere in a simple-command -or may precede or follow a -.I command\^ -and are -.I not\^ -passed on to the invoked command; -substitution occurs before -.I word\^ -or -.I digit\^ -is used: -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP 14 -.B word -Use file -.I word\^ -as standard output (file descriptor 1). -If the file does not exist then it is created; -otherwise, it is truncated to zero length. -.TP -.B >\h@-.3m@>word -Use file -.I word\^ -as standard output. -If the file exists then output is appended to it (by first seeking to the end-of-file); -otherwise, the file is created. -.TP -\f3<\h@-.3m@<\fP\*(OK\f3\-\fP\*(CK\f3word\fP -The shell input is read up to a line that is the same as -.IR word , -or to an end-of-file. -The resulting document becomes -the standard input. -If any character of -.I word\^ -is quoted, then no interpretation -is placed upon the characters of the document; -otherwise, parameter and command substitution occurs, -(unescaped) -.B \enew-line -is ignored, -and -.B \e -must be used to quote the characters -.BR \e , -.BR $ , -.BR \*` , -and the first character of -.IR word . -If -.B \- -is appended to -.BR <\h@-.3m@< , -then all leading tabs are stripped from -.I word\^ -and from the document. -.TP -.B <&digit -The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor -.I digit\^ -(see -.IR dup (2)). -Similarly for the standard output using -.BR > . -.TP -.B <&\- -The standard input is closed. -Similarly for the standard output using -.BR > . -.PD -.PP -If one of the above is preceded by a digit, -then the -file descriptor created is that specified -by the digit -(instead of the default 0 or 1). -For example: -.RS -.PP -\&.\|.\|. \|2>&1 -.RE -.PP -creates file descriptor 2 that is a duplicate -of file descriptor 1. -.PP -If a command is followed by -.B & -then the default standard input -for the command -is the empty file -.BR /dev/null . -Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains the -file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by -input/output specifications. -.SS Environment. -The -.I environment\^ -(see -.IR environ (7)) -is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to -an executed program in the same way as a normal argument list. -The shell interacts with the environment in several ways. -On invocation, the shell scans the environment -and creates a -parameter -for each name found, -giving it the corresponding value. -Executed commands inherit the same environment. -If the user modifies the values of these -parameters -or creates new ones, -none of these affects the environment -unless the -.B export -command is used to bind the shell's -parameter -to the environment. -The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed -of any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the shell, -plus any modifications or additions, -all of which must be noted in -.B export -commands. -.PP -The environment for any -.I simple-command\^ -may be augmented by prefixing it with one or more assignments to -parameters. -Thus: -.RS -.PP -\s-1TERM\s+1=450 \|cmd \|args and -.br -(export \|\s-1TERM\s+1; \|\s-1TERM\s+1=450; \|cmd \|args) -.RE -.PP -are equivalent (as far as the above execution of -.I cmd\^ -is concerned). -.PP -If the -.B \-k -flag is set, -.I all\^ -keyword arguments are placed in the environment, -even if they occur after the command name. -The following -first prints -.B "a=b c" -and then -.BR c: -.PP -.RS -.nf -echo \|a=b \|c -set \|\-k -echo \|a=b \|c -.fi -.RE -.SS Signals. -The \s-1INTERRUPT\s+1 and \s-1QUIT\s+1 signals for an invoked -command are ignored if the command is followed by -.BR & ; -otherwise signals have the values -inherited by the shell from its parent, -with the exception of signal 11 -(but see also -the -.B trap -command below). -.SS Execution. -Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions -are carried out. -Except for the -.I "Special Commands\^" -listed below, a new -process is created and -an attempt is made to execute the command via -.IR exec (2). -.PP -The shell parameter -.B -.SM PATH -defines the search path for -the directory containing the command. -Alternative directory names are separated by -a colon -.RB ( : ). -The default path is -.B :/bin:/usr/bin -(specifying the current directory, -.BR /bin , -and -.BR /usr/bin , -in that order). -Note that the current directory is specified by a null path name, -which can appear immediately after the equal sign -or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in the path list. -If the command name contains a \f3/\fP then the search path -is not used. -Otherwise, each directory in the path is -searched for an executable file. -If the file has execute permission but is not an -.B a.out -file, -it is assumed to be a file containing shell commands. -A sub-shell (i.e., a separate process) is spawned to read it. -A parenthesized command is also executed in -a sub-shell. -.SS Special Commands. -The following commands are executed in the shell process -and, except as specified, -no input/output redirection is permitted for such commands: -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP -.B : -No effect; the command does nothing. -A zero exit code is returned. -.br -.TP -.BI ".\| " file\^ -Read and execute commands from -.I file\^ -and return. -The search path -specified by -.B -.SM PATH -is used to find the directory containing -.IR file . -.TP -\f3break\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Exit from the enclosing \f3for\fP or -.B while -loop, if any. -If -.I n\^ -is specified then break -.I n\^ -levels. -.TP -\f3continue\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Resume the next iteration of the enclosing -\f3for\fP or -.B while -loop. -If -.I n\^ -is specified then resume at the -.IR n -th -enclosing loop. -.TP -\f3cd\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK -Change the current directory to -.IR arg . -The shell -parameter -.B -.SM HOME -is the default -.IR arg . -.br -.ne 2.1v -.TP -\f3eval\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The arguments are read as input -to the shell -and the resulting command(s) executed. -.TP -\f3exec\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The command specified by -the arguments is executed in place of this shell -without creating a new process. -Input/output arguments may appear and, if no other -arguments are given, cause the shell -input/output to be modified. -.TP -\f3exit\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK -Causes a shell to exit -with the exit status specified by -.IR n . -If -.I n\^ -is omitted then the exit status is that of the last command executed -(an end-of-file will also cause the shell to exit.) -.TP -\f3export\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The given -.IR name s -are marked -for automatic export to the -.I environment\^ -of subsequently-executed commands. -If no arguments are given, then a list of all -names that are exported in this shell is printed. -.TP -\f3newgrp\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -Equivalent to -.BI "exec newgrp" " arg\^" -\&.\|.\|.\|. -.TP -\f3read\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -One line is read from the standard input and -the first -word is assigned to the first -.IR name , -the second word -to the second -.IR name , -etc., with leftover words assigned to the last -.IR name . -The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered. -.TP -\f3readonly\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK -The given -.IR name s -are marked -.I readonly\^ -and -the values of the these -.IR name s -may not be changed -by subsequent assignment. -If no arguments are given, then a list -of all -.I readonly\^ -names is printed. -.TP -\f3set\fP \*(OK \f3\-ekntuvx\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \*(CK -.RS -.TP -.B \-e -If the shell is non-interactive then exit immediately if a command -exits with a non-zero exit status. -.TP -.B \-k -All keyword arguments are placed in the environment for a command, -not just those that precede the command name. -.TP -.B \-n -Read commands but do not execute them. -.TP -.B \-t -Exit after reading and executing one command. -.TP -.B \-u -Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. -.TP -.B \-v -Print shell input lines as they are read. -.TP -.B \-x -Print commands and their arguments as they are executed. -.TP -.B \-\- -Do not change any of the flags; useful in setting $1 to -. -.PP -Using -.B \+ -rather than -.B \- -causes these flags to be turned off. -These flags can also be used upon invocation of the shell. -The current set of flags may be found in -.BR $\- . -The remaining arguments are positional -parameters and are assigned, in order, to -.BR $1 , -.BR $2 , -\&.\|.\|.\|. -If no arguments are given then the values -of all names are printed. -.RE -.TP -\f3shift\fP -.br -The positional parameters from -.B $2 -\&.\|.\|. -are renamed -.B $1 -\&.\|.\|.\|. -.TP -\f3test\fP -.br -Evaluate conditional expressions. See -.IR test (1) -for usage and description. -.TP -\f3times\fP -.br -Print the accumulated user and system times for processes -run from the shell. -.TP -\f3trap\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. -.I arg\^ -is a command to be read and executed when the shell -receives signal(s) -.IR n . -(Note that -.I arg\^ -is scanned once when -the trap is set and once when the trap -is taken.) -Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. -Any attempt to set a trap on a signal that -was ignored on entry to the current shell -is ineffective. -An attempt to trap on signal 11 (memory fault) produces an error. -If -.I arg\^ -is absent then all trap(s) -.I n\^ -are reset -to their original values. -If -.I arg\^ -is the null -string then this signal is ignored by the shell and by the commands -it invokes. -If -.I n\^ -is 0 then the command -.I arg\^ -is executed -on exit from the shell. -The -.B trap -command -with no arguments prints a list -of commands associated with each signal number. -.TP -\f3umask\fP \*(OK \f2nnn\^\fP \*(CK -The user file-creation mask is set to -.I nnn\^ -(see -.IR umask (2)). -If -.I nnn\^ -is omitted, the current value of the mask is printed. -.TP -\f3wait\fP -Wait for all child processes to terminate -report the termination status. -If -.I n\^ -is not given then all currently active child processes are waited for. -The return code from this command is always zero. -.PD -.PP -.SS Invocation. -If the shell is invoked through -.IR exec (2) -and the first character of argument zero -is -.BR \- , -commands are initially read from -.B /etc/profile -and then from -.BR \s-1$HOME\s+1/.profile , -if such files exist. -Thereafter, commands are read as described below, which -is also the case when the shell is invoked as -.BR /bin/sh . -The flags below are interpreted by the shell on invocation only; Note -that unless the -.B \-c -or -.B \-s -flag is specified, the first argument is assumed to be the -name of a file containing commands, and the remaining -arguments are passed as positional parameters -to that command file: -.PP -.PD 0 -.TP 10 -.BI \-c "\| string\^" -If the -.B \-c -flag is present then -commands are read from -.IR string . -.TP -.B \-s -If the -.B \-s -flag is present or if no -arguments remain -then commands are read from the standard input. -Any remaining arguments specify the positional parameters. -Shell output is written to -file descriptor 2. -.TP -.B \-i -If the -.B \-i -flag is present or -if the shell input and output are attached to a terminal, -then this shell is -.IR interactive . -In this case \s-1TERMINATE\s+1 is ignored (so that \f3kill 0\fP -does not kill an interactive shell) and \s-1INTERRUPT\s+1 is caught and ignored -(so that -.B wait -is interruptible). -In all cases, \s-1QUIT\s+1 is ignored by the shell. -.PD -.PP -The remaining flags and arguments are described under the -.B set -command above. -.PP -.SH EXIT STATUS -Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors, -cause the shell -to return a non-zero exit status. -If the shell is being used non-interactively -then execution of the shell file is abandoned. -Otherwise, the shell returns the exit status of -the last command executed (see also the -.B exit -command above). -.SH FILES -/etc/profile -.br -\s-1$HOME\s+1/\f3.\fPprofile -.br -/tmp/sh\(** -.br -/dev/null -.SH SEE ALSO -cd(1), -env(1), -login(1), -newgrp(1), -rsh(1), -test(1), -umask(1), -dup(2), -exec(2), -fork(2), -pipe(2), -signal(2), -ulimit(2), -umask(2), -wait(2), -a.out(5), -profile(5), -environ(7). -.SH BUGS -The command -.B readonly -(without arguments) produces the same output as the command -.BR export . -.br -If -.B <\h@-.3m@< -is used to provide standard input to an -asynchronous process invoked by -.BR & , -the shell gets mixed up about naming -the input document; -a garbage file -.B /tmp/sh\(** -is created and the shell complains about not being able -to find that file by another name. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ov.1 b/static/v10/man1/ov.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c3a4bcd3..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ov.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'OV (I)'6/12/72'OV (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME ov -- overlay pages -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS ov__ [ file ] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION ov__ -is a postprocessor for producing double column formatted -text when using nroff(I). -ov__ -literally overlays successive pairs of 66-line pages. - -If the file argument is missing, -the standard input is used. -Thus ov__ may be used as a filter. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES none -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO nroff(I), pr(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS none -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS Other page lengths should be permitted. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/p.1 b/static/v10/man1/p.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7ba07596..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/p.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.TH P 1 -.CT 1 comm_term -.SH NAME -p, pg, more \(mi paginate -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B p -[ -.BI - number -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I P -copies its standard input, or the named files if given, -to its standard output, -stopping at the end of every 22nd line, and between files, -to wait for a newline from the user. -The page size may be set by -saying (for example) -.IP -.L p -60 -.PP -While waiting for a newline, -.I p -interprets some commands: -.TP -.B - -Reprint last page. -.L -- -reprints the second last page, etc. -.TP -.B ! -Pass the rest of the line to the shell as a command. -.TP -.B q -Quit. -.PP -.I Pg -and -.I more -are synonyms for -.I p. -.SH BUGS -Because of limited storage, -.I p -can't back up too far. -.br -.I Pg -and -.I more -exist only to placate old programs that call paginators. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pack.1 b/static/v10/man1/pack.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 830e917c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pack.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ -.TH PACK 1 -.CT 1 files -.SH NAME -pack, unpack, pcat, compress, uncompress, zcat \(mi compress and expand files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pack -[ -.B - -] -.I file ... -.PP -.B unpack -.I file ... -.PP -.B pcat -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B compress -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B uncompress -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B zcat -[ -.B -V -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pack -attempts to compress the -.I files -and places the results in -corresponding files named -.IB file .z -with the same access modes, dates, and owner as the originals. -Successfully packed files are removed. -.PP -.I Unpack -reverses the process. -.PP -.I Pcat -unpacks files to the standard output. -.PP -The -.B .z -suffix may be omitted from the name of the -input file for -.I unpack -or -.I pcat. -.PP -.I Pack -encodes individual characters in a Huffman code. -Option -.B - -causes statistics of the encoding to be printed. -The option toggles on and off at each appearance among the -list of -.I files. -.PP -.I Compress, uncompress, -and -.I zcat -work like -.I pack, unpack, -and -.I pcat, -putting each compressed -.I file -into -.IB file .Z . -The options are -.TP -.B -f -(force) -Compress even when it doesn't save space. -.TP -.B -c -Write to the standard output; change no files. -.I Zcat -is identical to -.I uncompress -.B -c. -.TP -.BI -b bits -.I Compress -uses a modified Lempel-Ziv encoding. -Common substrings in the file are replaced by -variable-length codes up to size -.I bits -(default 16). -Smaller limits devour less address space. -.TP -.B -v -Print percent reduction for each file. -.TP -.B -V -Print program version number. -.PP -.I Compress-uncompress -pack better and are faster overall; -.I pack-unpack -work on smaller machines and are much more widely available. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -T. A. Welch, -`A Technique for High Performance Data Compression,' -.I "IEEE Computer," -17 (1984) 8-19. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The exit code of -.I pack, unpack, -or -.I pcat -is the number of files it failed to process. -.PP -The exit code of -.I compress, uncompress, -or -.I zcat -is 0 normally, 1 for error, 2 for ineffective compression -(i.e. expansion). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/paper.1 b/static/v10/man1/paper.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ab19376a..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/paper.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -.TH PAPER 1 -.SH NAME -paper \- list input on HP2621P printer -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B paper -[ -.I file -] -... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I paper -prints the argument files (or the standard input -if there are no arguments) on the user's terminal -which is assumed to be a HP2621P. -A handshaking protocol is used to prevent overrunning -the terminal's buffer and dropping characters. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 b/static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 21ad8a30..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,196 +0,0 @@ -Lest this program stop prematurely, i.e. before displaying - - `END OF TEST', - -try to persuade the computer NOT to terminate execution when an -error like Over/Underflow or Division by Zero occurs, but rather -to persevere with a surrogate value after, perhaps, displaying some -warning. If persuasion avails naught, don't despair but run this -program anyway to see how many milestones it passes, and then -amend it to make further progress. - -Answer questions with Y, y, N or n (unless otherwise indicated). - - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 0 Page: 1 - -Users are invited to help debug and augment this program so it will -cope with unanticipated and newly uncovered arithmetic pathologies. - -Please send suggestions and interesting results to - Richard Karpinski - Computer Center U-76 - University of California - San Francisco, CA 94143-0704, USA - -In doing so, please include the following information: - Precision: double; - Version: 10 February 1989; - Computer: - - Compiler: - - Optimization level: - - Other relevant compiler options: - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 1 Page: 2 - -Running this program should reveal these characteristics: - Radix = 1, 2, 4, 8, 10, 16, 100, 256 ... - Precision = number of significant digits carried. - U2 = Radix/Radix^Precision = One Ulp - (OneUlpnit in the Last Place) of 1.000xxx . - U1 = 1/Radix^Precision = One Ulp of numbers a little less than 1.0 . - Adequacy of guard digits for Mult., Div. and Subt. - Whether arithmetic is chopped, correctly rounded, or something else - for Mult., Div., Add/Subt. and Sqrt. - Whether a Sticky Bit used correctly for rounding. - UnderflowThreshold = an underflow threshold. - E0 and PseudoZero tell whether underflow is abrupt, gradual, or fuzzy. - V = an overflow threshold, roughly. - V0 tells, roughly, whether Infinity is represented. - Comparisions are checked for consistency with subtraction - and for contamination with pseudo-zeros. - Sqrt is tested. Y^X is not tested. - Extra-precise subexpressions are revealed but NOT YET tested. - Decimal-Binary conversion is NOT YET tested for accuracy. - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 2 Page: 3 - -The program attempts to discriminate among - FLAWs, like lack of a sticky bit, - Serious DEFECTs, like lack of a guard digit, and - FAILUREs, like 2+2 == 5 . -Failures may confound subsequent diagnoses. - -The diagnostic capabilities of this program go beyond an earlier -program called `MACHAR', which can be found at the end of the -book `Software Manual for the Elementary Functions' (1980) by -W. J. Cody and W. Waite. Although both programs try to discover -the Radix, Precision and range (over/underflow thresholds) -of the arithmetic, this program tries to cope with a wider variety -of pathologies, and to say how well the arithmetic is implemented. - -The program is based upon a conventional radix representation for -floating-point numbers, but also allows logarithmic encoding -as used by certain early WANG machines. - -BASIC version of this program (C) 1983 by Prof. W. M. Kahan; -see source comments for more history. - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 3 Page: 4 - -Program is now RUNNING tests on small integers: --1, 0, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 27, 32 & 240 are O.K. - -Searching for Radix and Precision. -Radix = 2.000000 . -Closest relative separation found is U1 = 1.3877788e-17 . - -Recalculating radix and precision - confirms closest relative separation U1 . -Radix confirmed. -The number of significant digits of the Radix is 56.000000 . - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 30 Page: 5 - -Subtraction appears to be normalized, as it should be. -Checking for guard digit in *, /, and -. - *, /, and - appear to have guard digits, as they should. - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 40 Page: 6 - -Checking rounding on multiply, divide and add/subtract. -Multiplication appears to round correctly. -Division appears to round correctly. -Addition/Subtraction appears to round correctly. -Checking for sticky bit. -Sticky bit used incorrectly or not at all. - -Does Multiplication commute? Testing on 20 random pairs. - No failures found in 20 integer pairs. - -Running test of square root(x). -Testing if sqrt(X * X) == X for 20 Integers X. -Test for sqrt monotonicity. -sqrt has passed a test for Monotonicity. -Testing whether sqrt is rounded or chopped. -Square root is neither chopped nor correctly rounded. -Observed errors run from 0.0000000e+00 to 5.0000000e-01 ulps. - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 90 Page: 7 - -Testing powers Z^i for small Integers Z and i. -... no discrepancis found. - -Seeking Underflow thresholds UfThold and E0. -Smallest strictly positive number found is E0 = 2.93874e-39 . -Since comparison denies Z = 0, evaluating (Z + Z) / Z should be safe. -What the machine gets for (Z + Z) / Z is 2.00000000000000000e+00 . -This is O.K., provided Over/Underflow has NOT just been signaled. - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 120 Page: 8 - - -FLAW: X = 4.04076183095161330e-39 - is not equal to Z = 2.93873587705571880e-39 . -yet X - Z yields 0.00000000000000000e+00 . - Should this NOT signal Underflow, this is a SERIOUS DEFECT -that causes confusion when innocent statements like - if (X == Z) ... else ... (f(X) - f(Z)) / (X - Z) ... -encounter Division by Zero although actually -X / Z = 1 + 0.375 . -The Underflow threshold is 2.93873587705571880e-39, below which -calculation may suffer larger Relative error than merely roundoff. -SERIOUS DEFECT: Range is too narrow; U1^4 Underflows. -Since underflow occurs below the threshold -UfThold = (2.00000000000000000e+00) ^ (-1.28000000000000000e+02) -only underflow should afflict the expression - (2.00000000000000000e+00) ^ (-1.28000000000000000e+02); -actually calculating yields: 0.00000000000000000e+00 . -This computed value is O.K. - -Testing X^((X + 1) / (X - 1)) vs. exp(2) = 7.38905609893065010e+00 as X -> 1. -Accuracy seems adequate. -Testing powers Z^Q at four nearly extreme values. - ... no discrepancies found. - - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 160 Page: 9 - -Searching for Overflow threshold: -This may generate an error. - -* * * FLOATING-POINT ERROR * * * -Can `Z = -Y' overflow? -Trying it on Y = -8.50705917302346160e+37 . -Seems O.K. -Overflow threshold is V = 1.70141183460469230e+38 . -There is no saturation value because the system traps on overflow. -No Overflow should be signaled for V * 1 = 1.70141183460469230e+38 - nor for V / 1 = 1.70141183460469230e+38 . -Any overflow signal separating this * from the one -above is a DEFECT. - - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 190 Page: 10 - - -What message and/or values does Division by Zero produce? - Trying to compute 1 / 0 produces ... -* * * FLOATING-POINT ERROR * * * - - Trying to compute 0 / 0 produces ... -* * * FLOATING-POINT ERROR * * * - -Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 220 Page: 11 - - -The number of SERIOUS DEFECTs discovered = 1. -The number of FLAWs discovered = 1. - -The arithmetic diagnosed has unacceptable Serious Defects. - -A total of 3 floating point exceptions were registered. -END OF TEST. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pascal.1 b/static/v10/man1/pascal.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8886a2ec..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pascal.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ -.TH PASCAL 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -pascal \(mi language interpreter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pascal -[ -.B -cx -] -[ -.BI - options -] -[ -.B -i -.I name ... -] -[ -.IB name .p -] -[ -.I obj -[ -.I argument ... -] -] -.PP -.B pmerge -.IB name .p -.I \&... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pascal -translates Pascal source programs -to interpretable form, executes them, -or both. -Under option -.B -c -the programs are translated -but not executed. -The translated code appears in file -.FR obj . -Under option -.B -x -.I pascal -interprets the previously translated code in file -.I obj -(default -.FR obj ). -.I Arguments -are made available through the built-ins -.L argc -and -.LR argv . -.PP -Options -.B -c -and -.B -x -must come first. -.PP -Option -.B -i -causes the named procedures and include files to be listed. -.PP -Other options are combined in a separate string: -.TP -.B b -Buffer the runtime -file -.LR output . -.PD0 -.TP -.B l -Make a program listing during translation. -.TP -.B n -List each included -file on a new page with a banner line. -.TP -.B p -Suppress the post-mortem control flow backtrace -if an error occurs; -override execution limit of 500,000 statements. -.TP -.B s -Accept standard Pascal only; -non-standard constructs cause warning diagnostics. -.TP -.B t -Suppress runtime tests of subrange variables and treat -assert statements as comments. -.TP -.B u -Card image mode; -only the first 72 characters of input lines are used. -.TP -.B w -Suppress warning diagnostics. -.TP -.B z -Cause the interpreter to gather profiling data for -later analysis by -.IR pxp (A). -.PD -.PP -.I Pmerge -combines the named source files into a single source file on the -standard output. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/pascal/* -.TP -.F *.p -source -.TP -.F *.i -include files -.TP -.F /usr/lib/pascal/* -.TP -.F obj -.TP -.F /tmp/pix* -obj for compile-and-go -.TP -.F pmon.out -profile data file -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR pc (1), -.IR pxp (A) -.br -W. N. Joy, Susan L. Graham, C. B. Haley, -`Berkeley Pascal User's Manual', in -.I -Unix Programmer's Manual, Seventh Edition, Virtual VAX-11 Version, -1980, Vol 2C -(Berkeley). -There -.I pascal -is called -.I pi, px, -and -.IR pix. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The first character of an -error message indicates its class: -.TP -.L E -Fatal error; no code will be generated. -.PD0 -.TP -.L e -Non-fatal error. -.TP -.L w -Warning \- a potential problem. -.TP -.L s -Warning \- nonstandard Pascal construct. -.SH BUGS -The keyword -.L packed -is recognized but has no effect. -.br -Diagnostics for an included file may appear in the listing -of the next one. -.br -A dummy -.I obj -must be given if both source and -.I arguments -are present. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/passwd.1 b/static/v10/man1/passwd.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c8943a24..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/passwd.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,128 +0,0 @@ -.TH PASSWD 1 -.CT 1 comm_term sa_mortals secur -.SH NAME -passwd, pwx \(mi change login password -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B passwd -[ -.B -an -] -[ -.I name -] -.PP -.B priv pwx -[ [ -.B -qcd -] -.I name -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Passwd -changes a password -associated with the user -.IR name -(your own name by default). -.PP -The program prompts for the old password and then for the new one. -The caller must supply both. -The new password must be typed twice, to forestall mistakes. -.PP -New passwords must be at least four characters long if they use -a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters long -if monocase. -These rules are relaxed if you are insistent enough. -.PP -Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a password; -the owner must prove he knows the old password. -.PP -If the -.B -a -option is given, -.I passwd -prompts for new values of certain fields of the -password file entry. -.PP -The super-user may use the -.B -n -option to install new users. -The prompts are self-explanatory, -and most of the defaults obvious. -A null response to the -.L UID: -prompt -assigns a numeric userid one greater than the -largest one previously in -.FR /etc/passwd . -A null response to -.L Directory: -assigns a home directory in -.FR /usr . -If the first character of the response to this -prompt is an asterisk, the remaining characters -are taken as the name of the new user's home -directory, and a symbolic link to this directory -is placed in -.FR /usr . -.PP -A new user's home directory starts with a file named -.FR .profile , -which is a copy of -.F /etc/stdprofile -with -.B \eN -replaced by the user's name, and -.B \eD -replaced by the name of the user's home directory. -.PP -.I Pwx -modifies the password entry for -the named user in the secret password file, -.IR pwfile (5). -With no option -.I pwx -changes the classical password for the named user, -or the invoker by default. -The options are -.TP -.B -c -Change other information. -A special editing password for a fictitious user, -`pwedit', is demanded. -Then -.I pwx -prompts for treatment of the user password, -SNK key, maximum privilege, and clearance (maximum ceiling). -.TP -.B -d -Delete an entry. -The editing password is demanded. -.TP -.B -q -Demand the user password. -If a correct password is entered, return status 0; -otherwise nonzero. -.PP -Options -.B -c -and -.B -d -require -.B T_SETPRIV -privilege. -.SH FILES -.F /etc/passwd -.br -.F /etc/stdprofile -.br -.F /etc/pwfile -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR crypt (3), -.IR passwd (5), -.IR pwfile (5), -.IR pwserv (8) -.br -Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, -`UNIX password security,' -.I AT&T Bell Laboratories Technical Journal -63 (1984) 1649-1672 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/patch.1 b/static/v10/man1/patch.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 736e0324..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/patch.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,320 +0,0 @@ -''' $Header: patch.man,v 1.3 85/03/26 15:11:06 lwall Exp $ -''' -''' $Log: patch.man,v $ -''' Revision 1.3 85/03/26 15:11:06 lwall -''' Frozen. -''' -''' Revision 1.2.1.4 85/03/12 16:14:27 lwall -''' Documented -p. -''' -''' Revision 1.2.1.3 85/03/12 16:09:41 lwall -''' Documented -D. -''' -''' Revision 1.2.1.2 84/12/05 11:06:55 lwall -''' Added -l switch, and noted bistability bug. -''' -''' Revision 1.2.1.1 84/12/04 17:23:39 lwall -''' Branch for sdcrdcf changes. -''' -''' Revision 1.2 84/12/04 17:22:02 lwall -''' Baseline version. -''' -.de Sh -.br -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -''' -''' Set up \*(-- to give an unbreakable dash; -''' string Tr holds user defined translation string. -''' Bell System Logo is used as a dummy character. -''' -.ie n \{\ -.tr \(bs-\*(Tr -.ds -- \(bs- -.if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(bs\h'-12u'\(bs\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -.if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(bs\h'-12u'\(bs\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -.ds L" "" -.ds R" "" -.ds L' ' -.ds R' ' -'br\} -.el\{\ -.ds -- \(em\| -.tr \*(Tr -.ds L" `` -.ds R" '' -.ds L' ` -.ds R' ' -'br\} -.TH PATCH 1 "May 10, 1986" "Systems Development Corp" -.SH NAME -patch \- a program for applying a diff file to an original -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B patch -[options] orig diff [+ [options] orig] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Patch -will take a patch file containing any of the three forms of difference -listing produced by the -.I diff -program and apply those differences to an original file, producing a patched -version. -By default, the patched version is put in place of the original, with -the original file backed up to the same name with the -extension \*(L".orig\*(R", or as specified by the -.B -b -switch. -You may also specify where you want the output to go with a -.B -o -switch. -If -.I diff -is omitted, or is a hyphen, the patch will be read from standard input. -.PP -Upon startup, patch will attempt to determine the type of the diff file, -unless over-ruled by a -.BR -c , -.BR -e , -or -.B -n -switch. -Context diffs and normal diffs are applied by the -.I patch -program itself, while ed diffs are simply fed to the -.I ed -editor via a pipe. -.PP -.I Patch -will try to skip any leading garbage, apply the diff, -and then skip any trailing garbage. -Thus you could feed an article or message containing a context or normal -diff to -.IR patch , -and it should work. -If the entire diff is indented by a consistent amount, -this will be taken into account. -.PP -With context diffs, and to a lesser extent with normal diffs, -.I patch -can detect when the line numbers mentioned in the patch are incorrect, -and will attempt to find the correct place to apply each hunk of the patch. -As a first guess, it takes the line number mentioned for the hunk, plus or -minus any offset used in applying the previous hunk. -If that is not the correct place, -.I patch -will scan both forwards and backwards for a set of lines matching the context -given in the hunk. -All lines of the context must match. -If -.I patch -cannot find a place to install that hunk of the patch, it will put the -hunk out to a reject file, which normally is the name of the output file -plus \*(L".rej\*(R". -(Note that the rejected hunk will come out in context diff form whether the -input patch was a context diff or a normal diff. -If the input was a normal diff, many of the contexts will simply be null.) -.PP -If no original file is specified on the command line, -.I patch -will try to figure out from the leading garbage what the name of the file -to edit is. -In the header of a context diff, the filename is found from lines beginning -with \*(L"***\*(R" or \*(L"---\*(R", with the shortest name of an existing -file winning. -Only context diffs have lines like that, but if there is an \*(L"Index:\*(R" -line in the leading garbage, -.I patch -will try to use the filename from that line. -The context diff header takes precedence over an Index line. -If no filename can be intuited from the leading garbage, you will be asked -for the name of the file to patch. -.PP -(If the original file cannot be found, but a suitable SCCS or RCS file is -handy, -.I patch -will attempt to get or check out the file.) -.PP -Additionally, if the leading garbage contains a \*(L"Prereq: \*(R" line, -.I patch -will take the first word from the prerequisites line (normally a version -number) and check the input file to see if that word can be found. -If not, -.I patch -will ask for confirmation before proceeding. -.PP -The upshot of all this is that you should be able to say, while in a news -interface, the following: -.Sp - | patch -d /usr/src/local/blurfl -.Sp -and patch a file in the blurfl directory directly from the article containing -the patch. -.PP -If the patch file contains more than one patch, -.I patch -will try to apply each of them as if they came from separate patch files. -This means, among other things, that it is assumed that separate patches -will apply to separate files, and that the garbage before each patch will -be examined for interesting things such as filenames and revision level, as -mentioned previously. -You can give switches (and another original file name) for the second and -subsequent patches by separating the corresponding argument lists -by a \*(L'+\*(R'. -The argument list for a second or subsequent patch may not specify a new -patch file, however. -.PP -.I Patch -recognizes the following switches: -.TP 5 -.B \-b -causes the next argument to be interpreted as the backup extension, to be -used in place of \*(L".orig\*(R". -.TP 5 -.B \-c -forces -.I patch -to interpret the patch file as a context diff. -.TP 5 -.B \-d -causes -.I patch -to interpret the next argument as a directory, and cd to it before doing -anything else. -.TP 5 -.B \-D -causes -.I patch -to use the "#ifdef...#endif" construct to mark changes. -The argument following will be used as the differentiating symbol. -Note that, unlike the C compiler, there must be a space between the -.B \-D -and the argument. -.TP 5 -.B \-e -forces -.I patch -to interpret the patch file as an ed script. -.TP 5 -.B \-l -causes the pattern matching to be done loosely, in case the tabs and -spaces have been munged in you input file. -Any sequence of whitespace in the pattern line will match any sequence -in the input file. -Normal characters must still match exactly. -Each line of the context must still match a line in the input file. -.TP 5 -.B \-n -forces -.I patch -to interpret the patch file as a normal diff. -.TP 5 -.B \-N -forces patch to not try and reverse the diffs if it thinks that they may have -been swapped. See the -.B \-R -option below. -.TP 5 -.B \-o -causes the next argument to be interpreted as the output file name. -.TP 5 -.B \-p -causes leading pathnames to be kept. -If the diff is of the file \*(lqb/a.c\*(rq, patch will look for \*(lqa.c\*(rq -in the \*(lqb\*(rq directory, instead of the current directory. -This probably won't work if the diff has rooted pathnames. -.TP 5 -.B \-r -causes the next argument to be interpreted as the reject file name. -.TP 5 -.B \-R -tells -.I patch -that this patch was created with the old and new files swapped. -(Yes, I'm afraid that does happen occasionally, human nature being what it -is.) -.I Patch -will attempt to swap each hunk around before applying it. -Rejects will come out in the swapped format. -The -.B \-R -switch will not work with ed diff scripts because there is too little -information to reconstruct the reverse operation. -.Sp -If the first hunk of a patch fails, -.I patch -will reverse the hunk to see if it can be applied that way unless the -.B \-N -option is supplied. -If it can, the -.B \-R -switch will be set automatically. -If it can't, the patch will continue to be applied normally. -(Note: this method cannot detect a reversed patch if it is a normal diff -and if the first command is an append (i.e. it should have been a delete) -since appends always succeed. -Luckily, most patches add lines rather than delete them, so most reversed -normal diffs will begin with a delete, which will fail, triggering the -heuristic.) -.TP 5 -.B \-s -makes -.I patch -do its work silently, unless an error occurs. -.TP 5 -.B \-x -sets internal debugging flags, and is of interest only to -.I patch -patchers. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -No environment variables are used by -.IR patch . -.SH FILES -/tmp/patch* -.SH SEE ALSO -diff(1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Too many to list here, but generally indicative that -.I patch -couldn't parse your patch file. -.PP -The message \*(L"Hmm...\*(R" indicates that there is unprocessed text in -the patch file and that -.I patch -is attempting to intuit whether there is a patch in that text and, if so, -what kind of patch it is. -.SH CAVEATS -.I Patch -cannot tell if the line numbers are off in an ed script, and can only detect -bad line numbers in a normal diff when it finds a \*(L"change\*(R" command. -Until a suitable interactive interface is added, you should probably do -a context diff in these cases to see if the changes made sense. -Of course, compiling without errors is a pretty good indication that it -worked, but not always. -.PP -.I Patch -usually produces the correct results, even when it has to do a lot of -guessing. -However, the results are guaranteed to be correct only when the patch is -applied to exactly the same version of the file that the patch was -generated from. -.SH BUGS -Could be smarter about partial matches, excessively \&deviant offsets and -swapped code, but that would take an extra pass. -.PP -If code has been duplicated (for instance with #ifdef OLDCODE ... #else ... -#endif), -.I patch -is incapable of patching both versions, and, if it works at all, will likely -patch the wrong one, and tell you it succeeded to boot. -.PP -If you apply a patch you've already applied, -.I patch -will think it is a reversed patch, and un-apply the patch. -This could be construed as a feature. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pax.1 b/static/v10/man1/pax.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 606de37b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pax.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,657 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" G. S. Fowler -.\" AT&T Bell Laboratories -.\" -.\" @(#)pax.1 (ulysses!gsf) 01/11/90 -.\" -.TH PAX 1 -.SH NAME -pax \- portable archive interchange -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pax -[ -.B \-rmnov -] [ -.B \-f -.I archive -] [ -.B \-s -.RI / old / new /[gp] -] [ -.I "pattern ..." -] -.LP -.B pax -.B \-w -[ -.B mv -] [ -.B \-b -.I blocking -] [ -.B \-f -.I archive -] [ -.B \-s -.RI / old / new /[gp] -] [ -.B \-x -.I format -] [ -.I "pathname ..." -] -.LP -.B pax -.B \-rw -[ -.B mov -] [ -.B \-s -.RI / old / new /[gp] -] [ -.I "pathname ..." -] -.I directory -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I pax -reads and writes archive files in various formats. -There are four operation modes controlled by combinations of the -.B \-r -and -.B \-w -options. -.PP -.B "pax \-w" -writes the files and directories named by the -.I pathname -arguments to the standard output together with -pathname and status information. -A directory -.I pathname -argument refers to the files and (recursively) subdirectories -of that directory. -If no -.I pathname -arguments are given then the standard input is read to get -a list of pathnames to copy, one pathname per line. -In this case only those pathnames appearing on the standard input are copied. -.PP -.B "pax \-r" -reads files from the standard input that is assumed -to be the result of a previous -.B "pax \-w" -command. -Only files with names that match any of the -.I pattern -arguments are selected. -A -.I pattern -is given in the name-generating notation of -.IR sh (1), -except that the -.B / -character is also matched. -The default if no -.I pattern -is given is -.BR * , -which selects all files. -The selected files are conditionally created and copied relative -to the current directory tree, subject to the options described below. -By default the owner and group of selected files will be that of the -current user, and the permissions and modify times will be the same -as those in the archive. -If the -.B \-r -option is omitted then a table of contents of the selected files is -listed on the standard output. -.PP -.B "pax \-rw" -reads the files and directories named in the -.I pathname -arguments and copies them to the destination -.IR directory . -A directory -.I pathname -argument refers to the files and (recursively) subdirectories -of that directory. -If no -.I pathname -arguments are given then the standard input is read to get -a list of pathnames to copy, one pathname per line. -In this case only those pathnames appearing on the standard input are copied. -.I directory -must exist before the copy. -.PP -The standard archive formats are automatically detected on input. -The default output archive format is implementation defined, -but may be overridden by the -.B \-x -option described below. -.I pax -archives may be concatenated to combine multiple volumes on a single -tape or file. -This is accomplished by forcing any format prescribed pad data to be null bytes. -Hard links are not maintained between volumes, and -delta and base archives cannot be multi-volume. -.PP -A single archive may span many files/devices. -The second and subsequent file names are prompted for on the terminal input. -The response may be: -.TP -.BI ! command -Execute -.I command -via -.IR system (3) -and prompt again for file name. -.TP -.B EOF -Exit without further processing. -.TP -.B CR -An empty input line retains the previous file name. -.TP -.I pathname -The file name for the next archive part. -.SS "Basic Options" -These options support basic archive operations. -.TP -.BI b " blocking" -Set the output blocking size. -If no suffix (or a -.B c -suffix) is specified then -.I blocking -is in 1 character units. -A -.B b -suffix multiplies -.I blocking -by 512 (1 block), a -.B k -suffix multiplies -.I blocking -by 1024 (1 kilobyte) and an -.B m -suffix multiplies -.I blocking -by 1048576 (1 megabyte). -.I blocking -is automatically determined on input and is ignored for -.BR \-rw . -The default -.I blocking -is -.B 10k -for block and character special archive files and -implementation defined otherwise. -The minimum -.I blocking -is -.BR 1c . -.TP -.BI f " archive" -.I archive -is the pathname of the input or output archive, overriding the default -standard input for -.B \-r -and -.B \-rw -or standard output for -.BR \-w . -.TP -.B m -File modification times are not retained. -.TP -.B n -For -.B \-r -the pattern arguments are treated as ordinary file names. -Only the first occurrence of each of these files in the -input archive is read. -.I pax -exits with zero exit status after all files in the list have been read. -If one or more files in the list is not found, -.I pax -writes a message to standard error for each of these files -and exits with a non-zero exit status. -The file names are compared before any of the -.B \-i, -.B \-s, -or -.B \-y -options are applied. -.TP -.B o -Restore file ownership as specified in the archive. -The current user must have appropriate privileges. -.TP -\fBs\fP /\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/[\fIglpu\fP] -File names and symbolic link text are mapped according -to the -.IR ed (1) -style substitution expression. -Any non-null character may be used as a delimiter -.RB ( / -shown here). -Multiple -.B \-s -expressions may be specified; the expressions are applied from left to right, -terminating with the first successful substitution. -A trailing -.B l -converts the matched string to lower case. -A trailing -.B p -causes successful mappings to be listed on the standard error. -A trailing -.B u -converts the matched string to upper case. -File names that substitute to the null string are ignored on -both input and output. -The -.B \-P -option inhibits symbolic link text substitution. -.TP -.B v -Produces a verbose table of contents listing on the standard output when both -.B \-r -and -.B \-w -are omitted. -Otherwise the file names are listed on the standard error -as they are encountered. -.TP -.BI x " format" -Specifies the output archive -.IR format . -If specified with -.B \-rw -then the standard input is treated as an archive that is converted to a -.I format -archive on the standard output. -The input format, which must be one of the following, -is automatically determined. -The default output format, named by -.BR \- , -is -.BR cpio . -The formats are: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B asc -The -.B s5r4 -extended -.IR cpio (5) -character format. -.TP -.B ansi -ANSI standard label tape format. -Only regular files with simple pathnames are archived. -Valid only for blocked devices. -.TP -.B asc -The -.B s5r4 -extended -.IR cpio (5) -character format. -.TP -.B aschk -The -.B s5r4 -extended -.IR cpio (5) -character format with header checksum. -This format is misnamed -.B crc -in the -.B s5r4 -documentation. -.TP -.B binary -The -.IR cpio (5) -binary format with symbolic links. -This format is obsolete and should not be used on output. -.TP -.B cpio -The -.IR cpio (5) -character format with symbolic links. -This is the default output format. -.TP -.B ibmar -EBCDIC standard label tape format. -Only regular files with simple pathnames are archived. -Valid only for tape devices. -.TP -.B posix -The IEEE 1003.1b-1990 interchange format, partially compatible with -the X3.27 standard labeled tape format. -.TP -.B portarch -The svr2 portable object library format. -Valid only on input. -.TP -.B randarch -The BSD ranlib object library format. -Valid only on input. -.TP -.B tar -The -.IR tar (5) -format with symbolic links. -.TP -.B ustar -The POSIX IEEE Std 1003.1-1988 tar format. -.TP -.B vmsbackup -ANSI standard label VMS backup savset tape format. -Valid only for input tape devices. -.PD -.RE -.SS "Compatibility Options" -These options provide functional compatibility with the old -.IR cpio (1) -and -.IR tar (1) -commands. -.TP -.B a -For -.B \-w -append files to the end of the archive. -.TP -.B c -Complement the match sense of the -.I pattern -arguments. -.TP -.B d -Intermediate directories not explicitly listed in the archive -are not created. -.TP -.B i -Interactively -.I rename -files. -A file is skipped if a null line is entered and -.I pax -exits if -.B EOF -is encountered. -.TP -.B l -For -.BR \-rw , -files are linked rather than copied when possible. -.TP -.B p -Preserve the access times of input files after they have been copied. -.TP -.BI t " device" -.I device -is an identifier that names the input or output archive device, -overriding the default standard input for -.B \-r -or standard output for -.BR \-w . -Tape devices may be specified as -.IR drive [ density\|rewind ] -where -.I drive -is a drive number in the range [0\-7], -.I density -is one of -.BR l , -.B m -and -.B h -for -.B low -(800 bpi), -.B medium -(1600 bpi \- default) -and -.B high -(6250 bpi) -tape densities and -.I rewind -is -.B n -to inhibit rewinding of the tape device when it is closed. -Other forms for -.I device -are implementation defined. -.TP -.B u -Copy each file only if it is newer than a pre-existing file with the same name. -This option implies -.BR \-a . -.TP -.B y -Interactively prompt for the disposition of each file. -.B EOF -or an input line starting with -.B q -causes -.I pax -to exit. -Otherwise an input line starting with anything other than -.B y -causes the file to be ignored. -.SS "Extended Options" -These options provide fine archive control, including delta archive operations. -.TP -.BI e " filter" -Run the -.I filter -command on each file to be output. -The current name of the file to be output is appended to the filter command -string before the command is executed by the shell. -.TP -.B h -Inhibit archive heading and summmary information messages to stderr. -.TP -.B k -For -.B \-r -continue processing the archive after encountering an error by attempting -to locate the next valid entry. -This is useful for archives stored on unreliable media. -.TP -.BI z " base" -Specifies the delta base archive -.I base -that is assumed to be the result of a previous -.B "pax \-w" -command. -For -.B \-w -the input files are compared with the files in -.I base -and file delta information is placed in the output archive -using the delta algorithm. -For -.B \-r -the delta information in the input archive is used to update the -output files with respect to the files in -.IR base . -For -.B \-rw -the delta information in the archive on the standard input is used -to generate an archive on the standard output whose entries are updated -with respect to the files in -.IR base . -If -.I base -is -.B \- -or an empty file then the input files are simply compressed. -.B "\-z -" -must also be specified to produce a compressed archive for -.BR \-rw . -.TP -.BI B " count" -Sets the maximum archive part output character count. -.I pax -prompts for the next archive part file name. -Valid only with -.BR \-w . -.TP -.B C -Archive entries smaller than -.BI \-B " maxblocks" -must be contained within a single part. -Valid only with -.BR \-B . -.TP -.B L -Copy a logical view of the input files. -Symbolic links are followed, causing the pointed to files to be copied -rather than the symbolic link information. -This is the default. -.TP -.BI M " message" -Set the -.I "end of medium" -prompt to -.IR message . -This message is used to prompt interactively for the next tape -reel or cartridge in cases where the tape runs out before -all files have been copied. -.I message -may contain one -.IR printf (3) -style integer format specification that is replaced with the -next part number. -.TP -.B P -Copy a physical view of the input files. -Causes symbolic link information to be copied as opposed to the -default (logical view) action of following symbolic links -and copying the pointed to files. -.TP -\fBR\fP \fIoption\fP[\fIvalue\fP][,\fIoption\fP[\fIvalue\fP]...] -Set record oriented format options. -Multiple options may be concatenated using -.BR , . -Some options may be fixed for some formats. -The options are: -.RS -.PD 0 -.TP -.B c -Record data is subject to character set conversions. -.TP -.BI f format -Set the output record format to -.IR format . -The supported record formats are: -.RS -.TP -.B D -Variable length with 4 byte record header. -The record size default is 512. -.TP -.B F -Fixed length with no record header. -The record size default is 128. -.TP -.B S -Spanned variable length with 4 byte record header. -The record size default is 0 (no limit). -.TP -.B U -Variable length with no record header. -The output block size matches the size of each output record. -The record size default is 512. -.TP -.B V -Spanned variable length with binary 4 byte record header. -The record size default is 0 (no limit). -The -.B D -format is preferred. -.PD -.RE -.TP -.BI m pattern -Only those files with input record format matching -.I pattern -are processed. -.TP -.B p -Partial output blocks are padded to the full blocksize. -.TP -.BI s size -Set the output record size to -.IR size . -.I size -should divide the output blocking. -.TP -.BI v label -Set the output volume label to -.IR label . -Some formats may truncate and/or case-convert -.IR label . -.PD -.RE -.TP -.B S -Similar to -.B \-l -except that symbolic links are created. -.TP -.BI U " id" -Set file ownership to the default of the user named -.IR id . -Valid only for the super-user. -.TP -.B V -Output a `.' as each file is encountered. -This overrides the -.B \-v -option. -.TP -.B X -Do not cross mount points when searching for files to output. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -The number of files, blocks, and optionally the number of volumes and -media parts are listed on the standard error. -For -.B \-v -the input archive formats are also listed on the standard error. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.B "pax \-w \-t 1m ." -Copies the contents of the current directory to tape drive 1, medium density. -.TP -.PD 0 -.BI mkdir " newdir" -.TP -.BI cd " olddir" -.TP -.BI "pax \-rw ." " newdir" -.PD -Copies the -.I olddir -directory hierarchy to -.IR newdir . -.SH "SEE ALSO" -ar(1), cpio(1), find(1), ksh(1), tar(1), tw(1), libdelta(3), cpio(5), tar(5) -.SH BUGS -Special privileges may be required to copy special files. -.br -Each archive format has a hard upper limit on member pathname sizes. -.br -Device, user-id and group-id numbers larger than 65535 cause additional -header records to be output. -These records are ignored by old versions of -.IR cpio (1) -and -.IR tar (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pc.1 b/static/v10/man1/pc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 26b50792..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,176 +0,0 @@ -.TH PC 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -pc \- pascal language compiler -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pc -[ -.I option -] -[ -.B \-i -.I name ... -] -.I name ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pc -compiles the Pascal source file -.IB name .p -into an executable file called, by default, -.IR a.out . -.PP -Multiple -.B .p -files are compiled into object files suffixed -.B .o -in place of -.BR .p . -Object files may be combined by -.IR ld (1) -into an executable -.I a.out -file. -Exactly one object file must supply a -.B program -statement. -The other files contain -declarations which logically nest within the program. -Objects shared between separately compiled files -must be declared in -.BR include d -header files, whose names must end with -.BR .h . -An -.B external -directive, similar to -.BR forward , -declares -.BR function s -and -.BR procedure s -in -.B .h -files. -.PP -These options have the same meaning as in -.IR cc (1): -.BR "-c -g -w -p -O -S -o" . -The following options are peculiar to -.IR pc . -.TP -.B -C -Compile code to perform runtime checks, -verify -.B assert -statements, -and initialize variables to zero as in -.IR pascal (1). -.PD 0 -.TP -.B -b -Block buffer the file -.I output. -.TP -.B -i -Produce a listing for -the specified procedures, functions and -.B include -files. -.TP -.B -l -Make a program listing during translation. -.TP -.B -s -Accept standard Pascal only; -non-standard constructs cause warning diagnostics. -.TP -.B -z -Allow execution profiling with -.IR pxp (A) -by generating statement counters, and arranging for the -creation of the profile data file -.I pmon.out -when the resulting object is executed. -.PD -.PP -Other arguments -are taken -to be loader option arguments, -perhaps libraries of -.IR pc -compatible -routines; see -.IR ld (1). -Certain options can also be controlled in comments within the program -as described in the -.I "Berkeley Pascal User's Manual." -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/pc2.0strings -.TP -.B file.p -pascal source files -.TP -.B /usr/lib/pc0 -compiler -.TP -.B /lib/f1 -code generator -.TP -.B /usr/lib/pc2 -runtime integrator (inline expander) -.TP -.B /lib/c2 -peephole optimizer -.TP -.B /usr/lib/pc3 -separate compilation consistency checker -.TP -.B /usr/lib/pc2.0strings -text of the error messages -.TP -.B /usr/lib/how_pc -basic usage explanation -.TP -.B /usr/lib/libpc.a -intrinsic functions and I/O library -.TP -.B /usr/lib/libm.a -math library -.TP -.B /lib/libc.a -standard library, see -.IR intro (3) -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR pascal (1), -.IR pxp (A) , -.IR cc (1), -.IR ld (1), -.IR adb (1), -.IR sdb (1), -.IR prof (1) -.br -W. N. Joy, Susan L. Graham, C. B. Haley, -`Berkeley Pascal User's Manual', in -Unix Programmer's Manual, Seventh Edition, Virtual VAX-11 Version, -1980, Vol 2C -(Berkeley). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -See -.IR pascal (1) -for an explanation of the error message format. -Internal errors cause messages containing the word `SNARK'. -.SH BUGS -The keyword -.B packed -is recognized but has no effect. -.br -The binder is not as strict as it might be. -.br -The -.B -z -flag doesn't work for separately compiled files. -.br -Because -.B -s -is used by -.I pc, -it can't be passed to the loader. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 b/static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d8eab605..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -.TH PCOPY 1 -.SH NAME -pcopy \- paranoid file copy -.SH SYNOPSIS -[ -.B priv -] -.B pcopy -[ -.I input output -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pcopy -copies an input file to an output file preserving, -if possible, file ownership, dates, and label. -The copying is performed in -such a way as to assure faithfulness -even in the presence of interfering processes. -.PP -Privilege, obtained via -.IR priv (1), -is required to reproduce privileged files. -The user must be able to write the output file, -and be able to read and write files with the label -of the input file. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR cp (1), -.IR pex (4) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pfe.1 b/static/v10/man1/pfe.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fb139834..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pfe.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -.th PFE I 11/1/73 -.sh NAME -pfe \*- print floating exception -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd pfe -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Pfe -will examine the floating point exception register and -print a diagnostic for the last -floating point exception. -.sh "SEE ALSO" -signal(II) -.sh BUGS -Since there is but one floating point -exception register and it cannot be -saved and restored by the system, -the floating exception -that is printed is the one that occured system wide. -Floating exceptions are therefore volatile. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pic.1 b/static/v10/man1/pic.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 516bc370..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pic.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,341 +0,0 @@ -.de PS \" start picture -. \" $1 is height, $2 is width, both in inches -.if \\$1>0 .sp .35 -.ie \\$1>0 .nr $1 \\$1 -.el .nr $1 0 -.in (\\n(.lu-\\$2)/2u -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de PE \" end of picture -.in -.if \\n($1>0 .sp .65 -.. -.TH PIC 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff graphics -.SH NAME -pic, tpic \(mi troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pic -[ -.I files -] -.PP -.B tpic -[ -.I files -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pic -is a -.IR troff (1) -preprocessor for drawing figures on a typesetter. -.I Pic -code is contained between -.B .PS -and -.B .PE -lines: -.IP -.EX -\&.PS \f2optional-width\fP \f2optional-height\fP -\f2element-list\fP -\&.PE -.EE -If -.IR optional-width -is present, the picture is made that many inches wide, -regardless of any dimensions used internally. -The height is scaled in the same proportion unless -.IR optional-height -is present. -If -.B .PF -is used instead of -.BR .PE , -the typesetting position after printing is restored to what it was -upon entry. -.PP -A line of the form -.IP -.BI .PS < file -causes -.I pic -to treat the the named file as if it stood in place of the -.B .PS -line. -.PP -An -.IR element-list -is a list of elements: -.EX - \f2primitive attribute-list\fP - \f2placename\fP : \f2element\fP - \f2placename\fP : \f2position\fP - \f2var\fP = \f2expr\fP - \f2direction\fP - { \f2element-list\fP } - [ \f2element-list\fP ] - for \f2var\fP = \f2expr\fP to \f2expr\fP by \f2expr\fP do { \f2anything\fP } - if \f2expr\fP then { \f2anything\fP } else { \f2anything\fP } - copy \f2file,\fP copy thru \f2macro,\fP copy \f2file\fP thru \fPmacro\fP - sh { \f2commandline\fP } - print \f2expr\fP - reset \f2optional var-list\fP - \f2troff-command\fP -.EE -.PP -Elements are separated by newlines or semicolons; -a long element may be continued by ending the line with a backslash. -Comments are introduced by a -.BI # -and terminated by a newline. -Variable names begin with a lower case letter; -place names begin with upper case. -Place and variable names retain their values -from one picture to the next. -.PP -After each primitive -the current position moves in the current direction -.RB ( up , down , -.BR left , right -(default)) by the size of the primitive. -The current position and direction are saved upon entry -to a -.BR { ... } -block and restored upon exit. -Elements within a block enclosed in -.BR [ ... ] -are treated as a unit; -the dimensions are determined by the extreme points -of the contained objects. -Names, variables, and direction of motion within a block are local to that block. -.PP -.IR troff-command -is any line that begins with a period. -Such a line is assumed to make sense in the context where it appears; -generally, this means only size and font changes. -Changes to vertical spacing will produce broken pictures. -.PP -The -.I primitive -objects are: -.br -.EX - box circle ellipse arc line arrow spline move \f2text-list\fP -.EE -.L arrow -is a synonym for -.LR "line ->" . -.PP -An -.IR attribute-list -is a sequence of zero or more attributes; -each attribute consists of a keyword, perhaps followed by a value. -.EX -.ta .5i 2.5i - h(eigh)t \f2expr\fP wid(th) \f2expr\fP - rad(ius) \f2expr\fP diam(eter) \f2expr\fP - up \f2opt-expr\fP down \f2opt-expr\fP - right \f2opt-expr\fP left \f2opt-expr\fP - from \f2position\fP to \f2position\fP - at \f2position\fP with \f2corner\fP - by \f2expr, expr\fP then - dotted \f2opt-expr\fP dashed \f2opt-expr\fP - chop \f2opt-expr\fP -> <- <-> - invis same - \f2text-list\fP \f2expr\fP -.EE -Missing attributes and values are filled in from defaults. -Not all attributes make sense for all primitives; -irrelevant ones are silently ignored. -The attribute -.L at -causes the geometrical center to be put at the specified place; -.L with -causes the position on the object to be put at the specified place. -For lines, splines and arcs, -.L height -and -.L width -refer to arrowhead size. -A bare -.I expr -implies motion in the current direction. -.PP -Text is normally an attribute of some primitive; -by default it is placed at the geometrical center of the object. -Stand-alone text is also permitted. -A text list -is a list of text items: -.EX -\f2 text-item\fP: - "..." \f2positioning ...\fP - sprintf("\f2format\fP", \f2expr\fP, \f2...\fP) \f2positioning ...\fP -\f2 positioning\fP: - center ljust rjust above below -.EE -If there are multiple text items for some primitive, -they are arranged vertically and centered except as qualified. -Positioning requests apply to each item independently. -Text items may contain in-line -.I troff -commands for size and font changes, local motions, etc., -but make sure that these are balanced -so that the entering state is restored before exiting. -.PP -A position is ultimately an -.I x,y -coordinate pair, but it may be specified in other ways. -.EX -\f2 position\fP: - \f2expr, expr\fP - \f2place\fP \(+- \f2expr, expr\fP - \f2place\fP \(+- ( \f2expr, expr\fP ) - ( \f2position\fP,\f2 position\fP ) \f2x\fP\fR from one, \f2y\fP\fR the other\fP - \f2expr\fP [\f2of the way\fP] between \f2position\fP and \f2position\fP - \f2expr\fP < \f2position\fP , \f2position\fP > - ( \f2position\fP ) -.EE -.PP -.EX -\f2 place\fP: - \f2placename\fP \f2optional-corner\fP - \f2corner\fP of \f2placename\fP - \f2nth\fP \f2primitive\fP \f2optional-corner\fP - \f2corner\fP of \f2nth\fP \f2primitive\fP - Here -.EE -An -.IR optional-corner -is one of the eight compass points -or the center or the start or end of a primitive. -.EX -\f2 optional-corner\fP: - .n .e .w .s .ne .se .nw .sw .c .start .end -\f2 corner\fP: - top bot left right start end -.EE -Each object in a picture has an ordinal number; -.IR nth -refers to this. -.EX -\f2 nth\fP: - \f2n\fPth\f2, n\fPth last -.EE -.PP -The built-in variables and their default values are: -.EX -.ta .5i 2.5i - boxwid = 0.75 boxht = 0.5 - circlerad = 0.25 arcrad = 0.25 - ellipsewid = 0.75 ellipseht = 0.5 - linewid = 0.5 lineht = 0.5 - movewid = 0.5 moveht = 0.5 - textwid = 0 textht = 0 - arrowwid = 0.05 arrowht = 0.1 - dashwid = 0.1 arrowhead = 2 - scale = 1 -.EE -These may be changed at any time, -and the new values remain in force from picture to picture until changed again -or reset by a -.L reset -statement. -Variables changed within -.B [ -and -.B ] -revert to their previous value upon exit from the block. -Dimensions are divided by -.B scale -during output. -.PP -Expressions in -.I pic -are evaluated in floating point. -All numbers representing dimensions are taken to be in inches. -.EX -\f2 expr\fP: - \f2expr\fP \f2op\fP \f2expr\fP - - \f2expr\fP - ! \f2expr\fP - ( \f2expr\fP ) - variable - number - \f2place\fP .x \f2place\fP .y \f2place\fP .ht \f2place\fP .wid \f2place\fP .rad - sin(\f2expr\fP) cos(\f2expr\fP) atan2(\f2expr,expr\fP) log(\f2expr\fP) exp(\f2expr\fP) - sqrt(\f2expr\fP) max(\f2expr,expr\fP) min(\f2expr,expr\fP) int(\f2expr\fP) rand() -\f2 op\fP: - + - * / % < <= > >= == != && || -.EE -.PP -The -.B define -and -.B undef -statements are not part of the grammar. -.EX - define \f2name\fP { \f2replacement text\fP } - undef \f2name\fP -.EE -Occurrences of -.BR $1 , -.BR $2 , -etc., -in the replacement text -will be replaced by the corresponding arguments if -.I name -is invoked as -.EX - \f2name\fP(\f2arg1\fP, \f2arg2\fP, ...) -.EE -Non-existent arguments are replaced by null strings. -Replacement text -may contain newlines. -The -.B undef -statement removes the definition of a macro. -.PP -.I Tpic -is a -.IR tex (1) -preprocessor that accepts -.IR pic -language. -It produces Tex commands that define a box called -.BR \egraph , -which contains the picture. -The box may be output this way: -.IP -.L -\ecenterline{\ebox\egraph} -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above -move -A: ellipse - circle rad .1 with .w at A.e - circle rad .05 at 0.5 - arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5 -.EE -.PP -.PS -arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above -move -A: ellipse - circle rad .1 with .w at A.e - circle rad .05 at 0.5 - arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5 -.PE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR cip (9.1), -.IR ideal (1), -.IR ped (9.1), -.IR grap (1), -.IR dag (1), -.IR doctype (1), -.IR troff (1) -.br -B. W. Kernighan, -`PIC\(ema Graphics Language for Typesetting', -this manual, Volume 2 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/picasso.1 b/static/v10/man1/picasso.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 41684f16..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/picasso.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -.if n .pH g1.picasso @(#)picasso 1.0 of 1/2/90 -.TH PICASSO 1 -.SH NAME -picasso \- a line drawing program -.SH SYNOPSIS -\f3picasso [ \-b\f2size\fP \-F\f2path\fP \-I\f2path\fP \-l\f2n\fP \-M\f2n\fP \-m\f2margin\fP \-p\f2m\fPx\f2n\fP \-t \-x ] [ \- ] [ \f2file_name\^(s)\fP ] -.ft 1 -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Picasso -is a -processor for a PIC-like drawing language that produces PostScript output. -By default, this output is scaled to fit an 8 by 10 inch print area, and -centered on the page. -.PP -.B \-b -.IR size -specifies a buffer of \f2size\f1 objects accumulated before translation -into PostScript. -By default, an entire picture is buffered; -on machines with small memories, a buffer of a few thousand objects -can prevent thrashing when processing a very large picture. -This option is for exceptional cases and is not often needed. -.PP -.B \-I -.IR path -overrides the standard path for searching for the PostScript prologue -and font descriptions (not needed in normal use). -.PP -.B \-F -.IR path -overrides the standard path for font width tables. -The default is to use the \f(CWtroff\fP tables. -.PP -.B \-l -.IR n -processes layer \f2n\f1 only, as specified by \f(CWcurlayer=\f2n\fP. -.PP -.B \-M -.IR n -magnifies the output image by \f2n\f1 (shrinks if 0 < \f2n\fP < 1). -.PP -.B \-p -.IR m\f3x\fPn -.ft 1 -specifies output device size in inches (8.5x11 default). -.PP -.B \-t -packages the PostScript with surrounding troff input so that the -output file may be passed down a pipeline to -.BR troff (1). -The Drechsler/Wilks -.B mpictures -macro package can be used with -.B troff -to insert the pictures appropriately within the document. -Without the flag -.B picasso -outputs \fIonly\fR PostScript, dropping any text outside the markers -(.PS and .PE) delimiting each picture. -.PP -.B \-m -.IR margin -specifies an empty border, in printer's points, that -.B picasso -will place around each picture. -This may be useful at times to prevent too tight clipping against -adjacent text or the edge of the paper. -By default no margin is supplied; -to cause a 1/8" (9 point) margin, for example, specify -.BR \-m9 . -.PP -.B \-x -suppresses the default scaling and centering. -.PP -The -.B picasso -picture description language is object oriented, the basic objects being -.BR arrow , -.BR arc , -.BR box , -.BR circle , -.BR ellipse , -.BR line , -.BR sector , -.BR spline , -and (quoted) text. -These can be combined, hierarchically, into -.BR blocks . -Primitive objects can be drawn with -.BR solid , -.BR dashed , -.BR dotted , -or -.B invisible -edges. -These edges may be of varying -.B weight -(thickness) -and of any shade of gray (from black = 0 to white = 1) or color. -The predefined colors are -.BR black , -.BR white , -.BR red , -.BR green , -.BR blue , -.BR cyan , -.BR magenta , -and -.BR yellow . -.PP -Objects may be named and referred to by name or by anonymous -references such as -1st box, 4th object, or 2nd last circle. -Object names require an initial upper case letter; -names beginning with lower case or an underscore are numeric variables. -There are a number of predefined variables such as -.BR circlerad , -.BR boxwid , -.BR linecolor . -.B Picasso -provides a limited set of programming language constructs -(loops, if statements, macros, some arithmetic) -for combining simple objects into relatively complex pictures. -.PP -By default, objects are placed on the page adjacent to each other -and from left to right. -The default direction may be changed, and any object can be placed -.B at -a specific postion, -given either in absolute coordinates or by reference to other objects and -points of interest. -Any object has a -.BR top , -.BR bottom , -.BR left , -and -.B right -point; -these points may also be refered to directionally as -.BR north , -.BR south , -.BR west , -and -.B east -(or -.BR n , -.BR s , -.BR w , -and -.BR e .) -The ``corner'' points may also be specified, -.IR e.g. , -.B northwest -or -.BR nw. -Lines have -.B start -and -.B end -points; -you may also refer to -.BR 1st , -.BR 2nd ... -.B nth -points along a line. -Boxes, circles, and ellipses have eight predefined points corresponding -to the directional references mentioned above, the first point being in -the eastern direction and the 8th point towards the southeast. -For any object, the ``corner'' points really lie on the corners of a box -surrounding the object while the ``counted'' points lie on the object itself. -This distinction is normally relevant only for circles and ellipses, but -since an object can be rotated or otherwise transformed it occasionally -has significance for other objects as well. -.SH EXAMPLE -The following is a simple no-smoking sign described in the -.B picasso -language. - -.in +.5i -.ft CW -.nf - .PS - d = 0.5 - [ box ht d wid 3.5 weight d/20 - box ht d wid d/2 filled 0.5 noedge - spline weight 0.2 edge .75 right d then up d \\ - then right d then up d - ] - linecolor = red; lineweight = 0.375 - circle rad 3 at last block - line from last circle .4th to last circle .8th - .PE -.in -.5i -.fi -.ft R - -If this is used in a -.B troff -document and processed through -.B picasso -with the -.B -t -flag, the .PS marking the start of the picture can specify the size and -placement of the picture at that point in your document. -For example, to place the no smoking sign centered on the page in a 3 -inch square area, flag the start of the picture with\f(CW .PS 3 3 c\fR. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR troff (1), -.BR troff (5) -.SH REFERENCE -R. L. Drechsler and A. R. Wilks, -.I PostScript pictures in troff documents. -.br -B. W. Kernighan, -.I PIC \(em A Crude Graphics Language for Typesetting -.br -N-P. Nelson, M. L. Siemon, -.I -Picasso 1.0, An OPEN LOOK Drawing Program -.ft P -.\" @(#)picasso.1 1.0 of 1/4/84 -.SH BUGS -.B Picasso -is not completely compatible with -.BR pic (1). -Besides having a number of new keywords and predefined variable names, -.B picasso -also centers pictures on a page rather than placing them at upper left. -.P -The interactive version is unable to generate many elements -of the language, nor will it preserve such elements (e.g., loops) -if they are read in then written out. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pico.1 b/static/v10/man1/pico.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a1ff018f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pico.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,273 +0,0 @@ -.TH PICO 1 -.CT 1 editor graphics -.SH NAME -pico \(mi graphics editor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pico -[ -.B -mfto -] -[ -.B -wN -hN -] -[ -.I files -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pico -is an interactive editor for grey-scale and color images. -Editing operations are expressed in a C-like style. -The options are -.TP \w'\f5slower\ 'u -.BI -m n -Display on a Metheus frame buffer, -.BI /dev/om n. -A missing -.I n -is taken to be 0. -.TP -.B -f -Display on an Itoh frame buffer, -.BR /dev/iti0 . -.TP -.B -t -Show parse trees for expressions; toggled by the interactive command -.LR tree . -.TP -.B -o -Turn off the optimizer; toggled by -.LR optim . -.PP -Files are referred to in expressions as -.BI $ n, -where -.I n -is the basename or an integer, -see -.B f -below. -Otherwise file names are given as strings in double quotes, -which may be elided from names that do not contain -.LR / . -.LP -In general, the result of the previous edit -operation is available under the name -.LR old . -The destination -of the current operation is called -.LR new . -.LP -.I Pico -handles images with coordinates (0,0) in the upper left hand corner -and -.RB ( X , Y ) -in the lower right. -Brightnesses range from 0 (black) to -.BR Z -(white, -.BR Z =255). -The quantities -.BR X , Y , Z -may be used in expressions and set by options: -.TP \w'\f5slower\ 'u -.BI -w " n -Set the width -.B X -of the work area to -.I n -pixels, default 511. -.TP -.BI -h " n -Set the height -.BR Y , -default 511. -.PP -.LP -.I Pico -reads commands from the standard input: -.TP -.B help -Give a synopsis of commands and functions. -.TP -.BI a " file -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI a " x y w d file" -Attach a new file. -Optional parameters -.I x -and -.I y -give the origin of a subrectangle in the work buffer; -.I w -and -.I d -define width and depth of the image as stored in the file. -.TP -.BI d " file" -.PD0 -.TP -.BI "d $" n -Delete (close) the file. -.PD -.TP -.BI h " file" -Read header information from the file. -.TP -.BI r " file" -Read commands from -.I file -as if they were typed on the terminal. -Can not be done recursively. -.TP -.BI w " file -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI "w - " file -Write the file, restricted to the current window -(see below). -Use -.I pico -format by default. -With a minus flag, -write a headerless image -(red channel only, if picture is colored); see also -.IR picfile (5). -.TP -.B nocolor -.PD0 -.TP -.B color -Set the number of channels updated in the work buffer to 1 -(black and white) or 3 (red, green, blue). -.PD -.TP -.BI window " x y w d" -Restrict the work area to a portion of the -work buffer with the upper left corner at -.RI ( x,y ), -and the lower right at -.RI ( x+w, y+d ). -.TP -.BI get " file" -.br -.ns -.TP -.BI "get $" n -The picture file is (re)opened and read into the work area. -.TP -.B f -Show names, sizes, and file numbers of open files. -.TP -.B faster -.br -.ns -.TP -.B slower -In slow display the screen is updated once per pixel computed; -in fast display (default), once per line of pixels. -.TP -.BI show " name" -Show symbol table information, such as the current value of variables. -If -.I name -is omitted, the whole symbol table is shown. -.TP -.B functions -Print information on all user defined and builtin functions. -.TP -.BI def " name \fB(\fI args \fB) {\fI program \fB}" -Define a function, with optional arguments. -Variables are declared in these styles: -.PD0 -.IP -.EX -int var; -global int var; -array var[N]; -global array var[N]; -.EE -.PD -.TP -.BI x " expr" -Execute the expression in a default loop over all pixels in the -current window. -.TP -.BI "x {" program " }" -Execute the -.I program. -The program must define its own control flow. -.TP -.B q -Quit. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L "pico -w1280 -h1024 -m5" -Get a work buffer that exactly fills a Metheus screen. -.TP -.L -a "/tmp/images/rob" -Make a file accessible. -It will be known henceforth as -.LR $rob . -.PP -.EX -.L a 1280 0 3072 512 junk -.L get $junk -.EE -.PD0 -.IP -Direct attention to a 512\(mu512 subrectangle in the middle -of a 3072\(mu512 image stored in a file named junk, -and read it into the workspace. -.LP -.EX -x new = Z - old -x new[x,y] = Z - old[x,y] -x {for(x=0; x<=X; x++) for(y=0; y<=Y; y++) new[x,y] = Z-old[x,y];} -.EE -.PD0 -.IP -Three ways to make a negative image. -Note the defaults on control flow -and array indexing. -.PD -.LP -.EX -window 0 0 256 256 -x new = $1[xclamp(x*2), yclamp(y*2)] -.EE -.PD0 -.IP -Scale a 512\(mu512 image to one quarter of the screen. -The built-in functions -.L xclamp -and -.L yclamp -guard against indexing out of range. -.PD -.LP -.EX -x { printf("current value of %s[%d]:\et%d\en", "histo", 128, hist[128]); } -.EE -.PD0 -.IP -Turn off the default control flow (curly braces) and use the -builtin function printf to check the value of an array element. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR bcp (1), -.IR imscan (1), -.IR flicks (9.1), -.IR rebecca (9.1), -.IR picfile (5), -.IR flickfile (9.5) -.br -G. J. Holzmann, -`PICO Tutorial', -this manual, Volume 2 -.br -G. J. Holzmann, -.I Beyond Photography\(emthe Digital Darkroom, -Prentice-Hall, 1988 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/picpack.1 b/static/v10/man1/picpack.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ee5a428f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/picpack.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -.TH PICPACK 1 -.SH NAME -.B picpack -\- PostScript picture packing preprocessor -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpicpack\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B picpack -copies -.I files -to stdout, expanding picture inclusion requests -(marked by the -.MW .BP -or -.MW .PI -macros) into an in-line -format that can be passed through -.B troff -and handled by -.BR dpost . -If no -.I files -are specified -or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.I files -standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-k list -.I list -is a comma- or space-separated string of words used to locate -picture inclusion requests. -The start of every line in the input -.I files -is compared with each word in -.I list . -If there is a match, the second string on the line is -taken as the pathname of a picture file that is added -to the output file. -The default -.I list -is -.RM `` ".BP .PI ''. -.TP -.OP \-q -Suppress ``missing picture file'' error messages. -.PP -.B picpack -is a trivial preprocessor that, in a sense, duplicates some of the -picture inclusion capabilities already available in -.BR dpost . -.B picpack -should not be used if your formatting command line includes -a call to -.BR dpost . -Its only purpose is to combine picture files with text in a single -file that can be passed through -.B troff -and unpacked, at some later time, by -.BR dpost . -The original picture inclusion mechanism, with files are pulled in by -.BR dpost , -is the preferred approach. -.SH EXAMPLES -A typical application might be in a distributed printing environment -where everything up to -.B troff -is run by the user and everything after -.B troff -is handled by a spooling daemon (perhaps -.BR lp ). -In that case the command line would be, -.EX -pic \f2file\fP | tbl | eqn | picpack | troff -mm -Tpost | lp -.EE -A poor example, although one that should still work, would be, -.EX -pic \f2file\fP | tbl | eqn | picpack | troff -mm -Tpost | dpost >\f2file\fP.ps -.EE -In this case picture inclusion requests could (and should) be handled by -.BR dpost . -Running -.B picpack -is not needed or even recommended. -It should be dropped from any pipeline that includes a call to -.BR dpost . -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH WARNINGS -.PP -Combining pictures and text using the capabilities available in -.B dpost -is the recommended approach and is always guaranteed to be more -efficient than -.BR picpack . -Running -.B picpack -and -.B dpost -in the same pipeline makes little sense. -.PP -Using -.B picpack -will likely result in files that can no longer be reliably passed -through other important -.B troff -postprocessors like -.BR proof . -At present -.B picpack -is only guaranteed to work with -.BR dpost . -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR troff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pl.1 b/static/v10/man1/pl.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 85794975..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pl.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.TH PL 1 SHARE -.SH NAME -pl \- print share information for designated users -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pl -[-a[g]] [-[n][v]] [-pfilename] [-u uid[-uid] ...] [login-name ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pl -prints the share information -for the given list of login names. -The optional flags affect the default behaviour as follows:- -.TP "\w'-pfileXX'u" -.BI -a [g] -This flag causes information on all currently active users to be printed. -The optional flag -.B g -restricts the selection to real users (ie: doesn't print -.IR groups ). -.TP -.BI -n -The normal output is one item per line, -this flag puts all items for a user on the same line. -.TP -.BI -p file -Directs -.I pl -to use an alternate shares file, whose path name is -.IR file . -.TP -.BI -u -The list is assumed to be user IDs. -If any two user IDs are separated by a minus, then an inclusive range is assumed. -.TP -.BI -v -The normal output includes descriptions of each item, -this flag turns off verbose mode. -.PP -If no arguments are given then -.I pl -will use the login name of the person that executed -the command. -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP "\w'/etc/sharesXX'u" -/etc/shares -The shares file. -.TP -/etc/passwd -Information on user names and \s-1ID\s0s. -.PD -.SH "SEE ALSO" -lnode(5), passwd(5), share(5). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/plot.1 b/static/v10/man1/plot.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 67165bab..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/plot.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ -.th PLOT I 6/4/73 -.sh NAME -plot \*- make a graph -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd plot -[ option ] ... -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Plot -takes pairs of numbers from the -standard input as abscissas and -ordinates of a graph. -The graph is plotted on the storage scope, /dev/vt0. -.s3 -The following options are recognized, -each as a separate argument. -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBa\fR Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from -the input); spacing is given by the next -argument, or is assumed to be 1 if next argument is not a number. -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBc\fR Place character string given by next argument -at each point. -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBd\fR Omit connections between points. (Disconnect.) -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBg\fIn\fR Grid -style: -.lp +5 0 -\fIn\fR=0, no grid -.lp +5 0 -\fIn\fR=1, axes only -.lp +5 0 -\fIn\fR=2, complete grid (default). -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBs\fR Save screen, don't erase before plotting. -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBx\fR Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) \fIx\fR limits. -.s3 -.lp +5 5 -\fBy\fR Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) -\fIy\fR limits. -.s3 -.i0 -Points are connected by straight line segments in the order -they appear in input. -If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, or if -the automatic increment is negative, the graph is plotted -upside down. -Automatic abscissas begin with the lower \fIx\fR limit, or with 0 -if no limit is specified. -Grid lines and automatically determined limits fall on round -values, however roundness -may be subverted by giving an inappropriately rounded -lower limit. -Plotting symbols specified by -.bd c -are -placed so that a small initial letter, -such as + o x, will fall -approximately on the plotting point. -.sh FILES -/dev/vt0 -.sh "SEE ALSO" -spline(VI) -.sh BUGS -A limit of 1000 points is enforced silently. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/post.1 b/static/v10/man1/post.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2d63982c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/post.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,607 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.TH POST 1 "Post 4.0" " " -.ds q \fBpost\fP -.ds p \fIpost\fP -.SH NAME -post \- read or send mail with corporate directory access -.SH SYNOPSIS -.SS Reading Mail -\*q [\fImailx\fR(1) options] -.SS Sending Mail -\*q [\fImailx\fR(1) options] [directory query options] address ... -.SS Directory Assistance -\*q \fB\-D\fR -.br -\*q \fB\-w\fR [directory query options] address ... -.SS Directory Update -\*q \fB\-S\fR -.SS Administrative -\*q \fB\-G\fR [\fIsource\fR [\fIdest\fR]] -.br -\*q \fB\-V\fR -.SH DESCRIPTION -\*p is a mail processing system for reading and sending -messages using -.IR mailx (1). -It provides the ability to look up employee/site information in -on-line corporate directories, in addition -to recognizing -.IR mailx (1) -and -.IR mail (1) -addressing conventions. -\*p also generates paper mail for intra-company delivery. -.SS "Addressing" -An -.I address -is one of: -.RS 2 -.TS -tab(;); -l l. -\fIalias\fP;as defined in \fImailx\fR(1) -\fIlocal file delivery\fP;\fB+\fIfile\fR or \fB|\fIprogram\fR as defined in \fImailx\fR(1) -\fInetwork address\fP;[\fIsystem\fB!\fR...]\fB!\fIlogin\fR or \fIlogin\fB@\fIsystem\fR -\fIpaper address\fP;\fBpaper!\fIname\fB:\fIloc\fB:\fIroom\fR -\fIlogin\fP;local user login id -\fIquery\fP;corporate directory query -.TE -.RE -.PP -First, -.I alias -is resolved. -If the first character is a \fB+\fR or \fB|\fR, \fIlocal file delivery\fP -is assumed. -Then, \fIaddress\fP is searched from the left for the -first occurrence of a \fB!\fR, \fB@\fR, \fB/\fR, \fB:\fP, or \fB\=\fR. -If this character is a -.BR ! " or" -.BR @ , -.I address -is a -.I "network address" -.RI ( login -in -.I "network address" -can be a -.I query -or -.IR mail (1) -system-wide alias). -An -.I address -beginning with -.B paper! -delivers intra company mail specified by -.IR name , -.IR loc , -.RI and " room. -If the first character from the left is a -.BR / , -.BR : " or" -.BR = , -then -.I address -is a -.I query. -Finally, if -.B \%POSTETC -is set in the environment and -.I address -is found in -.BR /etc/passwd , -it is a -.IR login , -otherwise it is treated as a -.IR query . -A -.I query -is one more -.I "value pairs" -separated by -.BR / " or" -.BR : . -Colon must be used in place of slash in \fIsystem\fB!\fIquery\fR. -A -.I "value pair" -is the construction \fIattribute\fB=\fIvalue\fR -(see -.BR Attributes ). -.SS "Reading Mail" -.PP -See -.IR mailx (1). -.SS "Sending Mail" -See -.IR mailx (1) -and -.B Directory Queries. -A resolution prompt will appear if -.I address -is ambiguous or invalid. -.br -.SS "Directory Assistance" -.TP -.B \-D -Gives you information on the corporate directory: -a support contact for reporting problems, -the last update of the directory, -and available attributes and titles. -.TP -.B \-w -Who. -Query directory. -.br -.ne 2i -.SS "Directory Update" -.TP -.B \-S -Update user information interactively and set up a new user on the system. -This is automatically invoked when using \*p for the first time to send mail. -The session prompts for personnel identification number, -reporting organization, -location code, room number, telephone number and electronic -mail address. -The default for each prompt is displayed within brackets. -To delete a value, enter -.BR \- . -Any new information is electronically mailed to the Corporate Directory -Administrator for update of the master directory. -.SS "Administrative" -.TP -.B \-G \fR[\fIsource\fR [\fIdest\fR]] -Generate a new -.IR user (4) -file by reading the -.I source -file, deleting entries for users no longer on the system, and writing -the result to the file -.IR dest . -Both -.I source -and -.I dest -are in -.IR user (4) -format and the default for both is -.BR $POST/lib/user . -.TP -.B \-V -Print the current version and release date. -.SS "Directory Queries" -.TP -.BI \-a " attribute\fR[\fI/attribute\fR...] -Provide default -.IR attribute(s) . -If a -.I query -sequence is missing an -.IR attribute , -assume the corresponding -.I attribute -in the -.B \-a -argument. -The default is -.BR pn . -.TP -.BI \-m " mods -Opens the directory specified by -.I mods -(see -.IR modules (4)). -.TP -.BI \-o " fmt -Format output of directory search (see -.BR "Output Formatting" ). -The default format is -.br -.B "%24pn %10org %6loc %6room %12tel %ema" -.TP -.BI \-q " query -Provide default value pairs. -If a -.I query -is missing a -value pair given in the -.BR \-q -argument, add the value pair to the -.I query -(see -.BR POSTQUAL ). -.br -.ne 8i -.SS Attributes -The ``Directory Attributes'' table below contains a list of the -attributes used in -.IR queries . -The table also supplies a short description, a match type and a list -of value characteristics (see explanation following table) for each attribute. -.PP -.TS -center,allbox,tab(;); -c s s s s -c | c | c | c | c -l | l | c | c | l. -\fBDirectory Attributes\fP -\fIAttribute;Description;Match Type;Characteristics;Example\fR -_ -pn;personal name;x;i;pn=j.f.s.smith,jr -name;personal name;x;i;name=p_jones_\^_md -first;first name;p;ia;first=frederick -middle;first middle name;p;ia;middle=bernard -middle2;second middle name;p;ia;middle2=emile -last;last name;s;ia;last=adams -suffix;name suffix;e;ia;suffix=sr -soundex;soundex code;e;i;soundex=m460 -_ -pid;personnel identification number;n;a;pid=103459 -org;organization code;p;i;org=45263 -com;company affiliation;p;i;com=bl -tl;title abbreviation;w;i;tl=dh -occ;occupational code;e;;occ=c -_ -tel;full telephone number;t;a;tel="(201) 386-4419" -area;area code;e;a;area=201 -exch;exchange;e;a;exch=386 -ext;extension;e;a;ext=4419 -cornet;cornet number;e;a;cornet=232 -_ -loc;location code;s;ia;loc=wh -room;room number;p;ia;room=3a-359 -street;street address;p;ia;street="whippany road" -city;city address;p;ia;city=whippany -state;state address;e;ia;state=nj -zip;zip code;p;a;zip=07981 -_ -ema;email address;s;;ema=attmail!fsmith -_ -multi;employees with multiple locations;e;m;multi=1 -_ -attribute;display valid attributes;e;;\-o %attribute -.TE -.PP -.SS Match Type -.PD 0 -.TP -.B e -Exact match. -.TP -.B n -Numeric match. -.TP -.B p -Prefix match. -.TP -.B s -Exact match unless argument ends with a star -.RB ( * ), -in which case prefix match. -.TP -.B t -Telephone match. -Treat rightmost four numbers as extension, -next three rightmost as exchange, -and last three rightmost as area code. -Non-alphanumerics are ignored. -The output format is -.IR "area exch ext" " ." -.TP -.B w -Prefix match on every word. -.TP -.B x -Personal name match. -Syntax for personal name is: -[\fIfirst\fB.\fR[\fImiddle\fB.\fR[\fImiddle2\fB.\fR]]]\fIlast\fR[\fB,\^\fIsuffix\fR]\ \ or -[\fIfirst\fB_\fR[\fImiddle\fB_\fR[\fImiddle2\fB_\fR]]]\fIlast\fR[\fB_\^_\fIsuffix\fR] -.br -.ne 1i -To prefix match on last name, append -.B * -or -.B ... -to -.IR last . -To phonetic match on last name, append -.B ? -or -.B ~ -to -.IR last , -or prepend personal name with -.BR ? . -The output format for -.B pn -is -\fIlast\fB,\ \fIfirst\ middle\ middle2\fB,\ \fIsuffix\fR\ ; -and -.B name -is -\fIfirst\fB_\fImiddle\fB_\fImiddle2\fB_\fIlast\fB_\^_\fIsuffix\fR\ . -See -.B first, -.B middle, -.B middle2, -.B last, -and -.B suffix -for the characteristics of the individual parts of -.BR pn " and -.BR name . -.PD -.SS Characteristics -.PD 0 -.TP -.B a -Ignore non-alphanumerics. -.TP -.B i -Ignore case. -.TP -.B m -Multiple records match. -If argument is empty, -.BR 1 " or -.BR 2 , -retrieve first, second or third record for -.IR query , -respectively. -.PD -.PP -\*p attributes used for mail delivery are described in the following table. -These attributes only take effect on -.IR queries . -.PP -.TS -center,box,tab(;); -c s s -c | c | c -c | l | lw(3i). -\fBDelivery Attributes\fP -_ -\fIAttribute;Possible Values;Description -= -\fRdel;paper;T{ -Delivery type. -Forces paper mail delivery for \fIquery\fP recipients. -T} -_ -ask;yes, no (default);T{ -Ask before sending mail. -The recipients of the message are displayed. -T} -_ -all;yes, no (default);T{ -Send to all recipients matching \fIquery\fP. -Useful when sending to entire organizations. -The \fIquery\fP is not expanded in the message header. -T} -_ -.TE -.SS Output Formatting -The -.I fmt -argument specified with the -.B \-o -option is used as a -.IR printf (3C)-like -string for formatting the output of directory queries. -All characters are copied literally, except for -attribute substitutions and backslash escapes. -Quoting may be necessary to prevent shell interpretation. -.PP -The syntax for attribute substitutions is: -.IP -\fB% \fIflags width . precision \fIattribute\fP -.PP -Only -.BR % " and -.I attribute -are required. -.I Flags -may be one or more of the following: -.RS 2 -.PD 0 -.TP -.B \(mi -Right justify (left justification is the default). -.TP -.B ^ -Capitalize the first letter of each word. -.TP -.B + -Capitalize all letters in the value. -.TP -.B < -If the value is empty, -delete back to the last -.B \e\^< -or beginning of output. -.TP -.B > -If the value is empty, skip to the next -.B \e\^> -or end of format string. -.RE -.PD -.PP -.I Width -is an integer giving the minimum field width. -If the value has fewer characters than this number, the -value will be padded on the right (or left, if the -.B \(mi -flag is present) with blank spaces. -The default -.I width -is zero. -.P -.I Precision -is an integer that specifies -the maximum number of characters to -be printed from the value. -If the value has -more characters than this number, they will not -be printed. -Zero is a special case meaning print all characters (the default). -A period is used to -separate -.I width -and -.I precision -and is only used if -.I precision -is used. -.PP -To follow an -.I attribute -with an alphanumeric, -enclose the attribute substitution -(except for the percent sign) in curly braces, -.BR {} . -.PP -.ne 3i -The backslash escapes are: -.PP -.TS -allbox,center,tab(;); -c s -c | c -c | l. -\fBOutput Format Backslash Escapes\fP -\fIEscape;Meaning\fR -_ -\e\^c;Suppress terminating new-line -\e\^b;Backspace -\e\^f;Form feed -\e\^n;New-line -\e\^r;Carriage return -\e\^t;Tab -\e\^v;Vertical Tab -\e\^\fInnn\fR;Octal ASCII character -\e\^<;Marker for < flag -\e\^>;Marker for > flag -.TE -.br -.SS Environment Variables -.TP -.B POSTETC -When this variable is set, \*p will search -.B /etc/passwd -for -.I login -arguments. -.TP -.BI POSTQUAL\= query -Provide default -.I "value pairs" -for -.IR query . -If a -.I query -is missing -.I "value pair" -given in the -.B POSTQUAL -argument, add it to the -.I query -.RB ( \-q -overrides -.BR POSTQUAL ). -.SH EXAMPLES -.PD 0 -Read from your \fBmbox\fP file: -.IP -post \-f -.PP -Send mail to all department heads in Division 452: -.IP -post org=452/tl=dh/all=yes -.PP -Send paper mail to all employees at Whippany in section 3A: -.IP -post loc=wh/room=3a/all=yes/del=paper -.PP -Query directory for employees using system whutt: -.IP -post \-w ema=whutt!* -.PP -Query directory and format output in label-like form: -.IP -post \-w \-o "%^pn\e\^n%+loc %+room" org=123 -.PP -Query directory for valid attributes: -.IP -post \-w \-o %attribute -.PD -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.TP 30 -$POST/lib/dispatch -distributed directory map -.TP -$POST/lib/mailx -mailx program used by \*p -.TP -$POST/lib/user -list of -.IR post (1) -users on this system -.TP -$POST/lib/dbinfo -program to retrieve directory information -.TP -$POST/lib/update -program to update directory -.TP -$POST/lib/genuser -program to update -.IR user (4) -file -.TP -/bin/mail -local mail delivery agent -.TP -/bin/rmail -remote mail delivery agent -.TP -/etc/passwd -list of local users -.PD -.SH SEE ALSO -btoa(1), -fixmbox(1), -forward(1), -gone.fishing(1), -mail(1), -mailx(1), -pq(1), -genesis(1M), -server(1M), -upas(1M), -pq(3C), -dispatch(4), -ev(4), -mail(4), -modules(4), -user(4). -.br -.nf -.I "Post 4.0 Product Release Description" -.I "Post 4.0 Primer" -.I "Post 4.0 User Guide" -.I "Post 4.0 User Reference Manual" -.I "Post 4.0 Administrator Reference Manual" -.I "Post 4.0 Quick Reference Card" -.I "Post 4.0 Programmer Guide" -.I "Post 4.0 Administrator Guide" -.fi -.SH WARNINGS -Colon must be used in place of slash in the construction: -\fIsystem\fB!\fIquery\fR. -.SH BUGS -Mailings to very large mailing lists, e.g., -.BR com=bl/all=yes , -may fail by exceeding system limits (see -.IR exec (2)). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 b/static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 971e14a0..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,243 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTBGI 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B postbgi -\- PostScript translator for -.SM BGI -(Basic Graphical Instructions) files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostbgi\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postbgi -translates -.SM BGI -(Basic Graphical Instructions) -.I files -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-f name -Print text using font -.IR name . -Any PostScript font can be used, -although the best results will only be -obtained with constant width fonts. -The default font is Courier. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which by default is located at the center of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-w num -Set the line width used for graphics to -.I num -points, where a point is approximately 1/72 -of an inch. -By default -.I num -is set to 0 points, which forces lines to be -one pixel wide. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed at the -center of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y up the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves everything up the page. -The default offset is 0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -The default selects file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/postbgi.ps . -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request , -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0, the request -applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted, the request -lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.PP -.B postbgi -can handle -.SM STARE -(black and white) and -.SM PRISM -(color) -.SM BGI -jobs. -By default plots are rigidly scaled to fill the page, which produces -the good results for most -.SM STARE -jobs. -.SM PRISM -jobs typically fill regions with colors, and often require device -specific tuning to produce acceptable results. -Adding the -.MW \-P"/prism\ true\ def" -option is strongly recommended when -.B postbgi -is translating -.SM PRISM -jobs. -.br -.ne 7v -.SH EXAMPLES -For most -.SM STARE -jobs, -.EX -postbgi \f2file -.EE -gives good results, while -.EX -postbgi \-P"/prism true def" \f2file -.EE -is recommended when translating -.SM PRISM -jobs. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH BUGS -The default line width is too small for write-white -print engines, like the one used by the PS-2400. -Several -.SM BGI -opcodes have not been implemented. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/postbgi.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy (1), -.BR postdmd (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postmd (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR posttek (1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 b/static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a8716aa2..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTDAISY 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B postdaisy -\- PostScript translator for Diablo 630 files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostdaisy\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postdaisy -translates Diablo 630 daisy-wheel -.I files -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-f name -Print -.I files -using font -.IR name . -Any PostScript font can be used, -although the best results will only be -obtained with constant width fonts. -The default font is Courier. -.TP -.OP \-h num -Set the initial horizontal motion index to -.IR num . -Determines the character advance and the default -point size, unless the -.OP \-s -option is used. -The default is 12. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which is located near the upper left corner of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-r num -Selects carriage return and line feed behavior. -If -.I num -is 1 a line feed generates a carriage return. -If -.I num -is 2 a carriage return generates a line feed. -Setting -.I num -to 3 enables both modes. -.TP -.OP \-s num -Use point size -.I num -instead of the default value set by the -initial horizontal motion index. -.TP -.OP \-v num -Set the initial vertical motion index to -.IR num . -The default is 8. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed near the -upper left corner of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y down the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0.25 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves text down the page. -The default offset is 0.25 inches. -.TP -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -The default selects file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/postdaisy.ps . -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request , -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0, the request -applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted, the request -lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/postdaisy.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdmd (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postmd (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR posttek (1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 b/static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cb3317b1..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,206 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTDMD 1 -.SH NAME -.B postdmd -\- PostScript translator for -.SM DMD -bitmap files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostdmd\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postdmd -translates -.SM DMD -bitmap -.IR files , -as produced by -.BR dmdps , -or -.I files -written in the Ninth Edition -.BR bitfile (9.5) -format -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-b num -Pack the bitmap in the output file using -.I num -byte patterns. -A value of 0 turns off all packing of the output file. -By default -.I num -is 6. -.TP -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-f -Flip the sense of the bits in -.I files -before printing the bitmaps. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which by default is located at the center of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-u -Disables much of the unpacking for Eighth -Edition bitmap files. -Usually results in smaller output files that take longer to print. -Not a recommended option. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed at the -center of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y up the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves everything up the page. -The default offset is 0. -.TP -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/postdmd.ps . -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request, -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0, the request applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted, the request lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.PP -Only one bitmap is printed on each logical page, and each of the input -.I files -must contain complete descriptions of at least one bitmap. -Decreasing the pattern size using the -.OP \-b -option may help throughput on printers with fast processors -(e.g., \s-1PS\s+1-810), -while increasing the pattern size will often be the right move -on older models -(.e.g, \s-1PS\s+1-800). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.br -.ne 4v -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/postdmd.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postmd (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR posttek (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postgif.1 b/static/v10/man1/postgif.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 35476893..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postgif.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,157 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTGIF 1 -.SH NAME -.B postgif -\- PostScript translator for -.SM GIF -files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostgif\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postgif -translates Graphics Interchange Format (\s-1GIF\s+1) -.I files -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-f -Flip the sense of the bits in -.I files -before printing the pixmaps. -.TP -.OP \-g -Generate picture in gray instead of color -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which by default is located at the center of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed at the -center of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y up the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves everything up the page. -The default offset is 0. -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/postgif.ps . -.PP -Two options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.PP -Only one pixmap is printed on each logical page, -and each of the input -.I files -must contain complete descriptions of at least one pixmap. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.br -.ne 1i -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/postgif.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy (1), -.BR postdmd (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postmd (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR posttek (1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postio.1 b/static/v10/man1/postio.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3075951b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postio.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,308 +0,0 @@ -.TH POSTIO 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B postio -\- serial interface for PostScript printers -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostio\f1 -.OP \-l line -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postio -sends -.I files -to the PostScript printer attached to -.IR line . -If no -.I files -are specified the standard input is sent. -The first group of -.I options -should be sufficient for most applications: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-b speed -Transmit data over -.I line -at baud rate -.I speed. -Recognized baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. -The default -.I speed -is 9600 baud. -.TP -.OP \-c -Do not send -.MR ^C s -(interrupts) to the printer, -which means -.B postio -does not force a busy printer into the idle state. -.TP -.OP \-l line -Connect to printer attached to -.IR line . -In most cases there is no default and -.B postio -must be able to read and write -.IR line . -If -.I line -does not begin with -.MW / -it is treated as a Datakit destination. -.TP -.OP \-q -Prevents status queries while -.I files -are being sent to the printer. -When status queries are disabled a dummy message is appended -to the log file before each block is transmitted. -.TP -.OP \-B num -Set internal buffer size for reading and writing -.I files -to -.I num -bytes -(default is 2048 bytes). -.TP -.OP \-D -Enable debug mode. -Guarantees that everything read on -.I line -will be added to the log file (standard error by default). -.TP -.OP \-L file -Data received on -.I line -gets put in -.IR file . -The default log -.I file -is standard error. -Printer or status messages that do not indicate a change in state -are not normally written to -.I file -but can be forced out using the -.OP \-D -option. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Send -.I string -to the printer before any of the input files. -The default -.I string -is simple PostScript code that disables timeouts. -.TP -.OP \-R num -Run -.B postio -as a single process if -.I num -is 1 or as separate read and write processes if -.I num -is 2. -By default -.B postio -runs as a single process. -.PP -The next two -.I options -are provided for users who expect to run -.B postio -on their own. -Neither is suitable for use in spooler interface -programs: -.TP 0.35i -.OP \-i -Run the program in interactive mode. -Any -.I files -are sent first and followed by the standard input. -Forces separate read and write processes -and overrides many other options. -To exit interactive mode use your interrupt or quit character. -To get a friendly interactive connection with the printer type -.MW executive -on a line by itself. -.TP -.OP \-t -Data received on -.I line -and not recognized as printer or status information is written to -the standard output. -Forces separate read and write processes. -Convenient if you have a PostScript program that -will be returning useful data to the host. -.PP -The last option is not generally recommended and should only -be used if all else fails to provide a reliable connection: -.TP 0.35i -.OP \-S -Slow the transmission of data to the printer. -Severely limits throughput, runs as a single process, -disables the -.OP \-q -option, limits the internal buffer size to 1024 bytes, -can use an excessive amount of -.SM CPU -time, and does nothing in interactive mode. -.PP -Best performance is usually obtained by using -a large internal buffer -.OP -B "" ) ( -and by running the program as separate read and write processes -.OP \-R2 "" ). ( -Inability to fork the additional process causes -.B postio -to continue as a single read/write process. -When one process is used, only data sent to the printer is flow-controlled. -.PP -The options are not all mutually exclusive. -The -.OP \-i -option always wins, selecting its own settings for whatever is -needed to run interactive mode, independent of anything else -found on the command line. -Interactive mode runs as separate read and write processes -and few of the other -.I options -accomplish anything in the presence of the -.OP \-i -option. -The -.OP \-t -option needs a reliable two way connection to the printer and -therefore tries to force separate read and write processes. -The -.OP \-S -option relies on the status query mechanism, so -.OP \-q -is disabled and the program runs as a single process. -.PP -In most cases -.B postio -starts by making a connection to -.I line -and then attempts to force the printer into the -.SM IDLE -state by sending an appropriate sequence of -.MW ^T -(status query), -.MW ^C -(interrupt), and -.MW ^D -(end of job) characters. -When the printer goes -.SM IDLE -.I files -are transmitted along with an occasional -.MW ^T -(unless the -.OP \-q -option was used). -After all the -.I files -are sent the program waits until it is reasonably sure the -job is complete. -Printer generated error messages received at any time -except while establishing the initial connection -(or when running interactive mode) cause -.B postio -to exit with a non-zero status. -In addition to being added to the log file, printer error messages -are also echoed to standard error. -.SH EXAMPLES -Run as a single process at 9600 baud and send -.I file1 -and -.I file2 -to the printer attached to -.MR /dev/tty01 : -.EX -postio -l /dev/tty01 \f2file1 file2 -.EE -Same as above except two processes are used, -the internal buffer is set to 4096 bytes, -and data returned by the printer gets put in file -.MR log : -.EX -postio -R2 -B4096 -l/dev/tty01 -Llog \f2file1 file2 -.EE -Establish an interactive connection with the printer at Datakit -destination -.MR my/printer : -.EX -postio -i -l my/printer -.EE -Send file -.MW program -to the printer connected to -.MR /dev/tty22 , -recover any data in file -.MR results , -and put log messages in file -.MR log : -.EX -postio -t -l /dev/tty22 -L log program >results -.EE -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if the files ran successfully. -System errors (e.g., ``can't open the line'') set the low order -bit in the exit status, while PostScript errors set bit 1. -An exit status of 2 usually means the printer -detected a PostScript error in the input -.IR files . -.SH WARNINGS -.PP -The input -.I files -are handled as a single PostScript job. -Sending several different jobs, each with their own internal -end of job mark -.RM ( ^D ) -is not guaranteed to work properly. -.B postio -may quit before all the jobs have completed and could be restarted -before the last one finishes. -.PP -All the capabilities described above may not be available on every -machine or even across the different versions of -.SM UNIX -that are currently supported by the program. -For example, the code needed to connect to a Datakit destination may only -work on System\ V and may require that the -.SM DKHOST -software package be available at compile time. -.PP -There may be no default -.I line -so using -.OP \-l -option is strongly recommended. -If omitted -.B postio -may attempt to connect to the printer using the standard output. -If Datakit is involved the -.OP \-b -may be ineffective and attempts by -.B postio -to flow control data in both directions may not work. -The -.OP \-q -option can help if the printer is connected to \s-1RADIAN\s+1. -The -.OP \-S -option is not generally recommended and should only be used if -all else fails to establish a reliable connection. -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR buildtables (1), -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy (1), -.BR postdmd (1), -.BR postmd (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR posttek (1), -.BR printfont (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postmd.1 b/static/v10/man1/postmd.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fb67d969..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postmd.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,330 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTMD 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B postmd -\- matrix display program for PostScript printers -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostmd\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postmd -reads a series of floating point numbers from -.IR files , -translates them into a PostScript gray scale image, -and writes the results on the standard output. -In a typical application the numbers might be -the elements of a large matrix, -written in row major order, -while the printed image could help locate -patterns in the matrix. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-b num -Pack the bitmap in the output file using -.I num -byte patterns. -A value of 0 turns off all packing of the output file. -By default -.I num -is 6. -.TP -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-d dimen -Sets the default matrix dimensions for all input -.I files -to -.IR dimen . -The -.I dimen -string can be given as rows or rows\^\(mu\^columns. -If columns is omitted it will be set to rows. -By default -.B postmd -assumes each matrix is square and sets the number of rows -and columns to the square root of the number of elements in -each input file. -.TP -.OP \-g list -.I list -is a comma- or space-separated string of integers, each lying between -0 and 255 inclusive, -that assigns PostScript gray scales to the regions of the real line -selected by the -.OP \-i -option. -255 corresponds to white and 0 to black. -.B postmd -assigns a default gray scale that omits white (i.e., 255) and gets -darker as the regions move from left to right along the real line. -.TP -.OP \-i list -.I list -is a comma- or space-separated string of -.I N -floating point numbers that -partition the real line into -.RI 2 N +1 -regions. -The -.I list -must be given in increasing numerical order. -The partitions are used to map floating point numbers read from the input -.I files -into gray scale integers that are assigned automatically by -.B postmd -or arbitrarily selected using the -.OP \-g -option. -The default interval -.I list -is ``\*(mB\-1,0,1\fP'' which partions the real line into 7 regions. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which by default is located at the center of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-w window -.I window -is a comma- or space-separated list of four positive integers that -select the upper left and lower right corners of a submatrix from -each of the input -.IR files . -Row and column indices start at 1 in the upper left corner and the -numbers in the input -.I files -are assumed to be written in row major order. -By default the entire matrix is displayed. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed at the -center of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y up the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves everything up the page. -The default offset is 0. -.TP -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -The default selects file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/postmd.ps . -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request , -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0, the request -applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted, the request -lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.PP -Only one matrix is displayed on each logical page, -and each of the input -.I files -must contain complete descriptions of exactly one matrix. -Matrix elements are floating point numbers arranged in row major order in -each input file. -White space, including newlines, is not used to determine matrix -dimensions. -By default -.B postmd -assumes each matrix is square and sets the number of rows and columns -to the square root of the number of elements in the input file. -Supplying default dimensions on the command line using the -.OP \-d -option overrides this default behavior, and in that case the -dimensions apply to all input -.IR files . -.PP -An optional header can be supplied with each input file and is used -to set the matrix dimensions, the partition of the real line, the gray scale -map, and a window into the matrix. -The header consists of keyword/value pairs, each on a separate line. -It begins on the first line of each input file and ends with the -first unrecognized string, which should be the first matrix element. -Values set in the header take precedence, but only apply to the -current input file. -Recognized header keywords are -.MR dimension , -.MR interval , -.MR grayscale , -and -.MR window . -The syntax of the value string that follows each keyword parallels what is -accepted by the -.OP \-d , -.OP \-i , -.OP \-g , -and -.OP \-w -options. -.SH EXAMPLES -For example, suppose -.I file -initially contains the 1000 numbers -in a 20\(mu50 matrix. -Then the command line: -.EX -postmd -d20x50 -i"-100 100" -g0,128,254,128,0 \f2file -.EE -and prepending the header, -.EX -dimension 20x50 -interval -100.0 .100e+3 -grayscale 0 128 254 128 0 -.EE -to -.I file -and typing the command line: -.EX -postmd \f2file -.EE -produce exactly the same output. -The interval list partitions the real line into five regions and -the gray scale list maps numbers less than \-100 or greater than 100 -into 0 (i.e., black), numbers equal to \-100 or 100 into 128 -(i.e., 50 percent -black), and numbers between \-100 and 100 into 254 (i.e., almost white). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH WARNINGS -The largest matrix that can be adequately displayed is a function -of the interval and gray scale lists, the printer resolution, -and the paper size. -A 600\(mu600 matrix is an optimistic upper bound for a two element interval -list (i.e. five regions) using 8.5\(mu11 inch paper on a 300 dpi printer. -.PP -Using white (i.e., 255) in a gray scale list is not recommended and will not -show up in the legend and bar graph that -.B postmd -displays below each image. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/postmd.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy (1), -.BR postdmd (1), -.BR postio (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR postreverse (1), -.BR posttek (1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postnews.1 b/static/v10/man1/postnews.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 994091a6..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postnews.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -.TH POSTNEWS 1 -.UC -.SH NAME -postnews \- submit news articles -.SH SYNOPSIS -.BR postnews " [ " -.IR article " ]" -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Postnews -is a shell script that calls -.IR inews (1) -to submit news articles to USENET. -It will prompt the user for the title of the article -(which should be a phrase suggesting the subject, -so that persons reading the news can tell if they -are interested in the article) -for the newsgroup, -and for the distribution. -.PP -An omitted newsgroup (from hitting return) -will default to -.IR general . -.PP -.I general -is read by everyone on the local machine. -Other possible newsgroups include, but are not limited to, -.IR btl.general , -which is read by all users at all Bell Labs sites on USENET, -.IR net.general , -which is read by all users at all sites on USENET, -and -.IR net.news , -which is read by users interested in the network news on all sites. -There is often a local set of newsgroups, such as -.IR ucb.all , -that circulate within a local set of machines. -(In this case, -.I ucb -newsgroups circulate among machines at the -University of California at Berkeley.) -.PP -The distribution can be any valid newsgroup name list, -and defaults to the same as the newsgroup. -(If they are the same, the distribution will be omitted from the -headers put into the editor buffer.) -A distribution header will, if given, be included in the headers -of the article, affecting where the article is distributed to. -.PP -After entering the title, newsgroup, and distribution, -the user will be placed in an editor. -If $EDITOR is set in the environment, that editor will be used. -Otherwise, postnews defaults to -.IR vi (1). -.PP -An initial set of headers containing the subject and newsgroups -will be placed in the editor, followed by a blank line. -The article should be appended to the buffer, after the blank line. -These headers can be changed, or additional headers added, -while in the editor, if desired. -.PP -Optionally, the article -will be read from the specified -.IR filename . -.PP -For more sophisticated uses, such as posting news from a program, see -.IR inews (1). -.SH FILES -.PD 0 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Mail(1), -checknews(1), -inews(1), -mail(1), -readnews(1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postprint.1 b/static/v10/man1/postprint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 93dd3ff8..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postprint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,257 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTPRINT 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B postprint -\- PostScript translator for text files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostprint\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postprint -translates text -.I files -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-f name -Print -.I files -using font -.IR name . -Any PostScript font can be used, -although the best results will only be -obtained with constant width fonts. -The default font is Courier. -.TP -.OP \-l num -Set the length of a page to -.I num -lines. -By default -.I num -is 66. -Setting -.I num -to 0 is allowed, and will cause -.B postprint -to guess a value, based on the point size that is being used. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which is located near the upper left corner of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP -.OP \-r num -Selects carriage return behavior. -Carriage returns are ignored if -.I num -is 0, -cause a return to column 1 if -.I num -is 1, -and generate a newline if -.I num -is 2. -The default -.I num -is 0. -.TP -.OP \-s num -Print -.I files -using point size -.IR num . -When printing in landscape mode -.I num -is scaled by a factor that depends on the -imaging area of the device. -The default size for portrait mode is 10. -.TP -.OP \-t num -Assume tabs are set every -.I num -columns, starting with the first column. -By default tabs are set every 8 columns. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed near the -upper left corner of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y down the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0.25 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves text down the page. -The default offset is 0.25 inches. -.TP -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -The default selects file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/postprint.ps . -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request , -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0, the request -applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted, the request -lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.PP -A new logical page is started after 66 lines have been printed -on the current page, or whenever an -.SM ASCII -form feed character is read. -The number of lines per page can be changed using the -.OP \-l -option. -Unprintable -.SM ASCII -characters are ignored, -and lines that are too long are silently truncated -by the printer. -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -Print -.I file1 -and -.I file2 -in landscape mode: -.EX -postprint -pland \f2file1 file2 -.EE -Print three logical pages on each physical page in portrait mode: -.EX -postprint -n3 \f2file -.EE -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/postprint.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy(1), -.BR postdmd(1), -.BR postio(1), -.BR postmd(1), -.BR postreverse(1), -.BR posttek(1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 b/static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d7c3fd1e..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -.TH POSTREVERSE 1 -.SH NAME -.B postreverse -\- reverse the page order in a PostScript file -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpostreverse\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" file [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B postreverse -reverses the page order in files that conform to Adobe's -Version 1.0 or Version 2.0 PostScript file structuring conventions, -and writes the results on the standard output. -Only one input -.I file -is allowed and if no -.I file -is specified, the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-o list -Select pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-r -Do not reverse the pages in -.IR file . -.TP -.OP \-T dir -Use -.I dir -as the temporary file directory when -reading from the standard input. -By default -.I dir -is set to -.MR /tmp . -.PP -.B postreverse -can handle a limited class of files -that violate page independence, -provided all global definitions are bracketed by -.MW %%BeginGlobal -and -.MW %%EndGlobal -comments. -In addition, files that mark the end of each page with -.MW "%%EndPage:\ label\ ordinal" -comments will also reverse properly, provided the prologue and -trailer sections can be located. -If -.B postreverse -fails to find an -.MW %%EndProlog -or -.MW %%EndSetup -comment the entire -.I file -is copied, unmodified, to the standard output. -.PP -Since global definitions are pulled out of individual -pages and put in the prologue, the output file can be -minimally conforming, even if the input -.I file -was not. -.SH EXAMPLES -Select pages 1 to 100 from -.I file -and reverse the pages: -.EX -postreverse -o1-100 \f2file -.EE -Print four logical pages on each physical page -and reverse all the pages: -.EX -postprint -n4 \f2file\fP | postreverse -.EE -Produce a minimally conforming file from output -generated by dpost without reversing the pages: -.EX -dpost \f2file\fP | postreverse -r -.EE -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I file -was successfully processed. -.SH BUGS -No attempt has been made to deal with redefinitions of global -variables or procedures. -If standard input is used, the input -.I file -will be read three times before being reversed. -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy(1), -.BR postdmd(1), -.BR postio(1), -.BR postmd(1), -.BR postprint(1), -.BR posttek(1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/posttek.1 b/static/v10/man1/posttek.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2477170b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/posttek.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,198 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH POSTTEK 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B posttek -\- PostScript translator for Tektronix 4014 files -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBposttek\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B posttek -translates Tektronix 4014 graphics -.I files -into PostScript and writes the results on the -standard output. -If no -.I files -are specified, or if -.OP \- -is one of the input -.IR files , -the standard input is read. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP -.OP \-f name -Print text using font -.IR name . -Any PostScript font can be used, -although the best results will only be -obtained with constant width fonts. -The default font is Courier. -.TP -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which by default is located at the center of -each page. -The default magnification is 1.0. -.TP -.OP \-n num -Print -.I num -logical pages on each piece of paper, -where -.I num -can be any positive integer. -By default -.I num -is set to 1. -.TP -.OP \-o list -Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated -.IR list . -The list contains single numbers -.I N -and ranges -.IR N1\-\|N2 . -A missing -.I N1 -means the lowest numbered page, a missing -.I N2 -means the highest. -.TP -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBlandscape\fP. -.TP -.OP \-w num -Set the line width used for graphics to -.I num -points, where a point is approximately 1/72 -of an inch. -By default -.I num -is set to 0 points, which forces lines to be -one pixel wide. -.TP -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive x axis. -The default -coordinate system has the origin fixed at the -center of the page, with positive -x to the right and positive y up the page. -Positive -.I num -moves everything right. -The default offset is 0.0 inches. -.TP -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the positive y axis. -Positive -.I num -moves everything up the page. -The default offset is 0.0. -.TP -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -The default selects file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -.TP -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/posttek.ps . -.PP -Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript -at controlled points in the translation process: -.TP 0.75i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.I file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-P string -Include. -.I string -in the output file; -.I string -must be legitimate PostScript. -.TP -.OP \-R action -Requests special -.I action -(e.g., -.MR manualfeed ) -on a per page or global basis. -The -.I action -string can be given as -.IR request, -.IM request : page\f1\|, -or -.IM request : page : file\f1\|. -If -.I page -is omitted or given as 0, the request -applies to all pages. -If -.I file -is omitted, the request -lookup is done in -.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A 0 exit status is returned if -.I files -were successfully processed. -.SH BUGS -The default line width is too small for write-white -print engines, like the one used by the \s-1PS\s+1-2400. -.br -.ne 4v -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/posttek.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postdaisy(1), -.BR postdmd(1), -.BR postio(1), -.BR postmd(1), -.BR postprint(1), -.BR postreverse(1), -.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pp.1 b/static/v10/man1/pp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ef00f5ad..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -.TH PP 1 -.SH NAME -pp \- C pretty printer -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pp -[\fB\-T\fPdev] -[\fB\-f\fPfont] -[\fB\-t\fPtitle] -[files] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pp -formats the named C source files, or its standard input -if none are given, -and produces troff -.I output -format on its standard output. -Thus, its output is suitable for printing on a typesetter with -a program such as -d202(1). -In the output, comments are italicized, -keywords are emboldened, -and each page has header and footer tags. -The -.B \-T -option sets the device for output; the default is 202. -The -.B \-f -option sets the main font; the default is E, or Eurostyle. -The -.B \-t -option generates a title page with the title specified and a -date stamp. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.I Pp -complains and exits if it cannot find a required font. -If this happens, take the name of the missing font to -a local font guru. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -pr(1), troff(1), d202(1), dcan(1), etc. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pq.1 b/static/v10/man1/pq.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7cfec15c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pq.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.TH PQ 1 "Post 4.0" " " -.SH NAME -pq \- directory query interface -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pq -.RB [ \-l ] -[directory query options] query ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I pq\^ -is a fast directory query interface; the -.I "directory query options" -and -.I query -are defined in -.IR post (1). -Unlike -.BR "post \-w" , -.I pq -does not recognize aliases and -.BR \-q , -and only uses the -.B POST -environment variable. -.TP -.B \-l -Query location directory; equivalent to -.br -.B -\-a loc \-o "%6loc %12tel [%3cornet] %street, %city, %state, %zip" -.SH EXAMPLES -.PD 0 -Query directory for members of an office: -.IP -pq loc=mh/room=2b519 -.PP -Query directory for location information: -.IP -pq \-l mt -.PP -Query directory for cornet number of a location: -.IP -pq \-l \-o %cornet ih -.PD -.SH FILES -.TP 30 -$POST/lib/dispatch -directory configuration file -.SH SEE ALSO -post(1), -pq(3C), -dispatch(4), -modules(4). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pr.1 b/static/v10/man1/pr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 80bd0dcc..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'PR (I)'1/15/73'PR (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME pr -- print file -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS pr__ [-cm___] [-h__ name] [-_n] [+_n] [file918 ...] -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION pr__ -produces a printed listing of one or more files. -The output is separated into pages headed by a date, -the name of the file or a header (if any), and the page number. -If there are no file arguments, pr__ prints the standard -input file, and is thus usable as a filter. - -Options apply to all following files but may be reset -between files: - - -c__ print current date - -m__ print date file last modified (default) -.sp - -_n produce n-column output -.sp - +_n begin printing with page n -.sp - -h__ treats the next argument as a header -.sp -If there is a header in force, it is printed in place of -the file name. -.sp -Interconsole messages via write_____(I) are -forbidden during a pr__. -.sp -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES /dev/tty? -to suspend messages. -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO cat(I), cp(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS none (files not found are ignored) -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS In multi-column -output, non-printing characters other than new-line -cause misalignment. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/prefer.1 b/static/v10/man1/prefer.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 71debd08..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/prefer.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,489 +0,0 @@ -.tr @| -.TH PREFER 1 -.CT 1 writing_troff -.SH NAME -prefer, pinvert, penter, plook, pconvert \- maintain and use bibliographic references -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B prefer -[ -.I option ... -] -.PP -.B penter -[ -.I outfile -] -.PP -.B pinvert -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I file ... -] -.PP -.B plook -[ -.B -p -.I dbfile -] -[ -.I keyword ... -] -.PP -.B pconvert -[ -.B -d -] -.I file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Prefer -is a -.IR troff (1) -preprocessor for bibliographic references. -It copies a document from the standard input -to the standard output, using a bibliographic database to -change symbolic references -into full references ready for typesetting by -.IR troff (1). -Although symbolic references are in the style of -.IR monk (1), -.I prefer -does not depend on -.I monk. -The options are: -.TF dbfile -.TP -.B -n -Format for -.IR nroff . -.TP -.BI -o sortkey -Under the -.B @reference_list -command, sort according to -.IR sortkey , -any combinations of the letters -.LR a -(author) -.LR d -(date), and -.LR t -(title), -rather than -in database sequence. -If -.I sortkey is -.LR sort , -sort according to the current style. -.TP -.BI -p dbfile -Use -.I dbfile -as the bibliographic database (default -.FR prefer.out ). -.TP -.B -r -Format as a released paper -(technical memorandum default). -.TP -.BI -s style -Set the formatting -.I style , -one of -.LR att -(default), -.LR acm , -.LR apa , -.LR ieee , -.LR lsa , -.LR pami , -.LR spectrum . -.PD -.PP -.I Prefer -recognizes the following commands, -which may appear anywhere in a document. -Parentheses -.B () -in the commands -may be replaced by any of -.B "{} [] <>". -.TP -.BI @reference_style( " style arg ..." ) -Switch to a new formatting style. -All previous references are forgotten -and a new list of references is begun. -If -.I style -is -.B same -the current style remains (but all previous references are forgotten). -Optional -.IR args -are: -.RS -.TF sequence -.TP -.BR tm -Format as a technical memorandum. -.TP -.B rp -Format as a released paper. -.TP -.B nroff -Format for -.I nroff. -.TP -.B troff -Format for -.I troff. -.TP -.B sort -Print a -.B @reference_list -in an order appropriate for the current style. -.TP -.B sequence -Print a -.B @reference_list -in database sequence. -.TP -.I sortkey -Print a -.B @reference_list -according to the -.IR sortkey , -any combination of the letters -.LR a , -.LR d , -.LR t -as above. -.PD -.RE -.TP -.BI @reference( keywords -.I %ref_fields -.IB %flags ) -.br -Insert a citation mark -in the current style -(e.g. [7], \s-2\v'-0.4m'3\v'0.4m'\s+2, (Knuth, 1975)). -One or more -.I keywords -cause selection from the bibliographic database. -Each -.B % -argument must begin a new line. -.I %ref_field -lines override information from the database; -with no -.I keywords -a complete reference -may be given. -For the form of reference fields, see the output of -.I penter -or the paper in Volume 2. -The following -.I %flags -may modify the citation. -.RS -.TF posttextstring -.TP -.B %no_author -Exclude author information. -.TP -.B %no_date -Exclude date from the citation mark. -.TP -.B %no_cite -Omit the entire citation, but include the entry in the final reference list. -.TP -.BI %pre_text " string -Insert -.I string -before the citation mark. -.TP -.BI %post_text " string -Insert -.I string -after the citation mark -.PD -.RE -.TP -.BI @reference_include( " dbfile ..." ) -Include the contents of the database(s) -.I dbfile(s) -in the list of references, -treating them as -.B %no_cite -entries. -.TP -.B @reference_placement -Produce a list of all references specified in -.B @reference -or -.B @reference_include -commands since -the beginning of the document or the last -.B @reference_style -or -.BR @reference_placement . -.TP -.BI @reference_list( " dbfile ..." ) -Format the contents of the database(s) -.IR dbfile . -.TP -.BI @\^reference_database( " dbfile " ) -Switch to database -.I dbfile -.PP -.I Penter -helps build -.I prefer -bibliographic databses. -It prompts for a reference type, -and then for admissible attributes, such as author, date, etc. -A default value proposed in brackets -.B [] -may be accepted by typing a newline, -skipped by typing spaces before the newline, -or overridden by typing a new value. -The character -.L & -appended to an attribute causes -.I penter -to prompt for the attribute again -(to enter multiple authors, for example). -.PP -The answer -.L ? -to the initial prompt gets a list of all reference types. -The answer -.L help -gets a subprompt for a reference type -whose pertinent attributes will then be listed. -The answer -.L ? -to the subprompt gets attributes for every type. -.PP -The attribute -.B also -permits one entry to refer to another -by naming keywords for -the other reference. -An entire `also' citation may be included within a -.B @reference -thus: -.br -.ns -.IP -.EX -%also_begin \fItext\fP -\fI%ref_fields\fP -%also_end -.EE -.PP -The attribute -.B keywords -prompts for distinguishing keys for the current entry, in addition to -those already occurring within author, title, etc. -.PP -The `reference type' -.B quit -causes -.I penter -to exit, first appending the collected database information to -.I outfile -.RF ( prefer.out -by default). -.PP -The `attribute' -.B ~e -permits editing of the current reference with the editor -specified by environment variable -.BR EDITOR , -.IR ed (1) -by default; -.B ~v -gets the editor -.BR VISUAL , -.IR vi (1) -by default. -.PP -.I Pinvert -creates an inverted index to one or more bibliographic database -.I files. -The index is placed in -.IB file .i , -where -.I file -is the first input file. -An associated -.IB file .h -contains the names of the input files. -The options are: -.TF commmon -.TP -.BI -c common -Do not index words listed in file -.I common -(default -.FR /usr/lib/eign ). -.TP -.BI -i ignore -Do not index information about attributes listed in file -.I ignore. -(The default -.F /usr/lib/prefer/ignore -lists -.BR %volume , -.BR %number , -.BR %part , -.BR %pages , -.B %X -(location status), -.B %Y -(read status), -.B %Z -(comment).) -.TP -.BI -k i -Maximum number of keys kept per record (default 100). -.TP -.BI -l i -Maximum length of keywords (default 6, none is less than 3). -.TP -.BI -p file -The basename of the index is -.I file. -Prefer will write the index to -.IB file .i . -.TP -.B -v -Verbose. -Print statistics. -.PD -.PP -.I Plook -uses the inverted index to -retrieve bibliographic records by -.I keywords -from the command line -or the standard input. -Records that contain all the keywords in the request -are sent to -the standard output. -Option -.B -p -is the same as for -.I pinvert. -.PP -.I Pconvert -converts a -.IR refer (1) -database to -.I prefer -style. -Under option -.B -d -it converts -.IR refer -style -commands in a document to -.I prefer -style. -.ig -.SH EXAMPLES -.EX -@\^reference_style -A keyword citation@reference in the middle of a line. -.br -A complete citation -.br -@reference( -.br -%post_text , Chapter 6 -.br -%type book -.br -%author Aho, Alfred V. -.br -%author Sethi, Ravi -.br -%author Ullman, Jeffrey D. -.br -%title Compilers, Principles, Techniques, and Tools -.br -%publisher Addison-Wesley -.br -%address Reading, Massachusetts -.br -%date 1986 ). -.br -\&.ce -Bibliography -@\^reference_placement -.. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/prefer/mypubenter -.TP -.F prefer.out -default database -.TP -.F prefer.out.i -default index file -.TP -.F prefer.out.h -default header file containing names of databases -.TP -.F /usr/lib/eign -default list of common words -.TP -.F /usr/lib/prefer/ignore -default list of -.I %ref_fields -to ignore for indexing -.TP -.F /usr/lib/prefer/styles/* -.I awk -scripts of formatting instructions for each style -.TP -.F /tmp/prefer* -scratch file -.TP -.F /usr/lib/prefer/ptemplate -reference type definitions, self-describing -.TP -.F /usr/lib/prefer/mypubenter -program executed by penter -.SH -.SH SEE ALSO -M. A. Derr, -`Formatting References with Prefer', -this manual, Volume 2 -.br -.IR refer (1), -.IR monk (1), -.IR troff (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Prefer -commands don't work immediately after certain -formatting macros, e.g. .SM, .I, .B. -.br -.I Plook -complains if the first key matches more references than it can store. -Try rearranging your request so a less common word comes first. -.br -.I Pinvert -does not record options -.B -c -and -.BR -l . -If you use them with -.I pinvert, -you will have to supply them for -.I prefer -and -.I plook -as well. -.tr @@ diff --git a/static/v10/man1/printenv.1 b/static/v10/man1/printenv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1deddc08..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/printenv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -.TH PRINTENV 1 -.CT 1 shell -.SH NAME -printenv \- print environment -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B printenv -[ -.I name -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -With no arguments, -.I printenv -places the strings of the environment, described in -.IR environ (5), -on the standard output one per line. -.PP -If a -.I name -is specified, its value is retrieved from the environment -and printed. -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR sh (1), -.IR rc (1), -.IR environ (5), -.IR getenv (3) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Exit status 1 is returned when a specified -.I name -is not present in the environment. -.SH BUGS -The -.I name -feature cannot handle functions. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/printfont.1 b/static/v10/man1/printfont.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0e1bfcba..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/printfont.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,183 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH PRINTFONT 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B printfont -\- font listing program for PostScript printers -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBprintfont\f1 -.OP "" options [] -.OP "" files [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B printfont -builds a PostScript program that prints character set tables for -one or more PostScript fonts. -The program is written on the standard output, -and when sent to a PostScript printer usually prints a 16\(mu16 table -that shows the available (encoded) characters in each font. -The following -.I options -are understood: -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-a num -Set the character cell axes mode to -.IR num . -0 disables axes printing, 1 draws a baseline, -2 adds a vertical line through the character origin, -and 3 adds a vertical line through the next character origin. -The default is 0. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-b num -Print each table in base -.IR num . -The base determines the number of rows and columns in the table. -It also affects the character code placed in the lower left corner of each cell. -The default is 16 (hexadecimal). -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-c num -Print -.I num -copies of each page. -By default only one copy is printed. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-f name -Use font -.I name -for labeling the tables. -The default font is Helvetica. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-g num -Use -.I num -as the gray level for marking cells not currently assigned to characters. -The gray level should fall between 0 (black) and 1 (white). -The default is 0.85. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-m num -Magnify each logical page by the factor -.IR num . -Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, -which is located near the upper left corner of each page. -The default is 1.0. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-p mode -Print -.I files -in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP -.IR mode . -Only the first character of -.I mode -is significant. -The default -.I mode -is \*(mBportrait\fP. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-v -Completely label each character cell. -The full character name goes in the upper left corner and the -character width (at point size 1) goes in the lower right corner. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-w num -Set the line width to -.I num -points, where a point is approximately 1/72 of an inch. -A line width of 0 means 1 pixel. -The default line width is resolution dependent. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-x num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the x axis. -Positive -.I num -shifts the table to the right. -The default offset is 0. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-y num -Translate the origin -.I num -inches along the y axis. -Positive -.I num -shifts the table up the page. -The default offset is 0. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-C file -Copy -.I file -to the output file; -.B file -must contain legitimate PostScript. -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-E name -Set the character encoding for text fonts to -.IR name . -Requesting -.I name -means include file -.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. -A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. -The default selects file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -.TP 1.0i -.OP \-L file -Use -.I file -as the PostScript prologue. -.br -The default is -.MR \*(dQ/printfont.ps . -.PP -Arguments should be PostScript -.I font -names or the word -.MR all , -which means the full set of -.SM ROM -and disk based fonts available on a printer. -.B printfont -prints one font table per page. -Each page is labeled with the -.I font -name, the printer product name and interpreter version number, -and the gray level, linewidth, and printer resolution. -.PP -Black cells are used to mark characters listed in the font's -.MW Encoding -array but missing from its -.MW CharStrings -dictionary. -They usually indicate an incomplete font or a mistake in the -.MW Encoding -array. -The check is skipped if the font doesn't include a -.MW CharStrings -dictionary. -.br -.ne 4v -.SH EXAMPLES -Print the characters available in the Times-Roman, Symbol and -ZapfDingbats fonts: -.EX -printfont Times-Roman Symbol ZapfDingbats | lp ... -.EE -Print a baseline under each character and fully label the cells: -.EX -printfont -a1 -v Times-Roman Symbol ZapfDingbats | lp ... -.EE -Dump all the fonts available on a printer using the Latin1 character encoding: -.EX -printfont -ELatin1 all | lp ... -.EE -.SH WARNINGS -Printing a single table can take several minutes. -Dumping all available fonts can tie a printer up for an hour or more. -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/printfont.ps -.br -.MW \*(dQ/*.enc -.SH SEE ALSO -buildtables(1), -dpost(1), -postio(1), -psencoding(1), -trofftable(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/priv.1 b/static/v10/man1/priv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3a649446..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/priv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,145 +0,0 @@ -.TH PRIV 1 -.CT 1 sa_nonmortals secur -.SH NAME -priv, privedit \- run a command with privileges -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B priv -[ -.I option ... -] [ -.I command -.I arg ... -] -.PP -.B priv privedit -.I node -.I changes -.SH DESCRIPTION -If a -.I command -is given, -.I priv -determines from the -.IR privs (5) -file the most specifically matching -.B REQUEST -for which the process has all the -.B NEEDS -and to which it has -.BR ACCESS -(terminology explained in -.IR privs (5)). -If a unique most specific match is found, -.I priv -asks for confirmation. -Then, if the confirmation is -.LR y , -the request is executed. -Privileges and process ceiling are set according to -the pertinent entry in -.FR /etc/privs -and the current directory is set to a place with -security label -.BR L_NO ; -see -.IR getflab (2). -Thus relative pathnames won't work in the -.I command -until it executes -.IR chdir (2). -.PP -If no command is given, the contents of the -.I privs -file are printed on the standard output. -.PP -The options are -.TP -.B -n -Determine and report authorization and actions. -Do not execute them except, if -.B PRIVEDIT -is requested, place the edited privilege -file on the standard output. -.TP -.BI -f " servfile -Use -.I servfile -instead of -.FR /cs/priv , -to use a non-standard privilege server. -.PP -One request is more specific than another -if the regular language for each argument -of the first request is contained in the corresponding -language for the second request, -and at least one containment is proper. -.PP -The standard error and standard input are used for confirmations. -Both must come from the same trusted source, either a pexable -stream with a stream identifier, or a pipe from a trusted -process; see -.IR pex (4) -and -.IR stream (4). -.PP -.I Privedit -applies to the -.I privs -file the modifications given in the -.I changes -file. -Only the part of the authorization tree rooted at the given -.I node -may be changed. -The form of -.I changes -is described in -.IR privs (5). -The changes are echoed and confirmation is requested. -.RI ( Privedit, -like any other -.I command, -is a conventional token defined by the -.I privs -file; it is not built in.) -.PP -.I Priv -clears the environment to prevent hidden corruption -by untrusted processes. -For the same reason it asks confirmation of the argument list. -What you see is what it will do. -.PP -The real work of -.I priv -is done by -.IR privserv (8). -.I Priv -communicates with -.I privserv -via a pipe that the latter mounts on -.BR /cs/priv . -.SH FILES -.F /etc/privs -.br -.F /cs/priv -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR privs (5), -.IR privserv (8), -.IR session (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -If a -.I command -is performed, -.I priv -returns the result of the last constituent action; see -.IR privs (5). -.SH BUGS -Trailing null -.I args -are deleted. -.br -The standard input and standard error cannot freely be redirected. -.br -It is possible for a password to be demanded twice. -This would be mitigated if requests were assessed in -decreasing order of specificity instead of table order. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/prof.1 b/static/v10/man1/prof.1 deleted file mode 100644 index da7c5521..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/prof.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -.th PROF I 3/12/73 -.sh NAME -prof \*- display profile data -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd prof -[ -.bd \*-v -] [ -.bd \*-a -] [ -.bd \*-l -] [ file ] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Prof -will read the file -mon.out -produced by the -monitor subroutine. -Under default modes, -the namelist in the -object file (a.out default) -is read and correlated to the -mon.out profile. -The percentage of time spent -between adjacent valued -external symbols is printed -in decreasing order. -If the -.bd \*-a -option is used, -all symbols are used rather than -just external symbols. -If the option -.bd \*-l -is used, -the output is listed by -symbol value rather than -decreasing percentage. -If the -.bd \*-v -option is used, -all printing is suppressed -and a profile plot is produced -on /dev/vt0. -.sh FILES -mon.out for profile -.br -a.out for namelist -.br -/dev/vt0 for plotting -.sh "SEE ALSO" -mon(III), profil(II) -.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/proof.1 b/static/v10/man1/proof.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b817bd9c..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/proof.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.pa 1 -.he 'PROOF (I)'1/15/73'PROOF (I)' -.ti 0 -NAME proof -- compare two text files -.sp -.ti 0 -SYNOPSIS proof_____ -oldfile newfile -.sp -.ti 0 -DESCRIPTION proof_____ -lists -those lines of -.ul -newfile -that differ from corresponding lines in -.ul -oldfile. -The line number in -.ul -newfile -is given. -When changes, insertions or deletions have -been made the program attempts to resynchronize -the text in the two files by finding a sequence of -lines in both files that again agree. -.sp -.ti 0 -FILES -- -.sp -.ti 0 -SEE ALSO cmp(I) -.sp -.ti 0 -DIAGNOSTICS yes, -but they are undecipherable, e.g. "?1". -.sp -.ti 0 -BUGS proof_____ -is still evolving. Any bugs discovered or suggestions -should be brought to ENP. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/proofr.1 b/static/v10/man1/proofr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ea98fd87..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/proofr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 -.TH PROOFR 1 -.SH NAME -proofr \- automatic proofreader -.br -proofer \- alternative command-name for proofr -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B proofr -[ -.B \-s -][ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -file ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Proofr -is an automatic proofreading system -that runs modified versions of 5 programs: -.RS 5 -.TP 14 -.IR spellwwb (1) -- checks for misspelled words. -.TP -.IR punct (1) -- checks for rudimentary punctuation errors. -.TP -.IR double (1) -- searches for consecutive occurrences of the same word. -.TP -.IR dictplus (1) -- locates wordy and/or misused phrases and suggests alternatives. -.TP -.IR splitinf (1) -- searches for split infinitives. -.RE -.PP -.I Proofr -is one of the programs run under the -.IR wwb (1) -command. -.PP -Options are: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-s -produce a short summary version of -.IR proofr . -.RE -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.SH NOTE -If the user has a file called -.IR $HOME/lib/ddict , -.I proofr -will run -.I dictplus -so that phrases in -.I ddict -are located or ignored, as specified. -See diction(1), dictadd(1), dictplus(1) for more information. -.PP -If the user has a file called -.IR $HOME/lib/spelldict , -.I proofr -will run -.I spellwwb -so that words in -.I spelldict -are not listed as errors. -See spellwwb(1) and spelladd(1) for more information. -.SH FILES -.TP 21 -/tmp/$$* -temporary files -.SH SEE ALSO -spellwwb(1), -punct(1), -double(1), -splitinf(1), -diction(1), -wwb(1), -worduse(1), -spelltell(1), -deroff(1). -.SH BUGS -See other manual pages for bugs in individual programs. -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/prose.1 b/static/v10/man1/prose.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 29be4d2d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/prose.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,228 +0,0 @@ -.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT -.id Writer's Workbench version 2.2, February 24, 1981 -.TH PROSE 1 -.SH NAME -prose \- describe style characteristics of text -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B prose -[ -.B \-flags -][ -.B \-ver -] -[ -.B \-tm -| -.B \-c -| -.B \-t -| -.B \-x -standards-file -][ -.B \-mm -| -.B \-ms -] [ -.B \-li -| -.B \+li -][ -.B \-s -][ -.B \-f -style-file | file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Prose -describes the writing style of a document -as determined by -.IR style "(1), -but the output is in prose form. -The output describes readability, word and sentence lengths, -sentence structure and variation. -.PP -The program checks that a document's scores on certain -.I style -variables fall within the average range for documents of a specified type. -Whenever the score for a variable is outside the average range, -a warning message is printed with information -about the variable, -and commands that can be run to get further information. -.PP -.I Prose -creates a file called -.I styl.tmp -that contains the table produced by -.IR style . -.PP -.I Prose -compares a document with standards -for one of several document types, -according to the following flags: -.RS 5 -.TP 5 -.B \-tm -Compare input text to good Bell Laboratories TM's. (This is the default.) -.TP -.B \-c -Evaluate input text for craft suitability. -.TP -.B \-t -Compare input text with good training documents. -.TP -.BI \-x " standards-file" -Compare input text with standards contained in user-specified -.IR standards-file . -See -.IR mkstand (1) -to set up the -.IR standards-file . -.RE -.PP -Because -.I prose -runs -.IR deroff (1) -before looking at the text, -formatting header files should be included as part of the input. -.PP -Options affecting -.IR deroff (1) -are: -.RS 5 -.TP -.B \-mm -eliminate -.IR mm (1) -macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences -(e.g. headings), -from the analysis. -This is the default. -.TP -.B \-ms -eliminate -.IR ms (1) -macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences, -from the analysis. -The -.B \-ms -flag overrides the default, -.BR \-mm . -.TP -.B \-li -eliminate list items, -as defined by -.I mm -macros, from the analysis. -This is the default. -.TP -.B \+li -Include list items in the input text, -in the analysis. -This flag should be used if the text contains lists of sentences, -but not if the text contains many lists of non-sentences. -.RE -.PP -Other options are: -.RS 5 -.TP -.B \-s -Produce a short (10 line) summary version of -.IR prose . -.TP -.BI \-f " style-file" -If a file containing the -.I style -table exists as output from the -.I style -program, -or from a previous -.I prose -run, -it may be specified so that -.I prose -need not run -.I style -again. -.I Styl.tmp -can be used as the -.IR style-file . -The input text file should not be used with the -.B \-f -flag. -.RE -.PP -Two options give information about the program: -.RS 5 -.TP 7 -.B \-flags -print the command synopsis line (see above) -showing command flags and options, -then exit. -.TP -.B \-ver -print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. -.RE -.PP -.I Prose -is one of the programs run under the -.IR wwb (1) -command. -.SH EXAMPLES -The command: -.PP -.RS 5 -.B "prose \-t \+li filename" -.RE -.PP -will describe how the style characteristics of -.I filename -compare with standards for training documents. -Lists will be included in the analysis. -The -.IR style (1) -table will be left in the file -.IR styl.tmp . -.br -Then the command: -.PP -.RS 5 -.B "prose \-x standards-file \-f styl.tmp" -.RE -.PP -will use the style statistics already gathered for -.IR filename , -and describe how they compare with the user-defined -standards contained in -.IR standards-file . -.SH FILES -.TP 21 -styl.tmp -contains -.I style -table -.TP -wwb/lib/prosedoc -contains all standards used for comparison, -and stored -.I prose -output text files -.SH SEE ALSO -style(1), wwb(1), -deroff(1), -match(1), -wwbstand(1), -mkstand(1), -worduse(1). -.SH SUPPORT -.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" -.br -.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" -.br -.IR "STATUS: " Standard -.br -.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" -.br -.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" -.br -.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ps.1 b/static/v10/man1/ps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3819a0fa..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.th PS I 10/15/73 -.sh NAME -ps \*- process status -.sh SYNOPSIS -.bd ps -[ -.bd alx -] -.sh DESCRIPTION -.it Ps -prints certain indicia about active -processes. -The -.bd a -flag asks for information about all processes with teletypes (ordinarily -only one's own processes are displayed); -.bd x -asks even about processes with no typewriter; -.bd l -asks for a long listing. -Ordinarily only the typewriter number (if not one's own) -and the process number are given. -.s3 -The long listing is columnar and contains -.s3 -.lp +5 0 -A number encoding the state (last digit) -and flags (first 1 or 2 digits) of the process. -.s3 -The priority of the -process; high numbers mean low priority. -.s3 -A number related in some unknown way to the -scheduling heuristic. -.s3 -The last character of -the control typewriter of the process. -.s3 -The process unique number -(as in certain cults it is possible -to kill a process if you know its true name). -.s3 -The size in blocks of the core image of the process. -.s3 -The last column if non-blank tells the core -address in the system of the -event which the process is waiting for; -if blank, the process is running. -.s3 -.i0 -.dt -Unfortunately if you have forgotten the number of a process -you will have to guess which one it is. -Plain -.it ps -will tell you only a list of numbers. -.sh FILES -/usr/sys/unix system namelist -.br -/dev/mem resident system -.sh "SEE ALSO" -kill(I) -.sh BUGS -The ability to see, even if dimly, -the name by which the process was invoked would -be welcome. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 b/static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0c0a3a65..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript -.TH PSENCODING 1 "DWB 3.2" -.SH NAME -.B psencoding -\- check or set the default PostScript font encoding -.SH SYNOPSIS -\*(mBpsencoding\f1 -.OP "" encoding [] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B psencoding -sets the default font Encoding used by many PostScript translators to -.IR encoding . -No arguments means list the available choices and the current default. -.PP -PostScript encoding files are in directory -.MR \*(dQ . -Many existing PostScript translators include the encoding file -.MR Default.enc , -if it exists, in the output they generate. -.PP -Requesting -.I encoding -as the default means link the file -.MI \*(dQ/ encoding .enc -to the file -.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . -Changing the default encoding assumes you can write in directory -.MR \*(dQ . -.SH FILES -.MW \*(dQ/Default.enc -.br -.MW \*(dQ/*.enc -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR buildtables (1), -.BR dpost (1), -.BR postprint (1), -.BR trofftable (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/psifile.1 b/static/v10/man1/psifile.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9e9078da..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/psifile.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSIFILE 1 -.CT 1 writing_output -.SH NAME -psifile, mhssend\- postscript interpreter/fax sender -.lg 0 -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psifile -[ -.I option ... -] [ -.I file -] -.br -.B mhssend -.I phone_number -.I file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psifile -reads Postscript input from -.I file -or from standard input -and produces a file containing an image of the page. -The format of the output file is specified by the following options: -.TF /make/it -.TP -.B -fax -runs at 200 dpi and produces g31 fax in the multipage fax format called -.BR mhs , -putting its output in file -.B fax\fI$$\fP.mhs -by default. If a phone number is supplied, -the output file is pushed to -.B /tmp -on fama -and -.B mhssend -is run to send the fax. -.TP -.BI -P " phone_no" -specifies the destination phone number for -.BR -fax . -.TP -.B -g4 -runs at 300 dpi and produces a fax g4 file called -.B psi.out.g4 -by default that -can be displayed on the gnots with -.IR rbits . -.TP -.B -bm -produces -.IR bitfile (9.5) -output in file -.B psi.out -by default. -.I -bm -is useful for debugging postscript programs because -it has better diagnostics than the printers. -.PP -Other options are -.TF /this/is -.TP -.B -s -assumes the file is in -.B mhs -format and sends it to the phone number provided with -.B -P -above. -.TP -.BI -o " name" -use -.I name -as the basename of the output file. -.TP -.BI -p " page" -only output postscript page number -.I page -as determined by -.B %%Page -comments in the file. -.sp -.PP -Fonts are implemented with 24 point bitmap fonts. -Those available are -Symbol, Courier, Times-Roman, Times-Italic, Times-Bold, Times-BoldItalic, Helvetica, -Helvetica-Oblique, Helvetica-Bold, Helvetica-BoldOblique. -Fonts -Courier-Bold, -Courier-Oblique, -and -Courier-BoldOblique -are mapped to -Courier. -Postscript type 1 fonts are implemented and work if supplied -with the input. -.sp -.PP -For best results with TeX documents, run -.B dvips -with the -.B -Tfax -or -.B "-D 200" -option to get fonts of the proper resolution. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -troff -ms memo | lp -dstdout -H | psifile -fax -P 4223 -.br -.TP -.L -troff -ms memo | dpost | psifile -fax -P 4223 -Two equivalent ways to format a memo, convert it to PostScript, -and produce a fax file. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/psi/psifaxg4 -.TP -.F fax\fI$$\fP.mhs -default -.B -fax -output file -.TP -.F psi.out.g4 -default -.B -g4 -output file -.TP -.F psi.out -default -.B -bm -output file -.TP -.B /usr/lib/psi/psifax -postscript\->mhs format program -.TP -.B /usr/lib/psi/psifaxg4 -postscript\->fax g4 program -.TP -.B /usr/lib/psi/psibm -postscript\->bitfile program -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR psi (9.1), -.IR lp (1), -.IR dvips (1), -.IR postscript (8), -.IR proof (9.1) , -.IR bcp (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.PP -Symbols that lack bitmaps are replaced by `?' -and an error is reported. -.SH BUGS -Unimplemented PostScript features are rotated images -and half tone screens. -Imagemasks may only be rotated by multiples of 90 degrees, -not by arbitrary angles. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/psix.1 b/static/v10/man1/psix.1 deleted file mode 100644 index de343774..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/psix.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSIX 1 -.CT 1 writing_output -.SH NAME -psix \- postscript interpreter -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psix -[ -.I option ... -] [ -.I file -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psix -reads Postscript input from -.I file -or from standard input -and simulates the resulting pages in a -window under X Windows. -If the large window it brings up is too big -for your screen, you can use -.I -geometry -to change its size. You may also want to use the -.I -a -option described below. -.PP -The options are -.TP -.BI -p n -Display page -.IR n , -where -.I n -is determined from the -.B %%Page -comments in the file. -If these are not present, page selection will not work. -.TP -.B -R -Pages in the file are in reverse order. This flag must be used on such files -for the -.I -p -option to work. -.TP -.B -r -Display the image at full scale, with the bottom left -corner positioned at the bottom left corner of the window. -(By default, the image is scaled to fit the window, maintaining -the aspect ratio of a printer.) -.HP -.B -a -.I x y -.br -Display the image at full scale with position -.I x,y -of the image placed at the bottom left corner of the window. -.PP -Fonts are implemented with size-24 bitmap fonts. -Those available are -Symbol, Courier, Times-Roman, Times-Italic, Times-Bold, Times-BoldItalic, Helvetica, -Helvetica-Oblique, Helvetica-Bold, Helvetica-BoldOblique. -Fonts -Courier-Bold, -Courier-Oblique, -and -Courier-BoldOblique -are mapped to -Courier. -Other postscript fonts, including type1, may be used if -they are supplied before they're referenced. -.PP -When the `cherries' icon is displayed, you can move forward -by typing return or you can use mouse button 3 -to move forward -.RB ( more ), -to a particular page -.RB ( page ), -or quit -.RB ( done ). -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.L -troff -ms memo | lp -dstdout -H | psi -.br -.ns -.TP -.L -troff -ms memo | dpost | psi -Two equivalent ways to format a memo, convert it to PostScript, -and display it. -.PP -For best results with TeX documents, use -.B dvips -with the -.BR -Tjerq , -.BR -Tgnot , -or -.B "-D 100" -option to get fonts of the proper resolution and run -.I psi -with the -.I -r -or -.I -a -flag to prevent -.I psi -from scaling. -.SH FILES -.TF psi.err -.TP -.F psi.err -error messages -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR lp (1), -.IR dvips (1), -.IR postscript (8), -.IR proof (9.1), -.IR psifile (1), -.IR psi (9.1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -A `dead mouse' icon signals an error; -error comments are placed on file -.FR psi.err . -.PP -Symbols that lack bitmaps are replaced by `?' -and an error is reported. -.SH BUGS -Unimplemented PostScript features are rotated images and -half tone screens. -Imagemasks may only be rotated by multiples of 90 degrees, not -by arbitrary angles. -.br -Skipping pages may cause operators to be undefined. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ptx.1 b/static/v10/man1/ptx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b14ad396..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/ptx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ -.TH PTX 1 -.CT 1 writing_aids -.SH NAME -ptx \- permuted index -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ptx -[ -.I option ... -] -[ -.I input -[ -.I output -] -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Ptx -generates a permuted index to file -.I input -on file -.I output -(standard input and output default). -It has three phases: the first does the permutation, generating -one line for each keyword in an input line. -The keyword is rotated to the front. -The permuted file is then -sorted. -Finally, the sorted lines are rotated so the keyword -comes at the middle of the page. -.I Ptx -produces output exemplified by: -.br -.IP -.L -\&.xx "tail" "before" "keyword and after" "head" -.LP -where -.L .xx -may be defined as a -.IR troff (1) -macro -for user-defined formatting. -The -.I before -and -.I keyword and after -fields incorporate as much of the line as will fit -around the keyword when it is printed at the middle of the page. -.I Tail -and -.I head, -at least one of which is an empty string, -are wrapped-around pieces small enough to fit -in the unused space at the opposite end of the line. -When original text must be discarded, -.L / -marks the spot. -.PP -The following options can be applied: -.TP -.BR -f -Fold upper and lower case letters for sorting. -.TP -.BR -t -Prepare the output for the phototypesetter; -the default line length is 100 characters. -.TP -.BI -w " n" -Use the next argument, -.I n, -as the width of the output line. -The default line length is 72 characters. -.TP -.BI -g " n" -Use the next argument, -.I n, -as the number of characters to allow for each gap -among the four parts of the line as finally printed. -The default gap is 3 characters. -.TP -.BI -o " only" -Use as keywords only the words given in the -.I only -file. -.TP -.BI -i " ignore" -Do not use as keywords any words given in the -.I -ignore -file. -If the -.B -i -and -.B -o -options are missing, use -.F /usr/lib/eign -as the -.I -ignore -file. -.TP -.BI -b " break" -Use the characters in the -.I break -file to separate words. -In any case, tab, newline, and space characters are always used as break characters. -.TP -.B -r -Take any leading nonblank characters of each input line to -be a reference identifier (as to a page or chapter) -separate from the text of the line. -Attach that identifier as a 5th field on each output line. -.PP -The index for this manual was generated using -.I ptx. -.SH FILES -.F /usr/lib/eign -.SH BUGS -Line length counts do not account for overstriking or -proportional spacing. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/punct.1 b/static/v10/man1/punct.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 06574a94..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/punct.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -.TH PUNCT 1 -.SH NAME -punct \- punctuation checker -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B /usr/bin/WWB/punct -[ file ... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Punct -scans English text for punctuation errors and doubled words. -When it finds an error, -it places the error on the standard output -together with line number and suggested repunctuation. -.SH FILES -.ta \w'/tmp/$$* 'u -/tmp/$$* temporary files -.SH SEE ALSO -style(1), diction(1), wwb(1) -.SH BUGS -.I Punct -will consider unfamiliar abbreviations ending with a period (except initials) -to be the end of the sentence, -consequently, it will capitalize the next word. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/push.1 b/static/v10/man1/push.1 deleted file mode 100644 index af26404b..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/push.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ -.TH PUSH 1 -.CT 1 comm_mach -.SH NAME -push, pull, npush, npull \- datakit remote file copy -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B push -[ -.B -v -] -.I machine file ... remotedir -.PP -.B pull -[ -.B -v -] -.I machine file ... localdir -.PP -.B npush -[ -.B -v -] -.I machine file ... remotedir -.PP -.B npull -[ -.B -v -] -.I machine file ... localdir -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Push -and -.I pull -copy files between machines over Datakit. -.I Push -copies -.I files -from the local machine -to the directory -.I remotedir -on the named -.I machine. -.I Pull -copies -.I files -from the named -.I machine -to the directory -.I localdir -on the local machine. -The last component of the name of a copy is the same -as that of the original. -If one of the -.I files -is a directory, a corresponding -directory is created -and the directory's files are copied, recursively. -.PP -Option -.B -v -announces each file as it is copied. -.PP -Pushing and pulling involve two programs running in -different contexts on different machines. -In particular, pulling -to directory -.L . -puts files in the local current directory, -but pushing to -.L . -puts files in the remote home directory. -Shell metacharacters which are to be interpreted -on the remote machine must be quoted. -.PP -.I Npush -and -.I npull -behave exactly like -.I push -and -.I pull, -but use a different protocol, necessary for communicating -to some other Datakit clusters. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/Rpush -.TP -.F /usr/lib/Rpull -link to -.F /usr/bin/pull -for remote end of transaction -.TP -.F /usr/lib/Rpush -link to -.F /usr/bin/push -.SH SEE ALSO -.IR con (1), -.IR cp (1), -.IR rcp (1), -.IR cu (1), -.IR uucp (1) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Messages marked -.L (remote) -are from the sister process running on the -remote machine. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pwd.1 b/static/v10/man1/pwd.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bd408d3d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pwd.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -.TH PWD 1 -.CT 1 dirs -.SH NAME -pwd, where \(mi machine name and working directory -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pwd -.PP -.B where -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pwd -prints the pathname of the working (current) directory. -.PP -.I Where -prints the name of the machine and the pathname of the -current directory in the form -.IP -.IB machine ! fullpathname -.SH SEE ALSO -.I cd -in -.IR sh (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 b/static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 40c4dd7f..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,178 +0,0 @@ -.TH PWINTF 1 SHARE -.SH NAME -pwintf \- print selected limits file entries using printf formats -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pwintf -[-p shares_file] expression format [identifier..] -.SH DESCRIPTION -For each entry in the system shares file the expression -argument is evaluated. -If the result is non zero -the remaining arguments are treated as if they were arguments -to -.I printf -(see -.IR printf (3S)). -An alternative shares file may be specified with the -.I -p -option. -.PP -Expression elements are: -.TP "\w'identifierXXXX'u" -|| -Binary or. Non zero if the left hand side or the right hand side -evaluates to a non zero value. -.TP -&& -Binary and. Non zero if the left hand side and the right hand -side are both non zero. -.TP -== != -Equal/not equal to. Non zero if the left hand side -and the right hand side -are equal/not equal. -.TP -> < -Greater/less than. Non zero is the left hand side is -greater/less than the right hand side. -.TP ->= <= -Greater/less than or equal to. Non zero if the left hand side -is greater/less than or equal to the right hand side. -.TP -~ -Regular expression matching. Non zero if the string on the left -hand side matches the regular expression given by the string -on the right hand side. Regular expressions are given in the -style of -.I ed -(see -.IR ed (1)). -.TP -! -Unary not. Non zero if the right hand side evaluates to zero. -.TP -".." -A string of characters. -.TP -{..} -A date. -Date specifications are in the style: -.B {[[[[[yy]mm]dd]hh]mm][.ss]}. -For example -.B {01271200} -would be noon on the 27th of January in the current year. -.TP -(..) -A sub-expression. -.TP -identifier -Any one of the identifiers described below. -.TP -number -A decimal digit string. -.PP -Note that the expression may have to be quoted -to stop the shell from interpreting symbols such as -\fB&\fR -as symbols having special meaning. -.SH FORMATS -All -.I printf -format specifications and modifiers are allowed except the -\&'*' modifier. To facilitate the printing of dates -which are stored as the number of seconds since -1st January 1970, -\fB%t\fR -may be used. This will cause the corresponding integral -argument to be interpreted as a time and given in the style -of -.I ctime -(see -.IR ctime (3C)). -All modifiers will be ignored in such a time specification. -.SH IDENTIFIERS -In the following list words printed in -.B "this font" -are as defined in the include files and . -.PD 0 -.TP "\w'assumeddisconXX'u" -activelnode -1 if the account has the -.B ACTIVELNODE -flag set. -.TP -changed -1 if the account has the -.B CHANGED -flag set. -.TP -charge -The long term accumulated costs of the account as a floating point number. -.TP -deadgroup -1 if the account has the -.B DEADGROUP -flag set. -.TP -dirpath -The initial directory of the account as a string. -.TP -flags -A string containing the names of the flags set for this account. -.TP -gecos -The ``gecos'' field of the account as a string. -.TP -gid -The integral gid of this account. -.TP -lastref -1 if the account has the -.B LASTREF -flag set. -.TP -lastused -The time the account last did anything. -.TP -lname -The login name of the account as a string. -.TP -notshared -1 if the account has a -.B NOTSHARED -flag. -.TP -now -The current time. -.TP -pword -The encrypted password of the account as a string. -.TP -sgroup -The uid of the scheduling group of this account. -.TP -sgroupname -The lname of the scheduling group of this account. -.TP -shares -The integral number of shares the account has. -.TP -shellpath -The initial shell of the account as a string. -.TP -usage -The usage of the account as a floating point number. -.TP -uid -The integral uid of this account. -.PD -.SH FILES -/etc/passwd -.br -/etc/shares -.SH SEE ALSO -printf(3S), ctime(3C), shares(5). -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Yes. A summary of usage is given when pwintf -is invoked with no arguments. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pxp.1 b/static/v10/man1/pxp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3cffc462..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/pxp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ -.TH PXP 1 -.CT 1 prog_other -.SH NAME -pxp, pxref \- pascal printer, profiler, and cross-reference lister -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pxp -[ -.B -acdefjnstuw_ -] -[ -.B -23456789 -] -[ -.B -z -[ -.I name ... -] -] -.IB name .p -.PP -.B pxref -[ -.B - -] -.IB name .p -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pxp -prints the Pascal program -.IB name .p -in a standard `pretty' form. -Under option -.B -z -the listing is annotated with statement execution counts -from a previous -.IR pascal (1) -run. -.TP -.B -a -Print the bodies of all procedures and functions in the profile; -even those which were never executed. -.TP -.B -d -Include declaration parts in a profile. -.TP -.B -e -Eliminate -.B include -directives when reformatting a file; -the -.B include -is replaced by the reformatted contents of the specified -file. -.TP -.B -f -Fully parenthesize expressions. -.TP -.B -j -Left justify all procedures and functions. -.TP -.B -n -Eject a page -as each file is included; -in profiles, print a blank line at the top of the page. -.TP -.B -s -Strip comments from the input text. -.TP -.B -t -Print only a table of counts of -procedure and function calls. -.TP -.B -u -Card image mode; only the first 72 characters of input lines -are used. -.TP -.B -w -Suppress warning diagnostics. -.TP -.B -z -Generate an execution profile. -The presence of any -.I names -causes the profile to be restricted to the named procedures, -functions, and include files. -.TP -.B -\_ -Underline keywords. -.TP -.BI - d -With -.I d -a digit, -use -.I d -spaces as the indenting unit. -The default is 4. -.PP -.I Pxref -makes a line-numbered listing and cross-reference index for -.IB name .p . -The optional -.B - -argument suppresses the listing. -.SH FILES -.TF /usr/lib/how_pxp -.TP -.F *.p -input files -.TP -.F *.i -include files -.TP -.F pmon.out -profile data -.TP -.F /usr/lib/how_pxp -information on basic usage -.DT -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Berkeley Pascal User's Manual -.br -.IR pascal (1) -.SH BUGS -.I Pxref -trims identifiers to 10 characters and pads lines with blanks. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/qed.1 b/static/v10/man1/qed.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 21e7b38d..00000000 --- a/static/v10/man1/qed.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1617 +0,0 @@ -.TH "QED" 1 -. \" /*% nroff -man % -.if t .ds q \(aa -.if n .ds q ' -.SH NAME -qed \- multi-file text editor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B qed -[ -.B \- -] [ -.B \-i -] [ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-e -] [ -.B \-x -startupfile -] [ filename1 filename2 ... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fIQed\fP -is a multiple-file programmable text editor based on -.IR ed . -.PP -.I Qed -operates on a copy of any file it is editing; changes made -in the copy have no effect on the file until a \fIw\fR -or \fIW\fR (write) -command is given. -The copy of the text being edited resides -in a scratch area called a -.I buffer. -There are 56 buffers, labeled by alphabetics `a' to `z' and `A' to `Z', -and the characters `{', `|', `}' and `~' -(the four ASCII characters following `z'). -These 56 characters are called, for notational efficiency, -.I bnames. -The buffers can contain any ASCII character except NUL. -.PP -If -.I file -arguments are given, -.I qed -simulates an -.I r -command (see below) on each of the named files; that is to say, -the files are read into -.I qed's -buffers so that they can be edited. -The first is read into buffer `a', the second into buffer `b', -through `z', -then from `A' to `Z', -up to a maximum of 52 files. -The optional -.B \- -puts -.I qed -in non-\c -.I verbose -mode (described with the -.I o -command). -The -\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-e\fR -and -.B \-i -are equivalent to performing an initial -`oqs', `oes' or `ois' command (see the -.I o -command below). -.PP -When \fIqed\fP starts up, -the file named by the environment variable -.B QEDFILE -is read into -buffer `~' and executed -(i.e. read as command input), before -reading in files and accepting commands from the terminal. -The argument -.I filename\c -s are set in the buffers before the startup file is executed, -so the startup file can treat the \fIfilenames\fR as arguments. -The default startup file may be overridden with the \fB\-x\fR option. -.PP -Input to -.I qed -can be redirected, at any time, -to come from storage such as a buffer -by use of a -.I special -.I character -such as ``\eb''. -All the -.I qed special character -sequences are discussed in detail below; -they all begin with a -backslash `\\'. -.PP -.I Qed -has a -.I truth flag -which is set according to the success of certain commands -and which can be tested for conditional execution, and a -.I count -which is set to such values as the number of successful substitutions -performed in an -.I s -command. -Each buffer has associated with it a -(possibly null) filename and a -.I changed -flag, which is -set if the contents of the buffer are known to differ -from the contents of the named file in that buffer. -.PP -Commands to -.I qed -have a simple and regular structure: zero or -more -.I addresses -followed by a single character -\fIcommand\fP, -possibly -followed by parameters to the command. -These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. -Every command which requires addresses has default addresses, -so that the addresses can often be omitted. -.PP -In general, any number of commands can appear on a line. -Some commands require that the character following -the command be a separator, such as blank, tab or newline. -Usually, a -.I display -.IR character , -.IR p , -.IR P , -.IR l , -or -.I L -may precede the separator, -causing the resulting line to be displayed in the specified format -after the command. -Certain commands allow the input of text for placement in the buffer. -This text can be supplied in two forms: -either -on the same line, after the command, -or on lines following the command, -terminated by a line containing only a period `\fB.\fP'. -If the text is on the command line, -it is separated from the command by a space or a tab. -If the tab is used, it is considered part of the text. -.PP -.I Qed -supports a limited form of -\fIregular\fP \fIexpression\fP -notation. -A regular expression specifies -a set of strings of characters. -A member of this set of strings is said to be -.I matched -by the regular expression. -Regular expressions in -.I qed -are delimited by enclosing them in a pair of identical characters, -frequently slashes `/'. -In the following specification for regular expressions the word `character' -means any character but newline. -Note that special character interpretation always occurs -.I before -executing a command. -Thus, the backslashes mentioned below are those present -after special characters have been interpreted. -.IP 1. -Any character except a metacharacter matches itself. -Metacharacters are the regular expression delimiter plus -< [ \fB.\fP and \e | > ^ * \+ $ -when another rule gives them a meaning. -.IP 2. -A \fB.\fP matches any character. -.IP 3. -A backslash \\ followed by -any metacharacter in the list given in rule 1 -is a regular expression and matches that character. -A backslash followed by one of -! _ { } ( ) -or a non-zero digit -has a special meaning discussed below; -otherwise, backslashes have literal meaning in regular expressions. -.IP 4. -The metacharacter \e\|! matches any control character -except tab or newline. -.IP 5. -A non-empty string -.I s -enclosed in square brackets -[\fIs\fP] (or [^\fIs\fP]) matches any character in (or not in) \fIs\fP. -In -.IR s , -\\ has no special meaning, and ] may only appear as the first character. -A substring -.IR a \- b , -with -.I a -and -.I b -in ascending ASCII order, stands for the inclusive range of ASCII characters. -.IP 6. -A regular expression, -of the form <\fIx1\fP> or <\fIx1\fR|\|\fIx2\fR|\|...|\|\fIxn\fR>, -where the \fIx\fR's are regular expressions of form 1-12, matches what -the leftmost successful \fIx\fR -matches. -.IP 7. -A backslash followed by a non-zero digit -.I n -matches a copy of the string that the bracketed regular expression -(see rule 11) -beginning with the \fIn\fPth \e\|( matched. -.IP 8. -A regular expression of form 1-7 followed by * (\+) -matches a sequence of zero (one) or more matches of the regular expression. -.IP 9. -The metacharacter \\\|_ matches a non-empty -maximal-length sequence of blanks and tabs. -.IP 10. -The metacharacter \\\|{ (\\\|}) matches the empty string at the beginning -(end) of an identifier. An identifier is defined to be -an underscore _ or alphabetic followed by zero or more -underscores, alphabetics or digits. -.IP 11. -A regular expression, -.IR x , -of form 1-12, bracketed \e\|(\|\fIx\fP\|\e\|) matches what -.I x -matches. -The nesting of these brackets in each regular expression of an -alternation (rule 6) must be identical. -An alternation with these brackets may not be iterated (rule 8). -.IP 12. -A regular expression of form 1-12, -.IR x , -followed by a regular expression of form 1-11, -.IR y , -matches a match for -.I x -followed by a match for -.IR y , -with the -.I x -match being as long as possible while still permitting a -.I y -match. -.IP 13. -A regular expression of form 1-12 preceded by ^ (followed by $) is constrained -to matches that begin at the left (end at the right) end of a line. -.IP 14. -A regular expression of form 1-13 picks out the longest among the leftmost matches -in a line. -.IP 15. -An empty regular expression stands for a copy of the last regular expression encountered. -.PP -.i0 -Regular expressions are used in addresses and the -.I g -and -.I v -commands -to specify -lines, in the -.I s -command -to specify a portion of a line which is to be replaced, -in the -.I G -and -.I V -commands to refer to buffers in which to perform commands, -and in general whenever text -is being specified. -.PP -To understand addressing in -.I qed -it is necessary to know that at any time there is a -\fIcurrent buffer\fR -and a -\fIcurrent line.\fR -When -.I qed -is invoked, -the current buffer is -buffer `a', -but may be changed at any time by a -.I b -(change buffer) command. -All addresses refer to lines in the current buffer, -except for a special case described under the -.I m -(move) command. -.PP -Generally speaking, the current line is -the last line affected by a command; however, -the exact effect on the current line -is discussed under the description of -the command. -Addresses are constructed as follows. -.IP 1. -The character `\fB.\fR' addresses the current line. -.IP 2. -The character `$' addresses the last line of the buffer. -.IP 3. -A decimal number -.I n -addresses the -\fIn\fR-th -line of the buffer. -.IP 4. -`\*q\fIx\fR' addresses the line marked with the -mark name character \fIx\fR, -which must be a bname. -Lines are marked with the -.I k -command described below. -It is an error for the marked line to be outside of the current buffer. -.IP 5. -A regular expression enclosed in slashes `/' addresses -the first matching line -found by searching forwards from the line after the current line. -If necessary, the search wraps around to the beginning of the -buffer. -If the trailing `/' would be followed by a newline, -it may be omitted. -.IP 6. -A regular expression enclosed in queries `?' addresses -the first matching line -found by searching backwards from the line before -the current line. -If necessary -the search wraps around to the end of the buffer. -If the trailing `?' would be followed by a newline, -it may be omitted. -.IP 7. -An address followed by a plus sign `+' -or a minus sign `\-' followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus -(resp. minus) the indicated number of lines. -The plus sign may be omitted. -.IP 8. -An address followed by `+' or `\-' followed by a -regular expression enclosed in slashes specifies the first -matching line following (resp. preceding) that address. -The search wraps around if necessary. -The `+' may be omitted. -Enclosing the regular expression in `?' reverses the search direction. -.IP 9. -If an address begins with `+' or `\-' -the addition or subtraction is taken with respect to the current line; -e.g. `\-5' is understood to mean `\fB.\fR\-5'. -.IP 10. -If an address ends with a `+' (or `\-') 1 is added (resp. subtracted). -As a consequence of this rule and rule 9, -the address `\-' refers to the line before the current line. -Moreover, trailing `+' and `\-' characters have cumulative effect, so `\-\-' -refers to the current line less 2. -.IP 11. -To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor, -the character `^' in addresses is entirely -equivalent to `\-'. -.PP -.i0 -Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. -Commands which require no addresses regard the presence -of an address as an error. -Commands which accept one or two addresses -assume default addresses when none is given. -If more addresses are given than the command requires, -the last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used. -The last addressed line must not precede the second-last addressed line. -.PP -Typically, addresses are separated from each other by a comma `,'. -They may instead be separated by a semicolon `;' -in which case the current line `\fB.\fR' is set to the first address -before the second address is interpreted. -The second of two separated addresses may not be a line -earlier in the buffer than the first. -If the address on the left (right) side of a comma or semicolon -is absent, it defaults to the first (resp. last) line. -.PP -Filename operands of commands may be made up of printing characters only. -However, when the filename appears as the argument to the invocation of -\fIqed\fP, -non-printing characters may be included. -When a filename is specified for a command, -it is terminated at the first blank, tab or newline. -.PP -In the following list of -.I qed -commands, the default addresses -are shown in parentheses. -The parentheses are not part of -the address, but are used to show that the given addresses are -the default. -.TP 5 -( \fB. \fR)\|a -The append command accepts input text -and appends it after the addressed line. -`\fB.\fR' is left -on the last line input, if there -were any, otherwise at the addressed line. -Address `0' is legal for this command; text is placed -at the beginning of the buffer. -.TP 5 -b -The change buffer command sets the current buffer -to be that named. -`\fB.\fR', `$' and the remembered -.I filename -are set to those of the new buffer; -upon return to a previously used buffer, -`\fB.\fR' will be set to its value when the buffer was last used. -.TP 5 -( \fB. \fR)\|b[+\-\^\fB.\fP\^][pagesize][display character] -The browse command provides page-oriented printing. -The optional `+', `\-', or -.RB ` . ' -specifies whether the next, -previous, -or surrounding page -is to be printed; if absent, `+' is assumed. -.IB b . -also prints several carets `^^^^^' -immediately below the current line. -If a pagesize is given, it is used for the current browse -command and remembered as the default. -The pagesize is initially 22 lines. -If a display character is given, -the lines are printed in the specified format, -and the format is remembered as the default. -Initially, `p' is the default. -For -.I b+ -and -.IR b\- , -`\fB.\fP' is left at the last line displayed; -for -\fIb\fP\fB.\fP, -it is unchanged. -NOTE: The browse and change buffer commands are the same character! -The two commands can be syntactically distinguished -in all cases except for `b'; -this ambiguity may be resolved by typing the (implicit) `+' -after the `b'. -.TP 5 -( \fB. \fR, \fB. \fR)\|c -The change -command deletes the addressed lines, then accepts input -text which replaces these lines. -`\fB.\fR' is left at the last line input; if there were none, -it is left at the line preceding the deleted lines. -If an interrupt signal (usually ASCII DEL) is received during a -change command, the old lines are not deleted. -.TP 5 -( \fB. \fR, \fB. \fR)\|d -The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer. -The line after the deleted section becomes the current line; -if the deleted lines were originally at the end, -the new last line becomes the current line. -The character after the `d' can only be one of -a blank, newline, tab, or display character. -Line 0 is a valid address for deletion; -deleting line 0 has no affect on any lines in the buffer. -.TP 5 -e filename -The edit -command causes the entire contents of the current buffer to be deleted, -and then the named file to be read in. -`\fB.\fR' is set to the last line of the buffer. -The number of characters read is typed -if -.I qed -is in -.I verbose -mode. -The \fIfilename\fP is remembered for possible use as a default file name -in a subsequent -\fIf\fP, \fIr\fR, \fIw\fR, or \fIW\fR command. -.TP 5 -E filename -The -.I E -command is like -.IR e , -except that -.I qed -does not check to see -if the buffer has been modified -since the last -.I w -command. -.TP 5 -f filename -The filename command prints information about the current buffer, -in the format used by the \fIn\fR command. -If \fIfilename\fP is given, -the currently remembered file name is changed to \fIfilename\fP. -If -.I qed -is not in verbose mode, -the information is only printed if the -.I filename -is not specified. -If it is not desired to set the -.I filename, -the character immediately after the f must be a newline. -Otherwise, the first token -(which may be the null string) -on the line, after a mandatory non-empty sequence of blanks and tabs, -is taken to be the -.I filename. -These rules apply to all -.I filename\c --using commands, -.I e, -.I f, -.I r, -.I R, -.I S, -.I w -and -.I W, -although some regard specification of an explicitly null \fIfilename\fP as an -error. -.TP 5 -( 1 , $ )\|g/regular expression/command list -In the global -command, the first step is to mark every line in the range which matches -the regular expression. -Then for every such line, the -command list is executed with `\fB.\fR' initially set to that line. -Any embedded newlines in the command list -must be escaped with a backslash. -The -\fIa\fP, -\fIi\fP, -and -.I c -commands and associated input are permitted; -the `\fB.\fR' terminating input mode may be omitted if it would be on the -last line of the command list. -The commands -.I g -and -.I v -are not permitted in the command list. -If the command list is empty, `\fB.\fPp' is assumed. -The regular expression may be delimited by any character other than newline. -.TP 5 -G/regular expression/command list -In the globuf -command, the first step is to mark every active buffer -whose output from an -.I f -command -(with the -.I filename -printed literally) -would match the regular expression. -(An active buffer is one which has either some text or -a remembered file name.)\ -Then for every such buffer, the -command list is executed with the current buffer set to that buffer. -In other respects it is like the global command, -except that only the commands -.I G -and -.I V -are not permitted in the command list. -If the command list is empty, `f' is assumed. -.TP 5 -h